Vol I PDF

AGENDA & APPENDICES
FOR THE
59th MEETING OF THE ACADEMIC COUNCIL
09th JUNE 2018
VOLUME - I
PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY

Coimbatore 641004
Phone: 0422 – 4344777, 2572177, 2572477
Fax: 0422 – 2573833
Email: principal@psgtech.ac.in
Website: http://www.psgtech.edu
Government Aided Autonomous College Affiliated to Anna University Chennai

ISO 9001:2008 Certified
CONTENTS
VOLUME I
Appendix Page.
Department Name Programmes
No No.
AGENDA i-xxxv
ME/MTech (Full Time & Part Time) Regulations 1-15
Automobile Engineering ME Automotive Engineering (FT) 16
ME Structural engineering (FT & PT) 40
Civil Engineering
ME Infrastructure Engineering (FT) 56
Computer Science and ME Computer Science & Engineering (FT) 65
Engineering ME Software Engineering (FT) 81
ME Applied Electronics (FT & PT) 95
Electrical and Electronics ME Power Electronics & Drives (FT) 116
Engineering ME Embedded and Real-Time Systems (FT) 137
ME Electrical Machines (PT) 156
ME Communication Systems (FT) 172
Electronics and Communication
ME VLSI Design (FT) 187
Engineering
ME Wireless Communications (FT) 204
Instrumentation and Control
ME Control Systems (FT) 219
Systems Engineering
I ME Engineering Design (FT) 232
ME Industrial Engineering (FT & PT) 249
Mechanical Engineering ME Computer Integrated Manufacturing (FT) 265
ME Lean Manufacturing (FT) 276
ME Energy Engineering (FT) 285
Metallurgical Engineering ME Industrial Metallurgy (FT & PT) 299
ME Manufacturing Engineering (FT) 323
ME Production Engineering (PT) 325
Production Engineering ME Product Design & Commerce (FT) 348
ME Virtual Prototyping & Digital Manufacturing
359
(FT)
Information Technology ME Biometrics and Cyber Security (FT) 368
Electronics and Communication
MTech Nano Science and Technology (FT) 382
Engineering
Biotechnology MTech Biotechnology (FT) 396
VOLUME II
Information technology MTech Information Technology (FT) 409
I
Textile Technology MTech Textile Technology (FT & PT) 422
BSc Regulations 448
II
Applied Science BSc Applied Science 458
Applied Mathematics and
III BSc Computer System and Design 471
Computational Sciences
MSc Regulations 512
MSc Software Systems 526
IV Applied Mathematics and
MSc Theoretical Computer Science 582
MSc Data Science 640
MSc Regulations 696
V
Apparel and Fashion Design MSc Fashion Design and Merchandising 709
MCA Regulations 756
VI
Computer Applications MCA Master of Computer Applications 770
One Credit Course for BE Automobile
VII Automobile Engineering 779
Engineering
Professional Elective Course for BE Computer
780
Computer Science and Science and Engineering
VIII a & b
Engineering Professional Elective Course for ME Software
781
Science Engineering
Electrical and Electronics One Credit Course for BE Electrical and
IX 782
Engineering Electronics Engineering
Electronics and Communication One Credit Course for BE Electronics and
X 783
Engineering Communication Engineering
Professional Elective Courses for BTech
XI Information technology 784
Information Technology
One Credit Courses for BTech Textile
XII Textile Technology 786
Technology
Open Elective Courses for All BE/BTech
XIII Applied Science 787
(Regular & Sandwich) Degree Programmes
One Credit Course for five year MSc Software
XIV Systems and Five Year MSc Theoretical 790
Computer Science
Open Elective Courses for All BE/BTech
XV Apparel and Fashion Design 791
(Regular & Sandwich) Degree Programmes
Special Elective Course for All PhD (FT and
XVI Fashion technology 793
PT) Degree Programmes
VOLUME III
MBA Regulations (Full Time) 794
XVII
Management Sciences MBA Master of Business Administration 805
MBA Regulations (Part Time) 854
XVIII
Management Sciences MBA Master of Business Administration 865
XIX Members of the Academic Council for the Period 2016-18 911
XX List of External Members of Various Boards of Studies for the Period 2016-18 914
PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY, COIMBATORE
59th Meeting of the Academic Council
Venue: F201 Date: 09.06.2018 Time: 9.45 am
AGENDA
1. Welcome and Introductory remarks by the Chairman.
2. The Boards of Studies in Automobile Engineering, Civil Engineering, Computer Science &
Engineering, Electrical & Electronics Engineering, Electronics & Communication
Engineering, Instrumentation & Control Systems Engineering, Mechanical Engineering,
Metallurgical Engineering, Production Engineering, Biotechnology, Information Technology
and Textile Technology recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of
assessment and syllabi for ME/MTech (Full Time & Part Time) degree programmes of
2018 regulations under choice based credit system.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Prakasan will move
(i) that the regulations, scheme and syllabi for the following ME/MTech (Full Time &
Part Time) degree programmes of 2018 regulations namely
ME Automotive Engineering
ME Structural Engineering (FT & PT)
ME Infrastructure Engineering
ME Computer Science & Engineering
ME Software Engineering
ME Applied Electronics (FT & PT)
ME Electrical Machines (PT)
ME Power Electronics and Drives
ME Embedded and Real Time Systems
ME Communication Systems
ME VLSI Design
ME Wireless Communications
ME Biometrics and Cyber Security
ME Control Systems
ME Engineering Design
ME Industrial Engineering (FT & PT)
ME Computer Integrated Manufacturing
ME Lean Manufacturing
ME Energy Engineering
ME Industrial Metallurgy (FT & PT)
ME Manufacturing Engineering
ME Product Design and Commerce
ME Virtual Prototyping and Digital Manufacturing
ME Production Engineering (PT)
MTech Nanotechnology
MTech Biotechnology
i
MTech Information Technology
MTech Textile Technology (FT & PT)
as in Appendix I [pages 1 - 447] be approved and
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019 and
subsequently under 2018 regulations.
3. The Board of Studies in Applied Science recommended the regulations, courses of study,
scheme of assessment and syllabi for 1st & 2nd semesters for BSc degree programme
of 2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel will move
(i) that the regulations, scheme and syllabi for the following BSc degree
programme of 2018 regulations namely
BSc Applied Science
as in Appendix II [pages 448 - 470] be approved and
4. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences recommended the
regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for BSc degree
programme of 2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will move
programmes of 2018 regulations namely
BSc Computer Systems and Design
as in Appendix III [pages 471 - 511] be approved and
5. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences recommended

the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for Five Year
Integrated MSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations.
(i) that the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for
the following Five Year Integrated MSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations
namely
MSc Software Systems
MSc Theoretical Computer Science
ii
MSc Data Science
as in Appendix IV [pages 512 - 695] be approved and
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018-2019 and
6. The Board of Studies in Apparel and Fashion Design recommended the regulations,
courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for Five Year Integrated MSc
degree programme of 2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi will move
the following Five Year Integrated MSc degree programme of 2018 regulations namely
MSc Fashion Design and Merchandising

as in Appendix V [pages 696 - 755] be approved and
7. The Board of Studies in Computer Applications recommended the regulations, courses of

study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for 1st & 2nd semesters for MCA Programme
of 2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr A Chitra will move
for the following programme of 2018 regulations namely
MCA Master of Computer Applications
as in Appendix VI [pages 756 - 778] be approved and
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2018 – 2019
and subsequently under 2018 regulations.
8. The Board of Studies in Automobile Engineering recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Neelakrishnan will move
(i) that the introduction of the following One credit course namely
15AF20 Core Tools of IATF 16949 – SPC and MSA
for BE Automobile Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in

Appendix VII [page 779] be approved and
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016
iii
9. The Board of Studies in Computer Science and Engineering recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Sudha Sadasivam will move
a. (i) that the introduction of the following professional elective course namely
15Z024 Multi-tier Computing
for BE Computer Science and Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as

in Appendix VIII (a) [page 780] be approved and
b. (i) that the introduction of the following professional elective course namely
15ZS41 Machine Learning
for ME Software Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in

Appendix VIII (b) [page 781] be approved and
under 2015 regulations.
10. The Board of Studies in Electrical and Electronics Engineering recommended the
following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr M C Bhuvaneswari will move
(i) that the introduction of the following one credit course namely
15EF18 Industrial Drives for Automation
for BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015

regulations with syllabus as in Appendix IX [page 782] be ratified and
11. The Board of Studies in Electronics and Communication Engineering recommended the
following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Subha Rani will move
15LF21 ASIC Flow for Mixed Signal VLSI Design
for BE Electronics and Communication Engineering of 2015 regulations with

syllabus as in Appendix X [page 783] be approved and
iv
and subsequently under 2015 regulations
12. The Board of Studies in Information Technology recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Umamaheswari will move
(i) that the introduction of the following elective courses namely
15I020 Secure Coding

15I021 Human Computer Interaction
15I022 Computer Vision
15I023 Cyber Physical Systems
for BTech Information Technology of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in

Appendix XI [page 784 - 785] be approved and
13. The Board of Studies in Textile Technology recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Thilagavathi will move
(i) that the introduction of the following one credit courses namely
15TF26 Fabric Sourcing

15TF27 Speciality Fabric Sourcing
15TF28 Home Textiles
for BTech Textile Technology degree programme of 2015 regulations with

syllabus as in Appendix XII [page 786] be approved and
14. The Board of Studies in Applied Science recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel will move
(i) that the introduction of the following open elective courses namely
15OH95 Composites Materials

15OH96 Ceramic Materials
15OH97 Nano Magnetism and Spintronics
15OH98 Financial Engineering
for all BE/BTech Degree Programme (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations
with syllabus as in Appendix XIII [page 787 - 789] be approved and
v
15. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences

recommended the following
(i) that the introduction of the following elective course namely
12XWAP/12XTEL Deep Learning
for Five Year MSc Software Systems and Five Year MSc Theoretical Computer
Science of 2012 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XVIII [page 790 ] be
approved and
16. The Board of Studies in Apparel and Fashion Design recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi will move
15FOD1 Theatre and Film Costumes

15FOD2 Elements and Principles of Fashion Design
15FOD3 World Art and Craft
15FOD4 Fashion Journalism
with syllabus as in Appendix XIV [page 791-792] be approved and
17. The Board of Studies in Fashion Technology recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr P Kandhavadivu will move
a. (i) that the introduction of the following course of study as prescribed by Anna
University (PhD 2015 regulations, under the category of special elective) namely
15RM02 Field work
for PhD (FT & PT) programme of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix
XV (a) [page 793 ] be ratified and
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2017 – 2018 under 2015
regulations.
vi
b. (i) that the introduction of the following course of study as prescribed by Anna
18RM02 Field work
XV (b) [page 793 ] be approved and
18. The Board of Studies in Management Sciences recommended the courses of study,
scheme of assessment and syllabi for MBA degree programme of 2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam will move
the following programme of 2018 regulations namely
MBA Master of Business Administration
as in Appendix XVI [pages 794-853] be approved and
scheme of assessment and syllabi for the PART TIME MBA degree programme of
2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam will move
PART TIME MBA Part Time Master of Business Administration
as in Appendix XVII [pages 854-910] be approved and
vii
20. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Prakasan will move
a. (i) that the modification in the clause 4 (vi) in 2015 regulations of BE (Regular &
Sandwich) / BTech, degree programmes be ratified as under
Existing Revised
4 (vi) 4 (vi)
Online courses: Students can register and earn Online courses: Students can register and earn
credits for online courses approved by department credits for online courses approved by department
committee consisting of HoD, Programme committee consisting of HoD, Programme Coordinator,
Coordinator, Tutor and Subject Expert. Students who Tutor and Subject Expert. Students who complete
complete online courses successfully to a maximum relevant online courses successfully to a maximum of 6
of 6 credits may obtain exemption from studying two credits may obtain exemption from studying two
Professional Electives. The list of online courses is to Professional Electives. Similarly, students who
be approved by Chairman Academic Council on the complete relevant online courses successfully to a
recommendation of HoD at the beginning of the maximum of 6 credits may obtain exemption from
semester if necessary, subject to ratification in the studying two Open Electives. The list of online courses
next Academic council meeting. The Committee will is to be approved by Chairman Academic Council on
monitor the progress of the student and recommend the recommendation of HoD at the beginning of the
the grade or evaluate the candidate in 100% semester if necessary, subject to ratification in the next
Continuous Assessment (CA) pattern, if necessary. Academic council meeting. The Committee will monitor
Candidates may do online courses from fifth the progress of the student and recommend the grade
semester to seventh semester for regular or evaluate the candidate in 100% Continuous
programmes and from fifth semester to ninth Assessment (CA) pattern, if necessary. Candidates
semester for sandwich programmes. may do online courses for exemption from studying
professional elective from fifth semester to seventh
semester for regular programmes and from fifth
semester to ninth semester for sandwich programmes.
However, the relevant online courses for exemption
from open electives can be registered and credits can
be earned from third semester onwards and are to be
completed before the pre final semester of the
respective programmes.
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and
21. The Board of Studies in Mechanical Engineering recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Natarajan will move
viii
(i) that the change in course code of the following elective namely
S.No. Existing Course Code and Title Revised Course Code and Title
12M041 Advanced Heat and Mass 12M043 Advanced Heat and Mass
1
Transfer Transfer
for BE Regular/Sandwich Mechanical Engineering Degree Programme of 2012

regulations be ratified and
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students of BE Sandwich Degree
Programme admitted in 2014 – 2015, under 2012 regulations.
22. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences recommended
the following
(i) that the change in course title of the following elective namely
15SA76 Mathematical Programming 15SA76 Mathematical Modelling under

1
under Uncertainty Uncertainty
for 2 Year MSc Applied Mathematics Degree Programme of 2015 regulations be

ratified and
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in the year 2016 and
23. The Board of Studies in Physics recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr M D Kannan will move
(ii) that the change in course code of the following elective namely
1 15OH30 Quantum Mechanics 15OH18 Quantum Mechanics

15OH31 MEMS Sensors and Actuators 15OH19 MEMS Sensors and Actuators
2
for Industrial Applications for Industrial Applications
for All BE/BTech Degree Programme (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations
be approved and
(iii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2015-2016 and
ix
24. Any other matter.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K.Prakasan will move
(i) that the following SWAYAM based online courses for all (UG & PG) degree programmes be ratified as under
Subject Course Code

Sl No Course Title Credits Department
Code (PSG Tech)
1 noc18_bt03 15Q301 Demystifying The Brain 1 BioTechnology
2 noc18-bt04 15Q302 Introductory Mathematical Methods for Biologists 2 BioTechnology
& BioMedical
3 noc18_bt08 15Q303 Medical Biomaterials 2 Engg
4 noc18_bt10 15Q304 Interactomics 2
BioTechnology
5 noc18_bt12 15Q305 Bio-Electrochemistry 1
6 noc18_ce01 15Q306 Applied Environmental Micro Biology 3
7* noc17_ce02 15Q307 Hydration, Porosity and Strength of Comentitious Materials 2 Civil
8 noc18_ce03 15Q308 Digital land Surveying and Mapping 2 Engineering
9 noc18_ce06 15Q309 Energy Efficiency, Acoustics And Day Lighting In Buildings 3
10 noc18 _cs02 15Q310 Social Networks 3
IT & CSE
11 noc18 _ cs03 15Q311 Introduction to Modern Application Development 2
12 noc18_cs06 15Q312 VLSI Physical design 3 EEE
13 Noc18_cs07 15Q313 Cryptography and Network Security 3 MCA
MCA, CSE
14 noc18 _ cs08 15Q314 Introduction to Internet of Things 3
& EEE
15 noc18 _ cs12 15Q315 Real Time Operating System 1 IT & CSE
16 noc18 _ cs16 15Q316 Cloud Computing 2 CSE
Mechanical
17 noc18_cs21 15Q317 Programming, Data Structures And Algorithms Using Python 2
Engineering
x
*18 noc17_cs22 15Q147 Introduction to Internet of Things 3 IT
Robotics and
19 noc18 _ cs23 15Q318 Introduction to Human Computer Interactions 2 Automation
Engineering
MCA, IT, CSE
20 noc18 _ cs26 15Q319 Introduction to Machine Learning 3
& EEE
IT & Robotics
21 noc18_cs27 15Q320 Reinforcement Learning 3 and Automation
Engineering
CSE & Robotics
22 noc18 _ cs28 15Q321 Data Science for Engineers 2 and Automation
Engineering
*23 noc17_ec06 15Q135 Design of Photovoltaic System 3 EEE
Robotics and
24 noc18 _ ec08 15Q322 Electronics Enclosures Thermal Issues 2 Automation
Engineering
*25 noc17_ec15 15Q125 Analog Circuits and System Through SPICE Simulation 2
26 noc18_ee12 15Q323 Industrial Automation and Control 3 EEE
*27 noc17_ee20 15Q106 Design of Internet of Things 2
28 noc18_ge01 15Q324 Digital and the Everyday: From Codes to Cloud 1 Robotics and
29 noc18_ ge05 15Q325 MATLAB Programming for Numerical Computation 2 Automation
30 noc18_ ge08 15Q326 Virtual Reality Engineering 3 Engineering
Mechanical
31 noc18_me03 15Q327 Introduction to Composites 3
Engineering
32 noc18_me04 15Q328 Product Design & Manufacturing 2 Textile
33 noc18_me08 15Q329 Basics of Finite Element Analysis – I 2 Technology
34 noc18_me09 15Q330 Transport Phenomena in Materials 2 Metallurgy
Mechanical
35 noc18_me11 15Q331 Introduction to Mechanical Micro Machining 3
Engineering
xi
Robotics and
36 noc18 _me12 15Q332 Machinery Fault Diagnosis and Signal processing 3 Automation
Engineering
Automobile
Engineering
37 noc18_me14 15Q333 Metal cutting and Machine Tools 1
& Mechanical
Engineering
Mechanical
38 noc18_me27 15Q334 Theory of Production Processes 3
Engineering
Textile
39 noc18_me36 15Q335 Surface Engineering of Nanomaterials 2
Technology
Mechanical
40 noc18_me37 15Q336 Introduction to Mechanical Vibration 2
Engineering
Textile
41 noc18_me38 15Q337 Modeling and Simulationof Dynamic Systems 2
Technology
Robotics and
42 noc18_mg03 15Q338 Management of New Products and Services 1 Automation
Engineering
43 noc18_mg08 15Q339 Project Management 2 Textile
44 Noc18_mg12 15Q340 Financial Statement Analysis and Reporting 3 Technology
Fashion
45 noc18-mg17 15Q341 Consumer Behaviour 2
Technology
46 noc18_mm01 15Q342 Physics of Materials 3 Metallurgical
47 noc18_mm03 15Q343 Fundamentals of Electronic Materials and Devices 2 Engineering
*48 noc17_mm14 15Q121 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 2 Automobile
Engineering
*49 noc17_mm15 15Q122 Spur and Helical Gear Cutting 1
Civil
50 noc18_oe02 15Q344 Water Economics and Governance 3
Engineering
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations.
xii
PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY: COIMBATORE
ATTENDANCE SHEET
Venue: F 201 Date: 09.06.2018 Time: 9.45 am
xiii
xiv
xv
xvi
PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY: COIMBATORE
ATTENDANCE SHEET
Venue: F 201 Date: 09.06.2018 Time: 10.00 am
Minutes of the 59th Meeting of the Academic Council held at 10.00 am on Saturday, 9th June,
2018 at Hall F201. The following members were present.
S.No. Name of the Member Designation
1. Dr R Rudramoorthy Chairman & Principal

Dr S Selladurai
Professor,
2. Department of Physics,
Anna University,
Chennai –600 025. University Nominees
Dr S Srinivasalu
Professor,
3. Institute for Ocean Management,
Anna University,
Chennai – 600 025.
Dr L S Jayagopal
Consultant,
4. No.1, Jawahar Nagar, Engineering Expert
Alagesan Road, ASHS Post,
Coimbatore – 641 043.
Mr V V Deshmukh,
Flat 301, A9, Latis Cooperative Housing Society Limited,
5. Near Nutan Polytechnic, Talegaon Chakan Road, Industry Expert
Talegaon Daphade,
Pune – 410 507, Maharastra.
Dr P V Mohanram
Principal,
6. PSG Institute of Technology & Applied Research, Education Expert
Neelambur,
Coimbatore – 641 062
Prof. B Ramamoorthy
Advisor – Academic
7. PSG Institutions, Special Invitee
Coimbatore- 641004
Controller of
8. Mr V C Thangavel
Examinations
HoD, Dept. of Automobile
9. Dr S Neelakrishnan
Engineering
xvii
HoD, Dept. of Biomedical
10. Dr R Vidhyapriya
Engineering
11. Dr G Sankarasubramanian HoD, Dept. of Civil Engineering

HoD, Dept. of Computer Science and
12. Dr G Sudha Sadasivam
Engineering
Head In-charge, Dept. of Electrical
13. Dr M C Bhuvaneswari
and Electronics Engineering
HoD, Dept. of Electronics and
14. Dr S Subha Rani
Communication Engineering
HoD, Dept. of Instrumentation and
15. Dr J Arunshankar
Control Systems Engineering
HoD In-Charge, Dept. of Metallurgical
16. Dr J Krishnamoorthy
Engineering
Dean - Autonomous Functioning &
17. Dr K Prakasan
HoD, Dept. of Production Engineering
Head In-charge,
18. Dr B Vinod Dept. of Robotics & Automation
Engineering
HoD,
19. Dr M Ananthasubramanian
Dept. of Biotechnology
HoD,
20. Dr P Kandhavadivu
Dept. of Fashion Technology
HoD,
21. Dr K Umamaheswari
Dept. of Information Technology
HoD,
22. Dr G Thilagavathi
Dept. of Textile Technology
HoD, Dept. of Apparel & Fashion
23. Dr D Vijayalakshmi
Design
HoD In-Charge, Dept. of Applied
24. Dr S C Murugavel
Science
HoD,
25. Dr M Kumaravel
Dept. of Chemistry
HoD,
26. Dr A Chitra
Dept. of Computer Applications
Head In-Charge,
27. Mr S P Suresh Kumar
Dept. of English
Head In-Charge,
28. Dr V Santhi
Dept. of Humanities
29. Dr M D Kannan Head In-Charge, Dept. of Physics
xviii
Dr J V Ramasamy
30. Dean - Academic
Dr A Kandaswamy Four teachers of the college
31. Dean - Industrial Research & Development representing different categories of
Dr N Geetha the teaching staff
32. Professor, Dept. of Applied Mathematics &
33. Dr R Sreenivasan Dean - Educational Technology
34. Dr K Natarajan Dean-Student Affairs
35. Dr P Narayanasamy Dean, Computing and Networks
36. Dr S Saravanan Member Secretary
Mr D Muralidhar
37. Training Manager
PSG Industrial Institute
Dr P Gopalakrishnan
38. Professor,
Department of Metallurgical Engineering
Dr C K Shashidharan Nair
Special Invitees
39. Professor,
Dept. of Applied Science
Dr P Visalakshi
Professor,
40. Department of Electronics and
Communication Engineering
Dr J Kanchana
41. Professor,
Department of Mechanical Engineering
Dr S Kanthalakshmi
42. Professor,
Department of Electrical and Engineering
Special Invitees
Dr M Kalpana
43. Associate Professor,
Department of Humanities
Dr V Thilagam
44. Associate Professor,
PSG Institute of Management
xix
The following members expressed their inability to attend the meeting due to their
preoccupation.
S.No. Name of the Member Designation

Dr T Ramesh Babu
Professor,
University Nominee
1. Department of Industrial Engineering,
Anna University,
Chennai – 600 025.
Mr R Nandakumar
Manager – Legal Affairs,
2. Sri Karthikeya Spinning & Weaving Mills Pvt. Ltd., Law Expert
484, Kamaraj Road, Upplipalyam
Coimbatore 641 015.
HoD, Dept. of Mechanical
3. Dr P R Thyla
Engineering
HoD, Dept. of Applied
4. Dr R Nadarajan Mathematics &
Director, PSG Institute of
5. Dr R Nandagopal
Management
6. Dr R Arumuganathan HoD, Dept. of Mathematics
One of the teachers of the

Dr V Ramamurthy college representing different
7. Professor, Dept. of Biotechnology categories of the teaching
staff
8. Prof R Ragupathy Dean - Administration
9. Dr R Venkatesan Dean-Placement
Dr C Lakshmi Deepika
Professor,
10. Special Invitee
Department of Electronics & Communication
Engineering
xx
MINUTES OF THE 59TH MEETING OF THE ACADEMIC COUNCIL
Chairman extended a warm welcome to the gathering and presented the background with which
the new PG regulations, Scheme of assessment and subjects of study (PG - 2018 under CBCS)
are prepared. This is aimed at improving Placement opportunities, research activities and
motivating PG students to pursue careers in teaching.
Some of the important changes introduced are as follows:
(a) In CA tests – average of marks secured by the student in two tests will be considered
and the practice of considering best two scores out of three CA tests is discontinued.
(b) Practicals have final examination component and it will have a weightage of 50% instead
of 100% CA evaluation.
(c) More laboratories are introduced as Professional Core instead of theory courses to
enhance research capabilities in PG programmes which are research oriented.
The courses have 4 outcomes listed in general so that achievement of course outcomes can be
computed easily.
The experts suggested the following:
Prof. Srinivasulu: Suggested that self learning can be introduced with a maximum credit of 3.
Online courses can be permitted with suitable checks for credit transfer. These options are
available in 2015 and 2018 PG regulations.
Prof. Selladurai: Opined that innovation projects can be introduced. There are options for such
open ended activities in PG curriculum under several laboratories, but these opportunities are to
be used carefully by students.
Mr.V V Deshmuk: Indicated that the employability of PG students is not appreciable and
electives are like day to day requirements. Courses are to be taught in such a way that
applications are always kept in focus while learning courses. After the companies conclude their
placement activities, the feedback from the company is to be analyzed on the performance of
students. This will help in Mid-term corrections. A major shift in thinking is needed in preparing
the curriculum.
Chairman Academic Council indicated that these points will be further discussed with the
chairmen- Boards of Studies.
Dr.L S Jayagopal: The contents of the PG courses are to be at a lighter level and outcomes
have to come from the external world and not from the teacher. Students are to be prepared to
learn by themselves. Application of fundamentals are to be stressed.
Prof. Srinivasulu: Weightage can be given to every learning activities like home work,
assignments/tutorials and presentations. Assessments must be designed in such a way that
they reflect the learning process.
xxi
Dr. P V Mohanram: Principles of pedagogy and methods of teaching can be imparted to PG
students as many of them take up teaching positions. Courses on IIOT & cost management can
be included in PG education.
Prof. B Ramamoorthy: Suggested the need for activity based learning and experiential learning.
He also suggested to introduce courses on communication skills, ethics & research
methodology. A comprehensive viva voce will be very helpful towards learning in depth.
Plagiarism is to be eliminated in research and software is needed to check plagiarism
professionally. The contents of curriculum can be compared with other universities from abroad
and IITs wherever possible. Two audit courses will be introduced in this regard. Plagiarism is
checked using licensed software.
He also suggested reduction in courses of study so that more research activities can be taken
up.
The Chairman provided necessary clarifications wherever it was feasible and the rest of the
suggestions will be implemented after deliberations with the chairmen of various boards.
The Chairman thanked all the members and appreciated their contributions for the
improvement of the curriculum. The term of the nominated members of all the Boards of
Studies and Academic Council is ending with this meeting. New members will be nominated
as per University Grants Commission (UGC) norms.
2. The Boards of Studies in Automobile Engineering, Civil Engineering, Computer Science &
Engineering, Electrical & Electronics Engineering, Electronics & Communication
Engineering, Instrumentation & Control Systems Engineering, Mechanical Engineering,
Metallurgical Engineering, Production Engineering, Biotechnology, Information Technology
and Textile Technology recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of
assessment and syllabi for ME/MTech (Full Time & Part Time) degree programmes
of 2018 regulations under choice based credit system.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Prakasan moved
(i) that the regulations, scheme and syllabi for the following ME/MTech (Full Time &
Part Time) degree programmes of 2018 regulations namely
ME Automotive Engineering
ME Structural Engineering (FT & PT)
ME Infrastructure Engineering
ME Computer Science & Engineering
ME Software Engineering
ME Applied Electronics (FT & PT)
ME Electrical Machines (PT)
ME Power Electronics and Drives
ME Embedded and Real Time Systems
ME Communication Systems
ME VLSI Design
ME Wireless Communications
ME Biometrics and Cyber Security
xxii
ME Control Systems
ME Engineering Design
ME Industrial Engineering (FT & PT)
ME Computer Integrated Manufacturing
ME Lean Manufacturing
ME Energy Engineering
ME Industrial Metallurgy (FT & PT)
ME Manufacturing Engineering
ME Product Design and Commerce
ME Virtual Prototyping and Digital Manufacturing
ME Production Engineering (PT)
MTech Nanotechnology
MTech Biotechnology
MTech Information Technology
MTech Textile Technology (FT & PT)
as in Appendix I [pages 1 - 447] be approved and
Dr S C Murugavel seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
3. The Board of Studies in Applied Science recommended the regulations, courses of

study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for 1st & 2nd semesters for BSc degree
programme of 2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel moved
programme of 2018 regulations namely
BSc Applied Science
as in Appendix II [pages 448 - 470] be approved and
Dr D Vijayalakshmi seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
4. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences recommended

the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for BSc
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha moved
programmes of 2018 regulations namely
xxiii
BSc Computer Systems and Design
as in Appendix III [pages 471 - 511] be approved and
Dr K Prakasan seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried

recommended the regulations, courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi
for Five Year Integrated MSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations.
the following Five Year Integrated MSc degree programmes of 2018 regulations
namely
MSc Software Systems
MSc Theoretical Computer Science
MSc Data Science
as in Appendix IV [pages 512 - 695] be approved and
Dr S Neelakrishnan seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
6. The Board of Studies in Apparel and Fashion Design recommended the regulations,
courses of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for Five Year Integrated MSc
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi moved
the following Five Year Integrated MSc degree programme of 2018 regulations namely
MSc Fashion Design and Merchandising

as in Appendix V [pages 696 - 755] be approved and
Dr A Chitra seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
xxiv
7. The Board of Studies in Computer Applications recommended the regulations, courses
of study, scheme of assessment and syllabi for 1st & 2nd semesters for MCA
Programme of 2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr A Chitra moved
for the following programme of 2018 regulations namely
MCA Master of Computer Applications
as in Appendix VI [pages 756 - 778] be approved and
Dr G Sudha Sadasivam seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
8. The Board of Studies in Automobile Engineering recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Neelakrishnan moved
(i) that the introduction of the following One credit course namely
15AF20 Core Tools of IATF 16949 – SPC and MSA
for BE Automobile Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in

Appendix VII [page 779 ] be approved and
Dr M C Bhuvaneswari seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried
9. The Board of Studies in Computer Science and Engineering recommended the

following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Sudha Sadasivam moved
a. (i) that the introduction of the following professional elective course namely
15Z024 Multi-tier Computing
for BE Computer Science and Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as

in Appendix VIII (a) [page 780] be approved and
xxv
b. (i) that the introduction of the following professional elective course namely
15ZS41 Machine Learning
for ME Software Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in

Appendix VIII (b) [page 781] be approved and
under 2015 regulations.
Dr S Subha Rani seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried
10. The Board of Studies in Electrical and Electronics Engineering recommended the
following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr M C Bhuvaneswari moved
15EF18 Industrial Drives for Automation
for BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015

regulations with syllabus as in Appendix IX [page 782] be ratified and
Dr K Umamaheswari seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried
11. The Board of Studies in Electronics and Communication Engineering recommended

the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Subha Rani moved
15LF21 ASIC Flow for Mixed Signal VLSI Design
for BE Electronics and Communication Engineering of 2015 regulations with

syllabus as in Appendix X [page 783] be approved and
and subsequently under 2015 regulations
Dr G Thilagavathi seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried
12. The Board of Studies in Information Technology recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Umamaheswari moved
xxvi
(i) that the introduction of the following elective courses namely
15I020 Secure Coding

15I021 Human Computer Interaction
15I022 Computer Vision
15I023 Cyber Physical Systems
for BTech Information Technology of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in

Appendix XI [page 784 - 785] be approved and
13. The Board of Studies in Textile Technology recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Thilagavathi moved
(i) that the introduction of the following one credit courses namely
15TF26 Fabric Sourcing

15TF27 Speciality Fabric Sourcing
15TF28 Home Textiles
for BTech Textile Technology degree programme of 2015 regulations with

syllabus as in Appendix XII [page 786] be approved and
Dr P Kandhavadivu seconded the motion.The motion was put to vote and carried
14. The Board of Studies in Applied Science recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel moved
15OH95 Composites Materials

15OH96 Ceramic Materials
15OH97 Nano Magnetism and Spintronics
15OH98 Financial Engineering
with syllabus as in Appendix XIII [page 787 - 789] be approved and
Dr M D Kannan seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
xxvii
(i) that the introduction of the following elective course namely
12XWAP/12XTEL Deep Learning
for Five Year MSc Software Systems and Five Year MSc Theoretical Computer
Science of 2012 regulations with syllabus as in Appendix XVIII [page 790 ] be
approved and
Dr M Kumaravel seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
16. The Board of Studies in Apparel and Fashion Design recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi moved
15FOD1 Theatre and Film Costumes

15FOD2 Elements and Principles of Fashion Design
15FOD3 World Art and Craft
15FOD4 Fashion Journalism
with syllabus as in Appendix XIV [page 791-792] be approved and
Dr M Ananthasubramanian seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
17. The Board of Studies in Fashion Technology recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr P Kandhavadivu moved
a. (i) that the introduction of the following course of study as prescribed by Anna
15RM02 Field work
XV (a) [page 793] be ratified and
xxviii
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2017 – 2018 under 2015
regulations.
b. (i) that the introduction of the following course of study as prescribed by Anna
18RM02 Field work
XV (b) [page 793] be approved and
Dr J Arunshankar seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
scheme of assessment and syllabi for MBA degree programme of 2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam moved
MBA Master of Business Administration
as in Appendix XVI [pages 794-853] be approved and
Dr R Vidhyapriya seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
scheme of assessment and syllabi for the PART TIME MBA degree programme of
2018 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam moved
PART TIME MBA Part Time Master of Business Administration
as in Appendix XVII [pages 854-910] be approved and
xxix
Dr K Prakasan seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
20. The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Prakasan moved
a. (i) that the modification in the clause 4 (vi) in 2015 regulations of BE (Regular &
Sandwich) / BTech, degree programmes be ratified as under
Existing Revised
4 (vi) 4 (vi)
Online courses: Students can register and earn Online courses: Students can register and earn
credits for online courses approved by credits for online courses approved by department
department committee consisting of HoD, committee consisting of HoD, Programme
Programme Coordinator, Tutor and Subject Coordinator, Tutor and Subject Expert. Students
Expert. Students who complete online courses who complete relevant online courses successfully
successfully to a maximum of 6 credits may to a maximum of 6 credits may obtain exemption
obtain exemption from studying two Professional from studying two Professional Electives. Similarly,
Electives. The list of online courses is to be students who complete relevant online courses
approved by Chairman Academic Council on the successfully to a maximum of 6 credits may obtain
recommendation of HoD at the beginning of the exemption from studying two Open Electives. The
semester if necessary, subject to ratification in list of online courses is to be approved by
the next Academic council meeting. The Chairman Academic Council on the
Committee will monitor the progress of the recommendation of HoD at the beginning of the
student and recommend the grade or evaluate semester if necessary, subject to ratification in the
the candidate in 100% Continuous Assessment next Academic council meeting. The Committee
(CA) pattern, if necessary. Candidates may do will monitor the progress of the student and
online courses from fifth semester to seventh recommend the grade or evaluate the candidate in
semester for regular programmes and from fifth 100% Continuous Assessment (CA) pattern, if
semester to ninth semester for sandwich necessary. Candidates may do online courses for
programmes. exemption from studying professional elective from
fifth semester to seventh semester for regular
programmes and from fifth semester to ninth
semester for sandwich programmes. However, the
relevant online courses for exemption from open
electives can be registered and credits can be
earned from third semester onwards and are to be
completed before the pre final semester of the
respective programmes.
xxx
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and
Dr J Krishnamoorthi seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
21. The Board of Studies in Mechanical Engineering recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Natarajan moved
(i) that the change in course code of the following elective namely
12M041 Advanced Heat and Mass 12M043 Advanced Heat and Mass
1
Transfer Transfer
for BE Regular/Sandwich Mechanical Engineering Degree Programme of 2012

regulations be ratified and
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students of BE Sandwich Degree
Programme admitted in 2014 – 2015, under 2012 regulations.
Dr B Vinod seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
22. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics & Computational Sciences

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will moved
(i) that the change in course title of the following elective namely
15SA76 Mathematical Programming 15SA76 Mathematical Modelling under

1
under Uncertainty Uncertainty
for 2 Year MSc Applied Mathematics Degree Programme of 2015 regulations be

ratified and
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in the year 2016 and
Dr P Kandhavadivu seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
23. The Board of Studies in Physics recommended the following
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr M D Kannan will moved
xxxi
(ii) that the change in course code of the following elective namely
1 15OH30 Quantum Mechanics 15OH18 Quantum Mechanics

15OH31 MEMS Sensors and Actuators 15OH19 MEMS Sensors and Actuators
2
for Industrial Applications for Industrial Applications
for All BE/BTech Degree Programme (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015 regulations
be approved and
(iii) that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 2015-2016 and
Dr D Vijayalakshmi seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
xxxii
24. Any other matter.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K.Prakasan moved
(i) that the following SWAYAM based online courses for all (UG & PG) degree programmes be ratified as under
Subject Course Code

Sl No Course Title Credits Department
Code (PSG Tech)
1 noc18_bt03 15Q301 Demystifying The Brain 1 BioTechnology
2 noc18-bt04 15Q302 Introductory Mathematical Methods for Biologists 2 BioTechnology
& BioMedical
3 noc18_bt08 15Q303 Medical Biomaterials 2 Engg
4 noc18_bt10 15Q304 Interactomics 2
BioTechnology
5 noc18_bt12 15Q305 Bio-Electrochemistry 1
6 noc18_ce01 15Q306 Applied Environmental Micro Biology 3
7* noc17_ce02 15Q307 Hydration, Porosity and Strength of Comentitious Materials 2 Civil
8 noc18_ce03 15Q308 Digital land Surveying and Mapping 2 Engineering
9 noc18_ce06 15Q309 Energy Efficiency, Acoustics And Day Lighting In Buildings 3
10 noc18 _cs02 15Q310 Social Networks 3
IT & CSE
11 noc18 _ cs03 15Q311 Introduction to Modern Application Development 2
12 noc18_cs06 15Q312 VLSI Physical design 3 EEE
13 Noc18_cs07 15Q313 Cryptography and Network Security 3 MCA
MCA, CSE
14 noc18 _ cs08 15Q314 Introduction to Internet of Things 3
& EEE
15 noc18 _ cs12 15Q315 Real Time Operating System 1 IT & CSE
16 noc18 _ cs16 15Q316 Cloud Computing 2 CSE
Mechanical
17 noc18_cs21 15Q317 Programming, Data Structures And Algorithms Using Python 2
Engineering
xxxiii
*18 noc17_cs22 15Q147 Introduction to Internet of Things 3 IT
Robotics and
19 noc18 _ cs23 15Q318 Introduction to Human Computer Interactions 2 Automation
Engineering
MCA, IT, CSE
20 noc18 _ cs26 15Q319 Introduction to Machine Learning 3
& EEE
IT & Robotics
21 noc18_cs27 15Q320 Reinforcement Learning 3 and Automation
Engineering
CSE & Robotics
22 noc18 _ cs28 15Q321 Data Science for Engineers 2 and Automation
Engineering
*23 noc17_ec06 15Q135 Design of Photovoltaic System 3 EEE
Robotics and
24 noc18 _ ec08 15Q322 Electronics Enclosures Thermal Issues 2 Automation
Engineering
*25 noc17_ec15 15Q125 Analog Circuits and System Through SPICE Simulation 2
26 noc18_ee12 15Q323 Industrial Automation and Control 3 EEE
*27 noc17_ee20 15Q106 Design of Internet of Things 2
28 noc18_ge01 15Q324 Digital and the Everyday: From Codes to Cloud 1 Robotics and
29 noc18_ ge05 15Q325 MATLAB Programming for Numerical Computation 2 Automation
30 noc18_ ge08 15Q326 Virtual Reality Engineering 3 Engineering
Mechanical
31 noc18_me03 15Q327 Introduction to Composites 3
Engineering
32 noc18_me04 15Q328 Product Design & Manufacturing 2 Textile
33 noc18_me08 15Q329 Basics of Finite Element Analysis – I 2 Technology
34 noc18_me09 15Q330 Transport Phenomena in Materials 2 Metallurgy
Mechanical
35 noc18_me11 15Q331 Introduction to Mechanical Micro Machining 3
Engineering
36 noc18 _me12 15Q332 Machinery Fault Diagnosis and Signal processing 3 Robotics and
xxxiv
Automation
Engineering
Automobile
Engineering
37 noc18_me14 15Q333 Metal cutting and Machine Tools 1
& Mechanical
Engineering
Mechanical
38 noc18_me27 15Q334 Theory of Production Processes 3
Engineering
Textile
39 noc18_me36 15Q335 Surface Engineering of Nanomaterials 2
Technology
Mechanical
40 noc18_me37 15Q336 Introduction to Mechanical Vibration 2
Engineering
Textile
41 noc18_me38 15Q337 Modeling and Simulationof Dynamic Systems 2
Technology
Robotics and
42 noc18_mg03 15Q338 Management of New Products and Services 1 Automation
Engineering
43 noc18_mg08 15Q339 Project Management 2 Textile
44 Noc18_mg12 15Q340 Financial Statement Analysis and Reporting 3 Technology
Fashion
45 noc18-mg17 15Q341 Consumer Behaviour 2
Technology
46 noc18_mm01 15Q342 Physics of Materials 3 Metallurgical
47 noc18_mm03 15Q343 Fundamentals of Electronic Materials and Devices 2 Engineering
*48 noc17_mm14 15Q121 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 2 Automobile
Engineering
*49 noc17_mm15 15Q122 Spur and Helical Gear Cutting 1
Civil
50 noc18_oe02 15Q344 Water Economics and Governance 3
Engineering
(ii) that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2015 – 2016 and subsequently under 2015 regulations.
Dr M Kumaravel seconded the motion. The motion was put to vote and carried
xxxv
APPENDIX I
Regulations,
Courses of Study,
Scheme of Assessment &
Syllabi
for
ME(FT & PT)/MTech

Programmes
2018 Regulations
PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY, COIMBATORE - 641 004
(Autonomous college affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
2018 REGULATIONS OF ME/ MTech DEGREE PROGRAMMES

(For the batches of students admitted in 2018-2019 and subsequently under Choice Based Credit System)
NOTE: The regulations hereunder are subject to amendments as may be made by the Academic Council of the College
from time to time. Any or all such amendments will be effective from such date and to such batches of students
(including those already in the middle of the programme) as may be decided by the Academic Council.
1. a. PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE

In the following Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires
i. “Programme” means Degree Programme, that is ME/MTech Degree Programme
ii. “Branch” means specialization or discipline of ME/MTech Degree Programme, like
Industrial Engineering, Nano Technology etc.
iii. “Course” means a theory or laboratory course that is normally studied in a
semester.
iv. “University” means Anna University, Chennai.
b. CONDITIONS FOR ADMISSION

i. Students for admission to the first semester of the ME/MTech degree programme of
Anna University, Chennai will be required to satisfy the eligibility qualification for
admission in section 3 or any other examination of any recognized University or
authority accepted by Anna University, Chennai as equivalent thereto. The students
shall also be required to satisfy all other conditions of admission thereto prescribed
by the University and Government of Tamil Nadu.
ii. Part-time students should satisfy other conditions regarding experience, sponsorship,
place of work, etc. that may be prescribed by the University from time to time, in
addition to satisfying requirements as in section 1b(i).
2. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

i. Minimum Duration: The programme will extend over a period of two academic years in
the case of full-time and three academic years in the case of part-time leading to the
Degree of Master of Engineering (ME)/ Master of Technology (MTech) of the University,
an academic year being divided into two semesters. Each semester shall normally
consist of 90 working days including examination days.
ii. Maximum Duration: The student shall complete the ME/MTech degree programme in
2 years (4 semesters) in case of full-time programme, and 3 years (6 semesters) in case
of part-time programme; but in any case not more than 4 years in case of full-time
programme or 5 years in case of part-time programme; these durations are to be
reckoned from the commencement of the semester to which the student was first
admitted to the programme.
3. QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION

The various ME / MTech degree programmes offered and the eligible qualifications for
admission to the respective programmes are listed below:
1
Minimum
ME/MTech Degree
Full-time (FT)/ Eligible Qualification for Admission Latest
Department Programme
Part-time (PT) (Note 1) Credits
offered
(Note 2)
ME - Structural FT & PT
Engineering
CIVIL
ENGINEERING ME - Infrastructure
FT
Engineering
ME - Engineering
FT
Design
ME - Industrial
FT & PT
Engineering
ME - Computer
MECHANICAL Integrated FT
ENGINEERING Manufacturing
ME - Lean
FT
Manufacturing
ME - Energy
FT
Engineering
ME - Electrical
PT
Machines
As per ANNA UNIVERSITY norms
ME - Applied
FT & PT
Electronics
ELECTRICAL &
ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING ME - Power
Electronics & FT
Drives
ME – Embedded
and Real-Time FT
Systems
INSTRUMENTA
TION AND ME - Control
FT
CONTROL Systems
ENGINEERING
ME -
Communication FT
ELECTRONICS Systems
&
COMMUNICATI
-ON ME - VLSI Design FT
ENGINEERING
2
ME/MTech
Full-time Minimum
Degree Eligible Qualification for Admission
Department (FT)/ Part- Credits
Programme (Note 1)
time (PT) (Note 2)
offered
ELECTRONICS &
COMMUNICATI- ME – Wireless
FT
ON ENGINEERING Communications
METALLURGICAL ME - Industrial
FT & PT
ENGINEERING Metallurgy
AUTOMOBILE ME - Automotive
FT
ENGINEERING Engineering
ME –
Manufacturing FT & PT
Engineering
ME - Product
PRODUCTION
Design & FT
ENGINEERING
Commerce
ME- Virtual
Prototyping &
FT
Digital
Manufacturing
ME - Computer
Science &
FT
COMPUTER Engineering
SCIENCE &
ENGINEERING ME – Software
FT
Engineering
ME – Biometrics
FT
& Cyber Security
As per ANNA UNIVERSITY norms
INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
MTech -
Information FT
Technology
TEXTILE MTech - Textile

FT & PT
TECHNOLOGY Technology
BIO- MTech –
FT
TECHNOLOGY Biotechnology
ELECTRONICS
MTech – Nano
AND
Science and FT
COMMUNICATION
Technology
ENGG
Note : Eligible Qualification is subject to amendments as may be made by the University from time to time.
3
4. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMES
i. The course work of the odd semesters will normally be conducted only in odd semesters
and that of the even semesters only in even semesters.
ii. Curriculum: The curriculum for each programme includes courses of study and detailed
syllabi. The courses of study include nine core (Theory or Laboratory) courses, six
elective (Theory or Laboratory) courses, an industry visit & technical seminar, three
laboratory courses, Project Work I and Project Work II as given in section 13 infra. The
hours / week listed in section 13 infra for each of the course refer to periods/week, each
period being of 50 minutes of duration as specified in section 2(i) supra.
Full-Time Programme: Every full time student will normally undergo the courses of his /
her programme given in section 13 in various semesters as shown below:
Semester 1: Five core courses, one laboratory course

Semester 2: Four core courses, two elective courses, one laboratory course and
(Industry Visit & Technical Seminar)
Semester 3: Four elective courses, one laboratory course and
Project Work I
Semester 4: Project Work II
Part-Time Programme: Every part time student will normally undergo the courses of his
/ her programme given in section 13 in various semesters as shown below:
Semester 1: Three core course(s) and one laboratory course

Semester 2: Three core courses, and one laboratory course
Semester 3: Two core courses, one elective course and one (Industry
Visit and Technical Seminar)
Semester 4: One core course, two elective courses and one laboratory course
Semester 5: Three elective courses and Project Work I
Semester 6: Project Work II
iii. Core Courses: Every student shall undergo nine core courses (Theory/Libratory),six
elective courses, as given in section 13 infra. Every student shall opt for electives from
the list of electives relating to his/her degree programme as given in section 13 in
consultation with the tutor, Programme Co-ordinator and the HoD. Minimum number of
credits to be earned for courses under the category „„Professional Electives” is
18.However, a student may be permitted to take a maximum of two electives from the list
of elective courses of other ME / MTech degree programmes with specific permission
from both the Head of Department of student and the Head of the Department offering
the programme.
“Special Elective” means any theory subject/laboratory/field work specific to the area of
research designed by the Supervisor, recommended by the Doctoral Committee and
approved in the Board of Study and Academic Council (Anna University PhD
Regulations 2015). This special elective is applicable only for the Course work of
research scholars.
iv. Laboratory Courses: Every student shall opt for three laboratory courses from the list of
laboratory courses as given in section 13 relating to his / her degree programme.
Every laboratory course shall be evaluated based on conduct of experiments / exercises /

mini projects / development of software packages and report submitted.
v. Audit Courses: These are the courses for the purposes of self-enrichment and
academic exploration. There is no requirement on minimum number of credits to be
earned for this category of courses but a pass is mandatory. The students will be
evaluated by a committee of the faculty members of the department and the Pass/Re-
4
appearance (RA) will be transferred to grade sheet. Assessment includes presentations
on literature review from reputed journal papers, preparation of review papers,
presentation of technical reports and viva voice. However, this is not included in the
computation of CGPA.
vi. Project Work: Every student shall undertake the Project Work I during the third semester
(fifth semester in the case of part-time programme) and the Project Work II during the
fourth semester (sixth semester in the case of part-time programme). The Project Work I
or II shall be undertaken in an Industrial / Research Organization or in the College in
consultation with the faculty guide and the HoD. In case of Project Work at Industrial /
Research organization, the same shall be jointly supervised by a faculty guide and an
expert from the organization.
vii. Industry Visit & Technical Seminar: In the case of full-time students, a minimum of two
industry visits are to be arranged as part of the course and the students are expected to
make a presentation based on their learnings on product, design, technology and
manufacturing processes in the industry visits.
In the case of part-time students, the students shall choose an industry preferably where
they are working / where they choose to interact and make a presentation of their
learnings about its products & processes.
Every student (full-time / part-time), shall make presentations on technology review from
international journals / patents relevant to the technology used in the organization of
his/her choice of industrial visit. The above student shall also submit a report highlighting
the summary of the presentations in an appropriate format at the end of the semester.
viii. Online courses: Students can register and earn credits for online courses approved by
department committee consisting of HoD, Programme Coordinator, Tutor and Subject
Expert. Students who complete online courses successfully to a maximum of 6 credits
may obtain exemption from studying two Professional Electives. The list of online courses
is to be approved by Chairman Academic Council on the recommendation of HoD at the
beginning of the semester if necessary, subject to ratification in the next Academic
council meeting. The Committee will monitor the progress of the student and recommend
the grade or evaluate the candidate in 100% Continuous Assessment (CA) pattern, if
necessary. Candidates may do online courses during the second semester and third
semester for full time programmes from third semester to fifth semester for part time
programmes.
ix. Self Study Courses
A student can opt for Self Study of a Professional Elective on specific approval of HoD
provided the student does not have current arrears.
The students shall study on their own under the guidance of a faculty member approved
by the Head of the Department who will be responsible for the periodic monitoring and
evaluation of the course. No formal lectures would be delivered. The self study course
can be considered as equivalent to studying one professional elective course.
x. One Credit Courses: Students can also opt for industry oriented one credit courses of
15 hours duration which will be offered by experts from industry / other institution / our
faculty on specialized topics apart from the prescribed courses of study of the
programme. Students can complete such one credit courses during the semester two and
three (two to five in the case Part Time)as and when these courses are offered by the
Department. A student will also be permitted to enroll for the one credit courses of other
departments provided the student has fulfilled the necessary pre-requisites of the course
being offered subject to approval by both the Heads of Departments. However, the
grades earned by the students in one credit courses will not be included in the
computation of CGPA.
5
xi. Course Enrollment and Registration
a) Each student, on admission shall be assigned to a Tutor who shall advise and counsel
the student about the details of the academic programme and the choice of courses
considering the student‟s academic background and career objectives.
b) Each student on admission shall register for all the courses prescribed in the
curriculum in the student‟s first semester (first and second semester for Part Time) of
study.
c) From second semester onwards, (third semester in the case of Part Time) a student
has the option to drop a maximum of two theory courses (one theory course in the
case of Part Time) except Professional Core Courses in a semester and a student has
the option to study additionally two theory courses (one theory course in the case of
Part Time) which shall be only professional electives. However the maximum number
of credits the student can register in a particular semester cannot exceed 30 credits
(21 credits in the case of Part Time) including courses for which the student has
registered for redoing.
d) In case of a student dropping a course of study (other than professional core courses)
in one semester, he/she shall register for that course in the next given opportunity and
earn necessary attendance in that course exclusively to become eligible to appear for
the semester examination in that course.
e) The courses to be offered in a semester for candidates who need to reappear (as per
5 (vi) infra) or having attendance shortage etc., will be decided by HoD.
f) After registering for a course, a student shall attend the classes, satisfy the attendance
requirements, earn Continuous Assessment marks and appear for the End Semester
Examinations.
The enrollment for all the courses of the Semester II will commence 10 working days
prior to the last working day of Semester I. The student shall confirm the enrollment by
registering for the courses within the first five working days after the commencement
of the Semester II.
The enrollment for the courses of the Semesters III to IV (III to VI in the case of Part
Time) will commence 10 working days prior to the last working day of the preceding
semester. The student shall enroll for the courses with the guidance of the Tutor. If the
student wishes, the student may drop or add courses subject to eligibility within five
working days after the commencement of the concerned semester and complete the
registration process duly authorized by the Tutor.
xii. Credit assignment: Each course is assigned certain number of credits based on the
following:
Contact Period per week Credits
1 Lecture Period 1
2 Tutorial Periods 1
2 Practical Periods(Laboratory 1
/ Seminar / Project Work I & II/
etc.)
Audit Courses No Credits
The Contact Periods per week for Tutorials and Practical can only be in multiples of 2.
The exact number of credits assigned to the different courses is shown in section 13.
xiii. Minimum Credits: For the award of the degree, the student shall earn the minimum number
of credits as shown in section 3 by passing the prescribed number courses of study as
shown in section 13. The prescribed credit range for the curriculum of various programmes
is as in para 3 infra.
6
xiv. Medium of Instruction: The medium of instruction, examinations, project report etc. shall be
English.
5. REQUIREMENTS OF ATTENDANCE AND PROGRESS

i. A student will be qualified to appear for end semester examinations in a particular course
of a semester only if
a) he / she has satisfied the attendance requirements as per the norms given below:
 Shall secure not less than 75% attendance in that course
 If a student secures attendance 65% or more but less than 75% in any course in
the current semester due to medical reasons (hospitalization / accident / specific
illness) or due to participation in the College / University / State / National /
International level Sports events with prior permission from the Chairman, Sports
Board and Head of the Department concerned, the student shall be given
exemption from the prescribed attendance requirement and the student shall be
permitted to appear for the end semester examination of that course.
b) his / her academic progress has been satisfactory

c) his / her conduct has been satisfactory.
ii) A student shall normally be permitted appear for End semester examination of the
course if the student has satisfied the attendance requirements (vide Clause 5(i) supra)
and has registered for examination in those courses of that semester by paying the
prescribed fee.
iii) a) Students who do not satisfy clause 5(i) supra will not be permitted to appear for the
End-semester Examination / Evaluation of that course. The student has to register and
redo that course in a subsequent semester when it is offered next, earn necessary
attendance and CA mark and appear for end semester examinations.
b) For both Full-Time & Part-Time
If the total number of “Redo” courses at the end of any even semester is more than ten,
the student will not be eligible to register for the next immediate odd and further semester
courses.
Such students will be permitted to register for those semester courses only when offered
next, subject to fulfillment of the above condition.
iv) A student who has already appeared for a course in a semester and passed the
examination is not entitled to reappear in the same course for improvement of letter
grades / marks.
v) In respect of students who complete a part of the academic programme either one or two
semesters under the student exchange scheme in approved foreign Universities, the
transfer of credits of equivalent courses completed by them in the foreign university will
be approved; and in the case of the remaining courses of the respective semester(s)
which they have not studied in the respective regulation, they shall register for those
courses within the next two or subsequent semesters on a self-study basis. Such an
appearance of the student in those courses will be treated as first appearance for the
purpose of classification. (Vide sections infra 10 (A, B, C & D)).
6. DISCIPLINE
i) Every student is required to observe disciplined and decorous behavior both inside and
outside the college and not to indulge in any activity which will tend to bring down the
7
prestige of the college. The Head of the Institution shall constitute a disciplinary
committee to enquire into acts of indiscipline and notify the punishment.
ii) If a student indulges in malpractice in any of the examinations, he / she shall be liable for
punitive action as decided by the Board of Examiners.
7. PROCEDURE FOR REJOINING THE PROGRAMME
A student who desires to rejoin the programme after a period of discontinuance or who upon
his/her own request is permitted by the authorities to repeat the study of any semester, may
join the semester which he/she is eligible or permitted to join, only at the time of its normal
commencement for a regular batch of students and after obtaining the approval from the
University and Commissioner of Technical education. No student will however be enrolled in
more than one semester at any time.
8. ASSESSMENT AND PASSING REQUIREMENTS

i. Assessment: The assessment will comprise of Final Examination (FE) and/or
Continuous Assessment (CA), carrying marks as specified in the scheme in section 13
infra. The CA marks will be awarded on assessing the student continuously during the
semester as per guidelines 8(x) infra. The assessment for theory courses with CA and
FE components will be done by relative grading system. The other courses will be
assessed by absolute grading system. However, for the purpose of reporting the
performance of a student, letter grades and grade points will be awarded as per grading
norms stipulated in section 8(vi).
ii. Final Examinations: Final examinations will normally be conducted during October /
December and during April / May of each year. Supplementary examinations may be
conducted at such times as may be decided by the college.
A student will be permitted to appear for the final semester examination in a course only if
he/she has completed the study of that course.
iii. Project Work I: Every student shall submit a report on Project Work I on dates
announced by the department through the faculty guide to the HoD. If a student fails to
submit the report on Project Work I on or before the specified date, he/she is deemed to
have failed in it.
The student shall also present seminars about the progress of the Project Work I during
the appropriate semester. The seminars shall be presented before a review committee
constituted by the HoD.
The Project Work I will be evaluated based on the seminars, report and a viva voce
examination. The viva voce examination will be carried out by a team of faculty
appointed by the HoD and the internal examiner.
iv. Project Work II: Every student shall submit a report on Project Work II on dates
announced by the Principal through the faculty guide to the HoD. If a student fails to
submit the report on Project Work II on or before the specified date, he/she is deemed to
have failed in it.
The student shall also present seminars about the progress of the Project Work II during
the appropriate semester. The seminars shall be presented before a review committee
constituted by the HoD.
The Project Work II will be evaluated based on the seminars, report and a viva voce
examination. The viva voce examination will be carried out by a team consisting of an
internal examiner, usually the supervisor, and an external examiner, appointed by the
Principal.
8
v. Industry Visit & Technical Seminar: Every student will be evaluated based on two
presentations (i) technical/research papers (ii) industry visits. A technical report
submitted by the student will also be evaluated by a committee nominated by the Head of
the department.
There will be a viva voce examination on the dates announced by the department to
verify the depth of understanding of the student in both the technical topic and the
industry visits.
vi. Grade and Grade Point: Each student, based on his / her performance, will be awarded
a final grade and grade point as given below for each course at the end of each semester
by following relative grading system and absolute grading system.
a. Relative Grading System

In this system, the grades are awarded to the students based on their performance
relative to others in Theory courses having Continuous Assessment (CA) and Final
Examination (FE) components.
For each theory course, the total mark M [ie., the sum of Continuous Assessment marks
(CA) and Final examination marks (FE)] is computed for every candidate. The statistical
parameters Mean () and Standard Deviation () of the distribution of marks are arrived
at as given below:
n
 ( Mj   )
2
n
1
  M j 
j 1
n j 1 n
th
where, Mj - Total mark of the „j‟ student in the course
n – Number of students who appeared for the examination in that
particular course.
The students who secure the total mark M as detailed below are first declared as fail (RA)
in a course.
M < minimum of (  – 1.8, 50)

(or)
Marks in FE less than 50% of maximum of final RA
examination marks for theory courses
(or)
M less than 50% in total marks for theory and
laboratory courses with 100% continuous
assessment component
Note:
 “RA” denotes reappearance in a course
After omitting the marks (M) of all failed candidates, revised  and σ are computed for the
marks secured by the remaining candidates (passed), letter grade and grade point to
each student are awarded based on the revised  and σ as detailed below.
9
Total Mark, M secured by the Relative
Grade
student (CA +FE) Grade Point, g
O
M ≥ [ (µ+1.5σ)] 10
A+
µ+0.52σ ≤ M < µ+1.5σ 9
A
µ − 0.25σ ≤ M < µ+0.52σ 8
B+
µ –1.08σ ≤ M < µ−0.25σ 7
B
M < µ – 1.08σ 6
Withdrawal from examination W 0
Reappearance RA 0
Shortage of Attendance SA 0
Note:
 If the total number of candidates passed is less than 10, the grades shall be awarded
as per Absolute Grading System otherwise Relative Grading System may be
followed.
 No „O‟ grade shall be awarded if scored mark is less than 80.
 If the maximum marks awarded in a course is greater than or equal to 95% and if
the number of candidates getting „O‟ Grade is less than 7% of the total number of
candidates, then some candidates with A+ grade may be awarded „O‟ grade. In
such a case some candidates having „A‟ grade may be awarded „A+‟ grade and
some candidates having „B+‟ grade may be awarded „A‟ grade in order to ensure
that a minimum of 23% of the candidates are awarded „A+‟ grade and 30% of the
candidates are awarded „A‟ grade.
 The Performance Analysis Committee chaired by Principal consisting of Controller
of Examinations and all the Heads of the Departments will by collective wisdom,
normalize the marks secured by the students so as to ensure that the clustering,
grading decisions have been made in a reasonable manner for all the courses.
b. Absolute Grading System

In absolute grading system, the letter grade and grade points are awarded to each
student based on the percentage of marks secured by him/her in all courses like
Laboratory courses, Industry visit & Technical Seminar, One Credit courses, Project
Work I and II, etc. except theory courses having CA and FE components, as detailed
below.
Range of percentage of total Letter Grade Point g

marks grade
90 to 100 O 10
80 to 89 A+ 9
70 to 79 A 8
60 to 69 B+ 7
50 to 59 B 6
0 to 49
RA 0
or less than 50% in final examination
Withdrawal from examination W 0
Shortage of Attendance SA 0
 "RA" denotes Reappearance in a course.

The grades RA and SA will not figure in the grade sheet.
10
c. For online courses the following grading pattern is applicable in case of credit transfer
and CGPA calculations.
Range of percentage of total Letter Grade Point g

marks grade
90 to 100 O 10
76 to 89 A+ 9
60 to 75 A 8
50 to 59 B+ 7
40 to 49 B 6
vii. Cumulative Grade Point Average: After the completion of the programme, the
Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) from the first semester to final semester is
calculated using the formula.
 g i Ci
CGPA =
 Ci
th
where gi is Grade point secured for i course
th
Ci is Credit allotted for i course
viii. Passing a course:

a. A student shall be deemed to have passed a theory course with CA and FE
components, if
i. he/she secures at least 50% in the final examination paper and
ii. the total marks secured by him/her(CA and FE put together) is at least (µ−1.8σ) or
50%, whichever is lower, where µ is the average mark of the students registered
for the course and σ is the corresponding standard deviation.
A student is deemed to have passed in any course carrying only continuous

assessment marks (like Laboratory course, Industry visit & Technical Seminar, Project
Work I etc.) if the total mark secured by him/her is at least 50%.
A student is deemed to have passed in Project work II if he/she secures at least 50%
in the final examination and the total mark secured by him/her is at least 50%
b. A student who is absent or has failed in the end semester examinations in any theory
course is permitted to appear for supplementary examination either by retaining the
CA marks already earned or with the re-earned CA marks in the next one attempt of
his/her choice. For further attempts he/she will be solely assessed by the final
examination marks only.
c. A student who after having earned necessary attendance, is absent for final end
semester examination or has failed in any course carrying only continuous
assessment marks (like Lab, Project work I, summer term courses etc.) will register for
the supplementary examination immediately at the beginning of the next semester and
solely assessed in the final examination carrying the entire marks of that course.
d. A student who has earned necessary attendance in the course Project work II but
does not submit the report on Project Work II on or before the date specified by the
college / department, he/she shall be deemed to have failed in the Project work II and
awarded grade RA and will have to register for the same at the beginning of the
subsequent semester, redo and submit the project report at the end of that semester
and appear for the final examination, the CA mark earned afresh.
e. A student who has earned necessary attendance in the course Project work II but
whose project report is not accepted for reasons of incompleteness or other serious
deficiencies will be treated as „absent‟ and will have to register for the same at the
11
beginning of the subsequent semester, redo and submit the project report at the end
of that semester and appear for the final examination, the CA mark earned afresh.
f. A student who has submitted the report on Project Work II, but could not appear for
the final examination on the scheduled date, shall be deemed to have failed in the
Project work II and awarded grade RA.
g. If a student is absent or has failed in an elective course, he/she may register for the
same course as detailed in viii(b) or for any other elective course in the subsequent
semester.
h. A student who is not eligible to write the end semester examination in any course due
to lack of attendance, will be awarded grade SA and the student has to register for
that course again, when offered next, attend the classes and fulfill the attendance
requirements as per section 5 supra. If the course, in which the student has lack of
attendance, is a Professional Elective the student may register for the same or any
other Professional Elective course in the subsequent semesters.
i. A student after registering for a course may withdraw his / her registration between
first & second CA Test on valid reasons.
j. Out of the required six Professional Electives to be studied, the student shall study a
minimum of four Professional Electives from the list of Professional electives
prescribed in their scheme of examinations without fail and can study the remaining
two Professional electives either from the list of electives prescribed in the scheme or
as online courses / special courses by obtaining equivalence.
In the case of the student completing more than six Professional electives totally four
Professional Electives with highest grade among all Professional Electives studied
under the scheme and the two courses with next highest grade among all remaining
courses will be considered for calculation of CGPA; however the grades obtained in all
other left over courses will also appear in the grade sheet.
k. If a student who has registered for a one credit course does not clear the same
successfully, it will be treated on par with a course „withdrawn‟ by a student; One
credit courses will be evaluated by the course instructor / department faculty
concerned and will carry a total of 100 marks for continuous assessment; out of which
75 marks will be for final test to be scheduled by the course instructor / department
faculty concerned.
l. A student who is absent in the final semester examination of a course after registering
for the same will be considered to have appeared and failed in that examination and
awarded grade RA.
ix. Supplementary Examinations:

a. For Supplementary Examinations/ Examinations for any course under REDO
category, absolute grading will be followed irrespective of whether the grading was
originally under Relative Grading System or Absolute Grading System.
b. The candidate can apply for Revaluation in any theory course (for regular and
supplementary Examinations) directly (or) for Retotalling first and after perusal may
apply for Revaluation.
12
x. Scheme of Evaluation
a. Theory Courses (CA: 50% + FE: 50%) Total: 100 Marks

 CA Distribution:
(i) Assignment Presentation 15 Marks
(ii) Mini project / Tutorials (Minimum 2) 15 Marks
(i) Internal Tests:(Average of two tests) 20 Marks
 Test I 20 Marks
 Test II 20 Marks
 Final Examination (FE) 50 Marks
b. Laboratory Courses (CA : 50% + FE : 50%) Total : 100 Marks
(i)I Cycle
 Design of Experiment/Algorithm/Modeling 10 Marks
 Individual Report 15 Marks
(ii) II Cycle
 Testing/Simulation/Analysis/Implementation 10 Marks
 Individual Report 15 Marks
(iii) Final Examination 50 Marks
a) Presentation/Demonstration/Final Report 30 Marks
b) Viva Voce 20 Marks
c. Industry Visit & Technical Seminar (CA : 50% + FE : 50%) Total: 100 Marks
(i) Test/Report/Presentation 50 Marks
 Minimum of two visits to a particular industry
 Minimum of two Presentations by the students.
 Final Examination 50 Marks
(i) Report 30 Marks
(ii) Viva Voice 20 Marks
d. Project Work I (CA : 50% + FE : 50%) Total : 100 Marks
(i) Review - I 20 Marks
 Guide 10 Marks
 Committee
$
10 Marks
(ii) Review – II 30 Marks
 Guide 15 Marks
 Committee
$
15 Marks
(iii) Final Examination
Project Report Evaluation & Viva Voce 50 Marks
 Guide 25 Marks
 Committee
$
25 Marks
e. Project Work II (CA: 50% + FE: 50%) Total : 100 Marks

(i) Review - I 10 Marks
 Guide 5 Marks
13
 Committee
$
5 Marks
(ii) Review - II 20 Marks
 Guide 10 Marks
 Committee
$
10 Marks
(iii) Review III 20 Marks
 Guide 10 Marks
 Committee
$
10 Marks
 Final Examination (FE) 50 Marks

 External 25 Marks
 Thesis Evaluation 10 Marks
 Presentation & Viva Voce 15 Marks
 Internal 25 Marks
 Thesis Evaluation 10 Marks
 Presentation & Viva Voce 15 Marks
f. Audit Course/Field Work (CA: 100%) Total: 100 Marks
(i) Phase - I 50 Marks
(ii) Phase – II 50 Marks
$ - In respect of Project Work I&II carried out and reviewed in the departments, the reviewing committee
shall comprise of atleast three senior faculty nominated by the Head of the Department.
In respect of Project Work II carried out in industry, the committee nominated for the second review at
industry shall include one faculty deputed by the department and one mentor from respective industry.
9. QUALIFICATION FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE

A student will be declared to have qualified for the award of the ME/MTech degree provided
i. the student has successfully completed the course requirements and has passed all the
prescribed courses of study of the respective programme listed in section 13 infra within
the duration specified in section 2(ii) supra and earned the total number of credits as
specified in the curriculum of the respective programme of study. However, if the student
wishes, he/she may be permitted to earn more than the total number of credits prescribed
in the curriculum of his/her programme.
ii. no disciplinary action is pending against the student.
10. CLASSIFICATION OF DEGREE

A) FIRST CLASS WITH DISTINCTION:
A student who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First class with Distinction.
* Should have passed the end semester examination in all the courses of all the four
semesters in his/her First appearance within 3 years, (4 years in the case of PT)which
includes authorized break of study of one year. Withdrawal from examination (vide
clause 11) will not be considered as an appearance.
* Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 8.50.
* Should not have been prevented from writing end semester examination due to lack of
attendance in any of the courses.
B) FIRST CLASS:
A student who satisfies the following condition shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First Class.
14
* Should have passed the end semester examination in all the courses of all four (six for
PT) semesters within 3 years, (4 years in the case PT) which includes one year of
authorized break of study (if availed) or prevention from writing the end semester
examination due to lack of attendance (if applicable)
* Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 7
C) SECOND CLASS :
All other students (not covered in clauses A and B) who qualify for the award of the
degree shall be declared to have passed the examination in Second class.
D) RANK :
A student shall be eligible for award of ranking only if he/she has passed the
examination in first class or first class with distinction in the first available chance (i.e., first
attempt in all the courses). Those who have availed the provision of break of study /
withdrawal will not be eligible for ranking.
11. WITHDRAWAL FROM EXAMINATION

i. A student may, for valid reasons, be granted permission to withdraw from appearing for
the examination in any course or courses of only one semester examination during the
entire duration of the degree programme, if he/she does not have any history of arrears
at the time of request for withdrawal. Prior permission for withdrawal from semester
examinations is to be obtained from Principal. Also, only one application for withdrawal is
permitted for that semester examination in which withdrawal is sought.
ii. Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the student is otherwise eligible to write the
examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the semester examination or
on the day of the examination of a course / set of courses and also recommended by the
HoD and the Principal.
12. TEMPORARY BREAK OF STUDY

i. Under Choice Based Credit System, students will have the provision to take a break of
study at the beginning of a semester to re-do and complete the arrear courses of
previous semesters or on valid reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to
prolonged ill health) and rejoin the programme in a semester which he/she is eligible and
he/she shall apply to the Principal through the Head of the Department stating the
reasons therefore.
ii. A student permitted for break of study shall rejoin the programme at the respective
semester as and when it is offered after the break subject to the approval of
Commissioner of Technical Education and Anna University, Chennai and shall be
governed by the rules and regulations in force at the time of rejoining.
iii. The duration specified for passing all the courses for the purpose of classification (vide
section 10 supra) shall be increased by the period of such break of study permitted.
iv. The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from the commencement of
the semester to which the student was first admitted shall not exceed the maximum
period specified in section 2 (ii) supra irrespective of the period of break of study in order
that he/she may be qualified for the award of the degree.
v. If any student is detained for want of requisite attendance, progress and conduct, the
period spent in that semester shall not be considered as permitted 'Break of Study' and
section 12 (iii) supra is not applicable for such cases.
15
59th ACM 09.06.2018
13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment
ME AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING
(2018 REGULATIONS)
(Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 70*)
Course Hours/Week Maximum Marks
Course Title Credits CAT
Code Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE Total
I SEMESTER
18AE01 Computational Mathematics 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18AE02 Automotive Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18AE03 IC Engines and Emissions 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18AE04 Automotive Electronics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18AE05 Vehicle Development Process 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18AE51 Automotive Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18AE81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 23 Hrs. 15 4 4 18 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18AE06 Vehicle Dynamics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18AE07 Engine Component Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18AE08 Automotive Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18AE09 Linear Control Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18AE__ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Automotive Computer Aided Engineering
18AE52 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
Laboratory
18AE61 Industrial visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18AE82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 Hrs. 18 2 8 24 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18AE__ Elective Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
18AE71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 20 Hrs. 12 0 8 16 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18AE72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 Hrs. 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted)
Automotive Safety
18AE10 Electric Drives and Storage systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE11 Automatic and Automated Manual Transmission 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE12 Automotive Infotronics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE13 Automotive Ergonomics and Safety 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE14 Autonomous Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE15 Automotive Safety Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE16 Electronic Engine Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE17 Sensors and Actuators 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE18 Vehicle Diagnostics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE19 Automotive Electricaland Electronic Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Design Engineering
18AE20 Finite Element Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE21 Aerodynamics of Road Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE22 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE23 Automotive System Design and Simulation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE24 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE25 Automotive Power Train Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Automotive Manufacturing
18AE26 Advanced Manufacturing Process 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE27 Lean Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE28 Lean Six Sigma 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE29 Automotive Materials and Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
16
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Thermal Engineering
18AE30 Emission, Noise, Vibration and Harshness
3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Control
18AE31 Advanced Heat Transfer 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE32 Alternate Fuels 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE33 Automotive HVACR 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE34 Fuels and Combustion 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE35 Simulation of IC Engines 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE36 Instrumentation for Thermal Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE37 Thermal Management of Hybrid Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE38 Fuel Cell Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE39 Aerodynamics of Road Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Others
18AE40 Special Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE41 Vehicle Testing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE42 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE43 Automotive PLM 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18AE44 Automotive Ergonomics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE LABORATORY COURSES
(One to be opted)
18AE53 Automotive Styling and Design Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
18AE54 Automotive Embedded Systems Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
18AE55 Modeling and Simulation Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
* Indicated is the minimum number of credits to be earned by a student.

** - 60 hrs in I semester and 90 hrs in II semester; Grade: Completed / Not Completed
CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course;
MC- Mandatory Course
List of One credit Courses ( 15 hours each)
1. 18AK01 Model based Development

2. 18AK02 Robotics
3. 18AK03 Integrated Development Environment
4. 18AK04 Driveline Matching for Special Purpose Vehicles
17
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18AE01 COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS

2203
NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations – Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Siedel
methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations – Newton’s method. Interpolation: cubic spline
interpolation, Bezier curves and B-spline curves, least squares approximations. (8+7)
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Initial value problem: Runge Kutta method, Milne’s method. Boundary value problem:
Finite Element Method - Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods. (8+7)
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite difference method: Liebmann’s method for Laplace equation and Poisson equation,
explicit method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations, explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7)
MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Simulating deterministic behaviour, area under a curve, generating random numbers,
simulating probabilistic behaviour, inventory model: gasoline and consumer demand. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. John H Mathews and Kurtis D Fink, Numerical Methods using MATLAB, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Steven C Chapra and Raymond P Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
3. Frank R Giordano, William P Fox and Steven B Horton, A first course in Mathematical Modeling, Cengage Learning, New
Delhi, 2014.
4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatly, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Douglas J Faires and Richard Burden, Numerical Methods, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2013.
18AE02 AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS

3204
FRAME AND BODY: Introduction, Vehicle classification, frame types-conventional, integral construction – ladder chassis, sub
frames, functions and requirements, chassis lay out types, Loads acting on chassis, chassis members selection, frame
materials, types of bodies, features of body, body structural requirements ,body structural elements ,design for body bending,
design for body torsion, design for crashworthiness, design for vibration, design for vehicle and styling integration, material
selection and mass estimation in preliminary design. (11)
STEERING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Introduction, Functions and requirements, axles-live and dead axles, front axle and
its types, stub axle and its types, steering mechanisms, arrangement of steering system, over steer and under steer, steering
ratio calculation, steering gear box types, turning radius, center point steering, stub axle types, Wheel alignment, hydraulic
power steering. SUSPENSION SYSTEM-Introduction, Functions, characteristics of good suspension system, suspension
spring types-, types of suspension system, dampers, types, telescopic shock absorbers, air suspension, hydro elastic
suspension, hydro-pneumatic suspension system, active suspension system. (11)
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: Clutch- role - types of clutches, single plate clutch, coil spring type and diaphragm spring type,
multiple plate clutch, centrifugal clutch, calculation of torque transmission, over running clutch. Gear Box- Need for a gearbox,
types of gear boxes, sliding mesh, constant mesh and synchromesh gear boxes, calculation of gear ratios, overdrives, transfer
case and transaxles. propeller shaft drive, Hotchkiss drive, Torque tube drive, universal joints, trunnion type, ring type, flexible
disc type, constant velocity joint types, Final Drive and Differential- need for final drive and differential, types of final drives,
single reduction and double reduction final drives, differential and its types, conventional and non-slip differentials, rear axle
and its types, fully floating, semi- floating and three quarter floating axles. (11)
BRAKE SYSTEM, WHEELS AND TYRES: Introduction, principle, classifications, requirements, drum brake, disc brake,
stopping distance calculations, weight transfer calculations, braking efficiency calculations, mechanical brake, hydraulic brakes,
vacuum servo brakes, air brakes, air assisted hydraulic brakes, introduction to Anti-lock braking system. Wheels and Tyres-
basic construction of wheel, hub and tyres, tyre requirements, interchangeability, passenger car and commercial vehicle
requirements, bias ply and radial ply tyres, tubeless tyres, wheel balancing, tyre inflation, tyre wear and tyre rotation, quick
change wheels, special wheels, run flat tyre. (12)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Heister,Heinz., “Vehicle and Engine Technology”, SAE International, 1999.
2. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Electrics Automotive Electronics”, Professional Engineering Publication, 2004.
3. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Hand book”, 2004.
4. Garret,T.Kenneth.,Newton,Kenneth. and Steeds,William.,” The Motor Vehicle”, Butterworth-Heinemann Limited, 2001.
18AE03 IC ENGINES AND EMISSIONS

3003
ENGINE BASIC THEORY AND COMBUSTION: Engine types – otto, diesel, dual operating cycles – Fuel air cycle and actual
cycles – Engine design and operating parameters - Two and four stroke engines - Typical performance curves for automobile
engines - performance and pollution aspects. Combustion and combustion chambers- Introduction to combustion in SI and CI
18
59th ACM 09.06.2018
engines. Stages of combustion. Combustion chemistry and emission formation. Ignition and injection timing Knock, detonation
and control. Combustion chambers for SI and CI engines. Direct and indirect injection combustionchambers.Importance of
swirl, squish and turbulence. Factors controlling combustion chamber design. (11)
FUEL SYSTEMS, COOLINGAND LUBRICATING SYSTEM: Introduction and fuel system circuit.Air fuel ratio requirements.
Working of a carburetor and MPFI. Gasoline direct injection systems. Diesel fuel injection systems-Jerk pumps, distributor
pumps, types of nozzles, Unit injector and CRDI systems. Engine governor. Need for cooling, types of cooling systems- air and
liquid cooling systems. Water cooling circuit, radiator, water pump and cooling fan. Properties of coolants and additives.
Requirements of lubrication systems. Types-mist, pressure feed, dry and wet sump systems. Properties and chemistry of
lubricants. (11)
EMISSIONS FROM SI AND CI AND ITS CONTROL: Emission formation in S.I. engines - Hydrocarbons, Carbon monoxide,
Oxides of Nitrogen, Polyneculear Aromatic Hydrocarbon. Effects of design and operating variables on emission formation in
Spark Ignition engines Controlling of pollutant formation in engines Exhaust after treatment, Charcoal Canister Control for
Evaporative Emission Control, emissions and drivability, Positive crank case ventilation system for UBHC emission
reduction.Chemical delay, intermediate compound formation, Pollutant formation on incomplete combustion, Effect of design
and operating variables on pollutant formation, Controlling of emissions, emissions and drivability, Exhaust gas recirculation,
exhaust after treatment. Emission effects on health and environment. (12)
NEW ENGINE TECHNOLOGY: Lean Burn engine – Different approaches to lean bum – LHR engine – Surface ignition concept
– catalytic ignition – homogenous charge compression ignition – variable valve timing – turbo and super charging -Multi Port
Injection System - Gasoline Direct Injection – Common Rail Direct Injection – Recent Trends. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ganesan, V., “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co, Eighth Reprint, 2005.
2. Crouse, W.H. and Anglin, A.L., “Automotive Emission Control’, McGraw Hill Book Co, 1995.
3. Mathur, M. L., Sharma, R. P., "Internal Combustion Engines", Dhanpat Rai Publication, 2005.
4. Crouse, William., Anglin, Donald., "AUTOMOTIVE MECHANICS", Tata McGraw Hill Book Co, 2006.
18AE04 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS

3003
OVERVIEW OF VEHICLE ELECTRONICS: Need for Electronics in Automotive Systems - Performance (speed, power, and
torque), control (emission, fuel economy, drivability, and safety) & legislation (environmental legislation for pollution & safety
norms). Overview of Vehicle Electronic Systems Basic electrical components and their operation in an automobile - power train
subsystem (starting systems, charging systems Ignitionsystems, electronic fuel control), chassis subsystem (ABS, TCS, & ESP) –
Comfort and safety subsystems (night vision, airbags, seatbelt tensioners, cruise control, Lane-departureWarning, parking).
(12)
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLS: Concept of an electronic engine control system, electronic fuel injection - throttle body fuel
injection, multi point fuel injection, gasoline direct injection, common rail direct injection, electronic ignition control, engine
mapping, on-board diagnostics – engine control module and power train control module. (11)
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Classification of sensors, sensor for speed, throttle position, exhaust oxygen level, manifold
pressure, crankshaft position, coolant temperature, exhaust temperature, air mass flow for engine application. Solenoids, stepper
motors and relay. (11)
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS: Introduction to control networking – Communication protocols in embedded systems – SPI,
I2C, USB. Vehicle communication protocols – Introduction to CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY, MOST, KWP2000. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bosch, Robert., “Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics: Systems and Components, Networking and
Hybrid Drive” Springer Vieweg, Plochingen, Germany, 2014.
2. Ribbens, William. B., “Understanding Automotive Electronics- An EngineeringPerspective”, the Boulevard, Langford Lane,
Kidlington, Oxford, 2014.
3. Holembeak, Barry., “Automotive Electricity and Electronics”, Delmar Publishers, Clifton Park, USA, 2010.
4. Halderman, James. D., “Automotive Electricity and Electronics”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2013.
18AE05 VEHICLE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS

3003
VEHICLE DEVELOPMENT PROJECTS: An Overview, Categories of vehicle development projects, Platforms and model lines,
The product evolution process (PEP), Vehicle project management, Aspects of international development projects. Cars that
topped and cars that flopped, Factors of success in the automotive industry. Phases of the product evolution process.Initial
phase, concept phase, series development phase, series support and further development. (12)
VIRTUAL CAR PROCESS: Building virtual cars, Geometric integration, further functional geometry evaluation, Virtual build
groups. E/E system development: From machinery to E/E systems, Systems engineering processes. (11)
MANAGEMENT PROCESSES FOR COMPLETE VEHICLE DEVELOPMENT: Target management, Design problem
management, Release and change management, Quality management. (11)
19
59th ACM 09.06.2018
CUSTOMER RELEVANT COMPLETE VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS: Registrability, Total vehicle costs, Design appeal,
Cabin comfort, Infotainment, Agility, Passive safety, Theft deterrence, Reliability, Sustainability. Secondary complete vehicle
characteristics, Production Integration, Service Integration. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Weber, Julian., “Automotive Development Processes", Springer, 2009.
2. Sörensen,Daniel., "The Automotive Development Process", Springer, 2006.
3. Stark,John., “Global Product: Strategy, Product Lifecycle Management and the Billion Customer Question”, Springer
Publisher, 2007.
4. Lewin,Tony. andBorroff,Ryan., “How to Design Cars Like a Pro”, Motor Books International, 2010.
18AE51 AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING LABORATORY
0042
In this practical course students will be provided with an insight into Automotive Systems and their functionalities using the
following experiments. After this, students are expected to formulate and complete an activity of industrial relevance. The
details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in that area are to be arrived based on a good
literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the
assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the
semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned.
1. Measurement of engine components and compression and vacuum test

2. Ignition system troubleshooting and onboard diagnosis
3. Servicing of clutches and gear boxes with Gear ratio calculation
4. Servicing of brake systems and brake bleeding
5. Servicing of Steering system and Ackermann steering verification
6. Chassis measurement and Servicing of suspension system
7. Wheel balancing & Wheel Alignment
8. Battery testing and Head light alignment
9. Servicing and testing of Starter motors and alternator.
10. Performance test on IC engines and emission measurement
Total P: 60
REFERENCE
1. Manual prepared by the Department of Automobile Engineering, 2015.
II SEMESTER
18AE06 VEHICLE DYNAMICS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Earth and vehicle coordinate system. Longitudinal, lateral and vertical vehicle dynamics. Dynamic axle loads.
Road loads - Aerodynamic forces and moments, viscosity effects, separation and its control; aerodynamic lift and its control,
ground effect, styling for minimum drag. Rolling resistance, grade loads. (11)
PERFORMANCE MODE: Acceleration - Free body diagram of accelerating vehicle, maximum transferable tractive force,
gradability, Deceleration - free body diagram of decelerating vehicle, maximum decelerating rates, stopping distance, maximum
braking force. Vehicle performance. (11)
RIDE MODE: Pitch and bounce motion, oscillation centers, active and semi active suspension, orthogonality of mode shapes,
modal analysis. Spring System - Requirements, sprung mass and un-sprung mass, wheel hop, shimmy, wheel wobble, choice
of suspension spring rate, calculation of effective spring rate. Tyres - mechanics, stability of vehicle on slope, on curve and
banked road. Quartet car and Half car modeling. (12)
HANDLING MODE: Vehicle control-low speed cornering and static steering-Ackerman steering geometry, steady-state
cornering -steering factors, vehicle control parameters (under steer, neutral steer and over steer), roll steer, compliance steer,
ride steer, slip angle steer, steady state handling-lateral acceleration gain, characteristic speed, yaw velocity gain, critical
speed, effect of braking on vehicle handling. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gillespie, Thomas. D., “Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics”, SAE USA 2010.
2. Rao,Singiresu. S., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson Education Publication, 2009.
3. Giri, N. K., “Automobile Mechanics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.
4. Wong, J. Y., “Theory of Ground Vehicles”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2012.
20
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18AE07 ENGINE COMPONENT DESIGN

3204
REQUIREMENTS FOR ENGINE DESIGN:Arriving at the engine capacity from vehicle performance requirements – Design of
Parts Working under alternating loads - Engine balancing- kinematics of crank mechanism- Forces acting on crank
mechanism. (11)
DESIGN OF PISTON ASSEMBLY: Introduction- design of crown thickness- Empirical relationships- Design of CI and SI
engine pistons-Compression ring design for CI and SI engine pistons- piston pin design for CI and SI engines.- Design of
connecting rod I section. (11)
DESIGN OF CRANK SHAFT:Introduction- Design of Journals and Crankpins- Design of Crankwebs- Design of In-Line Engine
crankshaft - Design of V type Engine crankshaft. (11)
DESIGN OF ENGINE SYSTEMS: Design of lubrication system elements- oil pump- oil cooler- design of cooling system
components- water pump- cooling fan and radiator- computation air cooling surface. (12)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Kolchin, A.I., Demidov, V., “Design of Automotive Engines”, MIR Publishers press, 1988.
2. Hoag, Kevin. L.,“Vehicular Engine Design”, Springer, 2012.
3. Shigley, Joseph., Mischke, Charles. and Brown, Thomas. H., “Standard Handbook of machine Design”,McGraw-Hill
Professional, 2004.
4. Heywood, John., “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill, 2017.
18AE08 AUTOMOTIVE EMBEDDED SYSTEM

3003
INTRODUCTION: Embedded Systems Definition - Components of embedded systems - Hardware Module - Microprocessor,
microcontrollers, ARM Processor, on-chip peripherals - Program memory(PM), Data memory (DM), parallel port structures,
timer, input capture & output compare units, ADC, PWM. (11)
INTEGRATED SYSTEMS: Introduction to an embedded board, Software module - IDE- Getting Started - Creating new project,
creating new files, adding files to project, compile, build, debug and simulation of a project. Embedded system programming -
Up-loaders, ISP, ROM emulators, in-circuit emulators. Debug Interfaces - BDM and JTAG. (11)
EMBEDDED RTOS: Comparison of conventional OS with RTOS. Tasks & task states (Pre-emptive & Non-pre-emptive,
scheduler, interrupt – Interrupt latency and context switch latency) – Task, multi-tasking, task synchronization, inter-task
communication, shared data problem and its prevention - Features of a typical embedded RTOS (µC/OS-II). (12)
ADVANCED APPLICATIONS: Body electronics – Infotainment systems – Navigation systems – System level tests – Software
calibration using engine and vehicle dynamometers – Environmental tests for electronic control unit - Application of Control
elements and control methodology in automotive System. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Denton, Tom.,” Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems”, Elsevier Jordan Hill, Oxford, 2010.
2. Bosch, Robert.,” BOSCH Automotive Handbook”, Bentley Publications, Massachusetts Avenue, London, 2010.
3. Knowles, Don., “Automotive Electronic and Computer Controlled Ignition Systems”, Prentice Hall Publications, New
Jersey, 2009.
4. Jurgen, Ronald. K., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Publications, Columbus, 2009.
5. Navit,Nicholas., “Automotive Embedded System Handbook”, CRC Press Publications, New Delhi, 2008.
18AE09 LINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION AND MATHEMATICAL MODELLING: - Introduction to control systems, differential equations of physical
systems, dynamics of robotic mechanisms, transfer functions, block diagram algebra, signal flow graphs, feedback and non-
feedback systems, reduction of parameter variations, control over dynamics, control effects of disturbances signals, linearizing
effects, regenerative feedback- linear approximation of nonlinear systems, stepper motor and hydraulic systems.
(14)
TIME RESPONSE AND STABILITY IN TIME DOMAIN: Standard test signals, time response of first order systems, time
response of second-order systems, steady state errors and error constants, effects, effects of adding zero to systems, design
specification of second order systems, design consideration for higher-order systems, performance indices, robotic control
systems, state variable analysis, approximation of higher order systems by lower order systems, concept of stability, necessary
conditions, Routh stability criterion, relative stability analysis. (11)
FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS AND STABILITY IN FREQUENCY DOMAIN: - correlation between time domain and
frequency response, polar plots and bode plots, all-pass and minimum pass systems, experimental determination of transfer
functions, log magnitude versus phase plots, Nyquist stability criterion, assessment of relative stability, closed loop frequency
response, sensitivity analysis. (10)
21
59th ACM 09.06.2018
INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN AND STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN: -P, PI and PID controllers, cascade
compensation in time domain and frequency, feedback compensation and robust control systems design- Concepts of state,
state variables and state model, state models for linear continuous –time systems, state variables and linear discrete –time
systems, solutions of state equations, concepts of controllability and observability, pole zero placement by state feedback.
(10)
Total L:45
REFERENCES:
1. Nagrath, I. J. and Gopal, M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, 2014.
2. Ogatta, K., “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson/ Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
3. Nise,Norman. S., “Control Systems Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2012.
4. Umez-Eronini,Eronini., “System Dynamics & Control”, PWS Publishing Company, 1999.
5. Astrom,Karl. J., “Advance PID Controller Control”, Instrumentation Society of America, 1995.
18AE52 AUTOMOTIVE COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING LABORATORY

0042
In this practical course students will be provided with a comprehensive practical exposure to Automotive Computer Aided
Engineering and its functionalities using the following experiments. After this, students are expected to formulate and
complete an activity of industrial relevance. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge in
that area are to be arrived based on a good literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the experiments and their
interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be
submitted at the end of the semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned.
1. Modeling of Automotive Component and Assemblies

2. Analysis of Automotive Component and Assemblies
3. Simulation of Automotive Component and Assemblies
Automotive Analysis
1. Engine Components
2. Cooling System
3. Power train
4. Steering System
5. Brake System
6. Suspension System
7. Chassis Frame
8. Aerodynamic forces
9. Structural analysis
10. Safety Analysis
Total P: 60
REFERENCE:
1. Manual prepared by Departmentof Automobile Engineering, 2015.
18AE61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
The student will make at least four one or half day Industry visits and technical presentations. The same will be assessed by a
committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the
various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held
at the end of the semester.
Total P: 60
III SEMESTER
18AE71 PROJECT WORK I

0063
 Identification of a current industry problem in thrust areas
 Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem
 Finalization of system requirements and specification
 Proposing different solutions for the problems based on literature survey
 Future trends in providing alternate solutions
 Consolidated report preparation of the above
Total P: 90
22
59th ACM 09.06.2018
IV SEMESTER
18AE72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14
The project work involves the following:
 Preparing a project brief proposal including
 Problem identification
 A statement of system / process specification proposed to be developed (Block diagram / concept tree)
 List of possible solutions including alternative and constraints
 Cost benefit analysis
 Time Line of activities
 A report highlighting the design finalization (based on functional requirements & standards (if any))
 A presentation including the following:
 Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both)
 Testing & Validation of the developed system
 Learning in the Project
 Consolidated project report preparation
Total P: 420
ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES
AUTOMOTIVE SAFETY STREAM
18AE10 ELECTRIC DRIVES AND STORAGE SYSTEMS

3003
BATTERIES: Batteries Types and Battery Packs-Basic Battery Operation-Basic Electrochemistry-Lifetime and Sizing
Considerations-Battery Pack Discharge Curves and Aging-Battery Management System-Battery Models-Simple Novel Curve
Fit Model for BEV Batteries-Voltage, Current, Resistance, and Efficiency of Battery Pack-Determining the Cell/Pack Voltage for
a Given Output\Input Power-The Fuel Economy of a BEV Vehicle with a Fixed Gear Ratio. (13)
ENERGY SOURCES FOR ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES: plug-in hybrid electric vehicle, and electric vehicle Li-ion
batteries- Cell designs- Battery pack design- Safety requirements- Components of HV battery packs- Requirements of HV
battery packs- Testing procedures for EV batteries (12)
BATTERY CHARGING STRATEGIES FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Introduction-Charging algorithms for a single battery-
Balancing methods for battery pack charging-Charging infrastructure. (11)
BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS: Topology of BMS-BMS representation - Data management and network- SoC and SoH
- Battery balancing- Safety aspects of BMSs-BMS standard. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hayes, John. G., “Electric Powertrain- energy Systems, Power electronics and drives”. First Edition, John Wiley, New
Jersy, United States,2017.
2. Chau, K.T. (edited), “Energy Systems for Electric and Hybrid Vehicles”, The Institution of Engineering and Technology,
United Kingdom, Published 2016.
3. Wang, Miao., “Mobile Electric Vehicles: Online Charging and Discharging (Wireless Networks)”, Springer, Berlin, 2015.
4. Scrosati, B., Garche, J. and Tillmetz, W.,"Advances in Battery Technologies for Electric Vehicles",Woodhead Publishing
Series in Energy-Elsevier 2015.
18AE11 AUTOMATIC AND AUTOMATED MANUAL TRANSMISSION

3003
HYDRODYNAMIC DRIVES: Principle of fluid coupling, construction, operation and characteristics, fluid coupling with
conventional gear boxes. Introduction to torque converters, comparison between fluid coupling and torque converters,
performance characteristics, slip, principles of torque multiplication, types of torque converters. (12)
HYDRO-MECHANICAL DRIVES: Major components, principle of planetary gear trains, actuating mechanism, controls system
– Types - Manual, governor, throttle and hydraulic control systems. Principle of automatic gear shifting, Typical automatic
transmissions. (11)
HYDROSTATIC DRIVES: Principles of hydrostatic drives, different systems of hydrostatic drives, fixed displacement pump and
fixed displacement motor, variable displacement pump and fixed displacement motor, fixed displacement pump and variable
displacement motor, variable displacement pump and variable displacement motor, applications, plunger type pump and
23
59th ACM 09.06.2018
plunger type motor, advantages and limitations, typical hydrostatic drives. (11)
AUTOMATED MANUAL TRANSMISSION (AMT):Introduction- advantages – Transmission control unit (TCU) - Single-stage 6-
speed AMT with range-change unit- Applications -Semi-Automated Manual Transmissions- System structure of an automated
manual transmission-Examples of Commercial Vehicle AMT’s. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Erjavec,Jack., “Automatic Transmissions”, Delmar Publishers, 2005.
2. Tucker, H.F., “Automatic Transmission”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, 1980.
3. Naunheimer,Harald., Bertsche,‎dnreB. and ‎Ryborz, Joachim., “Automotive Transmissions- Fundamentals, Selection,
Design and applications”, Springer Publishers ,2010.
4. John, J.P. and Tyler, G.H., “Industrial Hydraulics”, MGH Published, 1980.
18AE12 AUTOMOTIVE INFOTRONICS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Driver information, driver perception, driver convenience, driver monitoring, general vehicle control,
longitudinal and lateral control, collision avoidance and vehicle monitoring. (11)
SAFETY SYSTEMS: Active and passive safety, airbags, seat belt tightening system, forward collision warning systems, Radar
monitoring system, Ultrasonic sensor, child lock, anti lock braking systems, EBD, ESP, traction control system and lane
departure warning system. (11)
COMFORT & SECURITY SYSTEMS: Adaptive cruise control system, active suspension system, power steering, collapsible
and tiltable steering column and power windows, Adaptive lighting system, Security - Anti theft technologies – mechanical,
electromechanical and electronic immobilizers, alarm system, stolen vehicle tracking system, remote keyless entry, smart card
system and number plate coding. (12)
New car Assessment Program: Body parts shell for safety–NCAP and Global Norms, Frontal and offset frontal Crash
requirements, Safety for seating and seat belt anchorages; Head impact and Injury prevention. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vlacic,Ljubo., Parent,Michel. and Harashima,Fumio., “Intelligent Vehicle Technologies”, Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, Oxford, 2001.
2. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Hand Book”, SAE, 2000.
3. Jurgen,Ronald. K., “Navigation and Intelligent Transportation Systems – Progress in Technology”, Automotive Electronics
Series, SAE, USA, 1998.
4. Broy, Manfred., Krüger,Ingolf. andMeisinger,Michael.,”Automotive software”, Springer ,2014
18AE13 AUTOMOTIVE ERGONOMICS AND SAFETY

3003
INTRODUCTION: Definition, human technological system, multidisciplinary engineering approach, human – machine system,
manual, mechanical, automated system, human system reliability, conceptual design, advanced development, detailed design
and development, human system modeling. INPUT: Input and processing, text, graphics, symbols, codes, visual display of
dynamic information, auditory, tactual, displays, speech communications. biomechanics, biothermodynamics and bioenergetics.
(12)
VEHICLE ERGONOMICS: Introduction, seating dimensions, interior ergonomics, ergonomics system design, seat comfort,
suspension seats, split frame seating, back passion reducers, dash board instruments, electronic displays, commercial vehicle
cabin ergonomics, mechanical package layout, goods vehicle layout. (11)
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Illumination, heat ventilation and air conditioning, noise, motion, speed and acceleration,
sound, vibration. (11)
HUMAN FACTORS APPLICATIONS: Human error, accidents, human factors and the automobile, organizational and social
aspects, steps according to ISO/DIS6385, OSHA’s approach, virtual environments. SAFETY: Seat belt, air bag, collapsible
steering, warning systems, ABS braking system, collision safety systems, global safety standards in automotive applications.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bridger, R. S., “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2003.
2. Phillips,Chandler. Allen., “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2000.
3. Helandar,Martin., “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Taylor and Francis, 1996.
4. Mark, S. S., “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1993.
5. Fenton,John., “Hand Book of Automotive Power Train and Chassis Design”, SAE, 1998.
24
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18AE14 AUTONOMOUS VEHICLES

3003
INTRODUCTION: Advance driver assistance systems, LIDAR, RADAR, Image processing, Navigation (GPS& GIS) systems,
Adaptive cruise control systems, lane departure warning systems, automatic emergency braking systems- night vision systems-
autopilot-SAE international level of driving automation- V2V, V2I, Nokia Here digital maps- Communication protocols overview-
case study-DARPA and google waymo. (14)
CONNECTED FLEET SYSTEMS: Platoon, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi connectivity, Information, Advisory and Warning, Li-fi connectivity,
automated highway systems-aerodynamics performance, fleet testing and evaluation project. (11)
NONLINEAR CAMERA: Artificial intelligence and expert systems- GNSS-Aided INS for Fixed-Wing UAV, Machine Vision,
Optical Flow, From Optical Flow to Body Velocity, Kalman Filter-Observed System and Filter Equations, Stability of the EKF.
(10)
AUTOPILOT & IOTS IMPACT ON MOBILITY: Liability- vehicle intelligence- vehicle internet security- Crash Imminent Braking-
communication Standard-Distributed System Architecture of Autonomous Vehicles and Real-Monocular camera, Real time
perception control (Neural Network), disagreement notification- temporal difference input to neural network. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jurgen,Ronald. K. (edited), “ Autonomous Vehicle for Safer Driving”, SAE International, Warrendale Pennsylvania,
USA,2013.
2. Fossen,Thor. I., Pettersen,Kristin. Y. and Nijmeijer, Henk., "Sensing and Control for Autonomous Vehicles-
Applications to Land, Water and Air Vehicles" Springer International Publishing AG 2017.
3. Fridman, Alex., Jenik,Benedikt., Reimer, Bryan., “Arguing Machines: Perception- Control system Redundancy and
edge case discovery in real- world autonomous driving”,ArXiv,2017.
4. Maurer, Markus., Gerdes, ‎naitsirhC‎.J. and ‎zneL‎, Barbara., "Autonomous Driving- Technical, Legal and social
aspects", Springer Daimler und Benz- Stiftung, Ladenburg 2015.
18AE15 AUTOMOTIVE SAFETY SYSTEM

3003
INTRODUCTION: Driver information, driver perception, driver convenience, driver monitoring, general vehicle control,
longitudinal and lateral control, collision avoidance and vehicle monitoring. (11)
SAFETY SYSTEMS: Active and passive safety, airbags, seat belt tightening system, forward collision warning systems, child
lock, anti lock braking systems, EBD, ESP, traction control system and lane departure warning system. (11)
COMFORT & SECURITY SYSTEMS: Adaptive cruise control system, active suspension system, power steering, collapsible
and tiltable steering column and power windows, Adaptive lighting system, Security - Anti theft technologies – mechanical,
electromechanical and electronic immobilizers, alarm system, stolen vehicle tracking system, remote keyless entry, smart card
system and number plate coding. (12)
NEW CAR ASSESSMENT PROGRAM: Body parts shell for safety–NCAP and Global Norms, Frontal and offset frontal Crash
requirements, Safety for seating and seat belt anchorages; Head impact and Injury prevention. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vlacic,Ljubo., Parent,Michel. and Harashima,Fumio., “Intelligent Vehicle Technologies”, Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, Oxford, 2001.
2. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Hand Book”, SAE, 2000.
3. Jurgen,Ronald. K., “Navigation and Intelligent Transportation Systems – Progress in Technology”, Automotive Electronics
Series, SAE, USA, 1998.
4. William, B. R., “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Butter worth Heinemann Woburn, 1998.
18AE16 ELECTRONIC ENGINE MANAGEMENT

3003
INTRODUCTION: Purpose of electronic engine management system - Business & Engineering Need: Meet market specific
need and legislative norms (Emission & Safety).Improve the engine performance (Torque and Speed characteristics), fuel
economy and driving comfort. Software Architecture - Overview for Engine Management System, Overview of Safety standards
(ISO26262 ASIL), AUTOSAR overview, Diagnostic and Monitoring System overview. (12)
SENSORS, ACTUATORS AND CONTROL UNIT: Sensors for measuring crankshaft speed, camshaft position, Mass air flow
(MAF),exhaust gas oxygen, throttle plate angular position, coolant temperature, intake air temperature, manifold absolute
pressure (MAP),differential exhaust gas pressure, Nitric Oxide, Actuators for controlling EGR,Fuel Injection Quantity (Injector
Solenoid and Piezo),Air control via throttle control,EGR control via EGR valve, variable valve timing and lift control, Turbo-
charger control via waste gate control. (11)
25
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ENGINE CONCEPTS FOR PERFORMANCE AND EMISSION CONTROL: Gasoline Engine: MPFI and GDI System–Working
of MPFI and GDI systems, Lambda control with three-way catalyst, Throttle control, Variable valve timing and lift control,
Engine Downsizing via Turbo & Compressor Control, NOx control (NOx storage catalyst and Selective Catalytic
Reduction),Particulate control (Particulate Trap and Regeneration). (11)
DIESEL ENGINE: CRDI System – Fuel Injection control for engine performance optimization (Speed, Torque, Vibration and
Noise),NOx control via Injection control,EGRcontrol,NOx storage catalyst, Selective Catalyst Reduction. Particulate control via
particulate trap and regeneration. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ronald, K. J., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Book Co, 1999.
2. William, B. R., “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, SAE Publications 2004.
3. Bosch,Robert., “Diesel Engine management” Bentley Publishers, Cambridge, 2004.
4. Bosch,Robert., “Gasoline Engine management” Bentley Publishers, Cambridge, 2004.
18AE17 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS

3003
AUTOMOTIVE SENSORS: Introduction to sensors and variables to be measured in an automotive measurement and control
applications. Airflow Rate Sensor, Pressure Measurement –Strain gauge MAP sensor. Engine Crank Position sensor-Magnetic
reluctance, Hall effect and optical crank position sensor, Throttle angle sensor, Temperature Sensor. Sensors for Engine
feedback control – EGO sensor, EGO characteristics, Magneto strictive principle and Knock sensor. (11)
AUTOMOTIVE ACTUATORS:Introduction to actuators and variables to be controlled, Engine control actuators, Pulse width
Modulated signal and H-bridge device for speed and direction control. Electric motor actuator –DC motor, Brushless DC Motor,
Stepper Motor and Servomechanism. Engine control actuators-Fuel injector (solenoid, Piezo electric type), Ignition coil
operation, EGR Actuator, Electric actuators- Relays, Reed switch. (12)
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER:OP-Amp: Introduction, Basics, Ideal OP-AMP, Open Loop and feedback in OP-AMP operation,
Inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Voltage follower and Differential amplifiers. Difference mode, Common mode gain,
CMRR, Operation amplifier internal circuit, Example of OP-AMP IC’s (IC 741), OP-Amp D.C characteristics. - Operational
Amplifier Applications. (11)
WAVEFORM GENERATORS, A/D AND D/A CONVERTORS: Comparator and its application, Regenerative comparator and
square wave generator (Astablemultivibrator), Basic DAC techniques –Weighted resistor, R-2R ladder and inverted R-2R
ladder, ADC-Direct Type ADC’s –Flash ADC, Successive approximation ADC. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ribbens,William. B., “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 7th Edition Butterworth-Heinemann publications, 2012.
2. Choudhry,D. Roy. andJain,Shail., “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
3. Jurgan,Ronald. K., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, 2ndEdition , McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1999.
4. Franco,Sergio., “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits”, 3rd Edition, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2007.
18AE18 VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS

3003
ON AND OFF -BOARD DIAGNOSTICS: Introduction to fault diagnosis and oscilloscope diagnostics, mechanical and electrical
diagnostic techniques, sensors and actuators associated with oscilloscope diagnostics, faults Codes, Scanners/Fault Code
Readers, Engine Analysers, On-board diagnostics various perspectives, Petrol/Gasoline On-board diagnostics, On-board
sensors and actuators. (11)
ENGINE SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS: Introduction to engine systems diagnostics, engine operation and fuel system, ignition system
and emission system, fuel injection, starting and charging system, power flow control and energy efficiency analysis, engine
management and fault-finding information, air supply, exhaust system, cooling and lubrication system. (11)
CHASSIS AND BRAKE SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS: Introduction to chassis diagnostics, anti-lock braking system diagnostics,
traction control system diagnostics, steering and tires, transmission systems diagnostics, diagnostics on steering and tires.(11)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DIAGNOSIS: Introduction to electronic components and circuits, multiplexing and de multiplexing,
lighting system faults and auxiliary faults, in-car entertainment security and communications implementation, body-electrical
systems, instruments system faults, heating ventilation and air conditioning cruise control, air bags and belt tensioners. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Denton,Tom., “Advanced Automotive Fault Diagnosis”, Routledge, 2011.
2. Denton,Tom., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.; 2nd revised edition 1999.
3. Denton, Tom., “Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems”, Routledge,4th edition, 2012.
4. Jurgan,Ronald. K. “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, 2nd Edition , McGraw-Hill, Inc. 2008
26
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18AE19 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS

3003
BATTERIES AND IGNITION SYSTEM: Lead acid and alkaline batteries, construction and working, battery rating, battery
charging methods, testing and maintenance. Ignition system-Introduction - Construction and working of magneto coil and
battery coil ignition systems, spark plug types, spark advance mechanisms, electronic ignition systems - Transistorized ignition
system, solid state ignition systems, capacitor discharge ignition system and distributor less ignition system. (11)
STARTING SYSTEM AND CHARGING SYSTEM - Principle, construction and working of starter motor, working of different
starter drive units CHARGING SYSTEM: Alternators – Principle, construction and working – Regulators, Introduction to Start /
Stop system, integrated starter generator (ISA/ISG) (11)
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Mass air flow (MAF), exhaust gas oxygen, throttle plate angular position, crankshaft angular
position/rpm, coolant temperature, intake air temperature, manifold absolute pressure (MAP), differential exhaust gas pressure,
vehicle speed, pickups sensors, exhaust gas recirculation sensors, electric fuel pump motor characteristics, piezoelectric stack
injectors and solenoids for injection systems. (11)
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL - Electronic diesel control -Comparison indirect and direct injection- mechanical and
hydraulic actuated EDC - In-line fuel-injection pumps, helix and port controlled axial piston distributor, solenoid valve control,
unit injectors, common rail systems, data processing, lambda closed loop control, torque-controlled EDC systems, control and
triggering of actuators. Electronic gasoline control: Battery ignition system-open loop and closed loop systems, mono point,
multi point, gasoline direct injection systems, air assisted systems, principles and features of Bosch jetronic systems, idle
speed, knock and spark timing control, magnetostrictive ignition, capacitor discharge ignition, solid state and transistor ignition,
distributor less ignition. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bell,Joseph., “Diesel Engineering: Electricity and Electronics”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Bosch,Robert., “Automotive Hand Book” SAE, 2000.
3. Bosch,Robert.,“Automotive Electrics Automotive Electronics”, GmbH, 2004.
4. Denton, Tom., “Automobile Electrical and Electronics systems”, Routledge Taylor & Francis Group London & New York,
2002.
DESIGN ENGINEERING STREAM ELECTIVES
18AE20 FINITE ELMENT ANALYSIS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Historical background, Concept of finite element method, boundary, initial and eigen value problems, Finite
element formulation starting from governing differential equations – Weighted residual method, Finite element formulation
based on stationary of a functional. Review of static analysis using 1D elements. (10)
STATIC ANALYSIS AND DYNAMIC ANALYSIS: Triangular and quadrilateral elements, Isoparametric formulation, problems
using 2D elements, shape functions for axisymmetric and 3D elements, shape functions for higher order elements. Introduction
to plates and shells. Equations of motion for dynamic problems. Consistent and lumped mass matrices. Formulation of element
mass matrices. Free vibration problem formulation, Solution of Eigen value problems using 1D elements, Time dependent one-
dimensional bar analysis. (12)
HEAT TRANSFER ANALYSIS: Basic differential equations of heat transfer, one dimensional and two-dimensional finite
element formulation using variational and Galerkin’s method, one dimensional steady state heat transfer problems involving
conduction and convection. Analysis of tapered fin, Formulation of thermal stress problems and examples, transient thermal
analysis. (11)
NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS: Introduction, Non-linear differential equation, Solution procedures for non-linear problems,
Linearization and directional derivative, Material non-linearity-analysis of axially loaded bars, Geometric non-linearity-Basic
continuum mechanics concepts, Governing differential equations and weak forms, Introduction to contact problems. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Chandrupatla, T. R. and Belegundu, A. D., “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2007.
2. Logan, D. L., “A First Course in the Finite Element Method”, Thomson Learning, 2007.
3. Rao, S. S., “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Elsevier, 2005.
4. Cook, R. D., Malkus, D. S. and Plesha, M. E., “Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, John Wiley
and Sons, New Delhi, 2003.
18AE21 AERODYNAMICS OF ROAD VEHICLES

3003
AERODYNAMIC DRAG OF CARS: Introduction: Fundamentals of fluid mechanics, flow phenomenon related to vehicles,
external and internal flows. Cars as a bluff body, flow field around car, air flow to passenger compartment, drag force, types of
27
59th ACM 09.06.2018
drag force, analysis of aerodynamic drag, drag coefficient of cars, strategies for aerodynamic development, low drag profiles.
(12)
SHAPE OPTIMIZATION OF CARS: Front end shape modifications, front and rear wind shield angle, A and C pillar, front and
rear spoilers, Roof modifications, rear end shape modifications - boat tailing, hatch back, fast back and square back, dust flow
patterns at the rear, effects of gap configuration, effect of fasteners. (11)
VEHICLE HANDLING: Origin of forces and moments on a vehicle, lateral stability, methods to calculate forces and moments -
vehicle dynamics under side force and winds, steady and cornering effect - steering angle and slip angle, under steer and over
steer gradient, suspension effects on cornering, roll moments on front and rear axles, dirt accumulation on the vehicle, wind
noise, drag reduction in commercial vehicles. (12)
WIND TUNNELS FOR AUTOMOTIVE AERODYNAMICS: Introduction, principle of wind tunnel technology, limitation of
simulation, stress with scale models, full scale wind tunnels, measurement techniques, equipment and transducers, road
testing methods, numerical methods. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hucho, W. H., “Aerodynamic of Road vehicles ", Butterworth Co. Ltd., 1997.
2. Pope, A., “Wind Tunnel Testing ", John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1974.
3. “Automotive Aerodynamic: Update SP-706”, SAE, 1987.
4. “Vehicle Aerodynamic”, SP-1145, SAE, 1996.
5. McCallen, R., Browand, F. and Ross, J., “The Aerodynamics of Heavy Vehicles: Trucks, Buses, and Trains”,
Springer, 2004.
18AE22 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Application areas of CFD, Basic concepts of fluid flow - governing equations, conservation of mass,
momentum and energy – Navier-stokes and energy equation for Newtonian fluid, Mathematical classification of flow -
hyperbolic, parabolic, elliptic and mixed flow types. (10)
DISCRETISATION: Finite difference method - forward, backward and central difference schemes, Explicit and implicit methods:
Numerical solution for heat transfer and fluid flow problems for steady state and transient conditions, Stability analysis and error
estimation. Grid generation: Choice of grid, grid oriented velocity components, cartesian velocity components, staggered and
collocated arrangements. (12)
CFD TECHNIQUES: Lax - Wendroff technique - MacCormack’s technique, Relaxation technique. ADI technique, Pressure
correction technique, SIMPLE algorithm. Fluid flow and convection problems: Upwind scheme, Stability criteria. (11)
TURBULENCE MODELING AND CASE STUDIES: Turbulence energy equation- one-equation model, the k-ω model, the k- ε
model. Modeling and analysis of heat transfer, fluid flow and automobile components using CFD packages. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENECES:
1. Muralidhar, K. and Sundararajan, T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
2003.
2. Chung, T. J., “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, London, 2002.
3. David, C. Wilcox., “Turbulence Modeling for CFD”, DCW Industries, Inc., 1993.
4. Versteeg, H. K. and Malalasekara, W., “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Finite Volume
Method', Longman, 1995.
18AE23 AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEM DESIGN AND SIMULATION

3003
Principles of mathematical modeling of mechanical systems: Introduction-Mathematical Modeling- Bars Under Axial
Vibration- Bars Under Torsional Vibration Beams Under Flexural Vibration- Systems Governed by Second-Order PDEs-
Properties of the Laplace Transform- Time Response via the Laplace Transform- The Inverse Laplace Transform- The Final-
and the Initial-Value Theorems. (12)
Vibration Analysis of Two-DoF Systems: Constitutive Equations of Mechanical Elements- springs and dashpots – series and
parallel arrays –Hysteric Damping- Coulomb damping-Introduction-The Derivation of the Governing Equations-Equilibrium
States-Linearization of the Governing Equations- Lagrange Equations of Linear Mechanical Systems. Introduction-Natural
Frequencies and the Natural Modes-The Zero-Input Response of Two-DoF Systems-Damped Two- DoF Systems. (11)
Steering system and Road modeling: Steering system forces and moments calculation- EPS motor torque requirement and
influence different parameters – parking torque estimation- dynamics of rack and pinion steering – concept of road modeling -
Deterministic Profiles –Random profiles. (11)
Suspension and tire modeling: Quarter car model - Kinematics of a Double Wishbone Suspension - Modeling Aspects -
Constraint Equations - Spring Damper in Series tire modeling- – Pacejaka magic formula- brush and Dugoff model-
Introduction to full car model with 16 DoF. (11)
28
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 45
REFERENCES :
1. Angeles,Jorgge.,” Dynamic response of linear Mechanical systems -Modeling,Analysis and Simulation”, Elsevier
press, 2008.
2. Rill, Georg.,” Road vehicle dynamics- Fundamentals and modeling”, CRC press,2009.
3. Nazar, Reza. N., “Vehicledynamics: Thoery and application”,Springer, 2008.
4. Maurer, Markus. and Winner, Hermann.,”Automotive Systems Engineering”, Springer, 2013,
18AE24 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY

3003
DFMA TOOLS: Traditional design and manufacture vs concurrent engineering, poka-yoke, lean principles, six sigma concepts,
DFMA as the tool for concurrent engineering, Process capability, process capability metrics, Cp, Cpk, cost aspects, Design for
assembly (DFA), Design for the Environment (DFE) - environmental objectives, global issues, regional and local issues-basic
DFE methods-design guidelines-example application. (12)
TOLERANCE ANALYSIS: Geometric tolerancing for manufacture as per Indian standards and ASME Y 14.5 standard, surface
finish, review of relationship between attainable tolerance grades and different machining processes. Cumulative effect of
tolerances, dimensional chain analysis -equivalent tolerances method, equivalent standard tolerance grade method, equivalent
influence method. Limits and fits, interchangeable part manufacture. Selective assembly. (11)
DATUM SYSTEMS AND TRUE POSITION THEORY: Degrees of freedom, grouped datum systems - different types, two and
three mutually perpendicular grouped datum planes; Grouped datum system with spigot and recess, pin and hole; Grouped
datum system with spigot - recess pair and tongue - slot pair - computation of translational and rotational accuracy, geometric
analysis and applications. True position theory - comparison between coordinate and conventional method of feature location
tolerancing and true position tolerancing, virtual size concept, floating and fixed fasteners, projected tolerance zone, zero true
position tolerance, compound assembly. Functional inspection techniques using CMM and paper layout gauging. (11)
REDESIGN, TOLERANCE CHARTING: Redesign of castings based on parting line considerations, minimising core
requirements, redesigning cast members using weldments, design guidelines for welding. Redesign of components to facilitate
machining. Tolerance charting - operation sequence for typical shaft type of components, preparation of process drawings for
different operations, tolerance worksheets and centrality analysis, examples. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bralla,James. G. , “Design for Manufacturability Handbook”, McGraw Hill Professional, 1999
2. Boothroyd, G., Dewhurst, P. and Knight, W., “Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly”, Marcell Dekker, 1994.
3. Graedel,T. E. and Allenby,Braden. R. , “Design for environment”, Prentice Hall, 2007
4. Poli, Corrodo., “Design for Manufacturing – A structured Assembly”, Elsevier, 2009.
18AE25 AUTOMOTIVE POWERTRAIN DESIGN

3003
CYLINDER AND PISTON: Materials for cylinder and piston. Analysis of forces. Design procedure for cylinder, piston, piston
rings and piston pin. (11)
CONNECTING ROD: Materials for connecting rod and crank shaft. Analysis of forces. Design procedure for connecting rod
small end, big end bearings and middle portion. Design procedure for crankpin, web and main bearing of crank shaft. (12)
VALVE AND VALVE ACTUATING MECHANISM: Materials. Design of inlet and outlet valves, valve springs, rocker arm,
tappet, Cam, camshaft. (11)
FLYWHEEL AND CLUTCH: Requirements of flywheel. Design procedure for flywheel. Design of single and multi-plate
clutches. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kolchin, A. and Demidov, V., “Design of Automotive Engines”, MIR Publishers 1998.
2. Hoag, Kevin.and Dondlinger, Brian.,” Vehicular Engine Design”,Springer, 2015.
3. Fenton,John., “Gasoline Engine analysis for CAD”, MEP, London, 1986.
4. Crolla, David. anfMasadi, Bahrooz.,” Vehicle Power train Systems”, John Wiley and Sons -2011.
Automotive Manufacturing Stream Electives
18AE26 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES

3003
SURFACE TREATMENT: Scope, Cleaners, Methods of cleaning, Surface coating types, and ceramic and organic methods of
coating, economics of coating. Electro forming, Chemical vapour deposition, thermal spraying, Ion implantation, diffusion
coating, Diamond coating and cladding. (11)
29
59th ACM 09.06.2018
NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING: Introduction, need, AJM, Parametric Analysis, Process capabilities, USM –Mechanics of
cutting, models, Parametric Analysis, WJM –principle, equipment ,process characteristics , performance, EDM – principles,
equipment, generators, analysis of R-C circuits, MRR , Surface finish, WEDM. (11)
LASER BEAM MACHINING: Principle of working, equipment, Material removal rate, Process parameters, performance
characterization, Applications. Plasma Arc Machining – Principle of working, equipment, Material removal rate, Process
parameters, performance characterization, Applications. Electron Beam Machining - Principle of working, equipment, Material
removal rate, Process parameters, performance characterization, Applications. Electro Chemical Machining – Principle of
working, equipment, Material removal rate, Process parameters, performance characterization, Applications. (11)
PROCESSING OF CERAMICS: Applications, characteristics, classification .Processing of particulate ceramics, Powder

preparations, consolidation, Drying, sintering, Hot compaction, Area of application, finishing of ceramics. Processing of
Composites: Composite Layers, Particulate and fiber reinforced composites, Elastomers, Reinforced plastics, MMC, CMC,
Polymer matrix composites.
Fabrication of Microelectronic devices: Crystal growth and wafer preparation, Film Deposition oxidation, lithography, bonding
and packaging, reliability and yield, Printed Circuit boards, computer aided design in micro electronics, surface mount
technology, Integrated circuit economics. Manufacturing, nanotechnology, and micromachining, High speed Machining.
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kalpakijian., “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology” ,Adisson Wesley, 1995.
2. Lindburg, R. A.,”Process and Materials of Manufacturing” , 4th edition, PHI 1990.
3. Liu, Chang.,” Foundation of MEMS” ,Pearson, 2012.
4. Jain, V.K.,” Advanced Machining Processes”, Allied Publications,2012.
18AE27 LEAN MANUFACTURING

3003
INTRODUCTION: History - Objectives - Implications of lean. Traditional vs. mass production vs. lean manufacturing vs. smart
manufacturing. Single variant vs. flexible mixed model support. Lean Culture. Paper Lean vs. IT based Lean. LEAN
CONCEPTS: Five Key principles - Value creation - 3M - Takt time. (9)
LEAN METHODS: Value Stream Mapping: - Detailed process map - Use of VSM software. Group Technology - Machine cell
design - Facility layout optimization - Quality at source - 5S principles – One piece flow - Pull vs Push - JIT - Kanban.
Information technology aids – Smart manufacturing. Case Studies from various industries. (10)
LEAN TOOLS: Standard work - SOP. Spaghetti diagram – Process Map. Visual controls - Marquee - Andon - Vision system -
Score board. Total Integrated Automation - TPM - OEE - TQM - SMED - FMEA - Line balancing - Poka-yoke/ Error mistake
proofing - Information technology aids. Case Studies from various industries. (20)
LEAN IMPLEMENTATION: Road map to implement lean project - Hoshin planning. RECONCILING WITH OTHER SYSTEMS:
Lean six sigma - PDM, ERP, ERP II and PLM – Lean with ISO9001:2000. Industry 4.0/5.0. (6)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Liker,Jeffrey. and Convis,Gary. L., "The Toyota Way to Lean Leadership: Achieving and Sustaining Excellence
through Leadership Development", McGraw Hills, 2012.
2. Askin, R. G. and Goldberg, J. B., “Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Inc.,
2003.
3. George,Michael. L., Rowlands,David. T. andKastle,Bill., “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.
4. Robinson,Alan., “Continuous Improvement in Operations”, Productivity Press, Portland, Oregon, 1991.
.
18AE28 LEAN SIX SIGMA
3003
INTRODUCTION: Background - Six sigma definition – Six sigma vs. TQM – Traditional project vs. Lean six sigma project.
CONCEPT: Four keys, Five laws – COPQ – Total quality cost – Importance of Value stream mapping – Types of Lean six
sigma: DMAIC vs DFSS. Industry culture. Selection of team members. Characteristics of team members. (14)
DMAIC PROJECT: DEFINE: Problem statement - VOC – CTQ – Affinity process – Pareto diagrams – BRD – Project charter –
High level process map – Project team – SIPOC. MEASURE: Types of measures – Types of data. Collect data from "As is"
model. Carry out Cause and effect diagrams – Line, bar, stacked bar graphs – Pie chart – Histograms. Six sigma
measurements: COPQ – QLF - Process capability study. ANALYSE: Process capability analysis – Correlation analysis -
DOE/ANOVA, Chi square test. IMPROVE: Process redesign, generating alternatives for improvement. Conduct pilot
experiments - Cost/benefit analysis – Implementation plan – Risk analysis and mitigation. (22)
DESIGN FOR SIX SIGMA (DFSS) PROJECT: DFSS methodologies - QFD - Theory of Inventive Problem Solving (TRIZ) -
FMEA - Design for XDFX – Robust design and process. (6)
LEAN SIXSIGMA IMPLEMENTATION: Roadmap to implement or execute a lean six sigma project. Software tools available
for DMAIC and/or DFSS. (3)
30
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Feo,Joseph. De. andBarnard,William., “Juran Institute’s Six Sigma Breakthrough and Beyond”, The McGraw-Hill
Companies, 2004.
2. Ehrlich,Betsiharris., “Transactional Six Sigma and Lean Servicing”, St. Lucia Press, 2002.
3. Arthur, Jay., “Lean Six Sigma – Demystified”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 2007.
4. George,Michael. L., Rowlands,David. T. and Kastle,Bill., “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.
18AE29 AUTOMOTIVE MATERIALS AND METALLURGY

3003
METALLIC MATERIALS AND THEIR PROCESSING: ferrous and non ferrous materials properties, alloying elements and their
effects, characteristics of metallic materials such as castability, machinability, hardenability, formability, weldability, etc.
Processing of metallic materials – casting, forming, fabrication and heat treatments. Micro alloyed, high strength low alloy steel
- High strength Steels (HSS), Advanced High Strength Steels (AHSS), Ultra high strength Steels (UHSS), and developments in
non ferrous alloys for automotive industry. (11)
NON METALLIC MATERIALS AND THEIR PROCESSING:Polymers, elastomers – types, properties and applications.
laminated&heat treated glass, adhesive bonding. Electrical insulating materials. Gaskets, automotive glasses, Sound insulating
materials, Protective coating materials - Paints, primers, varnishes, enamels. Processing of polymers and elastomers.
Automotive applications of non metallic materials. (11)
ADVANCED MATERIALS AND THEIR PROCESSING: composite materials – type, application, properties and processing of
composite materials. Composites for automotive industry. Light weight materials Carbon fiber composites, Natural fibers,
refractory metals, SMART Materials - shape memory alloys (SMA), Piezo-electric materials, MEMS, Metallic glass‐Quasi crystal
and Nano crystalline materials, metal foams, etc., Advanced processing of materials – Powder metallurgy (hot isostatic & cold
isostatic), Hydroforming, Laser welding techniques, Induction heating, etc., (12)
MATERIALS FAILURES AND DESIGN: Materials behaviour under mechanical loading - Plastic deformation ‐ Strengthening
mechanisms ‐ Griffith's theory of failure modes –‐ Damping properties of materials ‐ fracture toughness ‐ Initiation and
propagation of fatigue cracks ‐ Creep mechanisms environmentally induced degradation and preventive solutions. Automotive
component failure analysis and case studies, types of failures, fracture mechanisms, types of defects in metals & cracks, types
of fatigue, importance of endurance life. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Yamagata,H.,” The Science and Technology of Materials in Automotive Engines”, Woodhead Publishing Ltd,
Cambridge, United Kingdom, 2005.
2. “Pistons and engine testing”, second edition, MAHLE, 2011.
3. Courtney,Thomas.H.,“Mechanical Behavior of Materials”, McGraw Hill,2000.
4. Budinski,Kenneth. G. and Budinski,Michael. K. “Engineering Materials” Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, 4th
Indian Reprint 2002.
Thermal Engineering Stream Electives

18AE30 EMISSION, NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS CONTROL
3003
Emission: Introduction - Types and causes of emission –SI and CI emission - Formation mechanisms- chemistry of emission-
emission testing methods- engine design and operating parameters on emission- emission standards. (10)
Noise fundamentals and Instrumentation techniques: Sound propagation, quantification of sound - frequency and wave
length, sound pressure level, sound intensity level, vehicle noise specifications & standards, noise induced hearing losses.
Exterior noise sources, Interior noise sources. Microphones & calibrators, Excitation devices, frequency analysis, sound
pressure measurement, sound intensity measurement, sound intensity probes, data acquisition system, digital signal
processing, semi-anechoic rooms. (12)
Noise analysis and control methods: Transfer Path Analysis: single source structure-borne noise transmission path analysis,
multiple reference transmission path analysis, Impedance modelling, modal analysis: definition of modal properties, modal
analysis theory, passive noise control methods: ducts & mufflers -types of mufflers, performance parameters – acoustics and
backpressure, reactive and absorptive silencers, helmholtz resonators and side branch resonators. (10)
Vibration fundamentals and Instrumentation techniques : Introduction, elements of vibration, source of vibration, types of
vibration, transient and steady state response of one degree of freedom system applied to vehicle systems, multi degree of
freedom system (MDOF), Undamped& damped vibrations, Vibration transducers, FFT analyser. (13)
31
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 45
REFERENCE:
1. Harrison,Matthew., “Vehicle Refinement: Controlling Noise and Vibration in Road Vehicles”, SAE International, 2004.
2. Munjal, M.L., “Acoustic Ducts and Mufflers”, John Wiley, 1987
3. Rajamani,Rajesh., “Vehicle Dynamics and Control”, 2nd edition, Springer, 2011.
4. Wang,Xu., “Vehicle noise and vibration refinement”, Wood head publishing Limited, 2010.
18AE31 ADVANCED HEAT TRANSFER

3003
INTRODUCTION TO MODES AND LAWS OF HEAT TRANSFER: Simultaneous Heat Transfer Mechanism, Steady and
Transient Heat Transfer, Multidimensional Heat Transfer, Thermal Conductivity, Thermal diffusivity, Various Boundary and
Initial Conditions, General Heat Conduction Equation, Thermal Resistance, Generalized Thermal Resistance Networks,
Thermal Contact Resistance. (11)
TRANSIENT HEAT CONDUCTION AND FLUID FLOW AND CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER: Lumped capacitance and its
validity, General lumped capacitance analysis, spatial effects. Problems related with conventional geometries. Concept of
velocity and thermal boundary layers: Laminar and Turbulent flow. Navier stokes equations and convection equation. Boundary
layer approximations and special conditions. Boundary layer similarity. The normalized convection transfer equations.
Dimensionless parameters & physical significance. (12)
CONVECTION: External forced convection: Parallel flow over Flat plates, Flow across cylinders, Flow across tube banks.
Internal forced convection: Entrance region, Constant surface heat flux, Constant surface temperature, Laminar and Turbulent
flow in tubes. Natural Convection: Physical Mechanism, Equation of motion and Grashof Number, Natural Convection over
surfaces. (11)
BOILING AND CONDENSATION: Boiling modes, the boiling curve, modes of pool boiling, correlations. Forced convection
boiling. Two phase flow. Condensation: Physical mechanisms, laminar film condensation on a vertical plate. Turbulent film
condensation, film condensation on radial systems, film condensation in horizontal tubes, on banks of tubes, Dropwise
condensation correlations. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Incropera, Dewitt.,”Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer” , John Wiley and sons., 2001.
2. Cengel, Yunus. andGhajar, Afshin.,”Heat and Mass Transfer” , Tata Mc Graw Hill., 2007.
3. Ozisik, M.N.,”Heat transfer - A basic approach”, Mc Graw Hill Int., 2011.
4. Bejan, A.,”Convective Heat transfer”, John Wiley and sons, 2003.
18AE32 ALTERNATIVE FUELS

3003
NEED FOR ALTERNATIVE FUELS: An introduction to hydrocarbon fuels, estimate of petroleum reserve and availability,
Petroleum refining process, Physio-chemical characteristics of fuels, fuel additives, Need for alternative fuels, applications,
types, study of availability, manufacture, storage, handling and dispensing, safety aspects. (11)
ENGINE PERFORMANCE AND EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS: Principle of combustion, Engine performance parameters,
Operating variables that affect SI and CI engine performance, efficiency and emissions, Emission formation in SI and CI
engines - UBHC, NOx, CO, CO2, Particulate emissions, Aldehydes, SOx. Emission effects on health and environment,
Emission Norms. (11)
TYPES OF ALTERNATIVE FUELS: Alcohol fuels - ethanol & methanol, Vegetable oils, Fuel composition, Fuel induction
techniques, Blending and fumigation of fuels, applications to engines. LPG and LNG, CNG, Producer gas, components,
mixtures and kits, fuel supply system, Hydrogen combustion characteristics, safety aspects and system development, HCNG,
Fuel cells, Introduction to Synthetic fuels: GTL, BTL. (12)
BIOFUELS: Oxygenated fuels, Biodiesel formulation techniques, Transesterification, Application in diesel engines, DME
(Dimethyl ether), DEE (Diethyl ether), properties, fuel injection consideration. Biomass: generation, characterization, use as
energy source, Biogas: aerobic and anaerobic bio-conversion processes, microbial reactions, purification, properties of biogas
(composition and calorific value), Storage and enrichment. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Haywood,John. B., “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 2001.
2. Bechtold,Richard. L., “Alternate Fuels – Transportation Fuels for Today and Tomorrow”, Society of Automotive
Engineers (SAE) – 2002.
3. “Alcohols as Motor Fuels”, SAE, 2012
4. Watson, E.B., “Alternative fuels for the combustion engine”, ASME, 2011.
32
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18AE33 AUTOMOTIVE HVACR

3003
FUNDAMENTALS: Terminology, design factors and concepts related to air conditioning & refrigeration systems - Construction
and Working principles of Thermostatic Expansion valve and Orifice tube-based system- Heating system types -detailed study
of HVAC components like compressor, evaporator, condenser, TXV, orifice tube, Receiver-drier, heater core etc. Location of air
conditioning components & refrigeration components in a vehicle. (11)
REFRIGERANTS, AIR MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SYSTEMS: Refrigerants: Temperature and pressure
relation, Properties of R-12 and R134a- refrigerant oil. Simple problems -Containers - Handling refrigerants - Tapping into the
refrigerant container - Ozone Layer Depletion. Air management system: Air routing for manual, semi and automatic system-
cases and ducts- Air distribution, control head and doors- Defrost system Block diagram - types of Sensors and Actuators, -
Control Logic Electrical wiring diagram of manual and automatic system - multiplexing between BCM and PCM- control of
compressor clutch, blower motor etc.- diagnostics tools and features. (12)
DESIGN OF AIR-CONDITIONING COMPONENTS: Modeling of Fixed and variable Displacement type compressor, evaporator
modeling – heat transfer correlations for the fluids inside the evaporator, analysis of evaporator frosting- condenser modeling -
improvement of refrigerant flow control method. (11)
DIAGNOSIS AND SERVICES: Air conditioning & refrigeration system diagnosis based on temperature and pressure
measurements, sight glass, sound etc. -refrigerant leak detection- Trouble shooting and Servicing of compressor, evaporator,
condenser, heater core. Air routing system service. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Birch,Tom., “Automotive Heating and Air Conditioning” Pearson Education Inc., 2003.
2. Dwiggins,Boyce. H., Erjavec,Jack., “Automotive Heating and Air-Conditioning”, Delmer publisher.,2009.
3. Crouse,William. H. and Anglin,Donald. L., “Automotive air conditioning”, McGraw - Hill Inc., 2010.
4. Daly,Steven., “Automotive Air Conditioning and Climate Control System”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2006.
18AE34 FUELS AND COMBUSTION

3003
COMBUSTION PRINCIPLES: Thermodynamics - concepts of combustion – combustion equations - heat of combustion

theoretical flame temperature - chemical equilibrium and dissociation, equilibrium constant for ideal gas mixture. Chemical
thermodynamics, chemical reaction, fuels and combustion, enthalpy of formation and enthalpy of combustion, 1st law analysis
of reacting systems, adiabatic flame temperature of different fuels. (11)
FUELS AND CHEMICAL KINETICS: Flame stability, combustion mechanisms of solid liquid and gaseous fuels. Theories of
combustion - pre-flame velocities - reaction rates - laminar and turbulent flame propagation in engines- reaction mechanisms of
hydrogen and hydrocarbon combustion. (12)
COMBUSTION IN SI ENGINES: Initiation of combustion - flame velocities – flame propagation - normal and abnormal
combustion - knocking combustion - pre-ignition - knock and engine variables – features and design consideration of
combustion chambers - stratified charge combustion - concepts of lean burn engines - heat release correlations. Flow
visualization and modeling, concept of combustion quality, ignition and its effect. (11)
COMBUSTION IN CI ENGINES: Various stages of combustion - vaporization of fuel droplets and spray formation – air motion -
swirl measurement - delay period correlations and affecting variables, diesel knock and engine variables, features and design
considerations of combustion chambers - swirl, squish and tumble Flow visualization and modelling. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ganesan, V., “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill Book Cop.,2005
2. John, B. Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill Book, 2008.
3. Mathur M. L., and Sharma, R. P., “A Course in Internal Combustion Engines”, Dhanpat Rai Publications Pvt. New
Delhi, 2007.
4. Obert, E. F.,” Internal Combustion Engine and Air Pollution”, International Text Books Publishers, 2000.
18AE35 SIMULATION OF IC ENGINES

3003
INTRODUCTION TO MODELLING: Advantages of computer simulation, Classification of engine models. Intake and exhaust
flow models – Quasi steady flow - Filling and emptying - Gas dynamic Models. Thermodynamic based in cylinder models. Step
by step approach in SI engine simulation. (11)
COMBUSTION AND STOICHIOMETERY: Reactive processes, Heat of reaction, measurement of URP, measurement of HRP.
Introduction -combustion equation for hydrocarbon fuels. Calculation of minimum air, excess air and stoichiometric air required
for combustion. Conversion of volumetric analysis to mass analysis. Introduction, complete combustion in C-H-N-O systems,
constant volume adiabatic combustion, constant pressure adiabatic combustion, calculation of adiabatic flame temperature,
isentropic changes of state. (11)
33
59th ACM 09.06.2018
COMPUTER SIMULATION OF SI ENGINE WITH FUEL AIR CYCLE: SI Engine simulation with air as working medium,
deviation between actual and ideal cycle. Fuel air cycle analysis - Temperature drop due to fuel vaporization, full throttle
operation, work output and efficiency calculation, part-throttle operation, engine performance at part throttle, super charged
operation. SI Engines simulation with progressive combustion. Wiebe’s law combustion analysis. , validation of the computer
code, engine performance simulation, pressure crank angle diagram, brake power, brake thermal efficiency, effect of speed on
performance. (12)
COMPUTER SIMULATION OF CI ENGINE: Zero, one and multizone models for diesel engine combustion. Double Wiebe’s
Law analysis for diesel combustion. Heat release model and different heat transfer models. Equilibrium calculations. Parametric
studies on simulated engine performance. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ganesan, V., "Computer Simulation of spark ignition engine process", Universities Press (I) Ltd, Hyderbad, 1996.
2. Heywood, John. B., ’Internal Combustion Engines’", Tata McGraw Hill Co., Newyork, 1988.
3. Ramoss, A.L., "Modelling of Internal Combustion Engines Processes", McGraw Hill Publishing Co.,1992.
4. Campbel, Ashley., "Thermodynamic analysis of combustion engines", John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1986.
18AE36 INSTRUMENTATION FOR THERMAL SYTEMS

3003
MEASURMENT CHARACTERISTICS: Instrument Classification, Characteristics of Instruments – Static and dynamic,

experimental error analysis, Systematic and random errors, Statistical analysis, Uncertainty, Experimental planning and
selection of measuring instruments, Reliability of instruments. (11)
MICROPROCESSORS AND COMPUTERS IN MEASURMENT: Data logging and acquisition – use of sensors for error
reduction, elements of micro computer interfacing, intelligent instruments in use. (11)
MEASURMENT OF PHYSICAL QUANTITIES: Measurement of thermo-physical properties, instruments for measuring

temperature, pressure and flow, use of sensors for physical variables. (11)
MEASURMENT TECHNIQUES AND ANALYSERS: Shadowgraph, Schlieren, Interferometer, Laser Doppler Anemometer, Hot
wire Anemometer, heat flux sensors, Telemetry in measurement. Orsat apparatus, Gas Analysers, Smoke meters, gas
chromatography, spectrometry. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Holman, J.P., “Experimental methods for engineers”, McGraw-Hill, 2012
2. Barnery.,” Intelligent Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
3. Prebrashensky, V., “Measurements and Instrumentation in Heat Engineering, Vol. 1 and 2”, MIR Publishers, 2007
4. Raman, C.S., Sharma, G.R. and Mani, V.S.V., “Instrumentation Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw- Hill, New
Delhi, 2001.
18AE37 THERMAL MANAGEMENT OF HYBRID SYSTEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION: First Law of Thermodynamics for open and closed systems; internal energy, enthalpy, and specific heat -
Second Law of Thermodynamics for closed systems; Thermodynamic equations, Gibbs function - Fluid mechanics: laminar vs.
turbulent flow, internal flow relationships, Navier Stokes equations - Heat transfer: simple conduction, convection, and radiation
relationships; Nusselt number relationships for convective heat transfer; energy equation. (12)
THERMAL MANAGEMENT OF MOTORS: Motor Sizing vs Heat Generation - Operational Temperature Limitations of Electrical
Insulation - Design concepts for Heat Extraction in Motors for xEV systems - Modelling and simulation of heat transfer in motors
- Rendering of Heat extraction solutions - Sensors and Protection solutions. (11)
THERMAL MANAGEMENT FOR BATTERIES AND POWER ELECTRONICS: Introduction - Thermal control in vehicular
battery systems: battery performance degradation at low and high temperatures - Passive, active, liquid, air thermal control
system configurations for HEV and EV applications - Battery Heat Transfer - Introduction to battery modeling: tracking current
demand, voltage, and State of Charge as functions of time for given drive cycles - Development of thermodynamic relationships
for cell heat generation - Lumped cell and pack models for transient temperature response to drive cycles - Model parametric
study results (11)
THERMAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS: Overall energy balance to determine required flowrates - Determination of convection
and friction coefficients for air and liquid systems in various geometric configurations: flow around cylinders, flow between
plates, flow through channels - Development of a complete thermal system model and parametric study results - Temperature
control and heat transfer using phase change materials - Thermal Management of Power Electronics. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Nag, P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2013.
34
59th ACM 09.06.2018
2. Sergent,Jerry. andKrum,Al., “Thermal Management Handbook: For Electronic Assemblies Hardcover”, McGraw- Hill.
2005.
3. “Vehicle thermal Management Systems Conference Proceedings, 1st Edition”, Coventry Techno Centre, UK, 2013.
4. Shabany, Younes.,” Heat Transfer: Thermal Management of Electronics Hardcover”, CRC Press. 2010,
5. Obidi,T. Yomi., “Thermal Management in Automotive applications”, SAE International, 2015.
18AE38 FUEL CELL VEHICLES

3003
Introduction and Thermodynamics of fuel cells: Introduction-working and types of fuel cell-Low, medium and high
temperature fuel cell. Enthalpy change of a reacting system, systematic Gibbs free energy, Ideal efficiency of the energy
conversion, energy balance in fuel cells. First and second law of thermodynamics for fuel cells. (10)
Electrochemistry of fuel cells: Nernst equation, relation of the fuel consumption versus current output, stoichiometric
coefficients and utilization percentages of the fuel and oxygen, mass flow rate calculation for fuel and oxygen in single cell and
fuel cell stack, total voltage and current for fuel cells in parallel and serious connection, over-potential and polarizations,
generous issues -water flooding and water management. (11)
FUEL CELL COMPONENTS AND FUELING: Material for conventional and new catalysts for MEA, Gas diffusion layer - Types
and significance, various flow field design and their impact on performance. Fuel cell performance characteristics -
Current/voltage, voltage efficiency and power density, Ohmic resistance, Kinetic performance, mass transfer effects, fuel cell
stacks, bi-polar plate, humidifiers and cooling plates. Hydrogen generation and storage technologies - various methods and
their influences. (12)
Fuel Cell Vehicle architecture: Hybrid Vehicle configurations – Parallel, Series and Parallel-Series, Fuel cell Vehicle Drives,
Recent developments in battery technology for automobile applications, Modeling, Simulation, and Control of Hybrid fuel cell
vehicles, Advanced heating and cooling systems for hybrid fuel cell vehicles. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Babir, Frano., "PEM FUEL CELLS: Theory and Practice", Elsevier Academic Press, USA, 2005.
2. Viswanathan, B. and Scibioh, Aulice. M., "Fuel cells: Principles and Applications", University Press, 2006.
3. Mench,M. M., “Fuel cells Engines”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008.
4. Ehsani, Mehrdad., Gao,Yimin., Gay,Sebastien. E. and Emadi,Ali., "Modem Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel cell
Vehicles", Fundamental, Theory and design “, CRS Press, 2004.
18AE39 AERODYNAMICS OF ROAD VEHICLES

3003
INTRODUCTION: Scope, historical developments, fundamentals of fluid mechanics, flow phenomenon related to vehicles,
external and Internal flow problem, resistance to vehicle motion, performance, fuel consumption and performance potential of
vehicle aerodynamics, engine cooling requirement, air flow to passenger compartment, duct for air conditioning, cooling of
transverse engine and rear engine. (12)
AERODYNAMIC DRAG OF CARS: Cars as a bluff body, flow field around car, drag force, types of drag force, analysis of
aerodynamic drag, drag coefficient of cars, strategies for aerodynamic development, low drag profiles. Front end modification,
front and rear wind shield angle, boat tailing, hatch back, fast back and square back, dust flow patterns at the rear, effects of
gap configuration, effect of fasteners. (11)
VEHICLE HANDLING: Origin of forces and moments on a vehicle, lateral stability problems, methods to calculate forces and
moments – vehicle dynamics under side winds, the effects of forces and moments, characteristics of forces and moments, dirt
accumulation on the vehicle, wind noise, drag reduction in commercial vehicles. (11)
WIND TUNNELS FOR AUTOMOTIVE AERODYNAMICS: Introduction, principle of wind tunnel technology, limitation of
simulation, stress with scale models, full scale wind tunnels, measurement techniques, equipment and transducers, road
testing methods, numerical methods. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hucho, W. H., “Aerodynamic of Road vehicles ", Butterworth Co. Ltd., 2003.
2. “Vehicle Aerodynamic”, SP-1145, SAE 2006.
3. Pope, A., “Wind Tunnel Testing ", John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2001
4. “Automotive Aerodynamics: Update SP-706”, SAE, 2004.
OTHER ELECTIVES
18AE40 SPECIAL VEHICLES
3003
TRACTORS AND GRADERS: Tractors - General description, specification and functions, light, medium and heavy wheeled
tractors, crawler tracks mounted / wheeled - Bull dozers, tilt dozers and angle dozers, front end loaders, factors affecting
efficiency of output of tractors, simple problems, merits and demerits.Graders -Description, specification of tractor towed
35
59th ACM 09.06.2018
graders and motor graders, classification and functions of graders, functional details of spreading, mixing, ditching, bank
sloping, snow removal, stripping, scarifying, and finishing, elementary details of transmission system (coupling, clutches, gear
box, driving axles, propeller shafts), running gear and operating equipment air braking system; hydraulic system and its
components, steering system of lights, medium and heavy graders, merits and limitations of graders. (12)
ROOTERS, SCARIFIERS AND SCRAPERS: General description, specification and functions, tractor towed rooters and
scarifiers - Heavy duty, light duty. General description, specification and functions, tractor towed and motorized scrapers,
scraper work in cutting, cambering, side hill cutting, spreading on embankments, compaction of fill merits and demerits. (10)
CRANES, EXCAVATORS AND COMPACTION VEHICLES: General description, specifications and functions, excavator
mounted cranes, mobile cranes with strut and cantilever type jibs, tractor towed and tractor mounted cranes. General
description, specification and functions, classification based on attachments, face shovel, drag shovel, hoe, drag-line and grab
or clam shell, advantages and limitations, Compaction Vehicles -: General description, specification and functions, smooth
wheeled rollers, pneumatic tired rollers, agricultural Rollers, sheep’s foot rollers, vibrating compactors. (13)
HAULAGE VEHICLES AND LIFT TRUCKS: General description, specification and functions, self-propelled and tractor towed
haulage vehicles and pneumatic – tires, dumpers – front tipping; trucks – rear tipping, tractor towed semi-trailers and trailers
(rear and side tipping, bottom dumping). General description, specification and functions, fork lift trucks, alternative front-end
equipment (attachments) – Jib arm, shovel bucket, squeeze clamp, boom, fork extensions, barrel forks. Scissors lift trucks -
Applications in industry, advantages and disadvantages. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Peurifoy, R.L., “Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Graham,Ian., “Off-Road vehicles”, Heinemann Library, 2008.
3. Wong, J. “Terramechanics and Off-Road Vehicle Engineering”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2009.
4. Roninson,E.G., “Motor Graders”, MIR Publications, Moscow, 2005.
18AE41 VEHICLE TESTING

3003
RIDE, VIBRATION AND BODY TEST: Vibration measurement instrument – accelerometer and signal conditioning, graphical
presentation. Dynamic simulation sled testing, methodology, vehicle acceleration measurement and documentation. Dolly roll
over test, dolly role over fixture, photographic / video coverage, instrumentation. Vehicle roof strength test – test procedure and
test measurements. Door system crush test –procedure and measurements- wind tunnel selection and Reynolds number
capability, model requirements, model details, model mounting, test procedure. (11)
SUSPENSION AND STABILITY FOR DIRECTIONAL CONTROL: Measurement of dimensional and geometric characteristics,
measurement of centre of gravity position, measurement of moments and products of inertia, measurement of suspension
kinematic characteristics, measurement of suspension elastic and coulomb friction characteristics, measurement of shock
absorber characteristics. (11)
STEERING AND BRAKING SYSTEM TESTING: Analysis of constant radius test, constant steer angle test, constant speed
variable radius test, constant speed variable steer angle test, response gain test. Dynamic cornering fatigue, dynamic radial
fatigue tests – procedure, bending moment and radial load calculations. Impact test – road hazard impact test for wheel and
tyre assemblies, test procedures, failure criteria and performance criteria. Bumpers - types of tests, pendulum test, fixed
collision barrier test, procedure, performance criteria. Air and hydraulic brake test, air brake actuator, valves test, performance
requirements. (11)
VEHICLE SIMULATION AND TESTING: Fault insertion testing in system model - brake fluid leakage test in from single to all
wheels – steering – vehicle in loop testing – braking test on split  conditions. Traction loss and roll instability simulation. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Crouse, W. H. and Anglin, D. L., “Automotive Mechanics”’ Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 2004.
2. Rangan, Mani and Sharma, “Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
3. “SAE Hand book, Vol. 3”, SAE Publications, 2009
4. Stockel, M. W., “Auto Mechanics Fundamentals”, Good Heart-Wilcox Co., Inc., 2008
18AE42 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

3003
Network Analysis: Maximal flow problems-Shortest Route Problems-Minimal Spanning Tree Problems-Minimum Cost
Capacitated Flow problem- PERT and CPM including crashing. (10)
Advanced Topics in Linear Programming: Revised Simplex Method- Integer programming- Traveling salesman problem-
Goal programming. (10)
Dynamic Programming: Concepts-Mathematics description- Deterministic Dynamic Programming (Examples: Facilities

selection problem, Cutting stock problem, Inventory control problem) Problems-Nonlinear Programming problem- Formulation-
Solution Methodology- Problem (Curse) of Dimensionality in Multi State Variables Problem. (12)
36
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Nonlinear Programming (Unconstrained and Equality, inequality Constraints): Basic Concepts-Taylor’s Series
expansions- Fibonacci and Golden Section search- Hooks and Jeeves search- Gradient Methods with equality
constraints.Khun concept- Khun Tucker conditions- Quadratic Programming-Complementary Algorithm- Separable
Programming- Concept of non-derivative search techniques: GA, SAA & TS.
(13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Taha,Hamdy. A., “Operations Research- An Introduction”, MacMillan Co., Seventh Edition 2003.
2. Ravindran,A., Phillips,Don.T., and Solberg,James. J., “Operations Research- Principles and Practice”, John Wiley and
Sons, Second Edition, Copy right 2011.
3. Srinath, L.S., “PERT and CPM Principles and Applications”, Affiliated East West Press Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
4. King, J.R., “Production Planning and Control”, Pergamon Press Oxford, 2009
18AE43 AUTOMOTIVE PLM

3003
MOTIVATION AND INTRODUCTION: e-commerce, B to B, B to C forms of business, extended enterprise, concepts in PDM -
product life cycle, business objects, work flows, versions, views, product structure, change processes, work list, information flow
model in product development, engineering bill of materials and manufacturing bill of materials. (12)
COMPONENTS OF PLM SOLUTIONS: Object oriented approach in product development solutions, phase gate process in
product design - disparate databases and connectivity, use of EAI technology (middleware) - cases for preparation of combined
BOM and other reports. Component supplier management and sourcing. (11)
PRODUCT VISUALISATION: CAD neutral environment and visualization of products, standard softwares, use of visualization
in several stages of lifecycle, reviews, mark up - case studies. Role of PLM in industries: (like auto, aero, electronic) - other
possible sectors, ten step approachto PLM, benefits of PLM. (11)
Details of Module:Details of modules in a PDM/PLM software, basics on customization and implementation of automotive
PDM/PLM software. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Wang,Lihui. and Andrew, Y. C. N., “Collaborative Design and Planning for Digital Manufacturing”, Springer-Verlag
London Limited, 2009.
2. Stark,John., “Global Product: Strategy, Product Lifecycle Management and the Billion Customer Question”, Springer
Publisher, 2007.
3. Grieves,Michael., “Product Life Cycle Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
4. Stark,John., “Product Lifecycle Management: 21 Century Paradigm for Product Realization”, Springer Publisher,
2005.
18AE44 AUTOMOTIVE ERGONOMICS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Definition, human technological system, multidisciplinary engineering approach, human – machine system,
manual, mechanical, automated system, human system reliability, conceptual design, advanced development, detailed design
and development, human system modeling. INPUT: Input and processing, text, graphics, symbols, codes, visual display of
dynamic information, auditory, tactual, displays, speech communications. biomechanics, biothermodynamics and bioenergetics.
(12)
VEHICLE ERGONOMICS: Introduction, seating dimensions, interior ergonomics, ergonomics system design, seat comfort,
suspension seats, split frame seating, back passion reducers, dash board instruments, electronic displays, commercial vehicle
cabin ergonomics, mechanical package layout, goods vehicle layout. (11)
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Illumination, heat ventilation and air conditioning, noise, motion, speed and acceleration,
sound, vibration. (11)
HUMAN FACTORS APPLICATIONS: Human error, accidents, human factors and the automobile, organizational and social
aspects, steps according to ISO/DIS6385, OSHA’s approach, virtual environments. SAFETY: Seat belt, air bag, collapsible
steering, warning systems, ABS braking system, collision safety systems, global safety standards in automotive applications.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bridger, R. S., “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2003.
2. Phillips,Chandler. Allen., “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2000.
3. Helandar,Martin., “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Taylor and Francis, 2006.
4. Mark, S. S., “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2001.
37
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ELECTIVE LABORATORY COURSES
18AE53 AUTOMOTIVE STYLING AND DESIGN LABORATORY

0021
Description: In this practical course students will be provided with a comprehensive practical exposure to Automotive Styling
and Design Laboratory and their functionalities using the following experiments. After this, students are expected to formulate
and complete an activity of industrial relevance. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge
in that area are to be arrived based on a good literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the experiments and their
submitted at the end of the semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 20
hours.
1. Automotive sketching
2. Automotive packaging design
3. Automotive class A modeling
4. Automotive Exterior design
5. Automotive Interior design
Total P: 30
REFERENCE:
15AE54 AUTOMOTIVE EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY

0021
Description: In this practical course students will be provided with a comprehensive practical exposure to Automotive
Embedded Systems Laboratory and their functionalities using the following experiments. After this, students are expected to
formulate and complete an activity of industrial relevance. The details like background, problem definition, state of
technology/knowledge in that area are to be arrived based on a good literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the
experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the
report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours
needed for this work is 20 hours.
1. Study of an Integrated Development Environment

2. Simulation of Automotive Sensors and Actuators
3. Interfacing of Sensors and Actuators
4. Code conversion and Waveform (square and rectangle) generation
5. Simulation of automotive lighting system.
Total P: 30
REFERENCE:
18AE55 MODELING AND SIMULATION LABORATORY
0021
Description: In this practical course students will be provided with a comprehensive practical exposure to Modelling and
Simulation Laboratory and their functionalities using the following experiments. After this, students are expected to formulate
and complete an activity of industrial relevance. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/knowledge
in that area are to be arrived based on a good literature review (5 latest papers). Results from the experiments and their
submitted at the end of the semester. The work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 20
hours.
Experiments:
1.Tire characteristics modeling usingPacejaka’s Magic formula

2. Quarter Car suspension system modeling
3. Dynamics of a Simple Steering System Model
4. Double Wishbone Suspension Kinematic Analysis
5. Nonlinear Damper Characteristics simulation
6. Piston speed and acceleration simulation
7. Simulation of engine kinematic forces
8. Simplified model for Four cylinder CI engine torque
9. Simplified model for Four cylinder SI engine torque
10. Roll centre variation simulation
Total P: 30
REFERENCE:
1. PSG Tech Lab Manual.
2. Crolla, David. and Masahadi,Behrooz.,”Vehicle Power train systems”,John Wiley and sons Publication -2012 .
38
59th ACM 09.06.2018
3. Rill, Georg.,“Road Vehicle dynamics -Fundamentals and Modeling”, CRC Press_2013.
One Credit Courses
18AK01 Model Based Development

1001
Introduction- Automotive system modeling using simulink – Control system modeling using Stateflow- verification and
validation of models-Functional and implementation models –AUTOSAR-Autocode generation. (15)
Total L: 15
References:
1. Kugele,Stefan. M. ,”Model-based Development of Software-intensive Automotive Systems”,Springer , 2012.
2. Navet,Nicolas. andSimonot-Lion,Francoise.,”Automotive Embedded Systems Handbook”, CRC press 2014.
3. Zander,Justyna., Schieferdecker,Ina. andMosterman,Pieter. J.,”Model-Based Testing for Embedded Systems”, CRC
press 2011.
18AK02 Robotics
1001
Introduction-components- types and classification of robots - representation of joints and links using D-H parameters- direct
and inverse kinematics of manipulators - examples of kinematics of some common manipulator configurations- Purpose and
types of sensors, displacement sensors, velocity sensors, force sensors and vision, necessity of actuators, different kinds of
actuators – stepper motors, DC servo and brushless motors, programming of robots. (15)
Total L: 15
References:
1. Morecki, Adam. and Knapczyk, Jozef.,”Theory and Components of Manipulators and Robots”, Springer ,2011.
2. Dinwiddie, Keith.,“Basic Robotics”, Cengage learning ,2009.
18AK03 Integrated Development Environment (IDE)
Fundamentals of KEIL – basics programming ant interfacing with hardware . Fundamentals of Code Warrior – basics
programming ant interfacing with hardware. (15)
Total L: 15
Reference :
Manual prepared by Automobile Engineering Department.
18AK04 Driveline Matching for Special purpose vehicles
Off- Road Vehicle : Performance requirements- selection of engine and tyres- driveline matching and the parameters affecting
the same. (8)
Motor sports Vehicle : Performance requirements- selection of engine and tyres- driveline matching and the parameters
affecting the same. (7)
Total L: 15
Reference :
Manual prepared by Automobile Engineering Department.
AUDIT COURSES
18AE81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP81
18AE82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

39
59th ACM 09.06.2018
13. ME – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING – 2018 Regulations

Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment
(2018 REGULATIONS)
(Minimum No. of credits to be earned:72*)
Course Hours/Week Maximum Marks CAT
Course Title Credits
I SEMESTER
18CS01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS02 Advanced Concrete Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS03 Reinforced Concrete Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS04 Computer Analysis of Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18CS05 Foundation Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS51 Structural Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18CS81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 22 Hrs 14 4 4 18 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18CS06 Structural Dynamics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18CS07 Applied Elasticity and Plasticity 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS08 Structural Steel Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS09 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS_ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS52 Symbolic and Numerical Computation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18CS61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18CS82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 Hrs 18 2 8 23 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18CS53 Computer Aided Structural Analysis and Design PC
0 0 4 2 50 50 100
Laboratory
18CS71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18CS72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 Hrs 0 0 0 14 50 50 100
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted)
18CS21 Bridge Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS22 Finite Element Method 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS23 Aseismic Design of Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS24 Behaviour and Design of Tall Buildings 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS25 Structural Stability 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS26 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS27 Maintenance and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS28 Shell and Spatial Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS29 Experimental Techniques and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS30 Soil Structure Interaction 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS31 Theory of Plates 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS32 Industrial Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS33 Mechanics of Composite Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS34 Soft Computing In Structural Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS35 Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS36 Design of Steel Concrete Composite Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS37 Prefabricated Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS38 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS39 Smart Materials and Smart Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS40 Structural Health Monitoring 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
40
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME (PART TIME) – STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING – 2018 Regulations

(2018 REGULATIONS)
I SEMESTER
18CS01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS02 Advanced Concrete Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS03 Reinforced concrete Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS51 Structural Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18CS81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 14 Hrs 8 2 4 11 200 200 400
II SEMESTER
18CS04 Computer Analysis of Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18CS05 Structural Steel Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS06 Structural Dynamics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18CS61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18CS82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 17 Hrs 9 4 4 13 200 200 400
III SEMESTER
18CS07 Applied Elasticity and Plasticity 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS08 Foundation Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CS53 Computer Aided Structural Analysis and Design 0 0 PC
4 2 50 50 100
Laboratory
18CS52 Symbolic and Numerical Computation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
Total 14 Hrs 6 0 8 10 200 200 400
IV SEMESTER
18CS09 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Total 12 Hrs 12 0 0 12 200 200 400
V SEMESTER
18CS71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 15 Hrs 9 6 12 200 200 400
VI SEMESTER
18CS72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
18CS21 Bridge Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS22 Finite Element Method 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS23 Aseismic Design of Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS24 Behaviour and Design of Tall Buildings 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS25 Structural Stability 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS26 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS27 Maintenance and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS28 Shell and Spatial Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS29 Experimental Techniques and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS30 Soil Structure Interaction 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS31 Theory of Plates 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS32 Industrial Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS33 Mechanics of Composite Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS34 Soft Computing In Structural Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS35 Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS36 Design of Steel Concrete Composite Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS37 Prefabricated Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS38 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS39 Smart Materials and Smart Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CS40 Structural Health Monitoring 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
41
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18CS01/18CN01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY

2203
REGRESSION AND CORRELATION: Curve fitting, method of least squares - inferences based on the least squares estimator -
correlation - curvilinear regression - multiple regression. (8+7)
STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Statistical process control – chance and assignable causes of quality variation, statistical
basis of control charts - control charts for variables - , R and s charts - control charts for attributes – p, np ,c and u charts. (8+7)
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING: Lot-by-Lot acceptance sampling for attributes – single sampling plans for attributes, double, multiple
and sequential sampling plans, acceptance sampling by variables - chain sampling, continuous sampling , skip-lot sampling plans.
(8+7)
RELIABILITY: Failure distribution - reliability function, mean time to failure, hazard rate function, bathtub curve, conditional
reliability, constant failure rate model – exponential reliability function, failure models, time dependent failure models - Weibull and
normal distributions - serial configuration, parallel configuration, combined series parallel systems, system structure function,
minimal cuts and minimal paths, state dependent systems . (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Richard A Johnson, Irwin Miller and John Freund‟s, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2018.
2. Charles E Ebeling, “An Introduction to Reliability and Maintainability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
3. Eugene L Grant, Richard S Leavenworth, “Statistical Quality Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2016.
4. Trivedi K S, “Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science Applications”, John Wiley & Sons,
New Delhi, 2016.
5. Douglas C Montgomery, “Introduction to Statistical Quality Control”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2009.
18CS02/18CN05 ADVANCED CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY

3003
CONSTITUENTS OF CONCRETE: Composition and properties of Portland cement –hydration of cement – structure of hydrated
cement paste-gel theories –Effect of cement characteristics on strength and heat of hydration- physical properties – acceptance
criteria – types of cements and applications – aggregates – fine aggregate characteristics and significance – mechanical properties
of coarse aggregates – acceptance criteria – influence of aggregate properties on strength of concrete- alkali-aggregate reaction –
grading requirements. (11)
PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE: Microstructure of concrete – nanometer scale –C-S-H structure – transition zone and micro
cracking -Workability - Factors affecting workability - Tests for workability -segregation - bleeding - Modern trends in concrete
production , placement, compaction and curing –- Vacuum dewatering and underwater concreting – special formwork - Factors
affecting strength of concrete - Maturity of concrete – Rheological properties of concrete - Shrinkage - Creep of concrete - Factors
affecting creep and shrinkage of concrete – Compression, Split Tension, Flexure ,Bond strength - IS code provisions - Factors
affecting strength test results - Accelerated strength tests - Stress strain characteristics - Determination of modulus of elasticity –
Non-destructive evaluation of reinforced concrete– load test on structural components . (12)
DURABILITY ASPECTS AND MIX DESIGN: Permeability-causes of concrete deterioration- Chemical attack - Sulphate attack -
Quality of water - Marine environment – effect of fire- frost action- thermal properties of concrete - fire resistance and corrosion
protection - Methods to improve durability- Mix design- Basic considerations – frequency of sampling – nominal and design mixes –
quality control and acceptance criteria -Factors in the choice of mix proportions - Mix design methods - ACI method, IS method - Mix
proportions for weigh batching and volume batching - correction for moisture content and bulking - yield of concrete – design of high
strength concrete (Shacklok and Entroy) (11)
ADMIXTURES AND SPECIAL CONCRETES : Classification of admixtures- uses of chemical and mineral admixtures-influences of
admixtures on properties of concrete- Light weight concrete - Fibre reinforced concrete - Polymer concrete - High Performance
Concrete and future trends– Pumpable concrete – Self compacting concrete- tests for key properties and aspects of mix design-
preplaced concrete – smart concrete – geo polymer concrete – concrete using industrial, agro and construction & demolition waste
materials – sprayed concrete- reactive powder concrete – ready mixed concrete – high toughness and ductile concrete -concrete
composites. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Neville A M and Brooks J J, “Concrete Technology”, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd, 2013.
2. Mehta P K, Pauls J M and Monteiro, “Concrete: Micro Structure, Properties and Materials”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private
limited, NewDelhi, 2006.
3. Zongjin Li, “Advanced Concrete Technology”, John-Wiley & Sons inc, New York, 2012.
4. Jayant D Bapat, “Mineral Admixtures in Cement and Concrete”, CRC Press, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Malhotra V M and Carino N J, “Handbook on Non-destructive Testing of Concrete”, CRC Press, 2014.
42
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18CS03/18CN03 REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN

3003
DESIGN OF SPECIAL RC ELEMENTS: Design of slender columns - design of shear walls - Design of corbels and deep beams -
Tie and strut model - arch analogy – design of gird floors. (11)
FLAT SLABS AND DESIGN OF CHIMNEYS: Design of flat slabs and flat plates according to IS and ACI method. Design for shear
reinforcement and spandrel beams: Design of RC chimneys for combined effect of self load, wind load and temperature. (11)
BUNKERS AND SILOS: Introduction – Janssen‟s theory, Airy‟s theory – Design of bunkers and silos. (11)
INELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF CONCRETE BEAMS AND SLABS: Principles of moment - rotation curves, moment redistribution
and Baker's method of plastic design – yield line theory of slabs RC members for fire resistance and ductile detailing: Introduction –
Classification – Effects of high temperature on steel and concrete - Effects of high temperature on different structural members –
Structural detailing – Ultimate moment capacity Ductile Detailing: Concepts of ductility – factors influencing ductility – design
principles and codal provisions – beam to column junction. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Punmia B.C, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain”Limit state design of reinforced concrete”,Laxmi Publications ,New Delhi
2016
2. Gamphir M L, “Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, PHI Learning Private Ltd., NewDelhi 2011.
3. Varghese P C, "Advanced Reinforced Concrete", Prentice-Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
4. Varghese P C, "Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete", Prentice-Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
5. McGregar G J and James K Wight, “Reinforced Concrete Mechanics and Design”, INC Pub., 2006.
6. Krishna Raju N and Pranesh R N, "Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design", New Age International Publishers, New Delhi,
2005.
18CS04/18CN04 COMPUTER ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES

3204
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS: Introduction – Forces and Displacement Measurements – Principle of superposition – Methods of
Structural Analysis – Stiffness and Flexibility matrices of the Elements – Springs system- Strain energy – Betti‟s Law and its
applications - Transformation of system force to element forces – Element flexibility to System flexibility – system displacement to
element displacement – Element flexibility to System flexibility - Transformation of forces and displacement in general – Normal and
orthogonal transformation. (11+6)
FLEXIBILITY METHOD: Choice of redundants – ill and well conditioned equations – Automatic choice of redundants – Rank
technique– Flexibility method – Flexibility analysis due to loads, settlement of supports, Lack of fit and Thermal expansion–
Application to pin jointed plane truss – continuous beams - frames and grids - Transformation of one set of redundants to another
set. (11+8)
STIFFNESS METHOD: Development of stiffness method – Difference between flexibility and stiffness – stiffness analysis due to
Loads, thermal expansion, lack of fit – Application to pin-jointed plane and space trusses – Continuous beams – frames and grids –
Space frames. (11+8)
SPECIAL TOPICS: Static condensation Technique – Substructure Technique – Symmetry & Anti symmetry of structures –
Reanalysis Technique - Direct stiffness approach – Application to two and three dimensional pin-jointed trusses - plane frames –
Grids. (12+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30
REFERENCES:
1. Madhu B Kanchi, “Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis”, New Age International, New Delhi, 2016.
2. Godbole P N, Sonparote R S and Dhote S U, “Matrix Methods of Structural Analysis”, PHI, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Nelsm J K, Nelson K James and Mc Cormac J C, “Structural Analysis Using Classical and Matrix Methods”, John Wiley & Sons,
2002.
4. Mcguire and Gallagher R H, “Matrix Structural Analysis”, John Wiley, 2001.
5. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G, “Computational Structural Mechanics”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2001.
18CS05/18CN23 FOUNDATION STRUCTURES

3003
CHOICE AND SIZING OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS AND STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF PILES INCLUDING PILE CAP: Choice
of shallow foundations for different situations – Proportioning of foundations for equal settlement, Sizing of foundations based on
bearing capacity – strip, isolated, combined and strap footing - Provisions of IS 2911 (Part 1 and Part 3) on structural design of piles
- Structural design of straight and underreamed piles including grade beam - Different shapes of pile cap - Structural design of pile
cap. (13)
WELL FOUNDATIONS: Different types based on shape in plan – Grip length – Load carrying capacity based on SPT results –
Thickness of steining and bottom plug – Forces acting on the well – Stability of well subjected to lateral load by Terzaghi‟s approach
– Methods to rectify tilt of well foundation. (9)
SHEET PILE WALL AND ANCHORED BULKHEADS: Different types of sheet pile – Cantilever sheet pile wall in granular soils, in
cohesive soils with granular backfill – Anchored bulkhead- Free earth and Fixed earth support methods – in cohesive soils,
in cohesive soil with cohesionless backfill . (10)
43
59th ACM 09.06.2018
INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN OF MACHINE FOUNDATIONS AND SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION PROBLEMS:

Fundamentals of soil dynamics – Determination of dynamic properties of soil based on Block Vibration Test and Cyclic plate load
test – Barkan‟s method of design of block foundation subjected to vertical vibrations – Vibration Isolation – Transmissibility –
Methods of Isolation - Modulus of subgrade reaction – Winkler model – Analysis of infinite beams resting on elastic medium and
subjected to point load, uniformly distributed load and moment. (13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kurian K P, “Design of Foundation Systems”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Varghese P C, “Foundation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
3. Bowles J E, “Foundation Analysis and Design”, McGraw-Hill International Editions, 2013.
4. Selvadurai A P S, “Elastic Analysis of Soil Foundation Interaction”, Elsevier, 1979.
18CS51/18CN51 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

0042
1. Study on properties of concrete ingredients – concrete mix design

2. Tests on fresh and hardened concrete
3. Study on structural behaviour of RC beams and RC columns
4. Study on structural behavior of steel beams
5. Study on accelerated curing of concrete, RCPT, permeability of mortar and concrete
6. Study on Non destructive tests – Rebound hammer, Ultrasonic Pulse velocity
Students should conduct selected quality control tests on aggregates and cement, design concrete mix, cast RCC Beam & Column,
calculate the theoretical load and conduct experiment on the RCC specimens, steel beam, measure load, deformation and strain,
plot load deformation curve, moment curvature relationship and discuss. Students should also study the strength and ductility
characteristics of concrete by conducting experiments.
Total P: 60
II SEMESTER
18CS06 STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS

3204
SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEM: Introduction - vibration studies and their importance to structural engineering problems
- elements of vibratory systems - simple harmonic motion - vibration with and without damping - constraints - generalized mass -
DÀlembert's principle - Hamilton's principle - degree of freedom - equation of motion for single degree of freedom (SDOF) system -
damped and undamped free vibrations - undamped forced vibration - critical damping - logarithmic decrement - response to support
motion - response of SDOF system to harmonic excitation damped or undamped - evaluation of damping resonance - band width
method to evaluate damping - force transmitted to foundation - vibration isolation. (12+8)
RESPONSE TO GENERAL DYNAMIC LOADING: Fourier series expression for loading - response to general dynamic loading -
(blast or earthquake) - Duhamel's integral. Numerical Evaluation: Newmark‟s method - Wilson θ method – recurrence formula.
GSDOF system: Expression for generalised system properties - vibrational analysis with Rayleigh's variational method – Rayleigh-
Ritz method. (11+8)
MULTIDEGREE FREEDOM SYSTEM: Response to free and forced vibration of undamped and damped systems – application of
Hamilton‟s principle - Lagrange equations coupling - evaluation of structural property matrices - natural vibration - solution of the
eigen value problem - iteration due to Stodola - Holzer method - Transfer matrix method - Rayleigh - Ritz and Dunkerley
approximation - orthogonality and normality principles of natural modes. (12+8)
DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER SYSTEM: Differential equation of motion - analysis of undamped free vibration of simply supported
and cantilever beams - effect of axial loads - numerical evaluation of modes - frequencies and response system - vibration analysis
using finite element method for beams and frames. Idealisation of multi-storied frames for dynamic analysis- modal analysis - time
history analysis - wind induced vibration of structures - moving load, impact & blast loading. (10+6)
Total L: 45+T: 30
REFERENCES:
1. Anil K Chopra, "Dynamics of Structures - Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering", Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Paz M, “Structural Dynamics - Theory and Computation", Springer, 2007.
3. Craig R R, "Structural Dynamics - An Introduction to Computer Methods", John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
4. Clough R W and Penzien, "Dynamics of Structures", McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd, 2003.
5. Thomson W T, "Theory of Vibration", Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
18CS07 APPLIED ELASTICITY AND PLASTICITY

3003
ANALYSIS OF STRESS, STRAIN, STRESS STRAIN RELATIONS FORMULATION OF PROBLEMS: Analysis of stress (two and
three dimensions) - Body force, surface forces and stresses, uniform state of stress - principal stresses - stress transformation laws
- Differential equations of equilibrium. Analysis of Strain (two and three dimensions) - strain and displacement relation - compatibility
equations - state of strain at a point - strain transformations - principle of superposition. - stress strain relation - generalised Hooke's
law - Lame's constants- Formulation of Problems - Methods of Formulation - Equilibrium equations in terms of displacements -
Compatibility equations in terms of stresses - boundary value problems (11)
TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS IN CARTESIAN COORDINATES: Plane Stress problem, Plane Strain Problem – Formulation-
44
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Boundary condition - examples - Airy's stress function - polynomials - Direct method of determining Airy's stress functions - solution
of Bi-harmonic equation - St.Venant`s principle - Two dimensional problems in Cartesian co-ordinates - bending of a cantilever
loaded at end. (11)
TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS IN POLAR COORDINATES & TORSION OF CYLINDRICAL BARS: General equations in polar
co-ordinates - stress distribution symmetrical about an axis - pure bending of curved bars - strain components in polar co-ordinates -
displacements for symmetrical stress distribution - bending of a curved bar - effect of a circular hole on stress distribution – Thick
cylinder - Forces on wedges - a circular disk with diametric loading - Torsion of prismatic bars - General solution of the problem by
displacement (warping function) and force (Prandtl`s stress function) approaches-Torsion of shafts of circular and non circular
(elliptic, triangular and rectangular) cross sectional shapes only-Torsion of thin rectangular section and hollow thin-walled sections.
(12)
INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICITY & ELASTO PLASTIC PROBLEMS: Introduction to stress strain curve - ideal plastic body -
criterion of yielding - Rankine`s theory - St.Venant`s theory - Tresca criterion - Beltrami`s theory - Von Mises criterion - Mohr`s
theory of yielding - yield surface - Flow rule (plastic stress - strain of relation) - Prandtl Reuss equations - Plastic work - stress -
strain relation based on Tresca - Plastic potential- Elastic plastic problems of beams in bending- thick hollow spheres and cylinders
subjected to internal pressure - General relation - plastic torsion - perfect plasticity - bar of circular cross sections - Nadai`s sand
heap analogy - Failure criteria and fracture - fracture toughness – stress intensity factor. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sadhu Singh, "Theory of Elasticity", Khanna Publications, NewDelhi, 2000.
2. Timoshenko S and Goodier J N, "Theory of Elasticity", McGraw Hill Book Co., 1988.
3. Chen WP and Henry D J, "Plasticity for Structural Engineers", Springer Verlag, New York, 1988.
4. Chakrabarty, “Theory of Plasticity”, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1987.
5. Mendelson A, "Plasticity:Theory & Applications", Macmillan Co., New York, 1968.
6. Chow PC and Pagono NJ, "Elasticity Tensor Dynamic and Engg. Approaches", DVan Nostrand Co., Inc., 1967.
18CS08/18CN24 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN

3003
CONNECTIONS & TENSION MEMBERS: Concept of design methodologies -Philosophies of Limit State Design, Working stress
design, LRFD, Welded and bolted connections – framed connection – seated connection – moment resistant connection
Introduction of Tension members – net sectional area for concentrically and eccentrically loaded members – tension splices -
bending of tension members – stress concentrations. (12)
COMPRESSION MEMBERS & LOCAL BUCKLING OF THIN PLATE ELEMENTS: Introduction – practical end conditions and
effective length factors – elastic compression members – restrained compression members – torsional buckling - built up
compression members with lacings and battens – column splices.
Plate elements in compression –shear – bending – bending and shear – bearing – design against local buckling. (11)
FLEXURAL MEMBERS & BEAM – COLUMNS: Introduction – Inplane bending of beams – elastic analysis of beams – bending
stresses – shear stresses – strength design – serviceability design – lateral buckling of beams – restrained beams – cantilever&
over hanging beams- braced and continuous beams – mono symmetric beams – non uniform beams.
Inplane behaviour of isolated beam-column – flexural torsional buckling – biaxial bending. (11)
FRAMES & TORSION MEMBERS: Introduction – triangulated frames – two dimensional frames – three dimensional frames- semi
rigid frames- braced frames.
Uniform torsion – non uniform torsion – torsion design – torsion and bending – distorsion. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Subramanian N, “Design of Steel Structures Limit state method”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi 2016.
2. Trahair N S , Brandford M A , Nethercot D M, and Gardner L , “The Behaviour and Design of Steel Structures EC3”, Taylor and
Francis, London and Newyork, 2008.
3. Englekirk R, “Steel Structures: Controlling Behaviour through Design”, John-Wiley &Sons, Inc, 2003.
4. William.T.Segui, “Design of Steel Structures”, Cengage learning,2011.
18CS09/18CN25 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

3003
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN FOR FLEXURE: Principles - types - prestressing - materials definition of Type I, Type II and Type III
structures – requirements - behaviour of PSC elements - force transmitted by pretensioned and post tensioned systems- analysis -
service loads - methods - losses - ultimate strength-Design For Flexure And Deflection: Philosophy - limit states - concepts -
collapse and serviceability - service load - basic requirements - stress range approach - Lin's approach - Magnel's approach - cable
layouts. Deflection - importance - short and long term deflection of uncracked and cracked members. (11)
DESIGN FOR SHEAR AND TORSION: Shear and principal stresses - limit state shearing resistance of cracked and uncracked
sections - design of shear reinforcement by limit state approach. Behaviour under torsion - modes of failure - design for combined
torsion, shear and bending. Transfer of prestress: Transmission of prestressing force by bond in pretensioned members -
Transmission length - Factors affecting transmission length - check for transmission length - transverse tensile stresses - end zone
reinforcement. Anchorage zone stresses in post-tensioned members - Magnel's method - Calculation of bearing stress and bursting
tensile forces - code provisions - Reinforcement in anchorage zone. (11)
45
59th ACM 09.06.2018
COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION OF PRESTRESSED & INSITU CONCRETE: Need - types of composite construction - behaviour -
analysis for flexural stresses - shear - differential shrinkage - design for flexure and shear- Tanks And Pipes: Circular prestressing
in liquid retaining tanks - analysis for stresses - design of tank wall. PSC pipes - types - design of non cylinder pipes (11)
STATICALLY INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES: Methods of achieving continuity - assumptions in elastic analysis - pressure line -
linear transformation - concordant cables - Guyon's theorem - analysis and design of continuous beams.-Other Structures: Design
of prestressed concrete columns, sleepers, poles and tension members - Methods of achieving partial prestressing - Advantages
and disadvantages - use of non-prestressed reinforcement. (12)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rajagopalan N, "Prestressed Concrete", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Krishna Raju N, "Prestressed Concrete", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi 1995.
3. Lin T Y and Ned H Burns, "Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures", John Wiley and Sons, Newyork, 1982.
18CS52 SYMBOLIC AND NUMERICAL COMPUTATION LABORATORY

0042
This laboratory is concerned with the use of symbolic computation and numerical methods to study phenomenon governed by the
Principle of Mechanics. After 5 to 6 hours of introductory lectures to the use of available computer programs / packages, the
students are advised to follow the list of tasks.
1. Students should make a mathematical model of a physical phenomenon.

2. Understand the assumptions made.
3. Express the natural or engineering system in terms of partial or total differential equations.
4. Mathematical equations are converted to a form suitable for digital computation. Convert partial or total differential equations to
algebraic equations.
5. Computer programs are made to solve discretized equation by direct or iterative methods.
6. The mathematical model, numerical procedures and the computer code are verified with experimental results or simple methods
for which exact analytical solution is available.
Problems:
Preliminaries – Symbolic data structures – Multi precision arithmetic – Polynomial algorithm – Solving system of equations –
Mathematical function – Differentiation and Integration – Power series – Two or three dimensions Graphics – Differential equations
– Curve fitting – minimization – Linear programming.
Examples:
1. Free and forced vibration of damped and undamped systems.
2. Numerical methods -Newmarks – Wilson Theta methods.
3. Extracting frequencies and mode shapes.
4. Vibration of beams and strings.
5. Finite Element method.
6. Response spectrum.
7. Problems of base excitation.
Total P: 60
18CS61/18CN61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
The students will make atleast two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be
assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester
covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will
be held at the end of the semester.
Total P: 30
III SEMESTER
18CS53 COMPUTER AIDED STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
ANALYSIS - DISCRETISATION: Matrix methods of Structural Analysis - programs for semi automatic techniques for flexibility and
stiffness approaches -- Direct Stiffness approach by MATLAB and EXCEL.
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS – Modelling – loads and load combinations – calculation of deflections – stress resultants.
STRUCTURAL DESIGN: Design of RC and Steel members – concepts – design principles as per IS codes
GENERAL PURPOSE PACKAGES: Analysis & Design of Steel, RC & Pre-stressed Structures using commercially available
software packages.
Introduction to neural network & genetic algorithm application to structural engineering problems – concepts and case studies from
literature.
Total P: 60
46
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18CS71 PROJECT WORK – PHASE I

0063
* Identification of thrust areas
* Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem
* Finalisation of system requirements and specification
* Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey
* Future trends in providing alternate solutions
* Consolidated report preparation of the above
IV SEMESTER
18CS72 PROJECT WORK – PHASE II
0 0 28 14
The Project work involves the following:
* Preparing a project – brief proposal including

Problem Identification
Methodology specifying the process/specifications/parameters
List of alternate methodology if available
Justification for the methodology adopted
Time line of activities
* Carrying out experimental/theoretical work as per the specified time line of activities.
* A presentation including all the above along with final results and conclusions.
* Consolidated report preparation.
18CS21/18CN22 BRIDGE ENGINEERING

3003
HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF BRIDGE AND SUBSTRUCTURE: Definition and components of a bridge – layout and planning of a
bridge – classification – investigation of a bridge – preliminary data collection – choice and type of a bridge – hydraulic design of a
bridge. Piers and abutments – bridge bearings – steel rocker and roller bearings – reinforced concrete rocker and roller bearings –
elastomeric bearings. (10)
REINFORCE CONCRETE BRIDGES: Traffic design – loading – highway and railway loading – specification- Straight and curved
bridge decks – decks of various types – slab hollow and voided slab – beam – slab box – reinforced concrete slab bridges – load
distribution – Pigeaud‟s theory – skew slab deck – RC tee beam and slab bridge – Balanced Cantilever bridge – rigid frame bridge –
box girder bridge. (13)
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE AND STEEL BRIDGES: Pre-stressed concrete bridge – Composite beam bridge– Analysis and
Design for static, moving and dynamic loading. Plate girder bridge – box Girder Bridge – truss bridge – influence lines for forces in
member– Analysis for static, moving and dynamic loading. (13)
CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE: Construction methods – short span – long span – false work for concrete bridges –
construction management – inspection and maintenance – lessons from bridge failures – rehabilitation of a bridge – load testing of
bridge (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Johnson Victor D, “Essentials of Bridge Engineering”, Oxford & IBH publishing co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.
2. Krishna Raju N, “Design of Bridges”, Oxford Publishing co Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.
3. Raina V K “Concrete Bridge Practice”, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing co, New Delhi, 1991.
4. Bakht B and Jaeger L G, “Bridge Deck Analysis Simplified”, McGraw-Hill, International Students‟ edition, Singapore, 1987.
5. Ponnuswamy S, “Bridge Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Pub co., New Delhi, 1986.
6. Taylor F W, Thomson S E and Smulski E, “Reinforced Concrete Bridges”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1955.
18CS22 FINITE ELEMENT METHOD

3003
INTRODUCTION: Concepts - Two dimensional truss element – algorithm to generate stiffness matrix – Assembly & Boundary
conditions - NUMERICAL METHODS – Gaussian elimination method – band and skyline form of storage – band solver –
interpolation – Lagrangian and Hermitian – Numerical integration using Gaussian quadrature. - ENERGY PRINCIPLES AND
METHOD OF WEIGHTED RESIDUAL: Variational principles - Rayleigh Ritz method - Method of collocation - Subdomain method -
Galerkin`s method - Method of least squares - CONVERGENCE & COMPATIBILITY REQUIREMENTS: Properties of single
element - assumed displacement field - various element shapes - Pascal triangle - Melosh criteria. (12)
TRIANGULAR, RECTANGULAR AND ISO PARAMETRIC ELEMENTS: Constant strain triangle - Element stiffness matrix -Various
methods of evaluating element stiffness - Higher order triangular elements - comparison of different methods - rectangular element -
serendipity family - Lagrangian family - Hermitian family - ISO PARAMETRIC ELEMENTS- sub- iso – super parametric elements –
47
59th ACM 09.06.2018
shape functions mapping – linear Iso-parametric quadrilateral. – Simple problems (11)
THREE DIMENSIONAL ELEMENTS & PLATE SHELL ELEMENTS: Tetrahedron element family - Hexahedron element family-
ZIB8 and ZIB 20 elements – comparison. Axi symmetric stress analysis - PLATE/SHELL ELEMENTS: Triangular and rectangular
elements - BFS element – Concepts of Shell elements - Degenerated shell elements – Introduction to Finite Strip Method (11)
NONLINEAR ANALYSIS: Types of non-linearities - solution techniques - stability analysis - Load deformation response considering
geometric, material and both non-linearities – Newton Raphson and Riks Wempner methods - eigen value analysis.- APPLICATION
TO FIELD PROBLEMS: Finite Element Modelling - Field problems such as seepage - torsion etc - programming organization of
finite element schemes - mesh generation aspects, adaptive mesh refinement- software packages - Introduction to meshless
methods – principles-applications. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rao S S, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Elsevier, 2005.
2. Bhatti M A, “Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Applications (with mathematica and MATLAB Computations)”, John
Wiley & Sons, 2005.
3. Cook R D, Malkus D S, Plesha M E and Witt R J, “Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, John Wiley & Sons,
2004 .
4. Rajasekaran S, "Finite Element Analysis in Engineering Design", S Chand & Co., 2003.
5. Zienkiewicz O C and Taylor, R L, “The Finite Element Method”, Butterworth and Heimann, Vol.1 The basis, Vol.2 Solid
mechanics and Vol.3 fluid dynamics , 2000.
6. Krishnamoorthy C S, “The Finite Element Analysis – Theory and Programming”, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 1987.
18CS23 ASEISMIC DESIGN OF STRUCTURES

3003
BASIC CONCEPTS AND ANALYSIS: Elements of Engineering Seismology - Indian Seismology - earthquake history - catastrophes
- failures - lessons learnt in past earthquakes - time history and response spectrum method - modal analysis - earth quake response
to linear systems - response spectrum characteristics - ground motion parameters - construction of design spectrum - lumped mass
system - shear building - symmetrical and unsymmetrical buildings - multiple support excitation - introduction to deterministic earth
quake response to continuous systems on rigid base. (12)
STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA: Principles and design criteria for structures as per IS 1893 - modal response contribution -
modal participation factor - response history - spectral analysis - problems - design and construction of buildings as per IS 4326 -
general principles - special construction features - types of construction - building categories - construction of masonry walls -
precast floors and roofs - guidelines for earthquake resistant of low strength masonry buildings as per IS13828 - behaviour and
design of masonry structures - behavior of masonry infills in RC frame - guidelines for improving earthquake resistance of earthen
buildings as per IS 13827 - guidelines for repair and seismic strengthening of buildings as per IS 13935. (13)
BEHAVIOUR OF RC STRUCTURES: Capacity design - design and detailing as per IS 13920 - behavior of RC structures - cyclic
load - shear wall frame system - Khan and Saboronis method - Coupled shear wall system - Rosman‟s method - ductility
requirements in concrete structures - beam column junction - push over analysis. (10)
BEHAVIOUR OF STEEL STRUCTURES: Behaviour of steel under cyclic load - behavior of flexural members under cyclic loading -
steel bracing systems - behavior and design aspects - ductile design of frame members - frame members subjected to axial
compression and bending - beam column joints - detailing of steel connections - retrofitting and strengthening of steel frames -
analysis for lateral loads - base isolation techniques. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Anil K Chopra, "Dynamics of Structures - Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering", Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Duggal S K, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Agarwal P and Shrikande M, “Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures”, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
4. Englekrik R, “Seismic Design of RC and Precast Concrete Buildings”, John Wiley and Sons, 2003.
5. Chen W F and Scawthorn, “Earthquake Engineering Hand Book”, CRC press, 2003.
6. Naeim F, "The Seismic Design Hand Book", Kluwer Academic Publishers, London, 2001.
18CS24 BEHAVIOUR AND DESIGN OF TALL BUILDINGS

3003
LOADING AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS: History-Design Philosophy - Strength and Stability - Stiffness and Drift - Creep,
Shrinkage and Temperature-Fire-Settlement. Loading – Gravity loading, wind loading, Earthquake loading and combinations of
loading. Structural Forms - Floor Systems – RCC and Steel.Modelling for Approximate and Accurate Analysis – Reduction
Techniques. (10)
BEHAVIOUR OF FRAMED SYSTEMS: Braced Frame-Behaviour of Bracing and Braced bents - Member Force Analysis – Drift
Analysis. Rigid Frame – Behaviour- Approximate Analysis for Gravity and Lateral Loading. Drift Analysis – Flat Plate Structures-
Reduction Techniques. In-filled Frame – Behaviour - Forces – Design of infill, Frame and Horizontal Deflection. (12)
BEHAVIOUR OF SHEAR WALL SYSTEMS: Shear Wall-Behaviour - Proportionate and Non proportionate - Twisting and Non
Twisting - Effects of Discontinuity - Stress Analysis Coupled Shear Wall - Behaviour-Continuous Medium Method – Frame Analogy
MethodWall-Frame – Behaviour - Approximate analysis-Solution for UDL and Alternative Loading- Analysis using Graphs . (12)
OUTRIGGER STRUCTURES AND STABILITY OF TALL BUILDINGS: Outrigger Braced – Analysis of Forces and Horizontal
Deflections – Generalized Solutions – Optimum Locations – Performance Stability – overall buckling analysis of Frames, Wall
frames. Second - Order Effects – P-Delta Analysis – Translational - Torsional instability - Out of Plumb Effect Concepts and
48
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Behaviour of Core and Tubular Structures. Behaviour of Connections - Rigid and Semi rigid-Beam and Beam - Column Connections
- Connections for ductility (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Smith B.S. and Coull A., “Tall Building Structures Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 2011.
2. Bangash M.Y.H., “Prototype Building Structures – Analysis and Design”, Thomas Telford, 1999.
3. Beedle L.S., “Advances in Tall Buildings CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi, 1996.
4. Taranath B.S., “Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings”, McGraw Hill co, 1988.
5. Fintel M., “Hand Book of Concrete Engineering”, Van Nostrand Reinhold co 1985.
18CS25 STRUCTURAL STABILITY

3003
CONCEPTS OF STABILITY AND COMPRESSION MEMBERS: Introduction – Stability Criteria – Equilibrium, Energy and dynamic
approaches - South well Plot – Stability of link models. Higher order Differential equations – Analysis for Various boundary
conditions – Behaviour of imperfect column – Initially bent column – Eccentrically loaded column - Energy method - Rayleigh Ritz,
Galerkin methods – Numerical techniques – Newmark‟s method – Finite Element Method. (13)
INELASTIC BUCKLING AND BUCKLING OF THIN-WALLED OPEN & CLOSED SECTIONS: Introduction – Double modulus
theory (reduced modulus) – Tangent modulus theory – Shanley‟s theory – Determination of double modulus for various sections.
Torsional buckling – Torsional flexural buckling – Equilibrium and Energy approaches. (10)
LATERAL STABILITY OF BEAMS AND BEAM-COLUMNS: Differential equations for lateral buckling – Lateral buckling of beams
in pure bending – Lateral buckling of cantilever and simply supported ‘I’ beams. Beam-columns with concentrated lateral loads –
Distributed loads – Effect of axial loads on bending stiffness – Stability of frames – Stability functions – PΔ effect. (11)
STABILITY OF PLATES AND ELEMENTS OF NON LINEAR THEORY OF BUCKLING: Governing Differential equation –
Equilibrium, Energy concepts – Buckling of plates of various end conditions – Finite Difference Method – Post-buckling strength –
Finite Element Method. Perfect Systems – Imperfect Systems – Imperfection in-sensitive and sensitive systems – Symmetric and
Asymmetric Bifurcation – Non-linear analysis of shell and spatial structures – Basic concepts. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Timoshenko, S.P. and GereJ.M., “Theory of Elastic Stability”, 2nd Ed. McGraw-Hill, 2010.
2. Alfutov N. A., “Stability of Elastic structures”, Springerverlay, 2000.
3. El Naschie M. S., “Stress, Stability and Chaos in Structural Engineering: An Energy Approach”, McGraw Hill International
Editions, 1992.
4. Iyengar N.G.R., “Structural Stability of Columns and Plates”, Affiliated East West press Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1988.
5. Chajes A., “Principles of Structural Stability Theory”, Prentice Hall, 1974.
18CS26/18CN27 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

3003
CONCEPTS OF OPTIMIZATION AND LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Introduction – Engineering applications of optimization –
statement of an optimization problem - classification of optimization problems. Standard form of a Linear Programming Problem –
plastic design of frames – Graphical method – Simplex method – Basic solution – computation – maximization and minimization.
Duality in Linear Programming – General Primal – Dual relations – Dual simplex method – Transportation problem – Assignment
method. (13)
NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING: One dimensional minimization methods – Dichotomous search, Fibonacci method and Golden
section method. Unconstrained optimization techniques – Classification – Direct search, Pattern search, Cauchy‟s steepest Descent
method, Conjugate Gradient method and Davidon Fletcher Powell method – Constrained function of a single variable – several
variables. (13)
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Bellman‟s principle of optimality - Multistage decision processes – representation and types – concept
of sub optimization problems using classical and Tabular methods – conversion of a final value problem into an initial value problem
– Linear Programming as a case of dynamic Programming. (10)
GENETIC ALGORITHM, EVOLUTION STRATEGIES AND ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION: Introduction – Representation of
design variables, objective function and constraints – Choice of population – Genetic operators – survival of the fittest – generation –
generation history – application to trusses. Probability – finding the shortest path – pheromone trail – travelling salesman problem –
Application to structural engineering problems. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rajasekaran S. and Vijayalakshmi Pai G. A., "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms", Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2013.
2. K. Deb, “Multi – objective Optimization using evolutionary algorithms”, John Wiley and Sons, 2009.
3. Goldberg D.E., “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning”, Pearson Education, 2008.
4. Iyengar.N.G.R and Gupta.S.K, “Structural Design Optimization”, Affiliated East West Press Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
5. Rao S.S. “Optimization Theory and Applications”, Wiley Eastern, 1995.
6. Fox R.L. “Optimization Methods for Engineering Design”, Addison Wesley, Rading, Mass, 1971.
49
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18CS27/18CN28 MAINTENANCE AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES
3003
DIAGONOSIS AND CONDITIONAL ASSESSMENT OF EXISTING STRUCTURES: Types of maintenance – Routine maintenance
works in buildings – Inspection – Structural appraisal. Crack – principal sources for crack formation- Durability aspects. Conditional
survey – visual inspection – field and laboratory testing stage – concrete strength assessment (11)
SELECTION OF REPAIR MATERIALS & DEMOLITION TECHNIQUES: Construction chemicals – repair chemicals – epoxies –
polymers and latex – acrylic polymers – polyester resins - corrosion inhibitors as admixture – bonding coats for reinforcement –
shrinkage compensating compounds - water proofing compounds. Special materials for construction and repair of buildings and
special methods of placing concrete – Demolition Technique (11)
REPAIR OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS & NON STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS: Repair against rising dampness and efflorescence in
masonry wall, repair of cracks in masonry wall and concrete member. Repair against rainwater leakage in building, renovation of
water proofing works of RC flat roofs against rain, repair of valley gutters of sloping roof, leakage of bathing area of toilets, sunken
floors of toilets in multistoreyed building. (11)
STRENGTHENING OF EXISTING STRUCTURES: Strengthening of superstructure - Conversion to composite construction – Post

stressing – Jacketing – Bonded overlays – Addition of reinforcement – Strengthening of substructure – Underpinning – Structural
Health Monitoring (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Poonam I. Modi & Chirag N Patel,” Repair and Rehabilitation of Concrete Structures”, PHI, Delhi 2016.
2. Varghese P.C, “Maintenance, Repair and Rehabilitation& Minor works of Buildings”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, 2014.
3. Malhotra V.M., “Handbook on Non- Destructive testing of Concrete”, CRC Press, 2014.
4. Guha P.K., “Maintenance and Repairs of Buildings”, New Central Book Agency (P) Ltd., Kolkata, 1998.
5. Allen R.T.L and Edwards S.C., “The repair of Concrete Structures”, Thompson Press (India) Ltd., Delhi.
18CS28 SHELL AND SPATIAL STRUCTURES

3003
THEORY OF SHELLS AND SPATIAL STRUCTURES: Definition - Historical development - Types - Materials - practical difficulties -
construction - support conditions - cladding - aesthetics - Structural behaviour of thin shells - General specification of shells -
Analysis of shells - Membrane theory of shells - Edge disturbances - classification of shells - methods of generating the surface of
different shells like conoid, hyperbolic and elliptic paraboloid - formex data generation of space structure. (11)
DESIGN OF CYLINDRICAL AND HYPERBOLIC PARABOLOID SHELLS: Surface definition - Design of cylindrical shells with
edge beam using theory for long shells - Design of cylindrical shell with ASCE manual coefficients - Detailing of reinforcement in
shells and edge beams. Geometry of hypar shell - Analysis of membrane forces and moments - Determination of forces in the edge
members - types of hyperbolic paraboloid roofs - Design of hypar shell roof of the inverted and tilted inverted umbrella types. (12)
SINGLE AND MULTI-LAYER GRIDS AND DOMES: Advantages - cladding - water drainage - progressive collapse and composite
space trusses - Network domes - geodesic domes - double dome - ice dome - erection - connectors - ORS: Classification - ball joint
systems - socket joint - plate joint - slot joint - shell joint - modular system - composite system - prefabricated systems. (12)
STRESSED SKIN - CABLE SUSPENDED STRUCTURES: Stressed skin steel buildings - stressed skin grids - cable suspended
roofs - design of cable roofs - erection of cable roofs - Finite element analysis of skeletal structures - approximate methods - optimal
design of space structures - Failure of shell and space structures - case histories. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ramaswamy G.S, "Design and Construction of Concrete Shell roofs", CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Ramaswamy G. S., Eekhout M. and Suresh G. R., “Analysis, Design and Constructions of Space Structures”, Thomas Telford,
2002.
3. Subramanian N., “Principles of Space Structures”, Wheeler Publishing, 1998.
4. Bairagi N. K., “Shell Analysis”, Kanna Publishers, 1990.
5. Chatterjee B.K., "Theory and Design of Concrete Shells", Chapman and Hall Ltd., London, 1990.
6. Billington D.F., "Thin Shell Concrete Structures", Mc Graw Hill Book Company, 1982.
18CS29/18CN30 EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES AND INSTRUMENTATION

3003
FORCES AND STRAIN MEASUREMENT: Measurement system: purpose system and elements - characteristics of measurement
system - accuracy, precision, repeatability, Errors in measurements - Strain gauge, principle, types, performance and uses. Photo
elasticity - principle and applications - Hydraulic jacks and pressure gauges - Electronic load cells - Proving Rings - Calibration of
Testing Machines - Long term monitoring-vibrating wire sensors - fiber optic sensors - Introduction to structural modeling. (12)
MEASUREMENT OF VIBRATION AND WIND FLOW: Characteristics of Structural Vibrations - Linear Variable Differential
Transformer (LVDT) - Transducers for velocity and acceleration measurements. Vibration meter - Seismographs - Vibration
Analyzer - Display and recording of signals - Cathode Ray Oscilloscope – wind tunnels-flow meter-venturimeter - Digital Data
Acquisition Systems. (10)
DISTRESS MEASUREMENTS AND ITS CONTROL: Diagnosis of distress in structures - crack observation and measurements –
corrosion of reinforcement in concrete-Half cell, construction and use-damage assessment - controlled blasting for demolition-
techniques for residual stress measurements - structural health monitoring. (11)
50
59th ACM 09.06.2018
NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING METHODS: Load testing on structures, buildings, bridges and towers-Rebound Hammer - acoustic
emission - ultrasonic testing principles and application - Holography - use of laser for structural testing - Brittle coating - Advance
NDT methods - ultrasonic pulse echo, impact echo, impulse radar techniques, advanced rebar corrosion rate determination system,
ground penetrating radar (GPR) - Applications of NDT for quality assessment and damage detection of structures and materials,
probability application in NDT, statistical quality control. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sadhu Singh, "Experimental Stress Analysis", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Ganesan T P, “Model analysis of Structures”, University Press 2000.
3. Dalley J W and Riley W F, "Experimental Stress Analysis", McGraw Hill Book Company, N.Y.1998.
4. Srinath et.al L.S, "Experimental Stress Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi, 1998.
5. Sirohi R S, Radhakrishna H C, "Mechanical Measurements", New Age International (P) Ltd., 1997.
6. Bray D E and Stanley R K, "Non-destructive Evaluation", McGraw Hill Publishing Company, N.Y.1989.
18CS30 SOIL STRUCTURE INTERACTION

3003
SOIL-FOUNDATION INTERACTION: Introduction to soil-foundation interaction problems – Soil behaviour, Foundation behaviour,
Interface behaviour, Scope of soil foundation interaction analysis, Soil response models, Winkler, Elastic continuum, two parameter
models, Elastic plastic behaviour, Time dependent behaviour . (10)
BEAM ON ELASTIC FOUNDATION-SOIL MODELS: Infinite beams, two parameters, Isotropic elastic half space, Analysis of
beams of finite length, Classification of finite beams based on their stiffness. (11)
PLATE ON ELASTIC MEDIUM: Infinite plate, Winkler, Two parameters, Isotropic elastic medium, Thin and thick plates, Analysis of
finite plates, rectangular and circular plates, Numerical analysis of finite plates – Simple solutions. (11)
ELASTIC ANALYSIS OF PILE: Elastic analysis of single pile, Theoretical solutions for settlement and load distributions, Analysis of
pile group, Interaction analysis, Load distribution in groups with rigid cap. Load deflection prediction for laterally loaded piles,
Subgrade reaction and elastic analysis, Piled raft system, Solutions by influence charts. (13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. ACI 336, “Suggested Analysis and Design Procedure for Combined Footings and Mats”, American Concrete Institute, Delhi,
1988.
2. Scott R.F., “Foundation Analysis”, Prentice Hall of India, 1981.
3. Poulos H.G. and Davis, E.H. “Pile Foundation Analysis and Design”, John Wiley, 1980.
4. Selvadurai A.P.S., “Elastic Analysis of Soil Foundation Interaction”, Elsevier, 1979.
18CS31 THEORY OF PLATES

3003
ELEMENTS OF PLATE - BENDING THEORY AND BENDING OF ISOTROPIC RECTANGULAR PLATES: General behaviour of
plates - Small deflection theory of thin plates - Governing differential equation for deflection of plates - Boundary conditions –
Kirchoff‟s theory - Navier solution for an all - round simply supported rectangular plate subjected to uniformly distributed load,
sinusoidal load and Patch load - Levy's solution for a rectangular plate with different boundary conditions and subjected to uniformly
distributed load. (13)
BENDING OF CIRCULAR PLATES: Symmetrical bending of circular plates - Simply supported solid circular plate subjected to an
uniformly distributed load, an end moment and partially distributed load. (11)
NUMERICAL METHODS: Finite difference method - Isotropic Rectangular plates - Boundary conditions - All round simply
supported square plate and fixed square plate subjected to uniformly distributed load. Plates of various shapes - Rectangular plate -
All round clamped square plate subjected to an uniform load. (12)
ANISOTROPIC PLATES: Bending of anisotropic plates - large deflection theory of plates - Plates on elastic foundation. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Timoshenko S. and Kreiger S.W., "Theory of Plates and Shells", McGraw Hill Book Company, India, 2010.
2. Chandrashekhara, K., "Theory of Plates", Universities Press (India) Ltd., Hyderabad, 2001.
3. Ansel C. Ugural, "Stresses in Plates and Shells", second edition, McGraw Hill International Editions, 1999.
4. Szilard R., "Theory and Analysis of plates - Classical and Numerical Methods", Prentice Hall Inc., 1995.
5. Bairagi N. K., “A text book on Plate Analysis”, Kanna Publications, 1986.
51
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18CS32 INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES
3003
PLANNING AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS: Classification of Industries and Industrial Structures – planning for layout
requirements regarding lighting, ventilation and fire safety - protection against noise and vibration – guidelines from factories act –
material handling systems - structural loads. (10)
SINGLE STOREY INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES: Types of roofing – roofing sheets – purlins – light gauge sections – built-up
sections – roof trusses – pre-engineered structures. Foundations for industrial structures (13)
MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS: Design Philosophy and practices - Cranes – Types design of EOT over head travelling cranes,
zib cranes and Goaliath cranes. Design of Gantry girders for over head cranes. Conveyor systems – Supports for conveyor
systems. (10)
INDUSTRIAL STORAGE & ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL STRUCTURES: Silos, Bins and Bunkers – Design of supporting
system for storage hoppers and bunkers - Electro Static Precipitators - Wet and dry Scrubbers – Chimneys – Self supporting, Guyed
and Braced chimneys. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Shiyekar M R, “Limit State Design in Structural Steel”, PHI Learning private limited, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Subramanian N, “Design of Steel Structures”, Oxford university press, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Karuna Moy Ghosh, “Analysis and Design Practice of Steel Structures”, PHI Learning private limited, New Delhi, 2014.
4. Sai Ram K S, “Design of Steel Structures”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Alexander Newman, “Metal Building Systems – Design and Specifications”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
6. Dunham, “Planning Industrial Structures”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1980.
18CS33 MECHANICS OF COMPOSITE MATERIALS

3003
BASICS AND MACROMECHANICS OF COMPOSITES: Classification – polymer - metal – ceramic – carbon-carbon – recycling of
fiber reinforced composites – mechanics terminology – advantages Stess and strain – Hooke‟s law - Engineering Constants of
angle lamina - Hygrothermal stresses. (12)
MICROMECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF A LAMINA: Volume and mass fraction – density – evaluation of elastic moduli – semi-
empirical models – elasticity approach – ultimate strength of uni-directional lamina – coefficients of thermal expansion. (10)
MICROMECHANICAL ANALSYSIS OF LAMINATE: Introduction – laminate code – stress – strain for a laminate – in-plane and
flexural modulus of a laminate – hygrothermal effects – warpage of laminates. (12)
FAILURE, ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF LAMINA & LAMINATES: Special cases of laminates – symmetric – cross-ply, angle –ply,
antisymmetric, Balanced, Quasi-isotropic – strength failure theories – Tsai – Hill failure theory – Tsai –Wu failure theory – failure
criterion - design of a laminated composite (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kollar L.P. and Springer G.S., “Mechanics of Composite Structures”, Cambridge University Press, 2003.
2. Reddy J.N., “Mechanics of Laminated Composite Plates - Theory and Analysis”, CRC Press, USA, 2001.
3. Jones R.M., “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, McGraw Hill Koghkusha Internation Students, 1999.
4. Kaw A.K., “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, CRC Press, 1997, USA.
5. Iyengar N.G.R. and Gupta S.K., “Structural Design Optimisation”, Affiliated East – West Press Pvt. Ltd., 1997.
18CS34 SOFT COMPUTING IN STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

3003
NEURAL NETWORKS, ASSOCIATIVE MEMORY AND ADAPTIVE RESONANCE THEORY: Basic Concepts - Artificial Neural
Network (ANN) Architecture - Learning Methods - Back Propagation Network (BPN) - Single layer ANN - Multilayer ANN - Learning
Method of Effect of tuning parameters. Kosko's Discrete (Bi-directional Associative Memory) BAM - input normalization - Evolution
Equation - vector quantization - Architecture of ART1 and ART2 - Application to structural engineering problems. (13)
FUZZY LOGIC: Fuzzy sets and relations – Fuzzy sets and Crisp sets - Predicate logic - Fuzzy quantifiers - Fuzzy Rule based
systems – Fuzzification and Defuzzification methods - Application to controllers- Application to structural Engineering problems.
(11)
GENETIC ALGORITHMS: Basic concepts – Representation of design variables, objective function and constraints - Genetic
operators - reproduction - selection - cross over - mutation – Choice of population – Survival of the fittest – generation – generation
history - convergence of GA - optimal design using GA - Application to structural engineering problems. (12)
HYBRID SYSTEMS AND SUPPORT VECTOR MACHINES: Neuro - Fuzzy Hybrids - Fuzzy genetic hybrids - Neuro genetic hybrid -
Fuzzy BPN - Fuzzy Art Map - Fuzzy controlled GA. Support vector regression – Classifications. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rajasekaran S. and Vijayalakshmi Pai G. A., "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms", Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2017.
2. Goldberg D. E., "Genetic Algorithms in Search Optimization and Machine Learning", Addison Wesley, Rading Mass, USA,
2006.
3. Gunn S. R., “Support Vector Machines for Classification and Regression”, Technical Report ISIS-I-98 - University of
Southampton, 1998.
52
59th ACM 09.06.2018
4. Tsoukalas H. L. and Uhrig E. R., "Fuzzy in Neural Approaches in Engineering", John Wiley and Sons, USA, 1997.
5. Adeli H. and Hung S. L., "Machine Learning, Neural Networks, Genetic Algorithms and Fuzzy Systems, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1995.
6. Zadeh, Loffi A, "Fuzzy Sets", Information Control, Vol.8, pp.338-353, 1965.
18CS35 GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING

3003
ELEMENTS OF EARTHQUAKE SEISMOLOGY AND DYNAMIC SOIL PROPERTIES: Mechanism of earthquakes, causes of
earthquake, earthquake fault sources, elastic rebound theory, seismic wave in earthquake shaking, definition of earthquake terms,
Quantification of earthquakes – Dynamic soil properties – Representation of state of stresses by Mohr circle, Measurement of soil
properties – Field and laboratory tests (12)
LIQUEFACTION AND DYNAMIC ANALYSIS OF SOLID WASTE LANDFILLS AND LINING SYSTEMS: Liquefaction and its
related phenomena, Evaluation of liquefaction hazards, Liquefaction susceptibility – Historical, geologic, compositional and state
criteria – Initiation of liquefaction, Effects of liquefaction – Alteration of ground motion, sand boils, settlement and instability.
Performance of solid waste landfills during earthquakes, Analysis of solid waste landfills stability during earthquakes, Monitoring and
safety control of landfills, Safety and risk analyses (13)
SEISMIC SLOPE STABILITY: Types of earthquake induced landslides, Earthquake induced landslide activity, Evaluation of slope
stability. Review of static slope stability analysis, Seismic slope stability analysis – Analysis for inertial and weakening instability
(10)
SEISMIC DESIGN OF RETAINING WALLS: Review of calculation of static pressures on retaining walls, Dynamic response of
retaining walls, Seismic pressures on retaining walls – Yielding and non yielding walls, Effect of water, finite element analysis,
Seismic displacements on retaining walls, seismic design considerations. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Swamisaran, ”Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundations”, Galgotia Publications Pvt.Ltd.,NewDelhi,2012.
2. Prasad B. B., “Fundamentals of Soil Dynamics and Earthquake Engineering”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009.
3. Ansal A., “Recent Advances in Earthquake Geotechnical Engineering and Microzonation", Kluwer Academic Publishers, The
Netherlands, 2004.
4. Kramer S. L., “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering", Pearson Education (Singapore) Private Ltd. (Indian Branch), New Delhi,
2003.
5. IS 1893, Indian Standard Criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures.
18CS36 DESIGN OF STEEL CONCRETE COMPOSITE STRUCTURES

3003
CONNECTIONS: Introduction – limit states of composite sections – Design philosophies - codes of practice - shear connectors –
types of shear connectors – degree of shear connection – partial and complete shear connections – Load bearing mechanism-
strength of shear connectors - standard tests for shear connectors. (10)
COMPOSITE BEAMS: Elastic behavior of composite beams - Ultimate load behavior - Full shear connection and partial shear
connection - Types of Profile steel sheeting - Design of composite beam – simply supported and continuous beams – beam with
profile sheeted deck slab - Analysis and design of composite beams without profile sheet. (10)
COMPOSITE SLABS: Introduction of composite floors - shear transferring mechanism in profile deck system – resistance to
longitudinal shear - resistance to vertical shear - Bending resistance of composite slab - Design considerations of composite floor -
profiled sheeting – sheeting parallel to span – sheeting perpendicular to span – analysis and design of composite floor system - limit
state of serviceability. (13)
COMPOSITE COLUMNS AND COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION: Types – design of composite columns – Relative slenderness -
resistance to axial, uniaxial and biaxial loading - Transverse and longitudinal shear - in-filled and encased columns - Design
Philosophy. Case studies on steel concrete composite construction in buildings- beam column joints - classification of joints - Effects
of Temperature, shrinkage, creep and vibration on composite beams. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Qing Quan Liang,” Analysis and Design of Steel and Composite Structures”, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, 2015.
2. Johnson R.P, “Composite Structures of Steel and Concrete”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, India, 2013.
3. Sai Ram K S, “Design of Steel Structures”, Pearson Education, 2010.
4. Oehers D.J. and Bradford M.A., “Composite Steel and Concrete Structural Members, Fundamental Behaviour”, Permagon
Press, Oxford, 1999.
5. Teaching resource material for, “Structural Steel Design,” Volume 2 of 3, Institute for Steel Development and Growth (INSDAG),
2002.
6. Narayanan R, “Composite Steel Structures – Advances, Design and Construction”, Elsevier, Applied Science, UK, 1987.
18CS37/18CN32 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES

3003
DESIGN PRINCIPLES: Road to industrialization in buildings – History - Standardization and Components - Types of prefabrication
– Prefabrication systems - Disuniting of structures - IS Code Specifications - Construction principles – Manufacture of prefabricated
53
59th ACM 09.06.2018
components – Transport and Erection of structural components – Finishing and Fitting -up operations – Dimensional deviation and
Tolerance – Principles of structural design of prefabricated components (11)
ROOF, FLOOR UNITS AND WALL PANELS: Roofing slabs – Large slab type roof components – Floor units – Structural design of
roof and floor units – Manufacture of roof and floor units – Dimensional variations – General consideration on external wall
construction - Types of wall panels - Load bearing walls – Wind bracing (shear wall) – Curtain walls – Window panels – Connections
and joints for wall panels – External wall panel examples – Manufacture, transport and erection of wall panels – Structural design
and problems. (12)
INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS: Structural Systems - Single bay - Multi-bay buildings - Low rise buildings - Applications - Design and
Detailing - Crane track beams - Columns – Frames - Structural Connections - Execution of construction work – Structural design
and stability problems. (10)
SPECIAL STRUCTURES: Design and Detailing, Construction, Stability conditions and Design of plates and shells – Lattice
structures – Arches – Pipe bridges and Conveyor bridges - Concrete poles – Silos - Inelastic behavior of externally prestressed
continuous composite box-girder bridge with prefabricated slabs - Cyclic behavior of prefabricated circular composite columns with
low steel ratio - Seismic performance of prefabricated steel beam-to-column connections. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Handbook on Precast Concrete Buildings, Indian Concrete Institute, 2016.
2. PCI Design Handbook, Precast/Prestressed Institute, Eighth Edition, 2015.
3. PCI Connections Manual for Precast & Prestressed Concrete Construction, First Edition, 2008.
4. Koncz T, “Manual of Precast Concrete Construction”, Vol I, II & III, Bauverlag, GMBH, 1971.
5. Sebestyen G, “Large Panel Buildings”, Akademiai Kiado, Publishing House of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences, Budapest,
1965.
6. Mokk L, “Prefabricated Concrete for Industrial and Public Structures”, Akademial Kiado, Budapest 1964.
18CS38/18CN38 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES

3003
INTRODUCTION AND MECHANICAL MODIFICATION: Need for ground improvement - methods of ground improvement -
geotechnical problems in alluvial and black cotton soils – selection of suitable ground improvement techniques based on soil
conditions; Methods of compaction, principles of soil densification, properties of compacted soil, dynamic compaction. (12)
SOIL NAILING AND MICROPILING: Introduction – functions and applications of soil nailing – methods of construction of soil nailed
cut – components of sail nail system; Reinforcing mechanism of micropile – installation of micropile. (11)
GEOSYNTHETICS AND DEWATERING SYSYTEMS: Introduction – functions of geosynthetics – types of geosynthetics -

properties of geosynthetics and its applications; Dewatering techniques- well points – vacuum and electroosmatic methods. (11)
GROUTING TECHNIQUES AND SOIL STABILIZATION: Types of grouts, grouting equipment and machinery, injection methods,
grout monitoring – applications of grouting; Lime stabilization - Base exchange mechanism, Pozzolanic reaction, lime-soil
interaction, Design of Foundation on lime columns. Cement stabilization: Mechanism, amount, age and curing. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Satyendra Mittal, "An Introduction to Ground Improvement Techniques", Scientific International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
2. Nihar Ranjan Patra, "Ground Improvement Techniques", Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
3. Purushothama Raj P, “Ground Improvement Techniques”, University Science Press, 2009.
4. Sivakumar Babu.G.L., “Introduction to Soil Reinforcement and Geosynthetics”, Universities Press, Hyderabad,2009.
5. Manfired R.Hausmann, “Engineering principles of ground modification, McGraw-Hill Pub,Co.,1990.
18CS39 SMART MATERIALS AND SMART STRUCTURES

3003
INTRODUCTION AND MEASURING TECHNIQUES: Properties of smart materials - mechanisms – instrumented structures
functions and response sensing system – self diagnosis – signal processing consideration – actuation systems and effectors. Strain
measuring techniques using electrical strain gauges, types – resistance-capacitance – inductance - wheatstone bridges - pressure
transducers - load cells - temperature compensation – strain rosettes. (13)
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Sensing technology – types of sensors – physical measurement using piezo electric strain
measurement – inductively read transducers – LVDT – fiber techniques - fiber optic strain sensors - Actuator techniques – Actuator
and Actuator materials - piezo electric and electro resistive material – magneto structure material – shape memory alloys
electrorheological fluids (ER) – electromagnetic actuation – role of actuators and actuator materials. (12)
SIGNAL PROCESSING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS: Data Acquisition and processing – signal processing and control for smart
structures – sensors as geometrical processors – signal processing – control system – linear and non linear. (9)
INTRODUCTION TO STRUCTURAL HEALTH MONITORING (SHM): Definition and characters of SHM, SHM and bio mimetics,
SHM as a part of system management, Passive and Active SHM, NDE, SHM and NDECS – basic components of SHM –
Applications – SHM of a bridge – applications for external post tensioned cables, monitoring historical buildings. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gauenzi, P., “Smart structures”, Wiley, 2009.
54
59th ACM 09.06.2018
2. Hand Book on Seismic Retrofitting of Buildings, Published by CPWD & Indian Building Congress in Association with IIT,
Madras, Narosa Publishing House, 2008.
3. Daniel Balageas, Claus - Peter FritzenamI Alfredo Guemes, Structural Health Monitoring, Published by ISTE Ltd., U.K. 2006.
4. Brain Culshaw, “Smart Structures and Materials”, Artech House, London, 2000.
5. L.S.Srinath, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
6. Cady,W.G, “Piezoelectricity”, Dover Publication.
18CS40 STRUCTURAL HEALTH MONITORING

3003
INTRODUCTION AND VIBRATION BASED TECHNIQUES FOR SHM: Definition and characters of SHM, SHM as a way of
making materials and structures smart, SHM and Biomimetics, Process and pre-usage monitoring as a part of SHM, Passive and
active SHM, NDE, SHM and NDECS. Basic vibration concepts for SHM, Local and global methods, Damage diagnosis as an
inverse problem, Model-based damage assessment, Mathematical description of structural systems with damage, General dynamic
behavior, State-space description of mechanical systems, Modeling of damaged structural elements, Damage identification in non-
linear systems. (13)
FIBER-OPTIC SENSORS : Classification of fiber-optic sensors, Photoelasticity in a plane stress state, Structures with embedded
fiber Bragg gratings, Orientation of the optical fiber optic with respect to the reinforcement fibers, Ingress/Egress from the laminate,
Fiber Bragg gratings as damage sensors for composites, Measurement of strain and stress variations, Examples of applications in
civil engineering, (10)
SHM WITH PIEZOELECTRIC SENSORS: The use of embedded sensors as acoustic emission (AE) detectors, Experimental results
and conventional analysis of acoustic emission signals, Algorithms for damage localization, Algorithms for damage characterization,
New concepts in acoustic emission, State of the-art and main trends in piezoelectric transducer-based acousto-ultrasonic SHM
research, Acousto-ultrasonic signal and data reduction methods. (9)
SHM USING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE and LOW FREQUENCY ELECTROMAGNETIC TECHNIQUES: Composite damage,
Electrical resistance of unloaded composite, Percolation concept, Anisotropic conduction properties in continuous fiber reinforced
polymer, Influence of temperature, Composite strain and damage monitoring by electrical resistance, unidirectional and
Multidirectional laminates, Damage localization. Theoretical considerations on electromagnetic theory, Maxwell„s equations,
Applications to the NDE/NDT domain and SHM domain, General principles, Magnetic method, Electric method and Hybrid methods.
(13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Douglas E Adams, “Health Monitoring of Structural Materials and Components-Methods with Applications”, John Wiley and
Sons, 2007.
2. Victor Giurglutiu, “Structural Health Monitoring with Wafer Active Sensors”, Academic Press Inc, 2007.
3. Daniel Balageas, Claus-Peter Fritzen, Alfredo Güemes, “Structural Health Monitoring”, Wiley-ISTE, 2006.
4. J.P. Ou, H.Li and Z.D. Duan, “Structural Health Monitoring and Intelligent Infrastructure”, Vol-1, Taylor and Francis Group,
London, U.K, 2006.
AUDIT COURSES
18CS81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18CS82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

55
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME –INFRASTRUCTURE ENGINEERING – 2018 Regulations

(2018 REGULATIONS)
I SEMESTER
18CN01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CN02 Pavement Analysis Design & Evaluation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CN03 Reinforced Concrete Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CN04 Computer Analysis of Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18CN05 Advanced Concrete Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CN51 Structural Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18CN81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 22 Hrs 14 4 4 18 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18CN06 Construction Project Management 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18CN07 Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18CN08 Geographic Information Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Design of Urban Water Supply and Waste 0 0 PC
18CN09 3 3 50 50 100
Treatment Systems
18CN_ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Computer Aided Project Planning and Scheduling 0 0 50 PC
18CN52 4 2 50 100
Laboratory
18CN61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18CN82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 Hrs 18 2 8 23 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18CN53 Geographic Information System Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18CN71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18CN72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
18CN21 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN22 Bridge Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN23 Foundation Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN24 Structural Steel Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN25 Prestressed Concrete Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN26 Infrastructure Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN27 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN28 Maintenance and Rehabilitation of Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN29 Modern Materials for Construction 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN30 Experimental Techniques and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN31 Financial Management and Accounting 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN32 Prefabricated Structures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN33 City Planning and Urban Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN34 Organizational Behavior 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN35 Geosynthetics in Infrastructure Projects 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN36 Corrosion in Reinforced Concrete 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN37 Remote Sensing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18CN38 Ground Improvement Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
56
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18CN01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY

vide Structural Engineering 18CS01
18CN02 PAVEMENT ANALYSIS, DESIGN AND EVALUATION

3003
PRINCIPLES OF PAVEMENT DESIGN: Types of pavement - flexible and rigid - Components of pavement and their functions,
Provisions of IRC Guidelines for each component, Comparison between highway and airport pavements, Factors influencing
pavement stability: Vehicle and traffic factors-ESWL and Wheel Load Factor - Moisture and climate, soil-CBR, Hveem stabilometer
method, Plate Bearing method for finding modulus of subgrade reaction and North Dakota Cone method - and stress distribution
factor - Boussinesq and Burmister theories. (10)
DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT: Empirical method based on arbitrary strength - CBR method - Provisions of IRC 37 - Plate
Bearing method (US Navy method for airfields), Theoretical and semi - theoretical methods - Kansas and Texas triaxial methods,
IRC guidelines for design of flexible rural roads. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) method (Recommended by International Civil
Aviation Organization) (10)
DESIGN OF RIGID PAVEMENT: Stresses in rigid pavement due to wheel load-Older, Westergaard, Bradbury and Kelly theories -
Stresses due to change in temperature - warping stress - theory by Bradbury - Stress due to subgrade restraint, Critical combination
of stresses. Modulus of Rupture of concrete, Design of airport pavement - Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) method
(Recommended by International Civil Aviation Organization) - Design of rigid highway pavement - IRC 58 method - IRC guidelines
for design of rigid rural roads. Types of joints, Types of rigid pavement based on reinforcement, Design of reinforcement in
longitudinal and transverse direction, tie bars and dowel bars. (13)
PAVEMENT EVALUATION AND REHABILITATION: Distresses in flexible and rigid pavements - condition surveys - Types of
roughness - present serviceability index - skid resistance - structural evaluation – Benkelman deflection method – Design of
overlays both for highway and airport pavements - flexible overlay over flexible pavement, rigid overlay over rigid pavement, flexible
overlay over rigid pavements – Methods suggested by IRC, FAA and Asphalt Institute. Stabilisation with special reference to
highway pavements, Chemical and mechanical stabilisation, Use of Geosynthetics in roads. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sharma S. K., "Principles, Practice and Design of Highway Engineering", S Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2014.
2. Wright P.H and Dixon K.K., “Highway Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 2009.
3. Yoder E. J. and Witezak M. W., "Principles of Pavement Design", John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York, 2008.
4. Croney P and Croney D., “Design and Performance of Road Pavements”, HMO Stationary Office, 2008.
5. Kadiyali L.R., “Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering”, Khanna Tech. Publications, New Delhi, 2004.
18CN03 REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN

18CN04 COMPUTER ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES

18CN05 ADVANCED CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY

18CN51 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

II SEMESTER
18CN06 CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT

3204
PLANNING: Management objectives and concepts as a blend of art and science – Functions of management – Opportunities and
threats to project managers – Application of management principles and tools to construction projects – Importance of applying
management concepts in construction industry. Importance of planning in the overall project management – Periods of planning –
Pre tender, Pre contract and contract period planning – Data collection, analysis, design, Activity – time scheduling, charts for
labour, material, staff and plant requirements – BOQ and cost estimates – Master Programme Chart. (11)
PROJECT SCHEDULING: Activity break down – Bar chart scheduling – its merits and shortcomings; Inter dependencies of
activities – CPM/PERT network diagram – Forward and Backward pass – Critical period and critical path analysis – Float – Three
time aspects for PERT activities and their identification based on statistical data – Probability of achieving desired time targets for
construction projects. (11)
57
59th ACM 09.06.2018
RESOURCE AGGREGATION, LEVELING & TIME COST OPTIMIZATION: Optimal use of resources – Aggregation as per early
start time of activities and initial histogram – Leveling of resources by manipulating activity start time with respect to float availability
and late finish time of activities and final histogram. Direct cost and Indirect cost, and their influence on project duration – Normal
and Crash duration of activities and their corresponding costs – Crashing of network to optimize cost and duration of projects –
Simple Operation Research techniques to optimize assignment of tasks to groups of workmen, and transport of materials from
quarries to sites. (11)
TECHNICAL PROCEDURES & COST CONTROL: Tenders – aim, importance and tender documents; tender process – Invitation,
submission, opening, scrutiny, negotiation, acceptance and award. Contract – definition, types of contracts, their merit and suitability
– contract agreement – Principal clauses and conditions; Payment for works – Measurements, Running Bills, deductions. Aims and
scope of cost control – use of estimates, data, unit rate and standard rate as tools for cost monitoring – systems of cost control
based on accounting details of spends and periodicity of cost comparison. Mass Haul Diagram – features and characteristics –
balancing cut and fill and optimizing haul distances and quantities. (12)
Total L: 45+T:30
REFERENCES:
1. Shrivastava U. K., “Construction Planning and Management”, Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd., 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Ghattas R. G and Sandra Mckee, “Practical Project Management”, Pearson Education (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
3. Punmia B. C. and Khandelval K. K., “Project Planning and Control with PERT and CPM”, Laxmi Publications, 2002.
4. Srinath L. S., “PERT/CPM Principles and Applications”, Affiliated East West Press (P) Ltd., 2002.
18CN07 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND TRANSPORT PLANNING

3003
TRAFFIC AND TRAFFIC STREAM CHARACTERISTICS: Physical, Physiological, Psychological, environmental characteristics of
Road user ,vehicle characteristics and their relations; Fundamental parameters and relations of traffic flow: speed, density, volume,
travel time, headway, spacing, time-space diagram, time mean speed, space mean speed and their relation, relation between
speeds, flow, density, fundamental diagrams; Traffic stream models: Green shield‟s model, Greenberg‟s logarithmic model, Lighthill-
Withams theory, shock waves. (11)
TRAFFIC SURVEYS STUDIES AND QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES IN TRAFFIC ENGINEERING: Measurement at a point:
Traffic volume measurement, equipment for flow measurements, data analysis, concepts of ADT, AADT;
Measurement over a short section: Speed measurements, 15th and 85th percentile speeds, design speed, speed distributions;
Moving observer method: Concepts and derivation, illustration, Measurement along a length of road: Density measurement, travel
time measurement; Automated traffic measurement: GPS devices, loop detectors, video analysis, and other technologies.
Specialized traffic studies: Parking studies, Accident studies, Congestion studies. Quantitative techniques: Probability distributions,
significance testing and linear regression models. (11)
TRAFFIC INTERSECTION CONTROL OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT: Principles of traffic control: Requirements, basic driving
rules, priority movements, principles of traffic control, intersections conflicts; Traffic signs and road markings: Regulatory, warning,
and information signs; longitudinal, transverse, and object marking; Channelization: channelizing devices, geometrical aspects,
turning radius ;Traffic rotary: Conflict resolution in a rotary, geometric layout, design elements, capacity of rotary; Grade separated
intersection: Road over bridges, under pass, overpass, trumpet interchange, diamond interchange, fully and partial clover leaf
intersection. Elements of traffic signal, Design principles of a traffic signal, Evaluation of a traffic signal, coordinated traffic signal.
(12)
TRANSPORTATION PLANNING AND TRANSPORT ECONOMICS: Transportation system and planning process - System
approach in transport planning - Interdependence of land use and traffic - transportation survey. Conventional and four stage
modeling process - trip generation and trip distribution, model spilt, and land use transport model. Transport planning strategies,
TSM, TDM, Traffic calming, road pricing and ITS. Economic evaluation of transport plans - accident cost - traffic congestion, restrain
and road pricing, EIA. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kadiyali L. R., "Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2005.
2. Partha Chakroborty and Animesh Das, "Principle of Transportation Engineering", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Khanna K. and Justo C. E. G., “Highway Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, Roorkee, 2001.
4. Nicholas J. Garben and Lester A. Hoel, "Traffic and Highway Engineering", PWS Publication, 1999.
5. Taylor M.A.P and Young W., “Traffic Analysis - New Technology and New Solutions”, Hargreen Publishing Company, 1998.
6. Jason C.Yu, “Transportation Engineering: Introduction to Planning”, Design and Operations, Elsevier, 1992.
18CN08 GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS

3003
GIS TECHNIQUES, DATABASE AND DATA STRUCTURES: Map – Types of map - Map analysis, Digital Cartography and
Evolution of GIS, Components of GIS - Software, Hardware and organization - Types of Map Projections and Coordinate concepts-
Datums, ellipsoids, geoids, Type of data - spatial and non spatial data, Various Sources of data - Conceptualization of real world in
GIS, georeferencing, vector and raster data structure, database concepts, E-R Model, Geodatabase, Object Oriented Database
(11)
DATA INPUT, DATA OUTPUT AND ERROR ANALYSIS: Digitizer, scanner, files and data formats, Collection of Data using GPS -
Data transfer from other spatial data sources, GIS flow chart for projects, Edge matching, rubber sheeting. Types of output data,
Map Design, source of errors, types of errors, elimination, accuracies. Data quality and data standards: Concepts – Definition and
assessment of data quality, Multimedia GIS, 3D GIS, meta data, Open source GIS and OGC standards. (11)
ADVANCED ANALYSIS: Spatial Analysis, data retrieval, query, simple analysis, spatial statistics, Topology, Measuring distance,
area and connectivity, buffering and neighbourhood functions - Raster and Vector overlay method - Reclass, Recode, vector data
analysis, raster data analysis, Modeling in GIS, digital Elevation Model, DTM, Cost and path analysis, Spatial interpolation - Analysis
58
59th ACM 09.06.2018
of surfaces - Network analysis - shortest path problem, traveling salesman problem, location and allocation of resources. Artificial
Intelligence and expert system, Multicriteria analysis, Analytical Hierarchy process. (11)
GIS APPLICATIONS: GIS for water distribution network, sewer network, transportation network, telecom network, power network
and other utilities, Site selection for larger projects based on GIS analysis, Remote Sensing data integration, Navigtion and tracking
using GPS and GIS, GIS database for buildings, Emergency planning, Internet GIS. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Demers M. N., “Fundamentals of Geographical Information Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008.
2. Chang K. T., “Introduction to Geographical Information Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
3. Elangovan K., “GIS: Fundamentals, Applications and Implementation”, New India Publishing Agency, New Delhi, 2006.
4. Chrisman N. R., “Exploring Geographic Information Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2001.
5. Clarke K. C., “Getting Started with Geographic Information Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2001.
6. Burrough P. A., “Principles of GIS for Land Resources Management”, Oxford Publication, 2000.
18CN09 DESIGN OF URBAN WATER SUPPLY AND WASTE TREATMENT SYSTEMS

3003
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS: Quantity of water - population forecasting- per capita consumption - fluctuation in consumption
rate - design period. Purification of water - screening - aeration - plain sedimentation - sedimentation with coagulation - filtration -
slow sand filter, rapid sand filter, pressure filter - disinfection of water - optional treatment methods - design aspects - storage
reservoir types and design. (11)
WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SEWERAGE SYSTEMS: Classification - layout of distribution system - residual pressure - analysis
of distribution system - leakage / waste prevention - appurtenances in distribution system Water carriage system - types - quantity of
sewage - self cleansing velocity - non-scoring velocity - shapes of sewers-sewer materials-design of sewers-construction of sewers
testing-plumbing systems - sewer appurtenances - sewage pumping. (11)
WASTE WATER TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL: Sewage characteristics - BOD- COD- population equivalent - relative stability -
designing of waste water treatment units - screens - grit chamber - skimming tank - sedimentation- biological treatment methods -
trickling filters - activated sludge process - oxidation pond - rotating biological contactors - design of septic tank and final disposal
unit - disposal of sludge - disposal by dilution - oxygen sag curve - standards of dilution - self-purification process - zones of pollution
- standards of waste water for irrigation - irrigation methods - percolation test. (11)
SOLID WASTE AND AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT: Solid wastes - composition - generation and factors influencing - collection
systems - processing, component separation - volume reduction methods - size reduction - recovery of material - disposal methods,
composting, land filling, anaerobic digestion. Effect of air pollution on human health, plants, animals, properties - air quality and
emission standards - particulate removal - removal of gaseous pollutants - stack design - sampling techniques. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Santhosh Kumar Garg, "Environmental Engineering Volume - I and II", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2015.
2. Punmia B C, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun K Jain, "Environmental Engineering Volumes I and II", Laxmi Publications, Jodhpur,
2014.
3. Peavy H S, Rowe D R and Tchobanoglous G, "Environmental Engineering", McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
4. MetCalf and Eddy, Inc. "Wastewater Engineering Treatment, Disposal, Reuse", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited,
New Delhi, 2012.
5. Rao M N and Rao H V N, "Air Pollution", Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2011.
6. "Manual on Solid Waste Management", Central Public Health and Environmental Engineering Organisation, Ministry of Urban
Development, New Delhi.
18CN52 COMPUTER AIDED PROJECT PLANNING AND SCHEDULING LABORATORY

0042
OVERVIEW AND STRUCTURING PROJECTS: Optimize the project plan, Understand data structures, Create a project, Create a
Work Breakdown Structure, Add activities, View calendars, Create relationships, Schedule the project, Assign constraints, Format
schedule data, create reports
CUSTOMISING THE PROJECTS: Working with layouts, grouping, sorting, and filtering data; Customising layouts printing layouts
and reports, Publishing a project on the web
RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND RISK ASSESSMENT: Roles and Resource, Assigning Roles, Assigning Resources, Analyzing
Resources, Optimizing the Project Plan,
UPDATING AND MANAGING THE SCHEDULE: Managing the Baselines, updating, scheduling and leveling, sumarising projects
issues and thresholds, managing risks, Project Execution and Control, Reporting Performance, Apply a risk assessment to a project
schedule, resources and costs, comparing actual with schedule comparison.
Total P: 60
18CN61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR

59
59th ACM 09.06.2018
III SEMESTER
18CN53 GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM LABORATORY

0042
DATA, FILES AND DATABASE: Input of data – Scanning, Manual and automatic digitization, use of GPS for data collection, for
utilities, use of digitiser, type of data - database, Files, Methodology of GIS data creation and analysis.
DATA MANIPULATION: Sources of errors, cleaning of errors, topology building, raster cell resolution, edge matching,
georeferencing, satellite image processing
SIMPLE ANALYSIS: Reclass, Recode, Buffering, area, distance, perimeter measurement, Database initiated analysis, Simple
overlay, raster and vector data analysis
ANALYSIS IN GIS: Weighted overlay - proximity analysis - DEM, DTM, TIN, Perspective view - network analysis - GIS application
in resource management - cartographic design of maps - multicriteria evaluation. DATA OUTPUT: Multimedia - GIS Maps, images,
Texts, Graphs, Cartographic symbolism
EXERCISES:
1. Onscreen digitisation for points. lines and polygons in a map.
2. GPS data collection for utilities and integration of data from various sources
3. Cleaning up the data, error removal , topology building, georeferencing and map projection
4. Classifications of spatial data, layer and symbol concept using a GIS software.
5. Satellite image processing to produce landuse / landcover maps
6. Attribute data query on maps, simple analysis
7. Simple overlay and weighted overlay
8. Network analysis in GIS.
9. Creating DEM, TIN, slope, aspect, hill shade and perspective view maps
10. Site selection of projects using GIS.
11. Output generation and cartographic design of maps.
Total P: 60
18CN71 PROJECT WORK – PHASE I
* Identification of thrust areas

* Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem
* Finalisation of system requirements and specification
* Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey
* Future trends in providing alternate solutions
* Consolidated report preparation of the above
IV SEMESTER
18CN72 PROJECT WORK – PHASE II
The Project work involves the following:
* Preparing a project – brief proposal including

Problem Identification
Methodology specifying the process/specifications/parameters
List of alternate methodology if available
Justification for the methodology adopted
Time line of activities
* Carrying out experimental/theoretical work as per the specified time line of activities.
* A presentation including all the above along with final results and conclusions.
* Consolidated report preparation.
18CN21 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

3003
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT (EIA) OBJECTIVES AND NEED: Impact of Civil Engineering development projects on
environment – International scenario of environment protection – Environmental protection methods – Environmental Impact
Assessment (EIA) – Objectives and need - Environmental Impact statement (EIS) – EIA capability and limitations – Legal provisions
60
59th ACM 09.06.2018
on EIA – Indian legislation to protect environment - environmental clearance procedure - Guidance for Industrial licensing
(11)
EIA METHODOLOGIES - PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT: Methods of EIA – Checklists – Matrices – Networks – Cost-benefit
analysis – environmental pricing – analysis of alternatives - case studies. Assessment of Impact on land, water and air, noise,
social, cultural flora and fauna - Mathematical models - public participation. (12)
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN: Plan for mitigation of adverse impact on environment – options for mitigation of impact
on water, air and land, flora and fauna; Addressing the issues related to the Project Affected people - Rapid EIA - ISO 14000 - EIA
in India – Environmental guidance for infrastructure projects and river valley projects – Legislations and Institutional support –
International cooperation . (11)
EIA FOR INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS: Case studies on bridges – power plants – highways – dams – urban development –
water supply and drainage projects. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Anji Reddy M, “Environmental Impact Assessment: Theory and Practice”, BS Publications, Hyderabad, 2017.
2. Barthwal RR, “Environmental Impact Assessment”, New Age International P Ltd, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Charles H Eccleston, “Environmental Impact Assessment: A Guide to Best Professional Practices”, CRC Press, 2011.
4. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II”, Blackwell Scientific Publications, London 2005.
5. Peter Morris and Rikki Therivel, “Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment”, SPON Press, London, 2003.
6. Canter R.L., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi, 1996.
18CN22 BRIDGE ENGINEERING

18CN23 FOUNDATION STRUCTURES

18CN24 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN

18CN25 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

18CN26 INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT

3003
OVERVIEW OF INDIAN INFRASTRUCTURE ASSETS: Infrastructure – Definition - Infrastructure management-Importance of
infrastructure management. Urban Infrastructure, Roads, Railways, Ports, Airports, Energy - social Infrastructure - education, health
care - Infrastructure deficiencies – Smart cities – MRTS. (12)
ASSET MANAGEMENT & RURAL INFRASTRUCTURE: Design service life - Built infrastructure issues - Report card -
Infrastructure Inspection - Sustainable Infrastructure - Alternate construction materials, village ponds, village transportation,
Sanitation (11)
PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION: Tender Document – Terms and Conditions – Bidding Process – Contracts – Terminology in
Contracts – Types of Contracts – BOO, BOT, DBOT, DBOOT, BOOT, EPC & Turnkey – Project Planning – Mobilization of
resources - Work Flow Execution – Construction & Maintenance during Defect Liability Period - Arbitration. (11)
PRIVATE SECTOR PARTICIPATION & PPP: Private Sector participation in Infrastructure Development Projects – Public Private
Partnership Projects - Technology Transfer and Foreign Collaboration – Scope of Technology Transfer - Case study (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Narindar Jethi K, “Infrastructure Development In India”, New Century Publications, 2007.
2. 3i Network, “India Infrastructure Report 2007 : Rural Infrastructure”, Oxford University Press, 2007.
3. 3i Network, “India Infrastructure Report 2006 : Urban Infrastructure”, Oxford University Press, 2006.
4. Joshi P, “Law Relating to Infrastructure Projects”, Taxmann Publishers, 2001.
5. Raghuram G, “Infrastructure Development and Financing : Towards a Public Private Partnership”, Macmillan , 2001.
18CN27 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

18CN28 MAINTENANCE AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES

61
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18CN29 MODERN MATERIALS FOR CONSTRUCTION

3003
MICROSTRUCTURE AND MATERIAL BEHAVIOUR: Introduction to the physics and chemistry of materials, Focusing on chemical
bonding, crystal structure, mechanical properties, phase transformation, Energy in building materials and building, Green and
climate responsive buildings (11)
STRUCTURAL MATERIALS: Criteria for selection of structural materials: Ceramics and Glass, Metals, Polymers, Fibre reinforced
polymers, Fire proofing materials, Bituminous materials, Typical agro waste and other biomass resources. (11)
NON-STRUCTURAL MATERIALS: Criteria for selection of non construction materials: PVC, EPOXY, Thermocole, Geotextile,
Acoustics, Thermal and sound insulation materials, Green building materials, special paints for Road marking. Construction
chemicals – sealants, engineering grouts, mortars, admixtures and adhesives. (11)
SPECIAL CONCRETE: High strength and high-performance concrete - FRP - Fibre reinforced polymer composite - Lightweight
concrete - vacuum concrete - silica fume concrete – ferro cement and ferro concrete – concrete for off shore structure, Bacterial
concrete, self curing and self healing concrete: Non destructive testing methods for concrete. Scope, type and application of Smart
and Intelligent materials in buildings. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Shan Somayaji, “Civil Engineering Materials”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2001.
2. Mamlouk M.S, Zaniewski J.P., “Materials for Civil and Construction Engineers”, Prentice Hall Inc., 1999.
3. Aitkens, “High Performance Concrete”, McGraw Hill, 1999.
4. Neveille A.M and Brooks J J., “Concrete Technology”, Longman, 1999.
5. Metha P.K and Montreil P.J.M., “Concrete Microstructure Properties and Materials”, Indian Concrete Institute, 1997.
6. Edwar Nawy E G., “Concrete Construction Engineering Handbook”, CRC press, New York, 1997.
18CN30 EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES AND INSTRUMENTATION

18CN31 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT AND ACCOUNTING

3003
BASIC ACCOUNTİNG, BALANCE SHEET & MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING: Meaning of Accounting - Definition and
objectives.Need for accounting- Internal and external users of accounting information-Branches of Accounting - Accounting
Information system - Accounting Cycle – Accounting Concepts, Conventions and Principles - The Corporate Balance Sheet –
Format of Balance sheet – Balance Sheet as per company law and annexure to it– Generally Accepted Accounting Principles -
Financial Accounting vs. Management Accounting. (11)
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ANALYSIS & MARGINAL COSTING: Characteristics – limitations - Ratio Analysis (Including Dupont
Model): Interpretation - Difference between Cash flow and Fund flow - Meaning of a cash flow statement – classification of cash
flows – Preparation and Interpretation of Cash Flow Statement - Direct Cost - Overheads – Cost Sheet – Cost - volume profit
analysis – Break Even Point - Application of marginal costing techniques to Managerial Decision making. (11)
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT & TIME VALUE OF MONEY: An overview – Nature & scope - Finance functions - goals of financial
management - Financial manager‟s role - agency problems ,agency cost - Long term finance - ordinary shares, right issue of equity
shares, preference shares, debentures, term loan, asset based financing-hire purchase, leasing, venture capital financing. Short
term finance - trade credit, bank credit, bill discounting, commercial paper - Time value of money - Concept - future value - present
value – single cash flows, annuity, uneven cash flows, multi period and continuous - yield calculation, applications : bond's
valuation and yield - valuation of preference shares - valuation of ordinary shares. (11)
COST OF CAPITAL & RECEIVABLES MANAGEMENT: Concept - determining component cost of capital - weighted average cost
of capital - weighted marginal cost of capital - Capital budgeting decisions - Evaluation of capital budgeting - discounted & non
discounted cash flows methods – simple problems - Principles and concepts of working capital – operating cycle - determinants of
working capital - policies for financing current assets - Inventory management and cash management – basic concepts only. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
nd
1. Sudarsana Reddy, “Financial Management”, 2 Revised Ed., Himalaya PH, 2010
2. Pandey, I M., “Financial Management”, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 10th Ed, 2010.
3. Chandra Prasanna, “Financial Management: Theory and Practice”, Tata McGraw, New Delhi, 2010.
4. Jonathan Berk, “Financial Management”, Pearson Education, 2010.
5. Ehrhardt, Michael and Brigham, Engene F, “Corporate Finance: A Focused Approach”, Cenage Learning, Australia, 2009.
6. Bhat and Sudhindra, “Financial Management: Principles and Practice”, Excel books, ND, 2007.
18CN32 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES

18CN33 CITY PLANNING AND URBAN DESIGN

3003
CITY AND METROPOLITAN PLANNING: Evolution of cities; principle of city planning; type of cities &new towns; Indian cities and
metropolises constraints and prospects, Polarization of economic socio cultural and administrative activities: Distribution of
62
59th ACM 09.06.2018
urbanization process; National settlement polices; eco city concept; sustainable development. Metropolitan plan making processes,
metropolitan plans in India, Metropolitan planning strategies. (11)
TECHNIQUES OF PLANNING: Planning survey techniques; Conducting survey; statistical methods of data analysis; report
presentation ; application of GIS and remote sensing techniques in urban and regional planning ; decision making models. (11)
DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT: Scope and content of master plan and structure plan, integrated urban
development plans and IDSMT and urban development projects; Planning laws ; development control and zoning regulations; law
relating to land acquisition; development enforcements, urban land ceiling, scope and content of zonal development plans, detailed
town planning schemes, area development plans, action plans and subject plans. Land management techniques; planning and
municipal administration; disaster mitigation management; 73rd and 74th constitutional amendments; public participation and role of
NGO & CBO. (12)
URBAN DESIGN: Definition of urban design , scope of urban design under Indian context and its integration with urban planning;
Historical development and approach to urban design; urban form; Urban structure and design rational linter - relationship between
economic activities, public organization , communication system, urban conservation and land-use structure. Organization of space.
Review and designing of urban renewal and redevelopment projects for old and new towns. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Urban Raw M, “Urban Planning and Practice”, CBS Publisher, 2005.
2. Simon Eisner, Arthur B Gallion, “Urban Pattern City Planning and Design, CBS Publisher, 2004.
3. Peter Hall, “Urban and Regional Planning”, Taylor and Francis, 2003.
4. Sundaram K.V, “Urban and Regional Planning in India”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000.
5. Cliff Moughlin, Rafael Cuesta, “Urban Design Method and Techniques”, Butterworth, 1999.
6. Harold Maclean Lewis, Wrigley J S, “Planning the Modern City”, Vol .I and Vol. II, John-Wiley, 1998.
18CN34 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

3003
IMPORTANCE OF OB & PERSONALITY: Definition, Meaning and Importance of OB, Historic developments of OB, Hawthorne
experiment, Basic OB Model, Different approaches to OB, Contributing disciplines to OB, Scope of OB, Significance of OB - Origin
of the word Personality, Determinants of Personality, Theories of Personality (Psychoanalytic theory, Self theory, Holland‟s
personality theory, Myers Briggs Type Indicators and Big 5 personality theory), Attributes of personality. (11)
EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE & MOTIVATION: Definition and Meaning, Categories of intelligence, EI Dimensions, Physiology of
EI, OB applications of emotions – Characteristics of Motivation, Process of Motivation, Theories of Motivation (Maslow‟s need
theory, ERG theory, Hertzberg theory, Expectancy theory, Theory X & Y, McClelland‟s theory of needs, Goal setting theory, Equity
theory), Incentives for Motivation. (12)
LEADERSHIP & GROUP DYNAMICS: Definition and Meaning, Styles of leadership, Theories of leadership (Trait theory, Ohio state
theory, Managerial grid, Contingency theory, Path goal theory, Leader Member Exchange(LMX), Transactional & transformational
leadership theory, Charismatic and Visionary leadership theory) - Difference between Group and Team, Groups in Organisation,
Team Effectiveness model, Troubles with team, Social loafing. (11)
ORGANISATIONAL CULTURE & ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE: Meaning and Definition, Characteristics of Organisational
culture, Elements of Organisational culture, Organisational sub culture, Artifacts for Organisational culture, Bicultural audit,
Strategies to merge different organisational culture. - Factors of Organisational change, Lewin‟s forced field model, Human reactions
to change, Resistance to change, Strategies for reducing change, Ethical issues in Organisational change. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Fred Luthans, “Organisational Behaviour”, New York, McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. Stephen P. Robins, “Organisational Behaviour”, Pearson Education, 2011.
3. Edwin Gerlof, “Organisation Theory and Design”, McGraw Hills, 2011.
4. Danial C. Fieldman and Hugh Arnold, “Managing Individual and Group Behaviour in Organization”, McGraw Hills, 2010.
5. Robrt Kreitener and Angelo Kinieki, “Organisational Behavior”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
18CN35 GEOSYNTHETICS IN INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS

3003
GEOSYNTHETIC MATERIALS AND THEIR PROPERTIES: Basic descriptions of geosynthetics, types, functions, materials,
manufacturing processes, properties and testing, Concepts and mechanism of reinforced soil, Factors influencing behaviour and
performance. (12)
REINFORCED SOIL RETAINING WALLS AND SLOPE STABILITY: Components of reinforced soil walls, Principles of design –
Internal and external stability – Design – Slope stabilization. (11)
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL, FILTRATION AND DRAINAGE: Liners for ponds and canals, covers and liners for landfills,
material aspects and stability considerations; Applications, Geotextile filter requirements, boundary conditions, drain and filter
properties, design criteria. (11)
EMBANKMENTS IN SOFT SOILS AND PAVEMENT: Embankment in soft soils - Analysis, Influence of reinforcement extensibility,
deformation in foundation, Overall stability with respect to bearing.
Pavement applications, Role of subgrade conditions, Design – The Giroud and Noiray approach, Geotextile serviceability,
Application in pavement overlays. (11)
63
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sivakumar Babu, G.L., “Introduction to Soil Reinforcement and Geosynthetics”, Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2009.
2. Mandal J N, “Geosynthetics World‟, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.
3. Robert M Koerner, “Designing with Geosynthetics”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2005.
4. Braja M Das, “Shallow Foundations: Bearing Capacity and Settlement”, CRC Press, New York, 1999.
18CN36 CORROSION IN REINFORCED CONCRETE

3003
BASICS OF CORROSION: Theoretical Concepts of Corrosion of Steel in Concrete Structures. Mechanism of Chloride induced and
carbonation induced Corrosion - parameters influencing rebar corrosion (11)
FORMS OF CORROSION & CORROSIVE ENVIROMENTS: Galvanic Corrosion, Crevice Corrosion, Pitting Corrosion, Integranular
corrosion, Erosion and hydrogen embrittlement. Mineral Acids, Organic Acids, Atmosphere Corrosion, sewage water treatment
plants. (11)
CORROSION MEASUREMENT & EVALUATION: Weight Loss method, Half cell potential Technique – Linear Polarization
Resistance, Galvanostatic Pulse Technique – Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy, Cyclic Polarisation and Voltammetry and
Corrosion Sensors for field monitoring. (11)
CORROSION PREVENTION: Materials Selection: Metals & Alloys - Metal purification, Alteration of Environment changing mediums
- Electrochemical techniques - Cathodic & Anodic protection, Sacrificial Anode. Coatings: metallic & other Inorganic coatings -
Organic coatings - Corrosion inhibitors. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Amir Poursaee, “Corrosion of Steel in Concrete Structures”, First Edition, Elseiver, Wood Head Publishing, 2016.
2. Luca Bertolini et al, “Corrosion of Steel in Concrete, Prevention, Diagonisis, Repair”, Second Edition, Wiley Publishing, 2014.
3. Mars G. Fontana, “Corrosion Engineering”, Third Edition, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York 1988.
4. Hans Bohni, “Corrosion in Reinforced Concrete Structures”, Woodhead Publishing Limited, Cambridge England, 2005.
18CN37 REMOTE SENSING

3003
REMOTE SENSING SYSTEM: Elements of EMR - wavelength regions – energy interaction in atmosphere – scattering -
atmospheric windows – terrestrial interaction – spectral reflectance curves – Planck„s blackbody law – displacement law and
emissivity effects - heat capacity, thermal property of objects – Radar interaction with Earth surface and vegetation, Surface
scattering theory - active and passive remote sensing - platforms. Sensors used in remote sensing - types of resolutions (11)
SATELLITE DATA PRODUCT AND INTERPRETATION OF SATELLITE IMAGERIES: Thermal sensors - thermal image
interpretation, Radar principles and applications – SRTM and its application -Types of data product - software and hardware
requirement for data processing - Elements of visual image interpretation - Digital Image processing techniques, Landuse /
landcover classification. (11)
CHARACTERISTICS OF SATELLITES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS: GOES, NOAA, METEOSAT, INSAT - Land observation
satellites: LANDSAT, SPOT, IRS, IKONOS, GEOEYE, QUICKBIRD, WORLDVIEW – SEASAT, SIRA, SIRB, ERS, JERS,
RADARSAT and other currently available satellites. (12)
REMOTE SENSING APPLICATIONS: Urban land use planning – urban sprawl - cadastral mapping - site selection for various
infrastructure projects - resource management - mapping of infrastructure facilities and planning - integration of satellite imageries in
GIS (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Lillisand T, Kiefer R. W and Chipman J., “Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2015.
2. Jensen, John R., “Remote Sensing of the Environment: An Earth Resource Perspective”, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall, New Jersey,
2007.
3. Sabins F F, "Remote Sensing - Principles and Interpretation", 3rd Edition, Waveland Press Inc., 2007.
4. James B. Campbell, “Introduction to Remote Sensing”, Taylor & Francis, London, 1996.
5. “American Society of Photogrammetry, Manual of Remote Sensing”, 2nd Edition, American Society of Photogrammetry, Falls
Church, Virginia, 1983.
18CN38 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES

AUDIT COURSES
18CN81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18CN82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

64
59th ACM 09.06.2018

ME COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
(2018 REGULATIONS)
Code Course Title Lecture Credits CAT
Tutorial Practical CA FE Total
I SEMESTER
Applied Mathematics For Computer Science 2 2 0 3 PC
18ZC01 50 50 100
Engineering
18ZC02 Advanced Data Structures and Algorithms 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZC03 Database Management Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18ZC04 Advanced Computer Architecture 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZC05 Analysis and Design of Software Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Advanced Data Structures and Algorithms 50 50
18ZC51 0 0 4 2 100 PC
Laboratory
18ZC81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 22 Hrs 14 4 4 18 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18ZC06 Data Intensive Computing Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZC07 Advanced Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZC08 Advanced Computer Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZC09 Embedded Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18ZC__ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC52 Data Intensive Computing Systems Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18ZC61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18ZC82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 Hrs 18 2 8 23 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18ZC__ Professional Elective 6* 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC53 Software Development Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18ZC71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 20 Hrs 11 2 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18ZC72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
Group I
18ZC21 Cloud Computing 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC22 XML and Web Services 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC23 Semantic Web Technology 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC24 Agile Software Development 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC25 Internet of Things 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Group II
18ZC26 Compiler Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC27 Evolutionary Computing Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC28 Information Retrieval 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC29 Natural Language Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC30 Virtualization 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC31 Programming Paradigms 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC32 Cryptography and Network Security 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC33 Cellular Network Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC34 Adhoc and Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC35 Memetic Algorithm 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC36 Computer Vision 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
65
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ZC37 Cognitive Computing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC38 Theoretical Computer Science 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC39 Advanced Algorithms 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC40 Software Defined Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZC41 Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
66
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18ZC01 APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR COMPUTER SCIENCE ENGINEERING

2203
NUMBER THEORY: Divisibility: properties of divisibility, fundamental theorem of arithmetic, division algorithm, Euclidean algorithm,
extended Euclidean algorithm. Arithmetical functions - Möbius function, Euler totient function. Congruence - basic properties of
congruence, residue classes and complete residue system, linear congruences, Euler-Fermat theorem, simultaneous linear
congruences, Chinese remainder theorem. (8+7)
APPLICATIONS OF NUMBER THEORY: Pseudo random bit generators: linear congruential generator, Blum Blum-Shub generator.
Primality testing-Legendre and Jacobi symbols, the solovay -strassen algorithm, the Miller- Rabin algorithm. Classical cryptography
– the shift cipher, the substitution cipher, the affine cipher.Public key cryptography - RSA cryptosystem. (8+7)
GRAPH THEORY: Graphs - directed and undirected, subgraphs, graph models, degree of a vertex, degree sequence, hand-
shaking lemma, walk, trail, path, connectedness, distance and diameter. Common classes of graphs – regular, complete Petersen,
cycle, path, tree, bi-partite, hypercube, mesh - Isomorphic graphs. Representations of graphs – adjacency list, incidence list,
adjacency matrix, incidence matrix, Eulerian graphs – Chinese postman problem and its solution – Hamiltonian graphs – travelling
salesman problem – nearest neighbour algorithm. (8+7)
STOCHASTIC PROCESSES: Classification, Markov chain: transition probability matrices – Chapman Kolmogorov equations -
classification of states, limiting probabilities, Poisson process - continuous time Markov chains: Kolmogorov equations, limiting
probabilities, birth-death processes. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Douglas R Stinson, “Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, Chapman Hall”, New York, 2017.
2. Saeed Ghahramani, “Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Trivedi K S, “Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, New
Delhi, 2016.
4. Yellen J and Gross J, “Graph Theory and its Applications”, Chapman & Hall, New York, 2006.
5. Tom M Apostol, “Introduction to Analytic Number Theory”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1998.
18ZC02/18ZS02 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS

3003
ALGORITHM ANALYSIS: Analysis of iterative and recursive Algorithms – Asymptotic notations – Parallel Algorithms:Introduction-
Scalar Product of two vectors- Matrix multiplication. (10)
TREES: Search Trees – Balanced Search Trees: AVL, RBT, Splay-Heaps: Binary heap, leftist heap, binomial heap, Fibonacci heap,
Multi-dimensional data structure: kd tree (15)
GRAPHS: Representation – Shortest path algorithms: Unweighted shortest path, Dijikstra’s algorithm, Graphs with negative edge
costs, Acyclic graphs, All pairs shortest path – Network Flow problems – Activity Networks – DFS applications: Biconnectivity, Euler
Circuits (10)
DISJOINT SETS AND HASHING: Disjoint Sets: Representation – Union and find operations - Hashing: Static hashing – Dynamic
hashing - Overflow handling - Bloom filters - Locality sensitive hashing (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas H Cormen, Charles E Leiserson, Ronald L Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction to Algorithms”, PHI learning Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2010
2. Venkatesan R and Lovelyn Rose S, “Data Structures”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.
3. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
4. Ellis Horowitz, SartajSahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Universities Press, Hyderabad,
2012.
5. Peter Brass, “Advanced Data Structures”, Cambridge University Press, New York, 2008.
18ZC03/18ZS03 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

3204
RELATIONALDATABASE:Relational database Design - ERDiagram, Extended ER Diagram, Reduction to relational schemas,
Normalization- Functional Dependencies, Normal Forms,SQL (12+8)
QUERY OPTIMIZATION: Algorithms for Query Processing – external sorting, SELECT and JOIN operation, PROJECT and set
operation, aggregate operation and OUTER JOINs, Heuristics of Query Optimization, Cost Based Query Optimization. (11+7)
67
59th ACM 09.06.2018
TRANSACTION AND SECURITY: Properties of Transaction, Serializability, Concurrency Control – locking, timestamp, validation
based protocols, Deadlock – prevention, detection, recovery, Database security – issues, access control. (12+7)
TRENDS IN DATABASE: Introduction to NoSQL databases - Key-Value Stores – Columnar Stores – Document Stores, Graph
database - The Power of Graph Databases - Options for Storing Connected Data -Data Modeling with Graphs-Building a Graph
Database Application - Case Study - Neo4J. (11+8)
Total L: 45 +T: 30=75
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Connolly and CarlolynBegg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach toDesign, Implementation and Management”,
Pearson Education,Harlow,2015.
2. Sadalage, P. & Fowler,”NoSQL Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Emerging World of Polyglot Persistence”, Pearson
Education,USA,2013
3. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education,USA,2016.
4. Redmond, E. &Wilson, “Seven Databases in Seven Weeks: A Guide to Modern Databases and the NoSQL
Movement”,Prsgmatic Programmers, LLC,USA,2012.
5. Ian Robinson, Jim Webber, Emil Eifrem, Graph Databases, , New Opportunities for Connected Data, O'Reilly Media,USA,
2015
18ZC04 ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
3003
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF PROCESSOR AND MEMORY: Instruction Set Principles - Review of Memory Hierarchy - Pipelining
– Quantitative design and analysis of Processor - Memory Hierarchy Design (12)
INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM: Pipelining and Handling Hazards - Instruction Scheduling - Static and Dynamic Branch
Prediction - Hardware Based Speculation - Limitations of ILP. (11)
DATA LEVEL PARALLELISM: Vector Architecture - SIMD Instruction Set - GPU Architecture - Detecting and Enhancing Loop
Level Parallelism. (11)
THREAD LEVEL PARALLELISM: Symmetric and Distributed Shared Memory Architectures - Performance Issues -
Synchronization - Models of Memory Consistency case studies of multi-core - Introduction to Domain Specific Architecture. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. John L Hennessey, John M Doe and David A Patterson, “Computer Architecture A Quantitative Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann,
USA, 2017.
2. Randal E. Bryant, Davie Richard O'Hallaron, “Computer Systems: A Programmer's Perspective” , Pearson, 2016.
3. David A. Patterson, John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design MIPS Edition: The Hardware/Software Interface”,
Morgan Kaufmann,2014.
4. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, Wiley Global Education, 2012.
18ZC05/18ZS05 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF SOFTWARE SYSTEMS

3003
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING CONCEPTS: Software Characteristics –Software Myths – Software life cycle models – The Linear
Sequential Model - The Incremental Model - The RAD Model - Evolutionary Software Process Models - The Prototyping Model -
Spiral Model –Agile Methods- Requirement Engineering - Requirement Engineering Tasks. (12)
SYSTEM ANALYSIS: Requirement Analysis – Analysis Modelling Approaches – Data Flow Oriented Modelling – Context diagram,
Data flow diagrams – Elements of Analysis Model - Data Modeling – Objects and Classes – Object Identification – Relationship
among objects – classification . (11)
UML MODELING: Unified Software Development Process – Scenario Based Modeling – Class Based Modeling – Behavioral Model
– CASE tools. (11)
SYSTEM DESIGN: Design Process – Design Concepts – Modularity – Functional Independence - Modular Design – Coupling –
Cohesion – Refactoring – Design Model – Architectural Design - Component Level Design Element – Deployment Level Design –
Architectural Styles and Patterns – IEEE Standard for Software Design Descriptions. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014
2. Booch G, Maksimchuk R A, Engel M W, Young B J, Conallen J, Houston K A, “Object Oriented Analysis and Design with
Applications”, Addison-Wesley, USA, 2007.
3. Booch G, Rumbaugh J and Jacobson I, “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide”, Addison Wesley Professional,USA,
2005.
4. Ian Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011.
68
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ZC51/18ZS51 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS LABORATORY

0042
The students will design, analyse and implement suitable data structures like Arrays, linked lists, stacks, queues,Search
Trees,Heaps,kd Tree, Graph Algorithms, Sets,Hashing for real world problems.
Total P: 60
SEMESTER II
18ZC06/18ZS06 DATA INTENSIVE COMPUTING SYSTEMS

3003
.
INFRASTRUCTURE: Cloud, Data intensive systems and Industry 4.0 – Cloud Architecture – Virtualisation – Data Virtualisation –
Storage Virtualisation – Network Virtualisation: SAS,SAN – File Systems – Big Data Characteristics – Use cases – Data Analytics
Life cycle – Case study. (12)
STORAGE PLATFORMS: NoSQL – Key-value store - Hadoop Architecture – Map Reduce programming – Examples - Spark;
Column-oriented stores – HBase architecture, Hive; Document stores – MongoDB architecture – examples ; Graph stores – Neo4j
architecture – examples; Realtime Processing – Storm (11)
THEORY AND METHODS-I: Preprocessing – Statistical measures – Hypothesis testing – ANOVA - feature selection – PCA
Regression – linear, logistic – LDA – Association Rule Mining – Text Analysis (11)
THEORY AND METHODS-II: Clustering – partitioning and hierarchical approaches – Classification – KNN, Decision trees, Naive
Bayes, SVM– Time Series Analysis – ACF, AR, MA, ARMA, ARIMA – Stream Analysis (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. EMC Education Services, “Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing, Visualizing and Presenting Data Big
data science & analytics : a hands-on approach”, Wiley, 2015.
2. Jared Dean, “Big Data, Data Mining, and Machine Learning: Value Creation for Business Leaders and Practitioners”, Wiley,
USA, 2014.
3. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie and Robert Tibshirani, “An Introduction to Statistical Learning with Applications in
R”, Springer, USA, 2013.
4. Nathan Marz and James Warren, “Big Data - Principles and Best Practices of Scalable Realtime Data Systems”, MEAP Began,
USA, 2012.
5. Venkata Josyula, Malcolm Orr & Greg Page, “Cloud Computing: Automating the Virtualized Data Center”, CISCO Press, USA,
2011.
18ZC07/18ZS33 ADVANCED OPERATING SYSTEMS

3003
PROCESS SCHEDULING & PROCESS SYNCHRONIZATION: Overview, Process scheduling, Operations on process, Inter
process communication, Process scheduling criteria, process scheduling algorithms. Process Synchronization: Background,
Hardware Support to Process Synchronization, Semaphores, Monitors - Memory Management Techniques. Case study: process
scheduling in Linux. (12)
DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS: Issues in Distributed Operating System – Architecture – Communication Primitives –
Lamport’s Logical clocks – Causal Ordering of Messages – Distributed Mutual Exclusion Algorithms – Centralized and Distributed
Deadlock Detection Algorithms – Agreement Protocols - Case Study: Remote Procedure call in Distributed Computing Environment.
(11)
DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: Distributed File Systems – Design Issues - Distributed Shared Memory – Algorithms
for Implementing Distributed Shared memory–Issues in Load Distributing – Scheduling Algorithms – Synchronous and
Asynchronous Check Pointing and Recovery – Fault Tolerance – Two-Phase Commit Protocol – Non blocking Commit Protocol –
Security and Protection. (11)
REAL TIME AND MOBILE OPERATING SYSTEMS: Basic Model of Real Time Systems – Characteristics - Applications of Real
Time Systems – Real Time Task Scheduling - Handling Resource Sharing - Mobile Operating Systems –Micro Kernel Design -
Client Server Resource Access – Processes and Threads - Memory Management - File system – case study - iOS and Android:
Architecture and SDK Framework - Media Layer - Services Layer - Core OS Layer - File System. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mukesh Singhal, Niranjan Shivaratri, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems”, McGrawHill,2011
2. William Stallings, “Operating Systems – Operating System: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, 2014.
3. Nancy A Lynch, “Distributed Algorithms”, Morgan Kaufmann Series, Elsevier, 1996.
69
59th ACM 09.06.2018
4. Hagit Attiya, Jennifer Welch, “Distributed Computing: Fundamentals, Simulations and Advanced Topics”, McGraw-Hill, 2004.
5. Rajib Mall, “Real-Time Systems: Theory and Practice”, Pearson, 2006.
18ZC08/18ZS34 ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS

3003
INTERNET ROUTING, QOS ANALYSIS AND MULTICASTING: Internet Architecture - IP service Model – Routing Domains and
Autonomous Systems – Intra Domain Routing Algorithms - Inter Domain-Routing: BGP - BGP Traffic Engineering. Routing
Convergence.Need for QoS - End to End QoS - QoS Levels - Performance Measures: Bandwidth - Delay and Jitter - Packet Loss -
Throughput. Routing Overheads .Multicast: Address Assignments - Multicast Routing – DVMRP- Protocol Independent Multicasting.
(12)
TCP PERFORMANCE MODELING: TCP Segment format - TCP Sliding Windows - Congestion Control and Queuing - TCP
Congestion Control - Analysis of TCP: Buffer Sizing - Throughput - Fairness - Random Early Detection Gateways for Congestion
Avoidance. - Congestion Control for High Bandwidth - Delay Product Networks - Variations of TCP. (11)
HIGH SPEED NETWORKS: Packet Switching Vs Cell Switching - ATM Networks: ATM Protocol Architecture - Logical Connections
- ATM Cells - Service Categories - ATM Adaptation Layer - Traffic and Congestion Control In Frame Relay and ATM Networks.
High-Speed LANS - Fast Ethernet - Gigabit Ethernet. (11)
WIRELESS NETWORKS: Wireless Networks: Cellular Networks: GSM - UMTS - 3G and 4G Networks – IEEE E 802.11 - Bluetooth
- WIMAX -.. WSN- Characteristics - Architecture – Applications- Network Virtualization and Software Defined Networking (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. James F Kurose, Keith W Ross, “Computer Networking - A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet”, Pearson Education,
India, 2012.
2. Larry L Peterson and Bruce S Davie, “Computer Networks: A systems approach”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Burlington,
USA, 2011.
3. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2010.
4. William Stallings, “High-Speed Networks and Internets: Performance and Quality of Service”, Pearson Education, India, 2002.
5. HolgerKarl , Andreas Willig, “Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley Publication, 2002.
18ZC09 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3204
BASICS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction - Fundamental Components of Embedded Systems - Challenges for Embedded
Systems - Architecture of Embedded Systems - Embedded Design Life Cycle - Selection Process - Hardware Software Partitioning
decision - Programming Embedded Systems. Memory Management: Memory Access Procedure - Memory Interfacing -- Memory
Management Methods - Interrupts - Interrupt Latency – Re-entrancy - Interrupt Priority - Programmable Interrupt Controllers -
Interrupt Service Routines (13+8)
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES: General Purpose Input Output(GPIO) interface - A/D and D/A converters - Serial
Communication Interfaces - RS232/UART - RS422/RS485 – Mod bus - CAN bus - Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Interface - SPI
Interface - USB - IrDA - Ethernet Interface – Wireless Communication - IEEE 802.11 – Bluetooth. (11+7)
REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS: Real-Time Concepts – Real-time Task Management – Real-time Task Scheduling - Clock
Driven Scheduling - Event Driven Scheduling - Resource Sharing and dependencies – Priority Inversion - Priority Inheritance
Protocol - Priority Ceiling Protocol – Task synchronization - Mutex - Semaphores - Inter Task Communication - Message Queues –
Signals - Timers - Commercial RTOS (11+7)
VALIDATION AND DEBUGGING: Host and Target Machines - Validation Types and Methods - Host Testing - Host-Based Testing
Setup – Toolchain - Cross-compilers -Target Testing - Remote Debuggers and Debug Kernels - ROM Emulator - Logical Analyzer -
Background Debug Mode – JTAG - In-Circuit Emulator
CASE STUDY: RFID Card Verification System - GPS Navigation System - Development of Protocol Converter (10+8)
Total L: 45 +T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Rajib Mall, ”Real-time systems: Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education India, 2009
2. Sriram V Iyer and Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real-time Systems Programming”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2006
3. Arnold S Berger, “Embedded Systems Design - An Introduction to Processes, Tools and Techniques”, CMP Books, USA, 2002.
4. Prasad K V K K, “Embedded/Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design and Programming - The Ultimate Reference”, Himal
Impressions, New Delhi, 2003.
5. Michael Barr, “Programming Embedded Systems in C and C++”, O'Reilly, 1999.
70
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ZC52/18ZS52 DATA INTENSIVE COMPUTING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
0042
The students will learn to use data intensive computing platforms like Hadoop, Spark, Hbase, MongoDB, Neo4j and R for
techniques like MapReduce, Machine Learning, Data Visualization, Regression, Clustering, Association Rule Mining, Classification,
Time Series Analysis etc and are then applied to solve a data intensive problem.
Total P: 60
18ZC61/18ZS61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the programme. The same will be assessed
by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester covering the
various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits.
Total P: 30
SEMESTER III
18ZC53/18ZS53 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY

0042
The student will demonstrate the ability to design research methodology that adequately addresses the following:
 Idea generation and Concept Selection
 Identification of real time problem in the field of computers.

 Comparing and contrasting different types of research methods.
 Patent search for foolproof concept selection
 Time line of activities
 Design
 Conceptualizing a research design and propose an innovative solution for the problem identified.
 Development and Testing
 Model/prototype development
 Validation and testing
Report submission and presentation

Total P: 60
18ZC71/18ZS71 PROJECT WORK I

0063
 Identification of a real world problem.
 Conduct literature survey
 Formulate a solution for the problem based on literature survey.
 Implementation of the modules
 Compare the results with existing solutions
 Write a technical report on the work done
 Publish the work in reputed national / international conferences
Total P: 90
SEMESTER IV
18ZC72/18ZS72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14
 Problem Identification.
 Define the scope and objectives of the problem
 Develop a mathematical model with realistic assumptions.
 Propose a novel and original solution for the identified problem
 Interpretation and validation of results using formal research methods
71
59th ACM 09.06.2018
 Comparison with existing solutions
 Publish the work in refereed national / international journals
Total P: 420
18ZC21 CLOUD COMPUTING

2203
INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING: The Vision of Cloud Computing - Defining a Cloud- A Cloud Computing Reference
Model –Cloud Deployment Models: Public, Private, Community, Hybrid Clouds - Cloud Delivery Models: IaaS, PaaS, SaaS
Characteristics and Benefits - Challenges Ahead - Historical Developments - Computing Platforms and Technologies. (8+7)
VIRTUALIZATION: Introduction - Hypervisors – Challenges of X86 Architecture-Main Categories of Virtualization: Full, Para -
Levels of virtualization: Hardwrare, Programming language, Application, Operating system, Storage, network, desktop, Application
Server - Benefits of Virtualization - Cost of Virtualization - Virtualization Drawbacks – Xen-KVM. (7+8)
CLOUD TECHNOLOGIES : infrastructure as a service: Amazon EC2 - Platform as Service: Google App Engine, Microsoft Azure
Amazon AWS , Aneka – Software as a service : RESTFul Web Services – SLA- Cloud Storage: MapReduce, GFS, HDFS, Hadoop
Framework-Cloud container: Docker. (7+8)
CLOUD SECURITY Infrastructure Security: Network level, Host level and Application level –Data Security- Identity and access
Management: Architecture and Practices - Security Management in the Cloud – Availability management- access Control
(8+7)
Total L: 30 + T: 30=60
REFERENCES:
1. RajkumarBuyya, Christian Vecchiola and ThamaraiSelviS, “Mastering Cloud Computing”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private
Limited,New Delhi,2013.
2. Diane Barrett and Gregory Kipper, “Virtualization and Forensics: A Digital Forensic Investigators Guide to Virtual Environment”,
Elsevier, USA,2010.
3. David S Linthicium, “Cloud computing and SOA convergence in your enterprise”, Pearson, USA,2010.
4. Tim Mather, SubraKumarasamy and ShahedLatif,“Cloud Security and Privacy: An Enterprise Perspective on Risks and
Complainace”,O'Reilly, USA,2011.
5. Dimitris N. Chorafas, “Cloud Computing Strategies”CRC Press,2010
6. Sébastien Goasguen , “Docker in the Cloud -Recipes for AWS, Azure, Google, and More”, O’Reilly Media ,2016.
18ZC22 XML AND WEB SERVICES

2203
XML TECHNOLOGY: Benefits – XML Documents - Well-Formed XML – Validation - DTD – XML Schemas - Relax NG –
Schematron (8+8)
XMLPROCESSING: Parsing XML – Updating XML – Extracting Data from XML – XPATH – Xquery – XSLT. (7+7)
WEBSERVICES AND IMPLEMENTATION: Architecture – Messaging – Service Description – Service Discovery – Service
Transport Security – SOAPProtocol – WSDL – UDDI – Web Service Clients and Service Invocation – WS -* Standards. (8+8)
REST BASED WEB SERVICES: Principles - Comparison with SOAP-XML Based Web Services – Design and Implementation of
REST Services – Resource Oriented Architecture – best practices. (7+7)
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. KalinM, “Java Web Services: Up and Running”, O'Reilly Media, USA, 2013.
2. Fawcett J, Ayers D, Liam and REQ, “Beginning XML”, Wrox, 2012.
3. Richardson L and Ruby S, “Restful Web Services”, O'Reilly, USA, 2008.
4. Hansen MD, “SOA Using Java Web Services”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007
18ZC23 SEMANTIC WEB TECHNOLOGY

2203
SEMANTIC WEB VISION: Introduction to syntactic web and semantic web-Evolution of web - Semantic Web Technologies -
Recommended Layered Architectures. Structured web documents - The XML Language: Structuring - Namespaces - Addressing
and Querying XML Documents - Processing. (8+8)
72
59th ACM 09.06.2018
RESOURCE DESCRIPTION: RDF- RDF Schema: Axiomatic Semantics for RDF and RDF Schema - Direct Inference System for
RDF and RDFS, Querying in SPARQL. (7+7)
ONTOLOGY ENGINEERING AND WEB ONTOLOGY LANGUAGE: OWL Language - Ontology Examples - OWL in OWL - Future
Extensions to OWL - Ontology engineering: Constructing Ontologies Manually - Reusing Existing Ontologies - Using Semiautomatic
Methods - On-To-Knowledge Semantic Web Architecture. (8+8)
INFERENCE RULES, TOOLS AND APPLICATIONS: Rules - Monotonic Rules: Syntax - Semantics - Representing Family
Relationships. Non monotonic Rules: Syntax - Brokered Trade as an Example - Monotonic and Non monotonic Rule Markup.
Development tools for semantic web - Jena Framework - Semantic Wikis-Semantic web service, Horizontal Information Products at
Elsevier - Data Integration at Audi - Skill Finding at Swiss Life. (7+7)
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. Ducharme B, “Learning SPARQL”, O’Reilly Media, USA, 2018.
2. John Hebeler, Matthew Fisher, Ryan Blace and Andrew Perez-Lopez “Semantic web programming”, Wiley, 2009.
3. Antoniou Gand Van Harmelen F, “Semantic Web Primer”, MIT press, USA, 2008.
4. Davies J, Studer R and Warren P, “Semantic Web Technologies: Trends and Research in Ontology-based Systems”, Wiley,
USA, 2006.
5. Daconta, MC, J Obrst L and SmitKT,“The Semantic Web: A Guide to the Future of XML, Web Services, and Knowledge
Management”, Wiley, USA, 2003.
18ZC24/18ZS22 AGILE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT

2203
AGILE PRINCIPLES AND MODELING: Introduction - Traditional, IID and Agile Methodologies – Comparison - Need - Manifesto –
Values and Practices – Agile Modeling Values, principles and practices – Agile modeling with RUP (8+8)
EXTREME PROGRAMMING: Life Cycle – User Stories – Architecture – Planning – Iteration – Testing – Release – XP Values – XP
Practices – Planning – Coding – Pair Programming Model – Refactoring – Agile Modeling and XP – case study (7+7)
SCRUM: Introduction – Practices - Applying Scrum – Need – Scrum Values - Practices- Tools in Agile Software Development –
Case Study – Applying Scrum for IoT projects, Applying Scrum for Big Data Projects (7+7)
OTHER AGILE DEVELOPMENT METHODOLOGIES: FDD – DSDM - Lean and Kanban Software development – Comparison of
agile approaches - Case Studies - Defining Data Warehousing Projects for Iterative Development – User stories – agile estimation -
Adapting Iterative Development for Data warehousing Projects. ` (8+8)
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Martin, “Agile Software Development: Principles, Patterns, and Practices”, Pearson Education Ltd., 2014.
2. Jim Highsmith, “Agile Data Warehousing Project Management”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2012.
3. Alistair Cockburn, “Agile Software Development: The Cooperative Game”, Pearson Education, USA, 2006.
4. Scott Ambler, “Agile Modeling: Effective Practices for eXtreme Programming and the Unified Process”, Wiley Computer
Publishing, 2002.
5. Ken Schwaber and Mike Beedle, “Agile Software Development with Scrum”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2001.
18ZC25/18ZS23 INTERNET OF THINGS

2203
IOT ARCHITECTURE: Introduction to IoT - M2M Architecture - Design Principles for Connected Devices - Definitions and
Functional Requirements – Sensors and Actuators IOT Architecture - IETF Architecture for IoT - OGC Architecture - Communication
Model (8+6)
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS: Protocol Standardization for IoT – Efforts – M2M and WSN Protocols – SCADA and RFID
Protocols – Unified Data Standards – Protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 – BACNET Protocol – MODBUS – Zigbee Architecture –
6LOWPAN – LoRA-COAP - MQTT (8+6)
ELECTRONIC PROTOTYPING: Prototypes and Production - Open Source versus Closed Source - Prototyping Embedded Devices
- Prototyping IoT Projects with Arduino - Prototyping IOT Projects with Raspberry PI (8+8)
CASE STUDIES AND IOT DATA ANALYTICS: Real world design constraints - Applications - Asset management, Industry 4.0,
Smart grid, Commercial building automation, Smart cities Data Analytics for IoT – Edge analytics - sensor data fusion techniques -
Cloud Storage Models & Communication APIs - Cloud for IoT - Predictive analytics (8+8)
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
73
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., UK, 2014.
2. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison and Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, 2011.
3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and OmarElloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”, Wiley & Sons
Ltd., UK, 2012.
4. David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi and OlivierHersent, “M2M Communications: A Systems Approach”, John Sons Ltd, UK, 2012
18ZC26 COMPILER DESIGN

3003
LEXICALANALYSIS: Introduction to Compilers - Analysis of the Source Program, The Phases of a Compiler, The Grouping of
Phases, Compiler Construction Tools, a Simple One-Pass Compiler, Language Design. The Role of the Lexical Analyzer - Input
Buffering, Specification of Tokens, Recognition of Tokens, Regular Expressions - Finite Automata- Deterministic Finite Automata -
Converting RE to Non Deterministic Finite Automata - Converting NFA to DFA. LEX Specification – Design of Lexical Analyzer for a
Sample language. (10)
SYNTAX ANALYSIS: The Role of the Parser - Context Free Grammars - Top Down Parsing - Bottom Up Parsing - Recursive
Descent Parser - Predictive Parser - Shift Reduce Parser - SLR Parser - LR Parser - LALR Parser - Error Handling and Recovery in
Syntax Analyzer - YACC Specification – Design of a Syntax Analyzer for a Sample Languge. (12)
SYNTAX DIRECTED DEFINITIONS AND INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION: Syntax Directed Definitions: Inherited and
Synthesized Attributes - Construction of Syntax Trees - Bottom-Up Evaluation of S-Attributed and L-Attributed Definitions -
INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION: Intermediate Languages- Declarations, Assignment Statements, Boolean Expressions,
Case Statements, Back Patching. Storage Management - Runtime Storage Management, Activation Record, Symbol Table -
Organization. (12)
CODE OPTIMIZATION AND CODE GENERATION: Principal Sources of Optimization - Basic Blocks and Flow Graphs - DAG
Representation - Optimization of Basic Blocks - Introduction to Global Data Flow Analysis - Peephole Optimization - Issues in the
Design of Code Generator - A Simple Code Generator. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Alfred V Aho, Monica S Lam, Ravi Sethi and Jeffrey D Ullman, “Compilers - Principles, Techniques and Tools”, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2008.
2. Sudha Sadasivam G, “Compiler Design”, Scitech Publications, Chennai, 2008.
3. Dhamdhere D M, “Compiler Construction Principles & Practice”, Macmillan India Ltd., New Delhi, 2001.
4. Jean Paul Tremblay and Paul G Serenson, “The Theory& Practice of Compiler Writing”, McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2001
5. Dick Grone, Henri E Bal, Ceriel J H Jacobs and Koen G Langendoen, “Modern Compiler Design” , John Wiley &Sons, New
Delhi, 2000.
18ZC27/18ZS31 EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTING TECHNIQUES

3003
HEURISTIC AND METAHEURISTIC APPROACHES: Challenges in Solving Complex Problems - Evolutionary algorithms:
Principles, Historical development, Features, Classification and Components, Advantages, Applications. Heuristic Search: Problem
representation as search - Generate and Test - Breadth First Search - Depth First Search - Hill Climbing: Principles, Local and
Global maxima, Ridges, Plateau - Steepest Ascent - Simulated annealing: Annealing schedule, Parameter Selection (12)
GENETIC ALGORITHM: Biological Background - Simple Genetic Algorithm (SGA) - Representation types - Recombination Types -
Mutation types - GA Algorithm - Schema Theorem - Variations of GA: Adaptive GA, Real Coded GA - Differential Evolution:
Principles, Mutation, Crossover, Selection (11)
SWARM INTELLIGENCE: Particle Swarm Optimization: Swarms, Operating principles, PSO Algorithm, Neighborhood Topologies -
Variations of PSO: Binary, weighted - Ant Colony Optimization: Ant foraging behavior, Theoretical Considerations, ACO Algorithm,
Variations of ACO: Elitist Ant System (EAS), MinMax Ant System (MMAS) and Rank Based Ant Colony System (RANKAS). (11)
MULTI-OBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION: Principles - Classical Methods - Challenges - Evolutionary algorithms for multi-objective
optimization - Multimodal function optimization - Non-Dominated Sorting Genetic Algorithm (NSGA): Non-elitist, elitist - Controlled
elitism in NSGA (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Eiben AE and Smith JE, “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing”, Springer, Heidelberg, 2015.
2. Rich E and Knight K, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, India, 2011.
3. Deb K, “Multi-Objective Optimization Using Evolutionary Algorithms”, Wiley-Blackwell, USA, 2008.
4. Dorigo M and Stutzle T, “Ant Colony optimization”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2005.
5. Kennedy J and Eberhart RC, “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, USA, 2001.
74
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ZC28 INFORMATION RETRIEVAL
3003
INTRODUCTION: The notion of Relevance, The IR problems, Conceptual Models of IR systems, Characteristics of text collections,
Term and Language properties for IR collections, Data and File Structures for Information Retrieval, Boolean Retrieval, Evaluation in
information retrieval (12)
INDEXING: Automatic Indexing, Indexing goals, Lexical Analysis, Stemming algorithms, Part-of-speech tagging and Parsing,
Phrase recognition, Thesaurus Construction, Indexing and storage issues, Dictionaries and Tolerant Retrieval, Index Compression
(11)
RETRIEVAL MODELS AND SCORING: Vector Space Model: Term frequency and weighting, Probabilistic information retrieval:
The Binary Independence Model, Language models for information retrieval, Computing Scores: Efficient scoring and ranking,
Search Relevance and Query Understanding (11)
TEXT CLASSIFICATION and WEB SEARCH: Issues in the classification of text documents, Naive Bayes, Support vector
machines, Web Search: Web characteristics, Advertising as the economic model, Web crawling and indexes, Link analysis,
Personalization. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David A. Grossman and Ophir Frieder,” Information Retrieval: Algorithms and Heuristics”, Dordrecht, The Netherlands:
Springer, 2014.
2. Bruce Croft W, Metzler D, and Strohman T, “Search Engines: Information Retrieval in Practice”, Addison Wesley, USA, 2013.
3. Gerald K, “Information Retrieval Architecture and Algorithms”, Springer, Heidelberg, 2013.
4. Manning C, Raghavan P, and Schutze H, “Introduction to Information Retrieval”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2012.
5. Ricardo Baeza-Yates and Berthier Ribeiro-Neto, “Modern Information Retrieval: The Concepts and Technology behind
Search”, Addison Wesley, USA, 2012.
18ZC29 NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING

3003
WORDS: Introduction - Mathematical Foundations – Linguistic Essentials - Regular Expressions, Text Normalization, Edit Distance
- Finite State Transducers - Language Modeling with N-grams - Naive Bayes Classification and Sentiment - Neural Nets and Neural
Language Models - Hidden Markov Models - Neural Sequence Modeling: RNNs and LSTMs - Part-of-Speech Tagging (12)
SYNTAX: Formal Grammars of English - Syntactic Parsing – Ambiguity – Cocke Kasami Younger (CKY) algorithm - Partial Parsing
- Statistical Parsing (11)
SEMANTICS: Vector Semantics - Semantics with Dense Vectors - Computing with Word Senses: WSD and WordNet - Lexicons for
Sentiment and Affect Extraction - The Representation of Sentence Meaning - Computational Semantics - Information Extraction -
Semantic Role Labeling and Argument Structure - Coreference Resolution and Entity Linking (11)
PRAGMATICS AND APPLICATIONS: Discourse Coherence – Sequence To Sequence Models and Machine Translation -
Summarization - Question Answering (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin, “Speech and Language Processing”, Prentice-Hall, Inc., 2017.
2. Christopher D. Manning, Hinrich Schütze, “Foundations of Statistical Natural Language Processing”, The MIT Press, 2018.
3. Nitin Indurkhya, Fred J. Damerau, “Handbook of Natural Language Processing Machine Learning & Pattern Recognition
Series, Chapman & Hall/CRC, Taylor and Francis Group, 2010.
4. Yoav Goldberg, “Neural Network Methods for Natural Language Processing”, Synthesis Lectures on Human Language
Technologies, April 2017.
5. Steven Bird, Ewan Klein, and Edward Loper, “Natural Language Processing with Python - Analyzing Text with the Natural
Language Toolkit”, O,Reilly.
18ZC30 VIRTUALIZATION
3003
ARCHITECTURE AND EMULATION: Computer architecture - Virtual Machine (VM): Basics and types – Taxonomy- Interpretation
- Different types - Interpreting Complex Instruction Set - Binary Translation - Code Discovery and Dynamic Translation - Control
Transfer Optimizations - Instruction Set Issues - Dynamic Program Behavior - Profiling - Optimization: Translation Blocks,
Framework, Code Reordering and Optimization. (12)
VM TYPES: Process VM: Issues, Emulation Types, Code Cache Management, System Environment - High Level Language (HLL)
VM: Object Oriented HLL VMs, Java Virtual Machine (JVM), Common Language Infrastructure, Implementation and Issues, High
Performance Emulation - Code Signed VM: Mapping, Code Issues and Caching, Traps, I/O. (11)
75
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SYSTEM VIRTUAL MACHINES: Key Concepts - Resource Virtualization: Processors, Memory, I/O - Performance Enhancement.
(11)
MULTIPROCESSOR VIRTUALIZATION AND CASE STUDY: Partitioning of Multiprocessor Systems - Partitioning: Physical,
Logical - Different Host and Guest Instruction Set Architectures - Security - Migration of Computing Environments - Case Study:
Virtual Box (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Portnoy M, “Virtualization Essentials”, Sybex, USA, 2012.
2. Ruest N and Ruest D, “Virtualization, A Beginner's Guide”, McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, USA, 2009.
3. Craig ID, “Virtual Machines”, Springer Verlag, Heidelberg, 2006.
4. Smith J E and Nair R, “Virtual Machines: Versatile Platforms for Systems and Processes”, Elsevier, India, 2005.
5. Wolf C and Halter EM, “Virtualization: From the Desktop to the Enterprise”, Apress, USA, 2005.
18ZC31 PROGRAMMING PARADIGMS

3003
BASICS OF PROGRAMMING: Role of Programming Languages - Programming Paradigms - Syntactic Structure - Expression
Notations - Abstract Syntax Trees - Lexical Syntax - Context Free Grammars - Grammars for Expressions. Semantic Methods:
Synthesized Attributes, Attribute Grammars, Natural Semantics, Denotational Semantics (11)
IMPERATIVE AND OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Structured Programming - Syntax-Directed Control Flow - Design
Considerations - Programming with Invariants - Data Representation - Data Types - Error Checking - Procedure Activations -
Parameter Passing - Scope and Scope Rules - Activation Records - Object Oriented Constructs - Information Hiding - Design With
Modules - Defined Types - Declarations - Inheritance - Polymorphism - Dynamic Allocation – Templates. (11)
FUNCTIONAL PROGRAMMING: Static Types and Lambda Calculus: Equality, Substitution, Pure Lambda Terms, Programming
Constructs as Lambda Terms, Typed Lambda Calculus, Polymorphic Types. Types, Values and Operations - Expression Evaluation
- Lexical Scope - Type Checking - Lists - Function Declaration by Cases - Functions as First-Class Values - ML: Implicit Types -
Data Types - Exception Handling In ML - Scheme: Structure of Lists, List Manipulation, Simplification of Expressions. (12)
LOGIC AND CONCURRENT PROGRAMMING: Computing with Relations - Prolog: Data Structures, Programming Techniques,
Control, Cuts - Concurrent Programming: Parallelism in Hardware, Streams and Implicit Synchronization, Concurrency as
Interleaving, Liveness Properties - Safe Access to Shared Data. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sebesta R W, “Concepts of Programming Languages”, Addison-Wesley, USA, 2012.
2. Harper R, “Practical Foundations for Programming Languages”, Cambridge University Press, USA, 2012.
3. Michael L. Scott, "Programming Language Pragmatics”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Inc, USA, 2009.
4. Sethi R, “Programming Languages: Concepts and Constructs”, Addison-Wesley, USA, 2002.
18ZC32 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY

3003
SECURITY CONCEPTS & SYMMETRIC CIPHERS: The OSI Security Architecture - Security Attacks, Security Services - Security
Mechanisms - A Model for Network Security - Classical Encryption Techniques: Symmetric Cipher model, substitution techniques,
Transposition techniques, Steganography. Block Ciphers and Data Encryption Standard: Block Cipher Principles, DES. (10)
PUBLIC-KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Number Theory: Prime Numbers, Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorems - Principles of Public-Key
Cryptosystems - The RSA Algorithm - Diffie - Hellman Key Exchange - Elliptic Curve Cryptography (10)
CRYPTOGRAPHIC HASH FUNCTIONS: Applications of Cryptographic Hash Functions - Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) Message
Authentication Codes - Message Authentication Requirements - Message Authentication Functions- Digital Signatures - Digital
Signature Standard (DSS). (10)
MUTUAL TRUST, NETWORK& INTERNET SECURITY: Key Management and Distribution: Symmetric Key Distribution Using
Symmetric Encryption, Asymmetric Encryption - Distribution of Public Keys - X.509 Certificates - Public Key Infrastructure –
Transport Level Security - Basic Concepts, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) - Transport-Level Security, Transport Layer Security (TLS)
- HTTPS - Secure Shell (SSH) - Introduction to quantum cryptography - Ethical hacking (15)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice”, Prentice Hall of India Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2013.
2. AtulKahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
3. Bernard Menezes, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Cengage Learning India, New Delhi, 2010.
4. Behrouz A and Forouzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
76
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ZC33 CELLULAR NETWORK ENGINEERING
3003
CELLULAR NETWORK and MAC LAYER: Introduction – Mobile IP: IP packet delivery, Agent discovery, tunneling and
encapsulation, IPV6-Network layer in the internet-Routing, Destination Sequence distance vector – Cellular Network applications -
Important Issues and the Need for Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocols - Classification of MAC Protocols - Multiple-Channel
MAC Protocols. (12)
CELLULAR TRANSPORT LAYER: TCP enhancements for wireless protocols – Traditional TCP: Congestion control, fast
retransmit/fast recovery, Implications of mobility – Classical TCP improvements: Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Time out
freezing, Selective retransmission, Transaction oriented TCP – TCP over 3G wireless networks. (11)
CELLULAR WIDE AREA NETWORK: Overview of UMTS Terrestrial Radio access network - UMTS Core network Architecture: 3G-
MSC, 3G-SGSN, 3G-GGSN, Firewall, DNS/DHCP - High speed Downlink packet access (HSDPA) - LTE network architecture and
protocol. (11)
4G NETWORKS: Introduction – 4G vision – 4G features and challenges – Applications of 4G – 4G Technologies: Multicarrier

Modulation, Smart antenna techniques, OFDM-MIMO systems, Adaptive Modulation and coding with time slot scheduler, Cognitive
Radio. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. D.P. Agrawal and Qing-Anzeng, “Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems”, CL Engineering, 2010.
2. Subir Kumar Sarkar, T.G. Basavaraju, C. Puttamadappa, “Ad Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks: Principles, Protocols and
Applications”, Auerbach Publications, 2013.
3. Jonathan Loo, Jaime Lloret Mauri, Jesús Hamilton Ortiz, “Mobile Ad Hoc Networks: Current Status and Future Trends”, CRC
Press, 2012.
4. Radhika Ranjan Roy, “Handbook of Mobile Ad Hoc Networks for Mobility Models”, Springer Science+Business Media, LLC
2011.
5. Joh R. Vacca, “Wireless Broadband Networks Handbook 3G, LMDS and Wireless Internet”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.
18ZC34 ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS

3003
AD HOC NETWORKS &MAC: Introduction – Self Organizing behavior – Issues and classification of MAC protocol - MACA -
MACAW – DBTMA. (12)
AD HOC NETWORKS: ROUTING AND TRANSPORT LAYER: Routing challenges in Ad hoc Network- Classification- Proactive,
reactive, and hybrid routing protocols -DSDV, AODV, DSR, OLSR, CBRP, FSR. Issues of TCP in Ad hoc Networks - TCP Over Ad
Hoc Networks (11)
SENSOR NETWORK: Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks - Single Node Architecture - Hardware Components - Energy
Consumption of Sensor Nodes – Single hop versus Multi hop Networks - Sensor Network Applications. Coverage problem in Sensor
Network - Types of coverage - OGDC coverage algorithm (11)
SENSOR NETWORK: MAC AND ROUTING: Classification of MAC protocols - MAC related properties - MAC performance issues -
MAC protocols for sensor networks - Issues with the adoption of ad hoc routing protocols - Data-centric routing - Position-based
routing - Data aggregation - Clustering-based routing algorithm (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. C Siva Ram Murty & BS Manoj, “Ad HOC Wireless Networks: Architectures & Protocols”, Pearson Education,2004.
2. Mohamed Illayas , “Handbook of Ad Hoc Wireless Network”, CRC Press,2002.
3. Ibrahiem M. M. El Emary, S. Ramakrishnan, “Wireless Sensor Networks: From Theory to Applications”, CRC Press, 2013.
4. Ian Akyildiz, Mehmet Can Vuran, “Wireless Sensor Networks” John Wiley & Sons USA 2010.
5. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks Technology, Protocols and Applications”, John Wiley &
Sons, Online.
18ZC35 MEMETIC ALGORITHM

3003
INTRODUCTION: Optimization - Evolutionary Algorithms: Components, Operation, variants, design and Tuning – Local Search:
Basic concepts, Neighborhoods and Local optima, Classifications, Local search in combinatorial and continuous domains (12)
MEMETIC ALGORITHM (MA) DESIGN ISSUES: Need for MA - MA template - Design issues - Balancing Global and Local search -
Time complexity of Local search - Diversity management (11)
SELF-ADAPTATIVE AND COEVOLVING MA: Self-adaption and co-evolution - framework, Self adaptation of fixed and varying
sized rules - Population size Variation - Handling Uncertainties (11)
77
59th ACM 09.06.2018
MULTI-OBJECTIVE MEMETIC ALGORITHMS (MOMA): Basic Concepts, Adaption of Memetic algorithms for multi-objective
optimization, Examples of MOMA, Implementation of MOMA - Applications (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ferrante Neri, Carlos Cotta, and Pablo Moscato, “Handbook of Memetic Algorithms”, Studies in Computational Intelligence,
Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2012.
2. Chi-Keong Goh, Yew Soon Ong , Kay Chen Tan, “Multi-Objective Memetic Algorithms”, Studies in Computational Intelligence,
Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2009.
3. William E. Hart, Dr. J. E. Smith, N. Krasnogor, “Recent Advances in Memetic Algorithms”, Studies in Fuzziness and Soft
Computing, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2005.
18ZC36 COMPUTER VISION

3003
INTRODUCTION: Motivation, Difficulty, Image analysis tasks, Image representations, Image digitization, Image properties, Color
images, Cameras (11)
DATA STRUCTURES AND TEXTURE: Levels of image data representation - Traditional image data structures - Hierarchical data
structures - Statistical texture description, Syntactic texture description methods, Hybrid texture description methods, Texture
recognition method applications (11)
OBJECT RECOGNITION AND 3D VISION: Knowledge representation, Statistical pattern recognition, Neural nets, Syntactic pattern
recognition, Recognition as graph matching, Optimization techniques in recognition, Fuzzy systems-3D vision: Tasks - Basics of
projective geometry - Scene construction from multiple views, Uses: Shape from X - Full 3D objects - 3D model based vision - 2D
view based 3D representation. (12)
MOTION ANALYSIS: Differential motion analysis methods, Optical flow, Analysis based on interest points, Detection of specific
motion patterns, Video Tracking, Motion models to aid tracking. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac and Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision”, Cengage Learning, New
Delhi, 2014.
2. Wesley E. Synder and Hairong Qi, “Machine Vision”, Cambridge University Press, USA, 2010.
3. Richard Szeliski, “Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications”, Springer-Verlag, London, 2011.
4. Rafael C Gonzalez, Richard E Woods, Steven L Eddins, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
18ZC37 COGNITIVE COMPUTING

3003
INTRODUCTION TO COGNITIVE SCIENCE AND COGNITIVE COMPUTING WITH AI: Cognitive Computing - Cognitive
Psychology - The Architecture of the Mind - The Nature of Cognitive Psychology – Cognitive architecture – Cognitive processes –
The Cognitive Modeling Paradigms - Declarative / Logic based Computational cognitive modeling – connectionist models –
Bayesian models. Introduction to Knowledge-Based AI – Human Cognition on AI – Cognitive Architectures (12)
COGNITIVE COMPUTING WITH INFERENCE AND DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS: Intelligent Decision making - Fuzzy
Cognitive Maps – Learning algorithms: Non linear Hebbian Learning – Data driven NHL - Hybrid learning – Fuzzy Grey cognitive
maps – Dynamic Random fuzzy cognitive Maps (11)
COGNITIVE COMPUTING WITH MACHINE LEARNING: Machine learning Techniques for cognitive decision making – Hypothesis
Generation and Scoring - Natural Language Processing - Representing Knowledge - Taxonomies and Ontologies - Deep Learning
(11)
CASE STUDIES: Cognitive Systems in health care – Cognitive Assistant for visually impaired – AI for cancer detection, Predictive
Analytics - Text Analytics - Image Analytics -Speech Analytics – IBM Watson - Introduction to IBM’s PowerAI Platform - Introduction
to Google’s TensorFlow Development Environment (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hurwitz, Kaufman, and Bowles, “Cognitive Computing and Big Data Analytics”, Wiley, Indianapolis, 2005.
2. Jerome R. Busemeyer, Peter D. Bruza, “Quantum Models of Cognition and Decision”, Cambridge University Press, 2014.
3. Emmanuel M. Pothos, Andy J. Wills, “Formal Approaches in Categorization”, Cambridge University Press, 2011.
4. Nils J. Nilsson, “The Quest for Artificial Intelligence”, Cambridge University Press, 2009.
5. Neil Stillings, Steven E. Weisler, Christopher H. Chase and Mark H. Feinstein, “Cognitive Science: An Introduction”, MIT Press,
1995.
78
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ZC38 THEORETICAL COMPUTER SCIENCE
3003
REGULAR LANGUAGES AND FINITE AUTOMATA: Basics of Automata Theory - Chomsky Hierarchy of Grammars and the
Corresponding Acceptors. Regular Expression - Deterministic FA - Non deterministic FA - Minimization of DFA - Pumping Lemma
of Regular Languages - Decision Problems. Context Free Grammars - Non Deterministic PDA (11)
DECISION PROBLEM: Decision properties Turing Machines - Variants of TMs - Programming Techniques for TMs - Non
Deterministic TMs - TMs and Computers - Recursive and Recursively Enumerable Languages. (11)
COMPUTABILITY THEORY: Hilbert's Problem - Computable Functions – The Recursion Theorem - Decidable Language -
Universal Turing Machines - Undecidablity - Halting Problem - Rice Theorem - Post Correspondence Problem - Church Turing
thesis. (11)
TIME AND SPACE COMPLEXITY THEORY: Tractable and Intractable Problems - Time of Tractable Problems – P, NP, NP-
Complete Classes - Boolean Satisfiability Problem - Polynomial Time Reductions - Proof of NP-completeness : Vertex Cover
Problem - Clique Problem - Hamiltonian Circuit problem - TSP - NP hard, Cook LevininTheorem. Space Complexity of tractable
problems – Savitch’s theorem – Class PSPACE – PSPACE Completeness – Class L and NL – NL Completeness – coNL. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Michael Sipser, “Introduction to the Theory of Computation”, Thomson course Technology, USA, 2012.
2. John C Martin, “Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi,
2007.
3. John E Hopcroft and Rajeev Motwani and Jeffrey D Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and Computation”,
Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2006.
4. Peter Linz, “An Introduction to Formal Language and Automata”, Narosa Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.
5. Harry R Lewis, Christos H Papadimitriou, “Elements of the Theory of Computation”, Prentice Hall of India/Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2003.
6. Christos H Papadimitriou, “Computational Complexity”, Addison-Wesley, New York, 1994.
18ZC39 ADVANCED ALGORITHMS

3003
ADVANCED RANDOMIZATION AND HARDNESS OF APPROXIMATION: Algorithm for Bipartite Matching - Constructing Perfect
Matching - Randomized Markov Chains - Ergodicity - Time Reversal. Hardness of Approximation: Reductions from NP-Complete
Problems Reductions that Preserve Approximation. (12)
MULTITHREADED ALGORITHMS: Dynamic Multithreaded Algorithms - Performance Measures and Scheduling – Analyzing
Multithreaded Algorithms - Parallel Loops and Race Conditions - Multithreaded Matrix Multiplication – Merge Sort. (11)
ONLINE ALGORITHMS: Investment Problem- Ski Rental Problem – Randomized On-Line Algorithms - Analysis of Marking
Algorithm and Finding Lower Bound - The K-Server Problem (11)
STRING MATCHING: Notations - Naive String Matching Algorithm - Rabin-Karp Algorithm - String Matching with Finite Automata -
Knuth-Morris - Pratt Algorithm. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas H Cormen, Charles E Leiserson, Ronald L Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction to Algorithms” ”, PHI learning Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
2. David P. Williamson and David B. Shmoys, ”The Design of Approximation Algorithms”, Cambridge University Press, 2010
3. Allan Borodin and Ran El-Yaniv, “Online Computation and Competitive Analysis”, Cambridge-UK, Cambridge University Press,
1998.
4. Michel Goemans, “Lecture Notes on Advanced Algorithms”, MIT,1996.
18ZC40 SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS

3003
NETWORK FUNCTION VIRTUALIZATION: History and Evolution of Software Defined Networking (SDN): IETF Forces, Active
Networking. Control and Data Plane Separation: Concepts, Advantages and Disadvantages, the OpenFlow protocol - Network
Function Virtualization: Concepts, Applications, Existing Network Virtualization Framework (VMWare and others), Mininet based
examples. (12)
CONTROL AND DATA PLANE SEPARATION: Control Plane: Overview, Existing SDN Controllers including Floodlight and
OpenDaylight projects - Customization of Control Plane: Switching and Firewall Implementation using SDN Concepts. Data Plane:
Software-based and Hardware-based; Programmable Network Hardware. Programming SDNs: Northbound Application
Programming Interface, Current Languages and Tools, Composition of SDNs. (11)
79
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS FOR THE INTERNET-OF-THINGS: Challenges - Understanding the nature of IoT traffic flows
in different use cases-A software defined end-to-end IoT Infrastructure - Effective resource provisioning in the IoT Multinetwork
environments - Addressing scalability and security issues- Adding SDN automation and verification in IoT infrastructure. (11)
USE CASES OF SDNS: Data Centers, Internet Exchange Points, Backbone Networks, Home automation Systems, Industrial
automation Systems and Smart grids. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas D. Nadeau, Ken Gray, “SDN: Software Defined Networks, An Authoritative Review of Network Programmability
Technologies”, O'Reilly Media, 2013.
2. Paul Goransson and Chuck Black, “Software Defined Networks: A Comprehensive Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2014.
3. Vivek Tiwari, “SDN and OpenFlow for Beginners”, Amazon Digital Services, Inc., 2013.
4. Fei Hu, “Network Innovation through OpenFlow and SDN: Principles and Design”, CRC Press, 2014.
18ZC41/18ZS37 MACHINE LEARNING

3003
COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING THEORY BASICS: Introduction: Types of Learning - Designing a learning system – concept
learning - Find-s – Candidate Elimination - PAC Learnabilty- Sample complexity for finite and Infinite hypothesis spaces-VC
Dimension - Evaluating Hypothesis - Estimating Hypothesis Accuracy - Error Estimation - Bias-Variance - Confidence Interval -
Central Limit Theorem (12)
LINEAR MODELS: Linear Models For Regression – Linear Regression Models, Maximum Likelihood Estimation - Least Squares,
The Bias-Variance Decomposition, Bayesian Linear Regression, Linear Models for Classification, Probabilistic Generative Models,
Probabilistic Discriminative Models, Linear Discriminant Analysis. (11)
NEURAL NETWORKS: Neural Networks - Feed-forward Networks - Network Training - Delta Rule- Gradient Descent - Error
Backpropagation - Regularization in Neural Networks. (11)
KERNEL AND GRAPHICAL METHODS: Kernel Methods - Constructing Kernels- Radial Basis Function Networks - Gaussian
Processes - Maximum Margin Classifiers – SVM - Graphical Methods – Bayes Theorem - Bayesian Networks - Markov Random
Fields - Inference in Graphical Models - Mixture Models – Expectation Maximization. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Christopher Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer-Verlag New York, 2013.
2. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw Hill, 1997.
3. Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical Learning - Data Mining, Inference, and
Prediction”, Second Edition, Springer Series in Statistics, Springer-Verlag New York, 2013.
4. Yaser S. Abu Mostafa, Malik Magdon Ismail, Hsuan Tien Lin, “Learning From Data A Short Course”, Amlbook.Com, 2012.
AUDIT COURSES
18ZC81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18ZC82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

80
59th ACM 09.06.2018

ME SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
(2018 REGULATIONS)
Code Course Title Lecture Credits CAT
Tutorial Practical CA FE Total
I SEMESTER
18ZS01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZS02 Advanced Data Structures and Algorithms 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZS03 Database Management Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18ZS04 Open Source Software 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZS05 Analysis and Design of Software Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZS51 Advanced Data Structures and Algorithms 50 50
0 0 4 2 100 PC
Laboratory
18ZS81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 23 Hrs 13 6 4 18 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18ZS06 Data Intensive Computing Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZS07 Software Testing and Quality Assurance 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18ZS08 Software Engineering Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZS09 Software Architecture 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ZS__ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS52 Data Intensive Computing Systems Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18ZS61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18ZS82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 Hrs 18 2 14 23 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18ZS53 Software Development Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18ZS71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 20 Hrs 11 2 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18ZS72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
Group I
18ZS21 User Interface Design 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS22 Agile Software Development 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS23 Internet of Things 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Group II
18ZS24 Systems Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS25 Software Reliability 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS26 Software Metrics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS27 Design Patterns 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS28 Decision Support Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS29 Privacy Preserving Data Mining 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS30 Agent Based Intelligent Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS31 Evolutionary Computing Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS32 Data Integration 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS33 Advanced Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS34 Advanced Computer Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS35 Social Networks Data Analytics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS36 Privacy in Social Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ZS37 Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
81
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18ZS01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY

2203
REGRESSION AND CORRELATION: Curve fitting, method of least squares - inferences based on the least squares estimator -
basis of control charts - control charts for variables - , R and s charts - control charts for attributes – p, np, c and u charts. (8+7)
and sequential sampling plans, acceptance sampling by variables - chain sampling, continuous sampling, skip-lot sampling plans.
(8+7)
minimal cuts and minimal paths, state dependent systems. (8+7)
Total L:32 +T: 28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Richard A Johnson, Irwin Miller and John Freund’s, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2018.
New Delhi, 2016.
18ZS02/18ZC02 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS

3003
ALGORITHM ANALYSIS: Analysis of iterative and recursive Algorithms – Asymptotic notations – Parallel Algorithms:Introduction-
Scalar Product of two vectors- Matrix multiplication. (10)
TREES: Search Trees – Balanced Search Trees: AVL, RBT, Splay-Heaps: Binary heap, leftist heap, binomial heap, Fibonacci heap,
Multi-dimensional data structure: kd tree (15)
GRAPHS: Representation – Shortest path algorithms: Unweighted shortest path, Dijikstra’s algorithm, Graphs with negative edge
costs, Acyclic graphs, All pairs shortest path – Network Flow problems – Activity Networks – DFS applications: Biconnectivity, Euler
Circuits (10)
DISJOINT SETS AND HASHING: Disjoint Sets: Representation – Union and find operations - Hashing: Static hashing – Dynamic
hashing - Overflow handling - Bloom filters - Locality sensitive hashing (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas H Cormen, Charles E Leiserson, Ronald L Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction to Algorithms”, PHI learning Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2010..
2. Venkatesan R and Lovelyn Rose S, “Data Structures”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.
3. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
4. Ellis Horowitz, SartajSahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Universities Press, Hyderabad,
2012.
5. Peter Brass, “Advanced Data Structures”, Cambridge University Press, New York, 2011.
18ZS03/18ZC03 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

3204
RELATIONALDATABASE:Relational database Design - ERDiagram, Extended ER Diagram, Reduction to relational schemas,
Normalization- Functional Dependencies, Normal Forms,SQL (12+8)
QUERY OPTIMIZATION: Algorithms for Query Processing – external sorting, SELECT and JOIN operation, PROJECT and set
operation, aggregate operation and OUTER JOINs, Heuristics of Query Optimization, Cost Based Query Optimization. (11+7)
82
59th ACM 09.06.2018
TRANSACTION AND SECURITY: Properties of Transaction, Serializability, Concurrency Control – locking, timestamp, validation
based protocols, Deadlock – prevention, detection, recovery, Database security – issues, access control. (12+7)
TRENDS IN DATABASE: Introduction to NoSQL databases - Key-Value Stores – Columnar Stores – Document Stores, Graph
database - The Power of Graph Databases - Options for Storing Connected Data -Data Modeling with Graphs-Building a Graph
Database Application - Case Study - Neo4J. (11+8)
Total L: 45 +T: 30=75
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Connolly and CarlolynBegg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach toDesign, Implementation and Management”,
Pearson Education,Harlow,2015.
2. Sadalage, P. & Fowler,”NoSQL Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Emerging World of Polyglot Persistence”, Pearson
Education,USA,2013
3. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education,USA,2016.
4. Redmond, E. &Wilson, “Seven Databases in Seven Weeks: A Guide to Modern Databases and the NoSQL
Movement”,Prsgmatic Programmers, LLC,USA,2012.
5. Ian Robinson, Jim Webber, Emil Eifrem, Graph Databases, , New Opportunities for Connected Data, O'Reilly Media,USA,
2015.
18ZS04 OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE

2203
BASICS OF PYTHON: Python - Variables - Executing Python from the Command Line - Editing Python Files - Python Reserved
Words - Basic Syntax-Comments - Strings and Numeric Data Types - Simple Input and Output. Control Flow and Syntax - Indenting
- if Statement - Relational Operators - Logical Operators - Bit Wise Operators - while Loop - break and continue - for Loop - Lists –
Tuples - Sets - Dictionaries. (8+8)
PYTHON PROGRAMMING: Functions - Passing parameters to a Function - Variable Number of Arguments - Scope - Passing
Functions to a Function - Mapping Functions in a Dictionary – Lambda - Modules - Standard Modules – sys – math – time - dir
Function. Error Handling: Run Time Errors - Exception Model - Exception Hierarchy - Handling Multiple Exceptions - Data Streams -
Access Modes Writing - Data to a File Reading - Data From a File - Additional File Methods - Using Pipes as Data Streams -
Handling IO Exceptions - Working with Directories. (7+7)
BASICS OF PHP: Introduction to Open Source Programming and Scripting Language PHP - Variables – data types – arrays – array
functions - Control structures – String manipulation – anonymous function - File Handling and Data Storage - Working with Forms –
development of applications using PHP with Mysql (8+8)
WEB SERVERS AND MYSQL: Web Server – Feature – Architectures - Case Study: Apache Web Server - Configuring and Using
Web Server - Comparison of Apache Web Server with Commercial Web Servers. MySQL - Internals and Portability - Data Types -
Security - Scalability - Connectivity – Localization – PostgreSQL - CouchDB - Hbase (7+7)
Total L:30 + T:30 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Julie Meloni, “Teach Yourself PHP, MySQL and Apache All in One”, Pearson Education, USA, 2012.
2. Wesley J Chun, “Core Python Applications Programming”, Prentice Hall, 2012.
3. Allen B Downey, “Think Python”, O’Reilly, 2012.
4. Mark Summerfield, “Programming in Python 3: A Complete introduction to the Python Language”, Addison Wesley
Professional, 2009.
5. Martin C. Brown, “PYTHON: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, 2001.
18ZS05/18ZC05 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF SOFTWARE SYSTEMS

3003
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING CONCEPTS: Software Characteristics –Software Myths – Software life cycle models – The Linear
Sequential Model - The Incremental Model - The RAD Model - Evolutionary Software Process Models - The Prototyping Model -
Spiral Model-Agile methods – Requirement Engineering - Requirement Engineering Tasks. (12)
SYSTEM ANALYSIS: Requirement Analysis – Analysis Modelling Approaches – Data Flow Oriented Modelling – Context diagram,
Data flow diagrams – Elements of Analysis Model - Data Modeling – Objects and Classes – Object Identification – Relationship
among objects – classification . (11)
UML MODELING: Unified Software Development Process – Scenario Based Modeling – Class Based Modeling – Behavioral Model
– CASE tools. (11)
SYSTEM DESIGN: Design Process – Design Concepts – Modularity – Functional Independence - Modular Design – Coupling –
Cohesion – Refactoring – Design Model – Architectural Design - Component Level Design Element – Deployment Level Design –
Architectural Styles and Patterns – IEEE Standard for Software Design Descriptions. (11)
83
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014
2. Booch G, Maksimchuk R A, Engel M W, Young B J, Conallen J, Houston K A, “Object Oriented Analysis and Design with
Applications”, Addison-Wesley,USA,2007.
3. Booch G, Rumbaugh J and Jacobson I, “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide”, Addison Wesley Professional,USA,
2005.
4. Ian Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007.
.
18ZS51/18ZC51 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS LABORATORY

0042
The students will design, analyse and implement suitable data structures like Arrays, linked lists, stacks, queues,Search
Trees,Heaps,kd Tree, Graph Algorithms, Sets,Hashing for real world problems.
Total P: 60
SEMESTER II
18ZS06/18ZC06 DATA INTENSIVE COMPUTING SYSTEMS

3003
INFRASTRUCTURE: Cloud, Data intensive systems and Industry 4.0 – Cloud Architecture – Virtualisation – Data Virtualisation –
Storage Virtualisation – Network Virtualisation: SAS,SAN – File Systems – Big Data Characteristics – Use cases – Data Analytics
Life cycle – Case study. (12)
STORAGE PLATFORMS: NoSQL – Key-value store - Hadoop Architecture – Map Reduce programming – Examples - Spark;
Column-oriented stores – HBase architecture, Hive; Document stores – MongoDB architecture – examples ; Graph stores – Neo4j
architecture – examples ; Realtime Processing – Storm (11)
THEORY AND METHODS-I: Preprocessing – Statistical measures – Hypothesis testing – ANOVA - feature selection – PCA
Regression – linear, logistic – LDA – Association Rule Mining – Text Analysis (11)
THEORY AND METHODS-II: Clustering – partitioning and hierarchical approaches – Classification – KNN, Decision trees, Naive
Bayes, SVM– Time Series Analysis – ACF, AR, MA, ARMA, ARIMA – Stream Analysis (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. EMC Education Services, “Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing, Visualizing and Presenting Data Big
Data Science & Analytics : A Hands-on Approach”, Wiley, 2015.
2. Jared Dean, “Big Data, Data Mining and Machine Learning: Value Creation for Business Leaders and Practitioners”, Wiley,
USA, 2014.
3. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie and Robert Tibshirani, “An Introduction to Statistical Learning with Applications in
R”, Springer, USA, 2013.
4. Nathan Marz and James Warren, “Big Data - Principles and Best Practices of Scalable Realtime Data Systems”, MEAP Began,
USA, 2012.
5. Venkata Josyula, Malcolm Orr & Greg Page, “Cloud Computing: Automating the Virtualized Data Center”, CISCO Press, USA,
2011.
18ZS07 SOFTWARE TESTING AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

3204
TESTING FUNDAMENTALS, TECHNIQUES AND STRATEGIES: Objectives and Principles - V Process Model - Testing
techniques: White Box Testing: Static testing – Structural Testing - Black Box Testing: Cause Effect Graphing Technique –
Orthogonal Array Testing - Testing Strategies for Conventional Software - Testing Strategies for Object Oriented Software –
Acceptance Testing – Ad Hoc Testing - Art of Debugging: Debugging Process - Debugging Strategies. (12+8)
TEST AUTOMATION AND MANAGEMENT: People and Organizational Issues in Testing - Test Planning – Management –
Execution – Reporting - Software Test Automation: Design and Architecture for Testing - Generic requirements for test
tool/framework - Selection of Test Tool - Automation for Extreme Programming Model - Challenges in Automation. (11+7)
SOFTWARE TESTING TOOLS: Introduction to Selenium – Selenium Components – Introduction to IDE and test scripts creation
using IDE – Webdriver: Introduction to locators, WebDriver scripts, WebDriver methods – Get, FindElement, close; WebElement
84
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Methods – SendKeys, clear, click, wait type and window maximize:Browser Verification – getTitle, getCurrentUrl, Interacting with
Edit, Buttton, checkbox, Link, Radio button, Dropdown - Interacting with alerts, Frames, Windows, Exceptions. (11+8)
SOFTWARE QUALITY CONCEPTS, QUALITY METRICS AND STANDARDS: Views of Quality - Quality Control vs Quality
Assurance - Cost of Quality - Quality Assurance Group - Roles and Responsibilities - SQA Activities - Formal Technical Reviews -
Statistical Approach to Quality Assurance - Software Quality Measurement - Project Metrics – Progress Metrics – Productivity
Metrics - Standards: Role of ISO, TMM. (11+7)
Total L: 45 +T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, 6th Ed, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “Software Testing Principles and Practices”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2009
3. Rex Allen Jones II, “Absolute Beginner (Part 1) JAVA 4 Selenium WebDriver: Come Learn How to Program for Automation
Testing (Practice how to selenium Tutorials)”, Createspace Independent Publishing Platform, 2016
4. MilindLimaye, “Software Quality Assurance”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
5. Glenford J. Myers, “The Art of Software Testing”, Second Edition, John Wiley & Amp; Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey.
18ZS08 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT

3003
SOFTWARE PROCESS AND PEOPLE MANAGEMENT: Process-Process Maturity - Capability Maturity Model and its variants -
CMMI - PEOPLE MANAGEMENT: Basic organization structures - Decision making - Issues in people management. Effective Team
building - Organizational Behavior - Productivity improvement. (9)
SOFTWARE ESTIMATION AND FEASIBILITY STUDY: Components of Software Estimation - Problems associated with estimation
- Estimation methods - Full Function Points – LOC Estimation- COCOMO II – Putnam Estimation Model - Cost Estimation –
Economical, Technical and Operational Feasibility studies. Discounted cash flow and return on investment - Stepwise planning -
Identifying scope and objectives. (12)
PROJECT SCHEDULING AND TRACKING: Principles of project scheduling - Critical Path - Tracking methods - Timeline chart -
Earned value Analysis. RISK MANAGEMENT: Nature, Type of Software Risks - Risk identification - Risk exposure - Risk
prioritization - Risk Mitigation, Monitoring and Management plan. (12)
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT AND MAINTENANCE: Need for Configuration Management - check in check out
process - Versions and Variations – Baselines - Software Configuration Audit - Software Maintenance Process, Activities and
Categories – Maintenance Measurement – Service Measurement and Benchmarking (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Gopalaswamy Ramesh and Ramesh Bhattiprolu, “Software Maintenance: Effective Practices for Geographically Distributed
Environments”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
3. Rajesh Naik and Swapna Kishore, “Software Requirements and Estimation”, Tata McGraw Hill, India, 2008.
4. Pankaj Jalote, “Software Project Management in Practice”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
5. Watts Humphrey, “Managing the Software Process”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2000.
18ZS09 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

3003
MIDDLEWARE ARCHITECTURES: Definition – Architecture for Non-Functional Requirements – Role of Software Architect –
Technologies – Software Quality Attributes - Classification – Distributed Objects – Message Oriented Middleware – Application
Servers – Enterprise Java Beans Architecture. (12)
SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE: Service Oriented Systems – Web Services – Components – Restful Web Services -
Advanced Middleware Architectures – Business Process Orchestration, Integrating Architecture Issues, ESB - Message Brokers.
(11)
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURAL PROCESS AND MDA: Process – Requirements, Design, Validation-Documentation - UML 2.0,
Architectural Views, Component Diagrams, Templates - Aspect Oriented Architecture-Aspects, AOP, Example - Architecture,
Aspects and Middleware, Tools, Model Driven Architecture - Need, Tools, MDA and Software Architecture - Requirements,
Transformation. (11)
ARCHITECTURAL STYLES AND PATTERNS: Patterns in Software Architecture – Layers, Pipes and Filters, Blackboard, Broker,
MVC, Presentation – Abstraction - Control, other styles - event-based, data centred, interpreter, message dispatcher, multitier
distributed - Adaptable Systems (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Simon Brown, “Software Architecture for Developers”, Lean Publishing, Vancouver, BC, Canada, 2013.
2. Ian Gorton, “Essential Software Architecture”, Springer, New York, 2011.
85
59th ACM 09.06.2018
3. Mahesh P Matha, “Object Oriented Analysis & Design Using UML - An Introduction to Unified Process & Design Patterns”,
Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., India, 2010.
4. George Fairbanks, “Just Enough Software Architecture”, Marshall and Bainerd, Boulder, USA, 2010.
5. Frank Buschmann, Regine Muine, Hans Rohner, Peter Sommerlad and Michael Stal, “Pattern Oriented Software Architecture”,
John Wiley, England, 2001.
18ZS52/18ZC52 DATA INTENSIVE COMPUTING SYSTEMS LABORATORY

0042
The students will learn to use data intensive computing platforms like Hadoop, Spark, Hbase, MongoDB, Neo4j and R for
techniques like MapReduce, Machine Learning, Data Visualization, Regression, Clustering, Association Rule Mining, Classification,
Time Series Analysis etc and are then applied to solve a data intensive problem
Total P: 60
18ZS61/18ZC61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the programme. The same will be assessed
various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits.
Total P: 30
SEMESTER III
18ZS53/18ZC53 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY

0042
The student will demonstrate the ability to design research methodology that adequately addresses the following:
 Idea generation and Concept Selection

 Identification of real time problem in the field of computers.
 Comparing and contrasting different types of research methods.
 Patent search for foolproof concept selection
 Time line of activities
 Design
 Conceptualizing a research design and propose an innovative solution for the problem identified.
 Development and Testing
 Model/prototype development
 Validation and testing
Report submission and presentation

Total P: 60
18ZS71/18ZC71 PROJECT WORK I

0063
 Identification of a real world problem.
 Conduct literature survey
 Formulate a solution for the problem based on literature survey.
 Compare the results with existing solutions
 Write a technical report on the work done
 Publish the work in reputed national / international conferences
Total P: 90
SEMESTER IV
18ZS72/18ZC72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14
 Problem Identification.
 Define the scope and objectives of the problem
 Develop a mathematical model with realistic assumptions.
86
59th ACM 09.06.2018
 Propose a novel and original solution for the identified problem
 Interpretation and validation of results using formal research methods
 Comparison with existing solutions
 Publish the work in refereed national / international journals
Total P: 420
18ZS21 USER INTERFACE DESIGN

2203
TASK ORIENTED UI DESIGN: User Interface – Importance-Goals - UI and Software Designer – Human Factors in Design – User
Needs and Requirements - Task Oriented UI Design – Principles – Design Evaluation – Choice of Color – Design Phases – Case
Study. (7+7)
OBJECT ORIENTED DESIGN ANDCSCW UI: Object Oriented UI Design: Design of Icons – Use of Metaphors – GUI Design –
Case Study, CSCW Characteristics – Examples – CSCW UI – Method of Specifying and Designing UI for CSCW Systems – Case
Study. (8+8)
USABILITY AND ACCESSIBILITY: Usability - The Viewpoint of User, Customer and Designer – Usability Specification – Stages in
Usability Specification and Evaluation - Accessibility - Need – Incorporating Accessibility – Involving People with Disability –
Accessibility in User Centered Design Process (8+8)
WEB INTERFACE DESIGN: Designing Web Interfaces - Drag and Drop-Direct Selection-Contextual Tools, Overlays, Inlays and
Virtual Tags - Process Flow - Case Studies (7+7)
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. Jeniffer Tidwell,” Designing Interfaces”, O’Reilley, USA, 2011
2. Bill Scott and Theresa Neil, “Designing Web Interfaces”, O’Reilly Media Inc., USA, 2009
3. Ben Schneiderman, “Designing the User Interface”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
4. Andrew Sears and Julie A Jacko, “HCI handbook”, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, New York, 2008.
5. Linda Mcaulay, “HCI for Software Designers”, International Thompson Computer Press, USA, 1998.
18ZS22/18ZC24 AGILE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT

2203
AGILE PRINCIPLES AND MODELING: Introduction - Traditional, IID and Agile Methodologies – Comparison - Need - Manifesto –
Values and Practices – Agile Modeling Values, principles and practices – Agile modeling with RUP (8+8)
EXTREME PROGRAMMING: Life Cycle – User Stories – Architecture – Planning – Iteration – Testing – Release – XP Values – XP
Practices – Planning – Coding – Pair Programming Model – Refactoring – Agile Modeling and XP – case study (7+7)
SCRUM: Introduction – Practices - Applying Scrum – Need – Scrum Values – Practices - Tools in Agile Software Development –
Case Study – Applying Scrum for IoT projects, Applying Scrum for Big Data Projects (7+7)
OTHER AGILE DEVELOPMENT METHODOLOGIES: FDD – DSDM - Lean and Kanban Software development – Comparison of
agile approaches - Case Studies - Defining Data Warehousing Projects for Iterative Development – User stories – agile estimation -
Adapting Iterative Development for Data warehousing Projects. ` (8+8)
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Martin, “Agile Software Development: Principles, Patterns, and Practices”, Pearson Education Ltd. 2014.
2. Jim Highsmith, “Agile Data Warehousing Project Management”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2012.
3. Alistair Cockburn, “Agile Software Development: The Cooperative Game”, Pearson Education, USA, 2006.
4. Scott Ambler, “Agile Modeling: Effective Practices for eXtreme Programming and the Unified Process”, Wiley Computer
Publishing, 2002.
5. Ken Schwaber and Mike Beedle, “Agile Software Development with Scrum”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2001.
18ZS23/18ZC25 INTERNET OF THINGS

2203
IOT ARCHITECTURE: Introduction to IoT - M2M Architecture - Design Principles for Connected Devices - Definitions and
Functional Requirements – Sensors and Actuators IOT Architecture - IETF Architecture for IoT - OGC Architecture -
Communication Model. (8+6)
87
59th ACM 09.06.2018
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS: Protocol Standardization for IoT – Efforts – M2M and WSN Protocols – SCADA and RFID
Protocols – Unified Data Standards – Protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 – BACNET Protocol – MODBUS– Zigbee Architecture –
6LOWPAN – LoRA-COAP - MQTT (8+6)
ELECTRONIC PROTOTYPING: Prototypes and Production - Open Source versus Closed Source - Prototyping Embedded Devices
- Prototyping IoT Projects With Arduino - Prototyping IOT Projects With Raspberry PI (8+8)
CASE STUDIES AND IOT DATA ANALYTICS: Real world design constraints - Applications - Asset management, Industry 4.0,
Smart grid, Commercial building automation, Smart cities Data Analytics for IoT – Edge analytics - sensor data fusion techniques -
Cloud Storage Models & Communication APIs - Cloud for IoT - Predictive analytics (8+8)
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
REFERENCES:
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and OmarElloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”, Wiley & Sons
Ltd., UK, 2012.
3. David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi and OlivierHersent, “M2M Communications: A Systems Approach”, John Sons Ltd, UK, 2012
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison and Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, 2011.
18ZS24 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING

3003
SYSTEMS ENGINEERING: Systems Engineering and Modern systems - Systems Engineering Landscape – Structure of complex
systems (11)
SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT PROCESS AND MANAGEMENT: System Life Cycle - Evolutionary Characteristics of the Development
Process - Systems Engineering Method - Testing throughout System Development - Managing System Development and Risks –
WBS, SEMP, Risk Management - Organization of Systems Engineering (11)
CONCEPT DEVELOPMENT: Analysis – Concept Exploration – Concept Definition – Decision analysis and support (11)
ENGINEERING DEVELPOMENT: Advanced development: Requirements analysis, Risk analysis and reduction, Functional
analysis, Prototype development, Software Systems Engineering, Engineering Design, Integration and evaluation (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Samuel J. Seymour and Steven M. Biemer, “Systems Engineering Principles and
Practice”, Wiley-Interscience, Hoboken, 2011.
2. Ed. Garrett Shea, “NASA Systems Engineering Handbook”, Revision 2, NASA, USA, 2017.
3. Charles S. Wasson, “System Engineering Analysis, Design, and Development: Concepts, Principles, and Practices”, 2nd
Edition, Wiley, New York, 2015.
4. Department of Defense, “Systems Engineering Fundamentals”, Defense Acquisition University Press, Fort Belvoir, 2001.
18ZS25 SOFTWARE RELIABILITY

3003
RELIABILITY FUNDAMENTALS AND MATHEMATICS: Need for Reliability – Definition - Causes of Failures - Types of Failures -
Maintainability and Availability - Reliability Measures - Design for Higher Reliability - Redundancy Techniques - Reliability and Cost -
Random Experiments - Probability – Random Variables - Distribution Functions - Discrete Distributions - Continuous Distributions.
(12)
SYSTEM RELIABILITY MODELS: Basics of Component Reliability - Systems with Components in Series – Systems with Parallel
Components-K-Out-of-M Systems - Non Series Parallel Systems – Systems with Mixed Mode Failures – Fault Tree Techniques.(11)
RELIABILITY PREDICTION: Purpose - Classification – General Requirements – Prediction Methodologies – Software Prediction
Packages – Role and Limitation of Reliability Prediction. (11)
REDUNDANCY TECHNIQUES IN SYSTEM DESIGN: Component Versus Unit Redundancy – Weakest Link Techniques – Mixed
Redundancy – Stand by Redundancy – Redundancy Optimization - Double Failures and Redundancy - Economic Issues –
Manufacturer’s Cost – Customer’s Cost – Reliability Achievement Cost Models – Reliability Utility Cost Models – Depreciation Cost
Models – Reliability Application – Banking System. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Michael R. Lyu, “Software Reliability Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2011.
2. John D Musa, “Reliability Engineering - More Reliable Software, Faster and Cheaper”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
3. John D Musa, “Software Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Ann Marie Neufelder, “Ensuring Software Reliability”, Marcel Dekkar, New York, 1993.
5. Balagurusamy E, “Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1984.
88
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ZS26 SOFTWARE METRICS
3003
QUANTIFICATION IN SOFTWARE ENGINEERING: Measurement in Software Engineering - Measurement Scales and Scale
Types - Classification of Software Measures - Software Measurement Validation - Data Analysis – Analysis Methods – Statistical
Methods. Software Process and Project Metrics: Metrics in The Process and Project Domains – Building Measurable Process
Models – Reconciling Different Metrics Approaches – Metrics for Software Quality – Integrating Metrics within the Software
Engineering Process (12)
SOFTWARE PRODUCTS AND TECHNICAL METRICS: Measuring of Internal Product Attributes - Measuring External Product
Attributes – A Framework for Technical Software Metrics – Metrics for the Analysis Model – Metrics for the Design Model – metrics
for Source Code – Metrics for Testing - Metrics for maintenance - Measurement of Quality. (11)
RESOURCE MEASUREMENT: Productivity, Teams and Tools - Making Process Predictions - Good Estimates - Models of Effort
and Cost - Dealing with Problems of Current Estimation Methods (11)
MEASUREMENT AND MANAGEMENT: Planning - Measurement Program - Measurement Tools-Measurers - Analysts - Audience
- Measurement in Practice. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Norman E Fenton and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Software Metrics - A Rigorous & Practical Approach”, Thomson Computer
Press U S A, 2013.
2. Roger Pressman S, “Software Engineering: A Practitioners”, Tata McGraw Hill, New York, 2009.
3. Stephen H Kan, “Metrics and Models in Software Quality Engineering”, Pearson Education, Boston, 2002.
4. Dick B Simmons and Newton C. Ellis, “Software Measurement”, Prentice Hall, New York, 2002.
18ZS27 DESIGN PATTERNS

3003
INTRODUCTION TO PATTERNS: Introduction to patterns – Describing Design Patterns, Relationship between Design Patterns,
Solving Design Problems Using Patterns, Procedure to Apply and Use a Design Pattern (5)
INTERFACE PATTERNS: Introduction to interfaces – Adapter – Façade – Composite – Bridge pattern (7)
RESPONSIBILITY PATTERNS: Introduction to responsibility – Singleton – Observer – Proxy – Mediator - Chain of Responsibility –
Flyweight (11)
CONSTRUCTION PATTERNS: Introduction to construction - Builder, Factory Method, Abstract Factory, Prototype, Memento (11)
OPERATION & EXTENSION PATTERNS: Introduction to operations - Template, State, Strategy, Command – Extensions-
Decorator, Iterator, Visitor (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Metsker S J, “The Design Patterns Java Workbook”, Addison-Wesley Longman Publishing, Boston, MA, USA, 2002.
2. Gamma E, Helm R, Johnson R, and Vlissides R, “Design Patterns: Elements of Reusable Object-Oriented Software”, Addison
Wessley, Boston, MA, USA, 1998..
3. Freeman E, Robson E, Bates B and Sierra K, “Head First Design Patterns”, O'Reilly Media, Sebastopol, CA, USA, 2004.
4. Vascaaran sarcar, “Java Design patterns”, Apress, 2015.
5. Kerievsky J, “Refactoring to Patterns”, Addison-Wesley Professional, Boston, MA, USA, 2004
18ZS28 DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS

3003
DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS (DSS) AND BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE (BI): Introduction to decision support systems -
framework for business intelligence - tools and techniques for managerial decision support. Decision making Models - phases of
decision making process - intelligence phase - design phase - implementation phase. (11)
DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS CONCEPTS, METHODOLOGIES AND TECHNOLOGIES: Decision support systems
configuration and descriptions - characteristics and capabilities – classifications – components - data management subsystem -
model management subsystem - user interface subsystem - the knowledge based management subsystem Modeling and analysis -
Management support systems modeling - structure of mathematical models for decision support - certainty, uncertainty and risk.(11)
BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE: Data mining for business intelligence: data mining concepts and applications - data mining process
and methods - Artificial Neural Networks for Data Mining applications of ANN - Case studies. Text and web mining: Text mining
concepts - natural language processing - text mining applications and process - web mining overview. (11)
89
59th ACM 09.06.2018
INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS: Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems: Structure of expert systems - knowledge engineering -
problem areas suitable for expert systems - benefits and limitations. Advanced Intelligent systems: Machine learning techniques -
Case Based Reasoning - intelligent agents - implementing DSS and BI- RFID and new BI application opportunities - cloud
computing and BI (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Dursundelen, “Decision Support Systems and Intelligent Systems”, Prentice-Hall of India,
2011.
2. Efraim Turban, Jay E. Aronson, Richard V. McCarthy, “Decision Support Systems and Intelligent Systems”, Prentice-Hall of
India, 2007
3. Clyde W. Holsapple and Andrew B. Whinston, “Decision Support Systems, A Knowledge-Based Approach”, West Group, 1996.
4. Vicki L. Sauter , “Decision Support Systems For Business Intelligence”, Wiley,2011.
18ZS29 PRIVACY PRESERVING DATA MINING

3003
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Data Mining : Data Mining Architecture, Data Preprocessing, Techniques: Association Rule mining
– Classification and Prediction – Clustering Social Aspects of Privacy, Legal Aspects of Privacy and Privacy Regulations, Effect of
Database and Data Mining technologies on privacy - Privacy issues, Need for PPDM - Applications of PPDM. (12)
QUANTIFICATION OF PRIVACY PRESERVING DATA MINING: Metrics for quantifying privacy levels, Metrics for quantifying
Hiding failure, Metrics for quantifying Data Quality, Complexity metrics, Selecting a proper metrics, Utility based privacy preserving
methods: Types, Anonymization using local recoding, Utility based privacy preservation in classification, Association rule mining.
(11)
PRIVACY AND SECURITY MODELS: Privacy Models: Privacy models: Randomization - perturbation, Data Swapping,
Anonymization Algorithms - K-anonymity, l-diversity, t-closeness, differential privacy. Security Models: Trusted Computing Base,
State Machine Model, Information Flow Model, Noninterference Model, Take-Grant Model, Access Control Matrix, Sutherland
Model, Graham-Denning Model. (11)
PRIVACY PRESERVING DISTRIBUTED DATA MINING: Basic cryptographic Techniques for Privacy Preserving Distributed Data
Mining, Common Secure Sub - protocols used, Anonymization for vertically partitioned data and Horizontally partitioned data,
Limitations of cryptographic techniques for privacy preserving data mining. Anonymizing Social Networks and Sanitizing Textual
Data: Social Networks - Introduction, General Privacy Preservation Strategies, Anonymizing Networks. Textual Data: Introduction -
ERASE - Health Information De-identification (HIDE) (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. James Michael Stewart ,Mike Chapple , Darril Gibson, ”CISSP (ISC)2 Certified Information Systems Security Professional
Official Study Guide,Wiley Publisher, 2015.
2. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber and Jian Pei, “Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques, The Morgan Kaufmann Series in Data
Management Systems Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, July 2011.
3. Benjamin C.M. Fung, Ke Wang, Ada Wai-Chee Fu and Philip S. Yu, “Introduction to Privacy-Preserving Data Publishing:
Concepts and Techniques”, Chapman & Hall/CRC, 2010.
4. Charu C. Aggarwal, “Privacy-Preserving Data Mining: Models and Algorithms”, Springer, 2008.
5. Jaideep Vaidya, Chris Clifton and Michael Zhu, “Privacy Preserving Data Mining”, Springer, 2006.
18ZS30 AGENT BASED INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Basic Definitions – Intelligent Agents – Problem Solving Agents – Searching for Solutions – Uninformed Search
Strategies – Informed Search Strategies – Implementation (12)
KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION: Knowledge Based Agents – Propositional Logic (PL) – First-Order Logic (FOL) – Inferences in
PL and FOL – Semantic Net (11)
PROBABILISTIC AGENTS: Quantifying Uncertainty – Probabilistic Reasoning – Bayesian Network – Probabilistic reasoning over
time – Time and Uncertainty – Inference in Temporal Models (11)
MULTI–AGENT SYSTEMS: Interaction Between Agents – Reactive Agents – Cognitive Agents – Interaction Protocols – Agent
Coordination – Agent Negotiation – Agent Cooperation – Agent Organization – Agent Communication and Agent Oriented
Programming – Applications (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Stuart Russel and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence – A Modern Approach”, Pearson, UK, 2015.
2. Bradshaw, “Software Agents”, MIT, Cambridge, 2010.
3. George F Luger, “Artificial Intelligence – Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving”, Pearson, UK, 2004.
90
59th ACM 09.06.2018
4. Gerhard Weiss, “Multi Agent Systems – A Modern Approach to Distributed Artificial Intelligence”, MIT Press, Cambridge, 2009.
18ZS31/18ZC27 EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTING TECHNIQUES

3003
HEURISTIC AND METAHEURISTIC APPROACHES: Challenges in Solving Complex Problems - Evolutionary algorithms:
Principles, Historical development, Features, Classification and Components, Advantages, Applications. Heuristic Search: Problem
representation as search - Generate and Test - Breadth First Search - Depth First Search - Hill Climbing: Principles, Local and
Global maxima, Ridges, Plateau - Steepest Ascent - Simulated annealing: Annealing schedule, Parameter Selection (12)
GENETIC ALGORITHM: Biological Background - Simple Genetic Algorithm (SGA) - Representation types - Recombination Types -
Mutation types - GA Algorithm - Schema Theorem - Variations of GA: Adaptive GA, Real Coded GA - Differential Evolution:
Principles, Mutation, Crossover, Selection (11)
SWARM INTELLIGENCE: Particle Swarm Optimization: Swarms, Operating principles, PSO Algorithm, Neighborhood Topologies -
Variations of PSO: Binary, weighted - Ant Colony Optimization: Ant foraging behavior, Theoretical Considerations, ACO Algorithm,
Variations of ACO: Elitist Ant System (EAS), MinMax Ant System (MMAS) and Rank Based Ant Colony System (RANKAS) (11)
MULTI-OBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION: Principles - Classical Methods - Challenges - Evolutionary algorithms for multi-objective
optimization - Multimodal function optimization - Non-Dominated Sorting Genetic Algorithm (NSGA): Non-elitist, elitist - Controlled
elitism in NSGA (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Eiben AE and Smith JE, “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing”, Second Edition, Springer, Heidelberg, 2015.
2. Rich E and Knight K, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, India, 2011.
3. Deb K, “Multi-Objective Optimization Using Evolutionary Algorithms”, Wiley-Blackwell, USA, 2008.
4. Dorigo M and Stutzle T, “Ant Colony Optimization”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2005.
5. Kennedy J and Eberhart RC, “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, USA, 2001.
18ZS32 DATA INTEGRATION

3003
INTRODUCTION: Data Integration – Importance – Types and Complexity – Process. Semantic Technology: Overview – Web
Ontology Languages for Semantic Web – RDF schema –An Axiomatic Semantics for RDF and RDF Schema – Traditional Ontology
Languages: OWL – SPARQL. (12)
BATCH DATA INTEGRATION AND REAL TIME DATA INTEGRATION: ETL – Datawarehousing – Data Conversion – Archiving –
Integration Architecture – Provenance Determination – ETL Tools – Case Study. Patterns – Technologies – Modelling – Master
Data Management – Data Warehousing with Real – Time Updates – Stream Data – Architecture – Case Study. (11)
DATA VIRTUALIZATION AND SCHEMA MAPPING: Introduction – Architecture – Integration – Metadata – Data Virtualization–
Bigdata Integration Architecture–Scheme Mapping Approaches – Semantic Approaches – Conceptual Layering – Global and Local
as view Data Integration – Metadata Integration. (11)
SQL/NoSQL INTEGRATION: Introduction – Architecture of NoSQL Systems – Schema Extraction Approaches – Data Integration
Framework – Query Processing – Case Study. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bo Ma, Tonghai Jiang, “A Novel Data Integration Framework based on Unified Concept Model”, IEEE, 2017.
2. Judith R. Davis, Robert Eve, “Data virtualization - Going beyond Traditional Data Integration to Achieve Business Ability.”Nine
Five One Press, USA, 2014.
3. April Reeve, “Managing Data in Motion”, Elsevier, 2013.
4. Chung-Chih Lin, Ping-Yeh Lin, Po-Kuan Lu, Guan-Yu Hsieh, “A Healthcare Integration System for Disease Assessment and
Safety Monitoring of Dementia Patients.”, IEEE Transactions On Information Technology In Biomedicine, Vol. 12, No. 5,
September 2008.
5. Grigoris Antoniou, Frank Van Harmelen,“A Semantic Web Primer”, The MIT Press Cambridge, 2008.
18ZS33/18ZC07 ADVANCED OPERATING SYSTEMS

3003
PROCESS SCHEDULING & PROCESS SYNCHRONIZATION: Overview, Process scheduling, Operations on process, Inter
process communication, Process scheduling criteria, process scheduling algorithms. Process Synchronization: Background,
Hardware Support to Process Synchronization, Semaphores, Monitors - Memory Management Techniques. Case study: process
scheduling in Linux. (12)
DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS: Issues in Distributed Operating System – Architecture – Communication Primitives –
Lamport’s Logical clocks – Causal Ordering of Messages – Distributed Mutual Exclusion Algorithms – Centralized and Distributed
91
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Deadlock Detection Algorithms – Agreement Protocols - Case Study: Remote Procedure call in Distributed Computing Environment.
(11)
DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: Distributed File Systems – Design Issues - Distributed Shared Memory – Algorithms
for Implementing Distributed Shared memory–Issues in Load Distributing – Scheduling Algorithms – Synchronous and
Asynchronous Check Pointing and Recovery – Fault Tolerance – Two-Phase Commit Protocol – Non blocking Commit Protocol –
Security and Protection. (11)
REAL TIME AND MOBILE OPERATING SYSTEMS: Basic Model of Real Time Systems - Characteristics- Applications of Real
Time Systems – Real Time Task Scheduling - Handling Resource Sharing - Mobile Operating Systems – Micro Kernel Design -
Client Server Resource Access – Processes and Threads - Memory Management - File system – case study - iOS and Android:
Architecture and SDK Framework - Media Layer - Services Layer - Core OS Layer - File System. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. William Stallings, “Operating Systems – Operating System: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, 2014.
2. Mukesh Singhal, Niranjan Shivaratri, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems”, McGraw Hill, 2011
3. Rajib Mall, “Real-Time Systems: Theory and Practice”, Pearson, 2006.
4. HagitAttiya, Jennifer Welch, “Distributed Computing: Fundamentals, Simulations and Advanced Topics”, McGraw Hill, 2004.
5. Nancy A Lynch, “Distributed Algorithms”, Morgan Kaufmann Series, Elsevier, 1996.
18ZS34/18ZC08 ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS

3003
INTERNET ROUTING, QOS ANALYSIS AND MULTICASTING: Internet Architecture - IP service Model – Routing Domains and
Autonomous Systems – Intra Domain Routing Algorithms - Inter Domain-Routing: BGP - BGP Traffic Engineering. Routing
Convergence. Need for QoS - End to End QoS - QoS Levels - Performance Measures: Bandwidth - Delay and Jitter - Packet Loss -
Throughput. Routing Overheads .Multicast: Address Assignments - Multicast Routing – DVMRP- Protocol Independent Multicasting.
(12)
TCP PERFORMANCE MODELING: TCP Segment format - TCP Sliding Windows - Congestion Control and Queuing - TCP
Congestion Control - Analysis of TCP: Buffer Sizing - Throughput - Fairness - Random Early Detection Gateways for Congestion
Avoidance. DRR - Core-Stateless Fair Queuing - Congestion Control for High Bandwidth - Delay Product Networks - Variations of
TCP. (11)
HIGH SPEED NETWORKS: Packet Switching Vs Cell Switching - ATM Networks: ATM Protocol Architecture - Logical Connections
- ATM Cells - Service Categories - ATM Adaptation Layer - Traffic and Congestion Control In Frame Relay and ATM Networks.
High-Speed LANS - Fast Ethernet - Gigabit Ethernet. (11)
WIRELESS NETWORKS: Wireless Networks: Cellular Networks: GSM - UMTS - 3G and 4G Networks – IEEE E 802.11 - Bluetooth
- WIMAX – WSN - Characteristics - Architecture – Applications - Network Virtualization and Software Defined Networking (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. James F Kurose, Keith W Ross, “Computer Networking - A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet”, Pearson Education,
India, 2012.
2. Larry L Peterson and Bruce S Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Burlington,
USA, 2011.
3. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2010.
4. William Stallings, “High-Speed Networks and Internets: Performance and Quality of Service”, Pearson Education, India, 2002.
5. HolgerKarl , Andreas Willig, “Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley Publication, 2002.
18ZS35 SOCIAL NETWORKS DATA ANALYTICS

3003
SOCIAL NETWORK MODELS: Social Network data : nodes, relations – social networks as graphs ; mathematical representation of
social network data - Social Network Models : ErdosRenyi Model, Watts-Strogatz model, Barabasi-Albert model - Models for social
influence analysis: Edge & Node Measures - Social Similarity and Influence: Homophily - Existential Test for Social Influence -
Influence and Actions, interaction - Influence Maximization - Viral Marketing ; RandomWalks on Graphs: proximity measures, graph
theoretic measures, algorithms for hitting, commute times, pageranking, simrank, computing harmonic functions – applications in
text analysis, collaborative filtering and link prediction (12)
NODE CLASSIFICATION IN SOCIAL NETWORKS: Iterative Classification Method - RandomWalk based Methods: Label
Propagation, Graph Regularization, Adsorption - Applying Node Classification to Large Social Networks - variations on node
classification – Node clustering models – clustering graphs as objects. (10)
LINK PREDICTION IN SOCIAL NETWORKS: Feature based Link Prediction - Bayesian Probabilistic Models: Local - Network
Evolution - Hierarchical Probabilistic Models - Probabilistic Relational Models- Relational Bayesian Network - Relational Markov
Network - Linear Algebraic Methods - Case studies (11)
92
59th ACM 09.06.2018
COMMUNITY DISCOVERY IN SOCIAL NETWORKS: Methods – quality functions – direct discovery of communities – cliques and
bipartite subgraphs - Kernighan-Lin(KL) algorithm - Agglomerative/Divisive Algorithms - Spectral Algorithms Multi-level Graph
Partitioning - Markov Clustering – using betweeness measures to find communities – community evolution and tracing – finding
overlapping communities – maximum likelihood and affiliation graph models - Neighbourhood properties of graphs; Case studies:
Community Discovery in Heterogeneous Networks - Coupling Content and Relationship Information for Community Discovery. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Charu C Agarwal, “Social Networks Data Analytics”, Springer, USA, 2011.
2. Jure Leskovec, Anand Rajaraman, Jeff Ullman, “Mining of Massive Datasets”, 2014.
3. Guandong Xu and Lin Li, “Social Media Mining and Social Network Analysis: Emerging Research”, 2013.
4. David Easley and Jon Kleinberg, “Networks, Crowds, and Markets: Reasoning about a Highly Connected World Cambridge
University Press”, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Maksim Tsvetovat, Alexander Kouznetsov, “Social Network Analysis for Startups - Finding Connections on the Social Web”,
O’Reilly Media, 2011.
6. Jeroen Bruggeman, “Social Networks: An Introduction”, Routledge, 2008.
18ZS36 PRIVACY IN SOCIAL NETWORKS

3003
INTRODUCTION AND SECURITY ISSUES: Online social networks – model - data collection – challenges – pitfalls – stealing reality
- mobile social networks, characteristics, applications – OSN threats and issues. Security Issues: Trust in Online Social Networks:
Properties, Components, Social Trust, Trust Evaluation Models - Access Control - Identity management - Identity as Self -
Presentation - identity disclosure - identity theft – Phishing threat in OSN- Safety challenges in Mobile Social Networks (MSN). (16)
PRIVACY BREACHES: Introduction – Types - Statistical methods for inferring information – Crowdsourcing and Ethics -
Cooperative Data Forwarding Strategy with Privacy Preservation in MSN. (10)
PRIVACY-PRESERVING MECHANISMS: k-anonymity, l-diversity and t-closeness, Differential Privacy - Profile Matching Protocol -
Dynamic social networks privacy preservation - Privacy of Social Recommendation Algorithms - Providing Group Anonymity in
Social Networks - Privacy Mechanisms for Affiliation networks, Complex Networks – Encryption for Peer-to-Peer Social Networks -
case studies (10)
MODELING, EVALUATING, AND MANAGING PRIVACY RISKS: Information-sharing Model - Strategic Behavior and Information
sharing – issues - case study - Privacy-score Model - Methods for Computing the Privacy Score - Managing Privacy Settings -
Predicting Users’ Privacy Settings – Recommendation-Based Trustworthy Service Evaluation in MSN (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Yaniv Altshuler, Yuval Elovici, Armin B. Cremers, Nadav Aharony, Alex Pentland, “Security and Privacy in Social Networks”,
Springer, 2013
2. Yashar Najaflou, Behrouz Jedari, “Safety Challenges and Solutions in Mobile Social Networks”, IEEE Systems Journal, 2013.
3. Xiaohui Liang, Rongxing Lu, Xiaodong Lin, Xuemin (Sherman) Shen, “Security and Privacy in Mobile Social Networks”,
Springer, 2013.
4. Elena Zheleva, Evimaria Terzi, Lise Getoor, “Privacy in Social Networks”, Morgan & Claypool Publishers, 2012.
5. Barbara Carminati, Elena Ferrari, and Marco Viviani, “Security and Trust in Online Social Networks”, Morgan & Claypool
Publishers, 2012.
18ZS37/18ZC41 MACHINE LEARNING

3003
COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING THEORY BASICS: Introduction: Types of Learning - Designing a learning system – concept
learning - Find-s – Candidate Elimination - PAC Learnabilty- Sample complexity for finite and Infinite hypothesis spaces-VC
Dimension - Evaluating Hypothesis - Estimating Hypothesis Accuracy - Error Estimation - Bias-Variance - Confidence Interval -
Central Limit Theorem (12)
LINEAR MODELS: Linear Models For Regression – Linear Regression Models, Maximum Likelihood Estimation - Least Squares,
The Bias-Variance Decomposition, Bayesian Linear Regression, Linear Models for Classification, Probabilistic Generative Models,
Probabilistic Discriminative Models, Linear Discriminant Analysis. (11)
NEURAL NETWORKS: Neural Networks - Feed-forward Networks - Network Training - Delta Rule- Gradient Descent - Error
Backpropagation - Regularization in Neural Networks. (11)
KERNEL AND GRAPHICAL METHODS: Kernel Methods - Constructing Kernels- Radial Basis Function Networks - Gaussian
Processes - Maximum Margin Classifiers – SVM - Graphical Methods – Bayes Theorem - Bayesian Networks - Markov Random
Fields - Inference in Graphical Models - Mixture Models – Expectation Maximization. (11)
Total L: 45
93
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Christopher Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer-Verlag New York, 2013.
2. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw Hill, 1997.
3. Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical Learning - Data Mining, Inference, and
Prediction”, Second Edition, Springer Series in Statistics, Springer-Verlag New York, 2013.
4. Yaser S. Abu Mostafa, Malik Magdon Ismail, Hsuan Tien Lin, “Learning From Data A Short Course”, Amlbook.Com, 2012.
AUDIT COURSES
18ZS81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18ZS82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

94
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
ME APPLIED ELECTRONICS (2018 REGULATIONS)
I SEMESTER
18EA01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA02 Embedded Controllers and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA03 Digital System Design and Testing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EA04 VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA05 Object Computing and Data Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EA51 Circuits and Systems Simulation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18EA81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18EA06 Analog VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA07 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EA08 Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA09 Embedded System Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EA__ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA52 Electronic System Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18EA61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18EA82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18EA53 Applied Electronics Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18EA71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 24 hrs 12 2 10 18 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18EA72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
ELECTIVE 3 Associated With Centre of Excellence (One to be opted)
18EA21 Virtual Instrumentation Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18EA22 Internet of Things 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18EA23 Totally Integrated Automation 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES(Five to be opted)
18EA24 Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA25 VLSI Testing and Testability 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA26 Mixed Signal VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA27 Hardware Design Verification Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA28 System on Chip 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA29 ASIC Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA30 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA31 Linear Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA32 Linux Architecture 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA33 Wireless Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA34 Electronic Product Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA35 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA36 Digital Video Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA37 Wavelets and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA38 Biosignal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA39 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA40 Internetworking and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA41 Soft Computing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA42 Machine Learning and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA43 Industrial Drives for Automation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
95
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018

ME APPLIED ELECTRONICS (PART-TIME) (2018 REGULATIONS)
I SEMESTER
18EA01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA02 Embedded Controllers and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA03 Digital System Design and Testing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EA04 VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 18 hrs 14 4 0 0 200 200 400
II SEMESTER
18EA05 Object Computing and Data Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EA06 Analog VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA07 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EA51 Circuits and Systems Simulation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18EA82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 17 hrs 9 4 4 13 200 200 400
III SEMESTER
18EA08 Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EA09 Embedded System Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EA52 Electronic System Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
Total 15 hrs 9 2 4 12 200 200 400
IV SEMESTER
18EA53 Applied Electronics Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
Total 15 hrs 9 2 4 12 200 200 400
V SEMESTER
18EA61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18EA71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 16 hrs 6 0 10 11 200 200 400
VI SEMESTER
18EA72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence (One to be opted)
18EA21 Virtual Instrumentation Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18EA22 Internet of Things 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18EA23 Totally Integrated Automation 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Five to be opted)
18EA24 Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA25 VLSI Testing and Testability 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA26 Mixed Signal VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA27 Hardware Design Verification Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA28 System on Chip 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA29 ASIC Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA30 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA31 Linear Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA32 Linux Architecture 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA33 Wireless Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA34 Electronic Product Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA35 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA36 Digital Video Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA37 Wavelets and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA38 Biosignal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA39 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA40 Internetworking and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA41 Soft Computing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA42 Machine Learning and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EA43 Industrial Drives for Automation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
CAT – Category; PC – Professional Core; PE - Professional Elective EEC – Employability Enhancement Course; MC-
Mandatory Course
96
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
ONE CREDIT COURSES
18EK06 Field Programmable Analog Array for Analog System Design

18EK07 Automotive Software Testing
18EK13 System Engineering for Automotive Applications
18EK14 Electric Vehicles
18EK15 Phasor Measurement Units & Applications
18EK16 Graphical Programming for Real-Time Applications
18EK17 CAD Tools for VLSI Design Automation
18EK18 Digital Design with Verilog HDL
18EK19 Automotive Electrical System
97
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18EA01/18EE01/18ED01/18EM01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING

2203
VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces, subspaces, linear independence – basis and dimension of a vector space - inner product
space, orthonormal bases, Gram-Schmidt process. (8+7)
LINEAR TRANSFORMATIONS: General linear transformations, kernel and range, inverse linear transformations, matrices of
general linear transformations, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization. (8+7)
CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS: Variational problems of fixed boundaries: Variations and its properties - simplest variational
problems – Euler equation – Brachistochrone problem – variational problems involving several unknown functions – Functional
involving first and second order derivatives. (8+7)
STOCHASTIC PROCESSES: Classification. Markov chain: Transition probability matrices – Chapman Kolmogorov equations -
classification of states, limiting probabilities, Poisson process - continuous time Markov chains: Birth-death processes. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, “Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version”, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018.
2. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017.
3. Medhi J., “Stochastic Processes”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2017.
5. Elsgolts L., “Differential Equation and Calculus of Variation”, MIR Publication, Moscow, 1977.
18EA02 / 18EE02 / 18EM02 EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS

3003
8051: 8051 microcontroller – Architecture – Instruction sets – Addressing modes – I/O ports – Timer/Counter – Serial
Communication – Interrupts – Assembly language programming. (11)
PIC18F: PIC18f Micro-controller – Device overview – Pin diagrams. PIC18f micro-controller memory organization – Special Function
Registers - I/O ports – Timers – Capture/ Compare/ PWM modules (CCP). Analog to Digital Converter module – Instruction set –
Oscillator selection – Reset – Interrupts – Watch dog timer – PIC microcontroller programming. (11)
ARM7: ARM7TDMI – Architecture overview - Processor modes – Data types – Registers – Program status registers – ARM
Instruction Set – Thumb Instruction Set – Simple programs. (11)
REAL WORLD INTERFACING: Master Synchronous Serial Port ((MSSP) structure - Detail study of UART, SPI, I2C, ADC and
Comparators, Interfacing of PIC18F serial port - ADC using I2C. - RTC using I2C. – Design of data acquisition System - frequency
counter with display on LCD - Digital Multimeter - DC motor control using PWM with signal. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. William Hohl and Christopher Hinds, “ARM Assembly Language Fundamentals and Techniques”, CRC Press, second edition,
2015.
2. Danny Causey, Muhammad Ali Mazidi, and Rolin D. McKinlay, “PIC Microcontroller & Embedded System: Using Assembly and
C for PIC18”, Pearson Education India, 2008.
3. MykePredko, “Programming and Customizing the PIC Microcontroller”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, 2008.
4. M.A. Mazidi, J.G. Mazidi and R.D. McKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, Prentice Hall India, 2nd
Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
5. ARM System Developer's Guide, “Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Andrew Sloss Dominic Symes Chris Wright,
1st Edition, 2004.
6. John B. Peatman, “Design with PIC Microcontrollers”, Prentice Hall, 2003.
18EA03 / 18EE04 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN AND TESTING

3204
REVIEW OF DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS: Designing combinational circuit using multiplexer, decoder – Finite State Machines –
Mealy Machine- Moore Machine – State Diagram – State table - Design of state machines using Algorithmic State Machines (ASM)
chart as a design tool. System Design using PLDs: Basic concepts – Programming technologies - Programmable Logic Element
(PLE) - Programmable Array Logic (PLA) - Programmable Array Logic (PAL) – Programmable Logic Architectures – 16L8 – 16R4 –
22V10–Design of combinational and sequential circuits using PLDs. (12+5)
VERILOG: Signals, Identifier, Net and variable types, Operators, Gate instantiations, Modules and ports, data flow, gate level,
Behavioral level ,Switch level and state machine modeling , Concurrent and procedural statements, UDP, sub circuit parameters,
function and task, timing and delays - test benches-- design of combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog. (11+10)
CPLD and FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAYS: Complex PLDs (CPLDs) –Xilinx cool runner architecture. Types of FPGA
- Xilinx XC4000 series - Logic Cell Array (LCA) – Configurable Logic Blocks (CLB) - Input/output Blocks (IOB) - Programmable
Interconnection Point(PIP) Implementing Functions in FPGAs Dedicated Memory in FPGAs – Dedicated Multipliers in FPGAs -
Mapping, Placement ,and Routing - Verilog based design flow for FPGA. . (11+10)
98
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
HARDWARE TESTING AND DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY: Defects, errors, faults, Levels of Fault models, Types, Fault Detection
in Combinational Logic circuits: Path sensitization method, Boolean difference method. Fault Detection in sequential logic circuit,
Design for Testability: Scan path Testing, Boundary Scan Test, Built in Self Test. (11+5)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL : A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson Education Asia, 2014. .
2. Charles H Roth and Lizy Kurian John, “Digital Systems Design Using VHDL”, Cengage Learning, 2013.
3. Bhaskar J., “A Verilog Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012.
4. Micheal D.Ciletti, “Advance Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012.
5. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA - Based System Design”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2012.
6. Michael L Bushnell, Vishwani D Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital Memory and Mixed Signal VLSI Circuits”,
Springer, 2002.
18EA04 VLSI DESIGN
3003
OVERVIEW OF VLSI DESIGN METHODOLOGY: VLSI design process - Architectural design - Logical design - Physical design -
Layout styles - Full custom - Semicustom approaches. (2)
REVIEW OF MOS FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS: Introduction to MOS devices – n channel and p channel MOS transistors –
Types – Symbol and Physical operation of enhancement type transistors, current – voltage characteristics – symbol and physical
operation of depletion type transistor, current – voltage characteristics. (3)
BASIC ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MOS AND CMOS CIRCUITS: MOS transistor - Threshold voltage equations - Basic DC
equations - Second order effects - MOS models - Small signal AC characteristics - NMOS inverter - Depletion mode and
enhancement mode pull ups – CMOS inverter - DC characteristics - Inverter delay - Pass transistor - Transmission gate – Power
consumption in CMOS gates – Static dissipation – Dynamic Dissipation. (7)
VLSI FABRICATION TECHNIQUES: An overview of wafer fabrication – Wafer processing - Oxidation - Patterning - Diffusion - Ion
implantation - Deposition – Silicon gate NMOS process - CMOS processes - NWell - PWell - Twintub - Silicon on insulator - CMOS
process enhancements - Interconnect - Circuit elements - Latch up - Latchup prevention techniques. (6)
LAYOUT DESIGN RULES: Need for design rules - Mead Conway design rules for the silicon gate NMOS process - CMOS based
design rules - Simple layout examples - Sheet resistance - Area capacitance - Wiring capacitance - Driving large capacitive loads.
(6)
LOGIC DESIGN: Switch logic - Pass transistor and transmission gate based design - Gate logic - Inverter - Two input NAND gate -
NOR gate - Other forms of CMOS logic – Dynamic CMOS logic - Clocked CMOS logic - Precharged domino CMOS logic -
Structured design - Simple combinational logic design examples - Parity generator - Multiplexers – Clocked sequential circuits -
Two phase clocking - Charge storage - Dynamic register element - NMOS and CMOS - Dynamic shift register - Semistatic register
- JK flip flop circuit. (11)
SUBSYSTEM DESIGN PROCESS: General arrangement of a 4-bit arithmetic processor - Design of a 4bit shifter - Design of a ALU
subsystem - Implementing ALU functions with an adder - Carry look ahead adders - Multipliers - Serial parallel multipliers –
Pipelined multiplier array – Modified Booth's algorithm. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kamran Eshraghian, Douglas A Pucknell, and Sholeh Eshraghian, “Essentials of VLSI Circuits and Systems”, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Sung-Mo Kang and Yusuf Leblebici,” CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill,, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Wayne Wolf," Modern VLSI Design: Systems on Chip Design”, Pearson Education Inc., Indian Reprint, 2007.
4. Neil H E West and Kamran Eshranghian, "Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System Perspective", Addision-Wesley, 2004.
5. Jan M Rabaey, Chandrasekaran A and Nikolic B, “Digital Integrated Circuits,” Pearson Education, 2004.
6. Amar Mukherjee, "Introduction to nMOS and CMOS VLSI System Design", Prentice Hall, USA, 1986.
18EA05 / 18EE05 / 18ED05 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES

3204
PRINCIPLES OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Procedure Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Programming
paradigm - Basic concepts and benefits of OOP - Object Oriented Language - Applications of C++ - Operators in C++ - Classes
and Objects - Manipulators. Functions in C++- Call by Reference - Return by reference - Inline functions - Default, Const Arguments
- Function Overloading - Friend Functions - Member functions - Nesting of Member functions - Private member functions - Static
data members - Static Member Functions - Arrays of Objects - Objects as Function Arguments - Friend Functions. (10+7)
CONSTRUCTORS: Parameterized Constructor - Copy constructor - Multiple Constructors in a Class – Destructors. INHERITANCE:
Defining Derived Classes - Single Inheritance - Making a Private Member Inheritable - Multiple Inheritance - Hierarchical Inheritance
– Hybrid Inheritance. POLYMORPHISM: Compile and Run Time Polymorphism – Operator Overloading - Virtual function. (11+7)
DATA STRUCTURES: Abstract data Types - Primitive data structures - Analysis of algorithms - Best, worst and average case time
complexities – Notation. ARRAYS: Operations - Implementation of one, two, three and multi dimensioned arrays - Sparse and
dense matrices - Applications. SORTING: Insertion sort - Selection sort - Bubble sort - Radix sort - Algorithms and their time
complexities. (12+7)
LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: STACKS: Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Subroutine handling,
Recursion-Queues-Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Job Scheduling. LISTS: Primitive Operations -
Singly linked lists, Doubly linked lists, Circular lists – Applications: Addition of Polynomials (10+7)
99
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: TREES: Terminologies - Binary Tree traversal. (2+2)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Herbert Schildt, “C++ - The Complete Reference", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Nell Dale, “C++ Plus Data Structures”, Jones & Bartlett, Massachusetts, 2011.
3. Harvey M Deitel and Paul J Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2010.
4. Stanley B Lippman, Josee Lajoie and Barbara E Moo, “The C++ Primer”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
5. Aaron M Tanenbaum, Moshe J Augenstein and Yedidyah Langsam, "Data structures using C and C++", Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2009.
6. Sahni Sartaj, "Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++", Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2005.
18EA51 CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS SIMULATION LABORATORY

0042
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Simulation of CMOS Digital Circuits using PSPICE

2. Simulation of CMOS Analog circuits using PSPICE
3. Experiments using 8051 Microcontrollers
4. Interfacing using 8051 Microcontrollers
5. Experiments using ARM Processor
6. Mini Project
18EA06 ANALOG VLSI DESIGN

3003
ANALOG CIRCUIT BUILDING BLOCKS: Switches, Active Resistors, Current Sources and Sinks, Current Mirrors – Simple.
Wilson, Cascode, Folded – Cascode. Voltage and Current References – General biasing circuits for analog design – Supply
Independent biasing, Temperature independent biasing, Bandgap voltage references, Comparators, Multipliers (11)
CMOS SINGLE STAGE AMPLIFIERS: MOS inverting amplifier, Improving the performance of inverting amplifer. Single stage MOS
amplifiers. T- CS stage, CG stage, Source Follower, Frequency response of amplifiers (11)
CMOS MULTI STAGE AMPLIFIERS: Cascode and Folded cascode stage, Current amplifiers, output amplifiers, Differential
amplifiers, CMOS operational amplifiers, uncompensated and compensated Op Amps, Noise performance of Op-Amps, Op-Amp
design techniques with examples. High performance CMOS Op-Amps. (9)
SWITCHED CAPACITOR FILTERS: Introduction to Switched capacitor filters, Switched capacitor resistors. (3)
DATA CONVERTERS: Data Converter fundamentals, DAC Architectures: Current Switched, Resistive, charge redistribution,
Hybrid, Segmented D/A Converters. ADC architectures: Flash, Pipeline, Integrating, Successive Approximation and folding A/D
Converters. (8)
FIELD PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG ARRAY (FPAA): Overview of analog design – Introduction to Field Programmable analog
array (FPAA) and its advantages – Role of EDA tool in Analog Design process. (3)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, Reprint September,
2014.
2. Behzad Razavi, “Design of CMOS Integrated Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Roubik Gregorian, Gabor C. Temes, “Analog MOS Integrated Circuits for Signal Processing”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
4. Randall L Geiger, Phillip E Allen and Noel R Strader, "VLSI Design Techniques for Analog and Digital Circuits", McGraw Hill,
International Edition, 1990.
5. David A Johns and Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2002, 2nd Edition, 2011.
6. Jacob Baker R, Lee H W and Boyce D E, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,
2010.
18EA07 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

3204
MULTIRATE DSP: Sampling – Spectral representation: DFT and FFT – Review of Digital filters - Decimation and Interpolation by an
integer and rational factors – Multistaging – Decimation and Interpolation with poly phase filters – Realizations – Applications of
multirate signal processing. (11+7)
FILTER BANKS: Analysis and Synthesis of Filter Banks – Quadrature Mirror Filter (QMF) banks – Filter bank with perfect
reconstruction – 2-Channel and M-channel – Paraunitary filter banks – Biorthogonal and Linear phase filter banks – Tree and
parallel structured filter banks – Transmultiplexer filter banks – Multi resolution analysis – Subband coding and its applications.
(12+8)
ADAPTIVE FILTERS: FIR adaptive filters – adaptive filters based on steepest descent method – LMS algorithm – Variants of LMS
algorithm – adaptive channel equalization – adaptive echo cancellation – RLS adaptive algorithm. (11+7)
100
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
WAVELET TRANSFORM: Short-Time Fourier Transform – limitations - time-frequency scaling- Heisenberg’s uncertainty –
Continuous Wavelet Transform – Discrete Wavelet Transform – Haar, Daubechy’s wavelets – Multi Resolution Analysis of audio
signal. (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Fliege N.J., “Multirate Digital Signal Processing” John Wiley & Sons Ltd., Reprinted with Correction, 2000.
2. Vaidyanathan P P., “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks”, Pearson Education, 2011.
3. John G Proakis and Dimitris G Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing-Principles, Algorithms and Applications”, Prentice Hall of
India, 2013.
4. Rao R.M. and Bopardikar A.S., “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory and Applications”, Addison Wesley, Reprint, 2003.
5. Soman K.P. and Ramachandran K.I., “Insight into Wavelets-From Theory to Practice”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
18EA08 / 18EE24 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND PARALLEL PROCESSING

3003
REGISTER TRANSFER LANGUAGE AND MICRO-OPERATIONS: Register transfer language – Inter-register transfer - Arithmetic
micro-operations – Logic micro-operations – Shift micro-operations – Control functions - Data path Organisation - Binary arithmetic
unit – BCD arithmetic unit – Floating point arithmetic unit – Processor bus configuration – Data transfer and manipulation –
Hardwired and micro-programmed control. (12)
MEMORY UNIT AND INPUT-OUTPUT UNIT: Memory hierarchy – Main memory – Back-up storage units – Multiple
module memories – Interleaved memory – Associative memory - Virtual memory systems – Structure – Paging – TLB –
Segmentation – Replacement strategies – Cache memory: Basic cache structure – Direct, fully associative and set associative
mapping – Replacement policies – Multiple caches – Memory management hardware - Characteristics of I/O subsystem –
Interrupt mechanisms and special hardware – Direct Memory Access – I/O processors and I/O channels – Asynchronous data
transfer. (10)
PARALLEL PROCESSING AND PIPELINING: Basic uniprocessor architecture – Parallel processing mechanisms – Levels of
parallelism – Balancing of subsystem bandwidth – Parallel computer structures – Architectural classifications – Parallel processing
applications -Linear pipelining – Pipeline processors – Instruction and Arithmetic pipelines – Organization of pipelined units –
Instruction pre-fetch and branch handling – Pipeline hazards – Reducing branch penalties – Branch prediction strategies – Vector
processing: requirements and characteristics – High performance Architectures: Superscalar Architecture – VLIW Architecture. (11)
ARRAY PROCESSING AND MULTIPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE: SIMD array processors – Masking and data routing
mechanisms – SIMD Interconnection networks - Multiprocessor Architecture - Functional structures: Loosely and Tightly coupled
Multiprocessors – Processor characteristics for multiprocessing – Symmetric Multiprocessors (SMP) – Non Uniform Memory Access
(NUMA) – Interconnection structures for multiprocessors – Cache coherence – Thread level parallelism – Multithreading – Clusters.
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. John Hennessy and David Patterson, "Computer Architecture: A Quantitative approach", Elsevier India Publishers, 5th Edition,
2017.
2. Kai Hwang and Faye A Briggs, "Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing", McGraw Hill Book Company, 2016.
3. Stallings W, “Computer Organisation and Architecture – Designing for performance”, Pearson Publishers, 9th Edition, 2014.
4. Mano M.M., "Computer System Architecture", Pearson Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2013.
18EA09 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN

3204
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction – Embedded systems versus general computing systems – Classification – Major application
areas – Hardware and Software components: CPU of an embedded system – Memory – Input/Output devices, Sensors and
actuators – Communication interfaces : I2C, SPI, CAN, and LIN - Firmware, other system components–Characteristics and quality
attributes. (12+8)
EMBEDDED FIRMWARE DEVELOPMENT: Integrated development environment (IDE) – Cross-compiler - Cross Assembler –
Software debugging techniques – In Circuit Emulator – Hardware-software co-design and program modeling - Issues in co-design –
Introduction to UML – Hardware-software trade-offs – Code optimization, Fixed point and floating point implementation of algorithms
– Analysis and Optimization of CPU Power Consumption. (12+8)
RTOS FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Interrupt driven systems - Need for Real-time Operating System – RTOS Concepts – Tasks,
Context switching, Interrupt latency, Memory management, Scheduling, Task synchronization, Shared data issues – Introduction to
RTOS APIs – Power optimization strategies for processes – Basic design using RTOS – Response time calculation – Performance
Comparison of commercial RTOSs. (12+8)
EMBEDDED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT: Design tools – Development techniques – Embedded product development cycle
(EDLC) – Objectives – Phases –Modeling EDLC – Trends in the embedded industry.
DESIGN CASE STUDIES: Smartcard reader – Automated meter reading system – Digital Camera – Advanced Driver Assistance
Systems. (9+6)
Total L: 45 + 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as components: Principles of Embedded Computing Design, 4th Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2016.
2. Jonathan W Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems, Real Time Interfacing”, 3rd Edition, CENGAGE Learning, 2012.
3. Shibu K. V., “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
101
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
4. David E Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson India, 2008.
18EA52 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
1. Design and Simulation of Digital Circuits using VHDL / Verilog and porting them into FPGA.
2. Layout of Simple NMOS/CMOS Circuits.
3. Study of Dynamically programmed Analog Signal Processers.
4. Applications using DSP Processors.
5. Implementing a basic computer on FPGA (implementing and simulating a common bus/ Data Path block/ control unit)
6. Mini Project.
18EA61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed
various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be held at the
end of the semester.
Total P: 60
18EA53 APPLIED ELECTRONICS LABORATORY

0042
1. Implementation of Digital Circuit Testing Algorithms using C.

2. Implementation of Interprocess communication mechanisms.
3. Design simple placement, partitioning and routing algorithms using C.
4. Simple RTOS Experiment to view multitasking using Keil IDE.
5. Implementation of Image/ Video Processing algorithms using Matlab.
6. Mini Project
18EA71 PROJECT WORK – I

0063
 Identification of a problem.
 Literature survey of identified problem.
 Finalization of project specification and requirements
 Presentation / Demonstration of sub block(s) of the Project ( Hardware / Software / both )
IV SEMESTER
18EA72 PROJECT WORK – II
0 0 28 14
 Project Implementation ( Hardware / Software / both )
 Presentation / Demonstration about the work done
 Consolidated report preparation
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE (ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence)

18EA21 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS
3204
INTRODUCTION: Concept of virtual instrumentation, virtual instrumentation model, design flow with graphical system design,
graphical data flow programming - Modular programming, repetition and loops, arrays, clusters, plotting data, structures, strings,
state machines – file I/O- creating LabVIEW executables and projects. (12+8)
DATA ACQUISITION: DAQ hardware configuration, DAQ hardware – Sampling and grounding techniques - analog I/O, digital I/O,
counter/timer, DAQ software architecture, network data acquisition. Application design using Real Time Targets: PXI, cRIO. (11+7)
INSTRUMENT INTERFACES: Virtual Instrumentation Software Architecture (VISA), instrument drivers, serial and parallel
interfaces: RS232, USB, firewire, controller area network (CAN), GPIB, Industrial Ethernet. OLE for Process Control (OPC) (11+7)
ADVANCED FEATURES IN LabVIEW: System identification and control design, signal processing, image acquisition and
processing, data logging and supervisory control, LabVIEW Interface for Arduino, case studies on machine vision, motion control,
GSD applications. (11+8)
Total: L: 45 T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
2. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, “LabVIEW Advanced Programming Techniques”, CRC Press, 2009.
102
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
3. Mathivanan, N. “PC-Based Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
4. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
5. Gary Johnson and Richard Jennings, “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, McGraw Hill Inc., 2006.
18EA22 / 18EE21 / 18ED22 / 18EM23 INTERNET OF THINGS

3204
FUNDAMENTALS OF IoT: Introduction to Internet of Things (IoT) – Machine to Machine (M2M) – Functional Characteristics –
Recent Trends in the Adoption of IoT – Societal Benefits of IoT – Consumer IoT vs Industrial Functional Components of a typical IoT
System: Sensors, Actuators, Embedded Computation Units, Communication Interfaces, Software Development (9+5)
IoT PROTOCOLS: Physical and Data Linnk Layer Protocols: RFID: NFC, FFC, ZigBEE, Bluetooth Low Energy, Z-Wave, Wi-Fi,
Wireless HART - Network Layer Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, TCP & UDP, 6LoWPAN - Application Layer Protocols: COAP, MQTT
(13+10)
CLOUD COMPUTING: NIST Visual Model – Essential Characteristics – Components of Cloud Computing - Service Models –
Deployment Models – Service Management and Security – Examples – Basics of Fog Computing (12+7)
SECURITY IN IoT: IEEE 802.11 Wireless Networks Attacks: Basic Types, RFID Security – Security Issues in ZigBEE: Bluetooth
Security: Threats to Bluetooth Devices and Networks - IoT Applications: Health Care, Connected Vehicles, Smart Grid, Smart
Home, and Smart City (11+8)
Total: L: 45 T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach)”, Universities Press, 2015.
2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, UK, 2014.
3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols”, John Wiley
and Sons Ltd., UK 2012.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, New York, 2011.
5. Johnny Cache, Joshua Wright and Vincent Liu, “Hacking Exposed Wireless: Wireless Security Secrets and Solutions”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
6. Himanshu Dwivedi, Chris Clark and David Thiel, “Mobile Application Security”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
18EA23 / 18EE22 / 18ED23 / 18EM22 TOTALLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

3204
INTRODUCTION TO FACTORY & PROCESS AUTOMATION: Evolution of Industrial Versions - Control elements of Industrial
Automation - IEC/ ISA Standards for Control Elements – Selection criteria for control elements – Utilisation Category with IEC
standards - Construction of Relay Ladder logic with different control elements- Need for PLC - PLC evolution. (6+3)
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS: Architecture of PLC - Types of PLC – PLC modules, PLC Configuration - Scan cycle
- Capabilities of PLC- Selection criteria for PLC – PLC Communication - PLC Wiring - Installation of PLC and its Modules.
Types of Programming – Bit Instructions - Timers and counters – PLC arithmetic functions PTO / PWM generation - High Speed
Counter – Analog Scaling – Encoder Interfacing - Servo drive control – Stepper Motor Control. (12+13)
HMI SYSTEMS: Need for HMI in Industrial Automation, Types of HMI – Configuration of HMI, Screen development and navigation,
Configuration of HMI elements / objects and Interfacing with PLC. (6+7)
NETWORKING: PLC Networking - Networking standards & IEEE Standard - Protocols - Field bus - Process bus and Ethernet –
EttherCAT (7+0)
SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION: Architecture – Tools – Tag Configuration - Internal & External graphics,
Alarm logging – Tag logging – structured tags – Trends – history – Report generation (14+7)
Total: 75 L: 45 + T: 30
REFERENCES:
1. W. Bolton, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier Ltd., 2015.
2. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers ‖”, McGraw Hill, 2011.
3. John R Hackworth and Fredrick D Hackworth Jr., “Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and Applications ‖”,
Pearson Education, 2006.
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES
18EA24 ALGORITHMS FOR VLSI DESIGN AUTOMATION

3003
INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN METHODOLOGIES: VLSI Design problem - The Design Domains-Design methods and
Technologies.
(3)
ALGORITHMIC GRAPH THEORY AND COMPUTATIONAL COMPLEXITY: Data structures for the representation of graphs -
Computational Complexity - Graph Algorithms - Depth first search - Breadth first search - Dijkstra's shortest path algorithm - Prim's
algorithm. (8)
103
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
PLACEMENT, PARTITIONING AND FLOOR PLANNING: Circuit representation - Types of Placement Problem - Placement
Algorithms- Constructive Placement, Iterative Improvement - Partitioning - Kernighan - Lin Partitioning algorithm - Floor Planning -
Representation - Shape functions and floor plan sizing. (11)
ROUTING: Local routing problems - Area routing - Channel routing - Channel Routing Models, The Vertical Constraint Graph,
Horizontal Constraints and the Left-edge Algorithm, Channel Routing Algorithms - Global routing - Standard-cell, Building-block
Layout and Channel Order, Algorithms for Global Routing. (11)
SIMULATION: Gate level modeling and simulation - Compiler driven simulation - Event driven simulation - Switch-level modeling
and simulation. (6)
HIGH LEVEL SYNTHESIS: Hardware models - Allocation - Assignment - Scheduling - Assignment Problem - High level
transformation. (6)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Abramovici M, Brever A and Friendman D, "Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design", Jaico Publishing House, 2014.
2. Naveed Sherwani, "Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation", Springer-Verlag, 2013.
3. Sabih H.Gerez, "Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation", John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
4. Sadiq M Sait and Habib Youssef, "VLSI Physical Design Automation", IEEE Press, New York, 2010.
5. WayneWolf, "Modern VLSI Design: Systems on Chip Design", Pearson Education Inc., Indian Reprint, 2007.
18EA25 VLSI TESTING AND TESTABILITY

3003
FAULT MODELS AND FAULT SIMULATION: Need for testing - Fault models - Fault detection and redundancy - Combinational
circuits – Sequential circuits - Fault equivalence - Fault dominance – Logic simulation - Compiler driven Simulation - Event driven
Simulation - Fault simulation techniques - Serial, parallel, deductive. (11)
TESTING FOR SINGLE STUCK AT - FAULTS: Test generation algorithms for combinational circuits - Fault oriented ATG – D-
algorithm – Examples – PODEM – Fault independent ATG - Random test generation – ATG for SSFs in sequential circuits - TG
using iterative array models - Random test generation. (12)
DELAY TEST & ANALOG SIGNAL TEST: Delay test problem – Path delay test – Transition faults – Delay test methodologies.
Analog And Mixed Signal Test : DSP based analog and mixed signal test – Static ADC and DAC testing methods - Model based
Analog and Mixed signal Test - Analog fault models-Analog fault simulation – Analog ATPG (11)
DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY: Adhoc design for testability techniques - Controllability and Observability by means of scan registers
– Storage cells for scan designs – Level Sensitive Scan Design (LSSD) - Partial Scan – Boundary scan – BIST concepts and
architectures. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Abramovici M., Brever A. and Friedman D., "Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design", Jaico Publishing House, 2013.
2. Xiaoqing Wen, Cheng Wen Wu and Laung Terng Wang, “VLSI Test Principles and Architectures: Design for Testability”,
Morgan Kaufmann, 2011.
3. Michael L Bushnell and Vishwani D Agarwal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed Signal Circuits”,
Springer, 2002.
4. Parag K Lala, “Fault Tolerant and Fault Testable Hardware Design”, BS Publications, 2002.
5. Stanley L Hurst, “VLSI Testing : Digital and Mixed Analogue Digital Techniques”, Institute of Electrical Engineers,1998.
18EA26 MIXED SIGNAL VLSI DESIGN

3003
SIGMA DELTA CONVERTERS: Over Sampled Converters - Over Sampling With Out Noise & With Noise - Implementation
Imperfections - First Order Modulator - Decimation Filters - Higher Order Modulators – Sigma Delta DAC & ADCs (11)
CONTINUOUS TIME FILTERS & DIGITAL FILTERS: Introduction to Gm - C filters - bipolar transconductors - CMOS
Transconductors using Triode transistors, active transistors - BiCMOS transconductors – MOSFET C Filters - Tuning Circuitry -
Dynamic range performance - Digital Filters: Sampling – decimation – interpolation - implementation of FIR and IIR filters. (11)
PHASE LOCKED LOOPS AND MIXED SIGNAL LAYOUT: Basic Architecture of PLL, Charge Pump PLL, Non-ideal effects in
PLLs, Applications.
CMOS design rules – Layout of CMOS – Capacitors – Resistors – Mixed layout issues: Floor planning, power supply and ground,
fully differential matching, Guard rings and shielding. (12)
ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL EXTENSIONS TO VHDL: Introduction - Language design objectives - Theory of differential
algebraic equations - the 1076 .1 Language - Tolerance groups - Conservative systems - Time and the simulation cycle - A/D and
D/A Interaction - Quiescent Point - Frequency domain modeling and examples. (11)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holberg “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press, 2000, 3rd Edition, 2014.
2. David A Johns and Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2002, 2nd Edition, 2011.
3. Behzad Razavi ,“ Design Of Analog Cmos Integrated Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
104
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
4. Jacob Baker, Harry W Li, and David E Boyce “CMOS, Circuit Design Layout and Simulation”, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2nd Edition
August, 2010.
5. Rudy van de Plassche “Integrated Analog-to-Digital and Digital-to-Analog Converters”, Springer, 2007.
6. Tsividis Y P, “Mixed Analog and Digital VLSI Devices and Technology”, McGraw Hill, 1996.
18EA27 HARDWARE DESIGN VERIFICATION TECHNIQUES

3003
VERIFICATION TECHNIQUES: Introduction – Testing Versus Verification – Design and Verification reuse. Techniques based on
simulation – Analytical and Formal approaches – Function verification – Timing verification – Formal verification – Basic of
equivalence checking and model checking. (10)
VERIFICATION TOOLS: Linting Tools – Simulators – Waveform viewers – Code Coverage – Functional Coverage – Metrics.
VERITIFCATION PLAN: Levels of verification – Verification Strategies – Test cases – Test benches. (13)
STIMULUS AND RESPONSE: Reference signals – Simple stimulus – Simple output – Complex Stimulus and response –
Transaction Level Interface. (11)
ARCHITECTING TEST BENCHES: Test Hardness – VHDL Test Hardness – Design Configuration – Self Checking Test benches –
Directed stimulus – Random stimulus – VHDL configuration management. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Andreas Meyer, “Principles of Functional Verification”, Newnes, 2009.
2. Samir Palnitkar, “Design Verification with e”, Pearson Education, 2008.
3. Janick Bergeron, “Writing Test Benches: Functional Verification of HDL Models” Springer 2003.
4. M Kerrel Iran and Robert P Kustbern, “Verification of Digital and Hybrid Systems”, Springer Verlag, 2000.
5. Thomas Kropf “Introduction to Formal Hardware Verification”, Springer Verlag, 1999.
18EA28 SYSTEM ON CHIP

3003
INTRODUCTION: System trade offs and evolution of ASIC Technology – System on chip concepts and methodology – SoC design
issues – SoC challenges and components. (4)
DESIGN METHODOLOGIC FOR LOGIC CORES: SoC Design Flow – On-chip buses – Design process for hard cores – Soft and
firm cores – Designing with hard cores, soft cores – Core and SoC design examples. (8)
DESIGN METHODOLOGY FOR MEMORY AND ANALOG CORES: Embedded memories – Simulation modes – Specification of
analog circuits – A to D converter – D to A converter – Phase-locked loops – High speed I/O (11)
DESIGN VALIDATION: Core level validation – Test benches- SoC design validation – Co-simulation – Hardware/software co-
verification. (11)
SOC TESTING: SoC Test issues – Testing of digital logic cores – Cores with boundary scan – Test methodology for design reuse –
Testing of microprocessor cores – Built in self test method – Testing of embedded memories. Case Studies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rajanish K Kamat, Santosh A Shinde, Vinod G Shelake, “Unleesh the System-on-Chip using FPGAs and Handle C, Spinger
2009.
2. Laung-Terng Wang, Charles E Stroud and Nur A Toubq, “System on Chip Test Architectures: Nanometer Design for
Testability”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.
3. Wgel Badawy, Graham A Jullien, “System-on-Chip for Real-Time Applications”, Kluwer Academic Press, 2003.
4. Rochit Rajsuman, “System-on-a-chip: Design and Test”, Artech House, London, 2000.
18EA29 ASIC DESIGN

3003
INTRODUCTION TO ASICS, CMOS LOGIC AND ASIC LIBRARY DESIGN: Types of ASICs - Design flow - CMOS transistors
CMOS Design rules - Combinational Logic Cell – Sequential Logic cell - Data path logic cell - Transistors as Resistors - Transistor
Parasitic Capacitance - Logical effort - Library cell design - Library architecture. (11)
PROGRAMMABLE ASICS: Anti fuse - static RAM - EPROM and EEPROM technology - PREP benchmarks - Actel ACT - Xilinx
LCA - Altera FLEX - Altera MAX DC & AC inputs and outputs - Clock & Power inputs - Xilinx I/O blocks. (11)
PROGRAMMABLE ASIC INTERCONNECT, PROGRAMMABLE ASIC DESIGN SOFTWARE AND LOW LEVEL DESIGN
ENTRY: Actel ACT - Xilinx LCA - Xilinx EPLD - Altera MAX 5000 and 7000 - Design systems - Logic Synthesis - Half gate ASIC -
Schematic entry - Low level design language – Introduction to PLA tools. (7)
LOGIC SYNTHESIS, SIMULATION AND TESTING: VHDL and logic synthesis - types of simulation - boundary scan test - fault
simulation automatic test pattern generation. (6)
105
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
ASIC CONSTRUCTION, FLOOR PLANNING, PLACEMENT AND ROUTING: System partition - FPGA partitioning - partitioning
methods - floor planning - placement - physical design flow - global routing - detailed routing - special routing - circuit extraction. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Smith M.J.S., "Application - Specific Integrated Circuits", Addison - Wesley Longman Inc., 2013.
2. Chu P., “FPGA Prototyping by VHDL Examples”, Wiley, 2008.
3. Francis R.J., Rose J., Vranesic Z.G., Brown S.D., “Field Programmable Gate Arrays", Springer Verleg, 2007.
4. Mohammed Ismail and Terri Fiez, "Analog VLSI Signal and Information Processing ", McGraw Hill, 1994.
5. Andrew Brown, "VLSI Circuits and Systems in Silicon", McGraw Hill, 1991.
6. Kung S.Y., Whilo House H.J., Kailath T., "VLSI and Modern Signal Processing", Prentice Hall, 1985.
18EA30 OPERATING SYSTEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Operating system structure – Function – Evolutions of Operating Systems - Serial processing, Batch Processing,
Multiprocessing, Time-sharing operating systems - Distributed OS - Multiprocessor OS – Real-time OS – Introduction to system
calls. (4)
PROCESS MANAGEMENT: Introduction to processes –Threads - Scheduling objectives - Scheduling Criteria - Types of scheduling
algorithms – Performance comparison – Inter-process communications - Synchronization – Semaphores – Deadlock - Prevention,
Recovery, Detection – Avoidance. (9)
MEMORY MANAGEMENT: Single contiguous allocation – Partitioned allocation – Paging – Virtual memory concepts – Swapping –
Demand paging – Page replacement algorithms – Segmentation – Segmentation with paging. (11)
DEVICE AND FILE MANAGEMENT: Principles of I/O hardware – I/O software – Disks – Disk Scheduling Algorithms – File Systems
– Files-Directories- File system implementation – Allocation methods – Security – Protection mechanisms. (11)
CASE STUDIES:
LINUX – History – Design Principles – Kernel modules – Process Management – Scheduling – Memory Management – File
Systems – Input and Output – Inter-process Communication – Network Structure – Security. (5)
WINDOWS 7 – History – Design Principles – System Components – Terminal Services and Fast User Switching –File System –
Networking – Programmer Interface. (5)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern OS”, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2015.
2. Dhamdhere D. M., “Operating Systems- A Concept Based Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2014.
3. Silberschatz A., Galvin P and Gagne G., “Operating System Concepts”, John Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 2013.
4. Deitel H M., Deitel P J. and Choffnes D R.,” An Introduction to Operating Systems”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
5. William Stallings, “Operating Systems”, Prentice-Hall, 2007.
6. Mukesh Singhal and Niranjan G Shivaratis, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
18EA31 LINEAR SYSTEMS

3003
MATHEMATICAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM: Causality, Lumpedness, Linearity, Linearization, Concept of state, state variables
and state model, State space representation using physical, phase and canonical variables, Comparison of input-output description
and state variable description, MIMO systems, Discretization of a continuous time model. (11)
SOLUTION OF STATE EQUATIONS: State transition matrix-Significance, Properties, Computation, solution of continuous time
state equation, impulse response matrix, Solution of discrete time state equation, Solution of linear time variant systems, Transfer
function from state space model, similarity transformation, decomposition of transfer functions - direct, cascade and parallel
decomposition techniques. (12)
CONCEPT OF CONTROLLABILITY AND OBSERVABILITY: Kalman`s and Gilbert`s test, State feedback controller design using
Ackermann’s formula, Design of full order observer using Ackermann’s formula, Duality, Observer based controller design,
Reduced order observer design, Controllability and observability of Discrete LTI systems, Controllability and observability of linear
time variant systems, Effect of pole-zero cancellation. (11)
STABILITY: Stability in the sense of Lyapunov, asymptotic stability of linear time invariant continuous and discrete systems,
Solution of Lyapunov equation, internal stability, stability of linear time variant system. (12)
Total: L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gopal M, “Modern Control System Theory”, New Age International, 2014.
2. Chen CT, “Linear System Theory and Design”, Oxford University Press, 2012.
3. William L Brogan, “Modern Control Theory”, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
4. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2010.
5. Benjamin C Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
106
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
18EA32 LINUX ARCHITECTURE
3003
INTRODUCTION: Evolution of Linux OS – Main characteristics of Linux – Typical Linux distributions – Linux directory structure –
User and super/root users – access rights – Home directory – Vi editior - Commands – Overview of shell and GUI. (11)
LINUX KERNAL ARCHITECTURE: Layer diagram of OS - Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) – Memory manager – scheduler – file
system – I/O subsystem – Networking subsystem – IPC – user space. (11)
LINUX FILE SYSTEM: Layers of Linux file system – structure of inode – process file system – The Ext2 File system – System
programming concepts – API & ABIs – C library and compiler. (11)
DEVICE DRIVER: System start up (Booting) Methods - PC I/O architecture – classification of Linux devices: character and block
devices – port I/O – PCI and ISA bus – polling, interrupt, and waiting queue – Device Files - Device driver Registration – Device
driver initialization – I/O operation - typical Linux driver – dynamic and static drivers - kernel modules – Linking and unlinking of
modules – On Demand modules linking. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Love, “LINUX System Programming”, Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
2. Raghavan P., Amol Lad, Sriram Neelakandan, “Embedded Linux System Design and Development”, Tailor & Francis Group,
2006
3. Daniel P. Bovet, Marco Cesati, “Understanding the Linux Kernel”, Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
4. Tim Jones M., “GNU/Linux Application Programming”, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
5. Michael Beck, Harald Bohme, Mirko Dziadzka, Ulrich Kunitz, "Linux Kernel Programming", Pearson Education, 2002.
18EA33 / 18EE29 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS

3003
CHARACTERISTICS OF WSN: Characteristic requirements for WSN, Challenges for WSNs, WSN vs Adhoc Networks, Sensor
node architecture, Commercially available sensor nodes, Physical layer and transceiver design considerations in WSNs, Energy
usage profile, Choice of modulation scheme, Dynamic modulation scaling, Antenna considerations. (11)
MEDIUM ACCESS AND ROUTING: Fundamentals of MAC protocols, Low duty cycle protocols and wakeup concepts, Contention
based protocols, Schedule-based protocols: SMAC - BMAC - Traffic-adaptive medium access protocol (TRAMA), The IEEE
802.15.4 MAC protocol. Routing And Data Gathering Protocols, Routing Challenges and Design Issues in Wireless Sensor
Networks, Flooding and gossiping, Data centric Routing, Energy aware routing, Hierarchical Routing, Real Time routing Protocols.
(12)
LOCALIZATION AND MANIPULATION: Localization and positioning, Coverage and connectivity, Single-hop and multihop
localization, Self configuring localization systems, Sensor management. Data Storage and Manipulation, Data centric and content
based routing, Storage and retrieval in network, Compression technologies for WSN, Data Aggregation Techniques. (11)
OPERATING SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS: Operating Systems for Wireless Sensor Networks, Design Issues, Examples of
Operating Systems: TinyOS – Mate – MagnetOS – MANTIS. WSN Applications, Home Control, Building Automation, Medical
Applications, - Reconfigurable Sensor Networks, Civil and Environmental Engineering Applications Nanoscopic Sensor Applications,
Case Study: IEEE 802.15.4 LR-WPANs Standard - Target detection and tracking - Contour/edge detection - Field sampling. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli and Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks Technology, Protocols, and Applications“, John
Wiley & Sons, 2015.
2. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2015.
3. K. Akkaya and M. Younis, “A survey of routing protocols in wireless sensor networks”, Elsevier Ad Hoc Network Journal, Vol. 3,
No. 3, pp. 325 - 349, 2005.
4. Anna Hać, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2007.
5. Raghavendra, Cauligi S, Sivalingam, Krishna M., Zanti Taieb, “Wireless Sensor Network”, Springer, 2004.
18EA34 ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DESIGN

3003
ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN: Top down design - product concept - innovation - creativity - validation – communication -
product requirements - system architecture development - trade-off analysis - cost modelling - circuit design - physical and
mechanical design - Tolerance and reliability - Quality control - quality assurance - quality functional deployment - assignment
matrices – checklist - quality in the design process - concurrent design - risk analysis - quality in production (11)
ELECTRONIC PACKAGING: IC packaging: Leaded package, TABITCP package - COB, flip-chip, BGA, CSP-Discrete components
- Board to board connectors - substrates - Escape routing - PCA/module design metrics - Electronic packaging metrics-I/O
hardware: buttons, switches, dials and touch screens, speakers, microphones, antennas, and external connectors. (11)
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY & MECHANICAL DESIGN: Electromagnetic fields and human health – EMC Control :
Characterizing the threat – Laws and Regulators – EMC Design : Grounding and shielding – Emission Suppression – Susceptibility
hardening - EMC Testing - EMI shielding
THERMAL MANAGEMENT: High level thermal analysis, thermal issues in notebook computers - mechanical integration - DFMA
analysis. (11)
107
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
PORTABLE ELECTRONICS : Digital and Analog processing: microprocessor, logic devices, microcontrollers, DSP, analog devices,
sensors, wireless communication, system memory and mass storage - Displays: Display technologies - Flexible OLED Displays -
LED-LCD-micro display - pen input - power sources - Battery technologies: Ni-Cd, alkaline, Ni-MH, lithium ion, lithium polymer,
photovoltaic cells, fuel cells - product implementation - high level power analysis-Case study: Cellular phones - portable PCs -
Personal digital assistants - digital imaging products. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Tim Williams, “EMC for Product Designers”, 5th Edition, Copyright@2017 Elsevier Ltd.
2. Bert Haskell, “Portable Electronics Product Design and Development: For Cellular Phones, PDAs, Digital Cameras, Personal
Electronics and More”, McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. Tony Ward and James Angus, “Electronic Product Design”, Chapman and Hall publications, 1996.
18EA35 / 18EE33 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

3003
IMAGE FORMATION AND ENHANCEMENT: Human visual system – Sampling and Quantization – Color fundamentals – Spatial
domain processing – Simple image operations – Point wise intensity transformations - Histogram processing - Linear and non-linear
noise smoothening – Sharpening - Derivatives – Laplacian – Combing spatial enhancement methods. (11)
FREQUENCY TRANSFORMS AND APPLICATIONS: Frequency domain processing – 2-D transforms: DFT, DCT, and DWT–
Properties – Frequency domain filtering techniques–Sub band coding of image compression – Coding techniques: Huffman, Run
length and Block transform – JPEG – Performance metrics. (11)
IMAGE RESTORATION AND RECONSTRUCTION: Image degradation – Noise models – Image observation models- Spatial
filtering: mean filters, order statistics filters, adaptive filters - Inverse filtering - Wiener filtering – Constrained least squares filtering.
Image Reconstruction from projections – Radon transform and it’s Application. (11)
SEGMENTATION AND FEATURE EXTRACTION: Edge detection: Gradient operators - edge linking and boundary detection:
Global processing via Hough transforms, Graph theoretic techniques – Thresholding techniques – K-means Clustering – Feature
extraction: Boundary feature descriptors – Region feature descriptors – Principal components – SIFT. Object Recognition
applications. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gonzalez R.C., Woods R.E., “Digital Image Processing”, Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2017.
2. Jayaraman S., Esakkirajan S., Veerakumar T., “Digital Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
3. Jain A.K., “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
18EA36 DIGITAL VIDEO PROCESSING

3003
VIDEO FILTERING: Digital video standards: Resolution, frame rate, and interface – Quality assessment - Video format conversion:
Down conversion, De-Interlacing - Frame rate conversion - Multi-frame noise filtering - Multi-frame restoration - Super resolution.
(11)
MOTION ESTIMATION AND COMPENSATION: 2D and 3D motion - Block matching methods - Optical flow estimation - Differential
methods: Lucas-Kanade method, Horn-Schunk method - Transform domain phase correlation method - Subpixel and region based
motion compensation techniques. (11)
COMPRESSION AND STANDARDS: Basics of 2D image compression – JPEG – 3D DCT Transform coding – 3D subband coding
using wavelets – Motion compensated transform coding – Scalable video coding – Coding standards: MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG4-
AVC/ITU-T H.264. (11)
SEGMENTATION AND TRACKING: Image Segmentation: Thresholding, Clustering and Active - contour models - Change
detection - Background modeling and subtraction - Motion segmentation - Motion tracking: Kanade-Lucas-Tomasi tracking - Mean
shift tracking - Tracking performance metrics. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Murat Tekalp, “Digital Video Processing”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
2. John W Woods, “Multidimensional Signal, Image and Video Processing and Coding”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press, USA,
2012.
3. Bovik A., “The Essential Guide to Video Processing”, Academic Press, USA, 2009.
18EA37 WAVELETS AND APPLICATIONS

3003
WAVELETS: Vector spaces – Relationship between functions, Sequences, Vectors – Properties – Fourier transform and non-
stationary signals – Limitations – Review of sampling theorem.
Haar Wavelet: Analysis of Haar wavelet in function of scale and time – Haar multire solution Analysis: Analysis part and Synthesis
part – Frequency domain analysis of Haar filter bank.
Daubechies Family: Calculation of scaling function – Daub-4 and Daub–6 design details. (12)
108
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORM: The uncertainty principle – Time-bandwidth product – Time-Frequency tiling – STFT and
wavelets – CWT-Comparison of STFT and CWT – Interpretation of spectrogram plot – Reconstruction and Admissibility –
Discreitization of scale. (11)
DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORM: Dyadic MRA – Theorem – Inverse DWT computation – Bi-orthogonal and orthogonal filter
banks – Construction of Orthogonal filterbank – Variants of MRA: Splines and Wavelet packets.
Other Wavelet Families: Mortlet, Mexican Hat, and Gabor – Multi-dimensional wavelets: 2-D Haar wavelet transform. (12)
APPLICATIONS: Review and demonstration of different wavelet applications: Compression – Denoising – Analysis of biomedical
signals and power signals. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vikram M Gadre and Aditya S Abhyankar, “Multiresolution and Multirate Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
2. Soman K.P. and Ramachandran K.I., “Insight into Wavelets - From Theory to Practice”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
3. Mallat S., “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing: The Sparse Way”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2009.
4. Rao R.M. and Bopardikar A.S., “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory and Applications”, Addison Wesley, Reprint, 2003.
5. Gilbert Strang and Truong Nguyen, “Wavelets and Filter Banks”, Wellesley-Cambridge Press, 1997.
18EA38 BIOSIGNAL PROCESSING

3003
BIO SIGNALS: Nature of Biomedical signals, Types: Action Potential, Electroneurogram (ENG), Electromyogram (EMG),
Electrocardiogram (ECG), Electroencephalogram (EEG), Electrogastrogram (EGG), Phonocardiogram (PCG),
Photoplethysmography (PPG). (11)
FILTERING FOR REMOVAL OF ARTIFACTS: Stationary versus non-stationary processes, Noise in event-related potentials, High-
frequency noise in the ECG, Motion artifact in the ECG, Power-line interference in ECG signals, Maternal interference in fetal ECG,
Time domain filters, Frequency domain filters, Optimal filtering: The wiener Filter, Adaptive filters for removal of Interference,
Application: Removal of Artifacts in the ECG. (12)
MODELING STOCHASTIC SIGNALS: Random Processes, Mean and Autocorrelation function of a Random Processes,
Stationarity and Ergodicity, General Linear Processes, Yule-Walker Equations, Autoregressive (AR) Processes, Moving Average
(MA) Processes, Autoregressive- Moving Average(ARMA) Processes, Harmonic Processes. (12)
SIGNAL COMPRESSION: Direct Digital compression Techniques, Transformation Compression Techniques, Other Compression
Techniques and Comparison. (10)
.
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rangaraj M. Rangayyan, “Biomedical Signal Analysis, A Case Study Approach”, IEEE Press, 2014.
2. D.C. Reddy, “Biomedical Signal Processing, Principles and Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Eugene N. Bruce “Biomedical Signal Processing and Signal Modeling”, Wiley Series, 2007.
4. Joseph D Bronzino, “The Biomedical Engineering Handbook, CRC Press, IEEE Press, 2000, 3rd Edition, May 2006.
5. Kenneth E Banner and Gonzalo R Arce, “Nonlinear Signal & Image Processing – Theory Methods & Applications”, CRC Press,
New York, 2004.
6. Willis J Tompkins, “Bio Medical Digital Signal Processing”: C Language Example and Lab, Prentice Hall INC, New Delhi, 2004.
18EA39 / 18ED33 / 18EE35 / 18EM32 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

3003
LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Statement of Optimization problems, Graphical method, Simplex method, Revised simplex method, Two
phase simplex method, Duality in linear programming, Sensitivity analysis. (12)
NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct search methods - Univariate method, Pattern search
method, Simplex method, Descent methods - Steepest Descent method, Conjugate gradient method, Quasi Newton method. (11)
NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk’s Method
of Feasible Directions, Rosen’s Gradient Projection Method, Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the
Penalty Function Method, Interior Penalty Function Method, Exterior Penalty Function Method. (11)
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Multistage decision process, Suboptimization and Principle of Optimality, Computational procedure,
Final value problem to initial value problem, Linear Programming as a Case of Dynamic Programming, Continuous dynamic
programming (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sharma J K, “Operations Research: Theory and Applications”, Macmillan Company, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Gupta C B, “Optimization Techniques in Operations Research”, I K International, New Delhi, 2012.
109
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
18EA40 / 18EE28 INTERNETWORKING AND APPLICATIONS

3003
INTERNETWORKING: Overview of Internetworking, Underlying networking technologies, Concept and Architectural model,
Protocol layering – LAN Fundamentals – Wired LANS : ETHERNET Protocol – Wireless LANS : 1EEE 802.11, Bluetooth, WiMax -
Connecting Devices : Repeaters, Hub, Switches, Routers, Unicast Routing - Multicast Routing (12)
NETWORK PROTOCOLS AND APPLICATIONS: Protocols: Network layer introduction - Network layer protocols : IPv4 Datagram
Format, IPv4 Addresses, Forwarding IP packets, ICMPv4 – DHCP, Transport layer protocols - Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
– User Datagram Protocols (UDP) - Applications : Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) – Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension
(MIME) – World Wide Web and HTTP – Remote login : Telnet, Electronic Mail - Next Generation IP. (11)
NETWORK MANAGEMENET AND SECURITY: Areas of Network Management – SNMP – SMI – MIB - ASN.1, Introduction to
network security – Confidentiality – Message Integrity - Message Authentication - Digital Signature – Digital Certification – HTTPS-
Entry Authentication - Key management – Internet Security – Firewalls. (11)
MOBILE NETWORKS & MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS: Mobile phone technologies: different generations, Mobile Internet
Protocol, Synchronization and replication protocols, WAP Architecture: Introduction, Components, Infrastructure, Security issues,
WAP gateways.
Multimedia Networking Applications, Streaming stored video, Voice over IP, Protocols for real-time conversational applications,
network support for multimedia. (11)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Behrouz A Forouzan and Firouz Mosharraf, “Computer Network – a Top Down Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
2. Jochen Burkhardt, Horst Henn, Stefan Hepper, Klaus Rindtoroff, Thomas Schaeck, “Pervasive Computing – Technology and
Architecture of Mobile Internet Applications”, Pearson, 2012.
3. James F. Kurose, Keith W.Ross, ”Computer Networking – a Top Down Approach”, Pearson, 2012.
4. Behraouz A Forouzan, “TCP/IP Protocol Suite”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
5. Doughlas Comer, “Internetworking with TCP/IP : Principles, Protocols and Architecture”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2006.
18EA41 / 18EE38 SOFT COMPUTING

3003
FEED FORWARD NETWORKS AND SUPERVISED LEARNING: Fundamentals – Biological neural network – Artificial neuron –
Activation function – Learning rules - Perceptron Networks – Adaline – Madaline – Back propagation networks – Learning factors –
Linear separability. Hopfield network – Discrete Hopfield networks – Associative memories – Recurrent auto association memory –
Bi-directional associative memory – Boltzman machine. (12)
UNSUPERVISED LEARNING NETWORKS: Hamming networks – Self-organising feature maps – Adaptive resonance theory
network – Instar model – Outstar model – Counter propagation network – Radial basis function networks (10)
FUZZY SETS AND RELATIONS: Properties and Operations on Classical and Fuzzy Sets - Crisp and Fuzzy Relations - Cardinality,
Properties and Operations, Composition, Tolerance and Equivalence Relations - Fuzzy Ordering - Simple Problems. Features of
membership function - Standard forms and Boundaries - fuzzification - membership value assignments - Fuzzy to Crisp Conversions
- Lambda Cuts for fuzzy sets and relations – Defuzzification methods (11)
GENETIC ALGORITHMS AND SOFT COMPUTING APPLICATIONS: Introduction – Genetic operators – Selection, cross-over and
mutation – Fitness function – A simple genetic algorithm – Applications, .Application of Neural Networks: Pattern Recognition -
Image compression – Communication - Control systems, Applications of Fuzzy Logic: Fuzzy Pattern Recognition - Fuzzy Image
compression - Fuzzy Logic controllers. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sivanandam S N, Sumathi S. and Deepa S. N., “Introduction to Neural Networks using Matlab 6.0”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications,
New Delhi, 20th Reprint, 2014.
2. Sivanandam S N, and Deepa S. N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd Edition, June 2011.
3. Timothy Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 3rd Edition, 2010.
4. Laurene Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks”, Pearson Education India, New Delhi, 2004.
5. David E Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimisation and Machine Learning, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004.
6. Zimmermann H.J., “Fuzzy set Theory and its Applications”, Springer India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, Nov. 2001.
18EA42 / 18EE39 / 18ED36 / 18EM33 MACHINE LEARNING AND APPLICATIONS

3003
PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS: Basic Definitions, Types of learning, Probability Theory, Probability Reasoning, Model Selection,
Curse of Dimensionality, Decision Theory, Information Theory, Binary Variables, Multinomial Variables, Gaussian Distribution,
Exponential Family, Nonparametric Methods, Belief Networks. (12)
LINEAR MODELS FOR REGRESSION AND CLASSIFICATION: Linear Basis Function Models, Bias-Variance Decomposition,
Bayesian Linear Regression, Bayesian Model Comparison, Evidence Approximation, Limitations of Fixed Basis Functions,
Discriminant Functions, Probabilistic Generative and Discriminative Models, Laplace Approximation, Bayesian Logistic Regression.
(11)
110
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
NEURAL NETWORKS: Introduction, Reforcement Learning, Feed-forward Network functions, Error Back propagation, Hessian
Matrix, Mixture Density Networks, Bayesian Neural Networks, Convolution Neural Network, Dual Representations, Constructing
Kernels, Gaussian Processes, Maximum Margin Classifiers, Relevance Vector Machines. (11)
APPLICATIONS OF MACHINE LEARNING ALGORITHMS: Content Based Image Retrieval, Machine Learning Approach for face
Recognition, Computer Aided Diagnosis, Computer Vision, Speech Recognition, Text Mining, Thinking Machines, Smart Machines,
Business Applications of Deep Learning, Software Reliability Prediction, Medical Imaging. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep Kumar and Arvind Tiwari., “Ubiquitous Machine Learning and Its Applications”, IGI Global, 2017.
2. David Barber., “Bayesian Reasoning and Machine Learning”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Christopher M Bishop., “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, New Delhi, 2013.
18EA43 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES FOR AUTOMATION

3003
DYNAMICS OF ELECTRIC DRIVES: Fundamental torque equation - multi-quadrant operation- nature and classification of load
torques- modes of operation. Induction Motor Drives: Construction - Principle – performance characteristics – stator voltage
control, frequency control, v/f control, rotor resistance control. (10)
VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Introduction to Park’s and Clarke’s transformation - Principle of vector
control - Direct vector control-indirect vector control - stator flux oriented vector control - rotor flux oriented vector control –
sensorless control - Direct torque control. (12)
SPECIAL DRIVES: PMSM – principle - PMSM flux density distribution - Controller – SynRM - principle - magnetic flux density and
operating point - BLDC - principle, controller – Stepper motor – types, drive circuit. (12)
CONFIGURATIONS OF I/O CONTROL: AC drive Hardware Blocks – Control Blocks – Automatic Motor Adaptation –
Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). Digital input and output - Analog input and Output control - word access - motion
control - sequential logic control(SLC) - parameterization of different communication protocol: RS 485 – MODBUS – PROFIBUS. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gopal K Dubey, "Fundamentals of Electric Drives", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2005.
2. John Park, Steve Mackey and Edwin Wright, "Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control", Elsevier, 2003.
3. Ned Mohan, “Advanced Electric Drives: Analysis, Control and Modeling using Simulink”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2001.
4. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, New York 1997
5. Peter Vas, "Vector Control of AC Machines", Oxford University Press, 1990.
6. T. J. E. Miller, “Brushless Permanent-Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives”, Clarendon Press Oxford, 1989.
ONE CREDIT COURSE
18EK06 FIELD PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG ARRAY FOR ANALOG SYSTEM DESIGN

1001
INTRODUCTION: Overview of Analog Design - Introduction to Field Programmable Analog Array (FPAA) and its advantages - Role
of EDA tool in Analog Design process. (2)
CONFIGURABLE ANALOG MODULES: Introduction to Anadigm`s inbuilt Analog Functions (CAM) - Generation of Clock Signals -
Signal Delay - Performance of CAM. (3)
SIMULATION and PHYSICAL REALIZATION: Features of ANADIGMDESIGNER2 EDA tool for simulating the analog design -
Configuring the FPAA with analog design - Real time verification. (2)
FPAA IO INTERFACING: Interfacing of input and output signals to the FPAA - Rauch Filter - Output Buffer. (2)
STATIC CONFIGURATION: Full Wave Rectifier - Tone Generation and Notch filter - Voltage Controlled Oscillator - Pulse Width
Modulation - Phase Detector. (3)
DYNAMIC RECONFIGURATION: Reconfigurable Analog design using FPAA, Various methods of Reconfiguration - Real time
verification. (3)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas L. Floyd, “Electronic devices Conventional Current Version” Pearson Education Ltd., Ninth Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, “Instructor’s Resource Manual to Accompany Electronic Devices”, Pearson Education Ltd., Eighth Edition,
2008.
3. Thomas L. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Pearson Education Ltd., Eighth Edition, 2008.
111
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
18EK07 AUTOMOTIVE SOFTWARE TESTING

1001
BASICS OF AUTOMOTIVE SOFTWARE TESTING: Introduction – Conventional Software Testing Vs Automotive Software Testing
- Need for Automotive Software Testing - Major recalls and impact of recalls – Case study. (3)
FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE TESTING: Basics of Software Development Life Cycle – Model Based - Modular - Reusable
Design - Static Analysis, Dynamic Analysis - Code Coverage including MC/DC (Modified Condition/Decision Coverage) and LCSAJ
(Linear Code Sequence and Jump) - Data Flow and Control Flow analysis - Unit/System/Integration Testing - Code Quality -
Software Quality metrics - test management - Importance of using qualified software for software testing. (6)
CODING STANDARDS: Coding Standards - important - Coding Standard for Automotive Industry – MISRA C: 2012 with Security
Amendments - Top 10 secure coding best practices - Advantages of adhering to coding standards. (3)
PROCESS STANDARD: Introduction to ISO 26262 – Functional Safety Standard - Details about ASIL (Automotive Safety Integrity
Level) - Details about Part 4 and Part 6 of ISO 26262 – Failure Mode Effective analysis (FMEA). (3)
Total L: 15
Lab Session (along with Theory Class)
 Practical Implementation of Fundamentals of software testing using LDRA Software.
 Adhering to MISRA C coding guidelines using LDRA Software.
 Achieving compliance to ISO 26262 using LDRA Software.
 In case of non-availability of MISRA C document, students may refer to CERT C standard.
 Example of Code Coverage and Executing Test Cases on Raspberry Pi or Arduino.
REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep Oak and Renu Rajani , “Software Testing – Effective Methods, Tools and Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications,
2004.
2. Stephen L. Montgomery,”MISRA C: Guidelines for the use of the C Language in Critical Systems”, Motor Industry Research
Association,2013.
3. Robert C. Seacord, “The CERT C Secure Coding Standard”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 1st edition, 2008.
4. Justyna Zander, Ina Schieferdecker,Pieter J. Mosterman, “Model-based Testing for Embedded Systems”, CRC Press, Taylor
and Francis Group, 2012.
18EK13 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS

1001
INTRODUCTION: Systems, Systems Engineering and System on Systems Design Models flow: Waterfall, Spiral and INCOSEVEE
model Product development flow Values of Systems Engineering (4)
ROLES OF SYSTEM ENGINEER: Understanding the Systems Engineering goal, Significance of documentation, Knowing about
DSM (Design structure matrix), Interdisciplinary role of Systems Engineering, Behavioral aspects of Systems Engineering (3)
PROCESS: Requirements process, Baseline creation
INNOVATION IN SYSTEM ENGINEERING: Creativity characteristics, About TRIZ, Ideality, Contradictions and approach to resolve
Innovation in Technical systems: Architectural Innovation (3)
DESIGN PROCESS: Definitions, Axioms, Design Matrices, Types and examples, Constraints (3)
SYSTEM RELIABILITY: Approach to achieve system reliability, significance of Reuse (1)
EXAMPLE SYSTEM DESIGN: Designing an Automotive ECU (1)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. “INCOSE Systems Engineering Handbook: A Guide for System Life Cycle Processes and Activities”, Wiley, 2015.
2. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Samuel J. Seymour, Steven M. Biemer, “Systems Engineering Principles and
Practice”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2011.
3. Benjamin S. Blanchard, John E. Blyler, “System Engineering Management”, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2016.
18EK14 ELECTRIC VEHICLES

1001
INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Social and environmental importance of electric vehicles. Conventional Vehicles:
Basics of vehicle performance, vehicle power source characterization, transmission characteristics, and mathematical models to
describe vehicle performance. (3)
History of Hybrid Electric Vehicles - Energy consumption Concept of Hybrid Electric Drive – Architecture: Series Hybrid Electric
Drive, Parallel hybrid electric drive. Fuel Cell basic principle and operation, Types of Fuel Cells, PEMFC and its operation, Modelling
of PEMFC, Super Capacitors. (3)
112
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
ELECTRIC PROPULSION UNIT: Electric components, Configuration and control of drives: DC Motor - Induction Motor - Permanent
Magnet Motor - Switch Reluctance Motor. Drive system efficiency - Energy storage for EV and HEV - Energy storage requirements,
Battery parameters, Modelling of Battery. (5)
Power Electronic Converter for Battery Charging - Charging methods for battery - Design of Z-converter for battery charging. Case
Study: Design of a Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV). (4)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Sheldon S. Williamson, “Energy Management Strategies for Electric and Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles”, Springer, 2013.
2. Chris Mi, M. Abul Masrur, David Wenzhong Gao, “Hybrid Electric Vehicles Principles and Applications with Practical
Perspectives”, Wiley Publication, 2011.
3. Iqbal Husain, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press, 2010.
4. M. Ehsani, Y. Gao, S. Gay and Ali Emadi, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric, and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory,
and Design”, CRC Press, 2009.
5. James Larminie, John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained”, Wiley, 2003.
6. C.C. Chan and K.T. Chau, “Modern Electric Vehicle Technology”, OXFORD University Press, 2001.
18EK15 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITS AND APPLICATIONS

1001
INTRODUCTION: Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs), Global Positioning System (GPS), Functional requirements of PMUs and
Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs), Phasor estimation of nominal frequency inputs. (2)
TRANSIENT RESPONSE: Transient response of Instrument Transformers, Transient response of Filters, Transient response during
Electromagnetic and Power Swings, Impact of Transient Response of Phasor Measurements. (2)
APPLICATIONS OF PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNITs: Phasor Measurements Unit based Adaptive Protection of Transmission
Lines, Out-of-Step protection, Adaptive System Restoration, Phasor Measurement units in Large Scale Integration of Wind and
Solar Energy systems, Introduction to Wide Area Monitoring, Protection and Control (WAMPAC). Deployment of large scale PMUs
in Utilities, Globally and in Indian Power sector. (8)
STANDARDS: Synchrophasor Standards - IEEE C37.118.1-2011, IEEE C37.118a-2014, IEC 61850 & IEEE C37.118, Evaluation /
Validation of PMU-Total Vector Error (TVE) both Steady State and Dynamic/Transient conditions. IEEE C37.118.2-2011. (3)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Phadke A.G., Thorp J.S., “Synchronized Phasor Measurements and Their Applications”, Springer Publications, Second Edition,
2017.
2. IEEE C37.118.1a-2014, IEEE Standard for Syncrophasor Measurements for Power Systems.
3. IEEE C37.242, 2013 - Guide for Synchronization, Calibration, Testing, and Installation of Phasor Measurement Units (PMU) for
Power System Protection and Control.
4. IEEE C37.244, 2013 - Guide for Phasor Data Concentrator (PDC) Requirements for Power System Protection, Control, and
Monitoring.
5. Phadke A.G., Thorp J.S, “Computer Relaying for Power Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., Research Studies Press Limited,
2nd Edition, 2009.
6. IEC 61850-90-5, Communication networks and systems for power utility automation – Part 90-5: Use of IEC 61850 to transmit
Synchrophasor information according to IEEE C37.118.
18EK16 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING FOR REAL-TIME APPLICATIONS

1001
INTRODUCTION TO REAL-TIME CONCEPTS: Concept of Real-Time Systems - Characteristics of Real-Time Systems – Need for
Real-Time Operating Systems (2)
LabVIEW REAL-TIME HARDWARE: ARCHITECTURE: Overview of Hardware Setup and Installation -Configuration of Network
Settings of Real-Time Target and Host Computer - Configuration of Real-Time Target in Measurement and Automation Explorer -
Configuring Real-Time targets through the LabVIEW Project. (3)
PROGRAMMING LabVIEW REAL-TIME MODULE: Accessing I/O using driver APIs or Scan Engine – Multithreading – Sleep
Mode -Timing loops in LabVIEW Real-Time. (4)
COMMUNICATION: Inter-process Communication: Sharing Data locally on Real-Time Target - Sharing Data between Deterministic
and Non-Deterministic Processes - Sharing data between non-deterministic processes - Communication between Real-Time Target
and Host Computer – Implementation of Network Communication (4)
DEBUGGING AND DEPLOYMENT: Standard Debugging Techniques – Analysis of Memory Consumption – Creating Build
Specification – Communication with Deployed Applications. (2)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Course Manual Titled, “LabVIEW Real-time Application Development”, Published by National Instruments, 2016.
2. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin, Matt Nawrocki, “LabVIEW: Advanced Programming Techniques”, Second Edition, 2006.
3. Garry W. Johnson,”LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.
113
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
18EK17 CAD TOOLS FOR VLSI DESIGN AUTOMATION

1001
INTRODUCTION TO VLSI DESIGN PROCESS: Design flow – Role of CAD tools in the design process. (3)
DESIGN CAPTURE: Features of Mentor Graphics Design Architect IC a tool for schematic capture, netlisting, simulation setup and
results viewing - Creating an Inverter using DA_IC - ELDO simulator. (3)
SIMULATION: Features of Advance MS simulator a tool for verification platform for AMS design and verification - Exercises. (3)
PHYSICAL LAYOUT: Features of the IC Station Tool Suite for full custom IC design flow editing, Schematic - driven layout and top
-level floor planning/routing – Exercises. (3)
PHYSICAL VERIFICATION: Features of Calibre LVS for physical verification tool, for layout versus schematic – Exercises. (3)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES :
1. WayneWolf, "Modern VLSI Design: Systems on Chip Design", Pearson Education Inc., Indian Reprint, 2007.
2. Michael John Sebastian Smith, “Application-Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
3. http://www.mentor.com/products/ic_nanometer_design.
18EK18 DIGITAL DESIGN WITH VERILOG HDL

1001
INTRODUCTION: Digital Design, Verification and Hardware description languages. (1)
VERILOG FOR DESIGN: Introduction to Logic Synthesis, Synthesizable Constructs - Inferring Combinational Circuit elements -
Inferring Sequential Circuit elements - State Machines - Counters - Encoders/Decoders - Synthesis of Loops - Data Path - Design
Partitioning / Methodology - Synthesizable Code-care about, Sensitivity list and Simulation Synthesis mismatch conditions. (3)
VERILOG FOR VERIFICATION: Delay Modeling in Verilog on Briefly behavioral constructions, Fork-join, Events - Clock Generation
- Data Generation, Deterministic, Random - Some Systems Tasks - Test Bench Architecture. (2)
DESIGN EXAMPLES: RISC Stored Program Machine - UART Design (2)
Mini Projects Specification and Scope Discussions (3)
Review of Projects: Presentation by student groups (3)
(15 min per student group)
Feedback on the Design Project (1)

Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Pearson Education, 2003
2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall NJ, USA, 2003.
3. Bhaskar J,”A Verilog Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012.
18EK19 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1001
INTRODUCTION: Major components of an Automobile Systems and its functions - Overview of four stroke I.C.engine -Four
Cylinder Engine – Spark firing sequence. (2)
AUTOMOBILE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS: Block diagram of Automobile electrical
system - Typical wiring diagram - Starter system: General layout - Basic starting circuit - Ignition system: Battery and magneto types
- Battery ignition system for four cylinder engine - Ignition system circuit - Distributed ignition coil and ignition advance. Charging
system: Typical alternator in common use - cut-out and regulator - Lighting & accessories system - Wiper motor – circuit diagram of
wind screen wiper motor and washer. (5)
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Physical Variables to be measured in automobiles: Position sensor: Magnetic reluctance and Hall
effect sensor - Temperature sensor: Coolant temperature - Speed sensor – Fuel level sensor - Acceleration sensor - Actuator:
Principle of solenoid and Fuel injector. (4)
DIAGNOSTICS AND COMMUNICATION BUS: Block diagram of Engine control unit - Diagnostics procedure: Introduction –
Diagnostics theory – On board and Off-board diagnostics – Diagnostics Link Connector – Vehicle condition monitoring - CAN bus -
topology – Data transmission – CAN Protocol – Overview of CAN controller - LIN bus: overview – Data Transmission System – LIN
protocol. (4)
Total L : 15
REFERENCES:
1. KK Jain , RB Sharma, “Automobile Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2011.
2. Ronald K.J., “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Publications, USA, 2009.
3. William B. Ribbens, Norman P. Mansour, “Understanding of Automotive Electronics”, Butterworth-Heinemann, United Kingdom
2003.
4. “Automotive Electrics / Automotive Electronics - Ed5”, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004.
114
th
59 ACM 09.06.2018
5. EdMay, “Automotive Mechanics Vol -2”, McGraw Hill Publications, Australia 2004.
6. Tom Denton, “Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems”, Routledge Taylor & Francis Group, London & New York, 2002.
AUDIT COURSES
18EA81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18EA82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

115
59th ACM 09.06.2018
13. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment (2018 REGULATIONS)
*
ME POWER ELECTRONICS & DRIVES (Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 75 )

I SEMESTER
18ED01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ED02 Power Semiconductor Devices 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ED03 Modelling and Control of Power Converters 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ED04 Power Converters and Analysis 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18ED05 Object Computing and Data Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18ED51 Power Converters Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18ED81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18ED06 Modeling and Analysis of Electrical Machines 3 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ED07 Electric Drives and Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ED08 Switched Mode Power Converters 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18ED09 Power Electronics in Wind and Solar Power Conversion 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18ED__ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED52 Drives and Controls Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 5
18ED61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18ED82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18ED53 Power Electronic Systems Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18ED71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 24 hrs 12 2 10 18 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18ED72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
18ED21 Industrial Approach to Power Converter Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18ED22 Internet of Things 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18ED23 Totally Integrated Automation 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE (Five to be opted)
18ED24 Special Machines and Controllers 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED25 Digital Controllers for Power Electronic Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED26 Advanced Control of Electric Drives 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED27 Soft Computing Techniques for Renewable Energy Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED28 Flexible AC Transmission system 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED29 Power Quality Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED30 Advanced Topics in Power Electronics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED31 HVDC Transmission 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED32 Design of Solar Photovoltaic systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED33 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED34 Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED35 Virtual Instrumentation Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED36 Machine Learning and Application 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED37 Pulse Width Modulated Power Electronic Converters 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED38 Smart Grid Technologies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED39 Distributed Generation and Micro grids 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ED40 Hybrid Electric Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
116
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ONE CREDIT COURSES
18EK01 Low Voltage Switchgear
18EK02 Energy Auditing and Conservation Techniques
18EK03 Power Electronics in More Electric Aircraft
18EK04 Power Quality in Industries
18EK05 Solar PV Systems – Design, Simulation and Monitoring and Control
18EK10 Industrial Drives for Automation
18EK16 Graphical Programming for Real-Time Applications
117
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ED01/18EA01/18EE01/18EM01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING

2203
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, ―Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version‖, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018.
2. David C Lay, ―Linear Algebra and its Applications‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017.
3. Medhi J., ―Stochastic Processes‖, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2017.
4. Saeed Ghahramani, ―Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes‖, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016.
5. Elsgolts L., ―Differential Equation and Calculus of Variation‖, MIR Publication, Moscow, 1977.
18ED02 POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

3003
INTRODUCTION & POWER DIODES: Status of Development of power semiconductor Devices - Types of static switches -
Controlled and uncontrolled - Ideal and real switches – on-state and switching losses. EMI due to switching. Use of heat sinks –
selection parameters and mounting techniques Power Diodes: Types - Electrical rating - Switching and steady state
characteristics - Switching aid circuits - Series and parallel operation - Schottky diodes - Fast recovery diodes. (11)
THYRISTORS: Physics of device operation - Electrical rating. Types of thyristors: Asymmetrical thyristor - Reverse conducting
thyristors, light fired thyristors. Turn on & off mechanisms, Gate circuit requirements - Driver circuit- Protection - Switching and
steady state characteristics-Switching losses. Series and parallel operation of thyristors. TRIACS, GTOS AND MCTS: Electrical
rating - Switching and steady state characteristics - Protection - Gate circuit requirements. (11)
POWER TRANSISTORS: Types - Ratings - Static and switching characteristics - Driver circuit - Switching aid circuit - Power
Darlington. POWER MOSFETS: Types - Comparison with BJTs - Structure - Principle of operation - Switching losses - Driver circuit
- Switching aid circuit. (11)
IGBTS: Comparison with power BJT and MOSFET - Structure - Principle of working - Switching characteristics - Gate drive
requirements. HV IGBT structure - Principle of working - Comparison with GTO. EMERGING DEVICES: SITs-characteristics -
Power Integrated circuit – Characteristics - Field controlled thyristors - New semiconductor materials for devices - Intelligent power
modules. Integrated Gate commutated Thyristor (IGCT). Comparison of Power semiconductor devices. (12)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
nd
1. MD Singh and K B Khanchandani, "Power Electronics" Tata McGraw Hill, 2 Edition, 2006.
2. Rashid, M.H., "Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 3 rd Edition, 2003.
3. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland and William P. Robbins., "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design", John Wiley
and Sons, 3rd Edition, 2003.
4. Joseph, Vithayanthil, "Power Electronics: Principles and Applications," McGraw Hill,1995.
5. Williams, B.W., "Power Electronics: Devices, Drivers, Applications and Passive Components", ELBS Oxford University Press,
1992.
6. Sen PC,"Modern Power Electronics ", Wheeler publishing Co, McGraw Hill, 2005.
18ED03 / 18EM35 MODELLING AND CONTROL OF POWER CONVERTERS

3003
STATE SPACE MODELLING: Review of basic control theory – Control design techniques such as P, PI,PID and lead lag
compensator design. State space control design approach –Modeling of physical systems - Solution to vector differential equations
and state transition matrix.- Controllability and Observability Small signal Model of Power Converters: - Linearizing Averaged Power
Stage Dynamics - Frequency Response of Converter Power Stage - Small-Signal Gain of PWM Block - Small-Signal Model for
PWM DC-to-DC Converters (12)
TRANSFER FUNCTIONS AND STATE SPACE MODEL OF POWER CONVERTER: Bode Plot for Transfer Functions - Power
Stage Transfer Functions and State space modelling of Buck Converter, Boost Converter, and Buck/Boost Converter - Empirical
Methods for Small-Signal Analysis (11)
118
59th ACM 09.06.2018
DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE AND CLOSED LOOP PERFORMANCE OF POWER CONVERTERS: Frequency Domain
Performance Criteria - Time-Domain Performance Criteria, Stability of Power Converters: - Nyquist Criterion - Relative Stability:
Gain Margin and Phase Margin Asymptotic Analysis Method – Frequency-Domain Performance - Voltage Feedback Compensation
and Loop Gain - Compensation Design and Closed-Loop Performance (11)
INTRODUCTION TO NONLINEAR SYSTEMS: Phase plane analysis of nonlinear system using linear approximation - Limit cycle
and periodic solutions - Singular points and qualitative behaviour. Stability of nonlinear systems - Lyapunov direct and indirect
methods (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Pulsewidth Modulated DC-to-DC Power Conversion Circuits, Dynamics, and Control Designs, Byungcho Choi, IEEE Press,
Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2013.
2. Sira -Ramirez, R.Silva Ortigoza, ‗Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices‘, Springer, 2006.
3. Ogata, K., ‗Modern Control Engineering‘, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
4. C.T. Chen, ‗Linear Systems Theory and Design‘‘ Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 1999.
5. Hassan K. Khalil, ‗Nonlinear Systems‘, Pearson Educational International Inc. Upper Saddle River, 3rd Edition, 2001.
6. Applied Nonlinear Control, Jean-Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, Prentice Hall, 1991 - Technology & Engineering
18ED04 POWER CONVERTERS AND ANALYSIS

3204
AC TO DC CONVERTERS: Single phase and three phase bridge rectifiers, Fully controlled converters with RL, RLE loads,
Freewheeling diode, Dual Converter, PWM rectifiers
Evaluation of performance parameter, Input harmonics and output ripple, smoothing inductance, power factor, effect of source
inductance and overlap, Design of converter circuits – Snubber circuit design - Control circuit strategies. (12+7)
DC TO DC CONVERTERS: DC choppers: Step down dc chopper with R, RL and RLE loads - Control strategies- Continuous and
discontinuous current operations - Two quadrant and four quadrant DC chopper - Multiphase DC chopper - Switching mode
regulators: Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost and CUK regulators - Chopper circuit design – Control circuit strategies. (11+8)
AC TO AC CONVERTERS: Principle of phase control, single-phase bi-directional controllers with R, L and R-L loads, 3-phase bi-
directional Controllers, different Configurations, Analysis with pure R and L loads. Principle of operation, - single phase and three
phase cyclo converters - Control circuit strategies. (11+7)
DC TO AC CONVERTERS: Single phase and Three phase bridge inverters - Evaluation of performance parameters –Voltage
control and Waveform improvement Techniques – Current source inverters - Inverter circuit design - SVPWM – Introduction to
multilevel inverter (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Rashid M.H., ―Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2013.
2. VedamSubrahmanyam, "Power Electronics", New Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2006.
3. MD Singh and K B Khanchandani,"Power Electronics", McGraw Hill, 2006.
4. Sen PC,"Modern Power Electronics ", Wheeler publishing Co, McGraw Hill, 2005.
5. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland, William P. Robbins, ‖Power Electronics: Converters, Applications, and Design‖, John Wiley
and Sons, Inc., New York, 2003.
6. Ramanarayanan V., "Course Material on Switched Mode Power Conversion", Department of Electrical Engineering, Indian
Institute of Science, Bangalore, 2007.
15EA05 / 18ED05 / 15EE05 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES

3 2 0 4
PRINCIPLES OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Procedure Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Programming
andObjects-Manipulators. Functions in C++- Call by Reference - Return by reference - Inline functions - Default, Const Arguments -
Function Overloading - Friend Functions - Member functions - Nesting of Member functions -Private member functions - Static data
members - Static Member Functions - Arrays of Objects -Objects as Function Arguments - Friend Functions. (10+7)
CONSTRUCTORS: Parameterized Constructor-Copy constructor - Multiple Constructors in a Class – Destructors. Inheritance-

– Hybrid Inheritance. Polymorphism- Compile and Run Time Polymorphism – Operator Overloading - Virtual function. (11+7)
LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: Stacks - Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Subroutine handling,
Recursion-Queues-Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Job Scheduling.Lists- Primitive Operations -
Singly linked lists, Doubly linked lists, Circular lists – Applications: Addition of Polynomials (10+7)
119
59th ACM 09.06.2018
NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: Trees- Terminologies- Binary Tree traversal. (2+2)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Herbert Schildt, ―C++ - The Complete Reference", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Nell Dale, ―C++ Plus Data Structures‖, Jones & Bartlett, Massachusetts, 2011.
3. Harvey M Deitel and Paul J Deitel, ―C++ How to Program‖, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2010.
New Delhi, 2009.
5. Stanley B Lippman, Josee Lajoie and Barbara E Moo, ―The C++ Primer‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
18ED51 POWER CONVERTERS LABORATORY

0042
1. Study of Characteristics of Power Semiconductor Devices.

2. Performance analysis of AC to DC converter with RL and RLE Load
3. Performance analysis of AC to AC converter with RL and RLE Load
4. Performance analysis of DC to DC converter with RL and RLE Load
5. Performance analysis of DC to AC converter under voltage and v/f control mode.
6. Mini Project
Total P: 60
18ED06 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES

3003
GENERALIZED THEORY & LINEAR TRANSFORMATION: Conversions – Basic two pole machine – Transformer with movable
secondary – Transformer voltage and speed voltage - kron‘s primitive machine - Invariance of power – Transformation from
displaced brush axis three phases to two phases. Rotating axes to stationary axes – Transformed impedance matrix – Torque
calculations. (11)
INDUCTION MACHINES: Generalized representation- Performance equations - Steady state analysis – Transient analysis - Single-
phase Induction motor-Transfer function formulation - Double cage machine - Harmonics. (11)
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Generalized representation - Steady state analysis-Transient analysis-Electromechanical transients

(11)
DC & SPECIAL MACHINES: Generalized representation – Operation with displaced brushes - Motor (shunt type only) operation -
Steady state and transient analysis. Generalized representation and steady state analysis of Reluctance motor –Brushless DC
motor-Variable reluctance motor. (12)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bimbhra P.S., "Generalised Circuit Theory of Electrical Machines", Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2002.
2. Krishnan R., ―Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control‖, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
3. Chee-Mun Ong ―Dynamic simulation of electrical machinery using MATLAB‖ Prentice – Hall, Inc, 1998.
4. Krause, P.C., O. Wasynczuk, and S.D. Sudhoff, ―Analysis of Electric Machinery‖, IEEE Press, 1995.
5. Adkins B., ―The Generalized Theory of Electrical Machines‖, Dover Publishers, 1980.
6. Ion Boldea and S.A. Nasar, ―Electric Drives‖, CRC Press LLC, New York, 1999.
18ED07 / 18EM05 ELECTRIC DRIVES AND CONTROL

3003
DYNAMICS & CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL DRIVES: Introduction – Parts of Electrical Drives- Fundamental Torque Equations –
Speed Torque Conventions and Multiquadrant Operation – Nature & Classification of Load Torques - Modes of Operation –Closed-
Loop Control of Drives. (11)
INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Stator Control: control by AC voltage controllers - Variable frequency square wave VSI drives -
PWM Drives - CSI drives - closed loop control. Rotor Control: Static rotor resistance control - Slip power recovery : Static Kramer
drive -Static Scherbius drive. (11)
VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTORS: Principle of vector control -Rotor flux - Oriented control, Stator Flux-oriented
control, Magnetizing flux-oriented control of Induction machines. Sensorless Vector and Direct Torque Controlled Drives: Basic
types of torque controlled drive scheme: vector drives- direct torque controlled drives. (12)
SPECIAL DRIVES: Synchronous Motor Drives: Scalar control – True synchronous and self control modes – PMSM Motor and
Control - SynRM motor and Control - Switched reluctance motor and control. Configurations of I/O Control: AC drive Hardware
Blocks – Control Blocks – Automatic Motor Adaptation – Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). (11)
Total L : 45
120
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
2. Ion Boldea and S.A. Nasar, ―Electric Drives‖, CRC Press LLC, New York, 1999.
3. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, New York,
1997.
4. Pillai S.K., "Analysis of Thyristor Power Conditioned Motors", University Press, 1992.
6. T.J.E. Miller, ―Brushless Permanent-Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives‖, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
18ED08 SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERTERS

3204
DC-DC CONVERTER DYNAMICS: Reactive Elements in Power Electronic Systems, Types of inductor, Types of transformer,
Types of Capacitors for power electronic applications - Exact and Approximate Analysis of DC-DC converters, Non-isolated DC to
DC Power Converter- Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost, Cuk Converters, Isolated DC to DC Power Converter - Forward, Flyback, Half/Full
Bridge Converters – Design and Analysis – Case Study – Steady state model, dynamic model – EMI – EMC Complaints. (12+8)
RESONANT CONVERTERS: Classification of resonant converters-resonant load converters - principal of operation - SMPS using
resonant circuit- steady state modeling. Resonant switch converters- Buck converter with ZCS and ZVS-operation and analysis.
(11+7)
CLOSED LOOP CONTROL OF POWER CONVERTERS: Closed Loop Control of Switching Converters - Steady State Error,
Control Bandwidth, and Compensator Design - Closed Loop Dynamic Performance Functions - Design of feed - back
compensators. (11+7)
AC-DC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION SUPPLIES: Single-Phase Single-Stage Non-isolated Boost PFC, Output Capacitor Size,
DCM Boost Inductor Selection, CCM Boost Inductor Selection, High-Power PFC and Load Sharing, Surge Protection, Load Short-
Circuit Protection, Three-Phase PFC. (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Marian K. Kazimierczuk, "Pulse-width Modulated DC-DC Power Converters", Wiley, 2008.
3. Keng Wu, "Switch-Mode Power Converters-Design and Analysis", 1st Edition, Academic Press, 2005.
4. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic ―Fundamentals of Power Electronics‖, Springer, 2005.
5. K.Kit Sum, "Switch Mode Power Conversion: Basic Theory and Design", CRC Press, 1984.
6. Rashid M.H., ―Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2013.
18ED09 / 18EM09 POWER ELECTRONICS IN WIND AND SOLAR POWER CONVERSION

3204
SOLAR PV AND WIND POWER: Trends in energy consumption - World energy scenario – Energy sources and their availability -
Conventional and renewable sources - Solar PV and Wind potential in India and World – Solar and Wind Data - Policies and
Regulations - Standards and codes used for Renewable Energy Systems (11+7)
SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Solar radiation and measurement - Solar cells and their characteristics -
Classification of Solar PV panels- Influence of insolation and temperature - PV arrays- Maximum power point tracking – Algorithms
Power Conditioning Schemes - Charge controllers - Inverters – Classifications and Design - Analysis of PV Systems – BoS
components - Stand alone and Grid integrated Solar PV Systems – Building Integrated PV (BIPV) - Synchronized operation with
grid supply - Harmonic standards, Harmonic problems. (12+7)
WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: Basic Principle of wind Energy conversion - Nature of Wind - Power in the wind -
Components of Wind Energy Conversion System (WECS) – Wind farm and its accessories - Generators used in Wind Energy
Conversion Systems - Performance of Induction Generators for WECS- Power conditioning schemes - Controllable DC Power from
SEIGs - System performance. Grid Connected WECS - Concepts of Grid Integration - Grid related problems - Generator control -
Performance improvements - Different schemes - AC voltage controllers - Harmonics and PF improvement. (11+8)
HYBRID POWER SYSTEMS: Wind / Solar PV integrated systems – Other alternate Systems – Requirements - Optimization of
system components Power conditioning schemes for Hybrid Power Systems (HPS) – Design of HPS using software - Storage types
and selection methods - Applications of HPS (11+8)
Total: 75 L : 45 : T: 30
REFERENCES:
1. S Sumathi, Ashok Kumar L, S Sureka, ―Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory, Modeling
with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques‖, Green Energy and Technology, Springer; 2015.
2. Roger A. Messenger, Jerry Ventre,‖Photovoltaic System Engineering‖CRC Press, 2004.
3. Mukund R Patel, ―Wind and Solar Power Systems‖, CRC Press, 2004.
4. Thomas Markvart and Luis Castaser, ―Practical Handbook of Photovoltaics‖, Elsevier Publications, UK, 2003.
5. Rai, G.D., "Non-conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.
6. Daniel, Hunt, V., "Wind Power - A Handbook of WECS", Van Nostrend Co., New York, 1998.
121
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ED52 DRIVES AND CONTROLS LABORATORY
0042
1. Three-phase SPWM pulse generation using dSPACE

2. Performance analysis of three phase induction motorusing variable frequency drive
3. Performance analysis of Synchronous Reluctance motor using variable frequency drive
4. Performance analysis of SRM/BLDC motor using variable frequency drive
5. Performance analysis of PMSM using variable frequency drive
6. Mini project
18ED61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Total P: 60
18ED53 POWER ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS DESIGN LABORATORY

0032
1. Design, development and analysis of DC to DC converters using IGBTs, and Power MOSFETs.
2. Design and development of DC to AC converters using IGBTs, and Power MOSFETs.
3. Design, development and analysis of AC to AC converters of various configurations using SCRs, TRIAC, and IGBTs.
4. Design, development and analysis of AC to DC converters using SCR and Diodes.
5. Interfacing of Power converter simulation circuits using dSPACE.
6. Mini Project
Total P: 45
18ED71 PROJECT WORK – I

0063
IV SEMESTER
18ED72 PROJECT WORK – II

0 0 28 14

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence)
18ED21 INDUSTRIAL APPROACH TO POWER ELECTRONIC DESIGN

3003
NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT: Introduction - Product Development Process - Phases and Stages Gates Model, Product
Specification - Subsystem Specification - Sub-system Design - Design Verification - Prototype Development - Engineering
Verification– Product cost - Design to Cost - Price and Cost - Cost Estimation methods. (7)
Power Converter Circuit and PCB Assembly – Introduction to New wide band gap devices –device characterization - Existing Si
devices and its limitations - - Power converter prototypes with GaN - Benefit analyses (cost, performance and size) ––PCB
Assembly - Material Selection - PCB Layout and Assembly - Thermal Design - Packaging Design – Prototyping. (7)
Battery – Types – Charging Circuit – Health monitoring – Sizing Techniques. (3)
122
59th ACM 09.06.2018
EMBEDDED SYSTEM: Embedded Systems Development Life Cycle - Functional Block Diagram - System Architecture - Control
Architecture - Communication Architecture - Firmware Architecture - Firmware Requirement Specifications - Microcontroller
Selection - Microcontroller Architecture - Driver Development - Scheduler and Interrupt Design - Digital Control Methods - Power
Converter Control Methods - Digital Implementation of Controller - State Machine Design. (8)
DESIGN VERIFICATION AND REGULATORY COMPLIANCE: Verification and ValidationProcess -Types of Verification - Case
Study –Design Verification Test for power converters - Design Verification and Validation (DVT) Automation - Field Issues and
Handling - Service Log - Conditions for Serviceability - Remote Monitoring, Control and performance check - , Worst Case Analysis-
Vulnerability conditions and Warranty definitions. (7)
Product Quality - Regulatory Compliance and Safety - ESD&EMI/EMC - Environmental Regulations - Audible Noise – Reliability -
Fault Detection & Isolation - Quality management Workflow. (5)
MANUFACTURING AND INDUSTRIALIZATION: Product Designation - Manufacturing - Operational map - Industrialization Project
Follow-Up - PCBA Design - Make or Buy Analyses - Industrial Expenses - PCBA process - Failure Mode Effects Analysis (FMEA) -
Manufacturing Tools & Equipment Producing - PCBA Cost Assessment -Design for Manufacturing - Design for Test - Design for
Procurement - Part/Product Evaluation Plan - EP Boards Manufacturing- Incoming Inspection Sheet - Pilot Run Boards
Manufacturing - Mass Production. (8)
REFERENCES:
1. A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge ( PMBOK® Guide )—Fifth Edition, Project Management Institute
2. V. Kumar, R.R. Joshi, and R.C. Bansal, Advanced Power Electronics, Ashirwad Publications, Jaipur, India, Feb. 2010.
3. Andrzej M Trzynadlowski, Introduction to Modern Power Electronics, Wiley, 2010
4. V. Kumar, R.R. Joshi, and Dr. R.C. Bansal, Power Electronics with Matlab, Himanshu Publications, New Delhi, India, 2009.
5. Mohan, Undeland and Robbins, Power Electronics: converters, applications and design, 3nd ed. John Wiley & Sons, 2003
6. Robert Erickson, DraganMaksimovic, Fundamentals of Power Electronics, 2nd Ed, Kwuler, 2001
18ED22 / 18EM23 / 18EE21 / 18EA22 INTERNET OF THINGS

3204
System: Sensors, Actuators, Embedded Computation Units, Communication Interfaces , Software Development (9+5)
Wireless HART - Network Layer Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, TCP & UDP, 6LoWPAN - Application Layer Protocols: COAP, MQTT(13+10)
CLOUD COMPUTING: NIST Visual Model – Essential Characteristics –Components of Cloud Computing - Service Models –
Total:75 L:45 + T:30

REFERENCES:
1. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, ―Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach), Universities Press, 2015.
2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, ―Designing the Internet of Things‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, UK, 2014.
3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, ―The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols‖, John Wiley
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Florian Michahelles, ―Architecting the Internet of Things‖, Springer, New York, 2011.
5. Johnny Cache, Joshua Wright and Vincent Liu, ―Hacking Exposed Wireless: Wireless Security Secrets and Solutions‖, Tata
6. Himanshu Dwivedi, Chris Clark and David Thiel, ―Mobile Application Security‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
18EM22 / 18ED23 / 18EE22 / 18EA23 TOTALLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

3204
Automation- IEC/ ISA Standards for Control Elements – Selection criteria for control elements –Utilisation Category with IEC
standards- Construction of Relay Ladder logic with different control elements- Need for PLC - PLC evolution. (6+3)
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS: Architecture of PLC - Types of PLC – PLC modules, PLC Configuration -Scan cycle -
Capabilities of PLC- Selection criteria for PLC – PLC Communication - PLC Wiring- Installation of PLC and its Modules. Types
of Programming – Bit Instructions -Timers and counters– PLC arithmetic functions PTO / PWM generation- High Speed Counter –
Analog Scaling – Encoder Interfacing- Servo drive control – Stepper Motor Control. (12+13)
123
59th ACM 09.06.2018
NETWORKING: PLC Networking- Networking standards & IEEE Standard - Protocols - Field bus - Process bus and Ethernet –
EttherCAT (7+0)
Total:75 L:45 + T:30

REFERENCES:
1. W. Bolton, Programmable logic controllers, Elsevier Ltd, 2015.
2. Frank D Petruzella, Programmable logic controllers‖, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
3. John R Hackworth and Fredrick D Hackworth Jr., Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and Applications‖,
18ED24 / 18EM07 SPECIAL MACHINES AND CONTROLLERS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Need for special electric machines and controllers– Special Applications requirement– Robotics, Aerospace
actuators, space explorations roverand high temperature environments. Stepper Motors: Types – Constructional features, principle
of operation– modes of excitation–torque production in Variable Reluctance (VR) stepper motor, Permanent Magnet & Hybrid
stepper, Static&dynamic characteristics – Speed-Torque characteristics – Drive systems and circuit – introduction, unipolar drive &
bipolar drive circuits, open loop and closed loop control of stepper motor. (11)
SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MACHINES: Constructional features, principle of operation, Torque equationand characteristics control
techniques – Inductance Profile – Commutation timing diagram – starting & running phase excitation – speed controls, general
controller structure– determination of rotor position, current profiling for smoother torque. Synchronous Reluctance
Machines:Synchronous reluctance motor(SynRM) - operating principle, rotor topologies - Space-vector diagram - basic
characteristics of SynRM - Control of SynRM - Power factor, Current angle, saliency ratio– Vector control - constant current control,
constant angle control– Development of Permanent Magnet assisted SynRM (12)
PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS DC MACHINES: Commutation in DC motor, Electronic commutation, Hal sensors, Optical
sensors, Magnetic circuit model, Multiphase Brushless motor, Square wave permanent magnet brushless motor drives, Torque and
emf equation, Torque-speed characteristics,Control by Back-EMF detection circuits, Controllers-Microprocessor based controller,
Field Weakening control. (11)
PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Introduction -Motor Morphologies -Principle of operation, EMF, power
input and torque expressions, Phasor diagram, Torque -speed characteristics -Parameter Estimation Power controllers, Torque
Controllers, , Self-control, Vector control, Current control schemes.Linear Motors: Linear Induction motor (LIM) classification -
construction - Principle of operation - concept of current sheet - goodness factor - DC Linear motor (DCLM) types - circuit equation -
DCLM control applications. (11)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. JuhaPyrhonen, Valeria Hrabovcova, Scott semken, ―Electrical Machines Drives Control – An Introduction‖, Wiley, 2016
2. Riazollah Firoozian, ―Servo Motors and Industrial Control Theory‖, Springer, 2014.
3. Paul Acarnley, ―Stepping Motors a guide to theory and practice‖ IET, 2007
4. Kenjo T, "Stepping Motors and their Microprocessor Control", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
5. Miller T.J.E,"Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
6. KenjoT and Naganori, S., ―Permanent Magnet and Brushless DC Motors", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
18ED25 / 18EM36 / 18EE36 DIGITAL CONTROLLERS FOR POWER ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS

3003
TMS C2XX DSP: Introduction to the C2xx DSP core and code generation. The components of the C2xx DSP core, Peripherals and
Peripheral Interface, System configuration registers, Memory , Types of Physical Memory , memory Addressing Modes , Code
Composer Studio for C2xx DSP. (12)
I/O AND INTERRUPTS: Pin Multiplexing (MUX) and General Purpose I/O Overview, Multiplexing and General Purpose I/O Control
Registers, Programming I/O. Introduction to Interrupts, Interrupt Hierarchy, Interrupt Control Registers, Initializing and Servicing
Interrupts in Software, Programming Interrupts (11)
ADC AND EVENT MANAGERS: ADC Overview , Operation of the ADC in the DSP , Overview of the Event manager (EV), Event
Manager Interrupts , General Purpose (GP) Timers , Compare Units, Capture Units And Quadrature Enclosed Pulse (QEP)
Circuitry, General Event Manager Information, Programming of ADC and Event Managers (11)
DESIGN OF CONTROLLER IN POWER ELECTRONICS: Typical applications: DSP-based implementation of DC-DC buck-boost
converter- DSP-based control of permanent magnet brushless DC machines- DSP-based Implementation of clarkes‘s and park‘s
transformations- DSP-Based implementation of SPWM, SVPWM inverter pulse generation. (11)
Total L: 45
124
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Hamid.A.Toliyat and Steven G.Campbell ―DSP Based Electro Mechanical Motion Control― CRC Press New York, 2004.
2. TMS320C28x CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide - SPRU430
3. TMS320x28xx, 28xxx Peripheral Reference Guide - SPRU566
4. TMS320x2833x System Control and Interrupts Reference Guide - SPRUFB0
5. TMS320x2833x Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Reference Guide - SPRU812
6. TMS320x28xx, 28xxx Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) & High-Resolution Pulse Width Modulator (HRPWM)
Module Reference Guide - SPRU791 & - SPRU924
18ED26 / 18EM30 ADVANCED CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DRIVES

3003
ADVANCED CONTROLMETHODS: Introduction - Power Converter Control using State-Space Averaged Models - Sliding-Mode
Control of Power Converters - Fuzzy Logic Control of Power Converters (11)
MOTOR DRIVES: Review - DC Motor Drives - Induction Motor Drives - Synchronous Motor Drives - Reluctance motor Drives –
Servo Motor Drives (11)
HIGH PERFORMANCE DRIVES: Types of Torque-Controlled Drive Schemes - Vector Drives, Direct-Torque-Controlled Drives –
DSP Controlled Drives – DC Drive, AC Drive, Synchronous motor Drive, and Special Motor drive (12)
ARTIFICIAL-INTELLIGENCE BASED DRIVES: AI-Based Techniques - Applications in Electrical Machines and Drives - Neural-
Network-Based Drives - Fuzzy Based Drives - commercial AI based Drives (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hamid A Toliyat and Steven G. Campbell, ―DSP Based Electromechanical Motion Control‖, CRC Press, 2004.
2. Marcian Cirstea, Andrei Dinu, Malcolm Mc Cormick, Jeen Ghee Khor, ―Neural and Fuzzy Logic Control of Drives and Power
Systems, Newnes Publications, 2002.
3. Ned Mohan, ―Advanced Electric Drives: Analysis, Control and Modeling using Simulink‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2001.
4. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, 1997.
6. Miller T.J.E,"Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989
18ED27 / 18EM26 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEM

3003
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES: Fundamentals – Biological neural network – Artificial neuron – Activation
function – Learning rules - Single Layer Feedback Networks - Unsupervised Learning Networks - Membership Functions - Features
of membership function - Standard forms and Boundaries - fuzzification - membership value assignments. - Toolboxes of MATLAB –
Programming and file processing in MATLAB - Model definition and model analysis using SIMULINK - S-Functions - Converting S-
Functions to blocks. (11)
OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Passive filter design using Genetic Algorithm,
harmonic elimination in inverters, Tuning of controllers, GA, PSO, DE, optimized fuzzy logic for the Maximum Power Point Tracking,
MATLAB/SIMULINK Models of MPPT Techniques, (11)
OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES FOR WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: MATLAB/SIMULINK model of Wind turbine and
Wind Turbine Generators. Prediction of Wind Turbine Power Factor, Pitch Angle Control, MPPT Algorithms, Economic Dispatch For
Wind Power System – Related MATLAB/SIMULINK models-FLC based STATCOM - Prediction of Wind Speed based on FLC -
Fuzzy Logic Controlled SPWM Converter for WECS. (11)
GRID INTEGRATION: Integration of small scale generation into distribution grids, Different types of grid interfaces, Issues related to
grid Integration systems - Phase Locked Loop for Grid Connected Power System, Grid Connected Inverters, Current Controllers for
PWM inverters, MATLAB/SIMULINK model of Grid Integration, and PLL grid connected power system.
HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEMS: Need for hybrid energy system, MATLAB/SIMULINK models of Hybrid Solar PV and Wind Energy
System- - CUK-SEPIC converter, Boost Converter, Hybrid model of Solar PV and Diesel Energy System,– Hybrid Solar PV and
Wind Energy Conversion Systems (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. S. Sumathi, Ashok Kumar.L, P.Sureka, ― ―Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory,
Modeling with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques‖ – Green Energy and Technology, Springer,
2015 edition (20 April 2015).
2. Randall Shaffer., ―Fundamentals of Power Electronics with MATLAB‖ Charles River Media Boston Massachusetts, 2007.
3. Laurene Fausett, ―Fundamentals of Neural Networks‖, Pearson Education India, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Rao S S., "Optimization Theory and Applications", Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2003.
5. H.P.Garg and J.Prakash, ―Solar Energy, Fundamentals and Applications‖, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delh, 1997.
6. Mukund R Patel, ―Wind and Solar Power Systems‖, CRC Press, 2004.
125
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ED28 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

3003
INTRODUCTION: Fundamentals of AC power transmission, transmission problems and needs, emergence of FACTS- FACTS
control considerations, FACTS controllers, Concepts of voltage sourced and current sourced converters for FACTS devices. (11)
SHUNT COMPENSATOR: Principle of operation - types - Variable Impedance type & switching converter type - Static Synchronous
Compensator (STATCOM) - configuration, characteristics and control-applications. (11)
SERIES COMPENSATOR: Principles of operation- types - static series compensation using GCSC, TCSC and TSSC, Static
Synchronous Series Compensator (SSSC) – characteristics and control-applications.
VOLTAGE AND PHASE ANGLE REGULATORS: Principles of operation-types-Steady state model and characteristics of a static
voltage regulators and phase shifters- Thyristor controlled Voltage and phase angle regulators. Switching converter based voltage
and phase angle regulators-applications. (12)
UNIFIED POWER FLOW CONTROLLER: Principles of operation – characteristics- independent active and reactive power flow
control-applications. Comparison of UPFC with the controlled series compensators and phase shifters. Coordinated control of
FACTS Devices. Use of FACTS devices under deregulated environment. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Padiyar K.R., ‗FACTS Controllers for Transmission and Distribution Systems‘ New Age international Publishers, 2007.
2. Loi Lei Lai, ‗Power System Restructuring and Deregulation‘, John Wiley & Sons Ltd. 2003.
3. Mohan R .Mathur and Rajiv Varma K. , ‗Thyristor - based FACTS Controllers for Electrical Transmission Systems‘, IEEE Press,
Wiley Inter science , 2002.
4. Hingorani, L.Gyugyi, ‗Understanding FACTS - Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC Transmission Systems‘, IEEE Press
New York, 2000.
5. Song, Y.H. and Allan T. Johns, ‗Flexible AC Transmission Systems (FACTS)‘, Institution of Electrical Engineers Press, London,
1999.
6. Joseph Vithayathil, ‖Power Electronics‖, McGraw Hill Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering, USA, 1995.
18ED29 / 18EM37 POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT

3003
POWER QUALITY PROBLEMS: Definition of power quality – Power quality issues - Sources and Effects – International standards
of Power quality and Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA)
curve - Voltage sags - Load influence on voltage sags – Stochastic assessment of voltage sags - Voltage Sags in Continuous
Processes - Case Study – Interruptions – Types – Origin - Causes - Transients - Classification- Utility capacitor switching transients
– Utility lightning protection – Transients from load switching - Impact on users. (12)
HARMONICS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE: Harmonics - Sources and effects of harmonic distortion – Standards
– Impacts - Mitigation and control techniques – Devices for controlling harmonic distortion - Simulation using PSCAD.
Electromagnetic interference - Frequency classification - High-frequency interference - Electromagnetic interference – Susceptibility
- EMI mitigation - Cable shielding to minimize Electromagnetic interference - Health concerns of electromagnetic interference.
(11)
POWER QUALITY SOLUTIONS: Power quality monitoring considerations - Choosing monitoring locations - monitoring and
diagnostic techniques for various power quality problems - modeling of power quality (harmonics and voltage sag) problems by
mathematical simulation tools -power line disturbance analyzer –quality measurement equipment - harmonic / spectrum analyzer -
flicker meters – disturbance analyzer. Applications of expert systems for power quality monitoring. (11)
POWER QUALITY CONDITIONERS: Shunt and series compensators - DSTATCOM - dynamic voltage restorer - unified power
quality conditioners - Custom power devices and their applications in power system - Operating principles - Detailed modeling and
analysis of DSTATCOM and DVR - Compensators to mitigate power quality related problems - Realization of DVR and DSTATCOM
by using VSC. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sankaran.C, "Power Quality", CRC Press, Baco Raton, 2017.
2. Math H J Bollen, "Understanding Power Quality Problems: Voltage Sags and Interruptions", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2014.
3. Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan Surya Santoso and H. Wayne Beaty, "Electrical Power Systems Quality", Third
edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
4. Arindam Ghosh and Gerard Ledwich, ―Power quality enhancement using custom power devices‖, Springer-Verlag, New York,
2012.
5. J. Arrillaga, N.R. Watson and S. Chen, "Power System Quality Assessment", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
6. Ned Mohan, Undeland, and Robbins, "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design ", John Wiley and Sons (Asia)
Pte Ltd., Singapore, 2003.
126
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ED30 / 18EM31 ADVANCED TOPICS IN POWER ELECTRONICS

3003
RESONANT CONVERTERS: Zero voltage and Zero current switching – Classification of resonant converters - Basic resonant
circuit concepts - Load resonant converters - Resonant switch converters - Zero voltage switching, clamped voltage topologies -
Resonant DC link Inverters and Zero voltage switching - High frequency link integral half cycle converters - Applications in SMPS
and lighting. (11)
IMPROVED UTILITY INTERFACE: Generation of current harmonics – Current harmonics and power factor - Harmonic standards
and recommended practices - Need for improved utility interface - Improved single phase utility interface - Improved three phase
utility interface - Electromagnetic interference. (11)
FACTS AND CUSTOM POWER: Introduction - Principles of reactive power control in load and transmission line compensation -
Series and shunt reactive power compensation - Concepts of Flexible AC Transmission System (FACTS) - Static var compensators
(SVC) - Thyristor controlled reactor - Thyristor switched capacitor - Solid state power control - Static condensers - Controllable
series compensation - Thyristor controlled phase-angle regulator and unified power flow control - Modeling and methods of
analysis of SVC and FACTS controllers - System control and protection - Harmonics and filters – Simulation and study of SVC
and FACTS under dynamic conditions. (12)
EMERGING DEVICES AND CIRCUITS: Power Junction Field Effect Transistors - Field Controlled Thyristors - JFET based devices
Vs other power devices - MOS controlled thyristors - Power integrated circuits - New semiconductor materials for power devices.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rashid, M.H., ―Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices and Applications‖, Pearson Education (Singapore) Pte. Ltd, New Delhi,
2004. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
3. Mohan Mathur P, Rajiv K Varma, ―Thyristor – Based Facts Controllers for Electrical Transmission Systems‖, John Wiley
and Sons Inc., IEEE Press, USA, 2002.
4. Las Zlo Gyugyi, Narain G Hingorani, ―Understanding Facts: Concepts & Technology of Flexible AC Transmission System‖, The
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. Inc., New York, 2000.
5. Joseph Vithayathil, ‖Power Electronics‖, McGraw Hill Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering, USA, 1995.
6. Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan Surya Santoso and H. Wayne Beaty, "Electrical Power Systems Quality", Third
18ED31 HVDC TRANSMISSION

3003
HVDC TRANSMISSION: Introduction to HVDC transmission, Comparison between HVAC and HVDC systems - Economic,
technical and reliability, limitations, Types of HVDC links - monopolar, bipolar and homopolar links, Components of HVDC
transmission system.
ANALYSIS OF HVDC CONVERTERS: Analysis of HVDC Converters, Rectifier and Inverter operation of Graetz circuit without and
with overlap. Output voltage waveforms and DC voltage in both rectifier and inverter operation, Equivalent circuit of HVDC link. (12)
HVDC SYSTEM CONTROL: Basic means of HVDC system control, desired features, power reversal, Basic controllers - constant
ignition angle, constant current and constant extinction/ advance angle control, power control, high level controllers. Converter
malfunctioning - misfire, arc through, commutation failure. (11)
HARMONICS IN HVDC SYSTEM: Harmonics in HVDC system - Characteristic and uncharacteristic harmonics - Troubles due to
harmonics – Harmonic filters - Active and passive filters - Reactive power control of converters, Protection issues in HVDC, over
voltage and over current protection Voltage and current oscillations, DC reactor design, DC Circuit breakers. (11)
RECENT TRENDS IN HVDC TRANSMISSION: CSC based HVDC system, VSC based HVDC system – Multi-terminal HVDC
systems and HVDC system applications in wind power generation, Interaction between AC and DC systems (11)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kamakshaiah, S and Kamaraju, V, ‗HVDC Transmission‘, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education, Newdelhi 2011.
2. Padiyar, K.R., ‗HVDC transmission systems‘, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2010.
3. Vijay K. Sood, ‗HVDC and FACTS Controllers‘, Kluwer Academic Publishers, New York, 2004.
18ED32 DESIGN OF SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM

3003
FUNDAMENTALS OF SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC TECHNOLOGY: Historical review- Basic approaches and objectives -
Phenomena of light and energy- Energy from the sun - Photovoltaic(PV) cell characteristics - Model of PV cell - Datasheet study.
127
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Solar photovoltaic modules: Design structure of PV modules – Series and parallel connection of cells - Identical cells in series- Non-
identical cells in series - Protecting cells in series - Interconnecting modules in series - Identical cells in parallel-Non-identical cells in
parallel - Protecting cells in parallel – I-V and power curve of PV modules - Effect of temperature. (12)
SOLAR RADIATION: Insolation and irradiance- Insolation variation with time of day - Solar radiation outside the earth‘s atmosphere
- Solar radiation at the earth‘s surface – Solar radiation data - Solar radiation geometry - Effect of solar irradiation - Energy on a
horizontal flat surfaces - Energy on a tilted flat surfaces – Energy with atmospheric effects- PV System Emulation. (11)
SIZING OF PV: Batteries - Capacity – Factors affecting battery performance - Choice of battery – Battery charging and discharging
methods – Battery size. Charge controllers - Types of charge controllers - Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT) - Algorithms of
MPPT- Impedance control methods, Reference cell, Sampling method, Power slope methods, Hill climbing method – PV module
simulation. (11)
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM DESIGN AND APPLICATIONS: Classifications - Standalone, grid connected and hybrid PV systems -
configurations - working principle - Application examples.
Economic Analysis : Payback period-Life cycle costing - Time value of Money-present worth factor -Life cycle cost with example.(11)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Chetan Singh Solanki, ―Solar Photovoltaics: Fundamental, Technologies and Applications‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,
2015.
2. Parimita Mohanty, Tariq Muneer, Mohan Kolhe, ―Solar Photovoltaic System Applications: A Guidebook for Off-Grid
Electrification‖, Springer, 2015.
3. S. Sumathi, L. Ashok Kumar, P. Surekha, ―Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems: An Introduction to Theory, Modeling
with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques‖, Springer, 2015.
18ED33 / 18EM32 / 18EA39 / 18EE35 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

3003
LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Statement of Optimization problems, Principles of single and multi-objective optimization, Graphical
method, Simplex method, Revised simplex method, Two phase simplex method, Duality in linear programming, Sensitivity analysis.
(12)
NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk‘s Method
of Feasible Directions, Rosen‘s Gradient Projection Method , Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the
programming (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sharma J K, ―Operations Research: Theory and Applications‖, Macmillan Company, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Gupta C B, ―Optimization Techniques in Operations Research‖, I K International, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Hamdy A Taha, ―Operations Research: An Introduction‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012.
18ED34 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

3003
SPECTRAL ANALYSIS OF SYSTEMS: Fourier Series and Fourier Transform – - Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) – Properties -
FFT Algorithms – Linear Convolution and Circular Convolution – FFT Applications (10)
DESIGN OF DIGITAL FILTERS: Characteristics of IIR and FIR filters - Design techniques for analog filters-frequency
transformation-Digital IIR filter design: impulse invariant and bilinear transform methods - FIR filter design using Window functions -
Realization structures of filters: direct, cascade and parallel forms. (12)
MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING: Decimation by an integer factor-Interpolation by an integer factor-Sampling rate
conversion by rational factor-Decimation with poly phase filters-Interpolation with poly phase filters – Multistaging – Realization of
Transversal and Polyphase Decimation and Interpolation Filters. (12)
GENERAL-PURPOSE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS: Computer architectures for signal processing – pipelining - hardware
multiplier – accumulator - special instructions - extended parallelism : SIMD, VLIW, and super-scalar processing. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vinay K Ingle & John G Proakis, ― Digital signal processing using MATLAB, Brooks / Cole, 2006.
2. Mitra S K, ―Digital Signal Processing – A Computer based Approach‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Ifeachor E C & Jervis B.W, ―Digital Signal Processing: Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2002.
128
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EM34 / 18ED35 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS
3003
state machines –file I/O- creating LabVIEW executables and projects. (12)
DATA ACQUISITION: DAQ hardware configuration, DAQ hardware– Sampling and grounding techniques- analog I/O, digital I/O,
counter/timer, DAQ software architecture, network data acquisition. Application design using Real Time Targets: PXI, cRIO. (11)
interfaces: RS232, USB, firewire, controller area network (CAN), GPIB, Industrial Ethernet. OLE for Process Control (OPC) (11)
GSD applications. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jovitha Jerome, ―Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Mathivanan, N. ―PC-Based Instrumentation‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2009.
3. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, ―LABVIEW Advanced Programming Techniques‖, CRC Press, 2009.
18ED36 / 18EM33 / 18EE39 / 18EA42 MACHINE LEARNING AND APPLICATIONS

3003
Discriminant Functions, Probabilistic Generative and Discriminative Models, Laplace Approximation, Bayesian Logistic Regression.
(11)
NEURAL NETWORKS: Introduction, Reforcement Learning, Feed-forward Network functions, Error Backpropogation, Hessian
Recognition, Computer Aided Diagnosis, Computer Vision, Speech Recognition,Text Mining, Thinking Machines, Smart Machines,
Total: L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep Kumar and Arvind Tiwari., ―Ubiquitous Machine Learning and Its Applications‖, IGI Global, 2017.
2. David Barber., ―Bayesian Reasoning and Machine Learning‖, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Ethem Alpaydin, ―Introduction to Machine Learning‖, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.
18ED37 PULSE WIDTH MODULATION FOR POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS

3003
POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS FOR DC-AC AND AC-DC POWER CONVERSION: Electronic switches, dc-dc buck and
boost converters, H-bridge, multilevel converters – diode clamp, flying capacitor and cascaded-cell converters; voltage source and
current source converters; evolution of topologies for dc-ac power conversion from dc-dc converters. Applications of voltage source
converters - Overview of applications of voltage source converter, motor drives, active front-end converters, reactive compensators,
active power filters (11)
PULSE WIDTH MODULATION (PWM) AT LOW SWITCHING FREQUENCY: Purpose of PWM- Review of Fourier series,
fundamental and harmonic voltages; machine model for harmonic voltages; undesirable effects of harmonic voltages – line current
distortion, increased losses, pulsating torque in motor drives; control of fundamental voltage; mitigation of harmonics and their
adverse effects- Square wave operation of voltage source inverter, PWM with a few switching angles per quarter cycle, equal
voltage contours, selective harmonic elimination, THD optimized PWM, off-line PWM. Triangle-comparison based PWM-Average
pole voltages, sinusoidal modulation, third harmonic injection, continuous PWM, bus-clamping or discontinuous PWM. Space vector
based PWM -Space vector concept and transformation, per-phase methods from a space vector perspective, space vector based
modulation, conventional space vector PWM, bus-clamping PWM, advanced PWM, triangle comparison approach versus space
vector approach to PWM (12)
ANALYSIS OF PWM CONVERTERS: Analysis of line current ripple - Synchronously revolving reference frame; error between
reference voltage and applied voltage, integral of voltage error; evaluation of line current ripple; hybrid PWM for reduced line current
ripple. Analysis of dc link current - Relation between line-side currents and dc link current; dc link current and inverter state; RMS dc
129
59th ACM 09.06.2018
current ripple over a carrier cycle; RMS current rating of dc capacitors. Analysis of torque ripple - Evaluation of harmonic torques
and RMS torque ripple, hybrid PWM for reduced torque ripple - Inverter loss - Simplifying assumptions in evaluation of inverter loss,
dependence of inverter loss on line power factor, influence of PWM techniques on switching loss, design of PWM for low inverter
loss. (11)
OVERMODULATION & PWM FOR MULTILEVEL INVERTER: Per-phase and space vector approaches to over modulation,
average voltages in a synchronously revolving d-q reference frame, low-frequency harmonic distortion. Extensions of sine-triangle
PWM to multilevel inverters, voltage space vectors, space vector based PWM, analysis of line current ripple and torque ripple. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mohan, Undeland and Robbins,‘ Power Electronics; Converters, Applications and Design‘, John Wiley and Sons, 1989.
2. Erickson R W,‘ Fundamentals of Power Electronics‘, Chapman and Hall, 1997.
3. Vithyathil J, ‘Power Electronics: Principles and Applications ‗, McGraw Hill, 1995
18ED38 / 18EM38 / 18EE37 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES

3003
SMART GRID ARCHITECTURE AND COMPONENTS: Introduction to Smart Grid, Evolution of Electric Grid, Concept of Smart
Grid, Definitions, Need of Smart Grid, Concept of Robust & Self-Healing Grid, Present development & International policies in Smart
Grid, Smart Grid Architecture Models, Components of Smart Grid: Smart Generation systems, Smart Transmission Grid :
Geographic Information System (GIS). Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) & their application for Monitoring & Protection. Wide Area
Monitoring Protection and Control (WAMPAC), Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) and its applications in Smart Grid. (11)
MICROGRIDS AND DISTRIBUTED ENERGY RESOURCES: Micro grid: Concept of Micro grid, Need & Applications of Micro grid.
Micro grid Architecture, Issues of interconnection, Protection & Control of Micro-grid. Distributed Energy Resources: Plastic &
Organic Solar cells, Thin Film Solar cells. Variable Speed Wind Generators, Fuel cells, Micro turbines, Captive Power plants,
Integration of Renewable energy sources. Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable Energy Sources. Power Quality
Conditioners for Smart Grid. Web based Power Quality monitoring and Power Quality Audit. (12)
SMART METERING AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Smart Distribution Systems: Smart Meters, Automatic Meter
Reading (AMR), Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI), Real Time Pricing, Smart Appliances. Smart Substations : Substation
Automation, Feeder Automation, Outage Management System (OMS). Smart Sensors: Home & Building Automation, Plug in Hybrid
Electric Vehicles (PHEV), Algorithms for Vehicle to Grid and Grid to Vehicle Management, Smart Charging Stations. Energy Storage
for Smart Grids: Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS), Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES), Compressed Air
Energy Storage (CAES). (11)
COMMUNICATION NETWORKS AND CYBER SECURITY FOR SMART GRID: Communication Architecture for Smart Grids,
Home Area Network (HAN) : IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.15.4, 6LoWPAN, Neighborhood Area Network (NAN) / Field Area Network
(FAN): Radio over Power-Lines (BPL/PLC), IEEE P1901, Wide Area Network (WAN) : Optical Fiber Communication, Cellular
Networks, Wi-Max and Wireless Sensor Networks. Big Data Analytics in Smart Grid, Cyber Security Challenges in Smart Grid -
Load Altering Attacks - False Data Injection Attacks - Defense Mechanisms. (11)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ali Keyhani, ―Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems‖, Wiley, 2016
2. Stuart Borlase, ―Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions‖, CRC Press, 2012.
3. Janaka Ekanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu and Akihiko Yokoyama, ―Smart Grid: Technology and
Applications‖, Wiley, 2012.
18ED39 / 18EM39 DISTRIBUTED GENERATION AND MICROGRIDS

3003
DISTRIBUTED GENERATION: Energy Sources and their availability -Trends in Energy Consumption, Conventional and Non-
conventional Energy Sources – Review of Solar Photovoltaic – Wind Energy Systems – Fuel Cells , Energy storage systems:
Batteries – ultra capacitors – fly wheels – captive power power plants. Distributed Generation – Concept and topologies,
Renewable Energy in Distributed Generation. IEEE 1547 Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Generation to Electric Power
Systems – DG Installations – Siting and sizing of DGs – optimal placement – Regulatory issues. (11)
ISSUES IN GRID INTEGRATION OF DISTRIBUTED ENERGY RESOURCES: Basic requirements of Grid Interconnections –
operational Parameters – Voltage, Frequency and THD limits – Grid Interfaces – Inverter based DGs and rotary machines based
DGs – Reliability, Stability and Power Quality issues on Grid Integration – Impact of DGs on Protective Relaying and islanding
issues in existing distribution Grid. (11)
MICROGRIDS: Introduction to Microgrids – types – Structure and configuration of Microgrids – AC and DC Microgrids – Power
Electronic Intefaces for Microgrids – Energy Management and Protection Control Strategies of a Microgrid - Case Studies. (11)
CONTROL AND OPERATION OF MICROGRID: Modes of operation and control of microgrid: grid connected and islanded mode,
Active and reactive power control, protection issues, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based techniques,
microgrid communication infrastructure, Power quality issues in microgrids, regulatory standards, Microgrid economics, Introduction
to smart microgrids. (12)
130
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gregory W. Massey, ―Essentials of Distributed Generation Systems‖, Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2011.
2. Math H. Bollen, ―Integration of Distributed Generation in the Power System‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
3. Ali Keyhani, ―Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
18ED40 / 18EM40 HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES

3003
INTRODUCTION TO HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES: History of hybrid and electric vehicles, social and environmental importance
of hybrid and electric vehicles, impact of modern drive-trains on energy supplies. Basics of vehicle performance, vehicle power
source characterization, transmission characteristics and mathematical models to describe vehicle performance. (11)
DRIVE –TRAIN TOPOLOGIES: Basic concept of hybrid traction, introduction to various hybrid drive-train topologies, power flow
control in hybrid drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis. Basic concepts of electric traction, introduction to various electric
drive-train topologies, power flow control in hybrid drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis. (11)
ELECTRIC COMPONENTS IN HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Electric Drives in HEV/EVs, Classification and
Characteristics, configuration and Control of DC Motor drives, Induction Motor drives, Permanent Magnet Motor drives and Switched
Reluctance Motor drives for HEV/EVs applications, Drive System efficiency. Performance matching of Electric Machine and the
Internal Combustion Engine (ICE), Sizing the propulsion motor, sizing of power electronic devices and Energy Storage systems.(12)
ENERGY MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES: Introduction to energy management strategies used in hybrid and electric vehicle,
classification of different energy management strategies, comparison of different energy management strategies - implementation
issues. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2010.
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimi Gao, Sebastian E. Gay, Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles:
Fundamentals, Theory and Design, CRC Press, 2009.
3. Sira -Ramirez, R. Silva Ortigoza, ‗Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices‘, Springer, 2006
ONE CREDIT COURSE
18EK01 LOW – VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

1001
CONTRACTORS: Introduction to LV Switchgear – Typical industrial electrical layout. Introduction to contractors – Difference
between switch and contractor – Types of contactors – Utilization category – Selection of contactors – Nameplate details – Limits of
operation – Special types of contactors. (3)
RELAYS AND FUSES: Introduction to overload relay – Types of overload relay – Types of motor failures – Utilization category and
trip class – Selection of overload relay – Introduction to Fuses. HRC fuse – Types and Utilization category. Introduction to digital
protection techniques. (2)
SWITCHES AND STARTERS: Introduction to switch – Types of switches – Utilization category – Selection of switches.
Introduction to motor starters – Types of starters – Control and Power wiring circuits – Selection of starters – Types of timers. (2)
CIRUIT BREAKER: Introduction to circuit breaker – Types of circuit breaker – Selection of Air circuit breaker – Introduction to
MCCB and MCB – Difference between relay and release. (2)
LABORATORY COMPONENT: (6)

 Assembling and maintenance of contactors.
 Testing the pick-up and drop-off voltages in contactors.
 Testing of thermal overload relay.
 Control wiring practice on DOL and Star Delta Starter.
Total : L:9 + P: 6 = 15
REFERENCES:
1. Wadhwa C L, ―Electrical Power Systems‖, New Age Internationa – 2005.
2. Madhava Rao T S, ―Power Systems Protection : Static Relay with Microprocessors Application‖ , Tata Mcgraw-Hill-2004.
3. Sunil S Rao, ―Switch Gear and Protection‖, Khanna Publishers – 2008.
18EK02 ENERGY AUDITING AND CONSERVATION TECHNIQUES

1001
INTRODUCTION: Mandatory Auditing requirements – Audit purpose, scope and frequency - Energy auditing Conservation concepts
and its Importance – Energy conservation opportunities in electrical power supply sector -The Energy Conservation Act, 2001 and
its features. (2)
131
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ENERGY AUDIT METHODOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: Electrical energy audit, tools for electrical energy audit, billing
elements, tariff systems, electrical demand and load factor improvement, power factor correction, power demand control and
demand shifting- Duties and responsibilities of energy systems auditors (3)
ENERGY CONSERVATION IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Electrical energy requirements in pumps and fans and lighting, different
types of Variable Speed Drives, electrical energy conservation in industrial motors, air conditioning and refrigeration systems, DG
Sets, Cabling Techniques for energy conservation. (3)
GREEN BUILDINGS: Barriers to green buildings, green building rating tools, material selection, operating energy, façade systems,
ventilation systems, transportation, water treatment systems, water efficiency, building economics, Leed and IGBC codes (3)
ENERGY AUDITING IN INDUSTRIAL LIGHTING: Choice of lighting, energy saving, control of lighting, lighting standards, lighting
audit, use of different lighting technologies, electronic ballast. (1)
LABORATORY COMPONENT:
 Power factor Measurement & Compensation Techniques (1)
 Energy Saving Techniques - Lighting, air conditioning, pumps & fans (1)
 Case studies and exercises (1)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Rao VVL, Openshaw Taylor E., "Utilization of Electric Energy", Orient Longman Ltd, 2006.
2. Michael E., Brumbach, ―Electronic Variable Speed Drives‖ Thomson Asia (P) ltd., 2002.
3. Donald R Wulfinghoff, ―Energy Efficiency Manual‖, Energy Institute Press, 1999.
18EK03 POWER ELECTRONICS IN MORE-ELECTRIC AIRCRAFT

1001
INTRODUCTION TO AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM: Power sources: Aircraft Batteries – Lead Acid Batteries, VRLA Batteries,
NiCd Batteries, Generators, Main Engine, Auxiliary Power Unit; Primary and Secondary Power Distribution System. (3)
MORE ELECTRIC AIRCRAFT ARCHITECTURE: Migration from conventional fixed frequency electrical system to variable
frequency electrical system, Advantages of More Electric Aircraft. Introduction to working principle of various Electrical Loads in
Conventional and More Electric Aircraft. Electrical Loads in conventional aircraft – Avionics, Cabin Lighting, In-Flight Entertainment,
Pumps and Fans. New Electrical Loads in More Electric Aircraft – Cabin Pressurisation Compressor, Air Conditioning, Ice
Protection, Flight Control Actuator, Landing Gear, Electrical Taxi System, Braking System, Fuel Pumping. (4)
RECTIFIERS, INVERTERS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS IN AIRCRAFT: Starter Generator System in Aircraft: Main Engine and
APU start System. Multipulse Rectifiers – Autotransformer Rectifier Units as front end converter. How design of Inverters for motor
controllers in Aircraft is different from that for conventional industrial application. 2-Level and 3-Level inverters for motor control –
Brushless DC motor control and Sensorless Vector control. (4)
CASE STUDIES & PROJECT: Introduction to DO-160 standard and how that influences the design of power converter in aircraft.
Practical Design of Power Electronic converters for real life Aero application: Case Study: Design of Exciter Power Supply – Design
for space and weight optimization while meeting DO-160 standard. (4)
Total L: 15 + P: 0 = 15
REFERENCES:
1. Aircraft Electricity and Electronics, Sixth Edition (2013), by Thomas Eismin, ISBN-13: 978-0071799157.
2. Recent Advances in Aircraft Technology,(2012), Chapter 13, 14 & 15; Edited by Ramesh K.Agarwal, ISBN 978-953-51-0150-5.
3. R. I. Jones, "The More Electric Aircraft: the past and the future?" IEE Colloquium on Electrical Machines and Systems for the
More Electric Aircraft, 1999, pp. 1/1-1/4.
18EK04 POWER QUALITY IN INDUSTRIES

1001
POWER QUALITY: History, concern about power quality, Definition - categories and characteristics of power system -
electromagnetic phenomenon. (3)
SOURCES OF POWER QUALITY PROBLEM: Source of Power Supply & its saturation, Transformer & DG Environment, Sags,
Dips & Interruptions & its effect on equipments, Capacitors & Resonance, Case Study – Ill effects of Capacitors. Switching, Non –
Linear Loads & Harmonics, Case Study. (3)
EFFECTS OF POWER QUALITY PROBLEMS: On Maximum Demand, Contract Demand, Power Factor & Over all operation -
Case studies. (4)
POWER QUALITY STANDARDS: IEEE 519 1991 STDS, EMC & ESD & IEC (2)
HANDLING OF POWER QUALITY PROBLEMS: Principles of mitigation of harmonics -Passive & Active filter, Dynamic Voltage
Regulator & STATCOM. (2)
132
59th ACM 09.06.2018
PRACTICAL CONTENT:
Case Study using Power Quality Analyser (1)
Total L: 14 + P: 1 = 15
REFERENCES:
1. Roger .C. Dugan, Mark F.Mcgranaghan & H.Wayne Beaty, ―Electrical power system Quality‖ McGraw-Hill Newyork Second
edition 2003.
2. Snakaran C, ―Power Quality‖, CRC press Washington DC 2002.
3. Math.H.J.Bollen, Understanding Power Quality Problems‖ Voltage sags & Interruptions‖ IEEE Press, Newyork 2000.
18EK05 SOLAR PV SYSTEMS – DESIGN, SIMULATION AND MONITORING AND CONTROL

1001
INTRODUCTION TO PV SYSTEM DEISGN: Solar PV Fundamentals - PV Modules, PV Inverters, DC & AC Configurations, and
Parameters & Datasheet approach, MET Parameters, Weather Monitoring stations, Modems & Protocols. (2)
SOLAR PRO USER INTERFAC: Setting up of a Solar PV system using Simulation Wizard, 3D CAD interface, File formats, Export /
Import capabilities, System requirements, Shortcut keys. Choosing the Data Source - Meteorological data, PV database, Inverter
database. (2)
CONFIGURATION OF PV SYSTEM: Assessment of loads to be connected, Selection of right Inverters & PV modules. Creating a
string, Creating an Array, PV Array configuration, PV Inverter configuration, PV Electrical Assembly configuration, PV Module
mounting configuration & PV Module Tracking configuration, Electrical BOM preparation. (4)
3D DESIGN FEATURES: Building and Surrounding Objects - Setting up of building parameters, setting up of surrounding buildings
or interfering structures, setting up of plants, trees and vegetation. (2)
SIMULATION & REPORT GENERATION: Time Trackers, I-V curve simulation, Shadow analysis, Power generation, PV system
cost & Financial analysis, PV Array layout, Power generation and loss diagram, Performance Ratio Analysis. Economic viability and
Cost effectiveness of project, Print options and export options of variable parameters. (2)
MONITORING OF SOLAR PV POWER PLANT: Remote Monitoring, Real – Time Monitoring, Multiple Inverter Monitoring,
Interfacing of Hardware- Solar Link Zero- Modem, Routers, Modbus – Internet Gateway, Cloud Data, RS-485, RS-232 Serial, USB,
Ethernet and DVI-D ports. (3)
Total L : 15
REFERENCES:
1. Solar Link Monitoring Solutions Manual, Laplace Systems, 2014.
2. Solar Pro:Photovoltaic System Simulation Software Manual, Laplace Systems, 2012.
3. Roger A. Messenger, Jerry Ventre,‖ Photovoltaic System Engineering‖ CRC Press, 2004

1001
SIMULATION and PHYSICAL REALIZATION: Features of ANADIGMDESIGNER2 EDA tool for simulating the analog design-
verification. (3)
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas L. Floyd ―Electronic devices Conventional Current Version‖ Pearson Education Ltd, Ninth Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas L. Floyd ―Instructor‘s Resource Manual to Accompany Electronic Devices‖ Pearson Education Ltd, Eighth Edition,
2008.
3. Thomas L. Floyd ―Electronic Devices‖ Pearson Education Ltd, Eighth Edition, 2008.
133
59th ACM 09.06.2018
1001
(Linear Code Sequence and Jump) - Data Flow and Control Flow analysis- Unit/System/Integration Testing - Code Quality -

REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep Oak and Renu Rajani, ―Software Testing – Effective Methods, Tools and Techniques‖, Tata McGraw Hill Publications,
2004.
2. MISRA Online Resources available at https://www.misra.org.uk/
3. MISRA C:2012 Amendments URL: https://www.misra.org.uk/Publications/tabid/57/Default.aspx
18EK10 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES FOR AUTOMATION

1001
INTRODUCTION: Construction and Principle of operation of PMSM and SynRM – AC drive Hardware Blocks – Control Blocks –
Automatic Motor Adaptation – Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). (4)
CONFIGURATIONS OF DIFFERENT I/O CONTROL: Digital Input and output – Analog Input and output Control-word access –
Motion control - Sequential Logic Control (SLC) - Parameterization for different communication protocol: RS 485 – MODBUS -
PROFIBUS. (6)
CONFIGURATION FOR DIFFERENT APPLICATIONS: AQUA – HVAC – Automation – Master/ Slave control. (4)
PRACTICAL: Performance characterization of PMSM and SynRM - Conveyor control – Cascaded Pump Control – Synchronization
of Drives with Master Slave Control. (4)
Total L: 14 + P: 4=18
REFERENCES:
1. Programming Guide for FC Drives by Danfoss Industries Pvt. Ltd.
2. Monograph prepared by PSG-DanfossCoE for Climate and Energy.
3. Ned Mohan, ―Advanced Electric Drives: Analysis, Control and Modeling using Simulink‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2001.
18EK13 SYSTEM ENGINEERING FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS

1001
PROCESS: Requirements process, Baseline creation
DESIGN PROCESS: Definitions, Axioms, Design Matrices, Types and examples, Constraints (3)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Benjamin S. Blanchard, John E. Blyler, ―System Engineering Management‖, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2016
134
59th ACM 09.06.2018
2. INCOSE Systems Engineering Handbook: A Guide for System Life Cycle Processes and Activities, Wiley, 2015
3. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Samuel J. Seymour, Steven M. Biemer, ―Systems Engineering Principles and
Practice‖, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2011

1001
INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLES: social and environmental importance of electric vehicles. Conventional Vehicles:
ELECTRIC PROPULSION UNIT: electric components, Configuration and control of drives: DC Motor - Induction Motor - Permanent
Power Electronic Converter for Battery Charging - Charging methods for battery- Design of Z-converter for battery charging. Case
Total : 15
REFERENCES:
1. Sheldon S. Williamson, Energy Management Strategies for Electric and Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles, Springer, 2013.
2. Chris Mi, M. Abul Masrur, David Wenzhong Gao, Hybrid Electric Vehicles Principles And Applications With Practical
Perspectives, Wiley Publication, 2011.
3. Iqbal Husain, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2010

1001
Total L : 15
REFERENCES:
1. A.G.Phadke, J.S. Thorp, ‗Synchronized Phasor Measurements and Their Applications‘, Springer Publications, Second Edition,
2017
2. IEEE Synchrophasor Test Suite Specification Version2, 2015
3. IEEE C37.118.1a-2014, IEEE Standard for Syncrophasor Measurements for Power Systems
Power System Protection and Control
Monitoring.
6. IEEE C37.118-2, 2011 - Standard for Synchrophasor Data Transfer for Power Systems
18EK16 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING FOR REAL-TIME APPLICATIONS

1001
INTRODUCTION TO REAL-TIME CONCEPTS: Concept of Real-Time Systems - Characteristics of Real-Time Systems – Need for
Real-Time Operating Systems (2)
LabVIEW REAL-TIME HARDWARE: ARCHITECTURE: Overview of Hardware Setup and Installation -Configuration of Network
Settings of Real-Time Target and Host Computer - Configuration of Real-Time Target in Measurement and Automation Explorer -
Configuring Real-Time targets through the LabVIEW Project. (3)
PROGRAMMING LabVIEW REAL-TIME MODULE: Accessing I/O using driver APIs or Scan Engine – Multithreading – Sleep
Mode -Timing loops in LabVIEW Real-Time. (4)
135
59th ACM 09.06.2018
COMMUNICATION: Inter-process Communication: Sharing Data locally on Real-Time Target - Sharing Data between Deterministic
and Non-Deterministic Processes - Sharing data between non-deterministic processes - Communication between Real-Time Target
and Host Computer – Implementation of Network Communication (4)
DEBUGGING AND DEPLOYMENT: Standard Debugging Techniques – Analysis of Memory Consumption – Creating Build
Specification – Communication with Deployed Applications. (2)
Total L : 15
REFERENCES:
1. Course Manual titled, ―LabVIEW Real-time Application Development‖ published by National Instruments, 2016.
2. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin, Matt Nawrocki, ―LabVIEW: Advanced Programming Techniques‖, Second Edition, 2006.
3. Jovitha Jerome, ―Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
AUDIT COURSES
18ED81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18ED82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

136
59th ACM 09.06.2018

M.E. EMBEDDED AND REAL-TIME SYSTEMS (2018 REGULATIONS)
*
(Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 75 )
I SEMESTER
18EE01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EE02 Embedded Controllers and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EE03 Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EE04 Digital System Design and Testing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EE05 Object Computing and Data Structures 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EE51 Embedded Controllers Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18EE81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18EE06 Real-Time Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EE07 Embedded System Networks 3 - 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EE08 Linux Architecture and Device Drivers 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EE09 Advanced Embedded Controllers 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EE__ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE52 Real-Time Systems Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18EE61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18EE82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18EE53 Embedded System Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18EE71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 24 hrs 12 2 10 18 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18EE72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
18EE21 Internet of Things 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18EE22 Totally Integrated Automation 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18EE23 Industrial Drives for Automation 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES(Five to be opted)
18EE24 Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE25 Automotive Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE26 Graphical Programming for Real-Time Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE27 Industrial Networking and Standards 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE28 Internetworking and its Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE29 Wireless Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE30 Wireless and Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE31 Cryptography and Network Security 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE32 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE33 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE34 Graph Theory and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE35 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE36 Digital Controllers for Power Electronic Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE37 Smart Grid Technologies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE38 Soft Computing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE39 Machine Learning and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EE40 Python Programming 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
137
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ONE CREDIT COURSES

18EK17 CAD Tools for VLSI Design Automation
18EK18 Digital Design with Verilog HDL
18EK19 Automotive Electrical System
138
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18EA01/18EE01/18ED01/18EM01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
2203
Total L:32 +T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
18EE02 /18EA02/18EM02 EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS

3003
REFERENCES:
1. William Hohl and Christopher Hinds, “ARM Assembly Language Fundamentals and Techniques”, CRC Press, Second Edition,
2015.
2. Danny Causey, Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, “PIC Microcontroller & Embedded System: Using Assembly and
3. MykePredko, “Programming and Customizing the PIC Microcontroller”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2008.
4. Mazidi M.A., Mazidi J.G. and McKinlay R.D., “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, Prentice Hall India, 2nd
5. “ARM System Developer's Guide, Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Andrew Sloss Dominic Symes Chris Wright,
1st Edition, 2004.
18EE03 REAL-TIME CONCEPTS FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3003
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE AND TOOLS FOR EMBEDDED SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT: Fundamentals of Embedded
Systems – Embedded Software Development Process: Programming Languages - Embedded C Building Blocks – Mixing of
Assembly and C – Preprocessor - Compiler – Assembler - Linker and Loader - Cross Platform Development -Compiler Optimization
Techniques – Executable File Formats-Concept of Make Utility - Super Loop based Design Approach (12)
REAL-TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS: Basic Terminologies of Real-Time Embedded Systems – Concepts of OS-based Software
Development – Real-Time Operating Systems: Definition, Characteristics and Structure – Task Management: Definition,
Classification, Structure, States, and Scheduling – Concept of Pseudo Multitasking and True Multitasking (11)
INTER-TASK SYNCHRONIZATION AND COMMUNICATION: Critical Sections – Atomic Operation – Concept of Reentrancy –
Semaphores – Event Flag Registers - Inter-task Communication Methods: Shared Memory Technique, Mailbox, Message Queues,
and Pipes – Common Design Problems: Premature Task Deletion, CPU Starvation, Deadlocks, and Unbounded Priority Inversion (11)
139
59th ACM 09.06.2018
INTERRUPT MANAGEMENT, I/O SUBSYSTEMS AND MEMORY MANAGEMENT: Exceptions and Interrupts – Processing of
Exceptions and Interrupts – I/O Sub-systems – Memory Management – Dynamic Memory Allocation and Fixed-size Memory
Allocation in Embedded Systems - Application Modularization for Concurrency: Outside-In Approach – UML Diagrams - Design
Examples (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bernd Bruegge, Allen Dutoit, “Object-oriented Software Engineering – Using UML, Patterns and Java”, Prentice Hall, USA,
2010.
2. Insup Lee, Joseph Leung, and Sang Son, “Handbook of Real-Time Systems”, Chapman and Hall, 2008.
3. Qing Li, “Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems”, CMP Books, 2003.
4. Albert Cheng, “Real-Time Systems: Scheduling, Analysis and Verification”, Wiley Interscience, 2002.
5. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 1999
18EE04 / 18EA03 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN AND TESTING

3204
REVIEW OF DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS: Designing combinational circuit using multiplexer, decoder – Finite State Machines –
Mealy Machine - Moore Machine – State Diagram – State table - Design of state machines using Algorithmic State Machines (ASM)
chart as a design tool. System Design using PLDs: Basic concepts – Programming technologies - Programmable Logic Element
(PLE) - Programmable Array Logic (PLA) - Programmable Array Logic (PAL) – Programmable Logic Architectures – 16L8 – 16R4 –
22V10 – Design of combinational and sequential circuits using PLDs. (12+5)
Behavioral level, Switch level and state machine modeling, Concurrent and procedural statements, UDP, sub circuit parameters,
function and task, timing and delays - test benches - design of combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog. (11+10)
CPLD and FPGA: Complex PLDs (CPLDs) – Xilinx cool runner architecture. Types of Field Programmable Gate Arrays - Xilinx
XC4000 series - Logic Cell Array (LCA) – Configurable Logic Blocks (CLB) - Input/output Blocks (IOB) - Programmable
Interconnection Point(PIP) Implementing Functions in FPGAs Dedicated Memory in FPGAs – Dedicated Multipliers in FPGAs -
Mapping, Placement and Routing - Verilog based design flow for FPGA. (11+10)
HARDWARE TESTING AND DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY: Defects, errors, faults, Levels of Fault models, Types, Fault Detection
in Combinational Logic circuits: Path sensitization method, Boolean difference method. Fault Detection in sequential logic circuit,
Design for Testability: Scan path Testing, Boundary Scan Test, Built in Self Test. (11+5)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL : A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson Education Asia, 2014.
2. Charles H Roth and Lizy Kurian John, “Digital Systems Design Using VHDL”, Cengage Learning, 2013.
3. Michael D Ciletti, “Advance Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012.
4. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA - Based System Design”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2012.
5. Bhaskar J., “A Verilog Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012.
6. Michael L Bushnell, Vishwani D Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital Memory and Mixed Signal VLSI Circuits”,
Springer, 2002.
18EE05 / 18EA05 / 18ED05 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES

3204
.PRINCIPLES OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Procedure Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Programming
and Objects - Manipulators. Functions in C++ - Call by Reference - Return by reference - Inline functions - Default, Const
Arguments - Function Overloading - Friend Functions - Member functions - Nesting of Member functions -Private member functions
- Static data members - Static Member Functions - Arrays of Objects -Objects as Function Arguments - Friend Functions. (10+7)
CONSTRUCTORS: Parameterized Constructor - Copy constructor - Multiple Constructors in a Class – Destructors. Inheritance -
– Hybrid Inheritance. Polymorphism - Compile and Run Time Polymorphism – Operator Overloading - Virtual function. (11+7)
LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: Stacks: Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Subroutine handling,
Recursion- Queues: Primitive operations - Sequential implementation - Applications: Job Scheduling. Lists: Primitive Operations -
Singly linked lists, Doubly linked lists, Circular lists – Applications: Addition of Polynomials
NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES: Trees: Terminologies - Binary Tree traversal. (12+9)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
2. Nell Dale, “C++ Plus Data Structures”, Jones & Bartlett, Massachusetts, 2011.
140
59th ACM 09.06.2018
3. Harvey M Deitel and Paul J Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2010.
New Delhi, 2009.
5. Stanley B Lippman, JoseeLajoie and Barbara E Moo, “The C++ Primer”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
6. SahniSartaj, "Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++", Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2005.
18EE51 EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS LABORATORY

0042
List of Experiments
1. On-chip Peripherals Programming in 8051Microcontroller: GPIO, Timers, Serial Port

2. Interfacing of Sensors and Actuators with 8051 Microcontroller
a) Sensor Interfacing using External ADC
b) Actuator Interfacing: Relay, DC Motor, Stepper Motor and Servo Motor
3. Interrupts and Low Power Modes in 8051 Microcontroller
4. On-chip Peripherals Programming in ARM7 Microcontroller – GPIO, Timers, RTC, ADC, PWM
5. Serial Communication Protocols in ARM7 Microcontroller: USART, SPI, I 2C
6. Mini Project
Total P: 60
SEMESTER II
18EE06 REAL-TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS

3003
REAL-TIME SYSTEMS: Basic Terminologies - Limits of Current Real - Time Systems - Desirable Features of Real-Time Systems –
Factors affecting Predictability – Types of Task Constraints: Timing Constraints, Precedence Constraints and Resource Constraints
- Classification of Scheduling Algorithms - Metrics for Performance Evaluation - Scheduling Anomalies (10)
UNIPROCESSOR SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS: Periodic Tasks Scheduling: Cyclic Schedulers, EDF, RMA, and DMA - Aperiodic
Task Scheduling: Jackson‟s Algorithm, Horn‟s Algorithm, Bartley‟s Algorithm, Scheduling of Aperiodic Tasks with Precedence
Constraints – Hybrid Task Set Scheduling: Foreground and Background Scheduling, Polling Server, Deferrable Server, Priority
Exchange Server, Sporadic Server, and Slack Stealing (13)
RESOURCE ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOLS: Problems involved in Resource Sharing: Priority Inversion and Deadlock –
Deadlock Detection and Avoidance Algorithm - Non-Preemptive Protocol – Highest Locker Priority Protocol – Priority Inheritance
Protocol – Priority Ceiling Protocol – Comparison of Resource Access Control Protocols – Handling Task Dependencies (10)
MULTIPROCESSOR SCHEDULING and REAL-TIME KERNEL DESIGN ISSUES: Multiprocessor Task Partitioning and
Scheduling Algorithms - Structure of a typical Real-Time Kernel - Data Structures – List Management – Kernel Primitives -
Standards for Real - Time Operating Systems – Survey of Commercial Real-Time Operating Systems – Development Tools –
Performance Anlayzers (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Giorgio C. Buttazzo, “Hard Real-Time Computing Systems”, Springer, New York, 2011.
2. Jean J. Labrosse, “µC/OS-III, The Real-Time Kernel”, Micrium Press, 2009.
3. Jane W. Liu, “Real-Time Systems”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2006.
18EE07 EMBEDDED SYSTEM NETWORKS

3003
THE CAN BUS: Introduction – Concepts of Bus Access and Arbitration – Error Processing and Management – Definition of the CAN
Protocol ISO 11898-1 – Error Properties, Detection and Processing – Framing - The Rest of the Frame - CAN 2.0B (11)
THE CAN PHYSICAL LAYER: Introduction – Signal Propagation – Bit Synchronisation – Network Speed and Range – High Speed
CAN – Low Speed CAN – CAN Components – Event-Triggered and Time-Triggered Protocols - CAN Applications: Application
Layers and Development Tools for CAN. (11)
LIN, MOST and FLEXRAY: LIN: Introduction - Basic Concept of the LIN 2.0 Protocol - Conformity of LIN – MOST: The MOST
(Media Oriented Systems Transport) Bus – General - MOST concept – Flexray: Genesis of FlexRay - FlexRay Consortium - Aim of
FlexRay - Physical Time - Local Time - Channels, Cycles, Segments and Slots - Channels and Cycles – Segments -
Communication Frames - Symbol Window Segment - Network Idle Time Segment. (11)
USB AND TCP/IP FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction – Types of USB Transfers: Control Transfer – Bulk Transfer –
Interrupt Transfer – Isochronous Transfer – Introduction to the Enumeration Process – Introduction to USB Development Tools.
TCP/IP for Embedded Systems: Introduction – Embedded SMTP Client – Embedded SMTP Server (12)
Total L: 45
141
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Dominique Paret, “Flexray and Its Applications”, A John Wiley & Sons Ltd., Publication Wiley, 2012.
2. Dominique Paret, “Multiplexed Networks for Embedded Systems”, Wiley, 2007.
3. Jan, Axelson, “USB Complete”, Lake View Research, 2005.
4. Edward Insam, “TCP/IP Embedded Internet Applications”, Elsevier, 2003.
5. Tim Jones, “TCP/IP Application Layer Protocols for Embedded Systems”, Charles River Media, 2002.
6. John Hyde, “USB Design by Example”, Intel University Press, 2001.
18EE08 LINUX ARCHITECTURE AND DEVICE DRIVERS

3204
BASIC ARCHITECTURE: Evolution of Linux OS – Main characteristics of Linux – Typical Linux distributions – Linux directory
structure – User and super/root users – access rights – Home directory – Vi editior – Commands - Overview of shell and GUI.(11+10)
LINUX KERNEL ARCHITECTURE: Layer diagram of OS - Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) – Memory manager – scheduler – file
system – I/O subsystem – Networking subsystem – IPC – user space. (11+6)
LINUX FILE SYSTEM: Layers of Linux file system – structure of inode – process file system – The Ext2 File system – System
programming concepts – API & ABIs – C library and compiler. (11+6)
DEVICE DRIVER: System start up (Booting) Methods - PC I/O architecture – classification of Linux devices: character and block
devices – port I/O – PCI and ISA bus – polling, interrupt, and waiting queue – Device Files - Device driver Registration – Device
driver initialization – I/O operation - typical Linux driver – dynamic and static drivers - kernel modules – Linking and unlinking of
modules – On Demand modules linking. (12+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Michael Beck, Harald Bohme, Mirko Dziadzka, Ulrich Kunitz, "Linux Kernel Programming", Pearson Education, 2002.
2. Raghavan P., Amol Lad, Sriram Neelakandan, “Embedded Linux System Design and Development”, Tailor & Francis Group,
2006
3. Daniel P.Bovet, Marco Cesati, “Understanding the Linux Kernel”, Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
4. Robert Love, “LINUX System Programming”, Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
5. Tim Jones M., “GNU/Linux Application Programming”, Wiley Dreamtech India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
18EE09 ADVANCED EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS

3204
ARCHITECTURE OF MIXED SIGNAL PROCESSOR: Introduction to 16-bit Mixed Signal Controller- Important aspects of Mixed
Signal Controller‟s Hardware – CPU – Functional Block Diagram - Memory Mapping – Clock System - Addressing Modes -
Register Mode – Indexed Mode – Introduction to functions – Interrupts - Low Power Modes - Development Environment -
Programming and Debugging (10+6)
PERIPERALS OF MIXED SIGNAL PROCESSOR: Parallel ports - Digital Inputs/ Outputs – Timers - Watchdog Timer -
Capture/Compare module – Generation of Periodic Signal – Generation of PWM Signal - Operation of the ADC Peripheral
(ADC10) - Internal Temperature Sensor – Serial Communication Protocols (12+9)
ARCHITECTURE OF ARM CORTEX M x: ARM Cortex-Mx Processor Core overview - Programmers Model - Memory Model -
Exception and Fault Handling - Power Management - Instruction Set Summary - CMSIS Functions - Hardware-Software
Synchronization - Interrupt Synchronization - Multithreading - Register Map - System Timer - Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller -
Floating Point Unit (FPU) - Optional Memory Protection Unit. (11+6)
PERIPHERALS OF ARM CORTEX – Mx CONTROLLER: Cortex-Mx Peripherals - Parallel I/O Ports - Timer Interfacing - Pulse
Width Modulation - Frequency Measurement - Binary Actuators - Integral Control of a DC Motor – DAC - ADC - Serial
Communication Protocols. (12+9)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Valvano J. W., “Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing ARM Cortex – Microcontrollers”, Fourth edition, Volume 2, ISBN:
978-1477508992, 2014.
2. Valvano J. W., “Embedded Systems: Introduction to ARM Cortex-M Microcontrollers”, Fourth Edition, Volume 1, ISBN: 978-
1477508992, 2013.
3. Ravikumar C.P., “MSP430 Microcontroller in Embedded System Project”, First Edition, Elite Publishing House Private Ltd.,
Dec, ISBN: 978-81-88901-46-3, 2011.
4. John H. Davies, “MSP430 Microcontroller Basics”, First Edition, Newnes Publication, ISBN: 978-93-80501-85-7, 2010.
5. Steven F.Barret, Daniel J Pack, “Microcontroller Programming and Interfacing: Texas Instruments MSP430”, Morgan &
Claypool Publishers, ISBN: 9781608457137
6. Cortex-M4 Devices, Generic User Guide By ARM.
142
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EE52 REAL-TIME SYSTEMS LAB
0042
1. Creating a Make file for an Embedded Application

2. Task Management and Resource Management using Open Source Real-Time Kernel
3. Inter-task Communication in Open Source Real-Time Kernel
4. Interrupt Management and Memory Management using Open Source Real-Time Kernel
5. Performance Evaluation of Single-core and Multi-core Scheduling Algorithms
6. Mini Project
Total P: 60
18EE61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR
0042
Total P: 60
SEMESTER III
18EE53 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Implementation of Controller Area Network Protocol
2. Development of USB based Driver for an External Storage Device
3. Development of SPI based Driver for Micro SD Card
4. Development of Drivers for Wi-Fi
5. Development of Drivers for Bluetooth Devices
6. Mini Project
18EE71 PROJECT WORK – I

0063
SEMESTER IV
18EE72 PROJECT WORK – II

0 0 28 14
 Project Implementation (Hardware / Software / both)

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE (ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellence)
18EE21 / 18EA22 / 18ED22 / 18EM23 INTERNET OF THINGS

3204
Wireless HART - Network Layer Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, TCP & UDP, 6LoWPAN - Application Layer Protocols: COAP, MQTT.(13+10)
143
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach), Universities Press, 2015.
2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK, 2014.
18EE22 / 18EM22 / 18ED23 / 18EA23 TOTALLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

3204
Automation – IEC / ISA Standards for Control Elements – Selection criteria for control elements – Utilisation Category with IEC
standards - Construction of Relay Ladder logic with different control elements - Need for PLC - PLC evolution. (6+3)
- Capabilities of PLC - Selection criteria for PLC – PLC Communication - PLC Wiring - Installation of PLC and its Modules. Types of
Programming – Bit Instructions - Timers and counters – PLC arithmetic functions PTO / PWM generation - High Speed Counter –
Analog Scaling – Encoder Interfacing - Servo drive control – Stepper Motor Control. (12+13)
EttherCAT (7+0)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Bolton W., “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier Ltd., 2015.
2. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers ‖”, McGraw Hill, 2011.
3. John R Hackworth and Fredrick D Hackworth Jr., “Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and Applications ‖”,
18EE23 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES FOR AUTOMATION

3204
DYNAMICS OF ELECTRIC DRIVES: Fundamental torque equation - multi-quadrant operation - nature and classification of load
torques - modes of operation. Induction Motor Drives: Construction - Principle – performance characteristics – stator voltage
control, frequency control, v/f control, rotor resistance control, static rotor resistance control, slip power recovery: Static Krammer
drive, Static Scherbius drive. (12+7)
VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Introduction to Park‟s and Clarke‟s transformation - Principle of vector
control - Direct vector control - indirect vector control - stator flux oriented vector control - rotor flux oriented vector control –
sensorless control - Direct torque control. (12+7)
SPECIAL DRIVES: PMSM - principle - PMSM flux density distribution - Controller – SynRM - principle - magnetic flux density and
operating point - converter VA requirements. (10+8)
CONFIGURATIONS AND I/O CONTROL: AC drive Hardware Blocks – Control Blocks – Automatic Motor Adaptation –
Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). Digital input and output - Analog input and Output control - word access - motion
control - sequential logic control(SLC) - parameterization of different communication protocol: RS 485 – MODBUS – PROFIBUS.
(11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
2. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, New York 1997.
4. Miller T. J. E., “Brushless Permanent - Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives”, Clarendon Press Oxford, 1989.
5. John Park, Steve Mackey and Edwin Wright, "Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control", Elsevier 2003.
144
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EE24 / 18EA08 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND PARALLEL PROCESSING

3003
REGISTER TRANSFER LANGUAGE AND MICRO-OPERATIONS: Register transfer language – Inter-register transfer - Arithmetic
micro-operations – Logic micro-operations – Shift micro-operations – Control functions - Data path Organisation - Binary arithmetic
unit – BCD arithmetic unit – Floating point arithmetic unit – Processor bus configuration – Data transfer and manipulation –
Hardwired and micro-programmed control. (12)
MEMORY UNIT AND INPUT-OUTPUT UNIT: Memory hierarchy – Main memory – Back-up storage units – Multiple
module memories – Interleaved memory – Associative memory - Virtual memory systems – Structure – Paging – TLB –
Segmentation – Replacement strategies – Cache memory: Basic cache structure – Direct, fully associative and set associative
mapping – Replacement policies – Multiple caches – Memory management hardware - Characteristics of I/O subsystem –
Interrupt mechanisms and special hardware – Direct Memory Access – I/O processors and I/O channels – Asynchronous data
transfer. (10)
PARALLEL PROCESSING AND PIPELINING: Basic uniprocessor architecture – Parallel processing mechanisms – Levels of
parallelism – Balancing of subsystem bandwidth – Parallel computer structures – Architectural classifications – Parallel processing
applications - Linear pipelining – Pipeline processors – Instruction and Arithmetic pipelines – Organization of pipelined units –
Instruction pre-fetch and branch handling – Pipeline hazards – Reducing branch penalties – Branch prediction strategies – Vector
processing: requirements and characteristics – High performance Architectures: Superscalar Architecture – VLIW Architecture. (11)
ARRAY PROCESSING AND MULTIPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE: SIMD array processors – Masking and data routing
mechanisms – SIMD Interconnection networks -Multiprocessor Architecture - Functional structures: Loosely and Tightly coupled
Multiprocessors – Processor characteristics for multiprocessing – Symmetric Multiprocessors (SMP) – Non Uniform Memory Access
(NUMA) – Interconnection structures for multiprocessors – Cache coherence – Thread level parallelism – Multithreading – Clusters.
(12)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. John Hennessy and David Patterson, "Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach", Elsevier India Publishers, 5th Edition,
2017.
2. Kai Hwang and Faye A Briggs, "Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing", McGraw Hill Book Company, 2016.
3. Stallings W., “Computer Organisation and Architecture – Designing for Performance”, Pearson Publishers, 9th Edition, 2014.
4. Mano M.M., "Computer System Architecture", Pearson Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2013.
18EE25 AUTOMOTIVE EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Current trends in modern automobiles – Drive by wire Systems - Vehicle functional domains and their
requirements - Components of an Automobile Electronic system and their functions: Sensors, Actuators, Control Units and Software
structure of Control units. (11)
POWER TRAIN, BODY AND CHASSIS DOMAIN: Power Train Domain: Gasoline engine management - Body Electronics: Vehicle
power supply controllers – Lighting technology – Adaptive lighting system – Automatic wiper system – Door control modules -
Vehicle to vehicle communication - Chassis Domain: Antilock Braking System (ABS) – Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (11)
AUTOMOTIVE INFOTRONICS AND SAFETY & SECURITY SYSTEMS: Automotive Vision System - Advanced Driver Assistant
Systems (ADAS) – Multimedia systems- Intelligent Automotive Systems: Navigation Systems – Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -
Active and Passive safety- Airbag System – Seat belt tightening system - Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) - Lane
Departure Warning System - Anti-theft technologies – Electronic Immobilizers – Remote Keyless entry. (12)
AUTOMOTIVE NETWORKING AND DIAGNOSTICS: Cross-system functions - Bus systems: Requirements, classification and
applications – Review of CAN – LIN – Flexray - MOST On-Board Diagnostics – Off-board diagnostics – Diagnostics Link Connector
– Vehicle Condition Monitoring - Diagnostic Interfaces – Connected Vehicles (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Electrics Automotive Electronics”, Wiley, 5th Edition, 2010.
2. Nicolas Navet and Francoise Simonot-Lion, “Automotive Embedded Systems Handbook”, CRC Press, USA, 2008.
3. LjuboVlacic, Michel Parent & FurnioHarshima, “Intelligent Vehicle Technologies: Theory and Applications”, Butterworth-
Heinemann publications, 2001.
4. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Hand Book”, SAE, 5th Edition, 2000.
5. Bechhold, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, SAE, 1998.
145
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EE26 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING FOR REAL-TIME APPLICATIONS
3003
BASICS OF GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING: Fundamental Concepts of Virtual Instrumentation and Graphical Programming - Data
Flow Programming - Data Types – Modular Programming - Debugging Techniques – Customization of VI Properties - VI
Documentation
PROGRAMMING STRUCTURES: Formula Nodes - Expression Nodes – Loops – Shift Registers – Feedback Nodes - Local and
Global Variables – Case and Sequence Structures – Key Navigation-Dialog Boxes - Arrays and Clusters - Graphs and Charts -
Mechanical Action of Boolean Switches - String and File I/O (14)
DATA ACQUISITION AND INTERFACING STANDARDS: Temperature Monitoring System using PC based Data Acquisition
System - Motion Control - Image Acquisition and Processing - Communication: RS232 - RS485 - GPIB – System Interface Buses:
USB-PXI (9)
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING OPTIONS: Event Driven Programming - Diagram Disable Structures- Sound VI‟s- Reentrant VIs- VI
server -Web publishing tool- Multithreading in LabVIEW - State Machines – Nest Case Selector- Property Nodes-Invoke Nodes-
LabVIEW Interface for Arduino – Introduction to Object Oriented Programming in LabVIEW (10)
REAL-TIME APPLICATIONS: Real-Time Concepts including Determinism and Jitter – Configuration of Real-Time I/O Hardware in
MAX - Host & Target VI – Prioritization of Tasks – Timed Programming Structures in LabVIEW Real-Time – Sharing Data between
Deterministic & Non-Deterministic Processes – Real-Time Application Deployment using myRIO – Run-time Interaction with
Deployed Applications – Running Web Services in myRIO (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, “LabVIEW Advanced Programming Techniques”, CRC Press, 2009.
2. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
3. Garry W Johnson, "LabVIEW Graphical Programming", Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.
4. Barry Paron, "Sensors, Transducers and LabVIEW", Prentice Hall, 2000.
18EE27 INDUSTRIAL NETWORKING AND STANDARDS

3003
SERIAL INTERFACE STANDARDS: Modern Instrumentation and Control Systems – Open Systems Interconnection Model – EIA-
232 Interface Standard – Major Elements of EIA-232 – Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex operation of EIA-232 Interface – Overview of
EIA-422 and EIA-423 Interface Standards - EIA-485 Interface Standard – Comparison of Serial Interface Standards – Noise
problems in serial communication and troubleshooting. (11)
HART AND MODBUS PROTOCOL: HART PROTOCOL over 4-20 mA Signal Base – Wireless HART Protocol - MODBUS: Modbus
Protocol Structure: Data types, Transmission modes, Messaging Structure–Modbus Function Codes- Fault Handling Mechanisms of
Modbus Protocol – Applications of Modbus Protocol (11)
FIELD AREA NETWORKING PROTOCOLS: Actuator Sensor Interface: Structure of AS-i slave ICs, AS-i messages, AS-i
modulation technique, Troubleshooting - Device Net: Physical Layer Topology – Device Taps – Datalink Layer: Frame Format –
Medium Access – Fragmentation- Process Field Bus (PROFIBUS) - Foundation Fieldbus: Physical Layer and Wiring Rules –
Datalink Layer – Application Layer – Error Detection and Diagnostics. (11)
INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET: Overview – Ethernet Hardware Basics – Ethernet Protocol and Addressing – Introduction to10 Mbps,
100 Mbps and Gigabit Ethernet – Real-time Ethernet for Automation Applications – Time-triggered Ethernet – Security in Industrial
Communications (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Perry Marshall and John Rinaldi, “Industrial Ethernet”, The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society, 2005.
2. Richard Zurawski, “Industrial Communications Technology Handbook”, CRC Press, 2005.
3. John Park, Steve Mackey, and Edwin Wright, “Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control”, Elsevier, 2003.
18EE28 / 18EA40 INTERNETWORKING AND APPLICATIONS

3003
INTERNETWORKING: Overview of Internetworking, Underlying networking technologies, Concept and Architectural model,
Protocol layering – LAN Fundamentals – Wired LANS : ETHERNET Protocol – Wireless LANS : 1EEE 802.11, Bluetooth, WiMax -
Connecting Devices : Repeaters, Hub, Switches, Routers, Unicast Routing - Multicast Routing (12)
NETWORK PROTOCOLS AND APPLICATIONS: Protocols: Network layer introduction - Network layer protocols: IPv4
Datagram Format, IPv4 Addresses, Forwarding IP packets, ICMPv4 – DHCP, Transport layer protocols - Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) – User Datagram Protocols (UDP) - Applications: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) – Multipurpose Internet
Mail Extension (MIME) – World Wide Web and HTTP – Remote login: Telnet, Electronic Mail - Next Generation IP. (11)
146
59th ACM 09.06.2018
NETWORK MANAGEMENET AND SECURITY: Areas of Network Management – SNMP – SMI – MIB - ASN.1, Introduction to
network security – Confidentiality – Message Integrity - Message Authentication - Digital Signature – Digital Certification – HTTPS-
Entry Authentication - Key management – Internet Security – Firewalls. (11)
MOBILE NETWORKS & MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS: Mobile phone technologies: different generations, Mobile Internet
Protocol, Synchronization and replication protocols, WAP Architecture: Introduction, Components, Infrastructure, Security issues,
WAP gateways.
Multimedia Networking Applications, Streaming stored video, Voice over IP, Protocols for real-time conversational applications,
network support for multimedia. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Behrouz A Forouzan and Firouz Mosharraf, “Computer Network – a Top Down Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
2. Jochen Burkhardt, Horst Henn, Stefan Hepper, Klaus Rindtoroff, Thomas Schaeck, “Pervasive Computing – Technology and
Architecture of Mobile Internet Applications”, Pearson, 2012.
3. James F. Kurose, Keith W.Ross, “Computer Networking – a Top Down Approach”, Pearson, 2012.
4. Behraouz A Forouzan, “TCP/IP Protocol Suite”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
5. Doughlas Comer, “Internetworking with TCP/IP : Principles, Protocols and Architecture”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2006.
18EE29 / 18EA33 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS

3003
CHARACTERISTICS OF WSN: Characteristic requirements for WSN, Challenges for WSNs, WSN vs Adhoc Networks, Sensor
node architecture, Commercially available sensor nodes, Physical layer and transceiver design considerations in WSNs, Energy
usage profile, Choice of modulation scheme, Dynamic modulation scaling, Antenna considerations. (11)
MEDIUM ACCESS AND ROUTING: Fundamentals of MAC protocols, Low duty cycle protocols and wakeup concepts, Contention
based protocols, Schedule-based protocols: SMAC - BMAC - Traffic-adaptive medium access protocol (TRAMA), The IEEE
802.15.4 MAC protocol. Routing And Data Gathering Protocols, Routing Challenges and Design Issues in Wireless Sensor
Networks, Flooding and gossiping, Data centric Routing, Energy aware routing, Hierarchical Routing, Real Time routing Protocols.
(12)
LOCALIZATION AND MANIPULATION: Localization and positioning, Coverage and connectivity, Single-hop and multihop
localization, Self configuring localization systems, Sensor management. Data Storage and Manipulation, Data centric and content
based routing, Storage and retrieval in network, Compression technologies for WSN, Data Aggregation Techniques. (11)
OPERATING SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS: Operating Systems for Wireless Sensor Networks, Design Issues, Examples of
Operating Systems: TinyOS – Mate – MagnetOS – MANTIS. WSN Applications, Home Control, Building Automation, Medical
Applications, - Reconfigurable Sensor Networks, Civil and Environmental Engineering Applications Nanoscopic Sensor Applications,
Case Study: IEEE 802.15.4 LR-WPANs Standard - Target detection and tracking - Contour/edge detection - Field sampling. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. KazemSohraby, Daniel Minoli and TaiebZnati, “Wireless Sensor Networks Technology, Protocols, and Applications“, John
Wiley & Sons, 2015.
2. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2015.
3. Anna Hać, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2007
4. K. Akkaya and M. Younis, “A survey of routing protocols in wireless sensor networks”, Elsevier Ad Hoc Network Journal, Vol. 3,
no. 3, pp. 325 - 349, 2005.
5. Raghavendra, Cauligi S, Sivalingam, Krishna M., ZantiTaieb, “Wireless Sensor Network”, Springer, 2004.
18EE30 WIRELESS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION

3003
PRINCIPLES OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION: Digital modulation techniques – Linear modulation techniques – Spread
spectrum modulation – Performance of modulation – Multiple access techniques – TDMA – FDMA – CDMA – SDMA – Overview of
cellular networks – Cellular concept – Hand-off strategies – Path loss – Fading and Doppler effect. (10)
WIRELESS PROTOCOLS: Issues and challenges of wireless networks – Location management – Resource management –
Routing – Power management – Security – Wireless media access techniques – ALOHA – CSMA – Wireless LAN – MAN – IEEE
802.11 - Wireless routing protocols – Mobile IP – IPv4 – IPv6 – Wireless TCP -Protocols for 3G & 4G cellular networks – IMT – 2000
– UMTS – CDMA2000 – Mobility management and handover technologies – All-IP based cellular network . (11)
TYPES OF WIRELESS NETWORKS: Mobile networks – Ad-hoc networks – Ad-hoc routing – Sensor networks – Peer-Peer
networks – Mobile routing protocols – DSR – AODV – Reactive routing – Location aided routing – Mobility models – Entity based –
Group mobility – Random way – Point mobility model.
Issues and challenges of mobile networks – Security issues – Authentication in mobile applications – Privacy issues – Power
management – Energy awareness computing. Mobile IP and Ad-hoc networks – VoIP applications. (12)
CELLULAR TECHNOLOGIES: GSM, GPS, GPRS, CDMA and 3G: Bluetooth – Radio Frequency Identification – Wireless
Broadband – Mobile IP – Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) – Java Card – GSM Architecture – GSM Entities – Call Routing in GSM
147
59th ACM 09.06.2018
– PLMN Interfaces – GSM addresses and Identifiers – Network aspects in GSM – Authentication and Security – Mobile computing
over SMS – GPRS and Packet Data Network – GPRS Network Architecture – GPRS Network Operations – Data Services in GPRS
– Applications for GPRS – Limitations of GPRS – Spread Spectrum technology – Is-95 – CDMA Versus GSM – Wireless Data –
Third Generation Networks – Applications on 3G. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Charles E. Perkins, “Ad -Hoc Networking”, Addison – Wesley, December 2008.
2. Lee W. C. Y., “Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and Applications”, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2006.
3. Stallings W, “Wireless Communications & Networks”, Prentice Hall, 2 Edition, November 2004.
4. Schiller J., “Mobile Communications”, Addison-Wesley, 2003.
5. Pahlavan K. and Krishnamurthy P., “Principles of Wireless Networks”, Prentice Hall, 2002.
6. Theodore S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications, Principles and Practice”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, December 2001.
18EE31 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY

3003
SECURITY BASICS: The OSI Security Architectures - Conventional Encryption – Classical Techniques and Modern Techniques -
Modes of operation - DES, AES, Key Distribution. (11)
PUBLICKEY CRYPTOGRAPHY AND HASH FUNCTIONS: Number Theory Concepts – Prime numbers- Modular Arithmetic –
Fermat & Euler Theorem – Euclid Algorithm – RSA Algorithm – Diffie Hellman Key Exchange Elliptic Curve Cryptography –
Hashing techniques - SHA-HMAC – Digital Signatures - DSS, Digital Signature Algorithm. (12)
NETWORK SECURITYAND STANDARDS: Intruders and Intrusion – Viruses and Worms – OS Security – Firewalls – Design
Principles – Packet Filtering – Application gateways – Trusted systems - Security Standards: IEEE, RSA and ISO standards -
Blueprint for Security – Design of Security Architecture. (11)
NETWORK ISSUES: Authentication Applications – Kerberos – Electronic Mail Security – PGP – IP Security – Architecture - Web
Security - SSL – TLS – SET. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. William Stallings, “Network Security Essentials, Applications and Standards”, Dorling Kindersley I P. Ltd., Delhi, 2008.
2. Behrouz A Forouzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
3. AtulKahate, “Cryptography and Network Security” Tata McGraw Hill Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.
4. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security - Principles and Practice”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2007.
5. Richard E. Smith, “Internet Cryptography”, Addison – Wesley, 2004.
6. Wenbo Mao, “Modern Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.
18EE32 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

3003
MULTIRATE DSP: Sampling – Spectral representation: DFT and FFT – Review of Digital filters - Decimation and Interpolation by an
integer and rational factors – Multistaging – Decimation and Interpolation with poly phase filters – Realizations – Applications of
multirate signal processing. (11)
FILTER BANKS: Analysis and Synthesis of Filter Banks– Quadrature Mirror Filter (QMF) banks– Filter bank with perfect
reconstruction – 2-Channel and M-channel – Paraunitary filter banks – Biorthogonal and Linear phase filter banks – Tree and
parallel structured filter banks – Transmultiplexer filter banks – Multi resolution analysis – Subband coding and its applications. (12)
algorithm – adaptive channel equalization – adaptive echo cancellation – RLS adaptive algorithm. (11)
WAVELET TRANSFORM: Short-Time Fourier Transform – limitations - time-frequency scaling - Heisenberg‟s uncertainty –
Continuous Wavelet Transform – Discrete Wavelet Transform – Haar, Daubechy‟s wavelets – Multi Resolution Analysis of audio
signal. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. John G Proakis and Dimitris G Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing-Principles, Algorithms and Applications”, Prentice Hall of
India, 2013.
2. Vaidyanathan PP., “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks”, Pearson Education, 2011.
3. Soman K.P. and Ramachandran K.I., “Insight into Wavelets - From Theory to Practice”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
4. Rao, R.M and Bopardikar A.S., “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory and Applications”, Addison Wesley, Reprint 2003.
5. Fliege N.J., “Multirate Digital Signal Processing” John Wiley & Sons Ltd., Reprinted with Correction, 2000.
148
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EE33 / 18EA35 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
3003
IMAGE FORMATION AND ENHANCEMENT: Human visual system – Sampling and Quantization – Color fundamentals – Spatial
domain processing – Simple image operations – Point wise intensity transformations - Histogram processing - Linear and non-linear
noise smoothening - Sharpening - Derivatives – Laplacian – Combing spatial enhancement methods. (11)
FREQUENCY TRANSFORMS AND APPLICATIONS: Frequency domain processing – 2-D transforms: DFT, DCT and DWT –
Properties – Frequency domain filtering techniques – Sub band coding of image compression – Coding techniques: Huffman, Run
length and Block transform – JPEG – Performance metrics. (11)
IMAGE RESTORATION AND RECONSTRUCTION: Image degradation – Noise models – Image observation models - Spatial
filtering: mean filters, order statistics filters, adaptive filters - Inverse filtering - Wiener filtering – Constrained least squares filtering.
Image Reconstruction from projections – Radon transform and it‟s Application. (11)
SEGMENTATION AND FEATURE EXTRACTION: Edge detection: Gradient operators - edge linking and boundary detection:
Global processing via Hough transforms, Graph theoretic techniques – Thresholding techniques – K-means Clustering – Feature
extraction: Boundary feature descriptors – Region feature descriptors – Principal components – SIFT.
Object Recognition applications. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gonzalez R.C. Woods R.E., “Digital Image Processing”, Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2017.
2. Jayaraman S., Esakkirajan S., Veerakumar T., “Digital Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
3. Jain A.K., “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
18EE34 GRAPH THEORY AND APPLICATIONS

3003
BASICS: Simple Graph – Finite and infinite Graphs – Incidence and Degree – Isolated and Pendent Vertices – Sub-Graphs –
Isomorphism – Paths and Connections – Connected Graphs, Disconnected Graphs and Components – The Shortest Path Problem
– Trees – Spanning Tree Algorithms – Cut Edges and Bonds – Cut Vertices – Cayley‟s Formula – The Connector Problem. (11)
CUT-SETS, PLANAR AND DUAL GRAPHS AND CONNECTIVITY: Cut-sets – Properties – Connectivity – Blocks – Construction of
Reliable Communication Networks – Euler Trees and Hamiltonian Cycles – Planar and Dual graphs – Kuratowski‟s Graphs –
Directed Graphs – Euler Digraphs – The Chinese Postman Problem – The Traveling Salesman Problem. (11)
MATCHING, COLOURING AND COVERING: Matching – Covering in Bipartite Graphs – Perfect Matching – The Personal
Assignment Problem – The Optimal Assignment Problem – Edge Colouring – Edge Chromatic Number – Vizing‟s Theorem – The
Time Tabling Problem – Independent Sets and Cliques – Applications – Vertex Colouring – Chromatic Polynomials – Five Colour
Theorem – Applications (12)
MATRIX REPRESENTATION OF GRAPHS AND GRAPH ENUMERATION: Operations on Graphs – Incidence Matrix – Circuit
Matrix – Fundamental Circuit Matrix – Cut-set Matrix – Path Matrix – Adjacency Matrix – Types of Enumeration – Counting Labeled
and Unlabeled Trees – Polya‟s Counting Theorem – Graphs Enumeration with Polya‟s Theorem.
APPLICATIONS: Network Flows – Transport Networks – Max-Flow Min-Cut Theorem – Activity Networks – Graphs in Game
Theory (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. NarsinghDeo, “Graph Theory with Applications to Engineering and Computer Science”, Prentice Hall, 2007.
2. Reinhard Diestel, “Graph Theory”, Springer Publication, 2006.
3. Jonathan Gross and Jay Yellen, “Graph Theory and Its Applications”, Chapman and Hall, 2005.
18EE35 / 18EA39 / 18ED33 / 18EM32 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

3003
NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk‟s Method
of Feasible Directions, Rosen‟s Gradient Projection Method, Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the
Final value problem to initial value problem, Linear Programming as a Case of Dynamic Programming, Continuous
dynamic programming (11)
Total L: 45
149
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Sharma J K., “Operations Research: Theory and Applications”, Macmillan Company, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Gupta C B., “Optimization Techniques in Operations Research”, I K International, New Delhi, 2012.
18EE36 / 18ED25 / 18EM36 DIGITAL CONTROLLERS FOR POWER ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS

3003
Peripheral Interface, System configuration registers, Memory, Types of Physical Memory, memory Addressing Modes, Code
ADC AND EVENT MANAGERS: ADC Overview, Operation of the ADC in the DSP, Overview of the Event manager (EV), Event
Manager Interrupts, General Purpose (GP) Timers, Compare Units, Capture Units and Quadrature Enclosed Pulse (QEP) Circuitry,
General Event Manager Information, Programming of ADC and Event Managers (11)
DESIGN OF CONTROLLER IN POWER ELECTRONICS: Typical applications: DSP-based implementation of DC-DC buck-boost
converter - DSP-based control of permanent magnet brushless DC machines - DSP-based Implementation of clarkes‟s and park‟s
transformations - DSP-Based implementation of SPWM, SVPWM inverter pulse generation. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hamid.A.Toliyat and Steven G.Campbell “DSP Based Electro Mechanical Motion Control“ CRC Press New York, 2004.
18EE37 / 18ED38 / 18EM38 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES

3003
Home Area Network (HAN) :IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.15.4, 6LoWPAN, Neighborhood Area Network (NAN) / Field Area Network
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ali Keyhani, “Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems”, Wiley, 2016.
2. Stuart Borlase, “Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press, 2012.
3. JanakaEkanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu and Akihiko Yokoyama, “Smart Grid: Technology and
Applications”, Wiley, 2012.
150
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EE38 / 18EA41 SOFT COMPUTING
3003
FEED FORWARD NETWORKS AND SUPERVISED LEARNING: Fundamentals – Biological neural network – Artificial neuron –
Activation function – Learning rules - Perceptron Networks – Adaline – Madaline – Back propagation networks – Learning factors –
Linear separability. Hopfield network – Discrete Hopfield networks – Associative memories – Recurrent auto association memory –
Bi-directional associative memory – Boltzman machine. (12)
UNSUPERVISED LEARNING NETWORKS: Hamming networks – Self-organising feature maps – Adaptive resonance theory
network – Instar model – Outstar model – Counter propagation network – Radial basis function networks (10)
FUZZY SETS AND RELATIONS: Properties and Operations on Classical and Fuzzy Sets - Crisp and Fuzzy Relations - Cardinality,
Properties and Operations, Composition, Tolerance and Equivalence Relations - Fuzzy Ordering - Simple Problems. Features of
membership function - Standard forms and Boundaries - fuzzification - membership value assignments - Fuzzy to Crisp Conversions
- Lambda Cuts for fuzzy sets and relations – Defuzzification methods (11)
GENETIC ALGORITHMSANDSOFT COMPUTING APPLICATIONS: Introduction – Genetic operators – Selection, cross-over and
mutation – Fitness function – A simple genetic algorithm – Applications. Application of Neural Networks: Pattern Recognition -
Image compression – Communication - Control systems, Applications of Fuzzy Logic: Fuzzy Pattern Recognition - Fuzzy Image
compression - Fuzzy Logic controllers. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sivanandam S N, Sumathi S., and Deepa S. N., “Introduction to Neural Networks using Matlab 6.0”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications,
New Delhi, 20th Reprint, 2014.
2. Sivanandam S N, and Deepa S. N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd Edition, June 2011.
3. Timothy Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw Hill, Singapore, 3rd Edition, 2010.
5. David E Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimisation and Machine Learning, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004.
6. Zimmermann H.J., “Fuzzy Set Theory and its Applications”, Springer India (P) Ltd., New Delhi, Nov. 2001.
18EE39 / 18EA42 / 18ED 36 / 18EM33 MACHINE LEARNING AND APPLICATIONS

3003
Discriminant Functions, Probabilistic Generative and Discriminative Models, Laplace Approximation, Bayesian Logistic Regression. (11)
Recognition, Computer Aided Diagnosis, Computer Vision, Speech Recognition, Text Mining, Thinking Machines, Smart Machines,
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep Kumar and Arvind Tiwari, “Ubiquitous Machine Learning and Its Applications”, IGI Global, 2017.
2. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.
3. David Barber, “Bayesian Reasoning and Machine Learning”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2014.
18EE40 PYTHON PROGRAMMING

3003
BASICS OF PYTHON PROGRAMMING: Variables - Keywords - Strings and Numeric Data Types - Lists – Tuples - Sets -
Dictionaries - Control Statements: if Statement, Relational Operators, Logical Operators, Bit Wise Operators, while Loop, break and
continue, for Loop – Functions: Scope - Passing Functions to a Function - Mapping Functions in a Dictionary – Lambda – Modules -
Standard Functions (12)
OBJECT ORIENTED FEATURES AND I/O HANDLING: Classes - Principles of Object Orientation - Creating Classes –Instance
Methods – Special Methods - Class Variables – Inheritance – Polymorphism - Type Identification – Data Streams - Access Modes -
Writing Data to a File - Reading Data from a File - Additional File Methods - Using Pipes as Data Streams (10)
ERROR HANDLING AND REGULAR EXPRESSIONS: Run Time Errors - Exception Model - Exception Hierarchy - Handling
Multiple Exceptions - Handling IO Exceptions - Regular Expressions: Simple Character Matches - Special Characters - Character
Classes – Quantifiers - Dot Character - Greedy Matches – Grouping - Matching at Beginning or End - Match Objects – Substituting -
151
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Splitting a String - Compiling Regular Expressions. (11)
APPLICATIONS USING PYTHON: Network programming-Database Access- Creating simple Graphical User Interfaces -Sending
e-mail using SMTP Library-Multithreading-CGI Programming - Extensions- Web application development: opening an URL-creating
a simple web page- Overview of webapp2 and Flask- Micropython (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Andreas C. Müller, Sarah Guido, “Introduction to Machine Learning with Python: A Guide for Data Scientists” , O‟Reilly, 2016.
2. Sumit Gupta “Building Web Applications with Python and Neo4j”,Packt publishers, 2015
3. Ron DuPlain, “ Instant Flask Web Development “,Packt publishers ,Second edition, 2013
5. Mark Summerfield. “Programming in Python 3: A Complete introduction to the Python Language”, Addison-Wesley Professional,
2009.
ONE CREDIT COURSE

1001
SIMULATION and PHYSICAL REALIZATION: Features of ANADIGMDESIGNER2 EDA tool for simulating the analog design-
verification. (3)
Total L : 15
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas L. Floyd “Electronic devices Conventional Current Version” Pearson Education Ltd, Ninth Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas L. Floyd “Instructor‟s Resource Manual to Accompany Electronic Devices” Pearson Education Ltd, Eighth Edition,
2008.
3. Thomas L. Floyd “Electronic Devices” Pearson Education Ltd, Eighth Edition, 2008.

1001
(Linear Code Sequence and Jump) - Data Flow and Control Flow analysis- Unit/System/Integration Testing - Code Quality -
Total L : 15
152
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep Oak and Renu Rajani , “Software Testing – Effective Methods, Tools and Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications,
2004.
2. Stephen L. Montgomery,”MISRA C: Guidelines for the use of the C Language in Critical Systems”, Motor Industry Research
Association,2013.
3. Robert C. Seacord, “The CERT C Secure Coding Standard”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 1st edition, 2008.
4. Justyna Zander, Ina Schieferdecker,Pieter J. Mosterman, “Model-based Testing for Embedded Systems”, CRC Press, Taylor
and Francis Group, 2012.
18EK13 SYSTEM ENGINEERING FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS

1001
PROCESS : Requirements process, Baseline creation
DESIGN PROCESS : Definitions, Axioms, Design Matrices, Types and examples, Constraints (3)
Total L : 15
REFERENCES:
1. Benjamin S. Blanchard, John E. Blyler, “System Engineering Management”, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2016
2. INCOSE Systems Engineering Handbook: A Guide for System Life Cycle Processes and Activities, Wiley, 2015
3. Alexander Kossiakoff, William N. Sweet, Samuel J. Seymour, Steven M. Biemer, “Systems Engineering Principles and
Practice”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2011

1001
INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Social and environmental importance of electric vehicles. Conventional Vehicles:
ELECTRIC PROPULSION UNIT: Electric components, Configuration and control of drives: DC Motor - Induction Motor - Permanent
Power Electronic Converter for Battery Charging - Charging methods for battery- Design of Z-converter for battery charging. Case
Total L : 15
REFERENCES:
1. Sheldon S. Williamson, Energy Management Strategies for Electric and Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles, Springer, 2013.
2. Chris Mi, M. Abul Masrur, David Wenzhong Gao, Hybrid Electric Vehicles Principles And Applications With Practical
Perspectives, Wiley Publication, 2011.
3. Iqbal Husain, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2010
4. M. Ehsani, Y. Gao, S. Gay and Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric, and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory, and
Design, CRC Press, 2009
5. James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained Wiley, 2003.
6. C.C. Chan and K.T. Chau, Modern Electric Vehicle Technology, OXFORD University Press, 2001.

1001
153
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. A.G.Phadke, J.S. Thorp, „Synchronized Phasor Measurements and Their Applications‟, Springer Publications, Second Edition,
2017
2. IEEE Synchrophasor Test Suite Specification Version2, 2015
Power System Protection and Control
Monitoring.
5. A.G.Phadke, J.S. Thorp, „Computer Relaying for Power Systems‟, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., Research Studies Press Limited,
2nd Edition, 2009
6. IEC 61850-90-5, Communication networks and systems for power utility automation – Part 90-5: Use of IEC 61850 to transmit
Synchrophasor information according to IEEE C37.118
18EK17 CAD TOOLS FOR VLSI DESIGN AUTOMATION

1001
INTRODUCTION TO VLSI DESIGN PROCESS: Design flow – Role of CAD tools in the design process. (3)
DESIGN CAPTURE: Features of Mentor Graphics Design Architect IC a tool for schematic capture, netlisting, simulation setup and
results viewing - Creating an Inverter using DA_IC- ELDO simulator. (3)
SIMULATION: Features of Advance MS simulator a tool for verification platform for AMS design and verification - Exercises. (3)
PHYSICAL LAYOUT: Features of the IC Station Tool Suite for full custom IC design flow editing, Schematic-driven layout and top-
level floor planning/routing – Exercises. (3)
PHYSICAL VERIFICATION: Features of Calibre LVS for physical verification tool, for layout versus schematic – Exercises. (3)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Michael John Sebastian Smith, “Application-Specific Integrated Circuits” Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
2. WayneWolf," Modern VLSI Design: Systems on Chip Design", Pearson Education Inc., Indian Reprint, 2007.
3. http://www.mentor.com/products/ic_nanometer_design
18EK18 DIGITAL DESIGN WITH VERILOG HDL

1001
INTRODUCTION: Digital Design, Verification, and Hardware description languages. (1)
VERILOG FOR DESIGN: Introduction to Logic Synthesis, Synthesizable Constructs - Inferring Combinational Circuit elements -
Inferring Sequential Circuit elements - State Machines - Counters -Encoders/Decoders - Synthesis of Loops - Data Path - Design
Partitioning / Methodology - Synthesizable Code-care about, Sensitivity list and Simulation Synthesis mismatch conditions. (3)
VERILOG FOR VERIFICATION: Delay Modeling in Verilog on Briefly behavioral constructions, Fork-join, Events - Clock Generation
- Data Generation, Deterministic, Random - Some Systems Tasks - Test Bench Architecture. (2)
DESIGN EXAMPLES: RISC Stored Program Machine - UART Design (2)
Mini Projects Specification and Scope Discussions (3)
Review of Projects: Presentation by student groups (3)
(15 min per student group)
Feedback on the Design Project (1)
Total L : 15
REFERENCES:
1. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Pearson Education, 2003
2. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall NJ, USA, 2003.
3. Bhaskar J,”A Verilog Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Learning, 2012.
154
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EK19 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1001
INTRODUCTION: Major components of an Automobile Systems and its functions - Overview of four stroke I.C. engine - Four
Cylinder Engine – Spark firing sequence. (2)
AUTOMOBILE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS: Block diagram of Automobile electrical
system - Typical wiring diagram - Starter system: General layout - Basic starting circuit - Ignition system: Battery and magneto types
- Battery ignition system for four cylinder engine - Ignition system circuit - Distributed ignition coil and ignition advance. Charging
system: Typical alternator in common use - cut-out and regulator - Lighting & accessories system - Wiper motor – circuit diagram of
wind screen wiper motor and washer. (5)
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Physical Variables to be measured in automobiles: Position sensor: Magnetic reluctance and Hall
effect sensor - Temperature sensor: Coolant temperature - Speed sensor – Fuel level sensor - Acceleration sensor - Actuator:
Principle of solenoid and Fuel injector. (4)
DIAGNOSTICS AND COMMUNICATION BUS: Block diagram of Engine control unit -Diagnostics procedure: Introduction –
Diagnostics theory – On board and Off-board diagnostics – Diagnostics Link Connector – Vehicle condition monitoring - CAN bus -
topology – Data transmission – CAN Protocol – Overview of CAN controller - LIN bus: overview – Data Transmission System – LIN
protocol. (4)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. KK Jain , RB Sharma “Automobile engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2011
2. Ronald K.J, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill Publications, USA, 2009.
3. William B.Ribbens, Norman P.Mansour, “Understanding of Automotive Electronics”,Butterworth-Heinemann,United Kingdom
2003
4. “Automotive Electrics / Automotive Electronics - Ed5”, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004.
5. EdMay, “Automotive Mechanics Vol -2”, McGraw Hill Publications, Australia 2004.
6. Tom Denton, “Automobile Electrical and Electronics systems”, Routledge Taylor & Francis Group London & New York, 2002.
AUDIT COURSES
18EE81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18EE82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

155
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME - ELECTRICAL MACHINES (PART-TIME) (Scheme) (2018 REGULATIONS)
(Minimum credits to be earned: 74*)
Course Title CAT
Code Lecture Tutorial Practical Credits CA FE Total
I SEMESTER
18EM01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EM02 Embedded Controllers and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EM03 Modeling and Analysis of Electrical Machines 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EM04 Power Converters and Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EM81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total: 15 hrs. 11 4 0 13 200 200 400
II SEMESTER
18EM05 Electric Drives and Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EM06 Mechanical Design of Electrical Machines 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EM07 Special Machines and Controllers 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18EM51 Power Converters & Drives Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18EM82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total: 15 hrs. 9 2 4 12 200 200 400
III SEMESTER
18EM08 Design of Special Machines 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EM09 Power Electronics in Wind and Solar Power Conversion 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18EM__ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM52 Special Electric Machines Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
Total: 15 hrs. 9 4 2 12 200 200 400
IV SEMESTER
18EM __ Professional Elective 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM53 Smart Grid Lab 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PE
Total: 15 hrs. 9 2 4 12 200 200 400
V SEMESTER
18EM61 Industrial Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18EM71 Project Work -I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total: 16 hrs. 6 0 10 11 200 200 400
VI SEMESTER
18EM72 Project Work-II 0 0 14 14 50 50 100 EEC
ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellences (One to be opted)
18EM21 CNC Machines and Robotics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18EM22 Totally Integrated Automation 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18EM23 Internet of Things 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18EM24 Design & Simulation of Energy Efficient Electrical Machines 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM25 Energy Auditing and Conservation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM26 Soft Computing Techniques for Renewable Energy System 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM27 Simulation of Power Electronic Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM28 Linear Electric Machines 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM29 Electrical Energy Systems & Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM30 Advanced Control of Electric Drives 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM31 Advanced Topics in Power Electronics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM32 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM33 Machine Learning & Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM34 Virtual Instrumentation Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM35 Modelling and Control of Power Converters 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM36 Digital Controllers for Power Electronic Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM37 Power Quality Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM38 Smart Grid Technologies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18EM39 Distributed Generation and Microgrids 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
156
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EM40 Hybrid Electric Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
157
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18EM01/18EA01/18EE01/18ED01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING

2203
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
18EM02/18EA02/18EE02 EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS

3003
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. William Hohl and Christopher Hinds, “ARM Assembly Language Fundamentals and Techniques”, CRC Press, Second Edition,
2015.
2. MykePredko, “Programming and Customizing the PIC Microcontroller”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2008.
3. Danny Causey, Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, “PIC Microcontroller & Embedded System: Using Assembly and
4. Mazidi M.A., Mazidi J.G. and McKinlay R.D., “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, Prentice Hall India, 2nd
5. “ARM System Developer's Guide, Designing and Optimizing System Software”, Andrew Sloss Dominic Symes Chris Wright,
1st Edition, 2004.
18EM03 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES

3204
GENERALIZED THEORY & LINEAR TRANSFORMATION: Conversions – Basic two pole machine – Transformer with movable
secondary – Transformer voltage and speed voltage - kron’s primitive machine - Invariance of power – Transformation from
displaced brush axis three phases to two phases. Rotating axes to stationary axes – Transformed impedance matrix – Torque
calculations. (11+7)
INDUCTION MACHINES: Generalized representation - Performance equations - Steady state analysis – Transient analysis – Single
- phase Induction motor - Transfer function formulation - Double cage machine - Harmonics. (11+7)
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Generalized representation - Steady state analysis - Transient analysis - Electromechanical
transients (11+8)
158
59th ACM 09.06.2018
DC & SPECIAL MACHINES: Generalized representation – Operation with displaced brushes - Motor (shunt type only) operation -
Steady state and transient analysis. Generalized representation and steady state analysis of Reluctance motor – Brushless DC
motor - Variable reluctance motor. (12+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
2. Krishnan R., “Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
3. Chee- Mun Ong, “Dynamic Simulation of Electrical Machinery using MATLAB”, Prentice – Hall, Inc, 1998.
4. Krause P.C., Wasynczuk O. and Sudhoff S.D., “Analysis of Electric Machinery”, IEEE Press, 1995.
5. Adkins B., “The Generalized Theory of Electrical Machines”, Dover Publishers, 1980.
6. Ion Boldea and S.A. Nasar, “Electric Drives”, CRC Press LLC, New York, 1999
18EM04 POWER CONVERTERS AND ANALYSIS

3003
AC TO DC CONVERTERS: Single phase and three phase bridge rectifiers, Fully controlled converters with RL, RLE loads,
Freewheeling diode, Dual Converter, PWM rectifiers
Evaluation of performance parameter, Input harmonics and output ripple, smoothing inductance, power factor, effect of source
inductance and overlap, Design of converter circuits – Snubber circuit design - Control circuit strategies. (12)
DC TO DC CONVERTERS: DC choppers: Step down dc chopper with R, RL and RLE loads - Control strategies - Continuous and
discontinuous current operations - Two quadrant and four quadrant DC chopper - Multiphase DC chopper - Switching mode
regulators: Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost and CUK regulators - Chopper circuit design – Control circuit strategies. (11)
AC TO AC CONVERTERS: Principle of phase control, single-phase bi-directional controllers with R, L and R-L loads, 3-phase bi-
directional Controllers, different Configurations, Analysis with pure R and L loads. Principle of operation - single phase and three
phase cyclo converters - Control circuit strategies. (11)
DC TO AC CONVERTERS: Single phase and Three phase bridge inverters - Evaluation of performance parameters – Voltage
control and Waveform improvement Techniques – Current source inverters - Inverter circuit design - SVPWM – Introduction to
multilevel inverter (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications", Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Vedam Subrahmanyam, "Power Electronics", New Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2006.
3. MD Singh and K B Khanchandani, "Power Electronics", McGraw Hill, 2006.
4. Sen PC, "Modern Power Electronics ", Wheeler Publishing Co, McGraw Hill, 2005.
5. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland, William P. Robbins, “Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design”, John Wiley
and Sons, Inc., New York, 2003.
SEMESTER II
18EM05 / 18ED07 ELECTRIC DRIVES AND CONTROL

3003
DYNAMICS & CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL DRIVES: Introduction – Parts of Electrical Drives - Fundamental Torque Equations –
Speed Torque Conventions and Multiquadrant Operation – Nature & Classification of Load Torques - Modes of Operation – Closed -
Loop Control of Drives. (11)
Induction Motor Drives: Stator Control: control by AC voltage controllers - Variable frequency square wave VSI drives - PWM
Drives - CSI drives - closed loop control. Rotor Control: Static rotor resistance control - Slip power recovery : Static Kramer drive -
Static Scherbius drive. (11)
VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTORS: Principle of vector control - Rotor flux - Oriented control, Stator Flux - oriented
control, Magnetizing flux - oriented control of Induction machines. Sensorless Vector and Direct Torque Controlled Drives: Basic
types of torque controlled drive scheme: vector drives - direct torque controlled rives. (12)
SPECIAL DRIVES: Synchronous Motor Drives: Scalar control – True synchronous and self control modes – PMSM Motor and
Control - SynRM motor and Control - Switched reluctance motor and control. Configurations of I/O Control: AC drive Hardware
Blocks – Control Blocks – Automatic Motor Adaptation – Parameterization of Drives (Local and Remote). (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
2. Ion Boldea and Nasar S.A., “Electric Drives”, CRC Press LLC, New York, 1999.
3. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, New York,
1997.
4. Pillai S.K., "Analysis of Thyristor Power Conditioned Motors", University Press, 1992.
159
59th ACM 09.06.2018
6. Miller T.J.E., “Brushless Permanent-Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives”, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
18EM06 MECHANICAL DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES

3003
TYPES AND ANALYSIS OF ROTATING ELECTRICAL MACHINES: Different parts, their function, assembly of electrical
machines, Types of fit and tolerance -Selection of fits - Geometric tolerances – Drawing Conventions.
DESIGN OF FRAME: Design of frame and end covers - Cast fabricated - Different frame size as per BIS - Selection of material,
strength analysis - Heat generation and dissipation analysis - Heat balance and cooling - Fractional kW motor construction
Aluminium and extruded sections. (11)
DESIGN OF SHAFTS: Types of load on shaft - Selection of shaft material – Theories of failure - Design of shaft with bending and
torsion – Fatigue limit design.
DESIGN AND SELECTION OF BEARINGS: Selection of antifriction bearings for electrical machines - Ball and roller bearings - Life
and reliability - Design of hydrodynamic bearings - Application and construction of hydrostatic bearings. (12)
STANDARD COMPONENTS: Selection of standard components like screws, bolts, keys, circlips, oil seals, fans, Rotator,
commutators. BALANCING AND CRITICAL SPEED: Balancing of rotating masses in single plane and Multiplane - Static and
dynamic balancing – Dynamic balancing machine, critical speeds analysis - Rayleigh Ritz and Dunkerly methods. (11)
VIBRATION ANALYSIS: Natural frequency, Forced vibration - Single degree of freedom systems - Transmissibility ratio – Vibration
Damping - Dynamic absorbers - Vibration measuring instruments. Case studies involving mechanical design of electrical
machines. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert L. Norton, “Machine Design – an Integrated Approach”, Pearson Publishers, New Delhi, 2003
2. Hall et all, "Machine Design", Schaum Series, McGraw Hill Book Co., 2003.
3. Mechanical Engg. Dept., PSG CT - "Design Data Book", DPV Printers, Coimbatore 2004.
18EM07 / 18ED24 SPECIAL MACHINES AND CONTROLLERS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Need for special electric machines and controllers – Special Applications requirement – Robotics, Aerospace
actuators, space explorations roverand high temperature environments. Stepper Motors: Types – Constructional features, principle
of operation – modes of excitation – torque production in Variable Reluctance (VR) stepper motor, Permanent Magnet & Hybrid
stepper, Static & dynamic characteristics – Speed - Torque characteristics – Drive systems and circuit – introduction, unipolar drive
& bipolar drive circuits, open loop and closed loop control of stepper motor. (11)
SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MACHINES: Constructional features, principle of operation, Torque equationand characteristics control
techniques – Inductance Profile – Commutation timing diagram – starting & running phase excitation – speed controls, general
controller structure – determination of rotor position, current profiling for smoother torque. Synchronous Reluctance Machines:
Synchronous reluctance motor (SynRM) - operating principle, rotor topologies - Space-vector diagram - basic characteristics of
SynRM - Control of SynRM - Power factor, Current angle, saliency ratio– Vector control - constant current control, constant angle
control – Development of Permanent Magnet assisted SynRM (12)
PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS DC MACHINES: Commutation in DC motor, Electronic commutation, Hal sensors, Optical
sensors, Magnetic circuit model, Multiphase Brushless motor, Square wave permanent magnet brushless motor drives, Torque and
emf equation, Torque-speed characteristics, Control by Back-EMF detection circuits, Controllers-Microprocessor based controller,
Field Weakening control. (11)
PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Introduction - Motor Morphologies - Principle of operation, EMF, power
input and torque expressions, Phasor diagram, Torque - speed characteristics - Parameter Estimation Power controllers, Torque
Controllers, Self-control, Vector control, Current control schemes. Linear Motors: Linear Induction motor (LIM) classification -
construction - Principle of operation - concept of current sheet - goodness factor - DC Linear motor (DCLM) types - circuit equation -
DCLM control applications. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Juha Pyrhonen, Valeria Hrabovcova, Scott semken, “Electrical Machines Drives Control – An Introduction”, Wiley, 2016.
2. Riazollah Firoozian, “Servo Motors and Industrial Control Theory”, Springer, 2014.
3. Paul Acarnley, “Stepping Motors a Guide to Theory and Practice”, IET, 2007.
4. Kenjo T., "Stepping Motors and their Microprocessor Control", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
5. Miller T.J.E, "Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
6. KenjoT and Naganori, S., “Permanent Magnet and Brushless DC Motors", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.
160
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EM51 POWER CONVERTERS & DRIVES LABORATORY

0042
1. Performance analysis of Single phase and three phase Uncontrolled Rectifiers with RLE Load
2. Performance analysis of single phase and three phase AC to AC converter RLE Load
3. Performance analysis of DC to DC converter with RL and RLE Load
4. Performance analysis of DC motor using controlled converter.
5. Performance analysis of induction motor using electric drives.
6. Mini Project
Total P: 60
SEMESTER III
18EM08 DESIGN OF SPECIAL MACHINES

3204
BRUSHLESS PERMANENT MAGNET MOTOR: Brushless PM motor operation principle- BLDC/PMSM – Rotor Design – SPM,
IPM topology – Number of Phases – Number of Slot/Poles – Permanent Magnet Technical Parameters – B-H Curve – Load line
plot – Demagnetization – Winding Design – Distributed, Concentrated – Fractional slot winding machines – Thermal Considerations.
(11+7)
SYNCHRONOUS RELUCTANCE MOTOR: Machine Configuration – Principle of Torque production – Phasor diagram in dq axes –
Rotor geometry – flux barriers – flux carriers – Maximizing Saliency ratio – Number of turns and wire size, slot fill, Multi-layer design,
Mechanical limits – Manufacturing. (11+7)
SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTOR: Machine Configuration – Energy conversion diagram – Choosing poles & phases – Rotor
geometry – pole shapes – Inductance profile – Commutation stage – practical winding slot fill (11+8)
HYBRID STEPPER MOTOR: Variable reluctance motor – Permanent magnet stepping motor – operation principle, construction –
Static torque – Dynamic torque – micro-stepping – Analysis of a Hybrid Stepper Motor – Detent torque, Stiffness torque.
NEXT GENERATION ELECTRIC MOTOR: Extreme Environment electric motor – High temperature Environments – High
temperature wires, Magnets, Vanadium cobalt iron alloys steel – Introduction to superconducting machines – Magnetic gear,
Bearing - less motors. (12+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. “The Rediscovery of Synchronous Reluctance and Ferrite Permanent Magnet Motors”, Tutorial Course Notes 2016, by
Gianmario Pellegrino, Thomas M. Jahns, Nicola Bianchi, Wen L. Soong, Francesco Cupertino.
2. “Servo Motors and Industrial Control Theory”, Springer 2014, Riazollah Firoozian.
3. “High Temperature Materials and Mechanisms”, CRC Press 2014, Yoseph Bar-Cohen.
18EM09/18ED09 POWER ELECTRONICS IN WIND AND SOLAR POWER CONVERSION

3204
SOLAR PV AND WIND POWER: Trends in energy consumption - World energy scenario – Energy sources and their availability -
Conventional and renewable sources - Solar PV and Wind potential in India and World – Solar and Wind Data - Policies and
Regulations - Standards and codes used for Renewable Energy Systems (11+7)
SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Solar radiation and measurement - Solar cells and their characteristics -
Classification of Solar PV panels- Influence of insolation and temperature - PV arrays- Maximum power point tracking – Algorithms
Power Conditioning Schemes - Charge controllers - Inverters – Classifications and Design - Analysis of PV Systems – BoS
components - Stand alone and Grid integrated Solar PV Systems – Building Integrated PV (BIPV) - Synchronized operation with
grid supply - Harmonic standards, Harmonic problems. (12+7)
WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: Basic Principle of wind Energy conversion - Nature of Wind - Power in the wind -
Components of Wind Energy Conversion System (WECS) – Wind farm and its accessories - Generators used in Wind Energy
Conversion Systems - Performance of Induction Generators for WECS- Power conditioning schemes - Controllable DC Power from
SEIGs - System performance. Grid Connected WECS - Concepts of Grid Integration - Grid related problems - Generator control -
Performance improvements - Different schemes - AC voltage controllers - Harmonics and PF improvement. (11+8)
HYBRID POWER SYSTEMS: Wind / Solar PV integrated systems – Other alternate Systems – Requirements - Optimization of
system components Power conditioning schemes for Hybrid Power Systems (HPS) – Design of HPS using software - Storage types
and selection methods - Applications of HPS (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
161
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Sumathi S., Ashok Kumar L., Sureka S., “Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory,
Modeling with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques”, Green Energy and Technology, Springer;
2015.
2. Mukund R Patel, “Wind and Solar Power Systems”, CRC Press, 2004.
3. Roger A. Messenger, Jerry Ventre, “Photovoltaic System Engineering”, CRC Press, 2004.
4. Thomas Markvart and Luis Castaser, “Practical Handbook of Photovoltaics”, Elsevier Publications, UK, 2003.
5. Rai G.D., "Non-conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.
6. Daniel Hunt V., "Wind Power - A Handbook of WECS", Van Nostrend Co., New York, 1998.
,
18EM52 SPECIAL ELECTRIC MACHINES LABORATORY
0021
1. Speed control of Stepper Motor.

2. Performance characteristics study on Brushless DC Motor.
3. Performance characteristics study on Switched Reluctance Motor.
4. Performance characteristics study on Synchronous Reluctance Motor.
5. Performance characteristics study on Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor.
6. Mini Project
Total P: 45
SEMESTER V
18EM61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Total P: 60
18EM71 PROJECT WORK – I

0063
SEMESTER VI
18EM72 PROJECT WORK – II

0 0 14 14
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE (ELECTIVE 3 Associated with Centre of Excellences)
18EM21 CNC MACHINES AND ROBOTICS

3204
INTRODUCTION: History and Terminology of robotics - Types of industrial robots-Introduction to Numerical control machines,
Application of Numerical Control systems. (11+7)
STUDY OF SIX AXIS ARTICULATED ROBOT: Power Calculation- Motor and Amplifier Selection - Motion controller selection and
development - Robot body design and Assembly - Robotic Application Development.
(11+7)
ROBOT SIMULATION SOFTWARE: Familiarization of software-Simulation basics - Import robot models - Simulate different
applications and visualize robot path-Generation of robot program. (11+8)
STUDY OF CNC MACHINES: Functions of CNC, System hardware and software development process. Interfacing with keyboard,
monitor, field inputs, outputs and MPG. PC based controllers.
FEEDBACK DEVICES AND DRIVE UNITS OF CNC: Applications of feedback devices in CNC. Encoders - Absolute and
incremental. Resolvers, Proximity switchs. Introduction to motors and drives - AC and DC servomotors and drives, servo tuning. Use
of stepper motors and drives in CNC. Axis drive arrangements, ball screw, timing belts and couplings. (12+8)
162
59th ACM 09.06.2018
LAB SESSION:
Execute and Operate Industrial Robot from Remote Location.
Programming a CNC machining centre-Fanuc.
Programming and simulation of a lathe in Keller software.
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Lab Manual Prepared by Department of Robotics and Automation Engineering, 2015
2. Robert L. Mott, “Machine Elements in Mechanical Design”, Pearson, 2004.
3. James A Rehg, “Introduction to Robotics in CIM Systems‖”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
18EM22 / 18ED23 / 18EE22 / 18EA23 TOTALLY INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

3204
Automation - IEC/ ISA Standards for Control Elements – Selection criteria for control elements – Utilisation Category with IEC
standards - Construction of Relay Ladder logic with different control elements- Need for PLC - PLC evolution. (6+3)
- Capabilities of PLC - Selection criteria for PLC – PLC Communication - PLC Wiring - Installation of PLC and its Modules.
Types of Programming – Bit Instructions - Timers and counters – PLC arithmetic functions PTO / PWM generation - High Speed
Counter – Analog Scaling – Encoder Interfacing- Servo drive control – Stepper Motor Control. (12+13)
EttherCAT (7+0)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Bolton W., “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Elsevier Ltd., 2015.
2. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers‖”, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
3. John R Hackworth and Fredrick D Hackworth Jr., “Programmable Logic Controllers: Programming Methods and
Applications‖”, Pearson Education, 2006.
18EM23 / 18EE21 / 18EA22 / 18ED22 INTERNET OF THINGS

3204
Wireless HART - Network Layer Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, TCP & UDP, 6LoWPAN - Application Layer Protocols: COAP, MQTT(13+10)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on Approach), Universities Press, 2015.
2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK, 2014.
163
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EM24 DESIGN & SIMULATION OF ENERGY EFFICIENT ELECTRIC MACHINES
3003
INTRODUCTION TO EFFICIENCY STANDARDS: Worldwide Efficiency Regulation – Electrical Energy Consumption – IE Class
Motor/NEMA Standards – IEC60034-30 & IE60034-31 – Direct Grid/Inverter driven – Induction, Brushless PM Motor, Synchronous
Reluctance – Loss Characterization – Core, Copper, Magnet, windage & Bearing Friction, stray. (11)
DESIGN STRATEGIES FOR HIGH EFFICIENCY : Single Phase, Three Phase electric motor – Active length, Laminated electrical
steel characterization& Grades – AWG Gauge – Phase coils – Slot fill factor – Copper die cast – high energy Magnets – Cooling &
Frame design – saliency ratio for reluctance motor. (11)
ELECTROMAGNETICS ASPECTS OF DESIGN: Electromagnetic design guidelines for high efficiency – Flux density in cross -
sectional areas of the core – Core loss theory – Iron losses – Hysteresis, Eddy current losses – Core loss using FEM – Significance
of saliency ratio – Reluctance torque, Magnet torque. (12)
THERMAL ANALYSIS OF DESIGN: Heat extraction – conduction, convection & Radiation – Heat distribution in winding slots –
Cooling system design.
MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES: Stamping Lamination – Punching, EDM, Cleating, Riveting, Bonding, segmented stator –
Stress Relief Annealing – Wire insertion mechanism – Hydraulic Pressing of shaft – Heat shrinking – interlocking mechanism –
Induction heating for Bearings. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. “Introduction to AC Machine Design”, Thomas A. Lipo, 2017.
2. “Multiphysics Simulation by Design for Electrical Machines, Power Electronics and Drives” by Marius Rosu, Ping Zhou, Ding
Sheng Lin, Dan IONEL, Mircea Popescu, Frede Blaabjerg, Vandana Rallabandi, David Staton, 2017.
3. International Standard IEC 60034-30-1: 2014.
18EM25 ENERGY AUDITING AND CONSERVATION

3003
INTRODUCTION: Trends in energy consumption - classification of energy source and their availability- energy scenario - energy
pricing, energy sector reforms. Mandatory Auditing requirements – Audit purpose, scope and frequency - Energy auditing
Conservation concepts and its Importance – Energy conservation opportunities in electrical power supply sector - The Energy
Conservation Act, 2001 and its Features. (11)
ENERGY AUDIT: Electrical energy audit, tools for electrical energy audit, billing elements, tariff systems, energy and demand
charge, electrical demand and load factor improvement, power factor correction, power demand control and demand shifting -
Duties and responsibilities of energy systems auditors. Instruments for Audit and Monitoring Energy and Energy Savings, Types and
Accuracy. (11)
ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSERVATION IN DRIVEN EQUIPMENTS: Input electrical energy requirements in pumps, fans, and
lighting, load factor estimation in the equipments, different types of Variable Speed Drives, energy conservation potential, electrical
energy conservation in industrial motors and A/c systems, operation and maintenance practices for electrical energy conservation in
industrial motors, air conditioning and refrigeration systems, DG Sets, Cabling Techniques for energy conservation-waste heat
recovery in industrial DG sets. (11)
DEMAND SIDE MANAGEMENT (DSM) &GREEN BUILDINGS: Introduction to DSM, Concepts of DSM, benefits from DSM, DSM
techniques: time of day pricing, load priority technique, peak clipping, peak shifting, valley filling, strategic conservation, energy
efficient equipment, socio-economic awareness programmes. Barriers to green buildings, green building rating tools, material
selection, operating energy, façade systems, ventilation systems, transportation, water treatment systems, water efficiency, building
economics, Leed and IGBC codes. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. RAO VVL, Openshaw Taylor E., "Utilisation of Electric Energy", Orient Longman Ltd., 2006.
2. Allen J.Wood and Bruce F.Woolenberg, “Power Generation, Operation, and Control'', John Wiley and Sons, 2005.
3. Michael E., Brumbach, “Electronic Variable Speed Drives” Thomson Asia (P) Ltd., 2002.
4. Donald R. Wulfinghoff, “Energy Efficiency Manual”, Energy Institute Press, 1999.
5. Awasthi S.K., “Energy Conservation”, ISTE Publication, 1999.
6. Thiruvengadam S., Srinivasan P.S., “Energy Management In Electrical Energy System”, ISTE Publication, 1999.
18EM26 / 18ED27 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEM

3003
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES: Fundamentals – Biological neural network – Artificial neuron – Activation
function – Learning rules - Single Layer Feedback Networks - Unsupervised Learning Networks - Membership Functions - Features
of membership function - Standard forms and Boundaries - fuzzification - membership value assignments. - Toolboxes of MATLAB –
164
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Programming and file processing in MATLAB - Model definition and model analysis using SIMULINK - S-Functions - Converting S-
Functions to blocks. (11)
OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Passive filter design using Genetic Algorithm,
harmonic elimination in inverters, Tuning of controllers, GA, PSO, DE, optimized fuzzy logic for the Maximum Power Point Tracking,
MATLAB/SIMULINK Models of MPPT Techniques, (11)
OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES FOR WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: MATLAB/SIMULINK model of Wind turbine and
Wind Turbine Generators. Prediction of Wind Turbine Power Factor, Pitch Angle Control, MPPT Algorithms, Economic Dispatch for
Wind Power System – Related MATLAB/SIMULINK models-FLC based STATCOM - Prediction of Wind Speed based on FLC -
Fuzzy Logic Controlled SPWM Converter for WECS. (11)
GRID INTEGRATION: Integration of small scale generation into distribution grids, Different types of grid interfaces, Issues related to
grid Integration systems - Phase Locked Loop for Grid Connected Power System, Grid Connected Inverters, Current Controllers for
PWM inverters, MATLAB/SIMULINK model of Grid Integration, and PLL grid connected power system.
HYBRID ENERGY SYSTEMS: Need for hybrid energy system, MATLAB/SIMULINK models of Hybrid Solar PV and Wind Energy
System- - CUK-SEPIC converter, Boost Converter, Hybrid model of Solar PV and Diesel Energy System,– Hybrid Solar PV and
Wind Energy Conversion Systems (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sumathi S., Ashok Kumar L., Sureka P., “Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory,
Modeling with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques”, Green Energy and Technology, Springer,
2015 Edition, 20 April 2015.
2. Randall Shaffer., “Fundamentals of Power Electronics with MATLAB” Charles River Media Boston Massachusetts, 2007.
4. Rao S S., "Optimization Theory and Applications", Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2003.
5. Garg H.P. and Prakash J., “Solar Energy, Fundamentals and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 1997.
18EM27 SIMULATION OF POWER ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Need for Simulation - Overview of PSPICE, File formats - Description of circuit elements - Circuit description –
Output variables - Dot commands. Overview of MATLAB - SIMULINK Toolboxes - Programming and file processing in MATLAB -
Model definition and model analysis using SIMULINK - S-Functions - Converting S-Functions to blocks. (11)
MODELING AND SIMULATION USING PSPICE, MATLAB SIMULINk: Modeling of diode - Diode with R, R-L, R-C and R-L-C load
with AC supply – Modeling of SCR, MOSFET and IGBT in simulation - Simulation of gate/base drive circuits, simulation of snubber
circuits. (11)
SIMULATION USING PSPICE, MATLAB SIMULINK: Simulation of uncontrolled and controlled rectifiers- AC voltage controllers -
dc-dc - DC-AC converters with self-commutated devices.
State space modeling of Power Converter-Introduction to electrical machine modeling: induction, DC, and synchronous machines.
Simulation of converter fed dc motor drives, simulation of chopper fed dc motor drives-stability aspects. (12)
Simulation of single and three phase inverters, space vector representation, pulse-width modulation methods for voltage control,
waveform control - Simulation of inverter fed induction motor drives. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Randall Shaffer., “Fundamentals of Power Electronics with MATLAB”, Charles River Media Boston Massachusetts, 2007.
2. Issa Batarseh, “Power Electronic Circuits”, John Wiley, 2004.
3. Chee-Mun Ong, "Dynamic Simulation of Electric Machinery: Using MATLAB/ Simulink", Prentice Hall PTR, New Jersey, 1998.
4. Robert Ericson, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Chapman & Hall, 1997.
5. Ramshaw E., Schuuram D. C., “PSpice Simulation of Power Electronics Circuits – An Introductory Guide”, Springer, New York,
1996.
6. Ned Mohan, "Power Electronics: Computer Simulation Analysis and Education using PSPICE", Minnesota Power Electronics
Research and Education, USA, 1992.
18EM28 LINEAR ELECTRIC MACHINES

3003
GENERAL ASPECTS: Differences between Linear Electric Machines (LEM) and rotating machines -Traveling magnetic field –
Hamilton’s principle of LIM.
LINEAR INDUCTION MOTOR (LIM): Classifications - Construction - Concept of Current sheet - Air gap field equation - Air gap flux
leakage - Skin effect - Edge effect - End Effect - Goodness Factor.LIM Equivalent circuit - Performance calculations - Selection and
Applications - Design considerations - Tubular LIM. (12)
SELF OSCILLATING LINEAR MOTORS: Types – Construction - Principle of operation - Applications.

165
59th ACM 09.06.2018
LINEAR SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS (LSM): Principle of operation - Types – Design considerations - Performance equation - LSM
control - Applications. (11)
DC LINEAR MOTORS (DCLM): Principle of operation - Types - Design guide lines - Circuit equation - Electromagnetic
Launchers - DCLM control - Applications. (11)
LINEAR STEPPER MOTORS (LSTM): Principle of operation - Types - Static and holding thrust - Modeling - Design guidelines -
Drive Control – Applications.
LINEAR LEVITATION MACHINES (LLM): Basic configuration - Types - Expression for Levitation and Drag forces - Dynamics -
Electromagnetic bearings – Applications. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Nasar A and Boldea I, "Linear Electric Motors : Theory, Design and Practical Applications", Prentice-Hall Inc, New Jersey,
1987.
2. Yamamura S, "Theory of Induction Motors", University of TokyoPress, Japan, 1972.
3. Laithwaite E.R., "Induction Machines for Special Purposes", George New York Ltd., London, 1966.
18EM29 ELECTRICAL ENERGY SYSTEMS & MANAGEMENT

3003
INTRODUCTION & ECONOMIC OPERATION: Overall structure of Electrical Systems, Definition and Objective of Energy
Management, General Principles of Energy Management, Energy Management Skills, Energy Management Strategy. Economic
operation of power generating station - Input-Output curves, Load sharing, Industrial Distribution; Load profiling - Electricity tariff –
types - Reactive Power, Power factor, Capacitor Sizing, Capacitor losses, Location/Placement/Maintenance. (11)
ELECTRICAL ENERGY MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT: Energy Efficiency, Energy accounting, monitoring and control,
Instruments for Audit and Monitoring Energy and Energy Savings, Types and Accuracy. Energy consumption models, Specific
Energy Consumption; ECO assessment and Evaluation methods - Supply & Demand Side management. (11)
ELECTRICAL ENERGY FOR INDUSTRIAL LIGHTING & EFFICIENT CONTROL OF MOTORS: Transformer Loading/Efficiency
analysis, Feeder loss evaluation, Lighting, Energy efficient light sources, Domestic / commercial / industrial lighting, Controls,
Energy conservation in Lighting Schemes, Luminaries. Energy efficient buildings. Types and Operating characteristics of Electric
Motors, Energy efficient control and starting, Load matching, Selection of Motors, Efficiency and Load Analysis, Energy efficiency /
high efficiency Motors. (12)
ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT: Industrial Drives, Control Schemes, Variable speed drives and
Energy conservation schemes - Efficient Control strategies - Over sizing - Electrolytic Process, Electric heating - Furnace operation
and scheduling; Cogeneration Schemes - Optimal operation. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mehta V.K., Rohit Metha, “Principles of Power System” S.Chand & Company Ltd., Reprint 2009.
2. Allen J.Wood and Bruce Woolenberg F., “Power Generation, Operation and Control'', John Wiley and Sons, 2005.
3. Partab H., “Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Donald R. W., Energy Efficiency Manual, Energy Institute Press, 1999.
5. Kao Chen, “Energy Management in Illuminating Systems”, CRC Press Publication, 1999.
6. Saluja H.H., “Electric Power Supply and Energy Management in Industry by Optimisation”, ISTE publication, 1999.
18EM30 / 18ED26 ADVANCED CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DRIVES

3003
ADVANCED CONTROLMETHODS: Introduction - Power Converter Control using State-Space Averaged Models – Sliding - Mode
Control of Power Converters - Fuzzy Logic Control of Power Converters (11)
MOTOR DRIVES: Review - DC Motor Drives - Induction Motor Drives - Synchronous Motor Drives - Reluctance motor Drives –
Servo Motor Drives (11)
HIGH PERFORMANCE DRIVES: Types of Torque - Controlled Drive Schemes - Vector Drives, Direct – Torque - Controlled Drives
– DSP Controlled Drives – DC Drive, AC Drive, Synchronous motor Drive, and Special Motor drive (12)
ARTIFICIAL-INTELLIGENCE BASED DRIVES: AI-Based Techniques - Applications in Electrical Machines and Drives - Neural-
Network-Based Drives - Fuzzy Based Drives - commercial AI based Drives (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hamid A Toliyat and Steven G. Campbell, “DSP Based Electromechanical Motion Control”, CRC Press, 2004.
2. Marcian Cirstea, Andrei Dinu, Malcolm Mc Cormick, Jeen Ghee Khor, “Neural and Fuzzy Logic Control of Drives and Power
Systems”, Newnes Publications, 2002.
4. Bimal K Bose, "Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application", IEEE Press, 1997.
166
59th ACM 09.06.2018
6. Miller T.J.E,"Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives", Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989
18EM31 / 18ED30 ADVANCED TOPICS IN POWER ELECTRONICS

3003
RESONANT CONVERTERS: Zero voltage and Zero current switching – Classification of resonant converters - Basic resonant
circuit concepts - Load resonant converters - Resonant switch converters - Zero voltage switching, clamped voltage topologies -
Resonant DC link Inverters and Zero voltage switching - High frequency link integral half cycle converters - Applications in SMPS
and lighting. (11)
IMPROVED UTILITY INTERFACE: Generation of current harmonics – Current harmonics and power factor - Harmonic standards
and recommended practices - Need for improved utility interface - Improved single phase utility interface - Improved three phase
utility interface - Electromagnetic interference. (11)
FACTS AND CUSTOM POWER: Introduction - Principles of reactive power control in load and transmission line compensation -
Series and shunt reactive power compensation - Concepts of Flexible AC Transmission System (FACTS) - Static var compensators
(SVC) - Thyristor controlled reactor - Thyristor switched capacitor - Solid state power control - Static condensers - Controllable
series compensation - Thyristor controlled phase-angle regulator and unified power flow control - Modeling and methods of analysis
of SVC and FACTS controllers - System control and protection - Harmonics and filters – Simulation and study of SVC and FACTS
under dynamic conditions. (12)
EMERGING DEVICES AND CIRCUITS: Power Junction Field Effect Transistors - Field Controlled Thyristors - JFET based devices
Vs other power devices - MOS controlled thyristors - Power integrated circuits - New semiconductor materials for power devices.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Education (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2004. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. Ned Mohan., Undeland and Robbins, "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design", John Wiley and Sons (Asia)
3. Mohan Mathur P, Rajiv K Varma, “Thyristor – Based Facts Controllers for Electrical Transmission Systems”, John Wiley and
Sons Inc., IEEE Press,USA, 2002.
4. Las Zlo Gyugyi, Narain G Hingorani, “Understanding Facts: Concepts & Technology of Flexible AC Transmission System”, The
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc., New York, 2000.
5. Joseph Vithayathil., “Power Electronics”, McGraw Hill Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering, USA, 1995.
6. Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan Surya Santoso and ‎‎ H. Wayne Beaty, "Electrical Power Systems Quality", Third
18EM32 / 18ED33 / 18EA39 / 18EE35 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

3003
LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Statement of Optimization problems, Principles of single and multi-objective optimization, Graphical
method, Simplex method, Revised simplex method, Two phase simplex method, Duality in linear programming, Sensitivity analysis.
(12)
NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING (CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION): Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk’s Method
of Feasible Directions, Rosen’s Gradient Projection Method, Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the
Final value problem to initial value problem, Linear Programming as a Case of Dynamic Programming, Continuous
dynamic programming (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sharma J K, “Operations Research: Theory and Applications”, Macmillan Company, New Delhi, 2013.
18EM33 / 18EE39 / 18EA42 / 18ED36 MACHINE LEARNING AND APPLICATIONS

3003
167
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Discriminant Functions, Probabilistic Generative and Discriminative Models, Laplace Approximation, Bayesian Logistic Regression
(11)
Recognition, Computer Aided Diagnosis, Computer Vision, Speech Recognition,Text Mining, Thinking Machines, Smart Machines,
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep Kumar and Arvind Tiwari, “Ubiquitous Machine Learning and Its Applications”, IGI Global, 2017.
2. David Barber, “Bayesian Reasoning and Machine Learning”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.
18EM34 / 18ED35 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS

3003
state machines – file I/O - creating LabVIEW executables and projects. (12)
DATA ACQUISITION: DAQ hardware configuration, DAQ hardware – Sampling and grounding techniques- analog I/O, digital I/O,
counter/timer, DAQ software architecture, network data acquisition. Application design using Real Time Targets: PXI, cRIO. (11)
interfaces: RS232, USB, firewire, controller area network (CAN), GPIB, Industrial Ethernet. OLE for Process Control (OPC) (11)
GSD applications. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, “LABVIEW Advanced Programming Techniques”, CRC Press, 2009.
3. Mathivanan N., “PC-Based Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
18EM35 / 18ED03 MODELLING AND CONTROL OF POWER CONVERTERS

3003
STATE SPACE MODELLING: Review of basic control theory – Control design techniques such as P, PI, PID and lead lag
compensator design. State space control design approach – Modeling of physical systems - Solution to vector differential equations
and state transition matrix - Controllability and Observability Small signal Model of Power Converters: Linearizing Averaged Power
Stage Dynamics - Frequency Response of Converter Power Stage - Small-Signal Gain of PWM Block - Small-Signal Model for
PWM DC-to-DC Converters (12)
TRANSFER FUNCTIONS AND STATE SPACE MODEL OF POWER CONVERTER: Bode Plot for Transfer Functions - Power
Stage Transfer Functions and State space modelling of Buck Converter, Boost Converter, and Buck/Boost Converter - Empirical
Methods for Small - Signal Analysis (11)
DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE AND CLOSED LOOP PERFORMANCE OF POWER CONVERTERS: Frequency Domain
Performance Criteria - Time-Domain Performance Criteria, Stability of Power Converters: Nyquist Criterion - Relative Stability: Gain
Margin and Phase Margin Asymptotic Analysis Method – Frequency - Domain Performance - Voltage Feedback Compensation and
Loop Gain - Compensation Design and Closed-Loop Performance (11)
and periodic solutions - Singular points and qualitative behaviour. Stability of nonlinear systems - Lyapunov direct and indirect
methods (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. “Pulsewidth Modulated DC-to-DC Power Conversion Circuits, Dynamics, and Control Designs”, Byungcho Choi, IEEE Press,
Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2013
2. Ogata K., “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
3. Sira-Ramirez, R.Silva Ortigoza, “Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices”, Springer, 2006.
4. Hassan K Khalil, “Nonlinear Systems”, Pearson Educational International Inc. Upper Saddle River, 3rd Edition, 2001.
5. Chen C.T., “Linear Systems Theory and Design’’, Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 1999.
168
59th ACM 09.06.2018
6. “Applied Nonlinear Control”, Jean-Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, Prentice Hall, 1991 - Technology & Engineering
18EM36 / 18ED25 / 18EE36 DIGITAL CONTROLLERS FOR POWER ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS

3003
Peripheral Interface, System configuration registers, Memory, Types of Physical Memory, memory Addressing Modes, Code
ADC AND EVENT MANAGERS: ADC Overview, Operation of the ADC in the DSP, Overview of the Event manager (EV), Event
Manager Interrupts, General Purpose (GP) Timers, Compare Units, Capture Units and Quadrature Enclosed Pulse (QEP) Circuitry,
General Event Manager Information, Programming of ADC and Event Managers (11)
DESIGN OF CONTROLLER IN POWER ELECTRONICS: Typical applications: DSP-based implementation of DC-DC buck - boost
converter - DSP-based control of permanent magnet brushless DC machines - DSP-based Implementation of clarkes’s and park’s
transformations - DSP-Based implementation of SPWM, SVPWM inverter pulse generation. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hamid.A.Toliyat and Steven G.Campbell “DSP Based Electro Mechanical Motion Control“ CRC Press New York, 2004.
18EM37 / 18ED29 POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT

3003
POWER QUALITY PROBLEMS: Definition of power quality – Power quality issues - Sources and Effects – International standards
of Power quality and Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA)
curve - Voltage sags - Load influence on voltage sags – Stochastic assessment of voltage sags - Voltage Sags in Continuous
Processes - Case Study – Interruptions – Types – Origin - Causes - Transients - Classification- Utility capacitor switching transients
– Utility lightning protection – Transients from load switching - Impact on users. (12)
HARMONICS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE: Harmonics - Sources and effects of harmonic distortion – Standards
– Impacts - Mitigation and control techniques – Devices for controlling harmonic distortion - Simulation using PSCAD.
Electromagnetic interference - Frequency classification - High-frequency interference - Electromagnetic interference – Susceptibility
- EMI mitigation - Cable shielding to minimize Electromagnetic interference - Health concerns of electromagnetic interference.
(11)
POWER QUALITY SOLUTIONS: Power quality monitoring considerations - Choosing monitoring locations - monitoring and
diagnostic techniques for various power quality problems - modeling of power quality (harmonics and voltage sag) problems by
mathematical simulation tools - power line disturbance analyzer – quality measurement equipment - harmonic / spectrum analyzer -
flicker meters – disturbance analyzer. Applications of expert systems for power quality monitoring. (11)
POWER QUALITY CONDITIONERS: Shunt and series compensators - DSTATCOM - dynamic voltage restorer - unified power
quality conditioners - Custom power devices and their applications in power system - Operating principles - Detailed modeling and
analysis of DSTATCOM and DVR - Compensators to mitigate power quality related problems - Realization of DVR and DSTATCOM
by using VSC. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sankaran.C, "Power Quality", CRC Press, Baco Raton, 2017.
2. Math H J Bollen, "Understanding Power Quality Problems: Voltage Sags and Interruptions", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2014.
3. Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan Surya Santoso and ‎H. Wayne Beaty, "Electrical Power Systems Quality", Third
Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
4. Arindam Ghosh and Gerard Ledwich, “Power Quality Enhancement using Custom Power Devices”, Springer-Verlag, New York,
2012.
5. Arrillaga J., Watson N.R. and Chen S., "Power System Quality Assessment", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
169
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18EM38 / 18ED38 / 18EE37 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES
3003
Home Area Network (HAN) : IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.15.4, 6LoWPAN, Neighborhood Area Network (NAN) / Field Area Network
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ali Keyhani, “Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems”, Wiley, 2016
2. Stuart Borlase, “Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press, 2012.
3. Janaka Ekanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu and Akihiko Yokoyama, “Smart Grid: Technology and
Applications”, Wiley, 2012.
18EM39 / 18ED39 DISTRIBUTED GENERATION AND MICROGRIDS

3003
DISTRIBUTED GENERATION: Energy Sources and their availability -Trends in Energy Consumption, Conventional and Non-
conventional Energy Sources – Review of Solar Photovoltaic – Wind Energy Systems – Fuel Cells, Energy storage systems:
Batteries – ultra capacitors – fly wheels – captive power power plants. Distributed Generation – Concept and topologies, Renewable
Energy in Distributed Generation. IEEE 1547 Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Generation to Electric Power Systems – DG
Installations – Siting and sizing of DGs – optimal placement – Regulatory issues. (11)
ISSUES IN GRID INTEGRATION OF DISTRIBUTED ENERGY RESOURCES: Basic requirements of Grid Interconnections –
operational Parameters – Voltage, Frequency and THD limits – Grid Interfaces – Inverter based DGs and rotary machines based
DGs – Reliability, Stability and Power Quality issues on Grid Integration – Impact of DGs on Protective Relaying and islanding
issues in existing distribution Grid. (11)
MICROGRIDS: Introduction to Microgrids – types – Structure and configuration of Microgrids – AC and DC Microgrids – Power
Electronic Intefaces for Microgrids – Energy Management and Protection Control Strategies of a Microgrid - Case Studies. (11)
CONTROL AND OPERATION OF MICROGRID: Modes of operation and control of microgrid: grid connected and islanded mode,
Active and reactive power control, protection issues, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based techniques,
microgrid communication infrastructure, Power quality issues in microgrids, regulatory standards, Microgrid economics, Introduction
to smart microgrids. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gregory W. Massey, “Essentials of Distributed Generation Systems”, Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2011.
2. Math H. Bollen, “Integration of Distributed Generation in the Power System”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
3. Ali Keyhani, “Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
18EM40 / 18ED40 HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES

3003
INTRODUCTION TO HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES: History of hybrid and electric vehicles, social and environmental importance
of hybrid and electric vehicles, impact of modern drive - trains on energy supplies. Basics of vehicle performance, vehicle power
source characterization, transmission characteristics and mathematical models to describe vehicle performance. (11)
170
59th ACM 09.06.2018
DRIVE –TRAIN TOPOLOGIES: Basic concept of hybrid traction, introduction to various hybrid drive-train topologies, power flow
control in hybrid drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis. Basic concepts of electric traction, introduction to various electric
drive-train topologies, power flow control in hybrid drive-train topologies, fuel efficiency analysis. (11)
ELECTRIC COMPONENTS IN HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES: Electric Drives in HEV/EVs, Classification and
Characteristics, configuration and Control of DC Motor drives, Induction Motor drives, Permanent Magnet Motor drives and Switched
Reluctance Motor drives for HEV/EVs applications, Drive System efficiency. Performance matching of Electric Machine and the
Internal Combustion Engine (ICE), Sizing the propulsion motor, sizing of power electronic devices and Energy Storage systems.
(12)
ENERGY MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES: Introduction to energy management strategies used in hybrid and electric vehicle,
classification of different energy management strategies, comparison of different energy management strategies - implementation
issues. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Iqbal Hussein, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press, 2010.
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimi Gao, Sebastian E. Gay, Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, “Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles:
Fundamentals, Theory and Design”, CRC Press, 2009.
3. Sira-Ramirez, R. Silva Ortigoza, “Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices”, Springer, 2006
AUDIT COURSES
18EM81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18EM82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

.
171
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME – COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
(2018 REGULATIONS)
I SEMESTER
18LC01 Applied Mathematics 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LC02 Information Theory and Coding 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LC03 Advanced Digital Communications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LC04 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LC05 Communication Algorithms on FPGA 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LC51 Advanced Digital Communications Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LC81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 Hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18LC06 RF Circuit Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LC07 Communication Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LC08 Wireless Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LC09 Embedded System Design and IoT 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LC__ Professional Elective - 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC52 Communication Networks Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LC61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18LC81 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 Hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18LC53 Communication System Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LC71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18LC72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 0 0 28 14
18LC21 Detection and Estimation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC22 Cooperative Communications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC23 Cognitive Radio Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC24 High Performance Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC25 Green Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC26 Vehicular Systems and Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC27 Communication Protocols for IoT 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC28 Radiating systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC29 Multirate Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC30 Adaptive Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC31 Wavelets and Subband Coding 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC32 Digital Image and Video Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC33 Multimedia Compression 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC34 Computer Vision and Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC35 Speech Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC36 Error Control Coding 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC37 Evolutionary Computation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LC38 Data Structures and Algorithms 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
172
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18LC01 / 18LW01 APPLIED MATHEMATICS

2203
RANDOM VARIABLES: Continuous, Discrete and Mixed random variables, cumulative distribution function - joint distribution-
marginal distribution - conditional distribution –statistical independence. (8+7)
EXPECTATION AND ESTIMATION: Moments, central moments – mean, variance, Chebyshev and Schwarz inequatlities, Chernoff
bound, auto correlation, cross – correlation, covariance, characteristic functions, central limit theorem. (8+7)
RANDOM PROCESSES: Classification of Random processes, Poisson process, stationary process, wide sense stationary process,
cross correlation, White Gaussian process, linear filter. (8+7)
VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces and subspaces – linear independence - basis and dimension, inner product space -
orthonormal bases - Gram-Schmidt process, linear transformations - change of basis - inverse linear transformation, eigenvalues
and eigenvectors. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, ―Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version‖, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2018.
2. David C Lay, ―Linear Algebra and Its Applications‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017.
3. Saeed Ghahramani, ―Fundamentals of Probability with Stochastic Processes‖, Pearson, New Delhi, 2016.
4. H. Stark and J.W. Woods, ―Probability and Random Process with Applications to Signal Processing‖, Pearson Education, 2012.
5. Roy D.Yates and David J Goodman, ―Probability and Stochastic Processes - A Friendly Introduction for Electrical and
Computer Engineers‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
18LC02 INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING

3003
GAUSSIAN RANDOM VARIABLES: Independence, conditional expectation, Gaussian Random variable, Jointly Gaussian Random
Vector and its density function (5)
DISCRETE MEMORYLESS CHANNELS: Self information, conditional entropy and mutual information, channel capacity theorem
for DMC (5)
CONTINUOUS TIME CHANNELS: Average mutual information, AWGN channel capacity, introduction to MIMO channel capacity.
(9)
SOURCE CODING: Coding of memoryless sources, entropy and source coding theorem, Kraft inequality, Huffman code, LempelZiv
coding, introduction to Rate distortion theory (12)
CHANNEL CODING: Need for error control coding - Random coding theorem of Shannon, (7,4) Hamming code and syndrome
decoding, convolutional codes – Viterbi algorithm – Introduction to Turbo coding principles and parity check codes, Introduction to
Network coding (14)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. S Haykin, ―Communication Systems‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2014.
2. Reza F M, "An Introduction to Information Theory", McGraw Hill, 2014.
3. T.Cover and J.Thomas, ―Elements of Information Theory‖, John Wiley, 2013.
4. Proakis J.G and Salehi M ―Fundamentals of Communication Systems‖Pearson, 2011.
5. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Communication‖, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
18LC03 ADVANCED DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

3003
SIGNALING THROUGH AWGN CHANNEL: Review of Signal Representation and Optimum Receivers, Definitions for SER, BER,
SNR, average symbol energy, bit energy and Eb/No, decision boundary and decision regions for AWGN model with/without equal
prior probability, Exact symbol error probability for several linear modulation schemes (ASK, FSK, PSK and QAM), union bound
argument, Chernoff bound (15)
SIGNALING THROUGH BANDLIMITED CHANNELS: Nyquist criterion for zero ISI, Sync and Raised cosine pulse shaping,
controlled ISI using duobinary signals (6)
SIGNALING THROUGH DISTORTING CHANNELS: ISI, Zero forcing equalization, Linear MMSE equalizers, Decision Feedback
Equalizer, Fractionally Spaced Equalizer – Introduction to Adaptive Equalization (6)
BLOCK MODULATION SCHEMES: Single carrier, multicarrier, cyclic prefix in the guard interval, OFDM, OFDMA, MC-CDMA,
Introduction to Generalized block modulation schemes – GFDM, IFDMA, FBMC (9)
173
59th ACM 09.06.2018
TIMING AND FREQUENCY SYNCHRONISATION: Synchronization of baseband signals, oversampling, early late gate methods,
delay locked loop and squaring loop, carrier synchronization, PLL and Costas loop, pilot aided and decision aided approaches. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. S Haykin, ―Digital Communication Systems‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
2. Proakis J.G and Salehi M ―Fundamentals of Communication Systems‖ Pearson ,2011.
3. Lajos L Hanzo and Thomas Keller, ―OFDM and MC-CDMA – A primer‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2006.
4. Bernard Sklar, "Digital Communications", Pearson Education Asia, Sixth reprint, 2005.
5. Barry S, Lee E A and Messershmitt D J, ―Digital Communications‖, Kluwer Academic Press, 2004.
6. Meyer H, Moeneclacy M, Fechtel S A, "Digital communication receivers ", John Wiley, New York, 1998.
18LC04 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

3204
REVIEW OF DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING: DT signals and LTI Systems – Need for frequency domain analysis - Fourier
transform for continuous and discrete time signals – Z-Transform - DFT – FFT - Use of FFT for power spectral estimation - Linear
phase FIR filters – Realization of FIR filters. (11+6)
MULTIRESOLUTION ANALYSIS USING WAVELETS: Need for time frequency analysis - Heisenberg‘s uncertainty principle -
Short time Fourier transform - Need for wavelets - wavelet basis – concept of scale and its relation with frequency - Continuous
time wavelet transform equation - Admissibility condition – Multi resolution analysis – Applications - Signal Denoising - Subband
coding. (11 +8)
MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING: Review of Sampling Theory - Down sampling – Upsampling - Noble identities – Decimation
and Interpolation with transversal filters and polyphase filters – Fractional sampling rate convertor - multistage implementation -
Two channel, QMF and Perfect Reconstruction Filter banks - Transmultiplexers - Timing Recovery in a Digital Demodulator.
(12+8)
ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING: Linear MMSE based estimation - Adaptive linear combiner – Performance function – Gradient
and Minimum Mean Square error – Gradient search by the method of steepest descent – LMS algorithm – Convergence of LMS
algorithm – Applications. (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 FFT based periodogram with windowing
 Time and frequency domain analysis of decimators and interpolators.
 Multistage implementation of sampling rate convertors.
 Adaptive implementation of LMMSE FIR filter using LMS algorithm
 Denoising using Wavelets
REFERENCES:
1. K P Soman, ―Insight into Wavelets: From Theory to Practice‖, PHI Learning, 2013.
2. Fliege N J, "Multirate Digital Signal Processing", John Wiley and sons, 2010.
3. Vaidyanathan P P, ―Multirate Systems and Filter banks‖, Prentice Hall, 2008.
4. Bernard Widrow and Samuel D Stearns, ―Adaptive Signal Processing‖, Prentice Hall, 2008.
5. Lonnie.C.Ludeman, ―Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing‖, John Wiley and sons, 2000
18LC05 COMMUNICATION ALGORITHMS ON FPGA

3204
VERILOG HDL: HDL overview - Modules and ports - compiler directives - data types - operands and operators - gate level modeling
- data flow modeling - behavioral modeling - structural modeling – primitives-Tasks and functions - Writing test bench – Timing
issues. (11+8)
FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAYS: Introduction – FPGA Technology – DSP Technology Requirement – Design
Implementation – FPGA Architectures – Xilinx – Altera Flex – FPGA implementation issues. (11+6)
DSP ALGORITHMS ON FPGA: Fixed and Floating point arithmetic - Design of Binary Adders, Multipliers, Dividers and MAC unit -
Design of FIR Filters – Design of IIR Filters – DFT and FFT Algorithms, Approximate DSP Algorithms (11+8)
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION MODULES ON FPGA: Error Control coders and decoders, encryption, scrambling, LMS Algorithm for
channel estimation/equalization, pulse shaping, interpolation, decimation, Digital PLL, CORDIC implementations, Numerically
controlled oscillator and SDR. (12+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Design and implementation of FFT and IFFT algorithm.

 Design and implementation of programmable PN sequence generator.
 Implementation of Universal Modulator and Demodulator using CORDIC
 OFDM Transmitter implementation using model based design
174
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Samir Palnitkar, ―Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis‖, Prentice Hall, 2003.
2. Uwe Meyer Baese, ―Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays‖, Springer, 2004.
3. Jeffrey H Reed, ―Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering‖, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
4. James Tsui, ―Digital Techniques for Wideband Receivers‖, Prentice-Hall of India, 2005.
5. Roger Woods, John Mc Allister, Gaye Lightbody and Ying yi, ―FPGA Based Implementation of Signal Processing Systems‖,
Wiley, 2008.
6. Keshab K Parhi, ―VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems: Design and Implementation‖, John Wiley and Sons, 1999.
18LC51 ADVANCED DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS LABORATORY

0042
In this course the students will be provided with an orientation program on the following equipment/software for duration of 4 hours.
After this orientation each student is expected to formulate a complete an activity of interest which has to be derived from the
orientation program under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of technology/ knowledge
in that area by a good literature review (5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be used from the orientation
program, results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the assumptions or background and a formal
conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit
assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 56 hours.
 BER Analysis of basic digital modulation schemes – ASK, FSK, BPSK, QPSK and QAM
 Adaptive Equalizer Design for signal transmission through distorting channels
 BER Analysis of multicarrier modulation schemes
 Vector Signal Analysis of different modulation schemes
 Analysis of Source Coding and Channel Coding techniques
 Synchronization in time and frequency domain
Total P: 60
II SEMESTER
18LC06 RF CIRCUIT DESIGN

3204
RF FILTER DESIGN: Definition - properties - networks – ABCD, Z, Y, h and S parameters – Filter Design by the insertion loss
method – Filter Design by the insertion loss Methods, Filter Transformations, Filter Implementation. Stepped impedance Low pass
filters. (12+8)
MATCHING NETWORK AND PASSIVE DEVICES: Matching with lumped Elements - Design of T and  matching network-
Matching by micro strip line -Stub matching. Single stub matching – Double stub matching. Basic properties of dividers and
couplers – T Junction Power divider – Wilkinson Power divider – Quadrature Hybrid – Coupled line Directional Coupler. (9+6)
RF ACTIVE DEVICES AND AMPLIFIER DESIGN: The Diode Model – Two Port Design Model: The output terminals of a two port
RF Device, The bipolar Transistor, The heterojunction bipolar transistor , The GaAS MESFET, The High Electron Mobility
Transistor. RF Amplifier Design - Two port power Gains- Stability circles- Tests for Unconditional stability - Low Noise amplifier
Design – Low Noise MOSFET Amplifier –Broad Band Transistor Amplifier Design – Characteristics of Power Amplifiers and
Amplifier classes-Design Examples. (12+8)
OSCILLATORS AND MIXERS: RF Oscillators –Oscillators using BJT and FET –Dielectric Resonator Oscillators – Oscillator Phase
Noise. Mixers – Mixer Characteristics – Single –Ended Diode Mixer – Single-Ended FET Mixer- Balanced Mixer – Image Reject
Mixer- Differential FET Mixer and Gilbert Cell Mixer. (12+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Impedance matching networks

 Directional couplers.
 Passive filters.
 Amplifiers.
 Oscillator and mixer Circuits for RF Applications.
REFERENCES:
1. David M Pozar, ―Microwave Engineering‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2016.
2. Reinhold Ludwig and Pavel Bretchko, "RF Circuit Design: Theory and Applications‖, Pearson Education, 2011.
3. Rowan Gilmore and Les Besser, ―Practical RF Circuit Design for Modern Wireless Systems‖, Vol II, Passive Circuit and
Systems, Artech house, London, 2003.
175
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LC07 COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
3003
END TO END CONNECTIVITY: Network Edge and core - Protocol Layers and their service models-Principle of network
applications - web and HTTP - FTP- Electronic Mail-DNS – SNMP-Connectionless transport, End-to-End Issues, Connection
Establishment and Termination. (9)
INTERNETWORKING: Switching and bridging, basic internetworking, Internet protocol IPv4, IPv6, Routing algorithms, routing in the
internet (RIP, OSPF, BGP), Multiprotocol Label Switching(MPLS) - Broadcast and Multicast routing, routing among mobile devices
(9)
CONGESTION CONTROL AND RESOURCE ALLOCATION: Issues in Resource Allocation - Queuing Disciplines – Little‘s
Theorem -TCP Congestion Control - Congestion-Avoidance Mechanisms - Quality of Service (8)
LINKING AND MULTIPLE ACCESS: Link layer services –framing –Error detection –multiple access protocols – Channel
partitioning –Random access protocols – Ethernet- CSMA/CD -- Virtual LANs (9)
WIRELESS NETWORKS: Bits over Wireless networks – TCP performance over Wireless Links - Adaptive and Cross-Layer
Techniques CSMA-CA-IEEE 802.11 standards – Multiple access in 802.11 -Wireless Ad Hoc Networks - Topology and Connectivity.
(10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Larry L Peterson and Bruce SDavie, ―Computer networks: A system approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers 2010.
2. Kurose James F and Keith W Ross,―Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet‖, Pearson Education,
2009.
3. Behrouz A Forouzan, ―Data Communication and Networking‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
4. Vijay K Garg, ―Wireless Communication and Networking‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers 2008
5. Anurag Kumar, D.Manjunath, Joy Kuri, ―Communication networking - An Analytical Approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers
2004.
18LC08 WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS

3003
WIRELESS CHANNEL: Physical modeling for wireless channels - Input /output model of the wireless channel- Time and frequency
coherence- Statistical channel models- Detection in a Rayleigh fading channel (10)
CAPACITY OF WIRELESS CHANNELS: AWGN Channel capacity, Capacity of Flat Fading Channels – Capacity of Frequency
Selective Fading Channels– Time varying, Time Invariant Channels – Diversity Techniques - Narrowband MIMO model, Parallel
Decomposition of the MIMO Channel, MIMO Channel Capacity – MIMO diversity gain – Space Time Coding. (12)
MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATIONS: OFDM based multiple access, Broadband wireless access using OFDM and OFDMA,
frequency diversity and multiuser diversity, MIMO-OFDM techniques – closed loop and open loop. (12)
CELLULAR SYSTEMS AND STANDARDS: AMPS – GSM – IMT 2000 – Services provided by 3G Cellular Systems – Harmonized
3G Systems – UMTS - 3G UMTS signal processing - WCDMA, HSPA, HSPA+, Towards 4G, LTE and LTE advanced, 5G. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David Tse and PramodViswanath, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Communication‖, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
2. Singal T L, "Wireless Communications" Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. Theodore S Rappaport, ―Wireless Communications Principles and Practice‖, Pearson Education, Asia, New Delhi, 2009.
4. Andrea Goldsmith, ―Wireless Communications‖, Cambridge University Press, 2009.
5. Lajos L Hanzo and Thomas Keller, ―OFDM and MC-CDMA – A primer‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2006.
18LC09 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN AND IOT

3204
COMPONENTS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction to Embedded Systems, Embedded Design Life Cycle. Overview of ARM
Processors. Functional block diagram of ARM Cortex-A, Cortex-R and Cortex-M series controllers and their features. (8+3)
PERIPHERAL INTERFACING TECHNIQUES: Memory Management - Program Memory, Data Memory. AHB and APB Bus
Structure. GPIOs, Timer/Counters, Capture/Compare Modules, PWM, QEI, RTC, WDT, DMA, EEPROM and PLL. Serial
Peripherals: UART, I2C, SPI, CAN and USB. Hardware and Software Interrupts, Analog Peripherals: ADC, DAC and Analog
Comparators. (16+15)
IOT: Introduction, IoT protocols: MQTT and AMQP, IoT Security: AES and TLS1.2, FOTA, Consumer Electronics IoT, Automotive
IoT, Health Care IoT and Industrial IoT. (11+7)
CLOUD AND APP FACILITIES FOR IOT: Amazon Web Services Cloud (AWS), MS Azure, IBM Bluemix, Carriots and Thing
Speak, GE predix. MIT App Inventor and Android App Development tools. (10+5)
176
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 GPIO interfacing
 Interfacing of Smart Sensors
 Implementing Serial Communication Protocols
 Remote Monitoring and Control through Web Browser using WiFi
 Cloud based Data Analysis
REFERENCES:
1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijai Madisetti : A Hands-on Approach ―Internet of Things‖, Universities Press 2015.
2. Jonathan W. Valvano, ―Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing to Arm(r) Cortex -M Microcontrollers: Volume 2‖,
CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform; 5th edition, 2012.
3. Jonathan W. Valvano, ―Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing to Arm(r) Cortex -M Microcontrollers: Volume 1‖,
CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform; 5th edition, 2011.
4. Arnold S. Berger, ―Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction to Processes, Tools, and Techniques‖ CMP Books, 2002.
5. Tiva TM4C123GH6PM Microcontroller Datasheet
18LC52 COMMUNICATION NETWORKS LABORATORY

0042
 Networking commands (Windows and LINUX)

 Packet and protocol analysis using Wireshark
 Performance evaluation of RIP and OSPF protocols using discrete event network simulator
 Construction of Layer2 and Layer3 protocol packets using traffic generator
 Configuration and realization of VLAN
 Design and simulation of MAC & Routing protocol for wireless networks
Total P: 60
18LC61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Total P: 30
SEMESTER III
18LC53 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
 Wireless channel estimation and channel modeling

 Analysis of Space Time Coding Techniques
 Design and analysis of MIMO systems
 Implementation and Analysis of security algorithms for communication systems
 Implementation of a communication system in SDR platform
 Design and implementation of a Wireless Sensor Network application in embedded platform
Total P: 60
177
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LC71 PROJECT WORK-I

0063
 Identification of a real life problem in thrust area
 Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem
 Finalization of system requirements and specification
 Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey
 Future trends in providing alternate solutions
 Consolidated report preparation of the above
Total P: 90
IV SEMESTER
18LC72 PROJECT WORK –II

0 0 28 14
Preparing a project- brief proposal including
 Problem identification
 A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram/ Concept tree)
 List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints
 Cost benefit analysis
 Time line of activities
A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any)]
A presentation include the following
 Implementation phase( Hardware / Software / both)

 Testing and validation of the developed system
 Learning in the Project
Consolidated report preparation

Total P: 420
18LC21 DETECTION AND ESTIMATION

3003
STATISTICAL DECISION THEORY: Bayesian Hypothesis Testing - Likelihood Ratio Tests -Minimax Hypothesis Testing - Neyman
Pearson Hypothesis Testing - Composite Hypothesis Testing - M‘ary Hypothesis Testing. (8)
SIGNAL DETECTION IN DISCRETE TIME: Deterministic Signals - Stochastic Signals – Models and Detector Structures –
Performance Evaluation - Chernoff Bounds - Applications of Detection in Signal Processing (8)
PARAMETER ESTIMATION: Fundamentals of Estimation Theory - Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimation – Cramer Rao Lower
bound – Best Linear Unbiased Estimators - Linear Least Squares Estimation –Nonlinear Least Squares Estimation - Maximum
Likelihood Estimation. (10)
BAYESIAN ESTIMATION: Bayesian philosophy – General Bayesian Estimators - Minimum Mean Square Error Estimators –
Maximum A Posteriori Estimators – Linear MMSE Estimation . (9)
DISTRIBUTION-FREE ESTIMATION: Orthogonality Principle – Autoregressive Techniques - Discrete Wiener Filter, Continuous
Wiener Filter, Generalization of Discrete and Continuous Filter Representations, Kalman Filter, Extended Kalman Filter -
Applications of Estimation in Signal Processing. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Schonhoff and Arthur AGiordano, ―Detection and Estimation Theory", Prentice Hall, 2007.
2. Kay S M, ―Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing, Volume 2: Detection Theory‖, Prentice Hall, 1998.
3. Poor H V, ―An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation‖, Springer-Verlang, 1994.
4. Kay S M, ―Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing, Volume 1: Estimation Theory‖, Prentice Hall, 1993.
5. ScharfL L, ―Statistical Signal Processing‖, Addison Wesley, 1991.
178
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LC22 COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS

3003
COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS: Introduction; Definitions and Terminology; Types of relaying protocol; One-way and two-way
MIMO relaying protocols; System model and its terminologies; Pros and Cons of cooperation; Cooperative performance bounds;
Application Scenarios (9)
WIRELESS RELAY CHANNEL: Propagation Modeling; Channel Modeling; Regenerative relay channels; Transparent relay
channels; Distributed MIMO channel; Fundamental limits of Cooperative and Relay Networks; Gaussian Relay channels; Single and
multi-relay fading channels (9)
TRANSMISSION SCHEMES: Cooperative transmission schemes; Two user transmission schemes; Cooperative transmission
schemes with multiple relays; Cooperative communications with multiple sources (9)
COOPERATIVE RELAYING IN MIMO-OFDM SYSTEMS AND MAC: Overview of OFDM systems; Cooperative OFDM systems;
Cooperative OFDM systems with multiple relays; Distributed space frequency codes; MAC control based cooperative networks;
Networking and Cross layer issues in Cooperative Networks (9)
APPLICATIONS OF COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION: Cooperative Relaying in multihop cellular networks; Peer-to-Peer-and

Mobile AdHoc networks; Wireless Mesh Networks; Wireless Sensor and Actor Networks; Coordinated Multipoint Systems (CoMP);
Cooperation for Nest Generation Wireless Networks (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jonathan Rodriguez, ―Fundamentals of 5G Mobile Networks‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2015.
2. Ming Ding and Hanwen Luo, ―Multi-point Cooperative Communication Systems: Theory and Applications‖, Springer-Verlag,
2013.
3. Misha Dohler and Yonghui Li, ―Cooperative Communications: Hardware, Channel and PHY.‖ John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
4. Peter Hong Y W, Huang Wan-Jen and Jay Kuo C C, ―Cooperative Communications and Networking: Technologies and System
Design‖, Springer, Newyork, 2010.
5. Yan Zhang, Chen H H, Mohsen and Guizani, ―Cooperative Wireless Communications‖, CRC Press, 2009.
18LC23 COGNITIVE RADIO SYSTEMS

3003
SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO: Characteristics and Benefits of Software Radio, Design Principles of a Software Radio, Ideal SDR
architecture, Radio Frequency Implementation Issues (9)
SDR PLATFORMS: Digital Hardware choices for SDR, Hardware platforms for SDR – Universal Software Radio Peripheral,
Wireless open Access Research platform, RTL SDR receiver, comparison of different platforms, Software platforms for SDR-GNU
Radio (9)
COGNITIVE RADIO TECHNOLOGY: Dynamic Spectrum Access; Digital dividend; Types of Cognitive Radio; Spectrum policies and
Regulations; Information theoretic perspective on Cognitive Radio networks (9)
COGNITIVE RADIO TASKS: Spectrum sensing and its methods; Cooperative Spectrum sensing; Spectrum sharing; spectrum
mobility; spectrum management; spectrum trading (9)
RESEARCH CHALLENGES AND APPLICATIONS: Optimization Techniques of Dynamic Spectrum Allocation, OFDM based
Cognitive Radio; Security issues in cognitive radio; Game theory in Cognitive radio; crosslayer design for cognitive radio networks;
applications of cognitive radio; IEEE 802.22 WRAN standard (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ahmed Khattab, Dmitri Perkins, Magdy Bayoumi, "Cognitive Radio Networks: From Theory to Practice", Springer-Verlag New
York, 2013.
2. Bruce A Fette, ―Cognitive Radio Technology‖, Elsevier publication, BURLINGTON, 2009.
3. Ekram Hossain, Dusit Niyato, Zhu Han, ―Dynamic Spectrum Access and Management in Cognitive Radio Networks‖,
Cambridge University Press, 2009.
4. Kwang-Cheng Chen and Ramjee Prasad, ―Cognitive Radio Networks‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.
5. Joseph Mitola III, ―Cognitive Radio Architecture: The Engineering Foundations of Radio XML‖, Wiley Interscience Publication,
NEW JERSEY, 2006.
179
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LC24 HIGH PERFORMANCE NETWORKS
3003
MULTIMEDIA NETWORKING: Streaming stored Audio and Video, VOIP-Best effort service, protocols for real time interactive
applications, Beyond best effort, scheduling and policing mechanism, integrated services, and RSVP-differentiated services. (9)
NETWORK MANAGEMENT: Infrastructure for network management, The internet standard management framework –SMI, MIB,
SNMP, Security and administration, ASN.1. (8)
VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS: Overview of VPN -Remote-Access VPN, site-to-site VPN, Tunneling to PPP, Security in VPN.
MPLS operation, Routing, Tunneling and use of FEC, Traffic Engineering, MPLS based VPN, overlay networks-P2P connections.
(9)
SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING: Fundamental Characteristics of SDN - SDN Operation - SDN Devices - SDN Controller -
SDN Applications - SDN in Other Environments: SDN Applied to the WAN, SDN Applied to Service Provider and Carrier Networks,
SDN Applied to Mobile Networks, SDN Applied to Optical Networks. (10)
6LowPAN: Introduction - 6LoWPAN Architecture - 6LoWPAN Format - Mobility and Routing - Application Protocols - Using
6LoWPAN (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Goransson, Chuck Black, Timothy Culver, ― Software Defined Networks: A Comprehensive Approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers 2017
2. Larry L Peterson and Bruce S Davie, ―Computer networks: A system approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers 2010.
3. Kurose James F and Keith W Ross, ―Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet‖, Pearson Education,
2009
4. Zach Shelby, Carsten Bormann, ―6LoWPAN: The Wireless Embedded Internet‖, Wiley 2009
5. Nader F.Mir, Computer and Communication Networks, first edition.
18LC25 GREEN COMMUNICATION

3003
COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATIONS AND GREEN CONCEPTS: Network architectures and research issues in cooperative
cellular wireless networks; Cooperative communications in OFDM and MIMO cellular relay networks: issues and approaches;
Fundamental trade-offs on the design of green radio networks, Green modulation and coding schemes (9)
COOPERATIVE TECHNIQUES: Cooperative techniques for energy efficiency, Cooperative base station techniques for
cellular wireless networks; Turbo base stations ; Antenna architectures for cooperation; Cooperative communications in 3GPP
LTE-Advanced, Partial information relaying and Coordinated multi-point transmission in LTE-Advanced. (9)
RELAY-BASED COOPERATIVE CELLULAR NETWORKS: Distributed space-time block codes ; Collaborative relaying in downlink
cellular systems ; Radio resource optimization; Adaptive resource allocation ; Cross-layer scheduling design for cooperative
wireless two-way relay networks ; Network coding in relay-based networks. (9)
GREEN RADIO NETWORKS: Base Station Power-Management Techniques- Opportunistic spectrum and load management,
Energy-saving techniques in cellular wireless base stations , Power-management for base stations in smart grid environment,
Cooperative multicell processing techniques for energy-efficient cellular wireless communications. (9)
ACCESS TECHNIQUES FOR GREEN RADIO NETWORKS: Cross-layer design of adaptive packet scheduling for green radio
networks; Energy-efficient relaying for cooperative cellular wireless networks ; Energy performance in TDD-CDMA multihop cellular
networks ; Resource allocation for green communication in relay-based cellular networks ; Green Radio Test-Beds and
Standardization Activities. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ekram Hossain, Vijay K. Bhargava, Gerhard P. Fettweis, ―Green Radio Communication Networks‖, Cambridge University
Press, 2012.
2. Mazin Al Noor, ―Green Radio Communication Networks Applying Radio-Over-Fibre Technology for Wireless Access‖, GRIN
Verlag, 2012.
3. F. Richard Yu, Yu, Zhang and Victor C. M. Leung, ―Green Communications and Networking‖, CRC press, 2012.
4. Mohammad S. Obaidat, Alagan Anpalagan and Isaac Woungang, ―Handbook of Green Information and Communication
Systems‖, Academic Press, 2012.
5. Ekram Hossain, Dong In Kim, Vijay K. Bhargava , ―Cooperative Cellular Wireless Networks‖, Cambridge University Press,
2011.
180
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LC26 VEHICULAR SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Vehicular network definition, special characteristics, technical challenges, Evolution and progress, Vehicular
network application and services, public safety application, vehicular traffic coordination, road traffic management. (9)
MAC PROTOCOLS & HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION: DSRC spectrum and applications for vehicular
networks, IEEE standards for MAC protocols - A cluster based, A distributed MAC protocol, Priority based secure MAC protocol,
Introduction to heterogeneous wireless communications, enabling technologies for vehicular communication networks, platform for
design and simulation. (9)
ROUTING IN VEHICULAR NETWORKS: Challenges and requirements for routing protocols, classification, basic solutions, Map
based solutions, based on trajectories, based on traffic information. Adhoc IP address auto configuration problem, IP address auto
configuration solution requirements, Analysis of solution space, IP address auto configuration in vehicular networks (9)
MESSAGE SCHEDULING: Context and motivations, congestion control approaches, dynamic message scheduling, Analysis and
validation (9)
NETWORK MOBILITY: The network mobility problem, NEMO basic support protocol, NEMO route optimization, NEMO in vehicular
scenario, Mobile ADhoc NEMO. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. C. Sommer, F. Dressler, ―Vehicular Networking‖, Cambridge University Press, 2015
2. Hassnaa Moustafa and Yan Zhang, ―Vehicular networks – Techniques, Standards and applications‖ CRC Press, New York,
2009.
3. Stephen Olariu and Michele C Weigle, ―Vehicular networks – From theory to Practice‖, CRC Press, New York, 2009.
4. H. Hartensteinand K. P. Laberteaux, ―VANET: Vehicular Applications and InterNetworking Technologies‖, Wiley, 2010
18LC27 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS FOR IOT

3003
INTRODUCTION: Internet of things overview, Design principles for connected devices, Web thinking for connected devices, Internet
Principles. (5)
6LOWPAN AND RPL: 6LoWPAN and RPL Standardization Adaptation Layer RPL Downward Routes, Multicast Membership,
Packet Routing (8)
ZIGBEE SMART ENERGY 2.0: REST Overview, ZigBee SEP 2.0 Overview, Function Sets and Device Types, ZigBee SE 2.0
Security
(8)
ETSI M2M ARCHITECTURE: Introduction to ETSI TC M2M, System Architecture, ETSI M2M Interactions Overview, Security in the
ETSI M2M Framework, Interworking with Machine Area Networks (9)
COAP AND MQTT: Constrained application protocol overview, RFC 7252 , MQTT basics, Developing Projects , connecting to
server, Controlling Output Devices. (9)
CASE STUDIES: Smart Grid, Industrial Automation and Building automation, Connected Car, Connected Home, Digital Health,
Smart city (6)
Total : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Adrian McEwen,Hakim Cassimally ‖Designing the Internet of Things‖ John Wiley and Sons, Ltd , 2014.
2. Jan Holler, Vlasios Tsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis Karnouskos, Stefan Avesand, David Boyle ―From Machine-to-
Machine to the Internet of Things‖ Introduction to a New Age of Intelligence , Academic Press 2014
3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi ―The Internet of Things: Key Applications and Protocols‖, 2nd Edition John
Wiley & Sons Ltd 2012.
4. Peter Waher ―Learning Internet of Things‖ 2015 Packt Publishing.
18LC28 RADIATING SYSTEMS

3003
ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS: Antenna fundamental parameters Radiation integrals, Radiation from surface and line current
distributions, monopole, loop antenna; Mobile phone antenna - hand set antenna - base station antenna-Radiation Hazards.
(6)
RADIATION FROM WIRE AND APERTURE ANTENNAS: Radiated fields of infinitesimal and half wave dipole,; Introduction to
numerical techniques Field equivalence principle, Radiation from Rectangular and Circular apertures, Uniform aperture distribution
on an infinite ground plane; Slot antenna; Horn antenna; Reflector antenna, aperture blockage, and design consideration. (12)
181
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ARRAY ANTENNA: Linear array –uniform array, end fire and broad side array, gain, beam width, side lobe level; Two dimensional
uniform array; Phased array, beam scanning, grating lobe, feed network, Linear array synthesis techniques – Binomial and
Chebyshev distributions. (9)
MICRO STRIP ANTENNA: Radiation Mechanism and Excitation techniques : Microstrip dipole; Patch, Rectangular patch, Circular
patch, and Ring antenna – radiation analysis from cavity model; input impedance of rectangular and circular patch antenna;
Microstrip array and feed network; Applications of microstrip array antenna. (9)
EMC ANTENNA AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS: Concept of EMC measuring antenna; Tx and Rx antenna factors; Log
periodic dipole, Bi-conical, Ridge guide, Multi turn loop; Antenna measurement and instrumentation – Gain, Impedance and antenna
factor measurement; Antenna test range Design. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Balanis A, ―Antenna Theory Analysis and Design‖, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2009.
2. Krauss J D, ―Antennas‖, John Wiley and sons, New York, 2009.
3. Stutzman W L and Thiele G A, ―Antenna Theory and Design‖, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 1998.
4. Bahl I J and Bhartia P, ―Microstrip Antennas‖, Artech House, Inc.,1980
18LC29 MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING

3003
INTRODUCTION: Review of sampling rate convertors and filter banks – two channel filter banks - paraunitary, biorthogonal, linear
phase and transmultiplexer filter banks. (11)
M-CHANNEL FILTER BANKS: Filter banks with tree and parallel structure – complex modulated, cosine modulated and
transmultiplexer filter banks. (11)
FILTER BANKS WITH POLYPHASE STRUCTURES: Fundamental polyphase structures – polyphase QMF banks – two-channel,
M-channel, paraunitary and DFT polyphase filter banks. (11)
OCTAVE FILTER BANKS, WAVELETS AND APPLICATIONS: Tree structured and multicomplementary filter banks – filter banks
and wavelets – applications – modems – speech and audio coding – image and video coding – multirate techniques with sensors.
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Fredric J Harris, ―Multirate Signal Processing for Communication Systems‖, Prentice Hall, 2014.
2. Vikram Gadre and Aditya Abhyankar, ―Multiresolution and Multirate Signal Processing: Introduction, Principles and
Applications‖, McGraw Hill, 2013.
3. Ronald E Crochiere and Lawrence R. Rabiner, ―Multirate Digital Signal Processing‖, Prentice Hall, 2013.
4. Fliege N J, "Multirate Digital Signal Processing", John Wiley and sons, 2010.
5. Vaidyanathan P P, ―Multirate Systems and Filter banks‖, Prentice Hall, 2008.
18LC30 ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING

3003
INTRODUCTION: Linear Filtering problem – Adaptive filters – Approaches to the development of adaptive filters – cost functions –
Wiener filter – orthoganility principle – minimum MSE – Wiener Hopf Equations – error performance surface – linearly constrained
minimum variance filter. (11)
STOCHASTIC GRADIENT-BASED ALGORITHMS: Steepest descent algorithm – stability analysis - Least Mean Square algorithm
– stability and convergence analysis – variants of LMS algorithm (10)
RECURSIVE LEAST SQUARE ALGORITHMS: Matrix inversion lemma - Exponentially Weighted RLS – Sliding Window RLS –
convergence analysis – operation of RLS in nonstationary environment – comparison of RLS and LMS algorithms. (10)
KALMAN FILTER AND FILTERING APPLICATIONS: Recursive minimum mean square estimation – state space model -
Innovation process – Extended Kalman Filter - Adaptive Modeling & System Identification - Inverse Adaptive Modeling –
Deconvolution – Equalization - Adaptive self tuning filter - Adaptive Line enhancer. - Harmonic cancellation with adaptive prediction.
(14)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Haykin S, ―Adaptive Filter Theory", Prentice Hall Inc, 2012.
2. Widrow B and Stearns S D, "Adaptive Signal Processing", Prentice Hall inc., 2011.
3. Cowan C F N and Grant P M, "Adaptive Filters", Prentice Hall inc., 2010
4. Farhang Boroujeny, ―Adaptive Filters Theory and Applications‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2010
5. Alexander S T, "Adaptive Signal Processing: Theory and Applications ", Springer – Verlag, 2010.
182
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LC31 WAVELETS AND SUBBAND CODING

3003
INTRODUCTION: Signal spaces - concept of Convergence - Hilbert spaces for energy signals. Fourier basis & Fourier Transform –
Limitations of standard Fourier analysis – Need for Time-Frequency Analysis, Spectrogram plot – Windowed Fourier transform Tiling
of the Time-Frequency Plane for STFT – Heisenberg‘s Uncertainty principle – Short time Fourier transform (STFT) Analysis- short
comings of STFT- Need for Wavelets. (9)
CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORMS (CWT): Introduction, Continuous Time wavelets, Definition of CWT, The CWT as a
correlation, Constant Q-Factor Filtering Interpolation and time frequency resolution, the CWT as an operator, inverse CWT. (9)
DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORM (DWT) AND MRA: Introduction, Approximation of vectors in nested linear vector spaces,
example of an MRA-Bases for the approximations subspaces and Haar scaling function, Bases for detail subspaces and Haar
wavelet, Formal definition of an MRA, Construction of a general orthonormal MRA, A wavelet basis for MRA, Interpreting
orthonormal MRAs for Discrete time signals, Daubechies Wavelets, Relationship between Filter banks and wavelet basis, Important
wavelets: Haar, Mexican hat, Meyer, Shannon, Daubechies (10)
ADVANCED TOPICS: Wavelet packets, Non - separable multidimensional wavelets, Bi-orthogonal basis-B-Splines, Lifting scheme
of wavelet generation, Multiwavelets, Ridgelets, Curvelets. (9)
APPLICATIONS OF WAVELETS: Signal Denoising - Sub-band coding of Speech and music– Image Compression using 2-D
DWT- JPEG 2000 standard - Fractal Signal Analysis. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Soman K P and Ramachandran K I, ―Insight into Wavelets from Theory to Practice‖, Prentice Hall India, 2010
2. Jaideva C Goswami and Andrew K Chan, ―Fundamentals of Wavelets – Theory, Algorithms and Applications‖, John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., Singapore, 1999.
3. Vetterli M and Kovacevic J, "Wavelets and Subband Coding," Prentice Hall, 1995.
4. Wornell G W, "Signal Processing with Fractals: A Wavelet based Approach‖, Prentice Hall, 1995.
5. Fliege. N J, ―Multirate Digital Signal Processing‖, John Wiley and Sons, Newyork,1994.
18LC32 DIGITAL IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING

3003
DIGITAL IMAGE AND VIDEO BASICS: Human visual system and image perception, Types of Images, Digitization of Images,
Sampled Images, Quantized Images, Digital Video, Sampled video and colour vision models, 2D signals and systems; image
transforms ‐ 2D DFT, DCT, KLT, Harr transform and discrete Wavelet transform (10)
IMAGE AND VIDEO ENHANCEMENT AND RESTORATION: Linear Image Enhancement, Non-Linear Image Enhancement:
Weighted median filters, Image Noise cleaning, Image Zooming, Image Sharpening, Edge Detection, Wavelet denoising, Image
restoration, Video Enhancement, Filtering and restoration (10)
IMAGE AND VIDEO CLASSIFICATION AND SEGMENTATION: Statistical methods of segmentation, Texture classification and
segmentation, Gradient and Laplacian type edge detection, Diffusion based edge detectors, video segmentation (8)
IMAGE AND VIDEO STORAGE, RETRIEVAL AND COMMUNICATIONS: Image and Video Indexing and retrieval, Video browsing
and retrieval, Image and video communication networks, Image watermarking and authentication (9)
IMAGE AND VIDEO PROCESSING APPLICATIONS: Pixel-based model. Case study 1: Surveillance system, Space-frequency
model. case study 2: Mosaic creation, Geometrical model. case study 3: Video restoration, Region-based model. Case study 4:
object tracking (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
st
1. Yao wang, Joem Ostarmann and Ya–quin Zhang, ‖Video processing and communication‖ , 1 edition , PHI, 2015
2. Chris Solomon, Toby Breckon ,"Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing A Practical Approach with Examples in Matlab",
John Wiley & Sons,2011
3. Gonzaleze and Woods, ―Digital Image Processing‖, 3rd edition , Prentice Hall, 2008
4. Alan Bovik ―Handbook of Image and Video Processing‖ 2nd Edition ,Academic Press, 2005
18LC33 MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION

3003
INTRODUCTION: Compression Techniques - Overview of information theory - lossless and lossy coding– Modeling and Coding -
Taxonomy of compression techniques – Rate distortion theory - Huffman coding – Non-Binary Huffman codes – adaptive Huffman
coding – Application of Huffman coding. (8)
ARITHMETIC CODING AND DICTIONARY TECHNIQUES: Introduction - coding a sequence – generating deciphering the tag –
Generating a binary code – Uniqueness of arithmetic code – Algorithm, integer implementation – comparison of Huffman and
183
59th ACM 09.06.2018
arithmetic coding – Applications -Static and Adaptive dictionary – LZ77, LZ78, LZW approach – Applications - Facsimile encoding –
run length coding – comparison of MH, MR, MMR and JBIG. Scalar and Vector Quantization (10)
AUDIO COMPRESSION: Audio compression techniques - frequency domain and filtering - basic sub-band coding - application to
speech coding - G.722 - application to audio coding - MPEG audio - silence suppression - speech compression techniques –
Vocoders. (10)
IMAGE COMPRESION: Predictive techniques - DPCM, DM - KL transform – discrete cosine, Walsh- Hadamard transform - JPEG,
Wavelet based compression: quad-trees, EZW, SPIHT, JPEG-2000. (9)
VIDEO COMPRESSION: Video signal representation – Motion compensation – MPEG standards - Motion estimation techniques -
H.261 family of standards - Motion video compression. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Khalid Sayood, ―Introduction to Data Compression‖, Morgan Kaufman, 2012.
2. Salomon D, ―Data Compression The Complete Reference‖, Springer, 2007.
3. Salomon D, ―A Guide to Data Compression Methods‖, Springer, 2002.
4. Alistar Moffat, ―Compression and Coding Algorithms‖, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.
5. Jan Vozer, ―Video Compression for Multimedia‖, AP Press, New York, 1995.
18LC34 COMPUTER VISION AND MACHINE LEARNING
3003
IMAGES AND IMAGING OPERATIONS: Introduction-Image Processing Operations- Image Filtering Operation-Region Growing
Methods -Thresholding, Adaptive, Thresholding-Edge Detection-Template Operators-Differential Gradient Operators-Circular
Operator-Corner and Interest Point Detection-Basic Approaches to Texture Analysis. (10)
SHAPE AND BOUNDARY PATTERN ANALYSIS: Binary Shape Analysis-Connectedness-size filtering -Distance Functions -
Skeletons and Thinning-Measures for Shape Recognition-Boundary Tracking Procedures- Centroidal Profiles-Occlusion-Boundary
Length Measures-Methods of Line, Circle and Ellipse Detection. (9)
3D VISION AND MOTION: 3-D Vision Methods - Projection Schemes for 3D Vision- Photometric Stereo- Shape from Texture -
Structured Lighting -Three-Dimensional Object Recognition Schemes-Orientation Technique. (8)
MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES: Perceptron, multi-layer perceptron, backpropagation algorithm, Unsupervised learning and
clustering – k-means clustering, fuzzy k-means clustering, hierarchical clustering, SVM, SIFT, SURF, Adaboost algorithms. (9)
MACHINE VISION APPLICATIONS: Case study1: Automated Visual Inspection of objects, Case study2: Inspection of Food
Products, Case study3: Surveillance, Case study4: Vehicle Guidance in Agriculture, Case study5: Path Planning, Navigation and
Egomotion (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Michael Beyeler ―Machine Learning for OpenCV‖, First Edition, Packt Publishers, 2017
2. E. R. Davies, ―Computer and Machine Vision: Theory, Algorithms, Practicalities‖, Fourth Edition, Elsevier Inc, 2012.
3. Szeliski, Richard, ―Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications‖, First Edition, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2011.
4. C. Bishop, ―Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning‖, Springer, 2006.
18LC35 SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING

3003
SPEECH SIGNAL MODELLING: Speech signal characteristics and classifications - Speech production mechanism - Acoustic
Theory of speech production - Source – Filter model - Lossless Tube Models - Digital Model of speech signals. (9)
SPEECH SIGNAL ANALYSIS: Time domain Analysis for speech processing – Short time energy and magnitude - short time
average zero crossing – Speech vs silence discrimination (9)
FRQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS: Pitch period estimation using autocorrelation - Short time Fourier analysis- Definition and
properties - Design of digital filter banks - Pitch detection - analysis by synthesis. (9)
SPEECH CODING: Linear predictive coding - principle - solution of LPC equation - Cholesky decomposition method - Durbin's
method - Lattice formulation –Frequency domain coding – Model based coding – LPC residual coding. (9)
SPEECH RECOGNITION: Template training method - Hidden Markov Model-Gaussian Mixture model- connected word recognition-
Speaker identification/Verification. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rebner LR K and Juang BH, "Fundamentals of Speech Recognition", Pearson Education, First Indian reprint, 2003.
2. Thomas FQuatieri, ―Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing‖, Pearson Education, 2002.
184
59th ACM 09.06.2018
3. John R Deller, John Hansen and ProakisJG,―Discrete Time Processing of Speech Signals‖, IEEE Press, 1999.
4. Kondoz, "Digital Speech", John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 1994.
5. Rabiner LR and Schaffer RW, "Digital Processing of Speech Signals", Prentice -Hall, Englewod - Clitts, New Jersey, 1986.
18LC36 ERROR CONTROL CODING

3003
FINITE FIELD ARITHMETIC: Set, Group, field, vector spaces, elementary properties of Galois fields, Galois field arithmetic,
Addition of polynomials, Subtraction of polynomials, Multiplication of polynomials, Division of polynomials, Irreducible polynomial,
Primitive polynomial, Construction of GF (2m). (9)
BCH AND REED SOLOMON CODES: Non-binary BCH codes, Berlekamp–Massey Algorithm, Chien Search algorithm, Non-binary
RS codes, REED SOLOMON Design, decoding of non-binary codes, Welch—Berlekamp Algorithm. (9)
TURBO CODES: Turbo Encoder, Different Types of Interleavers, Turbo Coding Illustration, Turbo Decoder, The BCJR Algorithm,
Performance Analysis of the Turbo Codes, Effect of Number of Iterations on the Performance of the Turbo Codes, Effect of
Puncturing on the Performance of the Turbo Codes (9)
LOW-DENSITY PARITY-CHECK (LDPC) CODES: LDPC code properties, representation using Tanner Graph, LDPC encoding,
preprocessing method, LDPC decoding, Bit flipping algorithm, Sum Product algorithm, Min Sum algorithm. (9)
LT AND RAPTOR CODES: LT Codes design, Systematic LT codes, Raptor Codes (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. K.Deeraga Rao, "Channel Coding Techniques for Wireless Communications", Springer, 1st edition, 2015.
2. Shu Lin and Daniel J. Costello. Jr, "Error control coding", Pearson, Prentice Hall, 2nd edition, 2004.
3. Peter Sweeney, ―Error Control Coding from Theory to Practice‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Richard B Wells, ―Applied Coding and Information Theory for Engineers‖, Prentice Hall, 1st edition, 1998.
18LC37 EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION

3003
INTRODUCTION: Soft Computing, requirement, different tools and techniques, usefulness and applications. Artificial Neural
Network: Introduction, basic models, Hebb's learning, Perceptron, Multilayer feed forward network, Back propagation, Different
issues regarding convergence of Multilayer Perceptron, Competitive learning, Self-Organizing Feature Maps, SVM, Applications.
(10)
FUZZY SETS AND FUZZY LOGIC: Introduction, Fuzzy sets versus crisp sets, operations on fuzzy sets, Extension principle, Fuzzy
relations and relation equations, Fuzzy numbers, Linguistic variables, Fuzzy logic, Linguistic hedges, Applications, fuzzy database.
fuzzy controllers, fuzzy pattern recognition, fuzzy image processing. (9)
GENETIC ALGORITHM(GA): Different operators of GA, analysis of selection operations, Hypothesis of building blocks, Schema
theorem and convergence of Genetic Algorithm, Advanced operators, Simulated annealing, Applications. (9)
ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION: Ant foraging behavior - Theoretical considerations – ACO Algorithm – ACO Theory and model
based search. (8)
PARTICLE SWARM & ARTIFICIAL BEE COLONY(ABC)OPTIMIZATION: Principles of bird flocking and fish schooling – Evolution
of PSO – Operating principles – PSO Algorithm – Neighborhood Topologies – Convergence criteria – Behavior of real bees, ABC
algorithm. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Anupam Shukla, Rahul Kala, and Ritu Tiwari,‖ Real Life Applications of Soft Computing‖, CRC Press, 2010
2. S.N.Sivanadam, S.N.Deepa, ―Introduction to Genetic Algorithms‖ Springer, 2008
3. Marco Dorigo and Thomas Stutzle, ―Ant Colony optimization‖, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi 2005.
4. RajasekaranS and PaiG A V, ―Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic, and Genetic Algorithms,‖ PHI, 2003
5. Kennedy J and Russel C Eberhart, ―Swarm Intelligence‖, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, USA, 2001.
6. GoldbergD E, ―Genetic Algorithms in Search and Optimization, and Machine Learning‖, Addison-Wesley, 1989.
18LC38 DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS

2203
INTRODUCTION: Software Development process – Data structures - Abstract Data Types - Analysis of algorithms - Best, worst and
average case time complexities - notations. (4+4)
ARRAYS: Operations - Implementation of one, two, three and multi dimensioned arrays – Sparse and dense matrices -
Applications. (4+6)
STACK AND QUEUE: Stack operations - implementations - Applications: Function handling - Recursion – Expression Evaluation.
Queue - operations - implementations - Priority Queues - Dequeues - Applications: Job scheduling. (6+4)
LISTS: Operations - Singly linked lists, doubly linked lists, Circular lists - Applications – Linked Stacks - Linked queues. (6+4)
185
59th ACM 09.06.2018
TREES AND GRAPHS: Tree Terminologies - Implementation - Binary Tree: Properties – representation of trees, operations -
Traversals- Expression trees - Infix, Postfix and Prefix expressions – Dijkstra‘s Algorithms - Floyd‘s Algorithm.GraphTerminologies -
representations-graph search methods: Breadth first search, Depth first search, Minimum spanning trees-Multistage graph. (6+6)
SORTING: Insertion sort - Selection sort - Bubble sort - Radix sort - Algorithms and their time complexities. (4+6)
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
1. Analysis of algorithms
2. Implementation of stack and queue
3. Evaluation of expressions
4. Singly and doubly linked lists implementation
5. Binary tree traversal.
6. Single source shortest path algorithm – Dijkstra‘s algorithm,
7. All pairs shortest path problem- Floyd‘s Algorithm
8. Graph search method implementation
Total L: 30+T: 30=60
REFERENCES:
1. Robert L Kruse, Bruce P Leung and Clovin L Tondo, ―Data Structures and Program Design in C‖, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2009.
2. VijayalakshmiPai G A, ―Data Structures and Algorithms: Concepts Techniques and Applications‖, McGraw-Hill, 2009.
3. A. Chitra P T Rajan ―Data Structures", Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2008.
4. Ellis Horowitz ,SartajSahni and SanguthevarRajasekaran, ‗Computer Algorithms/C++‘, Orient Black Swan, 2008.
5. Mark Allen Weiss, ―Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007.
AUDIT COURSES
18LC81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18LC82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

186
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME VLSI DESIGN
(2018 REGULATIONS)
Semester I
Graph Theory and Optimization
18LV01 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Techniques
18LV02 Device Modelling 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LV03 Digital IC Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LV04 Designing with FPGAs 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LV05 Low Power VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LV51 VLSI Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LV81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 Hrs 14 6 4 19 300 3000 600
Semester II
18LV06 Analog VLSI Circuits 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LV07 VLSI Testing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LV08 Computer Aided Design for VLSI systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LV09 Hardware Verification Techniques 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LV__ Professional Elective - 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV52 Advanced VLSI Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LV61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18LV82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 Hours 18 4 8 24 400 400 800
Semester III
18LV53 VLSI System Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LV71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 17 300 300 600
Semester IV
18LV72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
18LV21 Mixed Signal VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV22 VLSI Signal Processing 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Semiconductor Memory Design and
18LV23 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Testing
18LV24 VLSI Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV25 VLSI for Wireless Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV26 RF Circuit Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV27 MEMS AND NEMS 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV28 System on Chip Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV29 Embedded System Design 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Synthesis and Optimization of Digital
18LV30 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Circuits
18LV31 High Speed Digital Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV32 Nano Scale Devices 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Modelling and Simulation of Nanoscale
18LV33 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Transistors
Advanced Computer Architecture and
18LV34 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Parallel Processing
18LV35 Hardware security 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV36 VLSI for Biomedical Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LV37 Electronic packaging Technologies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
187
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LV38 VLSI For IOT Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Quantum Dot Cellular Automata
18LV39 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
NanoTechnology
18LV40 Genetic Algorithms for VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
188
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18LV01 GRAPH THEORY AND OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

2203
BASIC CONCEPTS IN GRAPH THEORY: Common families of graphs, degree sequence, handshaking lemma, Havel-Hakimi
theorem (statement only). Walk, trail and path, connected graph, distance, radius and diameter. Graph isomorphism.
Representations of graphs – adjacency and incidence lists - adjacency and incidence matrices. Digraph – orientation, strongly,
weakly and unilaterally connected digraphs. (8+7)
GRAPH ALGORITHMS: Trees, spanning trees, matrix tree theorem. Search algorithms – depth first search and breadth first
search, spanning tree algorithm–Kruskal’s and Prim’s, shortest path algorithm–Dijkstra’s flow networks: flows and cuts in networks,
solution of the maximum - flow problem – characterization of maximum flow - Max-flow Min-cut Theorem (statement only),
algorithms – maximum flow, augmenting path, and FFEK – maximum flow. (8+7)
LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Formulation, simplex method, two phase method, simplex multipliers, dual and primal, dual simplex
method. Transportation model – initial basic feasible solution- north-west corner rule, least-cost method, Vogel’s approximation
method, and optimum solution of transportation problem. (8+7)
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Principle of optimality, backward and forward recursion, calculus method of solution, tabular method
of solution, shortest-route problem, Knapsack model. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. West D B, Introduction to graph Theory, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Hamdy A Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017.
3. Narasingh Deo, Graph Theory: with applications to engineering and computer science, PHI Learning, 2017.
4. Kambo N.S., Mathematical Programming Techniques, East – West Press, New Delhi, 2012
5. Jonathan L Gross and Jay Yellen, Graph Theory and its Applications, Chapman & Hall, New York, 2006.
18LV02 DEVICE MODELLING

3204
INTRODUCTION TO SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND DIODE MODELLING: Review of Quantum Mechanics - Boltzmann
transport equation - Continuity equation - Poisson equation. Junction and Schottky diodes in monolithic technologies - static and
dynamic behavior - small and large signal models - SPICE models. (12+8)
INTEGRATED MOS CAPACITANCE: Band diagram- flat band condition and flat band voltage-surface accumulation, surface
depletion-threshold condition and threshold voltage, charge versus gate voltage, MOS C-V Characteristics, Poly Si gate depletion-
effective Increase In Tox. (8+6)
VLSI FABRICATION TECHNIQUES: An overview of wafer fabrication, wafer processing- oxidation - patterning - Diffusion - Ion
implantation - Deposition - Silicon Gate nmos process - CMOS process - nwell - pwell -Twin tub - Silicon on Insulator - CMOS
process enhancements - Interconnects circuit elements. (10+8)
INTEGRATED MOS TRANSISTOR: nMOS and PMOS Transistor - Threshold voltage - Threshold voltage equations - MOS device
equations - Basic DC equations Second order effects - Small signal AC Characteristics- MOS models SPICE model, EKV Model,
BSIM Model. Technology scaling for cost, speed and power consumption, Subthershold Current –Sub threshold Swing, Threshold
voltage Roll Off-Short Channel Leakage, reducing gate insulator electrical thickness And Tunneling Leakage, Short Channel Effects.
Ultra Thin body, SOI and Multigate MOSFET - FINFET. MOSFET Compact Model for Circuit Simulation using Verilog A. (15+8)
Total L: 45+T: 30 =75

TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Modeling of PN junction and Schottky diodes and plotting device characteristics

 Modeling of PMOS and NMOS devices and plotting transfer and output characteristics.
 Modeling of SOI, multigate, UTB and FINFET devices plotting transfer and output characteristics.
 Spice model, EKV Model and BSIM model parameter extractions
REFERENCES:
1. Chenming C.Hu, ”Modern Semiconductors for Integrated Circuits”, Prentice Hall, 2010
2. Neil Weste and David Harris: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, Pearson, 2010.
3. Tyagi M S, "Introduction to Semi-conductor Materials and Devices", John Wiley, 2008.
4. Richard S. Muller, ‎Theodore I. Kamins, ‎MansunChan,”Device electronics for integrated circuits”, John Wiley, 2003.
5. Yannis Tsividis, "Operation and modeling of the mos transistor” Oxford University Press, 2013.
189
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LV03 DIGITAL IC DESIGN
3003
OVERVIEW OF VLSI DESIGN METHODOLOGY: VLSI design process - Architectural design - Logical design-Physical design-
Layout styles - Full custom, Semicustom approaches. Layout design rules: Need for design rules – Layer representations - CMOS
nwell / pwell design rules – Design rule backgrounder-Layer assignments - SOI rules. (11)
MOS INVERTER: Static characteristics - Resistive load inverter - Inverter with n-type MOSFET load - CMOS inverter - Transient
characteristics - Delay time definitions, calculation of delay times. (11)
LOGIC DESIGN: Static CMOS Design - Complementary CMOS, Ratioed logic, Pass transistor and transmission gate - Dynamic
CMOS logic - . CMOS logic - Precharged domino logic.- Static Sequential circuits - Bistatbility, CMOS static FF, Dynamic sequential
circuits – Pseudo static latch, Dynamic two phase FF, Clocked- CMOS latch, NORA CMOS logic, TSPCL logic. (11)
VLSI BUILDING BLOCKS DESIGN: Adders, Shifters, Arithmetic logic unit design, Multipliers-Array, Carry Save multiplier, Wallace
tree, Booth's algorithm, Modified Booths Algorithm. Designing Memory and Array Structures-Memory peripheral circuit. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jan M Rabaey, “Digital Integrated Circuits", Prentice Hall, second edition, 2016.
2. Kang, “CMOS Digital integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, 2016.
3. Neil Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, Pearson, 4th edition 2015.
4. Douglas A Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian, "Basic VLSI Design", PHI learning, New Delhi, 2011.
5. Saida M Sait and Habib Youssef, “VLSI Physical Design Automation: Theory and Practice”, World Scientific Publishing
Company, 1999.
18LV04 DESIGNING WITH FPGAS

3204
Behavioral level ,Switch level and state machine modeling , Concurrent and procedural statements, UDP, sub circuit parameters,
function and task, timing and delays - test benches-design of combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog. (12+10)
FPGA ARCHITECTURES: Design flow using FPGAs, Role and Types of CAD Tools - Architecture of Xilinx and Altera FPGAs –
configurable logic blocks, I/O blocks - programmable interconnections - clock circuits – programming technologies – antifuse,
SRAM, EPROM, EEPROM - Implementation using FPGA – timing models – critical path - calculation of maximum clock frequency -
power analysis. (10+5)
CONTROL PATH AND DATA PATH DESIGN: Design of memories - ROM, single and dual port RAM - synchronous and
asynchronous read - arithmetic circuit design - serial/parallel adder, subtractor, floating point adder/subtractor multiplier - sequential
multiplier, array multiplier, signed multiplier – ALU – Hardwired Control Design – Micro programmed Control Design. (10+5)
CONTROLLER AND DSP DESIGN: Memory controller, processor control unit, communication controllers - UART, I2C, VGA
controller, USB, DSP blocks- FIR and IIR filters. (13+10)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Modeling and simulation of combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog.

 Design and Implementation of arithmetic circuits.
 Design and implementation of real time clock and controller.
 Design and implementation of memory modules and filters.
 Interfacing with ADC/DAC and display modules.
REFERENCES:
1. Morris Mano M, Charles R Kime, “Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals”, Pearson Education, 2015.
2. Charles H. Roth, "Digital system design using VHDL”, Thomson, 2014.
3. Seetharaman Ramachandran, “Digital VLSI systems design”, Springer, 2011.
4. Michael D Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL”, Pearson education, 2005.
5. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall, 2003.
18LV05 LOW POWER VLSI DESIGN

3003
POWER DISSIPATION IN CMOS: Physics of Power Dissipation in CMOS FET Devices-Sources of power consumption-Static
Power dissipation- Dynamic Power dissipation-Leakage power dissipation-Basic Principles of Low Power Design. (8)
POWER ANALYSIS AND ESTIMATION: SPICE circuit simulation-Gate level Analysis, Architecture level Analysis, Data Correlation
Analysis, Monte-Carlo Simulation, Probabilistic Power Analysis. Statistical Techniques - Estimation of Glitching Power - Sensitivity
Analysis - Circuit Reliability - Power Estimation at the circuit level - High level Power Estimation - Information Theory based
approaches - Estimation of maximum power. (10)
190
59th ACM 09.06.2018
POWER OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES: Circuit Level – Transistor and Gate Sizing, Equivalent Pin Ordering, Network
Restructuring and Reorganization, Special Latches and Flip Flops, Low Power Digital Cell Library, Adjustable Device Threshold
Voltage. Leakage current in deep sub micrometer transistors (4)
SPECIAL TECHNIQUES: Gate Reorganization, Signal Gating, Logic Encoding, State Machine Encoding, Precomputational Logic.
Architectural and System Level – Power and Performance Management, Switching Activity Reduction, Parallel Architecture with
Voltage Reduction, Flow Graph Transformation. Advanced Techniques- Adiabatic Computation, Pass Transistor Logic Synthesis,
Asynchronous Circuits, Low power bus – low swing bus, charge recycling bus, delay balancing. (8)
LOW POWER MEMORIES: Basics of ROM, Low power ROM Technoloy, Basics of SRAM-Memory Cell-Low Power SRAM
Technology-Precharge and Equalisation Circuit-Basics of DRAM-Low Power DRAM Technology. Synthesis for Low Power-
Behavioral Level Transform-Logic Level Optimization for Low Power. (9)
LOW VOLTAGE BiCMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN: Conventional BiCMOS Logic-BiCMOS Logic Family-Low Voltage BiCMOS Logic
family-Low Voltage BiCMOS Applications. (6)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kaushik Roy and Sharat C Prasad ,“Low Power CMOS VLSI circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2000.
2. Kuo J B and Lou J H, “Low Voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits”, John Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 1999.
3. Gary B Yeap K, "Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1998.
4. AbdelatifBelaouar, Mohamed l Elmasry,’Low Power Digital VLSI Design’, Kluwer Academic Press, 1995.
5. Anantha P Chandrakasan and Robert W Brodersen, “Low Power Digital CMOS Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Holland,
1995.
18LV51 VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
 Study of MOS and Inverter characteristics
 Design of static and dynamic digital circuits
 Design of Memories with Peripherals
 Model parameter extraction for diode, BJT, MOSFET
 Layout generation from schematics
Total P: 60
SEMESTER II
18LV06 ANALOG VLSI CIRCUITS
3204
ANALOG CIRCUIT BUILDING BLOCKS: Switches, Active resistors, Current sources and sinks, Current mirrors, Voltage
references, Comparator, Multiplier, Single source amplifiers – Common source, Common drain and common gate. (11+8)
AMPLIFIERS: MOS inverting amplifier - Improving performance of inverting amplifier - CMOS differential amplifiers – Qualitative
and Quantitative Analysis, Characterization of Op-Amp - CMOS two stage op-amp -Op-amps with output stage, Folded Cascode op-
amp, Transconductance Amplifier-Noise and Distortion in Amplifiers. (12+8)
PHASE LOCKED LOOPS: Phase Detector-Voltage Controlled Oscillator-Loop Filter.

LAYOUT ISSUES: CMOS design rules - layout of CMOS - BJT- Capacitors – Resistors - Mixed layout issues: Floor planning, power
supply & ground, fully differential matching, Guard rings and shielding. (11+6)
DATA CONVERTER FUNDAMENTALS: Ideal A/D and D/A converters, Quantization noise, Signed codes, Performance limitations.
D/A AND A/D CONVERTERS: D/A converter : Current scaling, Voltage scaling and Charge scaling D/A converters -Serial D/A
converters -Serial A/D converters, Parallel - A/D converters. (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Design and Simulation of analog building blocks,
 Design and Simulation of Amplifiers,
 Design and Simulation of data converters
 Design and Simulation of PLL.
REFERENCES:
1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press, 2012.
2. Jacob Baker, “CMOS, Circuit Design Layout and Simulation”, Wiley- IEEE Press, 2011.
3. Randall L Geiger, Phillip E Allen and Noel R Strader, "VLSI Design Techniques for Analog and Digital Circuits", McGraw Hill,
International Edition, 2010.
4. David A Johns and Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008.
5. Benhard Razavi, “Data Converters”, Kluwer Publishers, 2005.
191
59th ACM 09.06.2018
6. Paul R Gray and Robert G Meyer “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, John Wiley and Son, 2005.
18LV07 VLSI TESTING

3003
FAULT SIMULATION AND COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT TESTING: Motivation for testing and design for testability - Fault models -
Fault simulation techniques-Serial, Deductive, Parallel and Concurrent Simulation. Test generation algorithms for combinational
logic circuits - Fault Table, Boolean difference, Path sensitization, D - algorithm PODEM, FAN algorithms. Path and delay fault
testing (12)
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT TESTING AND DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY: Functional testing –Fault model based testing- Time frame
expansion, Key testability concepts – Ad Hoc design for Testability – scan based design - Signature analysis - Compression
techniques-Built-in self-test -Architectures-Boundary scan standard. (11)
ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL TEST: Analog testing difficulties, Fault models, Analog fault simulation, ADC and DAC testing
methods-Analog test bus standard. (11)
MEMORY AND SOC TESTING: Memory testing-fault models-test algorithms-BIST architectures for memory, System test -
functional test - diagnostic test - core based design and test wrapper - test architecture for soc - Testability features for board test -
FPGA testing. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Wang, Wu and Wen, “VLSI Test Principles and Architectures”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2006.
2. Vishwani D Agarwal, “Essential of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed Signal Circuits”, Springer, 2005.
3. N.K.Jha, S.Gupta, “Testing of Digital systems”, Cambridge university press, 2003.
4. Parag K Lala, “Digital Circuit Testing and Testability”, Academic Press, 1997.
5. Abramovici M, Breuer M A and Friedman A D, “Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design”, Wiley, 1994.
18LV08 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN FOR VLSI SYSTEMS

3003
ALGORITHM & SYNTHESIS: VLSI Design cycle - Role of CAD tools in the VLSI Design process -data structures and algorithms:
Complexity of algorithms, dynamic programming, Integer linear programming, Genetic algorithm, Simulated Annealing. Logic
synthesis – two level synthesis, Binary decision diagrams, and ROBDD principles. (13)
PHYSICAL DESIGN AUTOMATION: Partitioning - KL, FM algorithms, Placement – Simulation based algorithms - Simulated
Annealing , Force Directed Algorithm, Partitioning based algorithms- Breuer’s Algorithm, Terminal propagation Algorithm , Cluster
Growth Algorithm , Floor planning – slicing floor plan , Constraint Based Floor Planning, Integer Program Based Floor Planning –
Pin Assignment. (12)
ROUTING: Grid routing – Maze Routing Algorithms, Global routing - Shortest Path Based Algorithms, Steiner tree based
Algorithms, detailed routing – Left Edge algorithm, Dog-Leg Algorithm , Greedy Channel Routing, Switch Box Routing algorithms-
over the cell routing, Clock Routing. (10)
LAYOUT SYNTHESIS AND OPTIMISATION: Layout generation and Optimization of standard cell layout, gate matrix layout and
PLA, Layout Compaction – one dimensional and two dimensional compaction. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sabih H Gerez, “Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation”, John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
2. Sherwani N A, “Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation”, Kluwer, 2007.
3. Sait S M and Youssef H, “VLSI Physical Design Automation”, World Scientific, 2004.
4. Micheli G D, “Synthesis and Optimization of Digital Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
18LV09 HARDWARE VERIFICATION TECHNIQUES

3204
VERIFICATION TECHNOLOGIES AND TOOLS: Importance of Verification - Reconvergence Model - The Human Factor - Formal
and Functional Verification Approaches - Timing Verification - Testing Versus Verification - Design and Verification Reuse - Linting -
Simulation - Third Party Models - Verification Intellectual Property - Waveform Viewers - Code Coverage - Functional Coverage -
Issue Tracking – Metrics - Role of the Verification Plan - Levels of Verification - Verification strategies. (12+8)
HIGH-LEVEL MODELING: High-Level Versus RTL Thinking - Structure of High-Level Code - Data Abstraction - Object-Oriented
Programming - Parallel Simulation Engine - Race Conditions - Portability Issues. (10+6)
TEST CASE GENERATION AND ARCHITECTING TESTBENCHES: Simple Stimulus - Simple Output - Complex Stimulus - Bus-
Functional Models - Response Monitors - Transaction Level Interface - Verification Harness - Design Configuration - Self-Checking
Test benches - Directed Stimulus - Random Stimulus - System Level Verification Harnesses - Transaction Level Models - Managing
Simulations - Regression. (12+8)
192
59th ACM 09.06.2018
VERIFICATION METHODOLOGY: Universal Verification Methodology (UVM) – Packages – Components – Environmental
Structure – Factory Registration – Reporting. (11+8)
Total L: 45+T:30=75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT
 Constrained Random Verification
 Functional and Code Coverage
 Assertion Based Verification
 Verification using environment
 Verification using UVM
REFERNCES:
1. Chris Spear, Greg Tumbush, "System Verilog for Verification - A Guide to Learning the Test bench Language Features"
Springer 3rd edition, 2012.
2. Kropf T, “Introduction to Formal Hardware Verification”, Springer Verlag, 2010.
3. Janick Bergeron, “Writing Test Benches Using System Verilog”, Springer 1st Edition, 2009.
4. Mark Glasser, "Open Verification Methodology Cookbook", Springer, 2009.
5. Andreas Meyer, “Principles of Functional Verification”, Newnes, 2003.
18LV52 ADVANCED VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
 Specification, Design, synthesis and layout design (floor planning, place and route, power and clock distribution, clock tree
synthesis, timing analysis, power analysis, signal integrity, post-layout simulation and back annotation, GDS-II generation) of
digital building block.
 Specification, Schematic Design, simulation, layout generation, Physical verification (LVS, DRC, RC extraction, post layout
simulation, back annotation, GDS-II generation) of analog building block.
Total P: 60
18LV61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Total P: 30
SEMESTER III
18LV53 VLSI SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY
0042
 Modeling of System level Design using Processor Soft Cores
 Development of basic system using tools
 Interfacing with peripherals
 Creation of custom peripherals using HDL
 Enhancement of instruction set with custom instructions
 Optimizing system architecture through choice of processor enhancements - architecture exploration
 Mapping designs into System-on-Programmable chips
Total P: 60
18LV71 PROJECT WORK-I

0063
Total P: 90
193
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER IV
18LV72 PROJECT WORK –II
0 0 28 14


Total P: 420

18LV21 MIXED SIGNAL VLSI DESIGN
3003
SWITCHED CAPACITOR C FILTERS: universal active filter (KHN), Switched capacitor filters: Switched capacitor resistors -
Integrator- amplifiers – comparators - sample & hold circuits –- Biquad. (11)
CONTINUOUS TIME FILTERS: Introduction to Gm - C filters - CMOS Transconductors using Triode transistors, active transistors -
BiCMOS transconductors – MOSFET C Filters - Tuning Circuitry - Dynamic range performance - Elementary transconductor
building block- First and Second order filters. (11)
DIGITAL TO ANALOG & ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTERS: Non-idealities in the DAC - Types of DAC’s: Current switched,
Resistive, Charge redistribution (capacitive), Hybrid, segmented DAC’s - Techniques for improving linearity - Non-idealities in the
ADC, Types of ADCs: Flash, two step, pipelined, successive approximation, folding ADC’s. SIGMA DELTA CONVERTERS: Over
sampled converters - over sampling without noise & with noise - implementation imperfections - first order modulator - decimation
filters - second order modulator - sigma delta DAC & ADC’s. (12)
ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL EXTENSIONS TO HDL: Introduction - Language design objectives - Theory of differential
algebraic equations - the 1076 .1 Language - Tolerance groups - Conservative systems - Time and the simulation cycle -
A/D and D/A Interaction - Quiescent Point - Frequency domain modeling and examples. Analog extensions to Verilog:
Introduction - data types –Expressions – Signals - Analog behavior – Hierarchical Structures – Mixed signal Interaction. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holberg “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press, 2012.
2. Jacob Baker, “CMOS, Circuit Design Layout and Simulation”, Wiley- IEEE Press, 2011.
3. David A Johns and Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008.
4. Benhard Razavi, “Data Converters”, Kluwer Publishers, 2005.
5. Kenneth S Kundert and Olaf Zinke, “The Designers Guide to Verilog AMS”, Kluwer Publications, 2004.
6. Jacob Baker, Harry W Li, and David E Boyce “CMOS, Circuit Design Layout and Simulation”, Wiley- IEEE Press, 1998.
18LV22 VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING

2203
REALIZATION OF DIGITAL FILTERS: FIR filter design - IIR filter design - Direct form I, II, Cascade, parallel, Ladder - Lattice filters.
(7+6)
ITERATION BOUND: Introduction, Data flow graph representations, loop bound and iteration bound, Algorithms for computing
Iteration bound, iteration Bound of multirate Data - Flow Graphs. PIPELINING AND PARALLEL PROCESSING: Introduction -
Pipelining of FIR Digital filters - Parallel processing - Pipelining and parallel processing for Low power. (7+8)
TRANSFORMATIONS: RETIMING: Introduction - Definitions and Properties - Solving system of Inequalities - Retiming Techniques.
UNFOLDING: Introduction - An algorithm for unfolding - Properties of unfolding - Critical path, unfolding and retiming -
Application of unfolding. FOLDING: Introduction - folding Transformation - Register Minimization Techniques - Register
Minimization in folded Architectures. (7 +8)
194
59th ACM 09.06.2018
FAST CONVOLUTION: Cook - Toom algorithm –modified Cook - Toom algorithm Winogard algorithm- modified Winogard
algorithm, Algorithmic strength reduction in filters and transforms-parallel FIR filters, Parallel architectures for Rank-order filter. (9+8)
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Design of Digital filters.

 Pipelining/Parallel processing of filter.
 Design and implementation of Lattice filter using Retiming techniques.
 Design and implementation of filter using Unfolding techniques.
 Design and implementation of Low power IIR/Lattice filter.
REFERENCES:
1. John G Proakis and Dimitris G Manolakis, “Digital signal processing – Principles, Algorithms and Applications” Pearson, 2014.
2. Uwe Meyer Baese, “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays”, Springer, 2014.
3. Lonnie C Ludeman, “Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing”, Wiley India (P) Ltd., 2010.
4. Peter Pirsch “Architectures for Digital Signal Processing”, Wiley India (P) Ltd., 2009.
5. Keshab K Parhi, “VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems Design and Implementation”, Wiley - Inter science, 2007.
18LV23 SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY DESIGN AND TESTING

3003
RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY TECHNOLOGIES: Static Random Access Memories (SRAM): SRAM cell structures, MOS SRAM
Architecture, MOS SRAM cell and peripheral Circuit Operation, Bipolar SRAM Technologies, Silicon on insulator (SOI) Technology.
Advanced SRAM Architectures and Technologies, Application Specific SRAMs. Dynamic Random Access Memories (DRAM):
DRAM Technology Development, CMOS DRAM, DRAM cell theory and advanced cell structures, BiCMOS DRAM, soft error failures
in DRAM, Advanced DRAM Design and Architecture, Application Specific DRAM. (11)
NON-VOLATILE MEMORIES: Masked Read only Memories (ROM), High Density ROMs, Programmable ROM, Bipolar ROMs,
CMOS PROMs, Erasable(UV) Programmable ROM(EPROM), Floating, Gate EPROM Cell, One time Programmable EPROM
(OTPEPROM), Electrically Erasable PROMS, EEPROM Technology and Architecture, Non volatile SRAM, Flash Memories
(EPROM or EEPROM), Advanced Flash Memory Architecture, Content Addressable Memory. (12)
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY RELIABILITY AND RADIATION EFFECTS: General Reliability Issues-RAM Failure Modes and
Mechanism-Nonvolatile Memory Reliability-Reliability Modeling and Failure Rate Prediction-Design for Reliability-Reliability Test
Structures-Reliability Screening and Qualification. Radiation Effects-Single Event Phenomenon (SEP)-Radiation Hardening
Techniques-Radiation Hardening Process and Design Issues-Radiation Hardened Memory Characteristics-Radiation Hardness
Assurance and Testing - Radiation Dosimetry-Water Level Radiation Testing and Test Structures (11)
ADVANCED MEMORY TECHNOLOGIES: Ferroelectric Random Access Memories (FRAMs)-Gallium Arsenide (GaAs) FRAMs-
Analog Memories- Magnetoresistive Random Access Memories (MRAMs)-Experimental Memory Devices. Memory Hybrids and
MCMs (2D)-Memory Stacks and MCMs (3D)-Memory MCM Testing and Reliability Issues-Memory Cards-High Density Memory
Packaging Future Directions. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jesse Russell and Ronald Cohn, "Content-Addressable Memory", Bookvika Publishing, 2012.
2. Kiyoo Itoh, Masashi Horiguchi and Hitoshi Tanaka, "Ultra-Low Voltage Nano-Scale Memories", Springer, 2007.
3. Ashok K Sharma, “Semiconductor Memories Technology, Testing and Reliability”, Wiley, 2002.
4. Ashok K Sharma “Advanced Semiconductor Memories – Architecture, Design and Applications, Wiley, 2002.
5. Betty Prince, "Emerging Memories - Technologies and Trends", Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.
18LV24 VLSI TECHNOLOGY

3003
MATERIAL PROPERTIES & CRYSTAL GROWTH: Crystal structure- axes & planes, Crystal defects-Point defects & dislocations
Crystal growth- Bridgman, Czochralski techniques & Zone process, Doping in the melt. DIFFUSION & ION IMPLANTATION: Nature
of diffusion-interstitial, Substitutional, interstitial substitutional movements, Diffusion constant, Dissociate process, Diffusion
equation- D is constant & function, Diffusion systems, problems in Si Diffusion, Evaluation Techniques Ion Implantation: Penetration
range, Implantation Damage, Annealing, Implantation Systems. (12)
OXIDATION & EPITAXY OXIDATION: Thermal Oxidation-Intrinsic, Extrinsic silicon Glass, Oxide formation, Kinetics of Oxide
growth, Oxidation systems, Faults, Anodic Oxidation. EPITAXY: Vapor Phase Epitaxy (VPE)- transport, reaction and growth,
Chemistry of growth, Insitu etching, Selective epitaxy, imperfections, Liquid Phase Epitaxy, LPE system, Evaluation of epitaxial
layers. (11)
ETCHING & LITHOGRAPHY: LITHOGRAPHY: Pattern generation & Masking, Printing & Engraving - Optical, E-Beam, ion Beam,
X-Ray, Photo resists, Defects. ETCHING: Wet chemical etching- anisotropic etchants, Etching for non-crystalline films-Plasma
etching, Plasma-assisted etching, cleaning. (11)
195
59th ACM 09.06.2018
DEVICE & CIRCUIT FABRICATION: Isolation- Mesa, Oxide, PN-junction isolations, Self Alignment, Local Oxidation, Planarisation,
Metallisation and Packaging. Circuits – N, P and CMOS Transistors, Memory devices, BJT Circuits – Buried Layer, PNP and NPN
Transistors, Diodes, Resistors, Capacitors. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Donald Neamen, Dhrubes Biswas, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices” McGraw Hill, New York, Fourth edition, 2017.
2. Massimo Rudan , ,“Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, Springer, second edition,2017
3. Sze S M, “VLSI Technology”, McGraw Hill, New York, second edition, 2017.
4. Sorab K Gandhi, “VLSI Fabrication Principles – Silicon and Gallium Arsenide”, Wiley Interscience Publications, New York 2008.
5. Chang S Y and Sze S M, “ULSI Technology”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2007.
6. Sze S M and Kwok K Ng ,“Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, John Wiley, 2006.
18LV25 VLSI FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION

3003
OVERVIEW OF MODULATION SCHEMES: Classical Channel - Wireless Channel Description - Path Loss - Channel Model and
Envelope Fading - Multipath Fading: Frequency Selective and Fast Fading - Summary of Standard Translation. (10)
RECEIVER FRONT END: Filter Design - Rest of Receiver Front End: Non idealities and Design Parameters - Nonlinearity –Noise -
Derivation of Noise Figure. AMPLIFIER DESIGN: Low Noise Amplifier Design - Wideband LNA - Design Narrowband LNA -
Impedance Matching - Automatic Gain Control Amplifiers – Power Amplifiers. (13)
MIXERS: Balancing Mixer - Qualitative Description of the Gilbert Mixer - Conversion Gain – Distortion - Low Frequency Case:
Analysis of Gilbert Mixer – Distortion - High-Frequency Case – Noise - A Complete Active Mixer. Switching Mixer - Distortion in
Unbalanced Switching Mixer - Conversion Gain in Unbalanced Switching Mixer - Noise in Unbalanced Switching Mixer - A Practical
Unbalanced Switching Mixer. Sampling Mixer - Conversion Gain in Single Ended Sampling Mixer - Distortion in Single Ended
Sampling Mixer - Intrinsic Noise in Single Ended Sampling Mixer - Extrinsic Noise in Single Ended Sampling Mixer- Demodulators.
(11)
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZERS: Phase Locked Loops - Voltage Controlled Oscillators - Phase Detector – Analog Phase Detectors
– Digital Phase Detectors - Frequency Dividers - LC Oscillators - Ring Oscillators - Phase Noise - A Complete Synthesizer Design
Example (DECT Application). Loop filter: General Description - Design Approaches. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Luzzatto A and Shirazi G, “Wireless Transceiver Design: Mastering the Design of Modern Wireless Equipment and Systems”,
Wiley 2007.
2. laskar J, Matinpourand B and Charaborty S, “Modern receiver front ends: Systems, Circuits and integration”, Wiley 2004
3. Bosco H Leung “VLSI for Wireless Communication”, Pearson Education, 2002.
4. Leenearts D, Vander J Tang and Vaucher C S, “Circuit design for RF transceivers”, Springer 2002.
5. Emad N Farag and Mohamed I Elmasry, “Mixed Signal VLSI Wireless Design - Circuits and Systems”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2000.
18LV26 RF CIRCUIT DESIGN

3003
PASSIVE RF COMPONENTS AND TRANSMISSION LINE ANALYSIS: High frequency Resistors, Capacitor and Inductors –
Transmission Line Analysis: Line equation, Micro strip line, Voltage Reflection Co-efficient, propagation constant phase velocity and
special termination - Smith Chart-Impedance transformation - Analysis of parallel RL circuit and parallel RC circuit. (9)
SINGLE AND MULTI PORT NETWORK THEORY AND RF FILTER DESIGN: Definition - properties - interconnection of networks -
ABCD parameters and S parameters - RF Filter Resonator and filter configuration - Butterworth and chebyshev filters. Design of
micro strip filters. (9)
DESIGN OF MATCHING NETWORK: Matching by Discrete Components - Design of two-component matching network, Design of
T and  matching network- Matching by micro strip line - Design of matching network - Design of stub matching. (9)
RF ACTIVE COMPONENTS, THEIR MODELING AND RF AMPLIFIER DESIGN: Components: RF Diode: PIN diode and Gunn
Diode. RF Bipolar junction Transistor, RF field effect transistor - Modeling: Diode model, Transistor model, and FET model – RF
Amplifier: Characteristics, power relations and Stability considerations. (9)
RF OSCILLATOR AND MIXER DESIGN: Basic oscillator model - Design of fixed frequency oscillator - Dielectric resonator
oscillator - voltage controlled oscillator - gun element oscillator - Basic concepts - Design of single ended mixer- Double ended
mixer. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Razavi B, “RF Micro Electronics”, Prentice Hall PTR, 2011.
2. Reinhold Ludwig and Pavel Bretchko, “RF Circuit Design”, Pearson Education Asia Publication, 2011.
3. Peter P Kenington, “High Linearity RF Amplifier Design”, Artech House, 2007.
196
59th ACM 09.06.2018
4. Lee T H, “The Design of CMOS Radio Frequency Integerated Circuits”, Cambridge University Press, 2004.
5. Matthew M Radmanesh, “Radio Frequency and Microwave Electronics Illustrated”, Pearson Education, Asia Publication, 2001.
18LV27 MEMS AND NEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION AND SCALING: MEMS and microsystems - development of MEMS technology- MEMS future and applications,
microsystems and microelectronics - MEMS challenges - scaling - scaling in geometry, rigid body dynamics, electrostatic forces,
electromagnetic forces, electricity, fluid mechanics, heat transfer. (7)
MATERIALS FOR MEMS: Introduction - substrates and wafer- silicon substrate - crystal structure, miller indices, properties - silicon
compounds - silicon dioxide, silicon carbide, silicon nitride, polycrystalline silicon- gallium arsenide - quartz- piezoelectric crystals -
polymers - polymers for MEMS, conductive polymers. (7)
FABRICATION PROCESS: Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD) - evaporation, sputtering - Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) -
etching process - wet chemical etching, plasma etching, Ion milling - patterning - lithography, lift off process - wafer bonding - silicon
fusion bonding, anodic bonding- annealing- chemical mechanical polishing - doping - diffusion, implant. (12)
MEMS TECHNOLOGIES AND PACKAGING: Bulk micromachining - Isotropic and anisotropic etching, wet etchants, etch stop, dry
etching, comparison of wet and dry etching - surface micromachining - Introduction, process, associated problems - LIGA Process
and electroplating - Integration of electronics and MEMS technology- packaging - post fabrication process, package selection, die
attach, Wire bond and Sealing. (12)
NEMS TECHNIQUES AND APPLICATIONS: Introduction to NEMS and its architecture - carbon nanotube electronics - modeling -
introduction, analysis and simulation - simulation of Actuators, FET, Pressure transducer - applications and future challenges. (7)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ananthasuresh G. K, Vinoy. K.J, Gopalakrishnan.S, “Micro and Smart Systems”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Vijay K. Varadan, Vinoy. K.J, Gopalakrishnan.S, “Smart material Systems and MEMS: Design and Development
Methodologies”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2011.
3. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems, Design, Manufacture and Nanoscale Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, New Jersey.
2008.
4. James J Allen, “Micro Electro Mechanical System Design CRC Press-Taylor & Francis”, New York, 2005.
5. Syergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS systems, Devices and Structures”, CRC Press, New York, 2002.
18LV28 SYSTEM ON CHIP DESIGN

3003
SOC INTRODUCTION: Components of SoC - Design flow - Nature of hardware & software, driving factors for hardware-software
codesign, design space, system specification and modeling- Hardware Software tradeoffs- Co-Design Approaches, Models of
Computation - SoC Applications - SYSTEM-LEVEL DESIGN: Processor selection-Concepts in Processor Architecture: Instruction
set architecture (ISA) - Soft and Firm processors, Custom-Designed processors - on-chip memory. (10)
COMMUNICATION ARCHITECTURES: On-chip Buses: basic architecture, topologies, arbitration and protocols, Bus standards:
AMBA, CoreConnect, Wishbone, Avalon - Network-on-chip: Architecture-topologies-switching strategies - routing algorithms - flow
control, Quality-of-Service (10)
IP BASED SYSTEM DESIGN: Types of IP, IP across design hierarchy, IP life cycle, Creating and using IP - Technical concerns on
IP reuse - IP integration - IP evaluation on FPGA prototypes. (10)
SOC IMPLEMENTATION: Study of processor IP, Memory IP, wrapper Design - Real-time operating system (RTOS), Peripheral
interface and components, High-density FPGAs - EDA tools used for SOC design - SOC TESTING: Manufacturing test of SoC:
Core layer, system layer, application layer-P1500 Wrapper Standardization-SoC Test Automation (STAT). (15)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Patrick Schaumont “A Practical Introduction to Hardware/Software Co-design”, Patrick Schaumont, 2nd Edition, Springer,
2012.
2. Michael J Flynn and Wayne Luk, “Computer system Design: System-on-Chip”, Wiley-India, 2012.
3. Patrick Schaumont “A Practical Introduction to Hardware/Software Co-design”, Patrick Schaumont, Springer, 2012.
4. Sudeep Pasricha and Nikil Dutt, “On Chip Communication Architectures: System on Chip Interconnect”, Morghan Kaufmann
Publishers, 2008.
5. Wolf W H, “Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computing System Design”, Elsevier, 2008.
6. Lin, Y-L S (ed.), “Essential Issues in SOC Design: Designing Complex Systems-on-chip. Springer, 2006.
18LV29 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN

2203
EMBEDDED DESIGN CYCLE OVERVIEW: Differences between the Desktop PC and typical Embedded System-Examples of
Embedded Systems-Major hardware and software modules of an embedded system-Embedded Design Life Cycle. Introduction to
197
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ARM Controllers: ARM Cortex-A, Cortex-R and Cortex-M series microcontrollers. (4)
PERIPHERAL INTERFACING TECHNIQUES: CPU Core, Program Memory, Data Memory, AHP and APB Bus Structure, System
Peripherals: GPIO, Timers, EEPROM, Hibernation Module, WDT and DMA. Serial Peripherals: UART, I2C, SPI, CAN and USB.
Analog Peripherals: ADC and Analog Comparator. Motion Control Peripherals: PWM and QEI. Hardware and Software Interrupts,
Clock and Reset Generator, Development and debugging Support: JTAG and BDM. (10+10)
PERIPHERAL PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES: Host and Target Machines, Configuring and Programming of System Peripherals,
Serial Peripherals, Analog Peripherals and Motion Control Peripherals. Display, Keyboard, Sensors, motors, interfacing and
Programming Techniques. (8+10)
REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS (RTOS): Survey of software architectures, Tasks and Task States, Tasks and Data,
Semaphores and Shared Data, Message Queues, Mailboxes and Pipes, Timer functions, Events, Memory Management, Interrupt
Routines in RTOS Environment. (8+10)
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 GPIO Interfacing.
 Analog Peripheral Interfacing
 Smart Sensors Interfacing
 Motion Control Peripheral Interfacing
 Experimenting Serial Communication Protocols
REFERENCES:
1. Steve Furber,” ARM System-on-Chip Architecture”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009.
2. David E Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer” Pearson Education Asia, 2006.
3. Arnold S. Berger, “Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction to Processes, Tools, and Techniques” CMP Books, 2002.
4. https://www.arm.com/products/processors
5. https://www.ti.com/tiva
6. https://www.nordicsemi.com/eng/Products/Nordic-Thingy-52
18LV30 SYNTHESIS AND OPTIMIZATION OF DIGITAL CIRCUITS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Boolean functions, satisfiability and cover. Abstract models, state diagrams. Data flow and sequencing graphs,
compilation and behavioural optimization. (8)
ARCHITECTURAL SYNTHESIS: Circuit specifications for architectural synthesis. Temporal domain, spatial domain, hierarchical
models. Synchronization problems. Area and performance estimation. Strategies for architectural optimization, Data path synthesis
of pipelined circuits. (10)
SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS: Scheduling with and without constraints. Scheduling algorithms for extended sequencing models.
Scheduling pipelined circuits. (8)
RESOURCE SHARING AND BINDING: Sharing and binding for resource dominated circuits and general circuits. Concurrent
binding and scheduling. Resource sharing and binding for non-scheduled sequencing graphs. (9)
SEQUENTIAL LOGIC OPTIMIZATION: Sequential circuit optimization using state based models and network models. Implicit finite
state machine. Traversal methods. Testability considerations for synchronous circuits. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mohanthy S P, Ranganathan N and Kougianos E, “Low Power High Level Synthesis for Nanoscale CMOS Circuits”, Springer,
2010.
2. Philippe Coussy and Adam, “High Level Synthesis: From Algorithm to Digital Circuit”, Springer, 2008.
3. Aarto P, Visegrady T and Jankovits I, “High Level Synthesis of Pipelined Data Paths”, Wiley, 2001.
4. De Micheli G, “Synthesis and optimization of Digital circuits”, McGraw Hill, 1994.
18LV31 HIGH SPEED DIGITAL DESIGN

3003
TRANSMISSION LINES AND CROSSTALK: Transmission line structures, signal propagation, transmission line parameters, line
impedance, propagation delay, Transmission line reflections, Cross talk- Mutual inductance, Mutual capacitance, cross talk induced
noise, minimizing cross talk. (10)
INTERCONNECTS: Interconnect technologies, Multilevel multilayer interconnects, propagation delay, crosstalk analysis (4)
POWER DISTRIBUTION: Losses, the need for low-impedance planes and decoupling capacitors and their selection. (10)
CLOCK DISTRIBUTION AND TIMING: High-quality clock signals to components, boards, and systems, Common clock timing and
source synchronous timing (10)
198
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC): Designing for EMC, EMC regulations, typical noise path, methods of noise
coupling, and methods of reducing interference in systems. (5)
GROUNDING: Safety grounds, signal grounds, single-point ground systems, multi-point ground systems, hybrid grounds, functional
ground layout, practical low frequency grounding, hardware grounds, grounding of cable shields, ground loops, shield grounding at
high frequencies. (6)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Goel A K , “High speed vlsi interconnections” ,Wiley, 2007.
2. Paul CR,”Introduction t Electromagnetic compatability”, Wiley 2006.
3. Howard Johnson, Martin Graham, “High speed Digital design”, Pearson, 2005.
4. Bogatin E, “Signal integrity-simplified”, Prentice Hall, 2003.
5. Hall S , Hall G and McCall J, “ High speed digital system design: A Handbook of Interconnect theory and practices”, Wiley
Interscience, 2000
6. Hartman Grabinski, “ Interconnects in VLSI design”, Kluwer, 2000.
18LV32 NANO SCALE DEVICES

3003
OVERVIEW: Nano devices, Nano materials, Nano characterization-Definition of Technology node. Basic CMOS Process flow- MOS
Scaling theory, Issues in scaling. MOS transistors: Short channel effects, Description of a typical 65 nm CMOS technology-
Requirements for Non classical MOS transistor. MOS CAPACITOR: Role of interface quality and related process techniques,
Gate oxide thickness scaling trend, SiO2 vs. High-k gate dielectrics- Integration issues of high-k -Interface states, bulk charge, band
offset, stability, reliability - Qbd high field, possible candidates, CV and IV techniques. (10)
METAL GATE TRANSISTOR: Motivation, requirements, Integration Issues - Transport in Nano MOSFET, velocity saturation,
ballistic transport, injection velocity, velocity overshoot - Ultrathin body SOI - double gate transistors, integration issues - Vertical
transistors - FinFET and Surround gate FET. (11)
METAL SOURCE/DRAIN JUNCTIONS: Properties of schotky junctions on Silicon, Germanium and compound semiconductors -
Work function pinning- Germanium Nano MOSFETs: strain, quantization, Advantages of Germanium over Silicon, PMOS versus
NMOS. Compound semiconductors - material properties, MESFETs Compound semiconductors MOSFETs in the context
of channel quantization and strain, Hetero structure MOSFETs exploiting novel materials, strain, and quantization. (10)
SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS: CVD, Nucleation and Growth, ALD, Epitaxy, MBE. Compound semiconductor hetero-structure
growth and characterization - Quantum wells and Thickness measurement techniques - Contact - step height, Optical - reflectance
and ellipsometry.AFM. Characterization techniques for nanomaterials: FTIR, XRD, AFM, SEM, TEM, EDAX etc-Applications and
interpretation of results. (11)
EMERGING NANO MATERIALS: Nanotubes, nanorods and other nano structures, LB technique, Soft lithography etc. Microwave
assisted synthesis, Self assembly etc. (3)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Karl Goser, Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices, Springer, 2005.
2. Waser Ranier, “Nanoelectronics and Information Technology (Advanced Electronic Materials and Novel Devices”, Wiley-VCH,
2005.
18LV33 MODELLING AND SIMULATION OF NANOSCALE TRANSISTORS

2203
ANALYTICAL MODELLING: Introduction - Types of Models - Attributes of Good Compact Models - Model Formulation - Model
Implementation in Circuit Simulators - Model Testing - Parameter Extraction - Simulation and Extraction for RF Applications.
Analytical Solution Methods: Parabolic Approximation - Variable Separable - Numerical Simulation - Fourier series - Green Function
- Bessel Function. (10+4)
TECHNOLOGY-ORIENTED CAD & DEVICE CAD: Introduction – Process and Device CAD – Process Simulation Techniques –
Interfaces in process and Device CAD – CMOS Technology - Ion Implantation – Oxidation – Impurity Diffusion. DEVICE CAD:
Semiconductor Device Analysis – The pn Junction – Equilibrium Conditions – Non-equilibrium Conditions - Bipolar Junction
Structures - Carrier Densities – Carrier Transport and Conversation - Field-Effect Structures. The MOS capacitor – Basic MOSFET
I-V Characteristics – Threshold Voltage in Nonuniform Substrate – MOS Device Design by Simulation. (13+11)
TCAD SIMULATION: Process simulator – Device simulator – Advanced concepts – drift-diffusion, hydrodynamic model, stress
models - Structure editor - meshing concepts - work bench – Plotting – Scripting -Monte-carlo simulation - Electromagnetic
simulation. (11+7)
NOVEL TRANSISTOR ARCHITECTURES: Nanowire transistor - High electron mobility transistor - Tunnel field effect transistor -
Single electron transistor - Carbon nanotube transistor - Double gate and multi gate MOS transistor - Electron wave transistor -
Electron spin transistor. (11+8)
Total L: 30+ T: 30 = 60
199
59th ACM 09.06.2018
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Modeling and simulation of single gate MOSFET.
 Modeling and simulation of double gate MOSFET.
 Modeling and simulation of multi gate MOSFET.
 Modeling and simulation of high electron mobility transistor.
 Modeling and simulation of TFET.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert W.Dutton and Zhiping Yu, “Technology CAD Computer Simulation of Processes and Devices”, Springer, 2012.
2. Rainer Waser, “Nanoelectronics and Information Technology: Advanced Electronic Materials and Novel Devices”, 3rd Edition,
Wiley VchVerlag, Weiheim, 2012.
3. YannisTsividis and Colin McAndrew, "Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor", 3rd Edition, Oxford University Press,
2011.
4. Mark S. Lundstrom and Jing Guo, "Nanoscale Transistors: Device Physics, Modeling and Simulation", Springer, 2006.
5. Shunri Oda and David Ferry, “Silicon Nanoelectronics”, CRC Press, New York, 2005.
6. Karl Goser, Peter Glosekotter and Jan Dienstuhl, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems”, Springer, 2004.
18LV34 ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND PARALLEL PROCESSING

3003
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING: Evolution of computer systems. Generation of computer systems – Trends
towards parallel processing- Parallel processing mechanisms- parallel computer structure- Architectural classification schemes –
Application. (8)
MEMORY AND I/O SUBSYSTEMS, PIPELINING: Hierarchical Memory structure – Virtual memory system - cache memory
management- Memory allocation and management – I/O subsystems pipelining: Principles - Classification of pipeline processors -
Reservation tables – Interleaved memory organization – Design of arithmetic pipeline – Design of instruction pipeline. (10)
VECTOR AND ARRAY PROCESSING: Need – Basic vector processing architecture - Issues in vector processing – Vectorization
and optimization methods. Array processing: SIMD Array processors – SIMD interconnection networks – Parallel algorithms for
array processors – associative array processing (9)
MULTIPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE: Functional structures - Interconnection network – Multi cache problems and solutions –
Exploiting concurrency for multiprocessing (9)
PRINCIPLES OF PARALLEL ALGORITHM DESIGN: Design approaches-Design issues-Performance measures and analysis-
Complexities-Anomalies in parallel algorithms - Pseudo code conventions for parallel algorithms-Comparison of SIMD and MIMD
algorithms. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kai Hwang, Naresh Jotwani: Advanced Computer Architecture - Parallelism, Scalability, Programmability, Tata McGraw Hill,
2011
2. John L Hennessy, “Computer Architecture a Quantitative Approach”, Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
3. Seyed Roosta, “Parallel Processing and Parallel Algorithms”, Springer Series, 2000.
18LV35 HARDWARE SECURITY

3003
CRYPTOGRAPHIC ALGORITHMS IMPLEMENTATION AND SIDE CHANNEL ANALYSIS: Introduction - Need for hardware
security – Basics and vulnerabilities - Design for security - Hardware Implementation of Public-key Cryptographic Algorithm -
Private-key Cryptographic Algorithm - Stream Ciphers - Hash Functions – Introduction to Side Channel Analysis - Power Analysis
Attack - Timing Attack - Fault Attack - Cache Attack – Scan Chain Based Attack - Design Techniques To Prevent Side Channel
Analysis Attacks. (12)
HARDWARE TROJANS: Overview - Nomenclature and Operating Modes - Hardware Trojan Detection Techniques - Logic Testing
- Countermeasures - Design Technique - Manufacturing Technique. (11)
PHYSICALLY UNCLONABLE FUNCTIONS: Introduction – Design Approaches - Modeling of PUFs - Sources of Mismatch and
Errors - Testing of PUFs - Practical Realizations - Applications. (11)
COUNTERFEIT ICS: Taxonomies - Assessment - Challenges - Detection and Prevention of Recycled ICs - Path Delay
Fingerprinting – Secure Hardware Intellectual Properties: - Need for IP protection - Digital Watermarking - Constraint-based
Watermarking to Design IP Protection - Watermarking HDL Source Codes by Duplicating Modules. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Debdeep Mukhopadhyay, Rajat Subhra Chakraborty, "Hardware Security - Design, Threats, and Safeguards", CRC Press,
2015.
2. Mohammad Tehranipoor, Hassan Salmani, Xuehui Zhang, "Integrated Circuit Authentication Hardware Trojans and Counterfeit
Detection", Springer, 2014.
200
59th ACM 09.06.2018
3. Christoph Bohm, Maximilian Hofer, "Physical Unclonable Functions in Theory and Practice", Springer, 2013.
4. Mohammad Tehranipoor, Cliff Wang, "Introduction to Hardware Security and Trust", Springer, 2012.
5. K. C. Koc, "Cryptographic Engineering", Springer, 2009.
6. Rodriguez-Henriquez, F., Saqib, N.A., Díaz Pérez, A., Koc, C.K., "Cryptographic Algorithms on Reconfigurable Hardware",
Springer, 2007.
18LV36 VLSI FOR BIOMEDICAL SYSTEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION TO BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS: Examples of Biomedical signals - ECG, EEG, and EMG etc - Tasks in Biomedical
Signal Processing - Computer Aided Diagnosis. Origin of bio potentials - Review of linear systems – Processing of Random &
Stochastic signals-Modeling Stochastic signals as filtered White Noise-Nonlinear models of signals- Properties and effects of noise
in biomedical instruments - Filtering in biomedical instruments. (11)
CARDIO VASCULAR AND NEUROLOGICAL SIGNALS: Basic ECG - Electrical Activity of the heart- ECG data acquisition – ECG
parameters & their estimation - Use of multiscale analysis for ECG parameters estimation – Arrhythmia analysis.
Electroencephalogram - EEG rhythms & waveform - categorization of EEG activity - recording techniques - EEG Analysis- EEG
applications- Epilepsy, sleep EEG-Data acquisition and classification of sleep stages- EEG segmentation-Fixed Segmentation-
Adaptive segmentation- coherence analysis of EEG channels. (12)
BIOMEDICAL ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS: Ultra-low-power noninvasive medical electronics - Analog integrated-circuit switched-
capacitor model of the heart – the electrocardiogram- A micro power electrocardiogram amplifier - Low-power pulse oximetry
Battery-free tags for body sensor networks -Intra-body galvanic communication networks - Biomolecular sensing. (10)
LOW-POWER ENERGY-HARVESTING CIRCUITS FOR BIOMEDICAL SYSTEMS: Low power transimpedance amplifiers and
photoreceptors- Low power transconductance amplifiers and scaling laws for power in analog circuits- Low-power filters and
resonators- Low power current- mode circuits - Ultra-low-power and neuron-inspired analog-to-digital conversion for biomedical
system. Wireless inductive power links for medical implants - Energy-harvesting RF antenna power links - Low-power RF telemetry
in biomedical implants. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Reddy D C, “Biomedical Signal Processing: Principles and techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Enderle, “Introduction to Biomedical Engineering,” Elsevier, 2005.
3. Rangaraj M. Rangayyan, “Biomedical Signal Analysis”, Wiley, 2012.
4. Rahul Sarpeshkar, “Ultra Low Power Bioelectronics: Fundamentals, Biomedical Applications, and Bio-Inspired Systems”
Cambridge University Press, 2011
5. Kris Iniewski, “VLSI Circuit Design for Biomedical Applications”, Artech House Publishers, 2008.
6. Bruce, “Biomedical Signal Processing & Signal Modeling,” Wiley, 2001.
18LV37 ELECTRONIC PACKAGING TECHNOLOGIES

3003
OVERVIEW OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PACKAGING: Packaged Electronics – Technologies- Trends- Products and levels of
packaging- Packaging aspects of handheld products. (8)
SEMICONDUCTOR PACKAGING: Basics of Semiconductor and Process flowchart; Wafer packaging; Packaging evolution- Chip
connection choices -Wire bonding, TAB and flip chip. Single chip packages or modules (SCM). Commonly used packages and
advanced packages; Materials in packages- Advances packages Thermal mismatch in packages; Current trends in packaging-
Multichip modules (MCM)-types; System-in package(SIP)- Packaging roadmaps- Hybrid circuits. (14)
ELECTRICAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS IN SYSTEMS PACKAGING: Electrical Issues – Resistive Parasitic - Capacitive and
Inductive Parasitic- Layout guidelines and the Reflection problem-Interconnection. (12)
THERMAL MANAGEMENT AND RELIABILITY: Heat-transfer fundamentals-. Thermal conductivity and resistance- Conduction,
convection and radiation- Cooling –Reliability- Basic concepts- Environmental interactions- Thermal mismatch and fatigue. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rao R Tummala, “Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging”, McGraw Hill, NY, 2001.
2. William D Brown, “Advanced Electronic Packaging”, IEEE Press, 1999.
18LV38 VLSI FOR IOT SYSTEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Concept of connected world – Need, Legacy systems for connected world – features and limitations, Key
features of IoT architecture, Merits and Demerits of IoT technology, Applications driven by IoT technology – examples (9)
COMPONENTS OF IOT: Review of classic embedded system architecture, Basic building blocks of an IoT system – Artificial
Intelligence, Connectivity, Sensors and Computing nodes. Sensors used in IoT systems – Characteristics and requirements, Types
of sensors for IoT systems, Compute nodes of IoT, Connectivity technologies in IoT – Software in IoT systems - features and
properties. (12)
201
59th ACM 09.06.2018
IC TECHNOLOGY FOR IOT: SoC architecture for IoT Devices– Application Processors, Microcontrollers, Smart Analog; Memory
architecture for IoT – Non Volatile Memories (NVM), Embedded Non-Volatile Memories, Anti-Fuse One Time Programmable (OTP)
memories, Power Management - Low Drop Out Regulators, DC-to-DC Converters, Voltage References, Power Management Units
(PMUs) in IC’s and Systems, Role of Field Programmability in IoT systems. (12)
ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN FOR IOT: Electronic System Design for IoT – Requirements, Computing blocks in IoT systems –
MCU’s, DSPs and FPGA’s, System Power Supply Design for IoT systems, Mixed Signal challenges in hardware systems, Form
Factor – Guidelines and prevailing standards, Component models & System Design – Feasibility and challenges, System Level
Integration, Operating conditions of IoT devices and impact on Electronic System Design; Hardware Security issues, EMI/EMC,
SI/PI and Reliability Analysis in IoT systems. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Alioto, “Enabling the Internet of Things- From Integrated Circuits to Integrated Systems”, Springer Publications, First Edition,
2017.
2. Pieter Harpe, Kofi A. A. Makinwa, Andrea Baschirotto, "Hybrid ADCs, Smart Sensors for the IoT, and Sub-1V & Advanced
Node Analog Circuit Design”, Springer International Publishing AG, 2017.
3. Rashid Khan, KajariGhoshdastidar, Ajith Vasudevan, “Learning IoT with Particle Photon and Electron”, Packt Publishing
Limited (Verlag), 2016.
4. ApekMulay, “Sustaining Moore’s Law: Uncertainty Leading to a Certainty of IoT Revolution” Morgan and Claypool Publishers,
2015.
5. OrCAD, “P-spice Technology for Internet of Things” - http://www.pspice.com/solution/pspice-technology-internet-things
6. Jim Lipman, Sidense Corp.” NVM memory: A Critical Design Consideration for IoT Applications”- https://www.design-
reuse.com/articles/32614/nvm-memory-iot-applications.html
18LV39 QUANTUM DOT CELLULAR AUTOMATA NANOTECHNOLOGY

3003
INTRODUCTION: Emerging Nanotechnologies- Electronics beyond Moore's law - Limitations of CMOS technology- Alternatives to
MOSFET and Challenges - Emerging Transistor Based Devices-IC Technology beyond CMOS Era- USDM and Quantum
computing- QCA modeling approach. (11)
QCA TERMINOLOGY: QCA Basics - Schrödinger’s equation in quantum wires - Quantum boxes - Non-zero angular momentum
states- Spherical quantum dots -Tiny quantum dots- Cuboidal dots- Dots of arbitrary shape -Approaches to pyramidal dots- Matrix
approaches-Transport through dot arrays- Crossovers in QCA -Convergence tests- Efficiency- Tool for QCA Simulation. (11)
DESIGN OF DIGITAL CIRCUITS IN QCA: Logic Primitives in QCA- Clocking in QCA - Role and Types -Design of Logic Gates and
Multiplexer in QCA - Design of a One-Bit Full-Adder - Flip-Flop in QCA. Adders and Multipliers in QCA –Design of Ripple Carry
Adder (RCA) and Prefix Adders in QCA- Design of 16-Bit Hybrid Adder in QCA- Layout Level Implementation of adders and
Comparisons. Introduction to Multipliers -Design of a Multiplier in QCA - The Baugh - Wooley Multiplier for 2’s Complement
Numbers- Design of Baugh-Wooley Multiplier in QCA. (12)
TRANSFORM IN QCA: Discrete Hadamard Transform Computation in QCA - Basics of Discrete Hadamard Transform-
Mathematical Formulation for DHT Computation- QCA Realization - Performance of a Full-Parallel Addition Strategy - Applications
of Quantum Dot Cellular Automata Technology. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Harrison, Alex Valavanis -Quantum Wells, Wires and Dots: Theoretical and Computational Physics of Semiconductor
Nanostructures, 4th Edition, Wiley, April 2016.
2. K. Sridharan, Vikramkumar Pudi –Design of Arithmetic Circuits in Quantum Dot Cellular Automata Nanotechnology Studies in
Computational Intelligence-Springer International Publishing-2015.
3. Fabrizio Lombardi, Jing Huang - Design and Test of Digital Circuits by Quantum-Dot Cellular Automata-Artech House-2007.
4. Kasper, E., Paul, D -Silicon Quantum Integrated Circuits -Silicon-Germanium Heterostructure Devices: Basics and
Realisations-Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2005.
18LV40 GENETIC ALGORITHMS FOR VLSI DESIGN

3003
GA OPERATORS AND GA FOR PARTITIONING: GA Terminology-steady state algorithm-Genetic Operators-Partitioning-circuit

partitioning by genetic algorithm-Hybrid Genetic algorithm for Ratio-cut portioning. (10)
GA FOR PLACEMENT AND ROUTING: Standard cell placement-Macro cell placement-Macro cell Routing-Steiner problem in
graph-Macro cell Global Routing. (12)
FPGA TECHNOLOGY MAPPING: Circuit segmentation and FPGA mapping-circuit segmentation for Pseudo-Exhaustive testing. (6)
AUTOMATIC TEST GENERATION: Test generation in a GA framework-Test generation for test application Time Reduction-
Deterministic/Genetic Test generator Hybrids-use of FSM sequences. (9)
202
59th ACM 09.06.2018
PEAK POWER ESTIMATION: Application of Genetic algorithms to peak power estimation-Estimation of peak single-cycle and n-
cycle powers-Peak Sustainable power estimation. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ricardo Sal Zebulum, Macro Aurelio Pacheco, Marley Maria B R Vellasco and Marley Maria Bernard Vellasco, “Evolution
Electronics: Automatic Design of Electronic Circuits and Systems Genetic Algorithms”, CRC press, 2001.
2. John R Koza, Forrest H Bennett III, David Andre and Morgan Kufmann, “Genetic Automatic Programming and Circuit
Synthesis”, 1999.
3. Pinaki Mazumder, E MRudnick, “Genetic Algorithm for VLSI Design, Layout and test Automation”, Prentice Hall, 1998.
4. Randy L Haupt, Sue Ellen Haupt, “Practical Genetic Algorithms”, Wiley-Interscience, 1977.
AUDIT COURSES
18LV81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18LV82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

203
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
(2018 REGULATIONS)

I SEMESTER
18LW01 Applied Mathematics 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LW02 Advanced Digital Communications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LW03 Wireless Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LW04 Wireless Communication System Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LW05 Communication Algorithms on FPGA 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LW51 Wireless Networks Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18LW81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 Hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18LW06 Radiating Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LW07 RF and Microwave Circuit Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LW08 Filter Design on Digital Signal Processor 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LW09 Embedded System Design and IoT 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LW__ Professional Elective -1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW__ Professional Elective -2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW52 RF System Design using EDA Tools Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LW61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18LW82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 Hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18LW__ Professional Elective - 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW53 Wireless System Design Laboratory 3 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LW71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 15 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18LW72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES

18LW21 Wireless Sensor Networks 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW22 Optical Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW23 Wireless Security 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW24 Digital Signal Processor Architectures 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW25 Software Defined Radio Architecture 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW26 Wireless Multimedia Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW27 Radar Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW28 Space Time Wireless Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW29 Spread Spectrum Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW30 5G Wireless Technologies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW31 Free Space Optics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW32 Smart Antennas 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW33 Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW34 Wireless Technologies and Measuring Tools 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW35 RF MEMS 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW36 Computational Electromagnetics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LW37 EMC Testing and Measurements 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
204
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER – I
18LW01/18LC01 APPLIED MATHEMATICS

2203
RANDOM VARIABLES: Continuous, Discrete and Mixed random variables, cumulative distribution function - joint distribution-
marginal distribution - conditional distribution –statistical independence. (8+7)
EXPECTATION AND ESTIMATION: Moments, central moments – mean, variance, Chebyshev and Schwarz inequatlities, Chernoff
bound, auto correlation, cross – correlation, covariance, characteristic functions, central limit theorem. (8+7)
RANDOM PROCESSES: Classification of Random processes, Poisson process, stationary process, wide sense stationary process,
cross correlation, White Gaussian process, linear filter. (8+7)
VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces and subspaces – linear independence - basis and dimension, inner product space -
orthonormal bases - Gram-Schmidt process, linear transformations - change of basis - inverse linear transformation, eigenvalues
and eigenvectors. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
2. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and Its Applications”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017.
4. H. Stark and J.W. Woods, “Probability and Random Process with Applications to Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2012.
5. Roy D.Yates and David J Goodman, “Probability and Stochastic Processes - A Friendly Introduction for Electrical and
Computer Engineers”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
18LW02/18LC03 ADANCED DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

3003
SIGNALING THROUGH AWGN CHANNEL: Review of Signal Representation and Optimum Receivers, Definitions for SER, BER,
SNR, average symbol energy, bit energy and Eb/No, decision boundary and decision regions for AWGN model with/without equal
prior probability, Exact symbol error probability for several linear modulation schemes (ASK, FSK, PSK and QAM), union bound
argument, Chernoff bound. (15)
SIGNALING THROUGH BANDLIMITED CHANNELS: Nyquist criterion for zero ISI, Sync and Raised cosine pulse shaping,
controlled ISI using duobinary signals. (6)
SIGNALING THROUGH DISTORTING CHANNELS: ISI, Zero forcing equalization, Linear MMSE equalizers, Decision Feedback
Equalizer, Fractionally Spaced Equalizer – Introduction to Adaptive Equalization. (6)
BLOCK MODULATION SCHEMES: single carrier, multicarrier, cyclic prefix in the guard interval, OFDM, OFDMA, MC-CDMA,
Introduction to Generalized block modulation schemes – UMC, GFDM, IFDMA, FBMC. (9)
TIMING AND FREQUENCY SYNCHRONISATION: synchronization of baseband signals, oversampling, early late gate methods,
delay locked loop and squaring loop, carrier synchronization, PLL and Costas loop, pilot aided and decision aided approaches.
(9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. S Haykin, “Digital Communication Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
2. Proakis J.G and Salehi M “Fundamentals of Communication Systems” Pearson, 2011.
3. Lajos L Hanzo and Thomas Keller, “OFDM and MC-CDMA – A primer”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2006.
4. Bernard Sklar, "Digital Communications", Pearson Education Asia, Sixth reprint, 2005.
5. Barry S, Lee E A and Messershmitt D J, “Digital Communications”, Kluwer Academic Press, 2004.
18LW03 WIRELESS NETWORKS

3003
WIRELESS PAN and LAN: Introduction to Bluetooth, Protocol Stack, Network Connection Establishment, Network topology,
Bluetooth applications, Zigbee technology.
Introduction to Wireless LANs, WLAN Equipment, Topologies, and Technologies. IEEE802.11 : Architecture and Services, Physical
Layer, Data Link Layer, MAC sub layer, IEEE 802.16 WiMAX: Roadmap, physical layer, MAC layer and spectrum allocation. (12)
WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORKS: GSM: Evolution for data, 3G wireless systems, UMTS – Network architecture, CODEC,
bearer service and QoS. CDMA: CDMA 2000 layering structure, forward link features, reverse link physical channels, WCDMA,
evolution of IS 95 to CDMA 2000, IMT 2000, HSPA, HSPA+, LTE and LTE advanced. (12)
ADHOC WIRELESS NETWORKS: Characteristics of Adhoc Networks, Classifications of MAC Protocols - Table driven and Source
initiated On Demand routing protocols, DSDV, AODV, DSR and Hybrid Protocols. (11)
205
59th ACM 09.06.2018
FOURTH GENERATION SYSTEMS AND TECHNOLOGIES: 4G vision, features and challenges, applications, 4G technologies:
Multicarrier modulation, smart antenna techniques, OFDM – MIMO systems, Adaptive modulation and coding with time slot
scheduler, BLAST system, SDR and cognitive radio. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vijay K Garg, “Wireless Communication and Networking”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2010.
2. Dharma Prakash Agrawal and Qing-An Zeng, "Introduction to wireless mobile systems" Thomson India, 2007.
3. Siva Ram Murthy C and Manoj B S, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols”, Prentice Hall, 2004.
18LW04 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESIGN

3204
PATH LOSS, SHADOWING AND MULTIPATH CHANNEL MODELS: Free-Space Path Loss, Two-Ray Model, Simplified Path
Loss, Shadow Fading, Path Loss and Shadowing, Cell Coverage Area, Time-Varying Channel Impulse, Narrowband fading models,
Autocorrelation, Cross Correlation, and Power Spectral Density, Envelope and Power Distributions, Level Crossing Rate and
Average Fade Duration, Wideband Fading Models, Jakes Model, Power Delay Profile, Coherence Bandwidth, Doppler Power
Spectrum and Channel Coherence- Capacity in AWGN, Flat Fading, Selective Fading Channels. (12+8)
BER ANALYSIS OF WIRELESS CHANNELS: BER: Error Probability for BPSK, QPSK and QAM in AWGN Channel, BER analysis
of Fading Channels – Outage Probability, Average Probability of Error, Moment generating function approach to average error
probability, Combined outage and average error probability. (12+8)
ERROR CONTROL CODING: Linear block codes - Polynomial representation of codes - Cyclic codes - Convolutional codes -
Viterbi decoding algorithm – Other decoding methods of convolutional codes, Galois fields, BCH codes, Reed Solomon codes,
Interleaving and Concatenated codes, Turbo codes, Low- Density Parity-Check codes. (9+6)
WIRELESS SYSTEM DESIGN: Cellular System Design, Frequency Reuse in Cellular Systems, Co-channel Interference and its
impacts, Erlang-D formula, Trunking efficiency, MIMO, Receiver Sensitivity, Link Budget, Noise Figure, Radio Planning, Wireless
Communication System Design Flow, Design Considerations - High Level View of Wireless Communication Systems, 4G Physical
Layer Systems, Case Studies from 4G Communication System. (12+8)
Total L: 45+ T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Pathloss with/without Shadowing

 Frequency Reuse
 Flat Fading
 Frequency Selective Fading.
REFERENCES:
1. Haesik Kim, “Wireless Communications System Design”, John Wiley & Sons, 2015
2. Andreas F Molisch , “Wireless Communications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
3. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2007.
4. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communications”, Pearson Education, Asia , New Delhi, 2009
5. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
18LW05/18LC05 COMMUNICATION ALGORITHMS ON FPGA

3204
VERILOG HDL: HDL overview - Modules and ports - compiler directives - data types - operands and operators - gate level modeling
- data flow modeling - behavioral modeling - structural modeling – primitives-Tasks and functions - Writing test bench – Timing
issues. (11+8)
Implementation – FPGA Architectures – Xilinx – Altera Flex – FPGA implementation issues. (11+6)
DSP ALGORITHMS ON FPGA: Fixed and Floating point arithmetic - Design of Binary Adders, Multipliers, Dividers and MAC unit -
Design of FIR Filters – Design of IIR Filters – DFT and FFT Algorithms, Approximate DSP algorithms. (11+8)
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION MODULES ON FPGA: Error Control Coders and decoders, encryption, scrambling, LMS Algorithm for
channel estimation/equalization, pulse shaping, interpolation, decimation, CORDIC implementations, Numerically controlled
oscillator and SDR. (12+8)
Total L: 45+ T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Design and implementation of FFT and IFFT algorithm.
 Design and implementation of programmable PN sequence generator.
 Implementation of Universal Modulator and Demodulator using CORDIC
 OFDM Transmitter implementation using model based design.
206
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Roger Woods, John Mc Allister, GayeLightbody and Ying yi, “FPGA Based Implementation of Signal Processing Systems”,
Wiley, 2008.
2. James Tsui, “Digital Techniques for Wideband Receivers”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2005.
3. Uwe Meyer Baese, “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays”, Springer, 2004.
4. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall, 2003.
5. Jeffrey H Reed, “Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering”, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
18LW51 WIRELESS NETWORKS LABORATORY

0042
 Networking commands (Windows and LINUX)

 Packet and protocol analysis using Wireshark
 Performance analysis of MAC and Routing protocols (RIP and OSPF) using NS2/ NS3
 Study and performance of CSMA / CA using NS2 / NS3
 Performance analysis of Networks with and with out packet latency
 Mapping of IP packet with LTE packet
Total P :60
SEMESTER – II
18LW06/18LC30 RADIATING SYSTEMS

3003
ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS: Antenna parameters, Radiation integrals, Radiation from surface and line current distributions,
monopole, loop antenna; Mobile phone antenna - hand set antenna - base station antenna-Radiation Hazards. (6)
RADIATION FROM WIRE AND APERTURE ANTENNAS: Radiated fields of infinitesimal and half wave dipole,; Introduction to
numerical techniques, Field equivalence principle, Radiation from Rectangular and Circular apertures, Uniform aperture distribution
on an infinite ground plane; Slot antenna; Horn antenna; Reflector antenna, aperture blockage and design consideration. (12)
ARRAY ANTENNA: Linear array –uniform array, end fire and broad side array, gain, beam width, side lobe level; Two dimensional
uniform array; Phased array, beam scanning, grating lobe, feed network, Linear array synthesis techniques – Binomial and
Chebyshev distributions. (9)
MICRO STRIP ANTENNA: Radiation Mechanism and Excitation techniques : Microstrip dipole; Patch: Rectangular patch, Circular
patch, and Ring antenna – radiation analysis from cavity model; input impedance of rectangular and circular patch antenna;
Microstrip array and feed network; Applications of microstrip array antenna. (9)
EMC ANTENNA AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS: Concept of EMC measuring antenna; Tx and Rx antenna factors; Log
periodic dipole, Bi-conical, Ridge guide, Multi turn loop; Antenna measurement and instrumentation – Gain, Impedance and antenna
factor measurement; Antenna test range Design. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Balanis A, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2015.
2. Krauss J D, “Antennas”, John Wiley and sons, New York, 2008.
3. Stutzman W L and Thiele G A, “Antenna Theory and Design”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 1998.
4. Bahl I J and Bhartia P, “Microstrip Antennas”, Artech House,Inc.,1980
18LW07 RF AND MICROWAVE CIRCUIT DESIGN

3003
PASSIVE COMPONENTS AND TRANSMISSION LINE ANALYSIS: High frequency Resistors, Capacitor and Inductors –
Transmission Line Analysis and its types –Smith Chart-Impedance transformation- single and multiport networks – network
parameters –RF Filter design – definition-RF Filter Resonator and filter- configuration -- properties - Butterworth and Chebyshev
filters. Design of microstrip filters. (12)
207
59th ACM 09.06.2018
MATCHING NETWORKS AND PASSIVE DEVICES: Matching with lumped Elements – quarter wave transformer- Design of T and
 matching network- Matching by micro strip line -Stub matching. Single stub matching – Double stub matching. Basic properties of
dividers and couplers – T Junction Power divider – Wilkinson Power divider – Quadrature Hybrid – Coulped line Directional Coupler.
(9)
LINEAR AND LOW NOISE MICROWAVE AMPLIFER: Introduction power gain definitions- neutralization- unilateral transducer
RF circuit stability considerations- bilateral RF amplifier design for maximum small operating gain - design for maximum linear
output power . Noise in RF/Microwave circuits- available gain design technique- Smith chart based graphical design aids-
broadband amplifiers. (12)
ACTIVE MICROWAVE DEVICES AND THEIR MODELLING: Model- two port devices models-high power amplifiers- Nonlinear
circuit simulation techniques- Classification of nonlinear circuit simulators- harmonic - balance method Harmonic balance
analysis of oscillators- mixers– Overview of mixers -- frequency multipliers-doublers. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David M Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons, 2011.
2. Reinhold Ludwig and Pavel Bretchko, "RF Circuit Design: Theory and Applications”, Pearson Education, 2011.
3. Rowan Gilmore and Les Besser, “Practical RF Circuit Design for Modern Wireless Systems”, Vol II, Passive Circuit and
Systems, Artech house, London, 2003.
18LW08 FILTER DESIGN ON DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR

3204
TMS320C6x PROCESSOR: Evolution of DSP Processor. Architecture of the C6X Processor – Instruction Set – DSP Development
System: Introduction-DSP Starter Kit Support Tools- Code Composer studio – Support files – programming – TMS320C6748 DSP
Development Kit-Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications-Multichannel Audio Serial Port –OMAP-L138 Development
system-Programming Examples Using C Code. Review of signal processing – Z-Transform - relationships between system
representations - FIR and IIR Systems, Application programs for processing real time signals. (9+6)
MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING: Representation of discrete time signals – down sampling – up sampling - Noble identities –
cascading sampling rate convertors - Decimation with transversal filters – interpolation with transversal filters – decimation with
polyphase filters – interpolation with polyphase filters – decimation and interpolation with rational sampling factors - multistage
implementation of sampling rate convertors. (12+8)
FILTER BANKS AND MULTICARRIER TECHNOLOGIES: Two channel filter banks - QMF filter banks - Perfect Reconstruction
Filter banks - Filter banks with tree structure and parallel structure – Filter Bank based Multicarrier Technologies – Principles of
FBMC Transmission –FBMC Transceiver Design – Pulse Design – Orthogonal Multiple carrier Data transmission – Practical FBMC
System Design Issues. (12+8)
ADAPTIVE FILTERS: Applications – System identification – Inverse modeling – Prediction - Interference Cancellation - Adaptive
linear combiner – Performance function – Gradient and Minimum Mean Square error – Gradient search by the method of steepest
descent – LMS algorithm – convergence of LMS algorithm – Learning curve – Misadjustment. (12+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 FIR and IIR Filter implementation using digital signal processor.
 Time and frequency domain analysis of decimators and interpolators.
 Implementation of Filter bank systems.
 Implementation of LMS algorithm.
 DSP Processor based multirate systems and filter bank implementation.
REFERENCES:
1. Hanna B, Adrian K, and Pawel.K “Advanced Multicarrier Technologies for Future Radio Communication”, Willey, 2017.
2. Simon Haykin “Adaptive Filter Theory", Pearson education, 2013.
3. Vaidyanathan P P, “Multirate Systems and Filter banks”, Prentice Hall, 2008.
4. Hayes M H, "Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling ", Wiley, New York, 2008.
5. Rulph Chassaing, "Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713 and C6416 DSK", Willey, 2005.
18LW09/18LC09 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN AND IOT

3204
COMPONENTS OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Introduction to Embedded Systems, Embedded Design Life Cycle. Overview of ARM
Processors. Functional block diagram of ARM Cortex-A, Cortex-R and Cortex-M series controllers and its features. (8+3)
PERIPHERAL INTERFACING TECHNIQUES: Memory Management - Program Memory, Data Memory. AHB and APB Bus
Structure. GPIOs, Timer/Counters, Capture/Compare Modules, PWM, QEI, RTC, WDT, DMA, EEPROM and PLL. Serial
Peripherals: UART, I2C, SPI, CAN and USB. Hardware and Software Interrupts, Analog Peripherals: ADC, DAC and Analog
Comparators. (16+15)
INTERNET OF THINGS: Introduction, IoT protocols: MQTT and AMQP, IoT Security: AES and TLS1.2, FOTA, Consumer
Electronics IoT, Automotive IoT, Health Care IoT and Industrial IoT. (11+7)
208
59th ACM 09.06.2018
CLOUD AND APP FACILITIES FOR IoT: Amazon Web Services Cloud (AWS), MS Azure, IBM Bluemix, Carriots and Thing
Speak, GE predix. MIT App Inventor and Android App Development tools. (10+5)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Simple problems simulation using IDE
 Smart Sensors Interfacing
 Experimenting Serial Communication Protocols
 Remote Monitoring and Control through Web Browser using WiFi
 Cloud based Data Analysis.
REFERENCES:
1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijai Madisetti “Internet of Things: A Hands-on Approach”, Bahga & Madisetti, 2014.
2. Jonathan W. Valvano, “Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing to Arm(r) Cortex -M Microcontrollers: Volume 2”, Create
Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2012.
3. Jonathan W. Valvano, “Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing to Arm(r) Cortex -M Microcontrollers: Volume 1”, Create
Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2011.
4. Steve Furber,” ARM System-on-Chip Architecture”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009.
5. Arnold S. Berger, “Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction to Processes, Tools, and Techniques” CMP Books, 2002.
6. Tiva TM4C123GH6PM Microcontroller Datasheet.
18LW52 RF SYSTEM DESIGN USING EDA TOOLS LABORATORY

0042
 Design, simulation and analysis of transmission line and impedance matching networks WLAN Application.
 Design, implementation and fabrication of micro strip Filters, coupler and Patch Antenna for GSM /ISM Band Application
using ADS.
 Design, simulation and analysis of oscillators/mixers for RF Applications.
 Implementation and analysis of Stepped impedance and Open/Short circuited stub Micro strip Filter for RF Applications
and its Field distribution Analysis using 3D structural simulator.
 Implementation and analysis of micro strip Patch Antenna for GSM & ISM Application and its Radiation Pattern & Field
distribution Analysis using 3D structural simulator.
Total P :60
18LW61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Total P : 60
SEMESTER –III
18LW53 WIRELESS SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
 Design and implementation of subband coding Filter Bank Systems using FPGA.
 Design and implementation of Convolutional Coder Using FPGA.
 Performance analysis of Raised cosine PAM Signal, Multilevel M-ary PAM signal in an optimum receiver using System
Vue.
209
59th ACM 09.06.2018
 Generation of M-ary PSK signals and its performance analysis for the optimum Receiver in AWGN environment using
System Vue.
 Design and implementation of OFDM and FBMC Systems using SystemVue.
 Single mode Fiber optic Link extension using Fiber Cleaver and Fusion Splicer.
 Fault diagnosis of Fiber optic Cable link using optical Time domain Reflectometer.
Total P: 60
18LW71 PROJECT WORK-I

0063
Total P: 90
IV SEMESTER
18LW72 PROJECT WORK –II

0 0 28 14


Total P: 420
18LW21 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS

2 2 0 3
INTRODUCTION: Challenges for wireless sensor networks, Comparison of sensor network with ad hoc network, Single node
architecture, Hardware components, Energy consumption of sensor nodes, Network architecture, Sensor network scenarios, Design
principles. (8+6)
SENSOR LOCALIZATION AND TIME SYNCHRONIZATION: Localization and positioning: Possible approaches, single hop
localization, positioning in multihop environments. Time synchronization: Time synchronization problem, protocols based on sender
to receiver and receiver to receiver synchronization in WSN. (8+6)
MAC AND ROUTING PROTOCOLS: Fundamentals of wireless MAC protocols, low duty cycle protocols and wakeup concepts,
contention-based protocols, Schedule-based protocols. ROUTING PROTOCOLS - Gossiping and agent-based unicast forwarding,
Energy-efficient unicast, Broadcast and multicast, geographic routing, Data centric routing, Data aggregation. (8+10)
SENSOR NETWORK PROGRAMMING: Programming Challenges in Wireless Sensor Networks, Tiny Operating System, Contiki
OS, Event-Driven Programming, Techniques for Protocol Programming. Simulators: GloMosim, Sensor Sim, ToSSIM and Power
TOSSIM.
(6+8)
TOTAL L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Basics of WSN programming
 Sensing data using WSN motes
 Simulation with RTOS (TOSSIM)
 Dissemination and over the air programming
210
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Sitharama Iyengar S, Nandan Parmeshwaran, Balkrishnan N and Chuka D, “Fundaments of Sensor Network Programming,
Applications and Technology”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
2. Fei Hu and Xiaojun Cao, “Wireless Sensor Networks Principles and Practice”, CRC Press, 2010.
3. Jean Philippe Vasseur and Adam Dunkels, “Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP, The Next Internet”, Morgan Kaufmann,
Elsevier, 2010.
4. Holger Karl and Andreas willig, “Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Willey Publication, Oct 2007.
5. Feng zhao and Leonidas guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks: an Information Processing Approach”, Elsevier Publication,
2004.
18LW22 OPTICAL NETWORKS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to WDM and TDM: Wireless Optical Systems; Key Optical Nodes; Evolution of Optical Systems;
Key attributes and characteristics of Optical Fiber; The Telecommunications Infrastructure; Timing and Synchronization. (7)
OTN AND MPLS: OTN - Architecture, Digital wrappers, Control Planes, Layered model, Encapsulation and Decapsulation
operations, Generic Framing Procedure, MPLs – Labels and forwarding, QoS, signaling and routing and carrier transport (11)
WDM AND OPTICAL NETWORKS: WDM-DWDM-operations, components. Network topologies, protection schemes, robustness,
diversity, 1: N protection channel sharing, BLSR, PONs and Metro Optical networking. MPLS and optical networks, Label switching,
Lambda switching, Traffic Engineering. (9)
LMP AND OPTICAL ROUTERS: LMP - Link up, LMP messages, connectivity, Fault management. Optical Routers - switching,
preferences, OSP, LSP, load increase, technologies, MEMS, Thermo, bubble, Granularity of Labels. (9)
OPTICAL INTERNETS: ATM vs. IP in optical internets: IP over ATM & SONET, OSI internet layered model, Encapsulation & its
methods, PPP packet, ATM vs. IP debate. Optical Internets: Evolution to 3G architecture, Migration to IP networking, IP subnets,
non-optical nodes, routing tables. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Uyless Black, “Optical Networks-Third Generation Transport Systems”, Pearson Education, 2012.
2. Rajiv Ramasami Kumar and Sivarajan N, “Optical Networks : A Practical Perspective”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011 .
3. Siva Ram Murthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks-Concept, Design and Algorithms”, Prentice-Hall of India
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2011.
4. Vivek Alwayn, “Optical Network Design and Implementation”, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Stamatious V Kartalopoulos, “Understanding SONET/SDH and ATM-communications networks for the next millennium”, PHI
India, 1999.
18LW23 WIRELESS SECURITY

3003
WIRELESS THREATS: Introduction to wireless technologies-Wireless data networks-Personal Area Networks - Kinds of security
breaches- Eavesdropping-Communication Jamming - RF interference -Covert wireless channels –DOS attack - Spoofing-Theft of
services-Traffic Analysis-Cryptographic threats-Wireless security Standards. (9)
CRYPTOGRAPHY: Encryption and Decryption - Product ciphers-AES (advanced Encryption Standard) - Stream ciphers
,Pseudorandom number Generator, A5, RC4 - Public key cryptography-ECC (Elliptic Curve Cryptography) - Cryptography in
Embedded Hardware. (9)
WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN): Introduction to IEEE 802.11 Standard-Security Risks-WEP (wired Equivalence
Protocol)- Countermeasures –WPA(Wi- Fi Protected Access)- IEEE 802.11x-Standards-Bluetooth security. (9)
SECURITY IN WIREELSS DATA NETWORKS: Wireless Device security issues- GPRS security (General Packet Radio Service)-
GSM (Global System for Mobile Communication) security –IP-security. (9)
WIRELESS TRANSPORT LAYER SECURITY (WTLS): Secure Socket Layer-Wireless Transport Layer Security-WAP Security
Architecture-WAP Gateway. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Wolfgang Osterhage ,Wireless security, CRC press‎,2016.
2. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security, Principles and Practices”, Pearson; 7th edition, 2016.
3. Behrouz A Forouzan, “Hill Cryptography and Network Security“, McGraw, 2011.
4. Hakima Chaouchi, Maryline Laurent, Maknavicius,” Wireless and Mobile Network security”, 2010.
5. Merritt Maxim and David Pollino, “Wireless Security”,RSA press series Osborne/McGraw Hill, 2002.
6. Nichols and Lekka, “Wireless Security-Models, Threats and Solutions”, McGraw – Hill, 2002.
211
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LW24 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURES

3003
PROGRAMMABLE DSP HARDWARE: Processing Architectures (von Neumann, Harvard), DSP core algorithms (FIR, IIR,
Convolution, Correlation, FFT), IEEE standard for Fixed and Floating Point Computations, Special Architectures Modules used in
Digital Signal Processors (like MAC unit,Barrel shifters), On-Chip peripherals, DSP benchmarking. (11)
STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL CONSIDERATIONS: Parallelism in DSP processing, Texas Instruments TMS320 Digital
Signal Processor Families, Fixed Point TI DSP Processors: TMS320C1X and TMS320C2X Family,TMS320C25 –Internal
Architecture, Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Auxiliary Registers, Addressing Modes (Immediate, Direct and Indirect, Bit-reverse
Addressing), Basics of TMS320C54x and C55x Families in respect of Architecture improvements and new applications fields,
TMS320C5416 DSP Architecture, Memory Map, Interrupt System, Peripheral Devices, Illustrative Examples for assembly coding.
(12)
VLIW ARCHITECTURE: Current DSP Architectures, GPUs as an alternative to DSP Processors, TMS320C6X Family, Addressing
Modes, Replacement of MAC unit by ILP, Detailed study of ISA, Assembly Language Programming, Code Composer Studio, Mixed
Cand Assembly Language programming, On-chip peripherals, Simple applications developments as an embedded environment.
(11)
MULTI-CORE DSPS & P-DSP: Introduction to Multi-core computing and applicability for DSP hardware, Concept of threads,
introduction to P-thread, mutex and similar concepts, heterogeneous and homogenous multi-core systems, Shared Memory parallel
programming –OpenMP approach of parallel programming, PRAGMA directives, OpenMP Constructs for work sharing like for loop,
sections, TI TMS320C6678 (Eight Core subsystem). Preliminaries of HPC, MPI, OpenMP, multicore DSP as HPC infrastructure.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Fayez Gebali, “Algorithms and Parallel Computing”,1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2011
2. Ann Melnichuk,Long Talk, “Multicore Embedded systems”, 1st Edition, CRC Press, 2010.
3. M. Sasikumar, D. Shikhare, Ravi Prakash, “Introduction to Parallel Processing”, 1st Edition, PHI, 2006.
4. Wayne Wolf, “High Performance Embedded Computing: Architectures, Applications and Methodologies”, 1st Edition, Morgan
Kaufman, 2006.
5. Rohit Chandra, Ramesh Menon, Leo Dagum, David Kohr, DrorMaydan, Jeff McDonald,“Parallel Programming in OpenMP”, 1st
Edition, Morgan Kaufman, 2000.
18LW25 SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO ARCHITECTURE

INTRODUCTION: Software Defined Radio- SDR concepts & history,- Characteristics and Benefits of Software Radio – Design
Principles of a Software Radio, Ideal SDR architecture, SDR Based End-to-End Communication. (9)
ARCHITECTURE AND STANDARDISATION OF SDR: Signal Processing Architectures - GPP-Based SDR, FPGA-Based SDR,
Architecture for FPGA-Based SDR, Hybrid and Multi-FPGA Architectures, Hardware Acceleration, Multi-Channel SDR; SDR
Standardization - Software Communications Architecture – JTRS, STRS, Physical Layer Description and Data Formats. (10)
RF SYSTEM DESIGN: Introduction- Principal Challenge of Receiver Design - Enhanced Flexibility of the RF Chain with Software
Radios - Noise and Channel Capacity, Transmitter RF Architectures - Receiver RF Front End Architectures, State-of-the-Art SDR
Components - SDR Using Test Equipment, SDR Using COTS Components. (9)
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE CENTRIC SDR PLATFORMS: Hardware platforms for SDR – Universal Software Radio
Peripheral, Wireless open Access Research platform, RTL SDR receiver. Software platforms for SDR- GNU Radio, Open-Source
SCA Implementation: Embedded, Other All-Software Radio Frameworks and Front End for Software Radio. (9)
APPLICATIONS OF SDR: Cognitive Radio and Intelligent Wireless Adaptation – Wireless Device Parameters, Vehicular
Communication Networks – VDSA overview, Transmitter and Receiver design, VDSA Test bed Implementation, Satellite
Communication. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Eugene Grayver, “Implementing Software Defined Radio”, Springer, 2013.
2. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Di Pu, “Digital Communication Systems Engineering with Software-Defined Radio”, Artech House,
2013.
3. Jeffrey H Reed, “Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering”, PEA Publication, 2002.
4. Walter Tuttle bee, “Software Defined Radio: Enabling Technologies”, Wiley Publications, 2002.
18LW26 WIRELESS MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION

3003
INTRODUCTION: Stream characteristics for Continuous media – Temporal Relationship – Object Stream Interactions, Media
Levity, Media Synchronization – Models for Temporal Specifications – Streaming of Audio and Video – Jitter – Fixed playout
and Adaptive layout – Recovering from packet loss – RTSP –– Multimedia Communication Standards – RTP/RTCP – SIP and
H.263. (9)
212
59th ACM 09.06.2018
QOS FOR MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION: End to End QoS provisioning in Wireless Multimedia Networks – Adaptive
Framework – MAC layer QoS enhancements in Wireless Networks – A Hybrid MAC protocol for Multimedia Traffic – Call Admission
Control in Wireless Multimedia Networks – A Global QoS Management for Wireless Networks. (9)
GUARANTEED SERVICE MODEL: Best Effort service model – Scheduling and Dropping policies – Network Performance
Parameters – Quality of Service and metrics – WFQ and its variants – Random Early Detection – QoS aware Routing – Admission
Control -Resource Reservation – RSVP -Traffic Shaping Algorithms – Caching – Laissez Faire Approach - Possible Architectures –
An Overview of QoS Architectures. (9)
MULTIMEDIA DATABASES: Audio Databases - A General Model of Audio Data - Capturing Audio Content through Discrete
Transformation - Indexing Audio Data. Video Databases - Organizing Content of a Single Video - Querying Content of Video
Libraries – Video Segmentation. (9)
MEDIA ON DEMAND AND APPLICATIONS: Storage and Media servers, Voice and video over IP, MPEG -2 over ATM / IP,
indexing, synchronization of requests, recording and control. MIME, Peer – to – Peer Computing, shared application, Video
conferencing, centralized and distributed conference control, Distributed virtual reality, Light weight sessions philosophy. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kurose and Ross, “Computer Networks : A Top Down Approach’, Pearson Education, 2013
2. Mahbub Hassan and Raj Jain, “High Performance TCP/IP Networking”, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. Jean Warland and Pravin Vareya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Morgan Kauffman Publishers, 2002
4. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internets: Performance and Quality of Service”, Pearson Education, 2002.
5. Nalin K Sharda, “Multimedia Information Networking”, Prentice Hall of India, 1999.
18LW27 RADAR COMMUNICATION

3003
INTRODUCTION TO RADAR: Basics of radar, EM Waves & properties- applications of radar, radar frequencies-radar block
diagram, Radar Coordinates, Radar equation for hard targets and the SNR-radar cross section of targets, Radar Resolution
Elements, Pulse, CW and FMCW Radars–configurations, transmitter power- pulse repetition frequency, Duty Ratio, Pulse
Compression, Coding. (9)
DETECTION OF SIGNALS IN NOISE AND RADAR SIGNALS: Introduction to Noise in detail, probability density functions –
probabilities of detection and false alarm-matched filter receiver-detection criteria – integration of radar pulses - constant-false alarm
rate receivers - Radar Wave forms, Pulse Compression, Ambiguity Diagram. (9)
RADAR TRANMIMTTER AND RECEIVER: Introduction- Types of Transmitters - linear-beam power tubes- solid-state RF power
sources- magnetron- Klystron, crossed-filed amplifier- radar receiver- receiver noise figure- super heterodyne receiver, Digital
Receivers, duplexers and receiver protectors- radar displays-Human Machine Interface (HMI). (9)
RADAR ANTENNA: Functions of radar antenna- antenna parameters- antenna radiation pattern and aperture illumination - reflector
antennas- electronically steered phased array antennas- phase shifters – frequency - scan arrays-- architectures for phased arrays ,
radiators for phased arrays- mechanically steered planar array antennas- radiation pattern synthesis -effect of errors on radiation
patterns - low side lobes antennas. (9)
MTI AND PULSE DOPPLER RADAR: Introduction to Doppler and MTI radar- delay –line cancellers- staggered pulse repetition
frequencies- doppler filter banks- digital MTI processing - Moving target detector- limitations to MTI performance- pulse Doppler
radar-MTD, Tracking radar- monopulse tracking- conical scan and sequential lobing- comparison of trackers. tracking accuracy-
low-angle tracking- Atmospheric & Weather Radars: Precipitation Radars, Doppler Weather Radar, Polarimetric Radar, Clear Air
Radars. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Richards M A, Scheer J A and Holm W A, “Principles of Modern Radar”, Yes Dee Publishing Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
2. Merril I Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, Mc Graw-Hill, 2008.
3. Bringi V N and Chandrasekar V, “Polarimetric Doppler Weather Radar “, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
4. Richard J Doviak and Dusan S Zrnic, “Doppler Radar and Weather Observations”, Dover Publications, 1993.
18LW28 SPACE TIME WIRELESS COMMUNICATION

3003
MULTIPLE ANTENNA PROPAGATION AND ST CHANNEL CHARACTERIZATION: Wireless channel: free space, fixed
transmitting and receive antennas - free space, moving antenna - reflecting wall, fixed antenna - reflecting wall, moving antenna -
reflection from a ground Plane, Scattering model in macrocells, Channel as a ST random field, Scattering functions, Polarization and
field diverse channels, Antenna array topology, Degenerate channels, reciprocity and its implications, Channel definitions, Physical
scattering model, Extended channel models, Channel measurements, sampled signal model, ST multiuser and ST interference
channels, ST channel estimation. (9)
CAPACITY OF MULTIPLE ANTENNA CHANNELS: Capacity of frequency flat deterministic MIMO channel: Channel unknown to
the transmitter, Channel known to the transmitter, capacity of random MIMO channels, Influence of ricean fading, fading correlation,
XPD and degeneracy on MIMO capacity, Capacity of frequency selective MIMO channels. (9)
213
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SPATIAL DIVERSITY: Diversity gain, Receive antenna diversity, Transmit antenna diversity, Diversity order and channel variability,
Diversity performance in extended channels, Combined space and path diversity, Indirect transmit diversity, Diversity of a space-
time- frequency selective fading channel. (9)
MULTIPLE ANTENNA CODING AND RECEIVERS: Coding and interleaving architecture, ST coding for frequency flat channels, ST
coding for frequency selective channels, Receivers(SISO,SIMO,MIMO),Iterative MIMO receivers, Exploiting channel knowledge at
the transmitter: linear pre-filtering, optimal pre-filtering for maximum rate, optimal pre-filtering for error rate minimization, selection at
the transmitter, Exploiting imperfect channel knowledge. (9)
ST OFDM, SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MIMO MULTIUSER DETECTION: SISO-OFDM modulation, MIMO-OFDM modulation,
Signaling and receivers for MIMO- OFDM,SISO-SS modulation, MIMO-SS modulation, Signaling and receivers for MIMO- S.MIMO-
MAC,MIMO-BC, Outage performance for MIMO-MU,MIMO-MU with OFDM,CDMA and multiple antennas. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
2. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
3. Paulraj A, Rohit Nabar and Dhananjay Gore, “Introduction to Space Time Wireless Communication Systems”, Cambridge
University Press, 2003.
4. Sergio Verdu, “Multi User Detection”, Cambridge University Press, 2003
5. Andre Viterbi, “Principles of Spread Spectrum Techniques”, Pearson, 1995.
18LW29 SPREAD SPECTRUM COMMUNICATION

3003
INTRODUCTION TO SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS: Communication in the presence of pulse noise jamming - Low probability
detection scheme -Direct sequence spread spectrum methods - Frequency Hop spread spectrum methods - Hybrid DS/FH spread
spectrum - Complex envelope representation of spread spectrum systems - examples of Spread Spectrum Systems (9)
MULTICARRIER SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS: Amalgamating DS-CDMA and OFDM - Multi-Carrier CDMA techniques – MC
CDMA – MC DS CDMA – MT CDMA (8)
BINARY SHIFT REGISTER SEQUENCES FOR SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS: Definition - PN sequence generator
fundamentals - Maximal length sequences - Properties, Power spectrum and Polynomial tables for maximal length sequences -
Gold codes - Rapid Acquisition systems - Non-linear code generators. (9)
SYNCHRONIZATION OF SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS: Optimal tracking of wideband signals - Early-late tracking loops -
Code tracking loops for FHSS - Optimum synchronization techniques - Multiple dwell and sequential detectors - Synchronization
using a matched filter - Synchronization by estimating the received spreading code. (10)
PERFORMANCE OF SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEM: SS Systems communications models - Performance without coding under
AWGN and different jamming environments - spread spectrum systems performances with forward error correction - Block coding -
Convolutional coding and specific error correcting codes - Inter leaving - Random coding bounds. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hanzo L and Keller T, “OFDM and MC-CDMA: A Primer”, John Wiley and sons Ltd., 2006.
2. Peterson R L, Ziemer R E and Borth D E, “Introduction to Spread Spectrum Communications”, Prentice Hall, 2005.
3. Dixon R C, “Spread Spectrum Systems with Commercial Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 1994.
4. Ziemer R E and Peterson R L, "Digital Communication and Spread Spectrum Systems", Macmillan Publishing Co., 1985.
5. Holms J K, "Coherent Spread Spectrum Systems", Wiley Interscience, 1982.
18LW30 5G WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES

3003
INTRODUCTION AND ROADMAP TO 5G: Historical trend and evolution of LTE technology to beyond 4G – Key building blocks of
5G – 5G use cases and System Concepts – The 5G Architecture – IoT: relation to 5G. (8)
RF FRONT END FOR 5G: Millimeter Wave Communications: Hardware technologies for mmW systems – Architecture and
Mobility – Massive MIMO: Resource allocation and transceiver algorithms for massive MIMO - Fundamentals of baseband and RF
implementations in massive MIMO - Beamforming.
(9)
5G WAVEFORMS AND CHANNEL MODELS: 5G Radio Access Technologies: Design principles - Multi-carrier with filtering - Non-
orthogonal Multiple Access - Radio access for dense deployments – Radio Access for V2X Communication - Radio access for
massive machine-type communication - 5G wireless propagation channel models: Modelling requirements and scenarios - The
METIS channel models. (10)
NETWORKING IN 5G: Coordinated multi-point transmission in 5G: Joint Transmission CoMP enablers - Distributed cooperative
transmission - JT CoMP with advanced receivers - Relaying and network coding in 5G: Multi-flow wireless backhauling - Buffer-
aided relaying. (9)
214
59th ACM 09.06.2018
EVALUATION OF 5G AND 5G APPLICATIONS: Machine-type communications: Fundamental techniques for MTC - Massive MTC
- Ultra-reliable low-latency MTC - Device-to-device (D2D) communications - Multi-hop D2D communications - Multi-operator D2D
communication - Simulation methodology: Evaluation methodology – Calibration - New challenges in the 5G modelling. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Wei Xiang, Kan Zheng, Xuemin (Sherman) Shen, - 5G Mobile Communications, Springer, 2017.
2. Afif Osseiran, Jose F. Monserrat and Patrick Marsch, - 5G Mobile and Wireless Communications Technology, Cambridge
3. Jonathan rodriguez, - Fundamentals of 5G mobile networks, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2015.
18LW31 FREE SPACE OPTICS

3003
FUNDAMENTALS OF FSO TECHNOLOGY: Introduction – Maxwell’s equations- Electromagnetic Wave Propagation in free space -
Alternate Bandwidth technologies - fiber Vs FSO- fiber access - Overview of FSO optical transmitters- receivers-subsystems-
pointing, acquisition and tracking – line of sight analysis. (12)
FSO NETWORKS: The role of FSO in the network- factors affecting FSO line of sight- selecting transmission wave integration of
FSO in optical networks- installation of FSO systems- Moving towards edge and residential areas. (10)
LONG DISTANCE FSO COMMUNICATION: The FSO model - applications- system descriptions and design- introduction to laser
satellite communications- characteristics, modulation techniques and radiation effects – laser sources. (11)
OPTICAL COMPONENTS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING: Optical waveguides- optical filters, couplers, amplifiers, switches,
antennas, interconnecting equipments- optical integrated circuits- semiconductor integrated optic devices.
Analog and Discrete systems- noise and stochastic processes- filters- power spectra estimation – The ambiguity function, Wigner
distribution function and triple correlation. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Pankaj K Das, “Optical Signal Processing”, Narosa Publishing House, 2012
2. Olivier Bouchet, ‎,nuziS evreH‎naitsirhCBoisrobert, "Free-Space Optics" ISTE USA, 2010.
3. Heinz and Willebrand, “Free Space Optics”, Sams, 2002.
4. William H Mott and Robert B Sheldo, “Laser Satellite Communication- The Third Generation”, Green Wood Publishing, 2000.
5. Hiroshi Nishihara, “Optical Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1989.
18LW32 SMART ANTENNAS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Antenna gain, Phased array antenna, power pattern, beam steering, degree of freedom, optimal antenna,
adaptive antennas, smart antenna - key benefits of smart antenna technology, wide band smart antennas, Digital radio receiver
techniques and software radio for smart antennas. (9)
NARROW BAND PROCESSING: Signal model conventional beamformer, null steering beamformer, optimal beamformer,
Optimization using reference signal, beam space processing. (8)
ADAPTIVE PROCESSING: Sample matrix inversion algorithm, unconstrained LMS algorithm, normalized LMS algorithm,
Constrained LMS algorithm, Perturbation algorithms, Neural network approach, Adaptive beam space processing, Implementation
issues. (9)
BROADBAND PROCESSING: Tapped delay line structure, Partitioned realization, Derivative constrained processor, Digital beam
forming, Broad band processing using DFT method. (9)
DIRECTION OF ARRIVAL ESTIMATION METHODS: Spectral estimation methods, linear prediction method, Maximum entropy
method, Maximum likelihood method, Eigen structure methods, Music algorithm – root music and cyclic music algorithm, the
ESPRIT algorithm. DIVERSITY COMBINING: Spatial diversity selection combiner, switched diversity combiner, equal gain
combiner, maximum ratio combiner, optical combiner. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert A Monzingo, Haupt R L and Miller T W, “Introduction to Adaptive Arrays”, Yesdee Publishing Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
2. Balanis, “Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2005.
3. Lal Chand Godara, “Smart Antennas” CRC press, 2004.
4. Joseph C Liberti.Jr and Theodore S Rappaport, “Smart Antennas for Wireless Communication: IS-95 and Third Generation
CDMA Applications”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
215
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LW33 RADIO FREQUENCY INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DESIGN

3003
ISSUES IN RFIC DESIGN, NOISE, LINEARITY, and FILTERING: Lower frequency analog design and microwave design versus
radio frequency integrated circuit design - Impedance levels for microwave and low-frequency analog design- noise - linearity and
distortion in RF Circuits - dynamic range - filtering issue. (9)
REVIEW OF TECHNOLOGY: Small -signal model of bipolar transistor - high frequency effects - noise in bipolar transistors - base
shot noise-noise sources in the transistor model - bipolar transistor design considerations-CMOS transistor.- impedance matching -
tapped capacitors and inductors - the concept of mutual inductance - tuning a transformer - bandwidth of an impedance
transformation network-quality factor of an LC resonator. (8)
DESIGN OF PASSIVE CIRCUIT ELEMENTS IN IC TECHNOLOGIES: Technology backend and metallization in IC technologies -
sheet resistance and skin effect -parasitic capacitance and inductance -current handling in metal lines-design of inductors and
transformers - characterization of inductor-layout of spiral inductors - on-chip transmission lines - high frequency measurements of
on-chip passives and common De-Embedding techniques-packaging. (9)
LNA AND POWER AMPLIFIER: Basic amplifiers - amplifiers with feed back - noise in amplifiers - linearity in amplifiers - differential
pair and other differential amplifiers-low-voltage topologies for LNAs and the use of on-chip transformers - DC bias networks -
temperature effects - broad band LNA design. Power amplifier: power capability - efficiency calculations - matching considerations -
Class A,B,C.D.E.F,G,H and S amplifiers -summary of amplifier classes for RF Integrated circuits - AC load line - matching to
achieve desired power - packaging -effects and implications of non linearity - linearization techniques - CMOS power amplifier
example. (10)
MIXERS: Mixing with nonlinearity - basic mixer operation – controlled transconductance mixer - double- balanced mixer - mixer with
switching of upper quad - analysis of switching modulator-mixer noise - linearity - improving isolation - image reject and single -
sideband mixers-alternative mixer designs - general design comments-CMOS mixers. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. John Rogers and Calvin Plett, “Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit Design”, Artech House, 2010.
2. Ferri Losee, “RF Systems, Components and Circuits Handbook”, Artech house, 2005.
3. Stephan A Mass, “Non-Linear Microwave and RF circuits”, Artech House, 2003.
4. Larson L E, “RF and Microwave Circuit for Wireless Applications”, Artech House, 1997.
18LW34 WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES AND MEASURING TOOLS

3003
MODERN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS: Second Generation, Third Generation mobile Cellular networks – 4G, 5G,
LTE, LTE A- Cognitive Radio Technology. (6)
RF SIGNAL AND SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS: Basics of RF and Microwaves - Scattering parameters – Distribution of power –
Deterministic & Random signal Power spectral densities – Microwave passive devices –Mixers – Switches – Attenuators –
Connectors & adaptors. (9)
RF SIGNAL GENERATION: Oscillator Circuits – Direct Digital synthesis – PLL Based Synthesizers – Arbitrary waveform generator
– Vector Signal Generator - Phase frequency detector. (10)
POWER AND SCATTERING MEASUREMENTS: Power detectors and instrumentation – Primary power standards – power
measurement techniques – History of vector network analyzers – Measurement types in VNA – Two port network analyzer
calibration. (10)
RF MODULAR INSTRUMENTS: Introduction – Understanding software designed systems – Multichannel measurements –

Customized measurement systems – Instruments: Spectrum/Signal Analyser – Digital storage Oscilloscope - Mixed signal
Oscilloscopes. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ananjan Basu “An Introduction to Microwave Measurements”, CRC Press, 2015.
2. Valeria Teppati, ‎rerreF‎aerdnAo, ‎ ‎egdirbmaC‎,”seuqinhceT‎tnemerusaeM‎evaworciM‎dna‎FR‎nredoM“‎deyaS‎demahoM
.2013‎,sserP‎ytisrevinU
3. Gordon L Stuber, “Principles of Mobile Communication”, Artech House, 2011.
4. Matthew M Radmanesh “RF & Microwave Design Essentials”, Author house, 2007.
5. Hsiao-Hwa Chen and Mohsen Guizani, "Next Generation Wireless Systems and Networks”, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
216
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LW35 RF MEMS
3003
MICROELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS(MEMS) AND RADIO FREQUENCY MEMS: Introduction – Microfabrication for MEMS
– Electromechanical transducers – Microsensing for MEMS – Materials for MEMS.MEMS Materials and Fabrication Techniques-
Metals – Semiconductors – Thin films for MEMS and their deposition techniques – Materials for polymer MEMS – Bulk
micromachining for silicon-based MEMS – Silicon surface micromaching – Microstereolithography for polymer MEMS. (10)
RF MEMS SWITCHES: Introduction – Switch parameters – Basics of switching – Switches for RF and microwave applications –
Electrostatic switching – Approaches for low-actuation –voltage switches – thermal switching –MEMS switch design, modeling and
evaluation –MEMS switch design considerations. MEMS Inductors and Capacitors: Introduction – MEMS inductors –MEMS
capacitors. (10)
MICROMACHINED RF FILTERS AND PHASE SHIFTERS: Introduction – Modeling of mechanical filters - Micromechanical filters –
Micromachined phase shifters: Introduction – Types of phase shifters and their limitations – MEMS phase shifters. (9)
MICROMACHINED TRANSMISSION LINES AND COMPONENTS: Introduction – Micromachined transmission lines and
components – Design, fabrication and measurements. (8)
MICROMACHINED ANTENNA: Introduction - Overview of microstrip antenna – Micromachining techniques to improve antenna
performance – Micromaching as a fabrication process for small antenna – Micromachined reconfigurable antenna. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gabriel M Rebeiz, “RF MEMS Theory, Design and Technology “, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Vijay K Varadan, Vinoy K J and Jose K A, "RF MEMS and Their Applications“, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, England, 2003.
3. Hector J De Los Santos, “RF MEMS Circuit Design for Wireless communications”, Artech House, 2002.
18LW36 COMPUTATIONAL ELECTROMAGNETICS

3003
ELECTROMAGNETICS REVIEW: E-field, permittivity, Coulombs Law, Flux of a vector field, Gausss Law for E fields (Integral),
divergence, Gausss Law for E fields (Differential) B-field, permeability, Biot-Savart law, Gausss law for B fields (integral and
differential), Divergence Theorem, circulation of a vector field, curl, Stokes Theorem. Gradient. Laplacian. Poisson and Laplace
equations. Ampere-Maxwell Law, Faraday-Maxwell Law. Continuity equation. Constitutive equations. (9)
NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION: Forward difference, backward difference, central difference. Higher order derivatives. Partial
derivatives. Solution of Linear Systems: Matrix equivalent. Solution sets. Direct vs iterative methods. Sparse matrices. Libraries.
Gaussian Elimination. Gauss-Seidel method. Numerical Integration Riemann Sums Left/right-point rules Midpoint, trapezoid,
Simpsons rules Error bounds-Numerical Integration Examples (9)
METHOD OF MOMENTS: Greens Functions; Surface equivalence principle; Electrostatic formulation; Magnetostatic formulation;
Electric Field Integral Equation; Magnetic Field Integral Equation; Direct and Iterative Solvers; (9)
FINITE DIFFERENCE TIME DOMAIN METHODS: 1D wave propagation, yee Algorithm, Numerical dispersion and stability,
perfectly matched absorbing boundary conditions, Dispersive materials. Antenna and scattering problems with FDTD, non-uniform
grids, conformal grids, periodic structures. (10)
APPLICATIONS OF CEM: Antennas, biological electromagnetic effects, electronic packing and high speed circuits, microwave
devices and circuits, environmental issues. surveillance and intelligence gathering, homeland security, signal integrity. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Walton C Gibson, “The Method of Moments in Electromagnetics”, CRC Press, 2014.
2. Taflove A and Hagness S C, “Computational Electrodynamics: The Finite Difference Time Domain Method”, Artech ouse, 2004.
3. Andrew F Peterson, Scott L Ray and Raj Mittra, “Computational Methods for Electromagnetics”, IEEE Press Series on
Electromagnetic Wave Theory,1998.
4. Roger F Harrington, “Field Computation by Moment Methods”, IEEE Press, 1993.
18LW37 EMC TESTING AND MEASUREMENTS

2 203
NATURE AND ORIGINS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY: Introduction – Visualising the EMI problem – Source of EMI
– EMI coupling to victim equipments – Intersystem and Intrasystem EMI – Historical background –Technical disciplines and
Knowledge areas within EMC – Electrical engineering – Physics –Mathematical modeling – Limited chemical knowledge – System
engineering – Legal aspects of EMC. (8+6)
EMC STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The need for standards and specifications – The need to meet EMC standards –
Derivation of military standards – Derivation of commercial standards– Outline of EMC testing – Types of EMC testing –
Preconformance test measurements – Implication of repeatability of EMC measurements – Introduction to EMC test sensor –
Conduction and Induction couplers – Radiative coupling – EMC antennas. (7+6)
217
59th ACM 09.06.2018
MEASUREMENT DEVICES FOR CONDUCTED EMI: Introduction – Measurement by direct connection –Inductively coupled
devices – EMC antennas – Basic antenna parameters – Antennas for radiated emission testing –Wideband antennas – Magnetic
field antennas – Use of antennas for radiated susceptibility testing – Type of antennas used in susceptibility testing – Standards
requiring immunity tests. (5+6)
RECEIVERS, ANALYSERS AND MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT: Introduction – EMI receiver – Spectrum Analyzers – RF power
meter – Frequency meters – Instrumentation for susceptibility testing – Automatic EMC tests – Electromagnetic transient testing –
Transient types – Continuous and transient signal – ESD-electrostatic discharge. (5+6)
DESIGNING TO AVOID EMC PROBLEMS: Intrasystem and Intrasystem EMC – Design for formal EMC compliance – Achieving
product EMC :checklists for product development and testing – Introduction – Developing an approach to EMC design – Process
flow chart, EMC strategy – Self certification. (5+6)
Total L: 30 + T: 30=60
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Design of Mathematical Modeling for EMC.
 Measurement & Implementation of EMC testing.
 Design of conduction & induction couplers.
 Design of EMC antennas & analysis.
 Measurement of power using RF power meter.
 Design of EMC compliance.
REFERENCES:
1. Tim Williams, “EMC for Product Designers”, 5th Edition, Newnes Elsevier, 2017.
2. Clayton R. Paul “Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility”, Wiley Press, 2014.
3. David Morgan, “A Handbook for EMC Testing and Measurement”, IET Electrical Measurement, 2012.
AUDIT COURSES
18LW81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18LW82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

218
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME CONTROL SYSTEMS
(2018 REGULATIONS)

I SEMESTER
18UC01 Mathematics of Systems Engineering 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18UC02 Smart Sensors and Networks 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18UC03 Dynamical Systems and Control 4 0 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18UC04 Advanced Process Control 4 0 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18UC05 Embedded Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18UC51 Object Computing and Data Structures Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18UC81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 Hrs 16 4 4 20 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18UC06 System Identification 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18UC07 Nonlinear Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18UC08 State Estimation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18UC09 Industrial Automation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18UC_ Professional Elective – 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC52 Industrial Automation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18UC61 Industry Visit & Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18UC82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 26 Hrs 18 0 8 22 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18UC53 Advanced Control Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18UC71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18UC72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
18UC21 Adaptive Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC22 Robust Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC23 Industrial Drives and Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC24 Applied Soft Computing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC25 Robotic Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC26 Machine Vision 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC27 Optimal Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC28 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC29 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC30 Wavelets and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC31 Multi Sensor Data fusion 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC32 Sliding Mode Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC33 Fault Diagnosis and Control 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18UC34 Mathematical Methods for Process Data Analytics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
219
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18EA01/18EE01/18ED01/18EM01/18UC01 MATHEMATICS OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING

2203
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
18UC02 SMART SENSORS AND NETWORKS

3003
MICRO AND SMART SENSOR: Micro sensors and actuators: Principle, characteristics and application - Smart sensor:
construction and characteristics - Integration of Micromachining and Microelectronics - Various sensing Techniques: Capacitive
sensing, piezoelectric sensing, Hall effect - Digital output sensors: Incremental optical encoders, Digital techniques - Applications of
smart sensors - Design of signal conditioning circuit: 4 to 20 mA transmitter. (12)
SMART FIELD DEVICES AND COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS: Smart Transmitters - primary and secondary sensors -
compensation methods - Handheld communicator - Smart valve positioners - Communications Protocols: CAN protocol, LIN
protocol, FlexRay protocol - Protocols in Silicon: MCU with integrated CAN, Ethernet Controller - Industrial Ethernet. (11)
STANDARDS FOR SMART SENSING: Setting Standards for Smart Sensors and Systems - IEEE 1451 family of standards -
Network-Capable Application Processor, Network Communication Models, Smart Transducer Interface Module, Transducer
Electronic Data Sheet, Transducer-Independent Interface, Calibration/Correction Engine - Extending System to the Network (11)
WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS: Challenges in wireless sensor networks - Single node architecture - Hardware components,
energy consumption of sensor nodes - Network architecture - Sensor network scenarios: Types of sources and sinks, single hop
versus multi-hop networks, multiple sinks and sources - Design principles and applications of WSNs - Bluetooth sensor networks -
IEE 802 sensor networks. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley, 2014.
2. Randy Frank, “Understanding Smart Sensors”, Third Edition, Artech House, 2013.
3. Ananthasuresh G K, Vinoy K J, Gopalakrishnan S, Bhat K N and Aatre V K, “Micro and Smart Systems”, Wiley Publishers,
2011.
4. Gerord C M Meijer, “Smart Sensor Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008.
5. Halit Eren, “Wireless Sensors and Instruments: Networks, Design and Applications”, CRC Press, 2006.
18UC03 DYNAMICAL SYSTEMS AND CONTROL

4004
MATHEMATICAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM: Causality – Lumpedness – Linearity – Linearization- Concept of state, state
variables and state model - State space representation using physical, phase and canonical variables - Comparison of input-output
description and state variable description- MIMO systems- Discretization of a continuous time model. (15)
SOLUTION OF STATE EQUATIONS: State transition matrix – Significance – Properties – Computation, impulse response matrix -
Simulation of state space model- Solution of discrete time state equation- Solution of linear time variant systems – Discrete time
case. Transfer function from state space model- similarity transformation- decomposition of transfer functions: direct, cascade and
parallel decomposition techniques. (15)
220
59th ACM 09.06.2018
CONCEPT OF CONTROLLABILITY AND OBSERVABILITY: Kalman`s and Gilbert`s test for controllability– Pole assignment by
state feedback using Ackermann’s formula Kalman Canonical form – Controller design using output feedback – Controllability of
Discrete LTI systems – Controllability of linear time variant systems. Kalman`s and Gilbert`s test for observability - Design of full
order observer using Ackermann’s formula – Observable canonical form – Duality – Observer based controller design – Reduced
order observer design – Observability of Discrete LTI Systems – Observability of linear time variant systems (15)
STABILITY: Stability in the sense of Lyapunov, asymptotic stability of linear time invariant continuous and discrete systems –
Solution of Lyapunov equation – Disturbance rejection, sensitivity and complementary sensitivity functions, internal stability, stability
of linear time variant system. SISO Feedback Control: Feedback structures. Nominal sensitivity functions. Stability and polynomial
analysis. Nominal stability using frequency response- Relative stability: Stability margins and sensitivity peaks. Synthesis of SISO
controllers: polynomial approach. PI and PID synthesis revisited using pole assignment. Frequency-domain design limitations:
Bode's integral constraints on sensitivity. Integral constraints on complementary sensitivity. (15)
Total L: 60
REFERENCES:
1. William L Brogan, “Modern Control Theory”, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
2. Graham C Goodwin, Stefan F Graebe and Mario E Salgado, “Control System Design”, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Chen CT, “Linear System Theory and Design”, Oxford University Press, 1999.
4. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Benjamin C Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 2016.
18UC04 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL

4004
PROCESS DYNAMICS & CONTROL ACTIONS: Need for Process Control – Continuous and batch processes - Degrees of
freedom – Servo and regulator operation - Self regulation – Mathematical model of flow, level and thermal processes – Interacting
and non-interacting systems – Linearization of nonlinear systems – Characteristic of ON-OFF, P, P+I, P+D and P+I+D control
modes – Digital PID algorithm – Bumpless transfer scheme – Anti-reset windup scheme – P&ID diagrams (15)
CONTROLLER TUNING & FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT: Evaluation criteria – Tuning: Process reaction curve method,
Continuous cycling method and Damped oscillation method – Auto tuning – Pneumatic and Electric actuators – Types of control
valves – Characteristic of control valves – Control valve sizing – Cavitation and flashing (15)
COMPLEX CONTROL SCHEMES: Cascade control – Split-range control – Feed-forward control – Ratio control – Inferential control
– Override control – Adaptive control schemes – Smith predictor control scheme – Internal Model Control – IMC PID controller –
Model Predictive Control (15)
MULTI-LOOP CONTROL: Process interaction – Pairing of Inputs and Outputs – Relative Gain Array: Properties and Applications –
Multi-loop PID Controller – Biggest Log Modulus Tuning Method – Decoupling of control loops – Case study: Control schemes for
CSTR, Distillation column and Four-tank system (15)
Total L: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Stephanopoulos G, “Chemical Process Control:An Introduction to theory and Practice”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New
Delhi, 2014.
2. Donald R Coughanowr and Steven E Leblanc, “Process Systems Analysis and Control”, Tata McGraw Hill Inc., 2014.
3. Curtis D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Pearson New International Edition, 2013.
4. Wayne Bequette B. “Process Control: Modeling, Design and Simulation”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Liptak B G, “Process Control”, Butterworth - Heinemann,1999.
18UC05 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3204
INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Embedded System and its types - Recent Trends in Embedded Systems –
Architecture of Embedded Systems: Hardware Architecture – Software Architecture – Application Software – Communication
Software – Process of Generating Executable Image – Development / Testing Tools (12+9)
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT TOOLS: Types of Hardware platforms – ARM Processor – Programming for
Embedded Systems: GNU Development tools – Bit manipulation using C – Memory Management – Timing of Programs – Device
Drivers – Code Optimization – Hardware / Software Co-Design and Program Modeling - UML – Hardware/Software Trade offs
(10+8)
DIGITAL CONTROLLERS: Digital control system- Sensors and Actuators- Signal conditioning and Driver circuits- - Discretization -
Digital realization of controllers- Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Controller-Hardware implementation considerations-. Fixed
and Floating point number representation-IEEE 754-Floating point emulation-Fixed point implementation of control algorithms.
(10+8)
RTOS BASED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN: Basic concepts of RTOS – Task, Process & threads – Interrupt routines in RTOS –
Multiprocessing and Multitasking – Preemptive and non-preemptive scheduling – Task communication – Interprocess
Communication – Priority inversion – Comparison of different commercial RTOS – µC/OS-II (10+8)
Total: L: 45+T:30=75
221
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming and Design”, Tata-McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. Alexandru Forrai, “Embedded Control System Design: A Model Based Approach”, Springer, 2013.
3. Andrew N Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, “ARM System Developer’s Guide: Designing and Optimizing System
Software”, Elseiver Publishers, 2013.
4. Jonathan W Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems: Real Time Interfacing”, Cengage Learning, 2013.
5. K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded/ Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design and Programming” , Dreamtech press, 2003
18UC51 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY

0042
LABORATORY COMPONENT:
Object Computing and Data Structures Laboratory course highlights the difference between procedure oriented programming and
object oriented programming. It gives an idea about the basic concepts of OOP. After completing this course a brief knowledge
about the concepts in object-oriented programming can be obtained. This course also gives a clear understanding on Data
Structures and its type. It deals with the linear data structures and their algorithms. It explores the basic sorting techniques in data
structures with their algorithm.
Object Computing (Using C++):
Implementation of the following problems:
1. Implementation of classes and object for simple arithmetic operations.

2. Implementation of array of objects and dynamic objects.
3. Implementation of Static members.
4. Implementation of call by value, call by reference and return by reference.
5. Implementation of friend functions, inline functions and default arguments.
6. Implementation of constructors and destructors.
7. Implementation of inheritance and its types
8. Implementation of polymorphism and its types.
Data Structures (Using C or C++):
1. Program using arrays.

2. Representation of Sparse & dense Matrix using arrays.
3. Implementation of Stacks using array.
4. Application of Stack: Conversion of infix to postfix expression
5. Implementation of queue using array.
6. Implementation of Linked Lists: Singly linked, doubly linked and Circular lists and applications.
7. Implementation of various sorting algorithms.
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
2. Aaron M Tanenbaum, Moshe J Augenstein and YedidyahLangsam, "Data structures using C and C++", Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2009.
3. Harvey M Deitel,andPaul J Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2010.
4. Robert L Kruse, Bruce P Leung and Clovin L Tondo, “Data Structures and Program Design in C”, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2009
5. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007.
II SEMESTER
18UC06 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

3003
IDENTIFICATION AND MODELS: System Identification Procedure- Identifiability- Signal-to-Noise ratio- Over fitting- Models:
Definition of a model, Classification of models, Models for discrete time linear time-invariant Systems, Models for time varying
systems and nonlinear systems, Models for Linear Stationary Processes (11)
ESTIMATION METHODS: Types of estimation problems - Goodness of Estimators: Fisher information, Bias, Variance, Efficiency,
Sufficiency, Cramer-Rao’s inequality, Asymptotic bias, Mean square error, Consistenc y– Estimation methods: Method of moments
estimators- Least squares estimators- Non-linear least squares- Maximum likelihood estimators- Bayesian estimators. (11)
NON-PARAMETRIC AND PARAMETRIC MODELS FOR IDENTIFICATION: Non-parametric descriptions and parametric
descriptions - Identification of Parametric Time-Series Models: Estimation of AR models- Estimation of MA models - Identification of
Non-Parametric Input-Output Models: Impulse response estimation- Step response estimation- Estimation of frequency response
function- Identification of Parametric Input-Output Models: Prediction-error minimization (PEM) methods - Properties (12)
222
59th ACM 09.06.2018
STATE SPACE MODEL IDENTIFICATION: Informative Data- Input design for identification- Data pre-processing- Model
development- Identification of State-Space Models: Kalman filter- Foundations for subspace identification- - Subspace identification
algorithms (11)
Total: L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Kailath, Ali H Sayed and Babak Hassibi, “Linear Estimation”, Pearson, 2016.
2. Arun K Tangirala, “Principles of System Identification: Theory and practice”, CRC Press, 2014.
3. Brian Rofel and Ben Betlem, “Advanced Practical Process Control”, Springer, 2008.
4. Ljung L, “System Identification: Theory for the User”, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, Second Edition, 1999.
5. Jer Nan Juang, “Applied System Identification”, Pearson Education, 1994.
18UC07 NONLINEAR CONTROL

3003
INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIBING FUNCTION ANALYSIS: Nonlinear system behavior- Common Nonlinearities in control
systems- Autonomy. Describing Function Fundamentals -Describing functions of common nonlinearities – Describing function
analysis of nonlinear systems: Existence and stability of limit cycles. (11)
PHASE PLANE ANALYSIS AND LYAPUNOV STABILITY THEORY: Singular points - Construction of phase plane using Isocline,
delta methods - Existence of Limit cycles: Poincare index and Bendixon theorems - Stability. Concepts of Stability-Linearization and
Local Stability-Lyapunov’s Direct Method –Generation of Lyapunov functions: Krasovski’s, Lure’s and Variable Gradient Method-
Popov’s stability criterion. LaSalle's invariance principle. (12)
FEEDBACK LINEARIZATION: Method of feedback linearization-Mathematical tools: Lie derivatives, lie brackets, involutive
condition, Frobenius theorem- Input-state linearization of SISO systems- Input-output linearization of SISO Systems- Internal
dynamics and zero dynamics. (11)
SLIDING MODE CONTROL AND BACKSTEPPING CONTROL: Basic concepts of variable structure systems - Sliding surfaces-
Filippov’s construction of equivalent dynamics- Conditions for existence of sliding regions. Backstepping control- Case Study:back
stepping method for non-feedback linearizable systems . (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gopal M “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw- Hill Ltd, New Delhi, 2004.
2. Zoran Vukic, Ljubomir Kuljaca, Dali Donlagic and Sejid Tesnjak, “Nonlinear Control Systems”, Marcel Dekker Inc, 2003.
3. Horacio J Marquez, “Nonlinear Control Systems: Analysis and Design”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2003.
4. Wilfrid Peruquetti and Jean Pierre Barabot, “Sliding Mode Control in Engineering”, Marcel Dekker Inc, 2002.
5. Jean Jacques Slotine and Weiping Li, “Applied Nonlinear Control”, Prentice Hall Inc., 1991.
18UC08 STATE ESTIMATION

3003
INTRODUCTION TO STATE ESTIMATION AND KALMAN FILTER: Review of state observers for deterministic System- Least
Square Estimation - Discrete Kalman Filter- Kalman filter generalization – correlated process and measurement noise- limitations of
Kalman filter – Case Studies. (11)
NONLINEAR KALMAN FILTERS: Linearized Kalman filter – Extended Kalman filter –Second order Extended Kalman filter –
Constrained Extended Kalman filter. Unscented Kalman filter - Unscented transformation - Simplex unscented transformation –
Spherical unscented transformation - Constrained Unscented Kalman filter – Case Studies. (12)
PARTICLE FILTER : Particle filtering - SIS filtering algorithm - Degeneracy phenomenon-SIR Particle filter - Implementation issues:-
Sample Impoverishment – Selection of proposal density:- Particle filter with EKF as proposal - Unscented Particle filter-Case
Studies. (11)
DECENTRALIZED ESTIMATION FOR MULTISENSOR SYSTEMS: Multisensor systems - Decentralized systems - Information
Filter - Decentralized Estimators - Decentralized information filter - Decentralized Kalman filter - Limitations of fully connected
Decentralization. (11)
Total L:45
REFERENCES:
1. Bruce P. Gibbs, "Advanced Kalman Filtering, Least-Squares and Modeling: A Practical Handbook" John Wiley and Sons, 2011.
2. Dan Simon, “Optimal State Estimation Kalman, H-infinity and Non-linear Approaches”, John Wiley and Sons, 2006.
3. Branko Ristic, Sanjeev Arulampalam, Neil Gordon, “Beyond the Kalman Filter: Particle filters for Tracking Applications” Artech
House Publishers, Boston, London, 2004.
4. Arthur G O Mutambara, “Decentralized Estimation and Control for Multisensor Systems”, CRC Press, 1998
5. Brian D. O. Anderson, John B. Moore, “Optimal Filtering”, Prentice Hall, 1979
223
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18UC09 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
3003
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) BASICS AND PROGRAMMING: Overview of PLC systems - input/output
modules-power supplies and isolators - Memory mapping -PLC programming Languages- PLC ladder diagram programming using
timers and counters - Programming using advanced PLC functions. (11)
PLC APPLICATIONS & SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS (SCADA): Analog PLC operation - PID
function - Design of interlocks and alarms using PLC – Safety PLCs- Case study on industrial applications of PLC - Elements of
SCADA - Functionality of SCADA -Master Terminal Unit (MTU) - Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) -Interfacing PLC and SCADA using
communication link. (11)
DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM AND INDUSTRIAL COMMUNICATION STANDARDS: Different architectures – Local Control
unit - Operator Interface – Displays - Engineering interface - Redundancy concept -Factors to be considered in selecting DCS -
Communication facilities: HART Protocol, Wireless HART. Foundation Field bus, PROFIBUS, MODBUS - Case Study of any one
DCS. (12)
ADVANCES IN INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION: Process data analytics, Cloud based automation, Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT)
(11)
Total: L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2016.
2. Stuart A Boyer, “SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems”, ISA Press, 2010.
3. Lukcas M P, “Distributed Control Systems”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, 1986.
4. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, “Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control”, Elsevier, 2003
5. Alasdair Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things” Kindle Edition, Apress, New York, 2016
18UC52 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students initially will be provided with an orientation program about the hardware pilot process plant and
software used for process automation. In addition to this, every week students will be given theoretical inputs related to the
problems defined for about two hours. These problems are about development of ladder logic for sequential control applications
using programmable logic controllers and development of control strategies for continuous control of pilot process plants using
distributed control system. Each student is expected to solve a control problem given to them and simulate to test the performance
of the solution provided by them and, finally implement in real time. A report is to be submitted based on the results obtained with
inference.
Total: P: 60
18UC61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
The student will make at least two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be
assessed by a committee appointed by the department. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester
covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A quiz covering the above will be
held at the end of the semester.
Total: P: 60
III SEMESTER
18UC53 ADVANCED CONTROL LABORATORY

0042
In this course students will be provided with an orientation program on the equipment and software facilities available in the
department connected with this lab. In addition to this, every week students will be given theoretical inputs related to the problems
defined for about two hours. Based on which every student is instructed to work with different mathematical models of systems for
the problems defined. These models should be minimum of order four and can represent stable/unstable, minimum/non-minimum
phase systems, and should have been obtained from standard literature. The focus of the problems defined are to implement state
estimator, multivariable controller, optimal and adaptive controllers on the models considered. Few of the above exercise is also
carried out based on the mathematical models of bench mark systems available in the department, to perform real time control.
A report is to be submitted based on the results obtained with inference.
Total: P: 60
224
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18UC71 PROJECT WORK - I
0063
 Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas

 Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem
 Finalisation of system requirements and specification
 Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey
 Future trends in providing alternate solutions
 Consolidated report preparation of the above
Total P: 90
IV SEMESTER
18UC72 PROJECT WORK – II

0 0 28 14
The project involves the following:
 Preparing a project - brief proposal including

 Problem Identification
 A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree)
 List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints
 A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any)
 A presentation including the following:

 Consolidated report preparation
Total P: 420
18UC21 ADAPTIVE CONTROL

3003
GAIN SCHEDULING CONTROLLER: Adaptive Schemes - The adaptive Control Problem - Applications - Parameter estimation in
dynamical systems: - Least squares and regression methods - Gain scheduling: Principle, Design of gain scheduling controllers,
Nonlinear transformations, Applications - Auto-tuning techniques- Methods based on Relay feedback (12)
DETERMINISTIC SELF-TUNING REGULATORS: Pole Placement design - Indirect Self-tuning regulators – Continuous-time self
tuners - direct self-tuning regulators – Disturbances with known characteristics (11)
STOCHASTIC AND PREDICTIVE SELF-TUNING REGULATORS: Design of minimum variance controller - Design of moving
average controller - stochastic self-tuning regulators - Unification of direct self tuning regulators - Linear Quadratic STR - Adaptive
Predictive Control. (11)
MODEL REFERENCE ADAPTIVE SYSTEM: MIT rule – Determination of adaptation gain – Lyapunov theory – Design of MRAS
using Lyapunov theory – Relation between MRAS and STR- Case Studies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Karl J Astrom and Bjorn Wittenmark, “Adaptive Control”, Pearson Education Inc., New Delhi, 2009.
2. Shankar Sastry and Marc Bodson, “Adaptive Control – Stability, Convergence and Robustness”, Dover Publisher Inc, New
York, 2009.
3. Ioannou P A and Sun J, “Robust Adaptive Control”, Prentice Hall, 1996.
4. Krstic M, Kanellakopoulos I and Kokotovic P, “Nonlinear and Adaptive Control Design”, Wiley -Interscience , 1995.
5. Chalam V V, “Adaptive Control Systems – Techniques and Applications”, Marcel Dekkar Inc., New Jersey, 1987.
225
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18UC22 ROBUST CONTROL
3003
UNCERTAINTY AND ROBUSTNESS: Concepts of model uncertainty, including both parametric and dynamic uncertainty -
Fundamental concept of robustness and the relationship between physical systems and mathematical models - Mathematical
background including norms for vectors, matrices, signals, and systems - Co prime Factorization and stabilizing controllers, singular
value decomposition and its application to perturbation analysis. (11)
MODELLING OF UNCERTAIN SYSTEMS: Unstructured Uncertainties - Parametric Uncertainty - Linear fractional transformations
and canonical forms - Structured Uncertainty - Robust stability and performance problems. (11)
ROBUST DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS: Small gain theorem and Robust Stabilization, Performance Consideration, Structured
Singular Values. H – infinity design: Mixed Sensitivity H-infinity Optimization. H-infinity suboptimal solutions, Discrete time case
H-infinity loop shaping design: Robust Stabilization against normalised Coprime Factor Perturbations, Loop Shaping Design, Mixed
Optimization Design Method with LSDP. µ- Analysis and Synthesis: Consideration of Robust performance, µ-synthesis- D-K
Iteration method, µ-K Iteration method. (12)
LOWER ORDER CONTROLLERS: Absolute-error Approximation Methods, Reduction via Fractional Factors, Relative-error
Approximation Methods, Frequency Weighted Approximation Methods. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Skogestad and Postlethwaite, “Multivariable Feedback Control: Analysis and Design”,Wiley India Pvt.Ltd, 2015.
2. Mackenroth U “Robust Control Systems, Theory and Case Studies”, Springer India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Gu D W, Petkov and Konstantinov M M, “Robust Control with MATLAB”, Springer, 2009.
4. Kemin Zhou and John Doyle, “Essentials of Robust Control”, Prentice-Hall Inc., 1998.
5. Zhou K, Doyle J C and Glover K, “Robust and Optimal Control”, Prentice-Hall Inc., 1996.
18UC23 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES AND CONTROL

3003
DC MOTOR DRIVES: Electrical drives, Fundamental torque equations, Speed torque conventions and multiquadrant operation,
Components of load torques, Nature and classification of load torques, State space model of DC motor drive, Single-phase and
Three-phase drives: Half converter, Semi converter, Full converter and Dual converter fed drives- Two quadrant and four quadrant
chopper controlled drives – Closed loop control of DC drives (12)
INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Performance characteristics, Stator Control: Stator voltage control, Rotor voltage control,
Frequency control, Voltage and frequency control, Current control, Voltage, current and frequency control - Rotor resistance control:
Conventional methods, Static rotor resistance control - Slip power recovery: Static Kramer drive, Static Scherbius drive. (11)
VECTOR CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES: Principle of vector control – Direct vector control - Flux vector estimation –
Indirect vector control – Vector control of line-side PWM rectifier – Stator flux oriented vector control – Vector control of current fed
inverter drive. (11)
SYNCHRONOUS AND SPECIAL DRIVES: Synchronous Motor Drives: Open loop volts/hertz control, Self control model Permanent
magnet ac motor drives, Brushless dc motor drives, Sensorless control - Stepper motor and Switched reluctance motor drives.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ion Boldea and Nasar S A, “Electric Drives”, CRC Press LLC, New York, 2017.
2. Gopal K Dubey, “Fundamentals of Electric Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Muhammad H Rashid, “Power Electronics Handbook”, Butterworth-Heinemann-Elsevier, 2014
4. Krishnan R, “Electric Motor Drives: Modelling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009.
5. Bimal K Bose, “Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives - Technology and Application”, Standard Publishers
Distributers, 2000.
18UC24 APPLIED SOFT COMPUTING

3003
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND CONTROL: Review of basic concepts of Artificial Neural Nets – Architecture of learning
algorithm – MLP Architecture: Back Propagation Algorithm – Radial Basis Function Nets – Kohonen Self-Organizing Nets - Non
Linear optimization - Representation of nonlinear Systems – Nonlinear system identification and monitoring with Artificial Neural
Networks – Modeling and control of nonlinear system using ANN - Adaptive neuro controller – case studies. (12)
FUZZY LOGIC AND CONTROL: Basics of Fuzzy sets - Fuzzy operations- Fuzzy Relations – Fuzzification – Defuzzification -
Linguistic Hedges – Model based fuzzy control : Fuzzy modeling - Development of membership functions – Modeling of nonlinear
systems using fuzzy models - Design of fuzzy logic controller – Case studies. (11)
NEURO-FUZZY CONTROL 1: Feedback control systems and Neuro-Fuzzy control - Inverse learning - Specialized learning - Back
propogation through time and Real-time recurrent learning - Case studies: The inverted pendulum system. (11)
226
59th ACM 09.06.2018
NEURO-FUZZY CONTROL 2: Reinforcement learning control – Gradient free optimization – Gain scheduling Fuzzy controller –
Feedback linearization of sliding control - Case studies: Cart and pole system with a varying pole length. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Timothy J Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2015.
2. J.-S.R. Jang, C.-T. Sun, E. Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy & Soft Computing”, Pearson. 2015
3. Laurene V Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks, Architecture, Algorithms and Applications”, Pearson Education, 2011.
4. Jin Y, “Advanced Fuzzy systems Design & Applications “Springer, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Kecman V, “Learning and Soft Computing, Support Vector Machines, Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Models”, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2004.
18UC25 ROBOTIC SYSTEMS

3003
ROBOTICS AND KINEMATICS: Robots Classifications –Elements of Robotics: Joints, Actuators and Sensors –End effectors –
Applications – Kinematics: Matrix representation – Homogeneous transformation – DH representation of standard robots – Inverse
kinematics. (11)
ROBOT DYNAMICS: Velocity kinematics – Jacobian and inverse Jacobian – Lagrangian formulation – Eulers Lagrangian
formulation – Robot equation of motion-Trajectory planning. (11)
ROBOTIC VISION: Image formation -Image processing and analysis - Vision applications: Detection, Recognition and Tracking-
Camera geometry and calibration (11)
JOINT CONTROL: Linear control of robotic manipulators – Second-order systems – Modeling and control of single joint –
Performance of feedback control system-Implementation issues- Architecture of industrial robotic controllers - Case studies
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Craig, “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education, Asia, 2016.
2. Ashitava Ghosal, “Robotics: Fundamental Concepts and Analysis”, Oxford University Press, 2013.
3. Mikell P. Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N Nagel and Nicholas G Odrey, “Industrial Robotics: Technology, Programming
and Applications”, Mc-Graw Hill Publisher, 2012.
4. Davis E R, “Machine Vision: Theory, Algorithms and Practicalities”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2006.
5. Saeed B Niku, “Introduction to Robotics Analysis, Systems, Applications", Pearson Education, 2003
18UC26 MACHINE VISION

3003
IMAGE FORMATION AND TRANSFORM: Digital image – image sensor- image model – perspective geometry - image file formats
- neighbours of a pixel - Fourier transform- Discrete Cosine Transform- Karhunen-Loeve (KL) transform - Singular Vale
Decomposition-Hough transform-Affine transform-scale invariant feature transform. (12)
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT AND RESTORATION: Spatial domain enhancement: gray level transformations - histogram processing-
edge detection - Frequency domain enhancement: filtering in frequency domain- smoothing frequency domain filters-sharpening
frequency domain filters- homomorphic filtering- Noise models- Restoration by order statistics filter - Inverse filtering - Wiener
filtering. (11)
IMAGE REPRESENTATION AND SEGMENTATION: Chain code – Fourier descriptor- Bspline representation- Convex hull-
Detection of discontinuities: point, line and edge detection-Edge linking and boundary detection-Thresholding: global thresholding-
optimal thresholding- local thresholding- thresholds based on several variables- Region based segmentation: basic formulation-
region growing- region splitting and merging. (11)
PATTERN RECOGNITION AND CLASSIFICATION: Feature –Feature vector – Feature extraction – Principal Component Analysis
– Linear Discriminant Analysis – transform based feature extraction - Statically pattern recognition – Bayes classifier- k-nearest
Neighbor classifier - Syntactic Pattern Recognition– Support Vector Machine. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sonka, Hlavac and Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision”, Cengage INDIA Learning Pvt Ltd, 2016.
2. Duda R, Hart P and Stork D, “Pattern Classification”, Wiley, 2014.
3. Anil K Jain, "Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing" PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2010.
4. Forsyth and Ponce, “Computer Vision: A Modern Approach”, PHI Learning, 2009.
5. Rafael C Gonzalez and Richard E Woods, "Digital Image Processing", Peace Publishers,New Delhi, 2001.
227
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18UC27 OPTIMAL CONTROL
3003
CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS AND OPEN LOOP OPTIMAL CONTROL: State variable representation of systems- Performance
measures for optimal control problems - Selection of performance measures – Calculus of variations – Definitions– The basic
variational problem - Extrema of functions and functional with conditions – Variational approach to optimal control system- Discrete
time optimal control system:- Variational calculus, Fixed final state and Free-final state open loop optimal control (12)
LINEAR QUADRATIC OPTIMAL CONTROL SYSTEM: Problem formulation – Finite time Linear Quadratic regulator – Infinite time
LQR system: Time Varying case- Time-invariant case – Stability issues of Time-invariant regulator – Linear Quadratic Tracking
system: Fine time case and Infinite time case - Discrete time linear state regulator system – Steady state regulator system-Case
studies (11)
PONTRYAGIN MINIMUM PRINCIPLE: Dynamic Programming:- Principle of optimality, optimal control using Dynamic Programming
– Optimal Control of Continuous time and Discrete-time systems – Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman Equation – LQR system using
Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman Equation (11)
CONSTRAINED OPTIMAL CONTROL SYSTEMS: Optimal control systems with control constraints: Time optimal control systems,
Fuel Optimal Control Systems ,Energy optimal control systems – Optimal control systems with state constraints (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kirk D E, “Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction”, BSB Books P Ltd, Hyderabad, 2016.
2. Frank L Lewis, “Optimal Control”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2012.
3. Gopal M, “Modern Control System Theory”, New Age International P Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
4. Desineni Subbaram Naidu, “Optimal Control Systems”, CRC Press, 2009.
5. Jeffrey B Burl, “Linear Optimal Control”, Addison-Wesley, California, 1999.
18UC28 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

3003
SPECTRAL ESTIMATION: Nonparametric methods – The periodiogram – Performance of the periodiogram – The Modified
Periodiogram – Bartlett’s method –Welch Method – Blackman-Tukey method- Performance comparisons – Parametric
methods. (12)
algorithm – adaptive channel equalization – adaptive echo cancellation – RLS adaptive algorithm (11)
MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING: Downsampling- Upsampling – Commutativity of upsampling and down sampling- Multirate
identities – Polyphase representation – Fracational sampling rate conversion - Multistage implementation of decimation and
interpolation- Two channel filter bank, M channel filter bank:Perfect reconstruction criterion- Applications of filter bank in speech and
image coding. (11)
WAVELET TRANSFORM: Need for time-frequency representation – Short-Time Fourier Transform: Properties, filterbank
realization – Continuous Wavelet Transform: Properties, Admissibility condition – Discrete Wavelet transform – Multi resolution
analysis. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vikram M Gadre and Aditya S. Abhyankar, “Multiresolution and Multirate Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. Monson H Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling,” John Wiley and Sons, 2014.
3. Behrouz Farhang-Boroujeny, “Adaptive Filters:Theory and Applications” Wiley, 2013.
4. Vaidyanathan P P, “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks”, Pearson Education, 2011.
5. Bernard Widrow and Samuel D Stearns, “Adaptive Signal Processing,” Prentice Hall, 2009.
18UC29 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

3003
UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION: Direct search methods - Univariate method, Pattern search method, Simplex method, Descent
methods - Steepest Descent method, Conjugate gradient method, Quasi Newton method. (11)
CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION: Direct methods - The Complex method, Zoutendijk’s Method of Feasible Directions, Rosen’s
Gradient Projection Method , Indirect method - Transformation Techniques, Basic Approach of the Penalty Function Method, Interior
Penalty Function Method, Exterior Penalty Function Method. (11)
programming. (11)
228
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L:45
REFERENCES:
1. Sharma J K, “Operations Research: Theory and Applications”, Trinity Press, New Delhi, 2016.
2. Singaresu S Rao, “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice”, New Age International, New Delhi, 2014.
4. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction”, Prentice Hall, 2008.
5. Nash S G and Ariela Sofer, "Linear and Nonlinear Programming", McGraw Hill, New York, 1996.
18UC30 WAVELETS AND APPLICATIONS

3003
SIGNAL DECOMPOSITION: Vector space and inner product – orthogonal basis - Hilbert space- Fourier basis and Fourier
Transform – Limitations of Fourier Transform – Need for Time-Frequency Analysis - Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle – Wigner
Ville distribution - Short time Fourier transform (STFT) Analysis - short comings of STFT- Need for wavelets. (12)
CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORM: Wavelet basis – concept of scale and its relation with frequency, Continuous time
Wavelet Transform equation – series expansion using wavelets – CWT – Admissibility condition – Multi Resolution Analysis (MRA)
(11)
DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORM: Series expansion of discrete-time signals- design and analysis of filter banks - Perfect
Reconstruction condition – orthogonal and biorthogonal filter banks – tree structured filter bank - relationship between wavelets and
filter banks – lifting scheme. (11)
APPLICATIONS OF WAVELETS: Power signal analysis - Signal Denoising - Sub-band coding of speech and music – Image
Compression (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vikram M Gadre and Aditya S. Abhyankar, “Multiresolution and Multirate Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. Vaidyanathan P P, “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks”, Prentice Hall, 2011.
3. Vetterli M and Kovacevic J, "Wavelets and Subband Coding," Prentice Hall, 2008.
4. Stephane G Mallat, “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing”, Academic Press, 2006.
5. Sidney Burrus C, Ramesh A. Gopinath and Haitao Guo, “Introduction to Wavelets and Wavelet Transforms: A Primer”, Prentice
Hall, 1998.
18UC31 MULTI SENSOR DATA FUSION

3003
FOUNDATIONS OF DATA FUSION: Sensors and sensor data, Use of multiple sensors, Fusion applications. The inference
hierarchy: output data. Data fusion model. Architectural concepts and issues. Benefits of data - Limitation of Data Fusion.
Mathematical tools used: Algorithms, co-ordinate transformations, rigid body motion. Dependability and Markov chains, Meta -
heuristics. (11)
TAXONOMY OF ALGORITHMS FOR MULTISENSOR DATA FUSION: Data association and correlation. Process Model for
Correlation, Positional Fusion Algorithms, Identity Fusion Algorithms, Hypothesis Generation, Hypothesis Evaluation, Hypothesis
Selection Techniques, Ancillary Support Algorithms (12)
DECENTRALIZED ESTIMATION FOR MULTISENSORY SYSTEMS: Multi sensor systems, Decentralized systems, Decentralized
estimators, limitations of fully connected decentralization. Scalable decentralized estimation – Nodal transformation. Distributed and
decentralized Kalman and Information Filters. (11)
HIGH PERFORMANCE DATA STRUCTURES: Tessellated, trees, graphs and function. Representing ranges and uncertainty in
data structures. Designing optimal sensor systems with in dependability bounds. Implementing data fusion system. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David L. Hall, “Mathematical techniques in Multisensor data fusion”, Artech House, Boston, 1992.
2. R.R. Brooks and S.S.Iyengar, “Multisensor Fusion: Fundamentals and Applications with Software”, Prentice Hall Inc., New
Jersey, 1998.
3. Arthur G.O. Mutambara, “Decentralized Estimation and Control for Multisensor Systems” First Edition, CRC Press; 1998.
4. H M Mitchell, “Data Fusion: Concepts and Ideas”, Second Edition, Springer, 2012.
5. Jitendra R. Raol, “Multi-sensor Data Fusion with MATLAB”, First Edition, CRC Press; 2009.
18UC32 SLIDING MODE CONTROL

3003
INTRODUCTION: Properties of sliding motion, different controller designs, pseudo-sliding with a smooth control action, state space
approach. Sliding mode control problem statement, existence of solution and equivalent control, properties of sliding motion.
Reachability problem, single input and multivariable case. Unit vector approach, continuous approximations. (11)
229
59th ACM 09.06.2018
DESIGN APPROACHES: Regular form based approach, robust eigen structure assignment, quadratic minimisation, direct eigen
structure assignment. Incorporation of tracking requirement, model reference approach , integral action approach. (12)
CONTROLLER DESIGN USING OUTPUT INFORMATION: Problem formulation, special case square plants. General frame work,
hyperplane design, control law synthesis. Dynamic compensation, model reference system using only outputs. (11)
HIGHER ORDER SLIDING MODES: Definitions, higher order sliding modes in control systems, sliding order and dynamic
actuators, 2-sliding controllers, arbitrary order sliding controllers. Sliding mode observers (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Yuri Shtessel, Christopher Edwards and Leonid Fridman, “Sliding Mode Control and Observation”, Birkhauser; 2014
2. Wilfrid Perruquetti and Jean Pierre Barbot, “Sliding Mode Control in Engineering”, Marcel Dekker, Inc, 2002.
3. Christopher Edwards and Sarah K. Spurgeon, “Sliding Mode Control: Theory and Applications”, Taylor and Francis Ltd., 1998.
4. Utkin V. I., “Sliding Modes in Control Optimization”, Springer – Verlag, 1992.
5. Zinober A. S. I.and Dorling C. M., “Deterministic Control of Uncertain Systems”, Peter Peregrinus, 1990.
18UC33 FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND CONTROL

3 0 0 3
INTRODUCTION & ANALYTICAL REDUNDANCY CONCEPTS: Types of faults and different tasks of Fault Diagnosis and
Implementation - Different approaches to FDD: Model free and Model based approaches- Mathematical representation of Faults
and Disturbances: Additive and Multiplicative types – Residual Generation: Detection, Isolation, Computational and stability
properties – Design of Residual generator – Residual specification and Implementation. (11)
DESIGN OF STRUCTURED RESIDUALS & DIRECTIONAL STRUCTURED RESIDUALS: Residual structure of single fault
Isolation: Structural and Canonical structures- Residual structure of multiple fault Isolation: Diagonal and Full Row canonical
concepts – Introduction to parity equation implementation and alternative representation - Directional Specifications: Directional
specification with and without disturbances – Parity Equation Implementation. (11)
FAULT DIAGNOSIS USING STATE ESTIMATORS: State observer – state estimators – Norms based residual evaluation and
threshold computation – statistical methods based evaluation and threshold settings: Generalized Likelihood Ratio approach-
Marginalized Likelihood Ratio approach. (11)
FAULT TOLERANT CONTROL: Passive Fault-tolerant Control- Active Fault tolerant Control - Actuator and Sensor Fault tolerance
Principles:- Compensation for actuator – Sensor Fault-tolerant Control Design – Fault-tolerant Control Architecture - Fault-tolerant
Control design against major actuator failures - case studies. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Steven X. Ding, “Model based Fault Diagnosis Techniques: Schemes, Algorithms, and Tools”, Springer Publication, 2012.
2. Rolf Isermann, “Fault-Diagnosis Systems an Introduction from Fault Detection to Fault Tolerance”, Springer Verlag, 2011.
3. Hassan Noura, Didier Theilliol, Jean-Christophe Ponsart, Abbas Chamseddine, “Fault-Tolerant Control Systems: Design and
Practical Applications”, Springer Publication, 2009.
4. Mogens Blanke, “Diagnosis and Fault-Tolerant Control”, Springer, 2003.
5. Janos J. Gertler, “Fault Detection and Diagnosis in Engineering systems”, Second Edition, Marcel Dekker, 1998.
18UC34 MATHEMATICAL METHODS FOR PROCESS DATA ANALYTICS

3 0 0 3
REGRESSION: Introduction to Process Data Analytics – Linear Regression: Simple Linear Regression, Multiple Linear Regression
– K-nearest neighbours regression – Practical Consideration in the Regression Model – Validation methods to assess model
quality:- The Validation set approach, Leave-one-out Cross Validation, k-Fold Cross Validation – Bias-variance Trade-off for k-Fold
Cross Validation. (11)
LINEAR MODEL SELECTION AND REGULARIZATION: Subset selection:- Best Subset Selection, Step-wise Selection and
Choosing the Optimal Model – Shrinkage Methods:-LASSO, Ridge regression, Elastic nets – Dimension Reduction Methods:-
Principal Components Regression, Partial Least Squares (11)
SUPERVISED LEARNING WTH REGRESSION AND CLASSIFICATION TECHNIQUES: Logistic regression – Linear Discriminant
Analysis – Quadratic Discriminant Analysis – Regression & Classification Trees – Support Vector Machines – Random forests,
Bagging and Boosting – Neural Networks – Deep Learning. (11)
APPLICATIONS: Process data analysis for System identification (under open loop) – Controller Performance Monitoring – Principal
Components Analysis (PCA) for Process Monitoring and Partial Least Squares (PS) for Soft-sensor Design – Data -based
CausalitAnalysis for Identification of Process Topology. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas A. Runkler, “Data Analytics: Models and Algorithms for Intelligent Data Analysis”, Springer Vieweg, Second Edition,
2016.
2. Arun K. Tangirala, “Principles of System Identification – Theory and Practice”, CRC Press, 2015.
230
59th ACM 09.06.2018
3. Fan Yang, Pig Duan, Sirish L Shah, Tongwen Chen, “Capturing Connectivity and Causality in Complex Industrial Processes”,
Springer, 2014.
4. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, “An Introduction to Statistical Learning with Applications in R”,
Springer Texts in Statistics, 2013.
5. EthemAlpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, MIT Press, 2013.
AUDIT COURSES
18UC81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18UC82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

231
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
13. COURSES OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF ASSESSMENT

ME ENGINEERING DESIGN
(2018 REGULATIONS)
*
Hours/Week Maximum Marks
Course
Course Title Credits TOTA CAT
Code Lecture Tutorial Practical CA FE
L
I SEMESTER
18MD01 Applied Numerical Methods 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MD02 Deterministic and Probabilistic Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MD03 Machinery Vibration and Diagnostics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MD04 Mechanisms and Robot Kinematics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18MD05 Mechatronics System Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18MD51 Vibration Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18MD81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18MD06 Applied Elasticity and Plasticity 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MD07 Finite Element Analysis in Mechanical Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MD08 Design and Failure Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MD09 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18 MD_ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD_ Professional Elective 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD52 Computer Aided Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18MD61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18MD82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 hrs 18 2 8 23 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18MD53 Sensor Interface and Robotics Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18MD71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22 hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18MD72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
18MD21 Modeling of Dynamic Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD22 Mechanics of Composites and Smart Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD23 Industrial Tribology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD24 Geometric Modeling 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD25 Strategies for Product Development 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD26 Design of Automotive Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD27 Design and Analysis of Thermal Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD28 Biomechanics of Tissues and Joints 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD29 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD30 Nano Materials and Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD31 Production Tool Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD32 Human Factors Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD33 Rotor Dynamics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD34 Optimum Design of Mechanical Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD35 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD36 Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD37 Advanced Strength of Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD38 Design of Pressure Vessels 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD39 Fracture Mechanics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD40 Experimental Stress Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD41 Design of Press Tools 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD42 Human Body Vibration Diagnostics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MD43 Advanced Finite Element Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
232
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
Mandatory Course
18MD01 APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS

2203
NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations –Thomas algorithm, Gauss Jacobi
and Gauss Seidel methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations - Newton Raphson method,
eigenvalues - power method and inverse power method. Curve fitting - linear regression, multiple linear regression, cubic splines -
Bezier curves and B-splines. (8+7)
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Boundary value problem - Shooting method, finite difference method, derivative boundary
conditions. Finite Element Method - Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods (8+7)
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite difference method: Liebmann’s method for Laplace and Poisson equations, alternating
direct implicit method, irregular and non-rectangular grids, explicit method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations,
explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7)
MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Simulating deterministic behaviour, area under a curve, generating random numbers, simulating
probabilistic behaviour, inventory model: gasoline and consumer demand. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
Delhi, 2014.
4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatley, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
18MD02 DETERMINISTIC AND PROBABILISTIC DESIGN

3003
STATIC AND DYNAMIC FORCE ANALYSIS: Review of basics of work, energy, torque, power, load analysis, external and internal
forces, equilibrium equations, free-body diagrams; Force analysis in single rigid bodies and multi-body assemblies, inertia force
analysis; Force flow concept, locating critical sections, practical considerations. (10)
DESIGN AGAINST STATIC LOAD: Design against simple and combined stresses: theories of elastic failure, modified Mohr
theory, design against static loading of machine elements in typical assemblies; Design of bolted joints – elastic analysis of bolted
joints; Light construction based on strength and stiffness: material saving by form design, possible weight and cost reduction. (11)
CYCLIC AND IMPACT LOADING: Design against cyclic loading: effect ofstress concentration, low cycle and high cycle fatigue,
endurance limit modification factors, cumulative damage; Influence of non-zero mean stress: Gerber line, Goodman line, Soderberg
line, yield line, modified Goodman diagram, design of machine elements and bolted joints under cyclic load; Design against impact
loading. (12)
STATISTICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN DESIGN: Statistics and design, frequency distribution and its characteristics, probability
distribution, analysis of variance, regression analysis, overview of response surface methodology, probabilistic approach to design.
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
6. Robert C Juvinall, “Fundamentals of Machine Component Design”, Wiley, 2017.
7. Bernard J Hamrock, Steven R Schmid, Bo O Jacobson, “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”, McGraw-Hill, 2014.
8. Michael Ashby, Hugh Shercliff and David Cebon, “Materials Engineering, Science, Processing and Design”, Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2013.
9. Myer Kutz, “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, Wiley, 2007.
10. Gustav Niemann, “Machine Elements: Design and calculation in Mechanical Engineering”, Springer-Verlag, 1980.
11. Lipson and Sheth, “Statistical design and analysis of engineering experiments”, 1973.
18MD03 MACHINERY VIBRATION AND DIAGNOSTICS

3003
FUNDAMENTALS OF VIBRATION: Introduction, sources and effects of vibration, types of vibration, harmonic analysis, transient
time function, random time function, frequency spectrum; Single Degrees of Freedom System: free vibration, free damped vibration,
forced vibration: nature of exciting forces, critical speeds, quality of balance, vibration Isolation. (12)
TWO AND MULTIPLE DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS: Normal mode vibration, co-ordinate coupling, Lagrange’s equation,
233
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
free harmonic vibration, tuned un-damped vibration absorbers;MDOF: influence coefficients, orthogonality, matrix iteration, Holzer
method, branched system, geared system, Rayleigh's principle, Dunkerley's principle. (12)
TRANSIENT AND RANDOM VIBRATION: Impulse and arbitrary excitation, base excitation, Laplace transform formulation,
response spectrum; Random vibration: frequency response function, spectral density, probability distribution, correlation, Fourier
transform. (10)
VIBRATION AND NOISE - MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL: Vibration analysis overview, measuring instruments: selection of
sensors, acceleration mountings, vibration exciters; Experimental methods in vibration analysis: free and forced tests, FFT analyzer,
methods of vibration control, excitation reduction at source, balancing of rigid, flexible and variable mass rotors; Dynamic properties
and selection of structural materials: viscoelastic polymers; Noise sources and control: noise in centrifugal fans and blowers, gears,
chain drives and bearings, reduction measures, machine enclosures, silencers and mufflers. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Thomson W T, "Theory of Vibration with Applications", Prentice Hall of India, 2018.
2. Lewis H Bell, “Industrial Noise Control Fundamentals and Applications”, Marcel Dekkev Inc., 2017.
3. Singiresu S Rao "Mechanical Vibrations", Prentice Hall, 2016.
4. Ashok Kumar Mallik, "Principles of Vibration Control", Affiliated East-West Press, 1990.
5. Tse Hinkle and Morse, "Mechanical Vibrations", OBS Publishers and Distributors, 1983.
18MD04 MECHANISMS AND ROBOT KINEMATICS

3204
KINEMATIC ANALYSIS AND DYNAMICS OF MECHANISMS: Kinematic analysis: Analysis of complex mechanisms, Goodman
analysis, auxiliary point method; Dynamics of mechanisms: inertia force in linkages, kineto-static analysis by complex numbers,
superposition and matrix methods, virtual work. (12+8)
KINEMATIC SYNTHESIS: Graphical synthesis, motion, path and function generation: two, three and four prescribed positions,
overlay method, analytical synthesis techniques; Complex number modeling in kinematic synthesis, the dyad or standard form, three
prescribed positions for motion, path and function generation, circle point and center point circles, ground pivot specification,
Freudenstein’s equation. (12+8)
SPATIAL MECHANISMS: Introduction, transformations describing planar finite displacements, planar finite transformations, identity
transformation, planar matrix operator for finite rotation, homogeneous co-ordinates and finite planar translation - concatenation of
finite displacements - rotation about an axis not through the origin, rigid body transformations, spatial transformations, analysis of
spatial mechanisms. (10+6)
ROBOTICS: Topology arrangements of robotic arms, forward kinematics, treatment of inverse position analysis and inverse velocity
and acceleration analysis, robot, actuator force analysis; Parallel kinematic machines: serial and parallel systems, configurations
and characteristics, degrees of freedom, design principles, kinematic modeling. (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T:30 =75

REFERENCES:
1. Uicker G R, Pennock J and Shigley J E, “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, Oxford University Press, 2016.
2. Dan B Marghitu, “Mechanisms and Robots Analysis with MATLAB”, Springer, 2009.
3. Arthur G. Erdman, George N. Sandor, Sridhar Kota, “Mechanism Design: Analysis and Synthesis”, Prentice Hall, 2004.
4. Xiao-Ping Susan Su, Computer-aided Kinematic and Dynamic Analysis of Spatial Mechanisms, Davis, 1997
5. Asok Kumar Mallik, AmitabhaGhosh and Günter Dittrich, “Kinematic Analysis and Synthesis of Mechanisms”, CRC Press,
1994.
18MD05 MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN

3204
REVIEW OF MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS: Elements of mechatronic systems, design process, actuators – magnetostrictive, fluidic
and electrical (PMDC, AC induction, Stepper, Servo), valves, selection of motors. (10+7)
FLUIDIC SYSTEM DESIGN: Cascade, KV-Map and step counter methods; Integration of fringe condition modules, sizing of
components in hydraulic andpneumatic systems, synchronizing circuits, regenerative circuits, Accumulators. (13+8)
PLCs, SENSORS and CONTROLLERS: Servo valves and Proportional valves; Sensors: proximity, displacement, velocity,
acceleration, force, torque, temperature and flow measurements; PLCs: construction and working, programming using ladder logic
diagram; Microprocessor and Micro controller. (12+8)
REAL TIME INTERFACING: Data acquisition systems, Virtual Instrumentation, interfacing of sensors/actuators with PC, condition
monitoring, adaptive control and SCADA systems. (10+7)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. W.Bolton, “Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering”, Pearson Education, Sixth
edition, 2014.
2. Anthony Espisito, “Fluid Power with Application”, Pearson, 2013.
234
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
3. David W.Pessen, “Industrial Automation: Circuit Design and Components”, Wiley India, 2011.
4. DevdasShetty and Richard AKolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, Cengage Learning, Second edition, 2010.
5. Sanjay Gupta and Joseph John, “Virtual Instrumentation using Lab VIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, Second edition, 2010.
6. Jovitha Jerome, “Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW”, Prentice Hall, 2010.
18MD51 VIBRATION ENGINEERING LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is
expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the
guidance of faculty. The details expected in the final report to be submitted at the end of the semester are: Problem definition,
literature review, objectives, methodology, analysis and interpretation of results and conclusions.
TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION
1. Introduction to VI software and Data Acquisition (DAQ) systems.

2. Vibration response of a given structure using free and forced vibration test- FRF, Damping ratio with and without smart
materials.
3. Vibration response of a balanced and unbalanced system.
4. Shock response of a system subjected to impact loading.
5. Sound level measurement using (a) Sound level meter and (b) Microphone and VI software.
6. Determination of mass ratio in tuned dynamic vibration absorber.
CASE STUDY
Experimental modal analysis of components / assemblies of mechanical systems.
Total P: 60
SEMESTER II
18MD06 APPLIED ELASTICITY AND PLASTICITY

3003
ANALYSIS OF STRESS AND STRAIN: Introduction to general theory of elasticity, assumptions and applications of linear elasticity,
stress tensor, Cauchy’s stress principle, principal stresses, octahedral stresses, equations of equilibrium, strain tensor, principal
strains, kinematic equations and compatibility conditions, Generalized Hooke’s law, plane stress and plane strain conditions,
elasticity theorems, strain energy in elastic body. (12)
ELASTICITY PROBLEMS AND EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS: Transformation of compatibility condition from strain
components to stress components, Airy’s stress function, two dimensional problems in cartesian and polar coordinate systems,
axisymmetric problems, stress concentration, effect of circular holes on stress distribution in plates; Fundamental concepts in
measurements, grid method, brittle coating method, strain gages, rubber model method and Fischer’s method for stress
concentration, photo elasticity and Moiré fringes. (13)
CONTINUUM PLASTICITY I: Introduction to the concept of plastic deformation, role of geometry and thermodynamics in plastic
deformation, stress-strain curve of real materials, plastic flow, hardening rules, strain hardening and parameters, Bauschinger
effects, yield criterion, rate dependent and rate independent plasticity. (10)
CONTINUUM PLASTICITY II: Equivalent stresses, Prandtl-Reuss and Levy-Mises equations, theory of stability under plastic flow,
effect of strain rate on strain hardening, effect of power law on strain hardening, plane problems: Introduction to slip line field theory
and applications. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. George E Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill Education, Third edition 2017.
2. Chakrabarthy J, “Theory of Plasticity”, Butterworth Heinemann Publications 2012.
3. Timoshenko S P and Goodier J N, “Theory of Elasticity” Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2010.
4. Ramesh K, “Digital Photo elasticity”, Springer Publications, 2000
5. Durelli A J, Phillips E A and Tsao C H, “Introduction to Theoretical and Experimental analysis of stress and strain” , McGraw
Hill Publications,1958.
18MD07 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS IN MECHANICAL DESIGN

3003
STATIC ANALYSIS USING ONE DIMENSIONAL ELEMENTS: Concepts of finite element method, finite element formulation using
variational, weighted residual and weak form techniques; Static analysis using one dimensional elements: Linear and quadratic spar
elements, truss and beam elements, beams on elastic foundation - treatment of boundary condition and temperature effects,
solution of problems. (12)
235
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
STATIC ANALYSIS USING TWO DIMENSIONAL ELEMENTS: Triangular element: Formulation of stiffness matrix and load
vectors, temperature effects, torsion of circular and non-circular cross-sections; Quadrilateral element: Evaluation of stiffness and
stress matrices by Gaussian quadrature based on isoparametric formulation; Solution of plane stress and plane strain problems;
Axisymmetric triangular element: Formulation of stiffness matrix and load vectors, problem modelling and boundary conditions,
solution of problems; Higher order elements; Overview of three dimensional stress analysis. (11)
EIGENVALUE ANALYSIS: Formulation and solution of undamped and damped free vibration problems - lumped and consistent
mass matrices, solution of longitudinal, transverse and torsional vibration problems using 1D elements; Formulation and solution of
buckling problems using 1D element. (11)
HEAT TRANSFER ANALYSIS: Review of differential equations of heat transfer, one dimensional and two-dimensional finite
element formulation using variational and Galerkin’s methods, solution of steady state heat transfer problems, analysis of tapered
fin. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Reddy J.N, “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
2. Bhavikatti SS, “Finite Element Analysis”, New Age International Publishers, 2015.
3. Chandrupatla T R and Belegundu A D, “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011.
4. Logan D L, “A First Course in the Finite Element Method”, Thomson Learning, 2010.
5. Dixit U.S, “Finite Element Methods for Engineers”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd, 2009.
6. Cook, R.D., Malkus, D. S., Plesha,M.E., and Witt,R.J “ Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, Wiley, 2007.
18MD08 DESIGN AND FAILURE ANALYSIS

3003
MATERIALS AND DESIGN: Factors affecting the behavior of materials in components, effect of component geometry and shape
factors, designing with high strength and low toughness materials, designing for hostile environments, the design process, materials
selection in design, processes and their influence on design, systematic process selection; Material selection forsustainability:
material life cycle assessment and energy, selecting materials for eco design. (11)
FRACTURE MECHANICS: Ductile fracture, brittle fracture, cleavage-fractography, ductile-brittle transition, fracture mechanics
approach to design-energy criterion, stress intensity approach;Time dependent crack growth and damage;Linear elastic fracture
mechanics: Griffith theory, energy release rate, instability and R-curve, stress analysis of cracks-stress intensity factor, K-threshold,
crack growth instability analysis, crack tip stress analysis; Elastic plastic fracture mechanics: crack tip opening displacement
(CTOD), J-integral, relationship between J and CTOD. (12)
DYNAMIC AND TIME-DEPENDENT FRACTURE: Dynamic fracture, rapid loading of a stationary crack, rapid crack propagation,
dynamic contour integral, creep crack growth-C Integral, viscoelastic fracture mechanics, viscoelastic J integral; Determination of
fracture toughness values: experimental determination of plane strain fracture toughness, K- R curve testing, J measurement,
CTOD testing, effect of temperature, strain rate on fracture toughness. (11)
WEAR FAILURES AND FAILURE ANALYSIS TOOLS: Wear failures: Types of wear, different methods of wear measurement,
analysis of wear failures, wear at elevated temperatures, wear on different materials, role of friction on wear, stick slip friction, creep,
stress rupture, elevated temperature fatigue, environmental induced failure;Failure analysis tools:Reliability concept and hazard
function, life prediction, life extension, application of Poisson, exponential and Weibull distributions for reliability, bath tub curve,
parallel and series systems, MTBF, MTTR, FMEA-design FMEA, process FMEA, analysis causes of failure, modes, ranks of failure
modes; Fault tree analysis; Industrial case studies on FMEA. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Anderson T L, “Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications”, Taylor and Francis, Fourth Edition 2017.
2. Michael F Ashby, “Materials Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth – Heinemann, 2016.
3. Michael F Ashby, Hugh Shercliff and David Cebon, “Materials – Engineering, Science,
Processing and Design”, Butterworth – Heinemann, 2013.
4. Shigley and Mische, "Mechanical Engineering Design", McGraw Hill, 2011.
5. Balbir S. Dhillon “Applied Reliability and Quality: Fundamentals, Methods and Procedures” (Springer Series in Reliability
Engineering), 2010.
6. ASM Metals Handbook, "Failure Analysis and Prevention", ASM Metals Park, Ohio, USA, Vol. 11, 2002.
18MD09 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY

3204
DFMA TOOLS: Rules and methodologies used to design components for manual, automatic and flexible assembly, traditional
design and manufacture vs concurrent engineering, DFA index, poka-yoke, lean principles, six sigma concepts, DFMA as the tool
for concurrent engineering, three DFMA criteria for retaining components for redesign of a product; Computer-aided design for
assembly; Process capability, process capability metrics, Cp, Cpk, cost aspects. (10+6)
TOLERANCE ANALYSIS: Geometric tolerancing for manufacture as per Indian standards and ASME Y 14.5 standard, surface
finish, review of relationship between attainable tolerance grades and different machining processes; Cumulative effect of
tolerances, dimensional chain analysis -equivalent tolerances method, equivalent standard tolerance grade method, equivalent
influence method; Limits and fits, interchangeable part manufacture; Selective assembly – Model-I: group tolerances of mating parts
236
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
equal; Model-II: total and group tolerances of shaft equal; Control of axial play - introducing secondary machining operations,
laminated shims, selective assembly, examples. Datum features - functional and manufacturing, redimensioning to suit
manufacturing. (12+8)
DATUM SYSTEMS AND TRUE POSITION THEORY: Degrees of freedom, grouped datum systems - different types, two and three
mutually perpendicular grouped datum planes; Grouped datum system with spigot and recess, pin and hole; Grouped datum system
with spigot - recess pair and tongue - slot pair - computation of translational and rotational accuracy, geometric analysis and
applications; True position theory - comparison between coordinate and conventional method of feature location, tolerancing and
true position tolerancing, virtual size concept, floating and fixed fasteners, projected tolerance zone, zero true position tolerance,
compound assembly. Functional inspection techniques using CMM and paper layout gauging. (12+8)
REDESIGN, TOLERANCE CHARTING AND DFE: Redesign of castings based on parting line considerations, minimising core
requirements, redesigning cast members using weldments, design guidelines for welding. Redesign of components to facilitate
machining; Tolerance charting: Operation sequence for typical shaft type of components, preparation of process drawings for
different operations, tolerance worksheets and centrality analysis, examples; Design for the Environment - environmental objectives,
global issues, regional and local issues-basic DFE methods-design guidelines-examples of application. (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Boothroyd G, Dewhurst P and Knight W, “Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly”, Marcell Dekker, 2010.
2. Matousek, "Engineering Design - A Systematic Approach", Blackie and Son Ltd., London, 2006.
3. T. E. Graedel, Braden R. Allenby, “Design for environment” Prentice Hall, 1998.
4. James G. Bralla, “Design for Manufacturability Handbook”, McGraw Hill Professional, 1999.
5. Harry Peck, "Designing for Manufacture", Pitman Publications, 1983.
6. Spotts M F, "Dimensioning and Tolerance for Quantity Production", Prentice Hall Inc., 1983.
18MD52 COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING LABORATORY

0042
1. Linear static analysis and non-linear analysis using FEM

2. Dynamic analysis using FEM
3. Transient thermal analysis using FEM
4. Fluid flow analysis using FEM
5. Fatigue analysis of mechanical components using FEM
6. FEA for sustainable design
CASE STUDY
Finite Element analysis of sub-systems/complex components of typical mechanical systems followed by design sensitivity
analysis
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Laboratory Manual prepared by Department of Mechanical Engineering.

2. Nitin S. Gokhale, “Practical finite element analysis”, Finite to Infinite 2008.
18MD53 SENSOR INTERFACE AND ROBOTICS LABORATORY

0042
1. Calibration of sensors using Virtual Instrumentation software

2. Sensor interface using Virtual Instrumentation software
3. Control of actuators using Virtual Instrumentation software
4. Programming of a typical pick and place robot
5. System control using PI and PID controllers
237
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
CASE STUDY
Interface and integration of sensors/ actuators for development of mechatronic systems
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Laboratory Manual prepared by Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG college of Technology.
2. Frank Lamb, “Industrial Automation Hands On”, McGraw Hill Book Company,2013
3. Terry L M Bartelt, “Industrial Automated Systems: Instrumentation and Motion Control”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi,
2011
18MD61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
This course, likened to a mini-intern, requires each student to identify a manufacturing or service industry and pursue the solution of
an industrial problem consistent with the credits allotted for the course. Students are expected to study the problem, survey pertinent
literature, gather relevant data and carry out engineering and scientific analysis followed by a detailed presentation both oral and
written. The report submitted for final assessment should be in line with that required for Project Work.
Total P: 60
SEMESTER III
18MD71 PROJECT WORK I

0063
 Identification of a real-life problem in thrust areas
 Finalization of system requirements and specification
Total P: 90
SEMESTER IV
18MD72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14
Preparing a project - brief proposal including
A report highlighting the design finalization [Based on functional requirements &standards (if any)]
A presentation including the following:


Total P: 420
18MD21 MODELING OF DYNAMIC SYSTEMS

3003
MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICAL SYSTEMS: Introduction to control systems: differential equations of physical systems,
dynamics of robotic mechanisms, transfer functions, block diagram algebra, signal flow graphs; Feedback characteristics of control
systems: feedback and non-feedback systems, reduction of parameter variations, control over system dynamics, control of the
238
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
effects of disturbance signals, linearizing effect, regenerative feedback. (11)
COMPONENTS OF CONTROL SYSTEMS AND FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS: Linear approximation of non-linear
systems: stepper motors, hydraulic systems, pneumatic systems; Frequency response analysis and stability in frequency domain:
correlation between time and frequency response- polar plots- bode plots, all-pass and minimum-phase systems; Experimental
determination of transfer functions: log-magnitude versus phase plots, Nyquist stability criterion, assessment of relative stability,
closed loop frequency response, sensitivity analysis. (12)
TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS AND STABILITY IN TIME DOMAIN: Standard test signals: time response of first-order systems,
time response of second-order systems, steady-state errors and error constants, effect of adding a zero to a system; Design
specifications of second-order systems; Design considerations for higher-order system: performance indices, robotic control
systems, approximation of higher-order systems by lower order systems; State variable analysis: concept of stability, necessary
conditions, Routh stability criterion, relative stability analysis. (11)
DESIGN AND STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS: Preliminary considerations, realization of basic compensators: cascade
compensation in time domain and frequency domain, feedback compensation, robust control system design; State variable analysis
and design: concepts of state, state variables and state model, state models for linear-continuous-time systems, state variables and
linear discrete-time systems, solutions of state equations; concepts of controllability and observability, pole placement by state
feedback. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Nagrath I J and Gopal M, “Control Systems Engineering”, 6th Edition, New Age International Publishers, 2017.
2. Gopal M, "Control Systems – Principles and Design", 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
3. Norman S Nise, “Control System Engineering”, International Student Version, 6thEdition, Wiley Publications, 2012.
4. Okata K, “Modern Control Engineering”, 5th Edition, Pearson Publications, New Delhi, 2009.
5. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “Control Systems – Theory with Engineering Applications”, 1st Edition, Jaico Publishing House,
2004.
18MD22 MECHANICS OF COMPOSITES AND SMART MATERIALS

3003
COMPOSITES AND SMART MATERIALS: Modern materials in design, types, metals, polymers, ceramics, composites,
classification of composites, advantages, applications and limitations, Matrix and reinforcement-their roles, principal types of fiber
and matrix materials; Smart materials: rheological, piezoelectric, shape-memory and magnetostrictive materials; Material
characteristics of smart materials; Application ofsmart materials for design of intelligent structures. (11)
MANUFACTURE OF COMPOSITE COMPONENTS: Lay-up and curing, open and closed mould processes, bag moulding, filament
winding, pultrusion, pulforming, thermoforming, injection moulding, blow moulding; An overview of metal matrix composite
processing and ceramic matrix composite processing. (10)
MICRO AND MACRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINA: Volume and mass fractions, evaluation of elastic moduli,
strength of unidirectional lamina, Hooke's law for different types of materials, engineering constants for orthotropic materials; Stress,
strain relations for plane stress in an orthotropic material and in a lamina of arbitrary orientation, strength of an orthotropic lamina,
basic strength theories. (12)
MACRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINATE: Classical lamination theory, lamina stress; Strain behaviour; Resultant
forces and moments in a laminate, types of laminates, strength and stiffness of laminates, inter laminar stresses in laminates;
Analysis of composite structures: Fatigue, fracture mechanics-basic principles, fracture initiation, crack growth and crack growth
modes, toughening mechanisms, environmental effects, composite joints-bonded, bolted and bonded-bolted joints. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ronald F Gibson, “Principles of Composite Material Mechanics", McGraw Hill Book Co, 2016.
2. Autar K Kaw, "Mechanics of Composite Materials", CRC Press, NY, 2006.
3. Matthews F L and Rawlings R D, “Composite Materials: Engineering and Science”, Woodhead Publishing, 1999.
4. Robert M Jones, "Mechanics of Composite Materials", Taylor and Francis, 1999.
5. Srinivasan A V and Michael McFarland, “Smart Structures: Analysis and Design”, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2001.
18MD23 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY

3003
REVIEW OF TRIBODESIGN AND LUBRICATION: Specific principles, Tribological problems in machine design, Surface
topography, tribological processes: contact process-contact mechanics, Hertzian and Non Hertzian contact,friction process-sliding
and rolling friction, wear process-wear mechanisms, Stick-slip effects, Friction and wear test methods, tribological properties of
materials, tribological materials;Lubrication: Purpose of lubrication, Basic modes of lubrication-Stribeck curve, hydrodynamic
lubrication, Elastodynamic lubrication, Mixed lubrication, Boundary lubrication; Hydrostatic lubrication, Properties of lubricant,
Additives, Choice of lubricant, oil, grease and solid lubricants, lubrication systems and their selection, oil conservation. Surface
Engineering: Surface modifications – transformation hardening, surface fusion - thermo chemical processes - surface coatings -
plating and anodizing - fusion processes - vapour phase processes. (12)
239
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
SELECTION OF BEARINGS: Rolling contact bearings:Nominal life, static and dynamic capacity, equivalent load, probabilities of
survival - cubic mean load, Selection of ball and roller bearings, bearing mounting details, preloading of bearings;Hydrodynamic
Bearings: Fundamentals of fluid film formation, Mechanisms of pressure development in oil film, Reynold’s equation, Hydrodynamic
journal bearing- Sommerfeld number, bearing performance, temperature rise; Hydrodynamic thrust bearings - Raimondi and Boyd
Method, fixed and tilting pads, single and multiple pad bearings. (11)
HYDROSTATIC BEARINGS: Arrangement, advantages and limitations, Hydrostatic step bearing analysis-energy losses, optimum
design, temperature rise; Hydrostatic conical thrust bearing, pad coefficients; Hydrostatic journal bearings - design procedures;
Hydrostatic squeeze film bearings-analysis; Aerostatic bearings: principle, requirement, merit, demerit and application, thrust
bearings and journal bearings - design procedure; Seals: Different types - mechanical seals, lip seals, packed glands, soft piston
seals, mechanical piston rod packing, labyrinth seals and throttling bushes, oil flinger rings and drain grooves - selection of
mechanical seals. (12)
COMPUTATIONAL HYDRODYNAMICS: Finite difference equivalent of the Reynolds equation, Numerical analysis of hydrodynamic
lubrication in idealized journal and partial arc bearings, Vibrational stability in journal bearings-determination of stiffness and
damping coefficients; Elasto-Hydrodynamic Lubrication: Pressure-viscosity term in Reynold’s Equation - Hertz theory - Ertel-Grubin
Equation, lubrication of spheres, introduction to thermo-hydrodynamic lubrication. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. GwidonStachowiak, ‎W‎werdnABatchelor, “Engineering Tribology”,Butterworth-Heinemann, 2013
2. Phakatkar H G and Ghorpade RR, “Tribology”, NiraliPrakashan, 2009.
3. Prasanta Sahoo “Engineering Tribology” PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. 2005
4. Basu S K, Sengupatha S N and Ahuja D B, “Fundamentals of Tribology”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
5. Neale M J,“Tribology Handbook”, Elsevier, 1995
6. Hutchings I M, “Tribology-Friction and Wear of Engineering Material”, Edward Arnold, London, 1992.
18MD24 GEOMETRIC MODELING

3003
OVERVIEW OF CAD SYSTEMS AND GRAPHICS TRANSFORMATION: Conventional and computer aided design processes,
subsystems of CAD-CAD hardware and software, analytical and graphics packages, CAD workstations. networking of CAD
systems, generative, cognitive and image processing graphics, static and dynamic data graphics; Transport of graphics data:
graphic standards, generation of graphic primitives, display and viewing, transformations, customizing graphics software. (12)
MATHEMATICAL REPRESENTATION OF CURVES AND SURFACES: Introduction, wireframe models, parametric representation
of curves-analytic - synthetic, curve manipulation; Surface models: types of surfaces, introduction to parametric representation of
surfaces, design examples. (11)
MATHEMATICAL REPRESENTATION OF SOLIDS: Fundamentals of solid modeling, boundary representation, constructive solid
geometry, solid manipulations, solid modeling based applications. (10)
VISUAL REALISM AND COMPUTER ANIMATION: Model cleanup, hidden line removal, shading, computer animation, animation
systems, design applications, mass property calculations, geometrical propertyformulation, mass property formulation, design and
engineering applications. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Donald D. Hearn, M. Pauline Baker, Warren Carithers, “Computer Graphics with OpenGL”, 4 th Edition, Pearson Education,
2015.
2. M. Morris Mano, Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design” 5th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2013
3. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S and Raju V, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age Internationals, 2012.
4. Ibrahim Zeid, "CAD/CAM Theory and Practice", McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi, 2009.
5. Michael E Mortenson, "Geometric Modeling", John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2006.
6. Radhakrishnan P and Kothandaraman C P, "Computer Graphics and Design", DhanpatRai and Sons, 1997.
18MD25 STRATEGIES FOR PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT

3003
PRODUCT DESIGN APPROACHES AND REVERSE ENGINEERING: Product design: characteristics of successful product
development, challenges of product development, phases of design process, product development versus design, types of design
and redesign, concept of CPC, PDM/PLM;Product design approaches: quality function deployment, axiomatic design, failure mode
and effect analysis, concurrent engineering; Reverse engineering: scanning methods for reverse engineering, cloud points, NURBS
surfaces, reengineering, tear down approach, bench marking, case studies. (12)
NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT: Design creativity, innovations in design alternatives, S-curve, gathering customer needs,
organizing and prioritizing customer needs, establishing product function, FAST method, establishing system functionality; Concept
generation: information gathering, brain ball, C-sketch/6-3-5 method, morphological analysis; Concept selection, technical feasibility,
ranking, measurement theory, case studies; Role of rapid prototyping in product development. (12)
MATERIALS SELECTION FOR PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT: Performance characteristics of materials, the material selection
process, economics of materials, methods of material selection, materials performance indices, material selection by expert
240
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
systems, value analysis, cradle to cradle reuse practices, composites and advanced materials, case studies. (11)
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS: Intellectual property, steps in patenting,
preparation of patent application, case studies; Product development economics: elements of economic analysis, economic analysis
process, case studies. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Michael F Ashby, “Materials Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth – Heinemann, 2016
2. Karl T Ulrich and Steven D Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”, McGraw Hill, 2015.
3. Nigel Cross, “Engineering Design Methods: Strategies for Product Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2008.
4. Chitale A K and Gupta R C, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
5. Michael Grieves, “Product Life Cycle Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
6. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson, 2003.
18MD26 DESIGN OF AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS

3003
DESIGN OF PROPULSION SYSTEMS: Review of design considerations for components under static and dynamic loading; Design
of I.C engine components - cylinder, piston, connecting rod, crankshaft, flywheel, valves and valve springs; Design principles of
electric vehicle. (10)
DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION ELEMENTS AND BRAKES: Clutches: power transmission requirements of clutches, design of single
and multi-plate clutches, diaphragm clutch, cone clutch and centrifugal clutch; Design of gear box and drive lines; Concepts of
variable transmission systems; Design of power train for vibration; Brakes: brake power requirements, design of drum and disc
brakes, principles of regenerative and anti-lock braking systems. (12)
DESIGN OF STREERING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: Design of steering systems, power assisted steering; Suspension
systems: classification of suspension, design of springs – coil springs, leaf springs, air springs; Design of steering and suspension
systems for vibration. (11)
AUTOMOTIVE BODY DESIGN: Automotive body structural elements: design of automotive beam sections, torsion of thin-wall
members, thin-wall beam section design in automobiles, buckling of thin-walled members, design for body bending and body
torsion- strength and stiffness requirements; Principles of body panel design; Structural requirements for crashworthiness; Design of
body structure for vibration. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bhandari V.B., “Design of Machine Elements”, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. Donald E. Malen, “Fundamentals of Automobile Body Structure Design”, SAE International, 2011.
3. Heinz Heisler, “Vehicle and Engine Technology”, Second Edition. SAE International, 2011.
4. Smith J.H., “An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design”, Butterworth-Heinmann, 2002.
5. Wang J.Y., “Theory of Ground Vehicles”, Second Edition. John Wiley, 2001.
6. Matchinsky W., “Road Vehicle suspensions”, PEP, 2000.
18MD27 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF THERMAL SYSTEMS

3003
SYSTEMS AND MATHEMATICAL MODELLING: Design Principles, workable systems, optimal systems, matching of system
components, economic analysis, depreciation, gradient present worth factor; Equation fitting, nomography, empirical equation,
regression analysis, different modes of mathematical models, selection, computer programmes for models. (11)
MODELLING THERMAL EQUIPMENTS: Modelling heat exchangers, evaporators, condensers, absorption and rectification
columns, compressor, pumps, simulation studies, information flow diagram, solution procedures. (12)
DYNAMIC BEHAVIOUR OF THERMAL SYSTEM: Steady state simulation, Laplace transformation, feedback control loops, stability
analysis, non-linearities. (10)
SYSTEMS OPTIMIZATION: Objective function formulation, constraint equations, mathematical formulation, Calculus method,
dynamic programming, geometric programming, linear programming methods, solution procedures. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
rd
1. Stoecker W F, “Design of Thermal Systems”, 3 Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
2. Nagrath., Gopal M., Control systems engineering, Fourth Edition, Wiley Student Edition, 2008
3. Kapur J N, “Mathematical Modeling”, New Age International Publishers, 2005.
4. McQuiston F C and Parker T D, “Heating, Ventilating and Air conditioning, Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 6 th
Edition (2004), USA.
5. Bejan, A., Tsatsaronis, G. and Michel, M., Thermal Design and Optimization, John Wiley and Sons (1996).
6. Stoecker W F, “Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, TMH, 1985.
241
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
18MD28 BIOMECHANICS OF TISSUES AND JOINTS

3003
PRINCIPLES OF MECHANICS: Review of the principles of mechanics, vector mechanics, resultant forces of coplanar and non-
coplanar and concurrent and non-concurrent forces, parallel force in space, equilibrium of coplanar forces, Newton’s laws of motion,
work and energy, moment of inertia. (12)
HARD AND SOFT TISSUE MECHANICS: Bone structure and composition, mechanical properties of bone, cortical and cancellous
bones, viscoelastic properties, Maxwell and Voight models- anisotropy, electrical properties of bone, fracture mechanisms; Soft
tissue mechanics:pseudo elasticity, nonlinear stress-strain relationship, viscosity, structure, function and mechanical properties of
skin, ligaments and tendons. (12)
BIOMECHANICS OF JOINTS: Skeletal joints, skeletal muscles, basic considerations, basic assumption and limitations, mechanics
of the elbow, mechanics of shoulder, mechanics of spinal column, mechanics of hip, mechanics of knee, mechanics of ankle. (11)
LOCOMOTION: Human locomotion, gait analysis and goniometry, ergonomics, foot pressure measurements – Pedobarograph;
Force platform, mechanics of foot, total hip prosthesis: requirements, different types of components, stress analysis and
instrumentation, knee prosthesis. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. NihatOzkaya and Margareta Nordin, “Fundamentals of Biomechanics: Equilibrium, Motion, And Deformation”, springer- Verlag;
2016.
2. Susan JHall, “Basic Biomechanics”, McGraw hill, Columbus- oh, 2015.
3. Fung Y C, “Biomechanics: Mechanical Properties of Living Tissues”, Springer-Verlag, 2013.
4. Author T Johnson, “Biomechanics & Exercise Physiology”, John Wiley & sons, NY, 2007.
5. GhistaD N, “Biomechanics of Medical Devices”, Macel Dekker, 1982.
18MD29 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

3003
MEMS,MICROSYSTEMS AND SCALING LAWS IN MINIATURIZATION: Review ofMEMS and microsystem products,working
principles of Microsystems: microsensors, microactuators, MEMS and microactuators, microaccelerometer; SCALING LAWS IN
MINIATURIZATION: Scaling in geometry, Scaling in rigid body dynamics, the trimmer force scaling, vector-scaling in electrostatic
forces, electromagnetic forces, scaling in electricity and fluidic dynamics, scaling in heat conducting and heat convection. (10)
MATERIALS AND ENGINEERING MECHANICS FOR MICROSYSTEMS DESIGN: Review of Substrates and wafers, single crystal
Silicon and wafers crystal structure, Si, silicon compounds-SiO2, SiC, Si3N4 and polycrystalline Silicon, Silicon piezoresistors,
gallium arsenside, quartz-piezoelectric crystals; Polymers for MEMS; Conductive polymers; Engineering mechanics: Static bending
of thin plate: circular plates with edge fixed, rectangular plate with all edges fixed and square plates with all edges fixed; Mechanical
vibration and Resonant vibration, Microaccelerometers: design theory and damping coefficients; Thermomechanics and thermal
stresses; Fracture mechanics: stress intensity factors, fracture toughness and interfacial fracture mechanics. (12)
FLUID MECHANICS IN MACRO/MESO SCALES AND MICROSYSTEM FABRICATION PROCESS: Viscosity, flow patterns,
Reynolds number, basic equation in continuum fluid dynamics, laminar fluid flow in circular conduits, incompressible fluid flow in
microconduits: surface tension, capillary effect and micropumping; Fluid flow in sub micrometer and nanoscale-rarefied gas,
Kundsen and Mach number and modelling of microgas flow, Heat conduction in multilayered thin films and solids in submicrometer
scale; Thermal conductivity of thin films, heat conduction equation for thin films; Microsystem fabrication process:Photolithography,
Photoresist, light sources, Ion implanation, diffusion process, thermal oxidation, chemical vapour deposition: principle, reactants in
CVD; Enhanced CVD physical vapour deposition, sputtering, etching: chemical and plasma etching. (13)
MICROMANUFACTURING AND MICROSYSTEM PACKAGING: Review of Bulk micromachining, Isotropic and anisotropic etching:
wet etchants, etch stops, dry etching; Surface micromachining; process, LIGA process, SLIGA process; Microsystem packaging and
its general considerations, essential packaging technologies, die preparation, surface bonding, wire bonding and sealing, three-
dimensional packaging; Assembly of microsytems and selection of packaging materials. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hans H. Gatzen, Volker Saile, Jürg Leuthold, “Micro and Nano Fabrication”, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2015
2. Mark Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, Taylor & Francis, 2011.
3. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture “, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
4. Sze S M, “Semiconductor Devices”, Wiley India, 2008
5. Julian W. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan , Osama O. Awadelkarim, “Microsensors, MEMS, and Smart Devices”, John Wiley and
Sons Ltd, 2001.
6. Julian W Gardner, “Microsensors: Principles and Applications”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2001.
18MD30 NANOMATERIALS AND NANOTECHNOLOGY

3003
ZERO AND ONE-DIMENSIONALNANOSTRUCTURES: Zero– dimensional nanostructures: nanoparticles through homogenous
242
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
nucleation, nanoparticles through the heterogeneous nucleation, kinetically confined synthesis of nanoparticles, epitaxial core –
shell nanoparticles; One dimensional nanostructure- nanowires and Nanorods: spontaneous growth, template-based synthesis,
electro spinning, and lithography. (10)
TWO-DIMENSIONAL NANOSTRUCTURES AND FABRICATION: Two-dimensional nanostructures-thin films: fundamentals of film

growth, vacuum science, Physical Vapor Deposition(PVD), Chemical Vapor Deposition(CVD), Atomic Layer Deposition (ALD),
Electrochemical Deposition, Sol-Gel films.Nanostructures fabrication: lithography, nano manipulation and nanolithography, soft
lithography, assembly of nanoparticles and nanowires, other methods of micro fabrication. (12)
NANOMECHANICS AND NANO ELECTRONICS: Nanomechanics: ahigh-speed review of motion: displacement, velocity,
acceleration and force, Nano mechanical oscillation, feeling faint forces; Nano Electronics: Electron energy bands, electrons in
solids: conductors, insulation and semiconductors, Fermi energy, the density of states for solids, quantum confinement, tunneling,
single electron phenomenon, molecular electronics. (11)
NANOSCALE HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID MECHANICS: Nanoscale heat transfer: Nanoscale heat, conduction, convection,
radiation; Nanoscalefluid mechanics: fluids at the Nanoscale- major concepts, flow fluids flow at the Nano scale, applications of
Nanofluidics; Nanophotonics: photonics properties of Nanomaterials, near-field light, optical tweezers, photonic crystals. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rogers, Pennathur and Adams, “Nanotechnology: Understanding Small Systems”, CRC Press, 3rd edition, 2015.
2. Guozhong Cao and Ying Wang, “Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties, and Applications” 2 nd edition, World
Scientific, 2011
18MD31 PRODUCTION TOOL DESIGN

3003
DESIGN OF CUTTING TOOLS: Cutting tool materials, properties, classification, selection, tool wear, tool life; Single point tool:
nomenclature, types and styles, design of tools for turning, boring, shaping, planing and slotting operations, form tools, tools and
holders for CNC applications; Multipointcutters: nomenclature, classification and selection of drills, reamers, taps, dies and milling
cutters; design of broaches and hobs. (11)
DESIGN OF JIGS AND FIXTURES: Principles of locating and clamping, design of drill jigs for conventional, SPM and CNC
machining centres, different type of jigs, jig bushes, calculation of drilling forces, process capabilities in drilling, chip disposal;
Fixtures - estimation of machining forces, pneumatic and hydraulic clamping, variable clamping force vices, vacuum chucks,
hydraulic work supports, tool setting gauges; Design of turning, milling and grinding fixtures; Fixtures for inspection, assembly,
welding and heat treatment; Modular fixtures. (11)
DESIGN OF PRESS TOOLS: Study of CNC shearing, press brake, mechanical and hydraulic power presses, accessories for power
presses-coiler and de-coiler, straightening, feed units, fundamentals of blanking and piercing, tool clearances, estimation of
tonnage, standard die sets, design of simple and compound tools, design of progressive tools with manual and auto feed, die
materials, bending, drawing and forming tools. (11)
DESIGN OF DIES: Plastic injection moulding dies: plastic materials, shrinkage, two plate mold design, standard mold plates, parting
line, runner and gate design, mold cooling, ejection methods, tool materials, runner less molds, multi-color injection molding,
simulation of mold flow; Introduction to Thermo Setting dies, blow molding dies, extrusion dies, forging dies, pressure die casting
dies, powder metallurgy dies and rubber molding dies. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Joshi P H, “Jigs and Fixtures”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. Ostergaurd D E, “Basic Die Making”, McGraw Hill, 2013.
3. Donaldson.C and LeCain.C.H, "Tool Design", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2012.
4. Pye R C W, “Injection Mold Design”, East West Press, 2000.
5. Kempster M H A, “An Introduction to Jig and Tool Design”, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd, 1998.
6. Arshinov.V and Alekseev.G, "Metal cutting Theory and Cutting Tool Design", MIR Publishers, Moscow, 1976.
18MD32 HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING

3003
INTRODUCTION: Definition, human technological system, multidisciplinary engineering approach, human–machine system,
manual, mechanical, automated system, human system reliability, conceptual design, advanced development, detailed design and
development, human system modeling; Information Input:input and processing, text, graphics, symbols, codes, visual display of
dynamic information, auditory, tactual, olfactory displays, speech communications; Human output and control:physical work, manual
material handling, motor skill, human control of systems, controls and data entry devices, hand tools and devices. (12)
WORKPLACE DESIGN: Applied anthropometry, workspace design and seating, arrangement of components within a physical
space, interpersonal aspects of work place design, design of repetitive task, design of manual handling task, work capacity, stress,
fatigue. (11)
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Illumination, climate, temperature, noise, motion, sound, vibration; Human factors applications:
Human error, accidents, human factors and the automobile, organizational and social aspects, steps according to ISO/DIS6385,
243
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
OSHA’s approach, virtual environments. (10)
BIOMECHANICSAND BIO-THERMODYNAMICS: Biostatic mechanics, statics of rigid bodies, upper extremity of hand, lower
extremity and foot, bending, lifting and carrying, biodynamic mechanics, human body kinematics, kinetics, impact and collision;
Biothermodynamics and Bioenergitics: Bio-thermal fundamentals, human operator heat transfer, human system bioenergetics,
thermoregulatory physiology, human operator thermos-regularity, passive operator, active operator, heat stress. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bridger R S, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, London, 2017.
2. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2013.
3. Neville Anthony Stanton, Alan Hedge, KarelBrookhuis, Eduardo Salas, Hal W. Hendrick “Handbook of Human Factors and
Ergonomics Methods” CRC Press, 2004
4. Chandler Allen Phillips, “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2000.
18MD33 ROTOR DYNAMICS

3003
ROTOR DYNAMICS AND MODELS: Co-ordinate systems: steady state rotor motion, elliptical motion, single degree of freedom
systems, free and forced vibrations, total motion; The Laval-Jeffcott rotor model: the two degrees of freedom rotor system,
translational motion, natural frequencies and natural modes; steady state response to unbalance, the effect of flexible support. (12)
TORSIONAL VIBRATION IN ROTATING MACHINERY: Modeling of rotating machinery shafts of multi degree of freedom systems,
determination of natural frequencies and mode shapes of branched systems. (10)
RIGID ROTOR DYNAMICS AND CRITICAL SPEEDS: Rigid disk equation: rigid rotor dynamics, rigid rotor on flexible shaft;
Whirling of an unbalanced simple elastic rotor: simple shafts with several disks, effect of axial stiffness, and determination of
bending critical speeds. (12)
BALANCING AND CONDITION MONITORING OF ROTORS: Balancing: single plane balancing, multi-plane balancing, balancing
of rigid rotors, balancing of flexible rotors; Condition monitoring - noise spectrum, real time analysis, knowledge based expert
systems. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Timoshenko S, Young D H and Weaver W, “Vibration Problems in Engineering”, John Wiley, 2017.
2. Yamamoto T and Ishida Y, “Linear and Nonlinear Rotor Dynamics: A Modern Treatment with Applications”, John Wiley and
Sons Inc., New York, 2013.
3. WengJeng Chen and Edger J Gunter, “Introduction to Dynamics of Rotor – Bearing Systems”, Trafford Publishing Ltd., London,
2007
4. Rao J S, “Rotor Dynamics”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
5. Tondl A, “Some Problems of Rotor Dynamics”, Chapman and Hall limited, New York, 1973.
18MD34 OPTIMUM DESIGN OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

3003
NONLINEAR OPTIMIZATION: Unconstrained optimization: one-dimensional optimization- elimination methods- Dichotomous
Search Method- Fibonacci method-golden section methods- quadratic interpolation method-direct root methods; Multivariable
optimization: direct search methods, univariate method, pattern search methods, Hookes and Jeeves method, descent methods,
steepest descent, newton methods; Solving design optimisation and process optimisation problems. (11)
CONSTRAINED MULTIVARIABLE OPTIMIZATION: Multivariable optimization: direct methods, cutting plane method, indirect
methods, transformation techniques, and basic approach of penalty function method, Khun-Tucker conditions, Lagrangianmethod;
Solving design optimisation and process optimisation problems. (12)
INTEGER AND DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Integer programming: solution techniques-graphical method- the branch and bound
technique; Dynamic programming: Principle of optimality, computational procedure, calculus method of solution; Solving design
optimisation and process optimisation problems. (11)
NON-TRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION: Genetic algorithms, simulated annealing, neural networks, particle swarm
optimization,Teaching–learning-based optimization (TLBO); Solving design optimisation and process optimisation problems. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design”, Prentice-Hall India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
2. Singiresu S Rao, “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice”, Wiley-Interscience, 2009.
3. David E Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning”, Addison-Wesley Pub Co., 1989.
4. Harvey M Salkin, “Integer Programming”, Addison-Wesley Pub. Co. 1989.
5. Dimitri P Bertsekas, “Dynamic Programming: Deterministic and Stochastic Models”, Prentice Hall, 1987.
244
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
18MD35 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
3003
CFD AND THERMO-FLUIDS: Review to the physics of thermo-fluids, governing equations - continuity, momentum, and energy
conservation - modelling, grid generation, simulation, and high-performance computing. (10)
COMPUTATIONAL APPROACH: Finite difference method, forward, backward and central difference schemes, explicit and implicit
methods, properties of numerical solution methods, stability analysis, and error estimation, difference between FDM and FVM,
approximation of surface integrals, approximation of volume integrals, interpolation practices, implementation of boundary
conditions, specification for a CFD simulation, requirements for accurate analysis and validation for multi scale problems. (12)
CFD TECHNIQUES: Mathematical classification of flow, hyperbolic, parabolic, elliptic and mixed flow types, Lax - Wendroff
technique, MacCormack’s technique, relaxation technique, artificial viscosity, ADI technique, pressure correction technique, SIMPLE
algorithm, upwind schemes, flux vector splitting. (12)
TURBULENCE MODELING AND CFD APPLICATIONS: Turbulence energy equation, one-equation model, two-equation models
(k-ω and k- ε models), review on advanced turbulence models, applications to fluid flow and heat transfer problems. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Chung T J, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
2. Muralidhar K and Sundararajan T, “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, 2009.
3. Versteeg H K and Malalasekara W, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics” - The Finite Volume Method', Longman,
2007.
4. Joel H Ferziger and MilovanPeric, “Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics”, Springer Publications, 2002.
5. John D Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics – The Basics with Applications”, McGraw Hill, 1995.
18MD36 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND EXPERT SYSTEMS

3003
HUMAN AND MACHINE INTELLIGENCE AND SMART SYSTEMS: Concepts of fifth generation computing, programming in AI
environment, developing artificial intelligence system, natural language processing, neural networks; Forward chaining, backward
chaining, use of probability and fuzzy logic, Semantic nets, structure and objects, ruled systems for semantic nets; certainty factors,
automated learning. (12)
LANGUAGES USED IN AI AND EXPERT SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT: Using PROLOG to design expert systems, converting rules
to PROLOG, conceptual example, introduction to LISP, function evaluation, lists, predicates, rule creation; Definition, choice of
domain, collection of knowledge base, selection of inference mechanism, case studies of expert system development in design and
manufacturing. (12)
EXPERT SYSTEM TOOLS: Expert systems, controlling reasoning, rule based system, canonical systems, rules and meta rules,
associative nets and frame systems, graphs trees and networks, representing uncertainty, probability in expert systems-learning,
forms of learning, inductive learning, decision trees, knowledge in learning, heuristic classification, heuristic matching, case studies
in expert systems, MYCIN, Meta-Dendral, general structure of an expert system shell, examples of creation of an expert system
using an expert system tool, fundamentals of object oriented programming, creating structure and object, object operations, invoking
procedures, programming applications, object oriented expert system. (11)
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF AI AND EXPERT SYSTEMS: Robotic vision systems, image processing techniques, application
to object recognition and inspection, automatic speech recognition. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Levine et al, "A Comprehensive Guide to AI and Expert Systems", McGraw Hill Inc., 1988.
2. Henry C Mishkoff, "Understanding AI", BPB Publication, New Delhi, 1988.
3. Peter Jackson, “Introduction to Expert Systems”, Addison Wesley, 2000.
4. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, 1995.
5. Elaine Rich et al, “Artificial Intelligence”, McGraw Hill, 2009.
18MD37ADVANCED STRENGTH OF MATERIALS

3003
CURVED BEAMS AND BEAMS ON ELASTIC SUPPORTS: Circumferential stress at a point in a curved beam, correction of
circumferential stresses in curved beams, deflection of curved Beams, Wrinklerbach formula-limitations, curved beam with
restrained ends; Closed ring subjected to a concentrated load and uniform load: beam with a concentrated load; Use of principle of
superposition. beam supported on equally spaced separate elastic supports; UDL over part of the beam, semi-infinite beam
subjected to loads at its end with concentrated load near its end. (12)
FLAT PLATES IN BENDING: Plates in which bending action is dominant, small deflections. stress in a circular plate with UDL,
simply supported and fixed edges-concentrated load; Stresses in square and rectangular plates with UDL, concentrated load at
center, strain energy of a plate. (11)
245
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
ROTATING DISKS ANDTORSION OF NON-CIRCULARSECTIONS: Solid disk, disk with a central hole with external and internal
pressures, disks of uniform strength, plastic collapse of rotating disks; Rotating cylinders (circular); Disk of varying thickness: torsion
of bar having rectangular sections, elastic membrane (soap film) analogy hollow thin walled tubes, thin wall torsion members with
restrained ends, elastic torsion of a circular cross section. (11)
THICK WALLED CYLINDERS: Lame solution for principal stresses, maximum stresses, radial deflection, failure theories,
applications, methods of increasing the elastic strength by pre-stressing, analysis of effects of stresses of shrinking a hollow cylinder
made of thin walled laminations, auto frettage, stress components and radial displacements for constant temperature. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ghosh D, Advanced Strength of Materials”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Srinath L S, “Advanced Mechanical of Solids”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 2011.
3. Pachauri and Simant, “Advanced Strength of Materials”, PragatiPrakashan, 250001(India), 2008.
4. Boresi A P and Sidebottom O M, “Advanced Mechanics of Materials”, John Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2002.
5. Cook R D and Young, “Advanced Mechanics of Materials”, John Wiley Co., New Delhi, 1998.
6. Den Hartog, “Advanced Strength of Materials”, McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi, 1987.
18MD38 DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS

3003
CATEGORIZATION OF STRESSES IN PRESSURE VESSELS: Overview of pressure vessels, development of pressure vessel
construction codes, factor of safety, design by rule, design by analysis, modes of failure, design for cyclic loading, stress intensity,
stress limits, practical aspects of stress categorization, shape factor considerations. (11)
DESIGN OF CYLINDRICAL SHELLS: Introduction, thin-shell equations, thick-shell equations, buckling of cylindrical shells,
discontinuity stresses in pressure vessels, design of heads and covers, hemispherical heads under internal pressure; Stress
concentration about a circular hole: cylindrical and spherical shell with a circular hole under internal pressure; Reinforcement of
openings; Case Studies: Sizing of a pressure vessel, nozzle reinforcement assessment. (12)
FATIGUE ASSESSMENT OF PRESSURE VESSELS: Introduction, exemption from fatigue analysis, S–N curves, local strain
approach to fatigue, design fatigue curves, cumulative damage, cycle counting, fatigue evaluation procedure, example of fatigue
evaluation, bolted flange connections, gasket joint behaviour, design of bolts, closure: Case Studies: fatigue evaluation using elastic
analysis, fatigue evaluation using the simplified inelastic analysis method. (12)
DESIGN OF VESSEL SUPPORTS: Lug support, support skirts, saddle supports, simplified inelastic methods in pressure vessel
design- Elastic analysis incorporating modified Poisson’s ratio, Elastic analysis to address plastic strain intensification; Case
Studies: Structural evaluation of a reactor vessel support. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Stanley, M. Wales, “Chemical process equipment, selection and Design. Buterworths series in Chemical Engineering, 2016.
2. Somnath Chattopadhyay, “Pressure Vessels Design and Practice”, CRC Press 2004.
3. John F. Harvey, Theory and Design of Pressure Vessels, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2001.
4. William. J., Bees, “Approximate Methods in the Design and Analysis of Pressure Vessels and Piping”, Pre ASME-Pressure
Vessels and Piping Conference, 1997.
5. Henry H. Bedner, “Pressure Vessels, Design Hand Book, CBS publishers and Distributors, 1991.
18MD39 FRACTURE MECHANICS

3003
FRACTURE MECHANISMS IN METALS AND NONMETALS: Linear elastic fracture mechanics, elastic plastic fracture mechanics,
fracture toughness testing; Fracture mechanisms in metals: Ductile fracture, cleavage, the ductile-brittle transition, intergranular
fracture; Fracture mechanisms in non-metals: Structure and properties of polymers, yielding and fracture in polymers, fiber-
reinforced plastics, ceramics and ceramic composites, concrete and rock. (10)
CREEP: Mechanics of creep, inter-granular, trans-granular creep, creep test, creep strain rate-time curves, deformation mechanism
map, high temperature properties of materials long time creep-stress-time relations creep contribution to the fracture mechanism;
DVM, DVL German-standard, Hatifield time yield test. (12)
APPLICATION TO STRUCTURES: Linear elastic fracture mechanics, CTOD design curve, failure assessment diagrams - original
concept, J-based FAD, application to welded structures, probabilistic fracture mechanics. (11)
FATIGUE CRACK PROPAGATION AND COMPUTATIONAL FRACTURE MECHANICS: Similitude in fatigue, empirical fatigue
crack growth equations, crack closure, growth of short cracks, micro-mechanisms of fatigue, fatigue crack growth experiments,
damage tolerance methodology. Computational fracture mechanics: Overview of numerical methods, traditional methods in
computational fracture mechanics, the energy domain integral, mesh design, linear elastic convergence study, analysis of growing
cracks. (12)
Total L: 45
246
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Surjya Kumar Maiti, “Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2015.
2. Prashant Kumar, “Elements of Fracture Mechanics”, McGraw Higher Ed, 2009.
3. TribikramKundu, “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics”, Taylor & Francis, 2008.
4. Anderson T L, “Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications”, Taylor and Francis, 2005.
5. ASM Handbook- Vol.10, "Failure Analysis and Prevention", Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 1995.
18MD40 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS

3003
OVERVIEW OF EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS: Optical methods work as optical computers, multi-scale analysis in
experimental mechanics; Stress, strain and displacement fields; Physical principle of strain gauges, photoelasticity and Moiré;
Moiré, brittle coatings and holography; Hologram interferometry and speckle methods; Introduction to shearography, TSA, DIC and
caustics, fringe patterns – richness of qualitative information, multi-scale analysis in experimental mechanics; selection of an
experimental technique. (11)
TRANSMISSION PHOTOELASTICITY: Ordinary and extraordinary rays, light ellipse, passage of light through a crystal plate,
retardation plates, stress-optic law, plane polariscope, Jones calculus, circular polariscope, determination of photoelastic
parameters at an arbitrary point; Tardy’s method of compensation, calibration of photoelastic materials, fringe thinning
methodologies, fringe ordering in photoelasticity; Miscellaneous topics in transmission photoelasticity: Resolving the ambiguity on
the principal stress direction, determination of the sign of the boundary stress, compatibility conditions, role of elastic constants on
stress field, model to prototype relations, properties of photoelastic model materials. (11)
THREE DIMENSIONAL PHOTOELASTICITY AND DIGITAL PHOTOELASTICITY: overview of digital photoelasticity; Photoelastic
coatings: Introduction, correction factors for photoelastic coatings, coating materials, selection of coating thickness, industrial
application of photoelastic coatings, calibration of photoelastic coatings; Brittle coatings: Introduction to brittle coatings, analysis of
brittle coatings. (11)
STRAIN GAUGES: Introduction to strain gauges, strain sensitivity of a strain gauge, bridge sensitivity, rosettes, strain gauge alloys,
carriers and adhesives, performance of strain gauge system, temperature compensation, two-wire and three-wire circuits; Strain
gauge selection, bonding of a strain gauge; Applications: soldering, accounting for transverse sensitivity effects, correction factors
for special applications; Special gauges- environmental effects, torque gauge, stress gauge, single element strain gauge as stress
gauge; Evaluation of SIF by strain gauges, strip gauge, single element strain gauge to evaluate SIF. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sadhu Singh, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, Khanna Publishers, 2009.
2. K. Ramesh, “E-Book on Experimental Stress Analysis”, IIT Madras, 2009.
3. W.N. Sharpe (Ed.), “Springer Handbook of Experimental Solid Mechanics”, Springer, 2008.
4. J.W. Dally and W.F. Riley,” Experimental Stress Analysis”, McGraw-Hill, 1991.
5. G.S. Holister, “Experimental Stress Analysis, Principles and Methods”, Cambridge University Press, 1987.
6. L.S. Srinath, M.R. Raghavan, K. Lingaiah, G. Gargesa, B. Pant, and K. Ramachandra, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, Tata Mc
Graw Hill, 1984.
18MD41 DESIGN OF PRESS TOOLS

3003
SHEET METAL BEHAVIOR AND FUNDAMENTALS OF DIES: Sheet metal and its behavior in metal stamping process, plasticity
theories, external influences on the part and their impact on plastic deformation, shear of metal in cutting operation, Bending and
forming of sheet metal material - movement of metal; Metal stamping die: description of a die, dies according to their construction,
dies according to their effect on the structure of material, new methods in metalworking, fine blanking. (11)
METALWORKING MACHINERY AND CONSTRUCTION OF DIES: Parts of the press, press operating parameters, classification of
presses, press mounting, performance and productivity, electro-erosive machining; Metal stamping dies: tolerancing systems,
fabrication and assembly of die components, mounting of blocks, machining of blocks, heat treatment. (11)
BLANKING AND PIERCING OPERATIONS: Sheet metal cutting process, forces involved in the sheet metal cutting process,
alignment of cutting tools, design of sheet metal cutting tools, cutting clearances, punching and blanking pressure, cutting force with
inclined cutting surfaces, stripping pressure, scrap and hole size recommendations, practical advices and restrictions, progressive
die design. (12)
BENDING AND FORMING OPERATIONS: Stress, strain, elongation and compression during bending, bend radius, radius of
forming tools, edge formability, types of bending operations, spring back, surface flatness after bending, forming, bending and
forming pressure calculations. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Cyril Donaldson, George H.Lecain, V.C. Goold, JoyjeetGhose, “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, 2012.
2. IvanaSuchy, “Handbook of Die Design”, McGraw Hill, 2006.
3. David A Smith, “Die Design Handbook”, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 1990.
247
59TH ACM 09.06.2018
18MD42 HUMAN BODY VIBRATION DIAGNOSTICS
3003
WHOLE BODY VIBRATION: Vibration and human response, Categorization of vibration (deterministic, random), effects of
vibration-criteria, limits, vibration analysis procedure, human vibration-definition, types; standardization bodies-ISO, CEN, National,
BSI; Sources-Road, off-road, marine, rail transports; Exposure to whole body vibration-Vibration discomfort Measurement
parameters and quantification of the vibration level, frequency response of human whole body vibration , vibration measurement-
setup and stimuli, transducers used , vehicle human interface mathematical model-half car, quarter car, equation of motion (multi
degree of freedom)-Lagrange’s approach, matrix approach.. (12)
BIODYNAMICS, SEATING DYNAMICS AND HAND ARM VIBRATION: Body transmissibility- apparent mass, models,
Transmissibility, SEAT value, Seat Testing, Biomechanical models; Sources, exposure to hand arm vibration-White finger
syndrome, frequency response of hand arm vibration, vibration measurement - setup and stimuli, transducers used, machine human
interface model, equation of motion (Multi degree of freedom)-Lagrange’s approach, matrix approach. (12)
MEASUREMENT EVALUATION AND ASSESSMENT OF HUMAN VIBRATION: Frequency analysis, digital frequency weighting,
amplitude analysis,ISO evaluation of human exposure to whole body vibration - fatigue decreased proficiency boundary, exposure
limit, reduced comfort boundary-BS 6841, ISO 2631, standards for assessment of hand arm vibration-BS 6842 (1987) and ISO 5349
(1986),ISO 5349 (2001)standards for determining the vibration emission value of tools and hand-guided machines-ISO 8662(1, 2,
3…14),standards for testing the dynamic performance of antivibration gloves-ISO 13753, ISO10819, 1/3 octave frequency analysis.
(11)
HEALTH EFFECTS OF VIBRATION, THEIR DIAGNOSIS, AND PREVENTION: Vascular disorders-primary Raynaud's disease,
secondary Raynaud's phenomenon, trauma, Occlusive vascular disease, neurogenic, Stockholm workshop scale, preventative
measures- managerial, technical, medical, and individual, treatments for injury and disease. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Neil.J. Mansfield, "Human response to vibration", CRC Press, 2005.
2. Thomson W T, "Theory of Vibration with Applications", Prentice Hall of India, 1997.
3. M J Griffin,"Handbook of Human Vibration", Academic Press, 1990.
4. P M Nelson,"Transportation Noise Reference Book", Butterworths, 1987.
5. K D Kryter, "The Effects of Noise on Man, Academic Press", 1985.
6. ISO 2631/1. “Evaluation of human exposure to whole-body vibration”, Geneva: ISO, 1985.
18MD43 ADVANCED FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS

3003
BENDING OF PLATES AND SHELLS: Review of elasticity equations; Bending of plates and shells – finite element formulation of
plate and shell elements, conforming and non-conforming elements, C0 and C1 continuity elements, degenerated shell elements,
application and examples. (11)
NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS: Introduction, non-linear differential equation, solution procedures for non-linear problems, linearization
and directional derivative; Material non-linearity: Analysis of axially loaded bars, significance of sampling rate, material models for
isotropic, orthotropic, anisotropic, hyper-elastic, hardening rules; Geometric non-linearity: Basic continuum mechanics concepts,
governing differential equations and weak forms; Introduction to contact problems. (12)
TIME-DEPENDENT ANALYSIS: Numerical integration in time, natural frequencies of one dimensional bar, time dependent one-
dimensional bar analysis; Time dependent heat transfer -transient thermal analysis; Solution of one dimensional problems. (12)
ERROR, ERROR ESTIMATION AND CONVERGENCE: Sources of error, ill-conditioning, the condition number, diagonal decay
test, residuals, discretization error, convergence rate, multi-mesh extrapolation, mesh revision methods, gradient recovery and
smoothing, A-Posteriori error estimate, adaptive meshing. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Reddy J.N, “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
2. Rao S S, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Elsevier, 2014.
3. Ashgar Bhatti M, “Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Applications”, Wiley India, 2012.
4. Logan D L, “A First Course in the Finite Element Method”, Thomson Learning, 2010.
5. Cook, R.D., Malkus, D. S., Plesha,M.E., and Witt,R.J “ Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, Wiley, 2007.
6. Bathe K.J., “Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis”, Prentice Hall, 1990.
AUDIT COURSES
18MD81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18MD82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

248
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING (2018 REGULATIONS)
*

I SEMESTER
18MN01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MN02 Advanced Operations Research 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18MN03 Enterprise Resource Planning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MN04 Simulation Modeling and Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MN05 Operations Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MN51 Operations Research Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18MN81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 22 hrs 14 4 4 18 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18MN06 Engineering Economic Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MN07 Quality Engineering and Work Study 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MN08 Supply Chain Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Modeling and Analysis of Advanced
18MN09 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Manufacturing Systems
18MN_ Professional Elective – 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN52 Industrial Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18MN61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18MN82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 26 hrs 18 0 8 22 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18MN53 Manufacturing Systems Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18MN71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18MN72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES
18MN21 Business Models and Entrepreneurship 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN22 Computer Integrated Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN23 E Business 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN24 Advanced Optimization Techniques 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18MN25 Facilities Location and Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN26 Financial and Cost Accounting 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN27 Knowledge Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN28 Lean Six Sigma in Manufacturing and Service 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN29 Logistics and Distribution Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN30 Marketing Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN31 Pricing and Revenue Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN32 Product Analysis and Cost Optimization 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN33 Project Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN34 Safety and Environment Management System 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN35 Sequencing and Scheduling 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN36 Service and Operations Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN37 Total Productive Maintenance 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MN38 Value Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Waste Disposal Management and Occupational
18MN39 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Hazards
18MN40 Human Factors Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
249
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18MN01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY

2203
REGRESSION AND CORRELATION: Curve fitting, method of least squares- inferences based on the least squares estimator -
basis of control charts - control charts for variables - 𝑋, R and s charts - control charts for attributes – p, np ,c and u charts. (8+7)
(8+7)
minimal cuts and minimal paths, state dependent systems. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Richard A Johnson, Irwin Miller and John Freund’s, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2018.
New Delhi, 2016.
18MN02 ADVANCED OPERATIONS RESEARCH

3204
LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Review of the principles of operations research; Linear programming: Formulation of linear
programming problems, simplex algorithm, degeneracy, cycling and bland anti-cycling rules, revised simplex method, duality; dual
simplex method – primal dual method; sensitivity analysis. (11+8)
TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS: Formulation of a general transportation problem ,types of transportation
problem: North-west corner method, Least cost method, Vogel’s approximation method, Stepping stone method - MODI algorithm,
loops in a transportation problem, optimality in transportation problem, variations of a transportation problem and trans-shipment
problem; Assignment problem :Mathematical formulation and solution methods of the assignment problem, variations of the
assignment problem. (12+8)
PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Project planning, project scheduling, project controlling, constructing the project network, dummy
activities and events, rules for network construction, critical path, floats, project evaluation and review techniques, applications -
PERT/Cost analysis, costs and networks and lean cost scheduling rules. (10+6)
GAME THEORY: Two people zero sum games: maximin and minimax principles - mixed strategies, expected pay-off, method of
oddments - dominance principle, game by matrix method; Two person zero sum 2 x n game - graphical method, 2 x n or m x 2
game - linear programming method, algebraic method; 3 x 3 games with mixed strategy by the method of oddment and iterative;
Markov chains: matrices and matrix multiplication, transition matrix, modelling a situation with a Markov chain
UNCONVENTIONAL OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Genetic algorithms, simulated annealing, particle swarm optimization, ant
colony optimization, neural networks – algorithms and applications, case studies in industrial engineering using genetic algorithms
and simulated annealing. (12+8)
Total L: 45+T: 30=75

REFERENCES:
1. Hamdy A. Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction”, Pearson Education India, 9th edition, 2014.
2. R. Panneerselvam, “Operations Research”, PHI Learning, 2009.
3. F. Hillier and G. Lieberman, “Introduction to Operations Research”, McGraw-Hill, 8th edition, 2004.
4. Wayne L. Winston, “Operations Research: Applications and Algorithms”, Brooks/Cole, 4th edition, 2003.
18MN03 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING

3003
FUNDAMENTALS OF ERP SYSTEMS: ERP an overview, enterprise an overview, ERP as integrated management information
system; Evolution of ERP, benefits of ERP, ERP vs. traditional information systems, advantages of ERP; MRP II model and
organizational processes. (10)
250
59th ACM 09.06.2018
BUSINESS PROCESS REENGINEERING (BPR) SYSTEM: Need and challenges, management concerns about BPR, BPR to build
the business; Model for ERP, basic constituents of ERP, selection criteria for ERPpackages; Procurement – Systematic way for
ERP package, features of various modules of ERP. (10)
ERP IMPLEMENTATION: ERP – implementation, lifecycle, implementation methodology, hidden costs in implementation,
organizing the implementation, vendors, consultants and users, project management and monitoring, issues in customizing ERP
systems for organizations, need for training; Finance – manufacturing ,human resource, plant maintenance, materials management,
quality management, sales and distribution. (13)
ERP PACKAGES AND CASE STUDIES: SAP-R/3 – SAP HANA – MFG/PRO – IFS/AVALON – ORACLE. Comparison between
different ERP packages; Survey of Indian ERP packages regarding their coverage, performance and cost – top management
concerns and ERP systems – extended ERP (ERP II) - HRM, finance, production, materials, sales and distribution; Advance
planning optimization through Internet of Things. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David L OLSON, “Managerial Issues of Enterprise Resource Planning Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2004.
2. Rahul V Altekar, “Enterprise Wide Resource Planning – Theory and Practice”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Alexis Leon, “ERP Demystified”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 2003.
4. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkitakrishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning-Concepts and Practice”, Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited, 2003.
18MN04 SIMULATION MODELING AND ANALYSIS

3003
SYSTEM SIMULATION: Definition, history, nature of computer modeling and simulation, limitations of simulation, areas of
application, components of a system, types of simulation, discrete and continuous systems, steps in simulation study; Simulation of
Queuing Systems - single server and multi-server models, simulation of inventory system, simulation of reliability problem. (10)
RANDOM NUMBER GENERATION AND TESTING: Techniques for generating random numbers:midsquare method,midproduct
method, constant multiplier technique, additive congruential method, linear congruential method, combined linear congruential
generators, feedback shift register generators; Tests for random numbers:Frequency test, Kolmogorov-Smirnov test, chi-square
test; Independence test: runs up and runs down, runs above and below the mean;Autocorrelation test, Gap test, Poker test. (12)
RANDOM VARIATE GENERATION: Inverse transform technique: Exponential distribution, uniform distribution;Weibull distribution,
Triangular distribution. Empirical continuous distribution, generating approximate normal variates, Erlangdistribution, empirical
discrete distribution, discrete uniform distribution, Poisson distribution, geometric distribution; Acceptance - rejection technique -
Poisson distribution, gamma distribution. (11)
MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS SIMULATION: Input Modeling:Steps to build a useful model of input data, data collection,
identifying the distribution with data, parameter estimation, suggested estimators, goodness of fit tests, selecting input models
without data, models of arrival processes; Variance reduction techniques: antithetic variables, calibration and validation of models;
Types of simulation with respect to output analysis: stochastic nature of output data, measures of performance and their estimation,
output analysis for terminating simulation, output analysis for steady state simulation, objectives and performance measures of
manufacturing systems modeling, modeling system randomness,sources of randomness, machine downtime; Case studies -Study
of various simulation software, simulation of manufacturing systems, material handling system. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Law A M, “Simulation Modeling and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
2. NarsinghDeo, “System Simulation with Digital Computer”, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
3. Jerry Banks, John S, Carson II, Barry L Nelson and David M Nicol, “Discrete Event System Simulation”, Prentice Hall Inc.,
2006.
4. Gordon G, “Systems Simulation”, Prentice Hall Ltd., 2006.
5. Francis Neelamkovil, “Computer Simulation and Modeling”, John Wiley and Sons, 1987.
18MN05 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

3003
OPERATIONS AND PRODUCTION PROCESS: Operations: Operations function, globalization, factors affecting operation
management, new trends in operation management. Operations strategy – forming operation strategies, strategy deployment, world
class manufacturing practices; understanding processes: Design of processes – types of production processes, major factors
affecting process design decisions. Process Planning- steps in process planning, make-or-buy decision, process analysis,
automated process plan, productivity measurement, product design and process selection (11)
DESIGNING, PLANNING AND CONTROL OF OPERATIONS: Facilities layout : globalization of operations, factors affecting
location decisions, location planning methods, other issues, basic layout, designing product, process layout, hybrid layout, layout
design procedures- CRAFT and ALDEP; Capacity Planning : capacity and strategy, managing demand, break-even analysis;
Forecasting : strategic role of forecasting, components of forecasting demand, forecasting methods- time series methods,
regression methods, seasonal forecasting, cyclic forecasting, accuracy of forecasts. Aggregate Production Planning - framework,
basic strategies, approaches to aggregate planning, graphical, empirical and linear programming. (12)
251
59th ACM 09.06.2018
INVENTORY ANALYSIS AND CONTROL: Definitions, elements of inventory management, Inventory classification & control
systems - ABC, XYZ, FSN, VED. Material management, inventory control, Lot sizing techniques, models of inventory, purchase
model with instantaneous replenishment and without shortages, manufacturing models without shortages, purchase model with
Service level, inventory models with price breaks, quantity discounts, inventory order policies, Inventory models under uncertainty.
(10)
SCHEDULING OPERATIONS and APPLICATION OF LEAN PRODUCTION SYSTEM: Scheduling and control in the job shop,
priority rules and techniques, shop floor control, Gantt chart, tools of shop floor control constraints in a manufacturing system, Drum-
Buffer-Rope (DBR) methodology; Lean Management: Philosophy of Lean Management, creating Lean Enterprise, waste
elimination; JIT :Elements of JIT, Changes in the manufacturing architecture, lot-size reduction, set-up reduction through SMED,
Kanban as a control tool; Production planning and control in JIT : push and pull scheduling, kanban system, design of kanban
quantities; Continuous improvement : Task force for continuous improvement, quality circle, project based small group improvement
activities (PBSGIA), visual control aids for improvement. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jay Heizer and Barry Render, “Operations Management”, Pearson Education India, 11th edition, 2015.
2. Roberta S Russell and Bernard W Taylor III, “Operations Management”, Wiley India Private Limited 7 th edition, 2012.
3. Mahadevan B, “Operations Management; Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education India, 2nd edition, 2010.
4. Pannerselvam R, “Production and Operations Management”, Prentice Hall India, 2 nd Edition, 2008.
5. Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier, “Operations Management” by Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier; Cengage Learning 9th
edition, 2002.
6. Bedworth D K, “Integrated Production Control Systems Management, Analysis, Design”, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1982.
18MN51 OPERATIONS RESEARCH LABORATORY

0042
TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION:
1. Linear and non-linear optimization, inventory and project management.

2. Use of statistical software for design of experiments, control charts, FMEA, reliability and forecasting.
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Laboratory Manual prepared by the Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology.
2. Frederick S. Hillier, Gerald J. Lieberman, Bodhibrata Nag and Preetam Basu, “Introduction to Operations Research”,
McGrawHill Education New Delhi, India, 2012.
SEMESTER II
18MN06 ENGINEERING ECONOMIC ANALYSIS

3003
TIME VALUE OF MONEY AND EVALUATION OF TANGIBLE ALTERNATIVES: Interest and time value of money : Simple
interest, compound interest, nominal interest rates, effective interest rates, continuous compounding ,compound interest factors,
cash flow diagrams ,calculation of time value equivalences, single payments, multiple payments, continuous interest payments.
Present worth comparison: Conditions for PW comparison, Rule 72, Present Worth comparison patterns, PW equivalence, Net
Present Worth; Comparison of assets, unequal lives, infinite lives, comparison of deferred investments; Valuation: bond valuation,
equivalent annual worth comparison ,situations for EUAC; Rate of return calculations: Internal rate of return(IRR), Minimum
acceptable rate of return(MARR). (11)
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND REPLACEMENT ANALYSIS: Development of alternatives, classification of alternatives, IRR
analysis of mutually exclusive alternatives, analysis of independent alternatives, alternatives with unequal lives, reinvestment
dependent alternatives. Replacement studies: Current salvage value of the defender, defender and challenger with unequal lives,
replacement due to deterioration, replacement due to obsolescence, replacement due to inadequacy; Economic life for cyclic
replacements zero interest rates, non zero interest rates, group replacement.
(12)
DEPRECIATION BREAKEVEN AND MULTI STAGE SEQUENTIAL DECISION ANALYSIS: Depreciation :Causes of declining
value, basic methods of computing depreciation charges ,straight line method, declining balance method; MACRS depreciation,
MACRS declining balance depreciation, MACRS recovery percentages. Basic concepts of break even analysis: Linear break even
analysis, break even charts, algebraic relationships, break even point alternatives, dumping, multiproduct alternatives. Including risk
in economic analysis, probability concepts, expected value, measures of variation, coefficient of variation; Application of probability
concepts: Payoff table, EV of perfect information; Probability concepts of decision tree – Formulation of a discounted decision tree,
application of decision trees. (10)
252
59th ACM 09.06.2018
PROJECT FEASIBILITY ANALYSIS: Marketing feasibility: Types of market, identification of investment opportunities, market and
demand analysis, forecasting demand (review),forecast control, secondary sources of information. Technical feasibility: Product
design, concept of concurrent engineering, make Vs buy decisions, BPO; Value analysis - FAST approach; Product life cycle
management. Financial feasibility: Means of financing, financial institutions, profitability, cash flows of a project, tax factors in
investment analysis, effects of inflation in economic analysis, Case study, report preparation.
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. James L Riggs, David D Bedworth and Sabah U Randhawa, “Engineering Economics”, McGraw Hill Book Company, New
Delhi, 2004.
2. Prasanna Chandra, “Projects Preparation, Appraisal and Implementation", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
3. William G Sullivan, Elin M Wicks and Patrick Koelling C “Engineering Economy”, Pearson Education Inc., Delhi, 2001.
4. Leland T Blank and Anthony J Tarquin, "Engineering Economy", McGraw Hill Book Company, 1998.
5. John A White et. al, "Principles of Engineering Economic Analysis", John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1998.
6. Norman N Barish, "Economic Analysis for Engineering and Managerial Decision Making", McGraw Hill Book Company, 1983.
18MN07 QUALITY ENGINEERING AND WORK STUDY

3003
LOSS FUNCTION: Derivation – loss function for products/system- justification of improvements - loss function and inspection-
quality evaluations and tolerances-N type, S type, L type. (10)
ON-LINE QUALITY CONTROL: On-line feedback quality control variable characteristics-control with measurement interval- one
unit, multiple units-control systems for lot and batch production. On-line process parameter control variable characteristics- process
parameter tolerances- feedback control systems- measurement error and process control parameters. (12)
ON-LINE QUALITY CONTROL ATTRIBUTES CHARACTERISTICS AND METHODS FOR PROCESS IMPROVEMENTS:
Checking intervals- frequency of process diagnosis. Production process improvement method- process diagnosis improvement
method- process adjustment and recovery improvement methods. (11)
TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT: Definition of Quality, Quality assurance, Quality Control, TQM and Deming’s principles, Old and
New Quality Tools. WORK STUDY: Introduction on Work study, method study, time study, determination of standard time. Case
study in lathe operation, assembling of electric motor. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. George Kanawaty “ Introduction to Work Study” Universal Book Corporation, Bombay, 2014.
2. Kaniska Bedi, “Quality Management” Oxford University Press, Chennai, 2007.
3. Logothetics N, "Managing for Total Quality - From Deming to Taguchi and SPC", Prentice Hall Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
4. Pyzdek T and Berger R W, “Quality Engineering Handbook”, Tata-McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
5. Taguchi G, Elsayed E A and Hsiang, T.C.,”Quality Engineering in Production Systems”, McGraw-Hill Book company,
Singapore, 1989.
18MN08 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

3003
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT, SUPPLY CHAIN PERFORMANCE MEASURE AND SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK DESIGN:
Definition, house of supply chain – customer satisfaction, integration, coordination - decision phases in a supply chain, objectives of
SCM, examples of supply chains, supply chain drivers, supply chain performance measures;Supply chain network design:Data
collection – data aggregation, transportation modes and rates, mileage estimation, warehouse costs, warehouse capacity, potential
warehouse locations, service level requirements and future demand; Network design in the supply chain – factors influencing the
network design, framework for network design decisions, models for facility location and capacity allocation – capacitated plant
location model, gravity location model, allocating demand to production facilities, simultaneous location of plants and warehouses –
impact of uncertainty on network design. (12)
INVENTORY MANAGEMENT AND RISK POOLING: Single warehouse inventory model - cycle inventory – economies of scale to
exploit fixed costs, quantity discounts, short term discounting, multi-echelon inventory, example problems. managing uncertainty –
safety inventory in the supply chain –safety level estimation, impact of supply uncertainty, impact of aggregation, impact of
replenishment policies, managing safety inventory in multi echelon supply chain, managing safety inventory in practice – product
availability – optimal level, affecting factors, supply chain contracts – risk pooling – examples; Value of information – Bullwhip effect,
information and supply chain technology. (11)
DISTRIBUTION NETWORK DESIGN AND STRATEGIES: Role of distribution in supply chain – distribution network design –
factors influencing distribution network design. push strategy – pull strategy – Kanban replenishment systems, types,
implementation, and push–pull strategy – demand driven strategy – impact of internet on supply chain strategy;Distribution networks
in practice – direct shipment, cross docking, warehousing, transhipment; Framework for strategic alliance - 3PL and 4PL – retailer-
supplier partnerships – distribution integration – procurement and outsourcing – benefits, make/buy decisions, E-Procurement,
supplier relationship management – supplier scoring and assessment, supplier selection and contracts – E-Business and the
supply chain; Design for logistics: Reverse logistics, case studies in paper and furniture industry;Supplier integration into new
product development – mass customization. (12)
253
59th ACM 09.06.2018
CUSTOMER VALUE AND GLOBAL SUPPLY CHAINS: Customer value – dimensions, strategic pricing, customer value measures,
information technology and customer value – customer relationship management. global supply chains – introduction, driving
factors, risks and advantages, issues, regional differences in logistics.Information technology for supply chain - Goals –
standardization – infrastructure – interface devices, communications, databases, system architecture – system components –
integrating the supply chain information technology - DSS for supply chain management. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Simchi – Levi Davi, Kaminsky Philip and Simchi-Levi Edith, “Designing and Managing the Supply Chain”, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Chopra S and Meindl P, “Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning, and Operation”, Prentice Hall India Pvt.
Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Sahay B S, “Supply Chain Management”, Macmillan Company, 2000.
4. David Brunt and David Taylor, “Manufacturing Operations and Supply Chain Management: The Lean Approach”,
Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2001.
5. HartmudStadler and ChristophKilger, “Supply Chain Management and Advanced Planning: Concepts, Models,
Software”, Springer-Verlag, 2000.
6. David F Ross, “Introduction to E-Supply Chain Management”, CRC Press, 2003.
18MN09 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ADVANCED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS

3003
MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS AND DESIGN: Types and principles of manufacturing systems, types and uses of manufacturing
models, physical models, mathematical models, model uses, model building; Assembly lines - reliable serial systems; Approaches
to line balancing – largest candidate rule, Kilbridge and Wester method, ranked positional weight heuristic, COMSOAL, sequencing
mixed models; Transfer lines and general serial systems – paced lines with and without buffers, unpaced lines. (10)
FACILITY LAYOUT AND FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Types of layout, advantages, limitations, systematic layout
planning, layout design procedures - quadratic assignments approach, graph theoretic approach; Robotics and automated
assembly; Cellular systems -Group technology, coding schemes, assigning machines to groups, production flow analysis, binary
ordering algorithm, single pass heuristic, similarity coefficient method; System components – planning and control hierarchy, system
design, system setup, scheduling and control – flow shop scheduling, job shop scheduling; Flexible inspection system. (12)
MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE: Material handling principles, equipments, conveyor analysis, AGV systems; Warehousing
– warehouse components, analysis of storage and retrieval systems, carousal storage systems; Introduction to material handling
and storage software. (11)
GENERIC MODELING APPROACHES: Queuing models – notations, performance measures, m/m/1 queue, m/m/m queue, batch
arrival queuing systems, queues with breakdowns; Queuing networks – open and closed networks, central server model; Petri net
modeling - classical petrinets, transformation firing and reachability, reachability graphs, representation schemes, timed Pertinets,
modeling of manufacturing systems. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
7. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, Pearson Education India, 2016
8. Mengchu Zhou, “Modeling, Simulation and Control of Flexible Manufacturing Systems: A Petri Net Approach”, World Scientific
Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
9. Brandimarte P and Villa A, “Modeling Manufacturing Systems” Springer Verlag, Berlin, 1999.
10. Jean Marie Proth and XiaolanXie, “Petri Nets: A Tool for Design and Management of Manufacturing Systems”, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 1996.
11. Ronald G Askin, “Modeling and Analysis of Manufacturing Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 1993.
12. Viswanatham N and Narahari Y “Performance Modeling of Automated Manufacturing Systems”, Prentice Hall Inc., 1992.
18MN52 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16hours. Each student is
1. Use of statistical software for hypothesis testing, gauge repeatability and reproducibility and process capability.
2. Use of ergonomics tools for human anthropometric studies, force, noise, illumination and postural analysis.
3. Use of lean tools for line balancing, Poka-Yoke, time and method study.
Total P: 60
REFERENCE:
254
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18MN61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Total P: 60
SEMESTER III
18MN53 MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16hours. Each student is
1 .Use of simulation software for layout analysis and optimization, scheduling and inventory management
2. Use of simulation software for random number generation and study of manufacturing system
3. Use of simulation software for value stream mapping and study of service system
Total P: 60
REFERENCE:
18MN71 PROJECT WORK I

0063
Project work involves the following:

Total P: 90
SEMESTER IV
18MN72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14
Project work involves the following:
A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any ]


255
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18MN21 BUSINESS MODELS AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP

3003
BUSINESS EXCELLENCE MODELS: Business Excellence Concepts – Need for BE models – Pioneers in the model MBNQA,
EFQM and DEMING award - MBNQA Criteria : Leadership, Strategic planning, Customer and Market focus, Measurement analysis
and Knowledge Management, Human resource focus, process management , business results. (12)
IMPLEMENTING BUSINESS EXCELLENCE MODEL: Basic concepts – Training -Report writing – Internal audit-Report submission
– Initial assessment - Site visit – Scoring – Criteria for Award, Award finalization - Case Study-Development of business excellence
model for industrial application in production systems, inventory systems, maintenance. (10)
ENTREPRENEURAL COMPETENCE, ENVIRONMENT AND BUSINESS PLAN PREPARATION: entrepreneurship concept –

entrepreneurship as career – entrepreneurial personality - characteristics of successful, entrepreneur – knowledge and skills of
entrepreneur. Business environment - role of family and society - entrepreneurship development training and other support
organizational services - central and state government industrial policies and regulations - international business. Sources of
product for business - prefeasibility study - criteria for selection of product - ownership - capital - budgeting project profile
preparation - matching entrepreneur with the project - feasibility report preparation and evaluation criteria. (12)
LAUNCHING AND MANAGEMENT OF SMALL BUSINESS: Finance and Human Resource Mobilization Operations Planning -
Market and Channel Selection - Growth Strategies - Product Launching – Incubation, Venture capital, IT startups. Monitoring and
Evaluation of Business - Preventing Sickness and Rehabilitation of Business Units- Effective Management of small Business. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hisrich, “Entrepreneurship”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014.
2. S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development”, S.Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Donald F Kuratko, T.V Rao, “Entrepreneurship: A South Asian perspective”,Cengage, 2012.
4. Mark Graham Brown, Baldrige, “Award Winning Quality”, CRC press, 2008.
5. Mathew Manimala, “Entrepreneurship Theory at the Crossroads”, Paradigms & Praxis, Biztrantra, 2nd Edition,2005
6. P.Saravanavel, “Entrepreneurial Development”, Ess Pee kay Publishing House, Chennai, 1997.
18MN22 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING

3003
CONCEPTS OF CIM: Definition of CIM, CIM wheel, evolution of CIM, development of numerical control, computers, computer–
aided design (CAD), computer-aided manufacturing (CAM), islands of automation, evolution of the CIM concept, CIM II, benefits of
CIM; Manufacturing: An Overview: Standard industrial classifications. Types of manufacturing - continuous of discrete
manufacturing, variety and volume, raw material to final product. Needs of CIM hardware, CIM software. (10)
FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Definition of an FMS - principal objectives – basic component – characteristics of FMS -
types of FMS – equipments and its functions. FMC vs. FMS. Types of flexibility and performance measures. Economic and
technological justification for FMS. Planning phases - integration - system configuration - FMS layouts - simulation - FMS project
development steps. Project management - equipment development - host system development – functions of FMS host computer –
FMS host and area controller function distribution - planning - hardware and software development. (12)
DISTRIBUTED NUMERICAL CONTROL AND PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS: Types of communications. Fundamentals of

computer communications, representation of data, coding, transmission, medium, types of communication lines, communications
hardware. Network architectures - the seven layers-OSI model, local area network (LAN), manufacturing automation protocol
(MAP), DNC system - communication between DNC computer and machine control unit - hierarchical processing of data in DNC
system - features of DNC systems, PLC - control system architecture - elements of programmable controllers: languages, control
system flowchart, comparison of programming methods. (11)
PROCESS PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT OF CIM: Computer-aided cost estimating, production planning and control – MRP II,
History of Group Technology – role of GT in CAD/CAM Integration – part families classification and coding – DCLASS and MCLASS
and OPTIZ coding systems – facility design using GT – benefits of GT – cellular manufacturing. Process planning - role of Process,
planning in CAD/CAM Integration – approaches to computer aided process planning – variant approach and generative approaches.
Role of management in CIM, cost justification, expert systems, participative management. Impact of CIM on personnel, role of
manufacturing engineers - CIM engineer and technologist, CIM technicians, Roles of institutions. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyam S and Raju V, ―” CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age International, 2008.
2. Rao P N, “CAD/CAM Principles and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2007.
3. Groover M P, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, 2002.
4. Parrish D J, “Flexible Manufacturing”, Butter Worth Heinemann Ltd, Oxford, 1993.
5. Tien-Chienchang, Richard A Wysk, “An Introduction to Automated Process Planning Systems”, Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood
Cliffs, New Jersey, 1985.
256
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18MN23 E-BUSINESS
3003
E-BUSINESS SYSTEM: Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneur - entrepreneurial process, understanding Internet economy - e commerce
vs. e business - advantages and opportunities - Critical Factors. e business models - e business plan - e governance - ERP in e
Business. (10)
E-BUSINESS INFRASTRUCTURE AND STRATEGY: Components - Five layer Model-Internet Technology - Internet standards -
Web Technology - Web Architecture - Common Gateway Interface (CGI) - Client server Communication - Architecture - Managing E
business Infrastructure: Wireless access standards- devices. Strategy process models - strategy analysis -Types - Assessing
competitive threats - Strategic objectives - Strategic decisions: types. Strategy implementation - Success factors - Failure strategies
(12)
E-PROCUREMENT AND MARKETING: Understanding procurement process - Types of Procurement - Procurement Drivers -
Estimating E Procurement cost - E auction - E tendering: Architecture - Reverse auction. E marketing : Definition - objectives -
strategy - Rules for E marketing - E Marketing Communication. Business Intelligent Systems - Online market research - E
Procurement Implementation barriers and risks. (11)
E-CRM: Introduction, benefits, conversion marketing, online buyer behaviour, customer acquisition management, social CRM
strategy, customer retention management, customer extension, technology solutions for CRM,partner relationship management, E
service management; E payment systems: types, protocols; E check transaction, E-cash-smart card,electronic fund transfer;
Introduction to cyber Laws: general provisions. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Dave Chaffery,”E business and E commerce Management”, Pearson Publication, 5th edition, 2013.
2. Jonafnan Reynolds, “E business: A management Perspective”, Oxford university press, 2010.
3. V.P.Gupta,”E business”, Research Book Center, 2006.
4. H. Albert Napier,”Creating a winning E business”, Course Technology, 2001.
5. Ravi Kalakota,”E business: Roadmap for success”, Pearson Education Asia, 2000.
18MN24 ADVANCED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

3204
UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Introduction, Statement of an optimization problem, classification, analytical

methods -Necessary and sufficient conditions for optimality; One-dimensional minimization methods:elimination methods,
interpolation methods, direct root methods; Unconstrainedoptimization techniques: Direct search methods, descent methods.case
studies in unconstrained optimization. (11+8)
CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Necessary and sufficient conditions for optimality, constrained optimization
techniques:Method of Lagrange multipliers, sequential linear programming, method of feasible directions, penalty function method,
case studies in constrained optimization. (12+8)
INTEGER AND DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Integer Programming:Graphical representation of integer programming problem,
Gomory’s cutting plane method, branch and bound technique, integer nonlinear programming;Dynamic programming: One-
dimensional and multi-dimensional allocation processes, case studies in industrial engineering using integer and dynamic
programming. (11+7)
UNCONVENTIONAL OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Genetic algorithms, simulated annealing, particle swarm optimization, ant
colony optimization, neural networks – algorithms and applications,case studies in industrial engineering using genetic algorithms
and simulated annealing. (11+7)
TotalL: 45+T: 30=75

REFERENCES:
1. Richard E. Bellman and Stuart E Dreyfus, “Applied Dynamic Programming”, Princeton University Press, 2016.
2. Singiresu S Rao, “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice”, Third Edition, New Age International Publishers, 2013.
3. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
4. Maurice Clerc, “Particle Swarm Optimization”, Wiley- ISTE, 2006.
5. Marco Dorigo and Thomas Stutzle, “Ant Colony Optimization”, MIT Press, 2004.
18MN25 FACILITIES LOCATION AND DESIGN

3003
SINGLE AND MULTI FACILITY LOCATION: Introduction, nature of facilities location problem, distance measures in location
problems, relevant costs, types of single facility location problem - straight line distance problem, rectangular distance problem, lp
distance problem; Variants of single facility location problems: Points and area destinations with rectangular distance, location of a
linear facility, probabilistic destination locations; Multi-Facility location: rectangular and l p distance models
(12)
257
59th ACM 09.06.2018
FLOOR LAYOUT: Quadratic assignment problem, Branch and bound technique, heuristic procedures, the Hall m-dimensional
quadratic placement algorithm. (11)
FLOW, SPACE AND ACTIVITY RELATIONSHIP: Departmental planning, flow patterns and measurement, space requirements.
(11)
LAYOUT PLANNING MODELS: Design cycle – SLP procedure, computerized layout planning procedure – ALDEP, CORELAP,
and CRAFT. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Tompkins, White,Bozer and Tanchoco, “Facilities planning”, John Wiley, Fourth Edition, 2010.
2. Richard Francis. L. and John A.White, “Facilities Layout and location – an analytical approach”, PHI., 2002.
3. Robert F Love, James G Morris and George O Wesolowsky,”Facilities Location – Models and Methods”, Elsevier, 1988.
4. James Apple, M. “Plant layout and Material Handling”, John Wiley, 1977.
18MN26 FINANCIAL AND COST ACCOUNTING

3003
ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES AND RECORDING PROCESS: Uses of accounting data- Brief history of accounting- Distinguish
between book keeping and Accounting – Building blocks of Accounting: Ethics, A fundamental business concept – Generally
Accepted Accounting principles Basic Accounting Equation- transaction analysis – income statement – Balance sheet – statement
of cash flows. Recording process: The Account: Debits and credits – Debit and Credit procedures – stockholders equity
relationships – expansion of basic equation – Steps in the Recording process: The journal – The ledger – The Trial balance:
Limitation of a trial balance – LocatingErrors. (12)
INVENTORIES AND CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK OF COST ACCOUNTING: Inventory Basics:Classifying Inventory-

Determining inventory quantities – inventory accounting systems – Periodic Inventory System: Recording transactions – Recording
purchase of merchandise – recording sales of Merchandise – Valuing inventory.Cost accounting and management accounting –
Cost concepts and classifications. (10)
ELEMENTS AND ACCOUNTING OF COST AND COSTING METHODS: Materials Control – Materials costing – Labour Costs
Accounting and Control – Factory overheads distribution – Administrative and selling and distribution overheads – Activity Based
Costing (ABC). Cost control Accounts – integrated accounting system – reconciliation of cost and financial accounts. Single or
Output Costing – Job, Contract and Batch costing – process Costing – service costing. (12)
COST ANALYSIS FOR DECISION MAKING AND CONTROL: Marginal (variable) Costing – Alternative choices decisions – Pricing
decisions – Standard Costing – Budgeting – working capital- financial ratios– Responsibility Accounting and Divisional performance
measurement. Profit and Loss Account, Balance sheet statement, Cash flow and fund flow analysis. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Weygandt ,Kieso and Kimmel, “Finance Accounting”, Wiley, India Edition.
2. JawaharLal andSeema Srivastava, “Cost Accounting", McGraw Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Rajasekaran V, “Cost Accounting”, Pearson Education, 2010.
4. I.M. Pandey, “Financial Management”, Vikas Publishing House, Tenth edition, 2010.
5. Ashok Banerjee, “Financial Accounting”, Excel Books India, 2009.
6. Cheng-F Lee, “Advances in Quantitative Analysis of Finance and Accounting”, Airiti Lab, 2009.
18MN27 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT

3003
OVERVIEW OF KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT (KM): Evolution of KM, types of knowledge, life cycles for KM systems, Integrative
framework involving technology, person and organization, Nonaka’smodel of knowledge creation and transformation,managing
knowledge in organizations, ethics in KM. (12)
TOOLS AND METHODS FOR KM: Building the learning organization, Internet search engines, data mining, telecommunications
and networks, information mapping, coding and retrieval,repackaging information. (11)
KM SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT: KM Codification, KM system analysis, design and development, knowledge transfer and sharing,
team, infrastructure and audit. (11)
EVALUATION OF KM SYSTEMS: Metrics to evaluate KM effectiveness, managerial, ethical and legal issues, KM Innovation and
case studies from leading organizations. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. KimizDalkir, “Knowledge Management in Theory and Practice”, Routledge, 2013.
2. Ashok Jashapara, “Knowledge Management: An Integrated Approach”Pearson Education, Canada, 2010.
3. Thomas H Davenport and Laurence Prusak, “Working Knowledge: How Organizations Manage What They Know”, Harvard
Business School Press, Boston, 2000.
4. Elias M.Awad and Hassan M. Ghaziri, “Knowledge Management”, Pearson Education, India, 2007.
5. Andreas Tolk, “Complex Systems in Knowledge-Based Environments: Theory, Models and Applications”; Springer, 2009
258
59th ACM 09.06.2018
6. Adrian A. Hopgood, “Intelligent Systems for Engineers and Scientists”, CRC Press, 2011.
18MN28 LEAN SIX SIGMA IN MANUFACTURING AND SERVICE

3003
CONCEPTS OF LEAN SIXSIGMA: Lean Principles, eight major wastes; Six-Sigma: Concept, methodology, definition, origin,
common terms; Lean six sigma: four keys, five laws of lean six sigma,types - DMAIC, DMADV,project selection;Selection of team
members; Six Sigma roles &responsibilities; Team: stages,characteristics of effective teams, six sigma training plan; Six-sigma
metrics: DPMO calculation; Quality cost:cost of poor quality, cost of quality; Roadmap for implementation: Plan, issues,
management strategies. (12)
DEFINE AND MEASURE PHASE: Customer identification,voice of customer(VOC),VOC data collection, Critical to quality(CTQ) ;
Value Stream Mapping; SIPOC ; Project charter; Types of measures;Types of data; Applications of old and new 7 QC tools;
Measurement system analysis; Process capability calculations. (12)
ANALYSE PHASE: Inferential and Descriptive Statistics; Patterns of Variation; Normality Analysis, multi-varianalysis; Hypothesis
testing for Normal Data: Selection and application problems; Introduction to statistical software; Failure mode and effects analysis -
applications; Analysis of Lean Wastes. (11)
IMPROVE AND CONTROL PHASE: Process redesign principles; Generating improvement alternatives; Quality Function
Deployment (QFD); Theory of Inventive Problem Solving (TRIZ); Introduction to design of experiments;Lean waste elimination
methods,cycle time reduction; Cost/benefit analysis; Process scorecard: Control Plan. Case studiesin manufacturing and service
sectors. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jay Arthur, “Lean Six Sigma – Demystified”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 2011.
2. Donald W Benbow andKubiak T M, “Certified Six Sigma Black Belt Handbook”, Pearson Education, 2007.
3. Joseph De Feo, William Barnard, Juran Institute, “Juran Institute’s Six Sigma Breakthrough and Beyond”, The McGraw-Hill
Companies, 2004.
4. Michael L George, David T Rowlands, and Bill Kastle, “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.
5. Kai Yang and BasemEl,Haik, “Design for Six Sigma”, McGrawHill, New York, 2004.
6. Thomas Pyzdek, “Six Sigma Handbook: Complete Guide for Greenbelts, Blackbelts and Managers at All Levels”, Tata McGraw
Hill Companies Inc,2003.
18MN29 LOGISTICS AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

3003
LOGISTICS, DISTRIBUTION AND PLANNING FOR LOGISTICS: Introduction to logistics and distribution- Integrated logistics and
the supply chain- Integrated logistics and the supply chain- Customer service and logistics- Channels of distribution – Key issues
and challenges for logistics. Planning framework for logistics -Logistics processes -Supply chain segmentation- Logistics network
planning - Logistics management and organization - Manufacturing and materials management. (12)
WAREHOUSING AND STORAGE: Principles of warehousing Storage and handling systems (palletized and non-palletized) – Order
picking and replenishment- Receiving and dispatch - Warehouse design- Warehouse management and information. (11)
FREIGHT TRANSPORT AND OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT: International logistics: modal choice - Maritime transport - Air
transport - Rail and intermodal transport- Road freight transport: vehicle selection, vehicle costing and planning and resourcing –
International transportation systems in Global perspective. Cost and performance monitoring- Benchmarking- Information and
communication technology in supply chain- Outsourcing: services and decision criteria, the selection process – Outsourcing
management- Security and safety in distribution - Logistics and the environment. (12)
MAINTENANCE LOGISTICS: Human factors – Maintenance staffing: Learning curves – Simulation – Maintenance resource
requirements: Optimal size of service facility – Optimal repair effort – Maintenance planning and scheduling – Spare parts planning.
(10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Alan Rushton,PhilCroucher and Peter Baker(Eds.) “The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management”,Kogan Page,
4thEdition,2010.
2. Jean-Paul Rodrigue, Claude Comtois and Brian Slack, “The geography of transport systems”, New York, 2009.
3. Andrew K.S.Jardineand Albert H.C.Tsang, “Maintenance, Replacement and Reliability”, Taylor and Francis, 2006.
4. BikasBadhury&S.K.Basu, “Tero Technology: Reliability Engineering and Maintenance Management”, Asian Books, 2003.
5. Seichi Nakajima, “Total Productive Maintenance”, Productivity Press, 1993.
18MN30 MARKETING MANAGEMENT

3003
MARKETING: Core concepts of marketing, product concept, selling concept and marketing concept, marketing process, analyzing
market opportunities, designing marketing strategies, planning marketing programmes, organizing, implementing and controlling the
marketing effort, marketing planning, current marketing situation, opportunity and issue analysis, action programmes, profit and loss
259
59th ACM 09.06.2018
statement. Concepts in demand measurement, estimating current demand, estimating future demand, market segmentation,
general approach to segmenting a market, patterns of market segmentation. (12)
PRODUCTS AND SERVICES: New product development, effective organizational arrangements, idea generation, idea screening,
concept development and testing, product development, market testing, commercialization, consumer adoption process, product life
cycle - introductory stage, growth stage, maturity stage and decline stage. Managing product lines, brands and packaging, product
mix decisions, product line decisions, brand decisions, packaging and labeling decisions, managing service businesses and
ancillary services. (12)
MARKETING CHANNELS: Nature of marketing channels, channel design decision, channel management decisions, channel
dynamics, channel co-operation, conflict and competition, retailing, wholesaling and distribution systems, nature and importance of
retailing, types of retailers, wholesaling and physical distribution. (11)
COMMUNICATION AND PROMOTION-MIX STRATEGIES: The communication process, steps in developing effective
communication, measuring promotion results, managing the sales force, designing the sales force, principles of personal selling.(10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Philip Kotler, "Marketing Management Analysis, Planning, Implementation and Control", Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2004.
2. Ekzel M J and Walkar B J, "Marketing", McGraw Hill, 1997.
3. Stanton and William. "Fundamentals of Marketing", McGraw Hill, Tokyo, 1995.
4. RamanujMajundar, "Marketing Research", Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1991.
5. Boyd and Kapoor, "Readings in Marketing Management", McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd., 1989.
18MN31 PRICING AND REVENUE MANAGEMENT

3003
MARKET COMPETITION AND PRICING: Market Structure – Various forms – Equilibrium of a firm – Perfect competition –
Monopolistic competition – Oligopolistic competition. Overview of pricing, buyer behavior. Pricing of products under different market
structures –Methods of pricing –Factors affecting pricing decision – Differential pricing– Price discrimination – Pricing of Joint
products-Government Intervention and pricing. (12)
REVENUE MANAGEMENT: Overview of Revenue Management (RM) and its applications, Quantity based RM- Introduction to
dynamic programming, capacity allocation and protection levels for a single leg with single and multiple fare classes-overbooking
(11)
PRICE BASED AND NETWORK BASED REVENUE MANAGEMENT: Price based RM; Basic pricing theory – dynamic pricing,
Network based RM; decomposition methods-approximate dynamic programming-stochastic approximate techniques. (11)
CHOICE BASED REVENUE MANAGEMENT AND JOINT DEMAND ESTIMATION: Choice based RM; Choice models- assortment
optimization – Joint demand estimation- dynamic pricing with demand learning-the multi-armed bandit paradigm-contextual bandits.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. A. RamachandraAryasry and V.V. Ramana Murthy,“Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
2. R. V. Vohra and L. Krishnamurthi, “Principles of Pricing”, Cambridge University Press, 2012.
3. K. T. Talluri and G. J. Van Ryzin, “The Theory and Practice of Revenue Management”, Springer (Kluwer Academic Publishers),
2005.
4. Robert L. Phillips, “Pricing and Revenue Optimization”, Stanford Business Books, 2005.
18MN32 PRODUCT ANALYSIS AND COST OPTIMIZATION

3003
ELEMENTS OF COSTING: Elements of cost – estimation – differences – types of costing – cost classification – depreciation –
different methods; Types of cost: Labour cost – direct, indirect - labour variances - material cost - direct, indirect - material cost
variances with examples, overhead cost. Elements in over heads, machine hour rate, apportioning methods - variance – examples.
(11)
ACTIVITY BASED COSTING AND TARGET COSTING: Introduction - traditional approach, comparison- examples– activity based
management; introduction to target costing, market driven, product driven and component driven target costing. (10)
COST CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS: Cost calculation for machined components, welding, casting and forged components
plastic moulded, powder metallurgy parts – illustrations – calculation of sales cost- cost of refection – case studies – use
ofcomputers in cost estimation; Cost analysis techniques: Analytical, graphical and incremental methods for single and multi
variable situations – learning curves. (12)
PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND PROCESS SELECTION: New products, new product strategy - market definition, idea
generation - introduction to the design process – quality function deployment - forecasting sales potential - product engineering and
markets, monopoly, competitive; Manufacturing planning: Selection of optimum process, standardization. - Process capability
analysis - break even analysis - application and area of use - problems - multi - product analysis. (12)
Total L: 45
260
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Glen L Urban and John R Hauser, “Design and Marketing of New Products”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey,2004.
2. Banga T R, Sharma S C, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing (Including Contracting and Process Planning)”, Khanna
Publishers, 2015.
3. Kannappan D, Ag Augustine, Paranthaman D, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
4. Yasuhiro Monden, “Cost Management in the New Manufacturing Age”, Productivity Press, 1992.
5. Narang G B S and Kumar V, “Production and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, Fourth edition, 2014.
18MN33 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

3003
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND INITIATION: Definition of Project, why project management, Project Life Cycle, Selecting Projects
Strategically – Project Management maturity, Project selection and criteria of choice, the nature of project selection models, types of
project selection models, analysis under uncertainty-the management of risk, project portfolio process, project proposals. Role of
project managers – project management and project manager, special demands on the project manager, problems of cultural
differences, impact of institutional environments, multicultural communication and managerial behavior. Working and partnering with
others – Nature of negotiation, partnering, chartering and scope change, conflict and the project life cycle, requirements and
principles of negotiation. Role of Projects in organization – projects as part of functional organization, pure project organization, the
matrix organization, mixed organizational systems, choosing an organizational form, the project team. (11)
PROJECT PLANNING AND CONTROL: Initial project coordination and the project plan, systems integration, the action plan.
Project costs and Budgets – estimating project budgets, expert opinion, analogy, parametric estimate; cost engineering – example,
contingency amount, elements of budgets and estimates improving the process of cost estimation. The planning, monitoring and
controlling cycle, information needs and reporting, earned value analysis, computerized PMIS. Controlling Project execution –
fundamental purpose of control, types of control processes, design of control system, control of change and scope creep. (10)
TOOLS AND RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: Case studies in Network diagram, PERT/CPM and crashing a project. WBS,
responsibility matrix, events and milestones, Gantt charts. Allocating resources on the project – Case resource loading, resource
leveling, constrained resource scheduling, multi-project scheduling and resource allocation.
INTER FUNCTIONAL KNOWLEDGE IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Active listening Applicable laws and regulations,
Brainstorming techniques, Communication - channels, tools, techniques, and methods, Data gathering - techniques, Diversity and
cultural sensitivity, Expert judgment technique, Information - management tools, techniques, and methods, Leadership - tools,
techniques, and skills, Organizational and operational awareness, Presentation - tools and techniques, Quality assurance and
control techniques, Situational awareness, Stakeholder management techniques, Team-building techniques, Virtual/remote team
management. (12)
RISK AND EVALUATION: Risk analysis – objectives of risk analysis, identify the risk, determine the most important risk, identify
control measures. Performing risk analysis – objectives and desired result, design of risk analysis, activities and time frame for
implementing risk analysis. Risk management – choosing, implementing and evaluating control measures, Performing risk
management, Implementing Risk management. Project evaluation – goals of the system, project audit, construction and use of audit
report, project audit life cycle, essentials of audit/evaluation, measurement. Completing the project – varieties of project termination,
when to terminate a project, termination process, final report. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jack R Meredith, Samuel J Mantel, “Project management: A Managerial Approach”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New Delhi, 2010.
2. D Van Well-Stam, FLindenaar, S Van Kinderen, B Van Den Bunt, “Project Risk Management: An Essential Tool for Managing
and Controlling Projects”, Kogan page Ltd, Great Britain, 2004.
3. John M Nicholas, “Project Management for Business and Technology”, Prentice Hall India Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
4. Vasant Desai, “Project Management”, Himalaya Publishing House, 2001.
5. Dennis Lock, “The Essentials of Project Management”, Gower Publishing Ltd., 1997.
18MN34 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3003
SAFETY SYSTEMS: Definitions, safety systems: basic concepts, definition of accidents, analysis of causes of accident. Hazard
analysis, General hazard analysis: electrical, physical and chemical hazard, fault tree analysis. Managing for safety: Safety
inspection, procedure, periodicity, checklist, report forms. Planning for safety and productivity, safety sampling, safety audit, Work
permit and lock out system, elimination of hazard and accident, safety education, communication, safety performance analysis.
Personal protective equipment testing, usage. (12)
SAFETY IN MATERIAL HANDLING: Selection of material handling equipment, equipment used, ropes, chains, slings, hooks,
clamps, procedure for testing and checking as per standard. Design conservation, conveyor systems, belt, roller chain and elevator
and lifts, industrial hoists, mobile crane, forklift, operation maintenance and checking procedure. (11)
FIRE PREVENTION SYSTEM: Automated fire fighting system: water sprinkler, fire hydrant, alarm and detection system.
Suppression system, CO2 system, foam system, DCP system, halon system, portable fire extinguisher. Safety in process:Design for
safety, safety in use of power press. Safety in foundry, forging, welding, hot working and cold working, electroplating and boiler
operation. (10)
SAFETY LEGISLATION: Provisions in factory act for safety, explosive act, workmen compensation act, compensation calculation.
Boiler act and pollution control act, electrical safety, electricity act and rules.
261
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Environment impact assessment: (EIA): Introduction, legal provisions, methods of EIA – checklist analysis of alternatives – case
studies, ISO14001:2004 EMS standards. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ken whitelaw,”ISO 14001:2004” Standards, Routledge; 2 edition, 2004.
2. Heinrich H W, “Industrial Accident Prevention”, National Safety Council, McGraw Hill Inc, Chicago, 1998.
3. National Safety Council “Personal Protective Equipment”, Bombay, 1998.
4. John Ridley, “Safety at Work”, Butter Work Publisher, Oxford, 1997.
5. National Safety Council “Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations”, Chicago, 1995.
6. Derek James, “Fire Prevention Handbook”, Buttes Worths and Co., Oxford, 1991.
18MN35 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

3003
SINGLE AND PARALLEL MACHINE SCHEDULING: Scheduling as a function and theory, scheduling problem, sequencing -
objective, constraints, difference between sequencing and scheduling; Single machine models -Characteristics, terminology,
theorems, SPT and EDD sequences, minimizing in - process inventory, mean flow time, weighted mean flow time, number of tardy
jobs and mean tardiness, Hodgson's algorithm, Wilkerson -Irwin algorithm, applications of dynamic programming and branch and
bound techniques, minimizing total cost, non-simultaneous arrivals, dependent jobs, sequence dependent set up time, use of
assignment model, heuristic solutions; Parallel Machine Models -Minimizing make span, independent jobs- McNaughton's algorithm,
heuristic procedures, minimizing weighted mean flow time, jobs- Hu's algorithm, Muntz-Coffman algorithm. (11)
FLOW SHOP AND JOB SHOP SCHEDULING: Flow shop-Permutation schedule, Johnson's problem, branch and bound
algorithms, dominance properties for make span problems, heuristic approaches, flow shops without intermediate queues, other
performance measures; Job shop -Types of schedules, schedule generation - branch and bound approach, heuristic
procedures, integer programming approach. (11)
RESOURCE CONSTRAINED PROJECT SCHEDULING AND SIMULATION: Extending job shop model - extending project model,
integer programming approach - heuristic methods; Project Scheduling -Logical constraints, network constructions, temporal
analysis, probabilistic network analysis, time/cost trade-off, resource allocation; Simulation -Elements of simulation models,
reducing mean flow time, meeting due dates, case studies. (12)
RESOURCE SCHEDULING: Interval scheduling, reservations and timetabling -Reservation without slack, reservation with
slack,timetabling with workforce, operator constraints - Case study; Planning, scheduling and timetabling in transportation -Tanker
andaircraft scheduling, train scheduling; workforce scheduling -Day-off scheduling,shift scheduling- cyclic staffing problem,operator
scheduling in a callcenter. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Michael L Pinedo, “Planning and Scheduling In Manufacturing and Services”, Springer Science and Business Media,2005.
2. French S, “Sequencing and Scheduling”, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 1982.
3. Baker K, “Introduction to Sequencing and Scheduling”, John Wiley and Sons, 1974.
4. Convay R W, Maxwell W L and Miller L N, “Theory of Scheduling”, Addison-Wesley, Mass., 1967.
18MN36 SERVICE AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

3003
SERVICES AND CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS: Introduction, types of services, types of service processes, the service concept –
defined, service concept as a strategic tool, focused and unfocused service operations. Customers, customer segmentation,
customer retention, managing customer and business relationships. Customer expectation and satisfaction – defining expectations,
finding expectation and assessing satisfaction, managing perceptions. (12)
SUPPLIER RELATIONSHIPS AND SERVICE DELIVERY: Managing supply relationships – types of supply relationships, managing
service supply chains, managing through intermediaries, supply partnerships, service level agreements. Service processes,
understanding the nature of service processes, Engineering service processes, Controlling service process, repositioning service
process. Service people – understanding the pressure on service providers, managing and motivating service providers, managing
customers. (10)
SERVICE MANAGEMENT AND PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT: Resource utilization – capacity management, operations
planning and control, managing bottlenecks and queues, managing the coping zone, improving resource utilization. Networks,
performance and information – how it is transforming service, managing physical and virtual networks, managing technology and
information flows, integrating networks, technology and information. Purpose of performance measurement, balance of measures,
interlinking, targets and rewards, benchmarking. Linking operations decisions to business performance – relationship, service
performance network, key stages in developing a network, world-class service. Driving operational improvement – approaches to
operational improvement, service recovery, service guarantees. (12)
MANAGING STRATEGIC CHANGE: Service strategy – service as competitive advantage, turning performance objectives into
operational priorities, strategy formulation and development, sustaining a strategy. Service culture – understanding organizational
culture, types of culture, national cultures, management of change and service delivery. Operational Complexity – operational
sequence of complexity. (11)
Total L: 45
262
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Bill Hobins and Sadie Shinkins, “Managing Service Operations”, Sage Publications India Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
2. Robert Johnson and Graham Clark, “Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery”, Pearson Education Ltd.,
New Delhi,2005.
3. Nevan Wright J and Peter Race, “The Management of Service Operations”, Thomson Learning, 2005.
4. William J Glynn and James G Barnes, “Understanding Service management: Integrating marketing, Operational Behaviour”,
1995.
18MN37TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE

3003
CONCEPTS OF TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE (TPM): Six basic principles, TPM definition, development stages of TPM,
principle of learning –improving machine performance zero defects and TPM. Overall Equipment Effectiveness: Power of OEE, six
major losses, OEE metrics, OEE calculation for a single machine, plant OEE calculations, process average method, weighted
process average method, total equipment effectiveness equipment performance (TEEP), financial aspects of OEE. (12)
RESTORING EQUIPMENT TO ‘NEW’ CONDITION: Specific goals for equipment, operators, technicians, detecting minor machine
defects, setting comp. standards, typical examples, machine tags, and one point lessons –typical examples. Autonomous
Maintenance: Seven levels - initial cleaning, preventive cleaning machines, cleaning and lubrication standard, general inspection,
autonomous inspection, process disciple, independent autonomous maintenance. (12)
MACHINE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PLAN: Elements of a complete preventive maintenance, PM checklist, PM schedules,
inspection specification, replacement parts numbers, PM procedure, part logs, quality checks, PM Master-plan. (10)
TPM IMPLEMENTATION: Introduction of TPM to the organization, creation of organization structure, Basic TPM policies and aids,
master plan, Kick start. TPM implementation stages: Small group activities, implementing AM, establishing planned maintenance,
training and education, developing equipment management program, perfecting TPM implementation – raising TPM levels, case
studies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Andrew K.S.Jardineand Albert H.C.Tsang, “Maintenance, Replacement and Reliability”, Taylor and Francis, 2006.
2. BikasBadhury&S.K.Basu, “Tero Technology: Reliability Engineering and Maintenance Management”, Asian Books, 2003.
3. Hansen R C, “Overall Equipment Effectiveness: A Powerful Production Maintenance Tool”, Industrial Press, USA, 2001.
4. Robinson C J and Ginder A P, “Implementing TPM: The North American Experience”, Productivity Press, USA, 1995.
5. Seichi Nakajima, “Total Productive Maintenance”, Productivity Press, 1993.
18MN38 VALUE ENGINEERING

3003
CONCEPTS OF VALUE ENGINEERING (VE): Introduction – status of VE in India and origin country – impact of VE application –
types of values – types of function – function identification on product – function matrix – function analysis – elements of costs –
calculation of costs – cost allocation to function – evaluation of worth in VE methodology. Determining the functional cost and worth
of piston and piston rings of IC Engine. (11)
TECHNIQUES OF VE: General techniques: brain storming – Godson feasibility ranking – morphological analysis – ABC analysis –
probability approach – make or buy. Function – cost worth analysis – function analysis – system techniques – function analysis
matrix – customer oriented FAST diagram – fire alarm – long range plan – evaluation methods – matrix in evaluation – Conduct of
Brain storming session for increasing the life of “V” belt in a critical machine. (11)
VALUE ENGINEERING IN JOB PLAN: Orientation phase – information phase – functional analysis – creative phase – evaluation
phase – recommendation phase – implementation phase and audit phase. Development of software modules for each phase of
VEJP. (11)
TEAM APPROACH IN VE: Team structure – team building – selection of team remembers – conduct of VE project study – task flow
diagram – pre study phase – workshop phase, host study phase. VE in service: Enhancing value through improvement in water
treatment plant – electric motor – two wheeler – restaurant and hospital. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mukhophadhyaya A K, “Value Engineering”, Sage Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
2. Richard J Park, “Value Engineering – A Plan for Inventions”, St.Lucie Press, London, 1999.
3. Larry W Zimmesman P E, “VE –A Practical Approach for Owners Designers and Contractors”, CBS Publishers, Delhi, 1992.
4. Arthur E Mudge, “Value Engineering”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1971.
18MN39 WASTE DISPOSAL MANAGEMENT AND OCCUPATIONAL HAZARDS

3003
SOURCES OF WASTE: Definitions of waste, waste arising, municipal solid waste(MSW), hazardous waste, sewage sludge, other
wastes, waste containers, collection systems and transport. Waste recycling, examples of waste recycling, economic
considerations, life cycle analysis of materials recycling. (10)
263
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT: Sources of solid waste, effects of solid waste, types of solid waste, quantities and characteristics,
objective of solid waste management, functional activities of solid waste disposal, hazardous waste, biomedical waste, refuse-
recycling-reduction-and recovery of solid wastes, theory of biogas generation, various solid conversion and utilization, red mud. (11)
ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND RELATED ISSUES: Environmental impact assessment, environmental management
planning(EMP), some examples of impact assessments conducted in India, information for assessing EIA of a proposed project,
notification on environment impact assessment, environmental protection acts, man and environmental pollution, use of pesticides
and their impacts on environment, pollution control methods, green technology, life cycle assessment, ISO14000 series
environmental management systems, environmental audit, conservation of natural resources. (12)
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND OCCUPATIONAL PHYSIOLOGY: Concept and spectrum of health - functional units and
activities of occupational health services, pre employment and post-employment medical examinations - occupational related
diseases, levels of prevention of diseases- occupational work capacity – aerobic and anaerobic work – evaluation of physiological
requirements of jobs – parameters of measurements – categorization of job heaviness – work organization – stress – strain – fatigue
– shift work – personal hygiene. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Paul T. Williams “Waste Treatment and Disposal”, second edition, Wiley publications,2012.
2. A.K. Chatterjee “Water supply, waste disposal and environmental engineering” Eighth edition, Khanna publications, 2010.
3. S.P.Mahajan, “Pollution control in process industries”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,New Delhi, 1993.
4. Rao, CS, “Environmental pollution engineering:, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 1992.
5. The Environment Act (Protection) 1986, Commercial Law Publishers (India) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Encyclopedia of “Occupational Health and Safety”, Vol.I and II, International LabourOffice, Geneva, 1985.
18MN40 HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING

3003
INFORMATION INPUT: Human Factors: Definition, focus and objectives; Man-Machine Systems: characteristics and components;
Information: Types of information, displaying information, display modality selection, compatibility, attention, display of static and
dynamic information-visual, auditory and tactual. (11)
HUMAN OUTPUT AND CONTROL: Muscle and Work Physiology, measures of physiological strain, physical workload, manual
materials handling; Biomechanics of human motion, compatibility- Spatial, movement and modality; Controls: Functions, factors in
control design, design of hand and foot-operated controls, principles of hand tool and device design. (11)
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Illumination: Visibility, effects of lighting on performance, distribution of light, glare; Noise: Sound
level, psychophysical indices, equivalent sound level, physiological effects of noise, effects of noise on performance, noise exposure
limits; Climate: Heat exchange process, factors influencing heat exchange, heat and cold stress. (11)
WORKPLACE DESIGN: Anthropometry: Static and dynamic dimensions, use of anthropometric data; Work spaces, design of work
surfaces; Seating: principles of seat design; Arrangements of components within a physical space-Principles, methodologies;
General location of controls and displays within workspace. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bridger R S, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, 2008.
2. Martin Helandar, “A Guide to Human Factors and Ergonomics”, Taylor and Francis, 2006.
3. Nemeth CP, “Human Factors Methods for Design”, Taylor and Francis, 2004.
4. Chandler Allen Phillips, “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
5. Martin Helandar, “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Taylor and Francis, 1995.
6. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw-Hill, 1993.
AUDIT COURSES
18MN81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18MN82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

264
59th ACM 09.06.2018

ME COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING
(2018 REGULATIONS)
*
(Minimum no. of credits to be earned: 74 )

I SEMESTER
Statistical Quality Control and Design of
18MC01 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Experiments
18MC02 Smart Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MC03 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18MC04 Integrated Product Development 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MC05 Industrial Automation and Control 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18MC51 Sensor Interface and Robotics Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18MC81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 Hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18MC06 Business Operations Integration 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18MC07 Production Tooling and Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MC08 Industrial Robotics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18MC09 Computer Controlled Machine Tools 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18MC__ Professional Elective-1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC52 CAD/CAM/CAE Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18MC61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18MC82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 Hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18MC__ Professional Elective- 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC__ Professional Elective- 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC53 Manufacturing Simulation and IoT laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18MC71 Project Work 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18MC72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
18MC21 Data Structures and Computer Programming 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC22 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC23 Virtual Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC24 Automatic Control Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC25 Industrial Internet of Things 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC26 Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC27 Advanced Manufacturing Process 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC28 Metrology and Automated Inspection 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC29 Sheet Metal Cutting and Bending Technologies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Modeling and Analysis of Advanced
18MC30 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Manufacturing Systems
18MC31 Simulation Modeling and Analysis 3 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC32 Operations Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC33 Lean Six Sigma in Manufacturing and Service 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC34 Engineering Economic Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC35 Geometric Modeling 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC36 Safety and Environment Management System 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18MC37 Supply Chain Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
265
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18MC01 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL AND DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS

2203
STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Methods and philosophy of statistical process control – chance and assignable causes of
quality variation, statistical basis of control charts - control charts for variables - 𝑋, R, and s charts - control charts for attributes – p,
np, c and u charts. (8+7)
(8+7)
DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS: Fundamentals of experimental design, guidelines for designing experiments, analysis of variance,
experiments with one factor, completely randomized design, randomized block design, factorial experiments, Latin square design.
(8+7)
RESPONSE SURFACE METHODOLOGY: Empirical models – linear regression models, estimation of parameters in linear
regression models, confidence interval and hypothesis testing in multiple regression, 2-level factorial design – 23 design, general 2k
design, single replication of 2k design, design for fitting second order models – class of central composite design. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Amitava Mitra, Fundamentals of Quality Control and Improvement, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey, 2016.
2. Eugene L Grant, Richard S Leavenworth, Statistical Quality Control, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Raymond H. Myers, Douglas C. Montgomery, Christine M. Anderson Cook, Response Surface Methodology: process and
product optimization using experimental designs, John Wiley and Sons, 2016.
4. Ronald E Walpole, Raymond H Myers, Sharon L Myers and Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2016.
5. Douglas C Montgomery, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2009.
18MC02 SMART MANUFACTURING

3003
CIM SYSTEMS: Architecture of CIM, Industry 4.0- Scope; FMS: Equipment, Tool management system, system layouts,
Reconfigurable machines and systems. (10)
COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS PLANNING AND MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS: Approaches to CAPP, variant approach and
generative approach, Feature recognition techniques; AI and Expert systems, SAP-R3/PP module, Material handling systems: AGV;
Storage systems: ASRS; Automatic data collection: Bar code technology, Radio frequency identification. (12)
DATABASE AND INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS: Telecommunications, the Internet, and Wireless Technology,
Components and Devices – Hub, switches, TCP/IP protocol structure, internet protocol, transmission protocol, applications; Case
studies: Networking of machine tools, Securing Information Systems, shop floor communications. (11)
SMART MANUFACTURING AND CONNECTED ENTERPRISE: ISA 95, Functional and physical sub-divisions, Global connected
supply chain, mass customization, customer co-creation. Case studies of information systems for key manufacturing functions: Life
cycle, supply chain, enterprise, quality, maintenance, materials, energy and sustainability information systems.
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Radhakrishnan P and Subramanyan S, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age International Ltd., 2016.
2. T. O. Boucher and A. Yalçin, Design of Industrial Information Systems, 1st edition, Elsevier, 2006.
3. R. Zurawski, Integration Technologies for Industrial Automated Systems, 1st edition, CRC Press, 2006.
4. F. Cecelja, Manufacturing Information and Data Systems, 1st edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 2002.
18MC03 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY

vide Engineering Design 18MD09
18MC04 INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT

3003
PRODUCT LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT: Paradigm, system architecture, scope, characteristics, drivers, stages - introductory
stage, growth stage, maturity stage and decline stage, S- Curve; Bathtub curve; Product Data Management (PDM): Product data,
structure, interaction in PLM. (11)
266
59th ACM 09.06.2018
CONCEPTUALIZATION AND PROTOTYPING: Customer needs, problem statement, bench marking and establishing engineering
specifications; Idea generation: brainstorming, mind-map; Concept generation: systematic exploration, C-sketch/6-3-5 method,
morphological analysis; Prototyping: methods, types, case studies. (11)
PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT APPROACHES AND TOOLS: Challenges and constraints in product development; PESTEL analysis;
SWOT analysis; Requirement Engineering; Requirement pyramid; Types of requirements; Quality function deployment
(QFD);Product development methodologies; Theory of inventive problem solving (TRIZ);Establishing product function: FAST
method, subtract and operate procedure; Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA): PFMEA, poka-yoke. . (12)
SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND IPR: Maintenance: Activities, objectives, Classification; Obsolescence Management:
Objectives, mitigation measures, design for obsolescence. : Types of IPR, Patentability criteria, Steps in patenting, Formulating
claims, Pursue application, Issues and challenges. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Chitale A K and Gupta R C, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2014.
3. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Nigel Cross, “Engineering Design Methods: Strategies for Product Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 2000.
18MC05 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION AND CONTROL

3204
SENSORY SYSTEMS: Industrial automation and control: Architecture, elements of mechatronics system, role of mechatronics in
automation; Sensors and measurement systems in automation: Static and dynamic characteristics of sensors, transducers for
measurement - displacement, strain, position, velocity, noise, flow, pressure, temperature, humidity, vibration, vision sensors;
Selection of sensors for different applications. (12+8)
ACTUATORS, CONTROL VALVES AND FLUIDIC SYSTEM DESIGN: Actuators: Pneumatic, hydraulic, electrical, magnetostrictive
and memory-metal actuators; Servo and stepper motors: Control valves: direction, pressure and flow proportional valves, control of
servo valves, fluidic muscles, actuators, shape memory alloys; Fluidic system design: Fluid power circuits – cascade, KV-map and
step counter method; Fringe condition modules; Sizing of components in pneumatic and hydraulic systems; Analysis of hydraulic
circuits. (11+8)
CONTROL SYSTEMS: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC):PLC ladder logic diagram, programming of PLC; Microcontrollers and
micro processors, (11+7)
REAL TIME INTERFACING: Data acquisition systems: Industry Interfacing devices, virtual instrumentation, interfacing of various
sensors and actuators with PC; Condition monitoring; Adaptive control; Supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems;
Human Machine Interface (HMI) systems;, Application case studies. (11+7)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 =75
REFERENCES:
1. Sanjay Gupta and Joseoh John, “Virtual Instrumentation using Lab VIEW”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications Co. Ltd., 2017.
2. Mikell P Groover, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, Pearson, 2016.
3. W Bolton, “Mechatronics - Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering”, Pearson India., 2010.
4. DevdasShetty and Richard A Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, PWS Publishing Company, 2010.
5. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Application”, Pearson Education India, 2013.
18MC51 SENSOR INTERFACE AND ROBOTICS LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for a duration of 12-16 hours. Each student
is expected to perform a case study by formulating and completing an activity of interest derived from the orientation under the
1. Calibration of sensors using Virtual Instrumentation software

2. Sensor interface using Virtual Instrumentation software
3. Control of actuators using Virtual Instrumentation software
4. Programming of a typical pick and place robot
5. System control using PI and PID controllers
CASE STUDY
Interface and integration of sensors/ actuators for development of mechatronic systems
267
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Laboratory Manual prepared by Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG college of Technology.
2. Frank Lamb, “Industrial Automation Hands On”, McGraw Hill Book Company,2013
3. Terry L M Bartelt, “Industrial Automated Systems: Instrumentation and Motion Control”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi,
2011
II SEMESTER
18MC06 BUSINESS OPERATIONS INTEGRATION

3204
BUSINESS PROCESS: Processes, business functions, functional areas of operation, business process concepts, process view;
Business operations, key terms – Engineering Change Note (ECN); Information flow: marketing and sales, supply chain
management, accounting and finance, human resources; Functional area information system; Business Process Reengineering
(BPR): background, elements, steps in BPR, challenges and best practices, business impact – case studies. (11+4)
ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING (ERP): Evolution of ERP, business benefits of ERP; ERP system: design process,
architecture, features; Selecting an ERP system; ERP implementation factors; Hidden cost: cost benefit analysis, issues in
customizing ERP systems; Training: Need, methods. (10+4)
ERPSOFTWARES AND CASESTUDIES: Analysis of ERP packages, survey of Indian ERP packages - coverage, performance and
cost; Extended ERP (ERP II)/advanced planning systems, business intelligent systems; IoT applications in ERP – case studies.
(12+4)
ERP MODULES: Detailed analysis of ERP modules: Sales order processing, purchasing, production planning, manufacturing,
financial accounting, human resource, simulation using typical ERP package; ERP case studies: Manufacturing and education
domain. (12+18)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. David L Olson, “Managerial Issues of Enterprise Resource Planning Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2017.
2. Mary Summer, “Enterprise Resource Planning”, Pearson Education Limited, 2014
3. Alexis Leon, “ERP Demystified”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2014.
4. Karl E. Kurbel, “Enterprise Resource Planning and Supply Chain Management”, Springer, 2013
5. Ellen F.Monk and Bret J.Wagner, “Concepts in Enterprise Resource Planning”, Course Technology, Cengage Learning, 2012.
18MC07 PRODUCTION TOOLING AND COST ESTIMATION

3003
TOOLING SELECTION: Interpretation of blue prints: Dimensions, geometrical features, material, surface finish, tolerances;
Process selection, Selection of machines: machine capability- parameters to be considered; Tooling selection: Factors,
specifications, classification, tools – cutting tools, finishing tools, forming tools, tool holders; Development of process plan,
instrumentation for inspection, Case studies for turning centers, milling centers, injection molding, Electrical Discharge Machining,
sheet metal operation, etc. (12)
JIGS AND FIXTURES: Degrees of freedom, principles of location and clamping, elements of jigs and fixtures, classification of jigs
and fixtures, selection of jigs and fixtures, modular fixtures for assembly and inspection; Case studies for selecting fixtures for
machining, joining, assembly, inspection and testing processes. (10)
COSTING: Elements of cost: R&D cost, material cost, labor cost, capital cost – space, power, machine, tools, dies, fixtures,
packing and shipping, overhead cost, sales cost, after-sale cost; Types of costing: Batch costing, contract costing, departmental
costing and process costing; Cost classification: Direct, indirect - capital depreciation, factory overheads, administrative overheads,
sales overheads, distribution overheads; Case studies to identify the cost elements for machining, joining, assembly, inspection and
testing processes. (10 )
COST CALCULATION: Calculation of machine hour rate- calculation of machining time, calculation of labor hour rate, Calculation
of material cost- raw material, material handling cost, procurement cost; Calculation of tooling cost: tool cost – procurement and
handling costs, tool life, Jigs and Fixtures cost; Calculation of cost for assembly, inspection and testing, calculation of overhead
cost- material, labor, administrative and distribution, software tools for cost estimation, Case studies for calculation of cost per piece,
sub-assembly and total product. (13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mikell. P .Groover, “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing – Materials Processes and Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 6th
Edition, 2016
2. SC Sharma & TR Banga, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing – including contracting”, Khanna Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 2015
3. SME, "Manufacturing Engineers Hand Book", 1998.
268
59th ACM 09.06.2018
4. Riggs, J.L ., Dedworth, Bedworth, D.B, Randhawa, S.U, “Engineering Economics”, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1996
5. Narang CBS and Kumar V, “Production and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 2005
6. Peter Scallan, “Process Planning: The Design/Manufacture Interface”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2003
18MC08 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS

3003
ROBOTICS, DRIVES AND CONTROLLERS: Robotics: Evolution, laws of robotics, anatomy of robot, specification of robots,
classification of robots, robot drives; Selection of drive systems: electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic drives - characteristics of
actuating systems; Robot controllers: motion control of robots: PID, PI; Types of robot controls. (12)
SENSORS FOR ROBOTS: Characteristics and selection of sensor: Position sensors, velocity sensors, acceleration sensors, force
and pressure sensors, torque sensors, micro switches, light and infrared sensors, touch and tactile sensors, proximity and range
sensors, sniff sensors, voice recognition devices, voice synthesizers. (10)
TRANSFORMATIONS, KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING: Co-ordinate reference frames, homogeneous

transformations, the forward and inverse kinematics, motion generation, manipulator dynamics, D.H Parameters, D.H matrices;
Robot Programming: Programming methods. (13)
ROBOT CELL LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION: Robot cell layout, Classification, considerations in work cell design, safety
monitoring; Robot installation: Feasibility of the robotization plan, evaluation strategies, planning for robot installation; Case studies.
(10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mikell P Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Oger N Nagel and Nicholasg Odrey, ”Industrial Robotics - SIE: Technology - Programming
and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill education Pvt.ltd.”, 2017
2. Deb SR and Sankha deb, “Robotics Technology And Flexible Automation”, TataMc Graw Hill education Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
3. Saeed B Niku, “Introduction To Robotics Analysis, Systems, Applications” , Pearson education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd.2nd
Edition, 2011
4. Richard DKlafter, Thomas AChmielewski and Michael Negin, "Robotic Engineering - An Integrated Approach", Eastern
economy edition, Prentice hall Pvt. Ltd., 2009
18MC09 COMPUTER CONTROLLED MACHINE TOOLS

3204
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES OF CNC MACHINE TOOLS: Role of CNC machine tools in CAM; Elements of CNC system:
characteristics, selection criteria; Machining centers: features, Automatic Tool Changers (ATC), tool magazines, Automatic Pallet
Changers (APC), attachments. (12)
CNC PART PROGRAMMING: Axes definition, datum, methods of programming, G and M functions, motion types, tool length
compensation, cutter radius compensation, tool wear compensation, canned cycles, sub-programming, mirroring, scaling; Part
program examples: turning, milling, drilling; Automatically Programmed Tool (APT). (11+20)
CNC CONTROL SYSTEMS: Structure of CNC system, open loop and closed loop systems, Adaptive control systems: adaptive
control with constraints, adaptive control with optimization; microprocessor based CNC systems, Interpolators: linear interpolation,
circular interpolation; DDA algorithm and Bresenham algorithm, calculation of Basic Length Unit (BLU), pulses, pulse frequency.
(11+5)
CALIBRATION AND CONDITION MONITORING OF CNC MACHINE TOOLS: Precision and accuracy, machine specifications,
Calibration, ISO standards, geometric accuracy of machines, repeatability of positioning CNC machine tools, determination of
thermal effects, circular test for CNC machine tools, determination of noise emission, axes of rotation, determination of vibration
levels; Measurement of uncertainty, tool wear monitoring methods ,Compensation: backlash, pitch error, thermal error.
(11+5)
Total L:45 + T:30 =75

REFERENCES:
1. YoramKoren, “Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co., 2017.
2. Peter Smid, "CNC Programming Handbook”, Industrial Press, 3rd Edition, Inc, 2015
3. ISO standards ISO-230 series, 2015
4. Radhakrishnan P, “Computer Numerical Control (CNC) Machines”, New Central Book Agency, 2013.
5. Alan Overby,“CNC Machining Handbook: Building, Programming, and Implementation”, McGraw-Hill Education TAB, 2010
18MC52 CAD/CAM/CAE LABORATORY

0042
269
59th ACM 09.06.2018
1. Part modeling and preparation of production drawing

2. Industrial robotics: Path planning and simulation
3. CNC part programming and tool path analysis
4. Static and dynamic analysis of industrial components using FEA software
5. Transient thermal analysis of industrial components/processes using FEA software
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. CAD/CAM/CAE Laboratory Manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG college of Technology, 2018.
2. NitinS.Gokhale and‎‎Sanjay S.Deshpande,“Practical Finite Element Analysis”, Finite To Infinite,2008
18MC61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Total P: 60
SEMESTER III
18MC53 MANUFACTURING SIMULATION AND IoT LABORATORY

0042
1. Product/process layout simulation and performance analysis

2. Material handling system simulation and inventory analysis
3. Measurement systems analysis and process capability analysis
4. Machine tool condition monitoring using IoT devices.
5. Sensor data analytics in IoT devices
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Manufacturing Simulation and IoT Laboratory Manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG college of Technology,
2018.
2. Malcolm Beaverstock, Applied Simulation: Modeling and Analysis Using FlexSim, FlexSim Software Products, 2011
18MC71 PROJECT WORK I

0063
Total P: 90
SEMESTER IV
18MC72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14
 The project work involves the following:

270
59th ACM 09.06.2018
 A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any) ]


Total P: 420
18MC21 DATA STRUCTURES AND COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

3003
DATA STRUCTURES, ARRAYS AND LINKED LISTS: Data structures: Definition, types of data structures, abstract data types,
algorithms; Arrays: array representation, algorithms - linear and binary search, insertion and bubble sort; Linked lists: linked list
representation, polynomial addition and sparse matrices, algorithms. (11)
STACKS, QUEUES AND TREES: Stacks: representation, expression handling, algorithms; Queues: Queue representation, types of
queues – circular queue, dequeue, priority queue, algorithms; Trees: Terminologies, Binary trees – types, representation, binary tree
searching operations, binary heaps, heap sort, multi-way search trees, algorithms. (10)
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING: Review of object oriented programming language-C++: Concepts of OOP; Functions:
function prototyping, call by reference, return by reference, overloading functions, case study; Classes and objects: creation of
classes, creation and data allocation for objects, arrays of objects, member functions of classes, inheritance – defining derived
classes and single inheritance, case studies. (12)
JAVA PROGRAMMING: Data types, operators, control structures, arrays and strings, functions and abstract functions, classes and
abstract classes, case studies . (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jean Paul Tremblay and Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company,
New Delhi, 2017.
2. Venkatesan R and Lovelyn Rose S, “Data Structures”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2015.
3. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
4. BjarneStroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, Addison Wesley, 2013.
5. Cay S Horstmann and Gary Cornell, “Core Java Volume 1 & 2”, Pearson Education, 2013.
6. Aho, Hopcroft and Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson Education, 2002.
18MC22 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING

3003
SEARCH ALGORITHMS: Agents and environments, structure of agents, problem-solving agents, formulating problems, general
tree-search and graph-search algorithms, Infrastructure for search algorithms, Measuring problem-solving performance; Uninformed
search strategies: Breadth-first search, uniform-cost search, depth-first search, depth-limited search, iterative deepening depth-first
search, bidirectional search; Informed search strategies: Greedy best-first search, A* search, Recursive best-first search (RBFS),
Hill-climbing search; Knowledge representation; Case studies for practical problems with programming. (12)
META-HEURISTIC ALGORITHMS: Genetic algorithms, simulated annealing, tabu search, ant colony optimization, particle swarm
optimization, differential evolution, harmony search, bee algorithms; Case studies for practical problems with programming. (12)
MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES: Supervised learning: classification - support vector machines, linear discriminant analysis,
naive bayes k-nearest neighbor, Regression - Linear Regression, generalized linear model, decision trees; Unsupervised learning:
Clustering- k-Means clustering, hierarchical clustering, apriori algorithm; Case studies for practical problems with programming. (11)
DEEP LEARNING WITH NEURAL NETWORKS: Nodes and layers of neural network, training of single layer neural networks,
training of multi-layer networks, architectures of deep networks, building deep networks; Case studies for practical problems with
programming. (10)
Total L: 45
271
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Omid Bozorg-Haddad,‎Mohammad Solgi,‎‎ Hugo A. Loáiciga, “Meta-heuristic and Evolutionary Algorithms for Engineering
Optimization”, Wiley; 1 edition, 2017
2. Phil Kim, “MATLAB Deep Learning: With Machine Learning, Neural Networks and Artificial Intelligence”, Apress, 1st edition,
2017
3. Josh Patterson, “Deep Learning: A Practitioner's Approach”, O'Reilly; First edition, 2017
4. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Pearson Education Limited, England, Third
edition, 2016.
5. Ethem Alpaydm, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, MIT Press, 2014
6. Peter Harrington, “Machine Learning in Action”, Manning Publications Co, 2012
18MC23 VIRTUAL MANUFACTURING

3003
VIRTUAL REALITY AND VIRTUAL MANUFACTURING: Virtual reality: overview, four I’s of VR, components of VR system;
Augmented reality: overview, virtual reality versus augmented reality; Virtual manufacturing: physical prototype versus virtual
prototype, virtual environment, virtual machine, virtual factory. (9)
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE FOR VIRTUAL MANUFACTURING: Input devices: trackers, navigation and manipulation
interfaces, gesture interfaces; Output devices: graphics displays, sound displays, haptic feedback; VR toolkits: VRPN, VR
programming; multi modal interaction, simulators. (12)
MODELING AND SIMULATION: Geometric modeling: virtual object shapes, visual appearance, object hierarchies, model
management, LOD; Simulation: physical modeling, bounding volumes, handling collision detection; Response: transformation, force
computation, surface deformation, haptic texturing. (12)
VALIDATION AND ANALYSIS: Design validation, verification by simulation, analysis of manufacturing processes, material handling
and storage system, process layout, plant maintenance. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Timothy Jung, “Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality: Empowering Human, Place and Business”, Springer, 2018
2. Grigore C. Burdea, and Philippe Coiffet, “Virtual Reality Technology”, John Wiley & Sons Inc. 2006
3. Gerard Jounghyun Kim, “Designing Virtual Systems: The Structured Approach”, Springer, 2005
4. Oliver Bimber and Ramesh Raskar, “Spatial Augmented Reality: Meging Real and Virtual Worlds”, 2005.
5. William R Sherman and Alan B Craig, “Understanding Virtual Reality: Interface, Application and Design (The Morgan
Kaufmann Series in Computer Graphics)”. Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, San Francisco, CA, 2002.
18MC24 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS

3003
CONTROL SYSTEMS: Components, open loop and closed loop systems; Transfer function: modeling of physical systems,
mechanical systems, translational and rotational systems, thermal, hydraulic systems and electrical systems, DC servomotor, AC
servomotor, potentiometer, tacho-generator; Stepper motor: Block diagram - reduction techniques, signal flow graph – Mason’s gain
formula. (11)
TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS: Continuous time signals, standard test signals; Classification of continuous time systems: Linear-
nonlinear, Time variant, Time invariant, Static – Dynamic; Time response of second order system; Time domain specifications;
Steady state error constants; Generalized error series; Introduction to P, PI and PID modes of feedback control. (12)
STATE SPACE ANALYSIS: Limitations of conventional control theory; Concepts of state, state variables and state model; state
model for linear time invariant systems; Introduction to state space representation using physical; Phase and canonical variables;
State equations; Transfer function from the state model; Solutions of the state equations; State transition matrix; Concepts of
controllability and observability, System stability; Basic concepts of stability. (11)
FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF SYSTEMS: Frequency domain specifications; Estimation for second order systems; Correlation
between time and frequency domain specifications for second order systems; Frequency domain analysis; Bode plot: determination
of transfer function from bode plot. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Smarajit Ghosh, “Control Systems Theory and Applications”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Norman S Nise, “Control System Engineering”, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Singapore, 2012.
3. Richard C Dorf and Robert H Bishop, "Modern Control Systems”, 12th Edition, Addison-Wesley, New Delhi, 2010.
4. S Palani, “Control Systems Engineering”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Ogata K, "Modern Control Engineering", 5th Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
6. Nagrath I J, and Gopal M, 'Control Systems Engineering”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008.
272
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18MC25 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS
3003
INTERNET OF THINGS (IoT) ARCHITECTURE: Concepts: IoT, Industrial Iot (IIot); M2M Architecture, IoT Architecture: Definitions,
functional requirements, sensing, actuation, wireless sensor networks, advancements in IoT; Use cases. (10)
COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING PROTOCOLS: Internet Communication: IP Addresses, MAC Addresses, Wi-Fi, Zigbee,
low energy Bluetooth, Lora, 6LOWPAN,TCP, UDP- MQTT. (12)
ELECTRONIC PROTOTYPING: Prototypes production: Open Source, closed Source; Prototyping embedded devices, embedded
computing basics, Prototyping IoT projects: with arduino, with arduino and raspberry Pi; Industry IoT Case studies. (12)
IOT DATA ANALYTICS: Cloud: Types, edge analytics, fog computing; Sensors: Sensor data aggregation, sensor data mining, big
data analytics, predictive analytics. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Alasdair Gilchrist , “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”, Apress; 1st edition, 2017
2. HwaiyuGeng, "Internet of Things and Data Analytics Handbook", Wiley-Blackwell, 2017
3. AgusKurniawan, "Smart Internet of Things Projects", Packt Publishing Limited, 2016
18MC26 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

3003
ALGORITHMS FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING (AM): Generalized AM process chain, classification of AM processes,
comparison of AM with CNC machining; Stages in AM, STL files :Format, errors and repairs, algorithm; Slicing algorithms- tool
path generation; Effect of invalid models; Software used for AM. (11)
AM PROCESS FOR POLYMERS: Vat photo polymerization processes: vector scan, mask projection and two photon approach,
materials, scan patterns; Sheet lamination processes: Bond-Then-Form processes, Form-Then-Bond processes, materials; Fused
Deposition Modeling (FDM), process parameters, influence of process parameters in the mechanical properties of prototype; Case
studies on automobile and medical applications. (12)
METAL ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING: Ultrasonic Additive manufacturing: Working principle, process parameters, microstructures
and mechanical properties; Powder bed fusion (PBF) processes: Direct metal laser sintering (DMLS), Electron beam melting (EBM),
Selective heat sintering (SHS), Selective laser melting (SLM) and Selective laser sintering (SLS); PBF processes challenges,
process parameters, power handling systems, characteristics; Case studies for aerospace applications. (12)
POST-PROCESSING AND DESIGN FOR AM: Support material removal methods, hot isostatic pressing (HIP); Design for additive
manufacturing: requirements, framework, methods, systems, technologies. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, “Additive Manufacturing Technologies: 3D Printing, Rapid Prototyping, and Direct
Digital Manufacturing”, second edition, Springer, 2014.
2. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid Tooling, Rapid Manufacturing”, Hanser,
2012.
3. D.T Pham, S.S. Dimov, “Rapid Manufacturing: The Technologies and Applications of Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Tooling”,
Springer Science & Business Media, 2012
4. Chee Kai Chua, Kah Fai Leong, Chu Sing Lim, “Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications”, World Scientific, 2010.
18MC27 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES

3003
MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES: Ultrasonic Machining (USM), Abrasive Jet Machining (AJM), Abrasive Water Jet
Machining (AWJM); Process principles, equipments, effect of process parameters, selection of elements; Mathematical models for
MRR, selection of process parameters. (11)
THERMAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES: Electron Beam Machining (EBM), Plasma Arc Machining (PAM), Laser Beam
Machining (LBM); Process principles, equipments, effect of process parameters, selection of elements; Mathematical models and
selection of parameters. (10)
THERMO-ELECTRICAL AND CHEMICAL MACHINING PROCESSES: Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM) - electrical circuits,
electrolytes, electrode materials, Electro Chemical Machining (ECM) - chemistry of the process, electrolytes, Electro Chemical
Grinding (ECG);Process principles, equipments, effect of process parameters, selection of elements; Mathematical models and
selection of parameters. (12)
MICRO MACHINING AND NANO FABRICATION: Micromachining: principle, chip formation-size effect in micromachining, micro-
turning, micro-milling, micro-drilling, micro EDM, Micro-wire EDM, micro ECM, laser micro-machining; Process principles,
273
59th ACM 09.06.2018
equipments, effect of process parameters, selection of elements; Mathematical models and selection of parameters. Nano
fabrication: LIGA, ion beam etching, molecular manufacturing techniques, nano machining techniques, sub micron lithographic
technique. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. John R. Walker, “Modern Metalworking”, Goodheart-Willcox Publishing, 2017
2. Vijay K.Jain, “Advanced Machining Processes”, Allied Publishers, 2017
3. Gary F Benedict, “Nontraditional Manufacturing Process”, CRC Press, 2015
4. Pandey P C, "Modern Machining Systems", Tata McGraw Hill Publication, 2012.
5. McGeough, J.A.," Advanced methods of Machining",Springer,2011
6. Madou, M.J., “Fundamentals of Micro fabrication: The Science of Miniaturization”, Second Edition, CRC Press, 2006.
7. Hassan Abdel-Gawad El-Hofy, “Advanced Machining Processes: Non-traditional and Hybrid Machining Processes”, McGraw-
Hill Education, 2005
18MC28 METROLOGY AND AUTOMATED INSPECTION

3003
MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS AND SURFACE FINISH MEASUREMENT: Review of measurement concepts, standards of
measurement, errors in measurement, accuracy and precision; Calibration of instruments: Calibration procedure for vernier caliper
and micrometer; Measurement of Surface Finish: Types of Surface Texture, surface roughness measurement methods,
profilometer, 3D Surface roughness measurement. (13)
INTERFEROMETRY AND LASER METROLOGY: Review of Interferometry: Principles of light interference, types of
interferometers, measurement and calibration using Interferometer; Laser Metrology: laser Micrometer, laser scanning gauge, laser
interferometry. (10)
MACHINE VISION: Solid state camera, three-dimensional vision, commercial machine vision system, smart Cameras, Image
processing: Overview, Image acquisition and digitizing, segmentation, thresholding, edge detection, feature extraction,
interpretation. (12)
ADVANCED INSPECTION SYSTEM: Tool makers microscope, micro-hite, coordinate measuring machine; Non contact and in-
process inspection; Case studies: Ultrasonic sensor for automated inspection, automated inspection for packaging product,
automatic inspection of engine block, multi-gauging, robotic testing and inspection- automobile body gauging. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Graham T.Smith, “Industrial Metrology”, Springer, 2016
2. Gupta.I.C, “A text book of Engineering Metrology”‖, DhanpatRai publications, New Delhi, eighth revised edition, 2015.
3. J. Beyerer, Fernando P.L., Christian F., “Machine Vision – Automated Visual Inspection Theory Practice and Applications”,
Springer, 2015.
4. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac and Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision”, Cengage-Engineering, 3rd
edition, 2013.
5. Beckwith.T.G,Roy D. Marangoni, John H. Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Prentice Hall, sixth edition, 2011
6. David Vernon, “Machine vision - Automated Visual Inspection and Robot Vision”, Prentice Hall
18MC29 SHEET METAL CUTTING AND BENDING TECHNOLOGIES

3003
SHEET METAL CUTTING TECHNIQUES: Growth of sheet metal industry, terminology, blanking operations, selection of punch
presses, calculation of tonnage, cutting operations, Selection of cutting processes and machinery: Laser cutting, water-jet cutting,
plasma cutting, oxy-fuel cutting; Specifications, selection process parameters; (11)
NESTING PROCESS: Concepts, factors to be considered, objectives, strategies, evaluation of different layout generation methods,
Nesting algorithms: Heuristics, expert systems, Artificial Intelligent methods; Case studies with CAM packages. (11)
SHEET METAL BENDING TECHNIQUES: Terminology, types of bending operations, types of press brakes, constructional
features, specifications, press brake tooling, types of punches, selection of die, development of unfold. (12)
SHEET METAL BENDING PLAN AND DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS: Bending sequence generation methods, tooling stages and
setup, back-gauge positioning, collision check methods, optimization concepts, software packages, design considerations, product
handling methods, protection and packaging methods. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David J. Gingery, “Sheet Metal Technology”, David J Gingery Publishing; First edition, 2016.
2. Vukota Boljanovic, “Sheet Metal Forming Processes and Die Design”, Industrial Press Inc., 2nd Revised edition, 2014.
3. Ramesh Babu A and Ramesh Babu N, “Effective Nesting of Complex Two Dimensional Shapes - Genetic and Heuristic
Approaches, LAP LAMBERT Academic Publishing, GMBH & Co. Germany, 2012, ISBN No: 978-3-659-10975-1
4. Steve D. Benson, “Press Brake Technology: A Guide to Precision Sheet Metal Bending”, Society of Manufacturing Engineers,
1st edition, 1997
274
59th ACM 09.06.2018
5. “Bending Technique: New Knowhow on Sheet-metal Fabrication”, Amada Sheet Metal Working Research Association,
Machinist Publicaitons,1980
18MC30 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ADVANCED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS

vide Industrial Engineering 18MN09
18MC31 SIMULATION MODELING AND ANALYSIS

18MC32 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

18MC33 LEAN SIX SIGMA IN MANUFACTURING AND SERVICE

18MC34 ENGINEERING ECONOMIC ANALYSIS

13MC35 GEOMETRIC MODELLING

vide Engineering Design 18MD24
13MC36 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

13MC37 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

AUDIT COURSES
18MC81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18MC82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

275
59th ACM 09.06.2018
M.E. LEAN MANUFACTURING
(2018 REGULATIONS)
*

I SEMESTER
18ML01 Applied Statistics and Reliability 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ML02 Operations Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ML03 Lean Manufacturing Tools and Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ML04 Lean Supply Chain Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ML05 Information Systems for Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ML51 Manufacturing Simulation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18ML81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 20 hrs 14 2 4 17 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18ML06 Lean Six Sigma in Manufacturing and Service 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18ML07 Lean Product Design and Development 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ML08 Total Productive Maintenance 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ML09 Costing and Engineering Economics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18ML-- Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML52 Lean Manufacturing Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18ML61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18ML82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 hrs 18 2 8 23 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18ML53 Operations Research Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18ML71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22 hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18ML72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
18ML21 Human Factors Methods 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML22 Entrepreneurship Development 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML23 Agile Project Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML24 Management of Service Operations 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML25 Inventory and Warehouse Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML26 Human Resource Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML27 Marketing Management and Strategy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML28 Facilities Design and Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML29 Sequencing and Scheduling 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML30 Enterprise Resource Planning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18ML31 Advanced Optimization Techniques 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18ML32 Advanced Operations Research 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
276
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18ML01 APPLIED STATISTICS AND RELIABILITY
18ML02 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

18ML03 LEAN MANUFACTURING TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES

3003
PRINCIPLES OF LEAN MANUFACTURING: Review of manufacturing paradigm; Objectives of lean manufacturing, key principles
and implications of lean manufacturing, traditional versus lean manufacturing characteristics; Value creation and waste elimination-
major kinds of manufacturing waste, concept of takt time, continuous flow , continuous improvement, single piece flow. (12)
LEAN MANUFACTURING TOOLS AND METHODOLOGIES: Values stream mapping: Current state and future state value stream
mapping; Standard work: Communication of standard work to employees, visual controls; Quality at the source, 5S principles, Total
Productive Maintenance, Changeover and setup time reduction; Production leveling-Failure mode and effect analysis, line
balancing, mistake proofing, case studies. (11)
GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND JUST IN TIME MANUFACTURING: Group technology philosophy: Part family, Machine cell design
and analysis; JIT-Elements of JIT, Kanban, case studies. (11)
LEAN MANUFACTURING IMPLEMENTATION: Road map for lean manufacturing implementation; Reconciling lean with other
systems-Lean six sigma, integrating lean principles in ERP and PLM; Lean production in Industry 4.0: Impact of industry 4.0 on lean
production system, case studies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Beata Mrugalska, Magdalena K. Wyrwicka, “Towards Lean Production in Industry 4.0”, Procedia Engineering, 182, 2017.
2. S. R. Devadasan, V. Sivakumar, “Lean and Agile Manufacturing: Theoretical, Practical and Research futurities”, PHI, 2012.
3. Askin R G, Goldberg J B, “Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003.
4. Micheal Wader, “Lean Tools: A Pocket Guide to Implementing Lean Practices”, Productivity and Quality Pub, 2002.
5. Kenichi Sekine, “One-Piece Flow”, Productivity Press, Portland, Oregon, 1992.
6. Alan Robinson, “Continuous Improvement in Operations”, Productivity Press, Portland, Oregon, 1991.
18ML04 LEAN SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

3003
LEAN SUPPLY CHAIN AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT: Lean opportunities in supply chain and logistics, Examples of JIT in
the Supply chain, competitive strategy, logistics and customer value, measuring logistics cost and performance; Traditional
inventory management versus lean inventory management, kanban sizing, WIP inventory: FIFO management, lot sizing in lean ,one
piece, Every Part Every Interval ,lot sizing as part of scheduling, reducing pipeline inventory: kanban, visual car, inventory reduction
through reducing lot sizes, point of sales data. (12)
LEAN SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGN: Principles, lean layouts, lean production schedules, lean service, traditional physical control of
inventories, traditional relationships packaging, preparing an item for shipment, overall warehouse setup and item locations,
traditional logistics, skill, freight cost, distribution requirements planning, lean warehousing, contractor management: selection of
contractors, induction, onsite management, risk management, lean logistics : product availability and its effect on logistics
,collaboration: visibility and reliability, the impact of globalization, enterprise resource planning, leveraging enterprise resource
planning in supply chain, sales and operations planning, lean supply chain tools for the perfect order (12)
LEAN SUPPLY CHAIN EXECUTION: E-Commerce, QR, ECR, and CPFR, collaborative planning, forecasting, replenishment,
vendor-managed inventory, other potential areas for collaboration, future opportunities , logistics of a global supply chain, value
stream mapping to identify waste, areas to reduce waste policies and procedures, relevant lean supply chain and logistics metrics,
balanced scorecard, display and control metrics, barriers to supply chain integration ,trends in lean supply chain, data analytics,
supply chain analytics and lean, potential obstacles to lean thinking in the supply chain. (11)
CASE STUDIES: Reverse logistics, warehouse management using lean concept, lean supply chain management of an automobile
component manufacturing industry, introducing lean concept in E-procurement. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Myerson “Lean Supply Chain and Logistics Management”, McGraw-Hill Education, 2012.
2. Robert Jacobs F,Richard B Chase “Operations and Supply Chain Management” McGraw-Hill Irwin, 2012.
3. Martin Christopher, “Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Pearson publications, 2011.
4. Bill Kerber, Brian J Dreckshage, “Lean Supply Chain Management Essentials: A Framework for Materials Managers”, CRC
Press, 2011.
5. Baudin Michel, “Lean Logistics: The Nuts and Bolts of Delivering Materials and Goods”, Productivity Press, New York, 2005.
277
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ML05 INFORMATION SYSTEMS FOR MANUFACTURING
3003
INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND NETWORKING: Role of information technology in manufacturing: Role of internet, Intranet and
extranet, present market constraints, extended enterprises, B2C and B2B. Types of server: Client/Server, architecture, database,
data model, database management systems. Networking concepts: Networking devices, Network topologies, Wireless
communication (12)
PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND ISSUES: Software Engineering: Software development life-cycle, Product life cycle
management- Sequential engineering versus concurrent engineering - Global product - Product development – Quality assurance
issues and complexity (12)
MANUFACTURING MODELS: Engineer to order, make to order, assemble to order, made to stock, and configure to order. Faster
design throughput: Web based design, changing design approaches, engineering change management, product configuration
management. Enterprise application and integration for product lifecycle management, risk management - case studies (10)
IT ENABLED PROCESS AND RESOURSE PLANNING: Process planning: Structure of process planning software, Information
requirements for process planning. Role of Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP), Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) – case
studies (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. John Stark, “Global Product Strategy, Product Lifecycle Management and Billion Customer Question”, Springer Publisher,
2007.
2. John Stark, “Product Lifecycle Management: 21st century for Product Realisation”, Springer Publisher, 2005.
3. Franjo Cecelja,” Manufacturing Information and Data systems, Design and Practice‟‟ Penton Press Publisher, 2002.
4. Radhakrishan P,Subramanyan P, Raju V, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age International Publishers, 2002.
18ML51 MANUFACTURING SIMULATION LABORATORY

0042
1. Manufacturing system simulation and performance measurement using simulation software

2. Solving inventory problems using simulation software
3. Solving transportation and assignment problems
4. Project evaluation and review based on time and cost
5. Measurement system analysis , process capability analysis , gauge repeatability and reproducibility using statistical
software
CASE STUDY
Manufacturing simulation of advanced manufacturing systems
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. W. David Kelton, .‎2005‎,noitacudE‎rehgiH‎lliH‎warGcM‎,”anerA‎htiw‎noitalumiS”,kcorrutS‎.T‎divaD‎,ikswodaS‎lladnaR‎

2. Jerry Banks, John S, Carson II, Barry L Nelson, David M Nicol, “Discrete Event System Simulation”, Prentice Hall Inc.,
2006.
3. Law A M, “Simulation Modeling and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 2008.
4. Francis Neelamkavil, “Computer Simulation and Modeling”, John Wiley and Sons, 1987.
SEMESTER II
18ML06 LEAN SIX SIGMA IN MANUFACTURING AND SERVICE

3204
CONCEPTS OF LEAN SIX SIGMA: Overview of six sigma concept: definition, origin, terms. Foundations of lean six sigma –four
keys, five laws of lean six sigma, types of lean six sigma: DMAIC versus DMADV – lean six sigma project selection: selection of
team members, six sigma roles and responsibilities; Team stages: characteristics of effective teams, six sigma training plan; Six
sigma metrics: DPMO calculation, quality cost, cost of poor quality- roadmap for implementation; Common implementation issues
and management strategies. (12)
278
59th ACM 09.06.2018
DEFINE AND MEASURE PHASE: Customer identification, Voice of customer (VOC), VOC data collection, Critical To Quality (CTQ)
– Value Stream Mapping - SIPOC – project charter, types of measures, types of data, applications of QC tools, measurement
system analysis, Process capability calculations. (12)
ANALYSE PHASE: Inferential and Descriptive Statistics, Patterns of Variation, Normality Analysis, Multi-Vari Analysis; Hypothesis
testing for Normal Data: Selection and application problems; Introduction to statistical software, failure mode and effects analysis,
analysis of lean wastes. (11)
IMPROVE AND CONTROL PHASE: Process redesign principles, Generating improvement alternatives, Quality Function
Deployment (QFD), Theory of Inventive Problem Solving (TRIZ); Design of experiments; Waste elimination methods, Cycle time
reduction, Cost/benefit analysis; Process scorecard – Control Plan. (10)
Total L: 45 T:15 60
REFERENCES:
1. Jay Arthur, “Lean Six Sigma – Demystified”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies Inc, 2011.
2. Joseph De Feo, William Barnard, “Juran Institute‟s Six Sigma Breakthrough and Beyond”, McGraw-Hill, 2004.
3. Betsiharris Ehrlich, “Transactional Six Sigma and Lean Servicing”, St. Lucia Press, 2002.
4. Michael L George, David T Rowlands, Bill Kastle, “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.
5. Kai Yangand Basem El, Haik, “Design for Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.
6. Donald W Benbow, Kubiak T M, “Certified Six Sigma Black Belt Handbook”, Pearson Education, 2007.
18ML07 LEAN PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

3003
INTEGRATED PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT: Product development system, process particularities, performance
drivers, metrics; integrated product development-sequential product design and integrated product design; Rescue movement, tools
and teams; lean thinking, value on product development, waste in product development. Green manufacturing: lean sustainability,
continuous improvement. (12)
LEAN PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT- ORGANIZATIONAL CULTURE: Lean enabling organizational culture-hard on the problem,
soft on the people; power of communication, lean product development organization knowledge management organized to learn
(and to lean); knowledge identification-creation- representation-distribution, enabling; A3 report planning method- problem-solving
A3. (11)
LEAN PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT PROCESS: Process and its phases, portfolio management activities; value identification,
proposition, delivery planning, design and development, production/ramp-up, product/process follow-up and product process
discontinuation activities; product development and visual management; value function deployment, identification activities,
planning activities ;board to guide the value delivery planning; execution phase - board to guide the design and development-
production. (11)
LEAN JOURNEY: Setting attitude and plan; breaking the roots from the traditional paradigm; thermo baby development project;
robot based flight simulator development project; product development performance drivers, case studies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Marcus Vinicius Pereira Pessôa, Luís Gonzaga Trabasso, “The Lean Product Design and Development Journey- A Practical
View”, Springer International Publishing AG 2017.
2. Ronald Mascitelli, “The Lean Product Development Guidebook”, Technology Perspectives, 2014.
3. Ronald Mascitelli, “Mastering Lean Product Development-A Practical, Event-Driven Process for Maximizing Speed, Profits, and
Quality”, Technology Perspectives, 2011.
4. Michael Grieve, “Product Lifecycle Management: Driving the next generation of lean thinking”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
18ML08 TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE

3003
PRINCIPLES OF TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE: Review of TPM concept-Objectives and functions, Reliability centered
maintenance, Maintainability prediction, availability and system effectiveness, maintenance cost. (12)
TPM IMPLEMENTATION: Developing the TPM implementation plan; Preventive maintenance, Minimal repair, Maintenance types,
Balancing PM and breakdown maintenance. (11)
ZERO BREAK DOWN: Zero defects and TPM, Maximizing equipment effectiveness, Autonomous maintenance program, Pillars of
TPM, TPM small group activities, TPM organization, Improving maintenance efficiency and effectiveness. (11)
HUMAN FACTORS IN MAINTENANCE: Maintenance manuals, Maintenance staffing methods, Simulation, Spare parts
management; Maintenance planning and scheduling; Condition monitoring techniques. Maintenance management information
systems, total economic maintenance, team-based maintenance, fault diagnosis, TPM online diagnostics. (11)
Total L: 45
279
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Tina Kanti Agustiady, Elizabeth A. Cudney, „Total Productive Maintenance: Strategies and Implementation Guide‟, Productivity
Press, 2015.
2. Kern Peng, „Equipment Management in the Post-Maintenance Era: A New Alternative to Total Productive Maintenance (TPM),
Productivity Press, 2012.
3. Fumio Gotoh, MasajiTajiri, „Autonomous maintenance in Seven Steps: Implementing TPM on the Shop Floor‟, Productivity
Press, 1999.
4. David J. Sumanth, „Total Productivity Management: A Systematic and Quantitative Approach to Compete in Quality, Price and
Time‟, Productivity Press, 1997.
5. Japan Institute of Plant Maintenance, „Autonomous maintenance for Operators‟, Productivity Press, 1997.
18ML09 COSTING AND ENGINEERING ECONOMICS

3003
COST CONCEPTS: Cost structure: Labor, material, overhead cost; Nature of overhead Cost, Overhead absorption methods: Direct
labor, direct material, number of pieces, labor hour rate, machine hour rate methods – Cost control: labor, material, overhead
variance analysis. (10)
ECONOMICS: Present economic policy: liberalization, privatization, globalization, scope for industrial growth, interest and time
value of money, cash-flow diagram, simple interest, compound interest, single payments: uniform series payments - interest factors
and tables - nominal and effective interest rates - continuous compounding - uniform continuous payments. Present worth
comparison - equal, unequal lived assets - study period – assets with infinite life - capitalized cost. Equivalent uniform annual cost
comparison – situations for EUAC. (12)
REPLACEMENT ANALYSIS: Review of conventional approach – group replacement - analysis with time value accounting –
replacement due to deterioration, obsolescence, inadequacy – economic life for cyclic replacements - current salvage value of the
defender - defender and challenger with different lives - additional one year assessment. (11)
PROJECT FEASIBILITY ANALYSIS: Case study - report preparation. Depreciation - reasons - depreciation accounts - causes of
declining value - depreciation methods, multi product break even analysis. - review of project management - PERT - CPM - crashing
- cost system. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Leland T Blank, Anthony J Tarquin, "Engineering Economy", McGraw Hill Book Company, 2012.
2. John A White, "Principles of Engineering Economic Analysis", John Wiley and Sons, 2012.
3. T.R. Banga, S.C. Sharma, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing Including Contracting”, Khanna Publishers, 2011.
4. William G Sullivan, “Engineering Economy”, Pearson Education Inc., 2010.
5. James L Riggs, David D Bedworth, Sabah U Randhawa, “Engineering Economics”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2004.
18ML52 LEAN MANUFACTURING LABORATORY

0042
1. Facility layout design and study of layout performance

2. Value Stream Mapping: Study of current state and future state diagrams
3. Ergonomic study of human performance
4. Study of lean factory (cycle time, WIP, time and motion study, Poka-Yoke)
5. Process capability study and use of six sigma
6. Study of failure mode and effects analysis
Case study:
Implementation of lean techniques in a manufacturing industry and perform lean audit.
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Askin R G, Goldberg J B, “Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003
2. Micheal Wader, “Lean Tools: A Pocket Guide to Implementing Lean Practices”, Productivity and Quality Pub, 2002
3. Beata Mrugalska, Magdalena K. Wyrwicka, “Towards Lean Production in Industry 4.0”, Procedia Engineering, 182 (2017)
280
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ML61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR
0042
Total P: 60
SEMESTER III
18ML53 OPERATIONS RESEARCH LABORATORY

18ML71 PROJECT WORK I

0063
 Identification of real life problem in thrust areas
 Developing a mathematical model for solving the selected problem
 Consolidated report preparation
Total P: 90
IV SEMESTER
18ML72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14
 Problem identification
 A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block diagram / Concept tree)
A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any) ]
 Implementation phase (Hardware / Software / both)

 Testing and validation of the developed system
 Learning in the project

Total P: 420
18ML21 HUMAN FACTORS METHODS

3003
HUMAN FACTORS: Goals and Scope of human factors, Systems thinking, Human centered design, Steps in performing task
analysis, Iterative design and refinement, Evaluation methods – Purpose and types of evaluation, Factorial designs with interactions,
Analysis of data, Statistical and practical significance. (12)
COGNITIVE ELEMENTS: Visual environment and receptor system, sensory processing characteristics, Influence of vision on
cognition, Auditory environment, Noise and annoyance, Tactile and Haptic senses; Information processing model of cognition,
Working and Long term memory, Divided attention and time sharing. (11)
HOMINAL SYNERGY WITH WORKSPACE: Theories for interface and interaction design, Types of automation; Fifteen principles
281
59th ACM 09.06.2018
of human centered automation, problems with automation; Principles of workspace design, Use of anthropometric data in design,
Standing and seated workplace. (11)
BIOMECHANICS OF WORK: Biomechanical models, Low-back problems, Cumulative trauma disorders, Work load assessment,
Energy cost of work, Whole body fatigue, Work capacity, Environmental and Psychological stressors, Remedies for overload,
Vigilance, fatigue and sleep disruption, Safety and accident prevention – OSHA and NIOSH. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. John D. Lee,‎Christopher D. Wickens,‎‎ Yili Liu, " An Introduction to Human Factors Engineering ", Create Space Independent
Pub., 2017.
2. Stephen.J.Guastello, Human Factors Engineering and Ergonomics: A Systems Approach, Second Edition, 2017.
3. L. P. Singh, Arvind Bhardwaj, "Human Factor Engineering", Galgotias Pvt. Ltd, 2016.
4. Neville A. Stanton, "Human Factors Methods: A Practical Guide for Engineering and Design", Taylor & Francis, 2013
5. Chandler.A.Philips,” Human Factors Engineering”, First edition, 2000.
18ML22 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

3003
FUNDAMENTALS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP: Forms of ownership, systematic business transformation, innovation in

entrepreneurship, seven sources for innovative opportunity, social and psychological factors, types, competencies and pre-
requisites of entrepreneurs. (12)
ENTREPRENEURIAL MOTIVATION: Propensity to taking risks, McClelland‟s need–Achievement Theory, Herjburg‟s theory,
McGragor‟s Theory, thematic apperception test – stress management, use of E-commerce in business (11)
STRATEGIES FOR BUSINESS: Market assessment, value chain analysis, SWOT analysis, porter‟s 5-forces model, sources of
finance, financial statement analysis, manpower planning, tools and techniques for performance appraisal, process of image
building, promotion and distribution. (11)
ETIQUETTES AND ETHICS: Effective presentation styles and body language, employee rights and gender issues, customer care,
grievance redressal, values and morals at workplace, case study of successful entrepreneurs. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sharma Sangeeta, “Entrepreneurship Development”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,2016
2. Peter Drucker, "Innovation and Entrepreneurship", Harper Collins India, 2015
3. Gordon E, Natarajan K ,”Entrepreneurship Development”, Himalaya Publications House,2014
4. Byrd, Megginson, "Small Business Management: An Entrepreneur's Guidebook", McGraw Hill Education, 2013
18MN23 AGILE PROJECT MANAGEMENT

3003
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND INITIATION: Definition of Project, Project Life Cycle, Selecting Projects Strategically – Project
Management maturity, Project selection and criteria of choice, the nature of project selection models, types of project selection
models,. Role of project managers, Nature of negotiation, partnering, chartering and scope change, conflict and the project life
cycle, requirements and principles of negotiation. (12)
PROJECT PLANNING, TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES: Initial project coordination and the project plan; Project costs and Budgets –
estimating project budgets, expert opinion, analogy, parametric estimate; cost engineering – example, contingency amount,
elements of budgets and estimates improving the process of cost estimation. Network diagram and Network Techniques; Risk
analysis – objectives of risk analysis, identify the risk; Risk management – choosing, implementing and evaluating; Project control,
evaluation and termination. (11)
AGILE PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Agile revolution‟s impact on product development- Agile Project Management, Agile values and
principles for organization; Optimizing all five stages of the agile project: Envision, Speculate, Explore, Adapt, and Close (11)
AGILE ENTERPRISE FRAMEWORK: Governance, project and iteration management, technical practices; Organizational and
product-related processes for scaling agile, agile project governance solutions; The “Agile Triangle”: measuring performance,
changing role of the agile project leader. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mark C. Layton “Agile Project Management”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2012
2. Jim Highsmith, “Agile Project Management: Creating Innovative Products”, Addison‐Wesley Professional, 2009
3. John M Nicholas, “Project Management for Business and Technology”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
4. Vasant Desai, “Project Management”, Himalaya Publishing House, 2001.
5. Dennis Lock, “The Essentials of Project Management”, Gower Publishing Ltd., 1997.
6. Anastasia Pagnoni, “Project Engineering – Computer Oriented Planning and Operational Decision Making”, Springer Verlag,
1990.
282
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ML24 MANAGEMENT OF SERVICE OPERATIONS
3003
SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS: Services – Importance, role in economy, service sector – growth; Nature of services -Service
classification , Service Package, distinctive characteristics , open-systems view; Service strategy – Strategic service vision,
competitive environment, generic strategies, winning customers; Role of information technology; stages in service firm
competitiveness; Internet strategies - Environmental strategies. (12)
SERVICE DESIGN: New service development: Design elements, Service blue-printing, process structure, generic approaches,
value to customer. Retail design strategies: store size- Network configuration; managing service experience: economy, key
dimensions, vehicle routing and scheduling. (11)
SERVICE QUALITY: Service quality- dimensions, service quality gap model; measuring service quality- quality service by design -
service recovery - service guarantees; service encounter – triad, creating service orientation, service profit chain; front-office back-
office interface – service decoupling. (10)
SERVICE STRATEGIC CHANGE: Managing demand – strategies; managing capacity – basic strategies, supply management
tactics, operations planning and control; yield management; inventory management in services– retail discounting model,
newsvendor model; managing waiting lines –queuing systems, psychology of waiting; managing for growth- expansion strategies,
franchising , globalization. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bill Hobins, Sadie Shinkins, “Managing Service Operations”, Sage Publications India Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
2. Robert Johnson, Graham Clark, “Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery”, Pearson Education Ltd., 2005.
3. Nevan Wright J,Peter Race, “The Management of Service Operations”, Thomson Learning, 2005.
4. William J Glynn, James G Barnes, “Understanding Service management: Integrating marketing, Operational Behavior”, Wiley
Publishers, 1995.
18ML25 INVENTORY AND WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT

3003
INVENTORY MANAGEMENT AND TOOLS: Types of inventory, types of inventory demand, reorder point, techniques, safety stock,
safety time, Economic Order Quality; Inventory cost-purpose of inventory, types of stocks; Inventory Strategy: replenishment,
fulfillment, customization and outsourcing, framework of Inventory management; Obsolete Inventory: obsolete inventory
identification, disposal, presentation and NCNR inventory reduction; Case study on total landed cost. Inventory record accuracy - fill
rates; Tools to uncover system dysfunction: run charts, flow charts, logic charts, variance report - cycle count: annual inventory,
cycle count methodologies. (12)
WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT AND PROCESS: Types of warehouse operations, supply chain trends affecting warehouse,
transportation issues; Assets, activities; Warehouse manager role: warehouse trade-offs, challenges, people management,
attracting and retaining warehouse employees and training: receiving, pre-receipt, in-handling, preparation, offloading, checking,
cross-checking; Pick preparation: preparation and warehouse layout. (12)
WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT TOOLS: Warehouse audit, 5S or 5C (Gemba Kanri), Pareto analysis, ABC analysis and XYZ
analysis for warehouse design, Order picking strategy, choice of picking system, cross docking, slotting or item profiling, resource
planning, task inventory, selection of warehouse storage equipment, warehouse location number, selection of material handling
equipments, warehouse space calculation, selection of warehouse management system. (11)
OUTSOURCING, AUTOMATION IDENTIFICATION AND ROLE OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY: Decision for outsourcing,
core activity/ core competence, cost reduction, labor relation, financial strategy, flexibility; Role of third-party contractors, future of
outsourcing, basics of bar coding - elements of bar code symbols - bar code applications. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Steven Bragg, “Inventory Management”, Accounting Tools LLC, USA, 2013.
2. Gwynee Richards,Susan Grinsted, “The logistics and Supply chain toolkit”, Gwynne Richards Publications, USA, 2013.
3. Max Muller, “Essentials of Inventory Management”, American Management Association, 2011.
4. Russell G Broeckelmann, “All in Inventory Classification Innovation: Paving the way for Electronic commerce and Vendor
managed inventory”, CRC Press, 1999.
18ML26 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

3003
NATURE AND SCOPE OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: Meaning and definition of HRM, objectives and functions of
HRM, models of HRM, HRM in a changing environment, role of globalization in human resource management; Job analysis – job
specification – recruitment – induction – selection – placement: role in HRM, process, methods, selection and placement. (11)
283
59th ACM 09.06.2018
TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT: Principles of learning, objectives, types and training methods, multi-skilling, management
development: meaning, scope and objectives; Process: methods, factors that distort appraisal, methods to improve performance,
role of performance in the performance management process, performance appraisal versus potential appraisal. (12)
WAGE AND SALARY ADMINISTRATION: Principles and techniques of wage fixation, job evaluation, incentive schemes; Morale:
importance of moral-employee attitudes and behaviour and their significance to employee productivity; Motivation methods of
employees, empowerment: factors affecting empowerment – process – benefits. (12)
WORK ENVIRONMENT AND TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF EMPLOYMENT: Fatigue, safety, accident prevention accident
records, industrial relations; Model variables that outline difference between local and international HRM: approaches to IHRM,
linking HRM to international expansion strategies; HR outsourcing: Human resource information system – management of turnover
and retention. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bernardin H John, “Human Resource Management – An Experiential Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
2. Dezenzo A David, Robbins P Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.
3. Gary Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.
4. Aswathappa K, “Human Resource and Personnel Management – Text and Cases”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
5. Rao V S P, “Managing People”, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2002.
18ML27 MARKETING MANAGEMENT AND STRATEGY

3003
MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES: Objectives and success: stakeholders‟ objectives and constraints, developing balanced objectives,
developing a strategy, criteria for strategic success, strategic intent core competences, organizational dimensions. Theory of
marketing: the customer-led business, focus on needs, competitive advantage, customers as assets, creating the customer-led
business. (11)
STRATEGIC MARKET PLANNING: Adapting to change, evolution of planning systems, corporate strategy, business unit strategy.
Market dynamics and competitive strategy: cycles of confusion, market dynamics, evolution of markets, formulating marketing
strategies, niche companies. (12)
COMMUNICATION STRATEGY: Communications and buyer behavior: advertising planning, direct response marketing, interactive
marketing, sales promotion, public relations, communications mix. Sales management: selling process, negotiations, managing
account relationships. (12)
MARKETING IN SERVICE: Nature of services: service characteristics, service tasks, services marketing strategy. Marketing: a
recapitulation, changing marketing environment, market prediction, corporate responsibility .Case studies. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Philip Kotler and Kevin Lane, “Marketing Management”, PHI Publications, 2008.
2. Azhar Kazmi, “Strategic Management & Business Policy”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
3. Peter Doyle and Philip Stern, “Marketing Management and Strategy”, Pearson Education Limited, 2006.
4. Lawerence G. Hrebiniak,” Making strategy work”, Pearson Education Limited, 2005.
18ML28 FACILITIES LOCATION AND DESIGN

18ML29 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

18MN30 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING

18ML31 ADVANCED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

18ML32 ADVANCED OPERATIONS RESEARCH

AUDIT COURSES
18ML81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18ML82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

284
59th ACM 09.06.2018

ME ENERGY ENGINEERING
(2018 REGULATIONS)
(Minimum No. of credits to be earned: 71) *

I SEMESTER
18SE01 Applied Numerical Methods 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE02 Selection of Energy Equipment 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE03 Energy Conservation and Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE04 Instrumentations for Energy Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE -- Stream Specific Core 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE51 Energy Engineering Laboratory - 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18SE81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 20 hrs 14 2 4 17 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18SE07 Energy Resources, Economics and Environment 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE08 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE -- Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE52 Computational Fluid Dynamics Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18SE61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18SE82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 hrs 18 2 8 23 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18SE53 Energy Simulation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18SE71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18SE72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
STREAM SPECIFIC CORE COURSES
STREAM SPECIFIC CORE 1 (one to be opted)
18SE05 Industrial Combustion Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE06 Modeling and Control of Power Converters 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE09 Thermal Systems Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE10 Modeling and Analysis of Electrical Machines 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18SE11 Design of Renewable Energy Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
Power Electronics in Wind and Solar Power PC
18SE12 3 2 0 4 50 50 100
Conversion
COMMON FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING STREAMS
Cleaner Production and Clean Development PE
18SE21 3 0 0 3 50 50 100
Mechanism
18SE22 Green Buildings 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE23 Design of Solar Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE24 Waste Management and Energy Recovery 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE25 Hydrogen Energy and Fuel Cells 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE26 Bio-Energy Conversion Technologies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE27 Energy Storage Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
285
59th ACM 09.06.2018
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING STREAM

18SE31 PE
Turbulence and Boundary Layer Theory 3 0 0 3 50 50 100
18SE32 Energy Conservation in HVACR Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE33 Aerodynamics of Streamlined and Bluff Bodies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE34 Design of Wind Energy Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING STREAM
18SE41 Soft Computing Techniques for Renewable Energy PE
3 0 0 3 50 50 100
Systems
18SE42 Advanced Virtual Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE43 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE44 Hybrid Electric Vehicles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE45 Distributed Generation and Micro grids 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE46 Smart Grid Technologies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18SE47 Flexible AC Transmission system 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
286
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18SE01 APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS

2203
NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations –Thomas algorithm, Gauss Jacobi
and Gauss Seidel methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations - Newton Raphson method,
eigenvalues - power method and inverse power method. Curve fitting - linear regression, multiple linear regression, cubic splines -
Bezier curves and B-splines. (8+7)
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Boundary value problem - Shooting method, finite difference method, derivative boundary
conditions. Finite Element Method - Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods (8+7)
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite difference method: Liebmann‟s method for Laplace and Poisson equations, alternating
direct implicit method, irregular and non-rectangular grids, explicit method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations,
explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
3. Frank R Giordano, William P Fox and Steven B Horton, A first course in Mathematical Modeling, Cengage Learning , New
Delhi, 2014.
4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatley, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
18SE02 SELECTION OF ENERGY EQUIPMENT

3003
FLUID MACHINERY SIZING AND SELECTION: Mass and momentum balance, continuity equation, Euler‟s and Bernoulli‟s
equation, major and minor losses, Navier - Stokes equation, principles of operation and selection of fluid machinery, hydraulic
turbines and pumps. (12)
SIZING OF HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT: Conduction: One dimensional steady state heat conduction, composite walls, critical
thickness; Convection: free convection, forced convection; Radiation: Physical mechanism, radiation properties, radiation shape
factors; principles of operation and sizing of heat exchangers and cooling tower. (12)
SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Working principle and selection: Transformer, Induction motor and generators;
Speed control techniques; DC machines; Power Systems: generation, distribution and transmission, Power converters. (10)
RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS Working principle and resource assessments: Solar, Wind, Biomass, Ocean - thermal, tide,
wave; OTEC, geo-thermal, energy storage systems. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Wylie, E. Benjamin, and Victor Lyle Streeter, "Fluid Mechanics" ,McGraw-Hill International Book Co., 2017.
2. Bergman, Theodore L., and Frank P. Incropera, “Fundamentals of heat and mass transfer”, John Wiley and Sons, 2017.
3. El-Wakil, Mohamed Mohamed, “Power plant technology”. Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2013.
4. Sukhatme S P, “A Text book on Heat Transfer”, Orient Longman, 2005.
5. Wilde, Theodore, "Electrical Machines, Drives and Power System", 2005.
18SE03 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT

3003
ENERGY MANAGEMENT: Scope of energy audit, types of energy audit, detailed energy audit methodology, role of energy
managers in industries; Energy Management System (EnMS): ISO standards, implementing energy efficiency measures, detailed
project report, energy monitoring and targeting, identification of energy conservation measures / technologies, economic and cost
benefit analysis, ESCOS. (11)
ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES: Steam engineering in thermal and cogeneration plants- steam traps and various
energy conservation measures; Boilers- losses and efficiency calculation methods, controls. Furnaces- heat balance in furnaces,
furnace efficiency calculations, energy conservation opportunities in furnaces, Insulation and Refractories. (11)
287
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES: Electrical system, motor, harmonics, diesel generator, centrifugal pumps, fans
and blowers, air compressor, lighting system – energy consumption and energy saving potentials, design considerations. (11)
PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT: Industrial case studies – assessment of energy generation/consumption in thermal station, steel
industry, cement industry, textile industry, etc. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Energy Audit Manual The Practitioner‟s Guide, EMC-Kerala and NPC 2017.
2. Bureau of Energy Efficiency - Energy Management Series, 2006.
3. Openshaw Taylor E, "Utilisation of Electric Energy", Orient Longman Ltd, 2003.
4. Donald R Wulfinghoff, “Energy Efficiency Manual”, Energy Institute Press, 1999.
5. Eastop T.D and Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”, Logman Scientific and Technical, 1990.
6. Reay D.A, “Industrial Energy Conservation”, Pergamon Press, 1979.
18SE04 INSTRUMENTATION FOR ENERGY SYSTEMS

3003
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM AND ELECTRICAL ENERGY MEASUREMENT: Measurement terminologies, precision, range,
accuracy, span, linearity, sensitivity, resolution, random errors, systematic errors, relative and absolute errors, uncertainty analysis
of single and multiple measurements – calibration of instruments – range –resolution – span – linearity, sensitivity- signal
conditioning system; Electrical Energy Measurement: Power factor, load factor, harmonic analyzer, lighting and lamination
measurement, digital data processing and data acquisition system. (12)
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: Working principle of various temperature devices, thermocouples,
thermistor, RTD, measurement analysis, infrared camera; Working principle of pressure transducers and laser induced fluorescence
(LIF), quantification, basics of algorithm used for quantification- calibration of Pressure measuring equipment, principles and
operation of various vacuum pumps and gauges. (12)
FLOW MEASUREMENT: Variable head flow meters- rota meters-working principle of hot wire/film anemometry and particle image
velocimetry, quantification, electromagnetic flow meters, ultrasonic flow meters. (11)
AIR POLLUTION AND ENERGY MEASUREMENTS: Particulate sampling techniques, SO2, Combustion Products, opacity, odour
measurements; Measurement of liquid level, Humidity, O2, CO2 in flue gases- pH measurement, moisture analyzer. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sawhney A K and Puneet Sawhney, “A Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Raiand Co 2017.
2. Doebelin EO, “Measurement Systems - Application and Design”, McGraw-Hill, 2017.
3. Rangan C S, Sharma G R and Mani V S V, “Instrumentation Devices and Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2016.
4. Holman JP, “Experimental methods for engineers”, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
5. Bechwith, Marangoni and Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements” Addison-Wesley, 2009.
STREAM SPECIFIC CORE COURSES
STREAM SPECIFIC CORE ELECTIVE 1
18SE05 INDUSTRIAL COMBUSTION SYSTEMS

3003
COMBUSTION THEORY: Stoichiometry, lean and rich mixture, basic reaction chemistry, chemistry of combustion, energetics,
types of flame, pre mixed, diffusion, laminar and turbulent flames, adiabatic flame temperature, burners and types. (12)
COMBUSTION IN FURNACE: Furnace types and classification, aerodynamic and heat transfer in furnaces, the single gas-zone
model, the "long" furnace and other multi-zone models, effect of operating variables, reduction of furnace-wall losses, temperature
control in industrial furnaces, oxygen enrichment in combustion processes. (11)
COMBUSTION IN INDUSTRIAL BOILERS: Sectional, shell and water-tube boilers, design features of shell boilers, boiler water
treatment and conditioning, gas-side corrosion and fouling problems, oil and gas-firing of boilers, coal firing, wastes as boiler fuel,
boiler efficiency and part-load operation, condensing boilers. (11)
FORMATION OF FLUE GAS AND ANALYSIS: Formation of unburnt combustibles, NOx, SOx, particulates; Thermal oxidizer,
scrubber, thermo-gravity analyzer, Fourier-transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR), cyclone separator, precipitator (11)
288
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Winterbone D and Elesaier, “Advanced Thermodynamics for Engineers”, 2015.
2. Colin R Ferguson and Allan T Kirk Patrick, “Internal Combustion Engines”, John Wiley and Sons. Inc. 2015.
3. Stephen R Turns, “Introduction to Combustion: Concepts and Applications”, McGraw Hill, 2011.
4. Gary L Borman and Kenneth W Ragland, “Combustion Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2011.
5. Kenneth Kuan-yunKuo, “Principles of Combustion”, Wiley - Interscience, 2005.
18SE06/18ED03 MODELLING AND CONTROL OF POWER CONVERTERS

3003
INTRODUCTION TO STATE SPACE MODELLING: Review of basic control theory, control design techniques such as P, PI, PID
and lead lag compensator design, state space control design approach, modeling of physical systems, solution to vector differential
equations and state transition matrix, Controllability and Observability. (8)
SMALL SIGNAL MODEL OF POWER CONVERTERS: Linearizing averaged power stage dynamics, frequency response of
converter power stage, small-signal gain of PWM block, small-signal model for PWM, DC to DC converters. (9)
TRANSFER FUNCTIONS AND STATE SPACE MODEL OF POWER CONVERTER: Bode plot for transfer functions, power stage
transfer functions and state space modeling of buck converter, boost converter, and buck/boost converter, empirical methods for
small-signal analysis. (9)
DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE AND CLOSED LOOP PERFORMANCE OF POWER CONVERTERS: Frequency domain
performance criteria, time-domain performance criteria; Stability of power converters - nyquist criterion; Relative stability: gain
margin and phase margin. (6)
Asymptotic analysis method, frequency domain performance, voltage feedback compensation and loop gain, compensation design
and closed-loop performance. (5)
and periodic solutions - Singular points and qualitative behavior; Stability of nonlinear systems - Lyapunov direct and indirect
methods. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Pulsewidth Modulated DC-to-DC Power Conversion Circuits, Dynamics, and Control Designs, Byungcho Choi, IEEE Press,
Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2013.
2. Ogata, K., „Modern Control Engineering‟, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
3. Sira -Ramirez, R.Silva Ortigoza, „Control Design Techniques in Power Electronics Devices‟, Springer, 2006.
4. Hassan K. Khalil, „Nonlinear Systems‟, Pearson Educational International Inc. Upper Saddle River, 2001.
5. Chen C.T., „Linear Systems Theory and Design‟‟ Oxford University Press, 1999.
6. Applied Nonlinear Control, Jean-Jacques E. Slotine, Weiping Li, Prentice Hall, 1991 -Technology & Engineering.
18SE51 ENERGY ENGINEERING LABORATORY

0 0 4 2
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation on the following topics for duration of 12-16 hours. Each student is
1. Performance evaluation of solar thermal system

2. Performance evaluation study of biomass digester/gasifier
3. Energy consumption and lumen measurement of lights and ballasts
4. Power quality measurements of electrical power systems
5. Performance evaluation of wind energy systems
6. Aerodynamic performance study of bluff and streamlined bodies
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Energy engineering laboratory manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, PSG College of Technology.
2. Solar concentrator training system, Experimental manual, Ecosense world, New Delhi.
3. Wind energy training system, Experimental manual, Ecosense World, New Delhi.
289
59th ACM 09.06.2018
II SEMESTER
18SE07 ENERGY RESOURCES, ECONOMICS AND ENVIRONMENT

3003
ENERGY RESOURCES: Current trends in energy production and consumption, world energy flows, energy and economic growth,
supply and availability; Electric utilities and regulations, cost structure analysis, economics of energy use in agriculture, transport,
building, Industry and energy substitution, cost benefit analysis – carbon credit and footprint. (10)
ENERGY MODELING AND FORECASTING: Modeling concepts like simulation, equilibrium, optimization, concept of energy
multipliers and implications of energy multipliers for analysis of regional, national energy policy, energy and environmental input –
output analysis including I-O model, interfile substitution models, SIMA model, Markal model for energy policy analysis,
methodology for energy demand analysis including regression, econometric energy demand modeling, end-use method of energy
demand analysis, time series method, techno-economic approach to forecasting, case studies on forecasting energy needs. (12)
ENERGY ECONOMICS: Simple payback period, time value of money, IRR, NPV, life cycle costing, cost of saved energy, and cost
of energy generated, examples from energy generation and conservation, energy chain, primary energy analysis, life cycle
assessment, net energy analysis, case studies on life cycle costing. (10)
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF ENERGY USE: Global warming - sources of emissions, CO2 emissions, impacts, mitigation and
sustainability. environmental standards, legislation and audits, air pollution - SOx, NOx, CO, particulates, solid and water pollution,
formation of pollutants, measurement and controls; Effect of operating and design parameters on emission, control methods,
exhaust emission test and procedures, case studies on analysis of energy projects for environmental impact assessment and
mitigation. (12)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Ristirer, and Jack P. Kraushaar., “Energy and the environment”,Willey,2005.
2. Energy and the Challenge of Sustainability, World energy assessment, UNDP New York, 2004.
3. Nebojsa Nakicenovic, Arnulf Grubler and Alan McDonald “Global energy perspectives”, Cambridge University Press, 1999.
4. AKN Reddy, RH Williams, TB Johansson, Energy after Rio, Prospects and challenges, UNDP, United Nations Publications,
New York, 1997.
5. Fowler, J.M ., “Energy and the environment”, McGraw Hill,1984.
18SE08 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

3003
CFD AND THERMO-FLUIDS: Review on the physics of thermo-fluids, governing equations -continuity, momentum, and energy
conservation - modeling, grid generation, simulation, and high performance computing. (10)
COMPUTATIONAL APPROACH: Finite difference method, forward, backward and central difference schemes, explicit and implicit
methods, properties of numerical solution methods, stability analysis, and error estimation, difference between FDM and FVM,
approximation of surface integrals, approximation of volume integrals, interpolation practices, implementation of boundary
conditions, specification for a CFD simulation, requirements for accurate analysis and validation for multi scale problems. (12)
CFD TECHNIQUES: Mathematical classification of flow, hyperbolic, parabolic, elliptic and mixed flow types, Lax - Wendroff
technique, MacCormack‟s technique, relaxation technique, artificial viscosity, ADI technique, pressure correction technique, SIMPLE
algorithm, upwind schemes, flux vector splitting. (12)
TURBULENCE MODELING AND CFD APPLICATIONS: Turbulence energy equation, one-equation model, two-equation models
(k-ω and k- ε models), review on advanced turbulence models, applications to fluid flow and heat transfer problems. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Chung T J, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
2. Versteeg H K and Malalasekara W, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Finite Volume Method', Longman,
2007.
3. Muralidhar K and Sundararajan T, “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, 2009.
4. Joel H Ferziger and MilovanPeric, “Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics”, Springer Publications, 2002.
5. John D Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics – The Basics with Applications”, McGraw Hill, 1995.
18SE52 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS LABORATORY

0042
290
59th ACM 09.06.2018
1. Flow simulation - Internal flow – Laminar region

2. Flow simulation - External flow – Laminar region
3. Flow simulation - Internal flow – Turbulence region
4. Flow simulation - External flow – Turbulence region
5. Flow simulation - Internal flow with heat transfer
6. Flow simulation - External flow with heat transfer
CASE STUDY:
Simulation of fluid flow/ heat transfer based systems.
Total P: 60
REFERENCE:
1. CFD laboratory manual, Department of mechanical engineering, PSG College of Technology.
18SE61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
This course, likened to a mini-intern, requires each student to identify an energy intensive industry and pursue the solution of an
industrial problem consistent with the credits allotted for the course. Students are expected to study the problem, survey pertinent
Total P: 60
III SEMESTER
18SE53 ENERGY SIMULATION LABORATORY

0042
1. Time series forecasting of solar radiation using numerical tool

2. Time series forecasting of wind speed using numerical tool
3. Load resource analysis for the optimization of hybrid solar-wind systems using numerical tool
4. Scheduled Heat Gain estimation using building energy management software
5. Windows and day lighting estimation using building energy management software
6. Air movement and green features simulation using HVAC simulator
CASE STUDY:
Modeling and simulation of energy systems using application software.
Total P: 60
REFERENCE:
1. Energy simulation laboratory manual, Department of mechanical engineering, PSG College of Technology.
18SE71 PROJECT WORK I

0063
 Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas.
 Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem.
 Finalization of system requirements and specification.
 Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey.
291
59th ACM 09.06.2018
 Future trends in providing alternate solutions.

 Consolidated report preparation of the above.
IV SEMESTER
18SE72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14

A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any) ]

18SE09 THERMAL SYSTEMS DESIGN

3003
THERMAL SYSTEMS: Energy systems, heat exchangers – classification, review of different design methodologies, pressure drop
analysis, thin fin analysis, fouling, corrosion, and erosion, design and operational issues, exergy analysis, surface comparisons, size
and weight relationships. (12)
MODELLING OF THERMAL SYSTEMS: Design of energy systems- mathematical analysis - thermodynamic modeling and analysis
of energy conversion equipments - heat exchangers, motors, fans, pumps, compressors, turbines, piping, ducts, etc. and efficiency
analysis. (12)
HEAT TRANSFER ENHANCEMENT TECHNIQUES: Flow misdistribution and header design, reduction of non-uniform heat
transfer in heat exchangers, reduction of fouling, role of pitch analysis in a thermal system. (11)
WASTE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEMS: Sources of waste heat, selection of waste heat recovery technologies and financial
considerations, design aspects of waste heat recovery systems. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert F Boehm, “Developments in the Design of Thermal Systems”, Cambridge University Press, 2016.
2. Stoecker W G, “Design of Thermal Systems”, McGraw Hill, 2011.
3. Ramesh K Shah and Dusan P Sekulic, “Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design”, Wiley Publications, 2007.
4. Ralph L WebbandNae – Hywn Kim, “Principles of Enhanced Heat Transfer”, Taylor and Francis, 2005.
5. SadikKakac and Hongtanliu, “Heat Transfer Enhancement of Heat Exchangers”, Kluwer academic publishers, 1998.
18SE10/18ED06 MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES

3003
GENERALIZED THEORY AND LINEAR TRANSFORMATION: Conversions, basic two pole machine, transformer with movable
secondary, transformer voltage and speed voltage, kron‟s primitive machine, invariance of power, transformation from displaced
brush axis three phases to two phases, rotating axes to stationary axes, transformed impedance matrix, torque
calculations. (11)
INDUCTION MACHINES: Generalized representation, performance equations, steady state analysis, transient analysis, single
phase induction motor, transfer function formulation, double cage machine, harmonics. (11)
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Generalized representation, steady state analysis, transient analysis, electromechanical transient.
(11)
292
59th ACM 09.06.2018
DC AND SPECIAL MACHINES: Generalized representation, operation with displaced brushes, motor (shunt type only) operation,
steady state and transient analysis, generalized representation and steady state analysis of reluctance motor, brushless DC motor,
variable reluctance motor. (12)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Krause, P.C., O. Wasynczuk, and S.D. Sudhoff, “Analysis of Electric Machinery”, IEEE Press, 2002.
3. Krishnan R., “Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
4. Chee- Mun Ong “Dynamic simulation of electrical machinery using MATLAB” Prentice – Hall, Inc, 1998.
5. Adkins B., “The Generalized Theory of Electrical Machines”, Dover Publishers, 1980.
18SE11 DESIGN OF RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

3204
SOLAR THERMAL CONVERSION: Properties of solar radiation, absorption of light by the atmosphere, spectral distribution of
sunlight, thermo-dynamical description of solar collectors, optical properties of solar collectors, technologies for fabrication of solar
collectors, design of solar thermal systems for different applications. (12)
WIND AND WIND RESOURCE: The nature of the wind, geographical variation in the wind resource, long-term wind-speed
variations, annual and seasonal variations, Synoptic and Diurnal variations; Turbulence - the boundary layer; Wind-speed prediction
and forecasting. (11)
WIND POWER CONVERSION: Aerodynamic concepts, Betz's law of maximum power, rotor blade theory, design of blade
Geometry and rotor diameter, performance curves, wind turbine siting and issues. . (11)
BIOMASS AND BIOGAS: Concepts and systems, sources, energy plantations; Design: pyrolysis, gasification and liquefaction
systems; biogas, fermentation and wet processes, chemicals from biomass and biotechnology, biofuels. (11)
Total L:45+T:30=75
REFERENCES:
1. Frank Kreith and Yogi Goswami D, “Handbook of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy”, CRC Press, 2017.
2. Sukhatme S P and Nayak J K, “Solar Energy - Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
3. Kothari P, Singal K C and RakeshRanjan, “Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies”, PHI Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
4. Bent Sorensen, “Renewable Energy”, Academic Press, 2011.
5. Tony Burton, David Sharpe, Nick Jenkins, Ervin Bossanyi, “Wind Energy Handbook”, John Wiley and Sons, 2011.
6. Abbasi S A and NaseemaAbbasi, “Renewable Energy Sources and their Environmental Impact”, PHI Private Limited, 2010.
7. Rai G D, "Non Conventional Sources of Energy", Khanna Publishers, 2009.
18SE12/18ED09 POWER ELECTRONICS IN WIND AND SOLAR POWER CONVERSION

3204
SOLAR PV AND WIND POWER: Trends in energy consumption, world energy scenario, energy sources and their availability,
conventional and renewable sources, solar PV and wind potential in india and world, solar and wind data, policies and regulations,
standards and codes used for renewable energy systems. (11)
SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY CONVERSION: Solar radiation and measurement, solar cells and their characteristics,
classification of solar PV panels, influence of insolation and temperature, PV arrays, maximum power point tracking algorithms,
power conditioning schemes, charge controllers, inverters – classifications and design, analysis of PV systems, BOS components,
stand alone and grid integrated solar PV systems, building integrated PV (BIPV), synchronized operation with grid supply,
harmonic standards, harmonic problems. (12)
WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEMS: Basic principle of wind energy conversion, nature of wind, power in the wind,
components of wind energy conversion system (WECS), wind farm and its accessories, generators used in wind energy
conversion systems, performance of induction generators for WECS, power conditioning schemes, controllable DC power from
seigs, system performance, grid connected WECS, concepts of grid integration, grid related problems, generator control ,
performance improvements, different schemes, ac voltage controllers, harmonics and PF improvement. (11)
HYBRID POWER SYSTEMS: Wind / solar PV integrated systems – other alternate systems – requirements - optimization of
system components power conditioning schemes for hybrid power systems (HPS) – design of HPS using software - storage
types and selection methods - applications of HPS. (11)
Total L:45+T:30=75
293
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. S Sumathi, Ashok Kumar L, S Sureka, “Solar PV and Wind Energy Conversion Systems - An Introduction to Theory, Modeling
with MATLAB/SIMULINK, and the Role of Soft Computing Techniques”, Green Energy and Technology, Springer; 2015.
3. Roger A. Messenger, Jerry Ventre,” Photovoltaic System Engineering” CRC Press, 2004.
4. Thomas Markvart and Luis Castaser, “Practical Handbook of Photovoltaics”, Elsevier Publications, 2003.
5. Rai, G.D., "Non-conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, 2002.
6. Daniel, Hunt, V., "Wind Power - A Handbook of WECS", Van Nostrend Co., 1998.
15SE21 CLEANER PRODUCTION AND CLEAN DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM

3003
CLEANER PRODUCTION (CP): Industrial and commercial sector development and related energy and environmental issues,
energy economy interactions in stabilizing greenhouse gases emission, long term strategies for reducing GHG emission, CP in
industrial and commercial sectors, sustainability, life cycle analysis, pollution prevention and control, overview, approaches and
technologies, industrial waste evaluation, sankey diagram for CP processes and case studies. (11)
PROCESS INTEGRATION: Process optimization by integrating energy and environmental aspects, energy management concepts
and measures to improve energy efficiency. Energy and water pinch as waste minimization tool, occupational health and safety,
quality of product, and other aspects of CP. (11)
CLEAN DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM (CDM): Carbon credit, CER, Baselines in CDM, its context, key elements and concepts,
additionality assessment, investment analysis, barrier analysis, common practice analysis, impact of CDM registration, baseline for
small scale CDM projects, small scale CDM project criteria and types, project categories and approved methodologies. (11)
CDM PROJECTS AND EVALUATION: Establishing baselines for large scale CDM projects, procedures for the submission and
approval of new methodologies. Baselines for a forestation and reforestation projects, sequestration projects, determining eligibility
and establishing the baseline tools and models for estimating baseline emissions, estimation of energy savings and GHG emissions
reductions, carbon credit, case study - Green energy concept. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Anne Offit, Pollution Prevention and Sustainability, Syrawood Pub House, 2018.
2. Biagio F. G, Cecilia M. V. B. A, Feni A, “Advances in Cleaner Production”, Nova Science Publishers Inc, 2016.
3. Klemes J, Handbook of Process Integration, Woodhead Publishing, 2013.
4. Ian C. K, Pinch Analysis and Process Integration, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006.
5. Ram M. S, Sudhir Sharma, Govinda R. T, Kumar S, Baseline Methodologies For Clean Development Mechanism Projects,
UNEP Risø Centre, 2005.
18SE22 GREEN BUILDINGS

3003
GREEN BUILDING CONCEPTS: High-performance green buildings - Impacts of building construction, operation, and disposal -
Methods and tools for building assessment, LEED, Green Globes, Living Building Challenge, Green Building Coalition. (10)
BUILDING ASSESSMENT AND THE GREEN BUILDING PROCESS: Design and construction relationships -project management-
BREEAM, CASBEE, green star, DGNB - site and landscape strategies, building energy system strategies, low energy buildings,
renewable energy systems, building hydrologic cycle strategies, case studies on energy assessment. (11)
GREEN MATERIALS AND STRATEGIES: Materials selection strategies - multi-attribute standards (MAS) - life cycle assessment -
indoor environmental quality (IEQ) analysis and strategies - construction team responsibilities and controls - building commissioning
strategies - site operations. (12)
COST ANALYSIS AND STANDARDS: Carbon Accounting - economic issues and analysis - life cycle costing - business case for
green buildings - green building codes and standards - International Green Construction Code ASHRAE 189P, ANSI/GG 01 - green
building specifications - future directions in green high performance building technologies. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Charles J. Kibert,” Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design and Delivery” John Wiley and Sons 2016.
2. Francis D. K. Ching, Ian M. Shapiro, “Green Building Illustrated” Wiley-2014.
3. Abe Kruger, Carl Seville, “Green Building: Principles and Practices in Residential Construction”, Wiley, 2012.
4. The World Business Council on Sustainable Development (WBCSD) website: http://www.wbcsd.org.
294
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18SE23 DESIGN OF SOLAR SYSTEMS

3003
DESIGN OF SOLAR COLLECTORS: Solar constant, penetration depth, characteristics of radiation, classification - air, liquid
heating collectors, testing of flat plate collectors, analysis of concentric tube collector, concentrator collectors – classification,
concentrator mounting, focusing solar concentrators, heliostats, parabolic and dish. (12)
SELECTION OF PHOTO-VOLTAIC SYSTEMS: Physics, material, characteristics, cell arrays, power electric circuits for output of
solar panels, choppers, inverters, batteries, charge regulators, thermoelectric, stand alone, off/on grid, hybrid systems and
construction concepts, performance analyzer and applications. (11)
ANALYSIS OF SOLAR THERMAL SYSTEMS: Steady state and dynamic analysis, solar pond, modeling of solar thermal systems
and simulations in process design of active systems by f-chart and utilization methods. Water heating systems: active and passive,
passive heating and cooling of buildings, solar distillation, solar drying. (10)
SOLAR ENERGY UTILIZATION: Solar powered vapor absorption air condition system, solar cooler, solar power station, water
pump, chimney, dryer, dehumidifier, still, desalination, furnaces, cooker, swimming pool, and solar energy economic analysis,
performance analysis and system design. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sukhatme S. P., “Solar Energy - Principles of thermal collection and storage” Tata McGraw-Hil, 2017.
2. Duffie J. A. and Beckman W. A., “Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes”, John Wiley, 2013.
3. Goswami D. Y., Kreith F. and Kreider J. F., “Principles of Solar Engineering”, Taylor and Francis, 2000.
4. Sodha M. S., Bansal N. K., Bansal P. K., and Malik M. A. S., “Solar Passive Building: science and design”, Pergamon
Press,1986.
5. Malik M. A. S., Tiwari G. N., Kumar A. and Sodha M.S., “Solar Distillation”, Pergamon Press, 1982.
18SE24 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND ENERGY RECOVERY

3003
WASTE CHARACTERISTICS AND OPERATIONS FOR WASTE HANDLING: Sources, types, composition, generation, estimation
techniques, characterization, types of collection system, transfer stations, transfer operations. Separation and Processing: Size
reduction - separation through density variation, magnetic/electric field; Densification - physical, chemical and biological properties
and transformation technologies. (11)
WASTE DISPOSAL TECHNIQUES, TRANSFORMATION TECHNOLOGIES AND VALUE ADDITION OF WASTES: Landfill,
landfill gas - generation, extraction, gas usage techniques, leachates formation, UNFCCC model for land fill gas prognosis and
reclamation; Physical Transformation: Component separation and volume reduction; Chemical Transformation: combustion,
gasification, pyrolysis; Energy Recovery: biological transformation, aerobic composting, anaerobic digestion. (12)
HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT AND WASTE RECYCLING: Definition, sources and classification; incineration vs
combustion technology; RDF / mass firing, material recycling, disposal of white goods and E-wastes, carbon credit calculations and
economic analysis of waste disposal and transformation techniques. (11)
MANAGEMENT OF LIQUID AND GASEOUS WASTES: Liquid Waste: Sewage treatment - Dilution, mechanical treatments,
biological treatments and chemical treatments, removal of ammonia; Gaseous waste management and control measures. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Howard S. Peavy et al, “Environmental Engineering”, McGraw Hill International Edition, 2013.
2. Manoj Datta, “Waste Disposal in Engineered Landfills”, Narosa Publishing House,1997.
3. Tchobanoglous, Theisen and Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste Management”, McGrawHill, 1993.
4. Stanley E. Manahan. “Hazardous Waste Chemistry, Toxicology and Treatment”, Lewis Publishers, 1990.
5. Parker, Colin and Roberts, “Energy from Waste – An Evaluation of Conversion Technologies”, Elsevier Applied Science, 1985.
18SE25 HYDROGEN ENERGY AND FUEL CELLS

3003
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT: Definition of sustainable development, factors affecting sustainable development like air
pollution, water source degradation, population explosion, agriculture and land degradation, global warming and climate change,
strategies for sustainability, energy and climate change. (11)
HYDROGEN ENERGY: Introduction to hydrogen economy, production, storage and transportation systems, hydrogen from fossil
fuels, electrolysis of water, thermo chemical cycles, transmission and infrastructure requirements, safety and environmental impacts,
economics of transition to hydrogen systems. (11)
295
59th ACM 09.06.2018
FUEL CELLS: Concept, key components, physical and chemical phenomena in fuel cells, advantages and disadvantages, different
types of fuel cells and applications, characteristics, Nernst equation, relation of the fuel consumption versus current output. (11)
FUEL CELL DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE: Stoichiometric coefficients and utilization percentages of fuels and oxygen, mass flow
rate calculation for fuel and oxygen in single cell and fuel cell stack, total voltage and current for fuel cells in parallel and serial
connection, over-potential and polarizations, DMFC operation scheme, general issues-water flooding and water management,
polarization in PEMFC. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. John Wiley and sons., “Fuel cell fundamentals”, Willey 2016.
2. Peter Hoffman, “Tomorrow‟s Energy – Hydrogen Fuel Cells and the Prospects for Cleaner Planet”, MIT, 2012.
3. Viswanathan B and Aulice Scibioh, “Fuel cells: Principles and Applications”, University Press, 2008.
4. Prashukumar G P, “Hydrogen – A fuel for Automatic Engines”, ISTE, 1999.
5. Hart A B and Womack G J, “Fuel Cells: Theory and Applications”, Chapman and Hall, 1967.
18SE26 BIO-ENERGY CONVERSION TECHNOLOGIES

3003
ANALYSIS OF BIOMASS: Biomass resources and biomass properties, biomass classification, availability, estimation of availability,
consumption and surplus biomass ; energy plantations, proximate analysis, ultimate analysis, thermo gravimetric analysis and
summative analysis of biomass and briquetting. (12)
PYROLYSIS: A pyrolysis plant, pyrolysis products, pyrolyser types, pyrolysis product yields and its influencing factors, pyrolysis
kinetics, kinetic models. (10)
GASIFICATION: Biomass gasification plant, gasifiers, fixed bed system, downdraft and updraft gasifiers, fluidized bed gasifiers
design, construction and operation, gasifier burner arrangement for thermal heating, gasifier engine arrangement and electrical
power, equilibrium and kinetic consideration in gasifier operation, gasifier product yields and its influencing factors. (12)
COMBUSTION: Biomass combustion, fixed bed combustors, inclined grate combustors fluidized bed combustors, design,
construction and operation and operation of all the above biomass combustors, biomass stoves, improved challahs, types. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Prabir Basu, “Biomass Gasification and pyrolysis, a practical guide”, Academic press, 2018.
2. Desai and Ashok V, “Non Conventional Energy”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2008.
3. WereKo-Brobby C Y and Hagan E B, “Biomass Conversion and Technology”, John Wiley and Sons, 1996.
4. Challal D S, “Food, Feed and Fuel from Biomass”, IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1992.
5. Khandelwal K C and Mahdi S S, “Biogas Technology - A Practical Hand Book - Vol. I and II”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.
Ltd., 1989.
18SE27 ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS

3003
ENERGY STORAGE MODES: Potential energy, Pumped hydro storage; KE and Compressed gas system: Flywheel storage,
compressed air energy storage; Electrical and magnetic energy storage: Capacitors, electromagnets; Chemical Energy storage:
Thermo-chemical, photo-chemical, bio-chemical, Superconducting Magnet Energy Storage (SMES) systems. (12)
ELECTROCHEMICAL ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS: Batteries- primary, secondary, Lithium;Solid-state and molten solvent
batteries; Lead acid batteries; Nickel Cadmium batteries; Advanced batteries, Role of carbon nano-tubes in electrodes. (11)
ELECTRIC ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS: Capacitor and Batteries: Comparison and application; Super capacitor:
Electrochemical Double Layer Capacitor (EDLC), principle of working, structure, performance and application, role of activated
carbon and carbon nano-tube. (10)
SENSIBLE AND LATENT HEAT STORAGE: SHS mediums; Stratified storage systems; Rock-bed storage systems; Thermal
storage in buildings; Earth storage; Energy storage in aquifers, Phase Change Materials (PCMs); Selection criteria of PCMs; solar
thermal LHTE systems. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Luisa F.Cabeza.,”Advances in thermal energy storage systems, Woodhead publications 2014
2. Yves Brunet., “Energy storage”, Wiley publications, 2013
3. Ru-shiliu, Leizhang, Xueliang sun, “Electrochemical technologies for energy storage and conversion”, Wiley Publications, 2012.
4. Ibrahim Dincer and Mark A Rosen, “Thermal Energy Storage Systems and Applications”, John Wiley and Sons 2011.
5. James Larminie and Andrew Dicks, “Fuel cell systems Explained”, Wiley Publications, 2003.
296
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18SE31 TURBULENCE AND BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY

3003
BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY: Boundary layer concept, displacement thickness, momentum thickness, laminar boundary layer on
a flat plate, turbulent boundary layer on a flat plate, boundary layer thickness using Blasius solution and Von Karman approach,
effect of pressure gradient and separation, Flow past bluff bodies and airfoil, concept of lift and drag. (11)
TURBULENT BOUNDARY LAYERS: Fully developed turbulent flow in a pipe, turbulent shear stress, turbulent velocity profile,
internal flows – couette flow – two-layer structure of the velocity field – universal laws of the wall– friction law – channel flow,
couettee – poiseuille flows. (11)
TURBULENCE AND TURBULENCE MODELS: Nature of turbulence – averaging procedures – characteristics of turbulent flows –
scales of turbulence, integral length scale, energy spectra, Kolmogorov‟s theory, Kolmogorov‟s scales, eddy viscosity and Prandtl‟s
mixing length, Reynolds Average Navier Stokes equation (RANS), Two-equation models, low – reynolds number models, large eddy
simulation. (11)
STATISTICAL THEORY OF TURBULENCE AND TURBULENT FLOWS: Ensemble average – isotropic turbulence and
homogeneous turbulence – kinematics of isotropic turbulence – Taylor‟s hypothesis – dynamics of isotropic turbulence –grid
turbulence and decay – turbulence in stirred tanks.
TURBULENT FLOWS: Wall Turbulent shear flows – structure of wall flow – turbulence characteristics of boundary layer – free
turbulence shear flows – jets and wakes – plane and axi-symmetric flows. kinetic energy budget in a turbulent flow, turbulence
production and cascade. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Schlichting H and Klaus Gersten, “Boundary Layer Theory”, Springer 2017.
2. Garde R.J. and Turbulent Flow, “New Age International (p) Limited”, Publishers, 2013.
3. Biswas G. and Eswaran E., “Turbulent Flows, Fundamentals, Experiments and Modelling”, Narosa Publishing House, 2002.
4. Rajaratnam N. and Turbulent Jets, “Elsevier Scientific Publishing Company”, 1976.
5. Hinze J.O., “Turbulence”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1975.
6. Launder B. E. and Spalding D. B., “Mathematical Models of Turbulence”, Academic Press, 1972.
18SE32 ENERGY CONSERVATION IN HVACR SYSTEMS

3003
REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT: Refrigerants-refrigeration cycles-refrigeration equipments-reciprocating, rotary, scroll, screw,

centrifugal systems –refrigeration system components expansion coils and valves, evaporators, condensers and other auxiliary
elements- sizing and selection of components. (12)
AIR CONDITIONING AND AIR SYSTEMS: Psychrometrics -thermal comfort-air conditioning process, classification, systems and
sub systems, components selection- air systems, fans, coils, filters and humidifiers, air handling units(AHU),air ducts and space
diffusion systems. (13)
HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS: Heat pumps and heat recovery systems, air-source heat pump, ground water heat
pump systems, ground water coupled surface water heat pump, gas cooling and cogeneration, basics and constant-volume
systems- variable-air-volume systems, VAV systems- fan combination, system pressure and smoke control- minimum ventilation
and VAV systems controls- indoor air quality. (10)
I S STANDARDS, ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL: IS code and standards: Air-condition equipments, pipes and fittings,
pumps and valves, refrigeration and lubricants, insulation, ventilation, International codes and practices, automatic control systems-
control loop and control methods-control modes-sensors and transducers- controllers and actuators-system architecture-
interoperability-artificial network-functional controls and fault detection and diagnostics, BMS. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. ISHRAE “HVAC Data book” ISHRAE 2017.
2. Plant Engineers and Manager‟s Guide to Energy Conservation, Fair Mount Press, 2011.
3. Arora C.P., “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Company, 2010.
4. Carrier Air conditioning Co., “Hand Book of Air conditioning System Design”, McGraw-Hill, 2001.
5. Shan.K.Wang, “Handbook of air conditioning and refrigeration” McGraw-Hill, 2000.
6. Edward Hartmann, “Maintenance Management, Productivity and Quality Publishing Pvt. Ltd”., 1995.
297
59th ACM 09.06.2018
15SE33 AERODYNAMICS OF STREAMLINED AND BLUFF BODIES

3003
INVISCID AND INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW: Lift, Drag, Moment and related coefficients conservation equations, flow lines, velocity
functions, boundary layer, Bernoulli's equation, low-speed wind tunnel flows; Governing equations and boundary conditions;
Elementary flows (uniform, sources, sinks and vortex); Ideal flow past a cylinder, conformal mapping, Kutta-Joukowski theorem and
lift generation; Source panel method for non-lifting flows; D'Alembert's paradox. (13)
INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW OVER AIRFOILS: Kutta condition; Thin airfoil theory (symmetric, cambered); Aerodynamic centre;
Vortex panel method for lifting flows; Effect of viscosity and Stokes‟ second problem. (10)
FINITE WING THEORY: Downwash and induced drag; Biot-Savart Law and Helmholtz's theorems; Prandtl's lifting line theory;
Numerical lifting-line method. (10)
AERODYNAMICS AND WIND TUNNEL EXPERIMENTATION: Aerodynamics of horizontal-axis wind turbines, aerodynamics of
bluff bodies, building aerodynamics, wind tunnel experiments, case studies. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Houghton E. L., Carpenter P. W. and Daniel T. Valentine, "Aerodynamics for Engineering students", Elsevier Ltd., 2013.
2. John D Anderson., "Fundamentals of Aerodynamics", McGraw Hill Book Co., 2011.
3. Lawson T, “Builing Aerodynamics”, Imperial College Press, 2010.
4. Tom L. Building Aerodynamics, World Scientific; 2010.
5. Hucho W H, “Aerodynamic of Road vehicles ", Butterworth Co. Ltd., 1998.
6. Pope A, “Wind Tunnel Testing ", John Wiley and Sons, 1974.
18SE34 DESIGN OF WIND ENERGY SYSTEMS

3003
DESIGN OF WIND TURBINE ROTOR: Basic aerodynamics-wind turbine model-blade element method-airfoil aerodynamics-
boundary conditions-aerodynamic design of rotor-numerical simulation of wind turbine flow, rotor blades- polymer materials-
processing technology-sandwich materials-material characterization. (11)
DESIGN OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Rotor hub, blade pitch mechanism, rotor bearing concepts, rotor brake, gear box, nacelle,
yaw system, assembly and performance testing, tower design. (11)
SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL SYSTEMS: Synchronous and asynchronous generator, assessment criteria for
electrical generators, fixed speed generators, variable speed generator systems, directly rotor-driven systems, total electrical system
of wind turbine, control systems and operation sequence control, wind measurement system, yaw control, power and speed control
by blade pitching, power limiting by aerodynamic stall, supervisory control and operational states, simulation and hardware of
control systems. (11)
WIND TURBINE OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND ECONOMICS: Wind farms, project development, planning, transportations,
erection, grid connection, commissioning, operation and monitoring, safety aspects, maintenance and repair offshore wind energy,
power optimization, power curve, annual energy yield, environmental impact, economics: factors influencing the wind energy, the
present worth approach, cost of wind energy, benefits of wind energy, Case studies; yard sticks and tax advantages, carbon credit.
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hansen MO,”Aerodynamics of wind turbines”, Routledge, 2015.
2. Mathew S, Philip GS, “Advances in wind energy and conversion technology” Berlin, Springer, 2013.
3. Burton T, Jenkins N, Sharpe D, Bossanyi E. “Wind energy handbook” John Wiley and Sons,2011 .
4. Hau E, von Renouard H, “Wind turbines: fundamentals, technologies, application, economics”. Springer,2003
5. Johnson GL. Wind energy systems, Englewood Cliffs (NJ): Prentice-Hall,1985
AUDIT COURSES
18SE81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18SE82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

298
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME INDUSTRIAL METALLURGY (FULL TIME)
(2018 REGULATIONS)
Code Course Title Lecture Tutorial Practical Credits CA FE Total CAT
I SEMESTER
18YN01 Statistical Quality Control and Design of 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Experiments
18YN02 Phase Transformations 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18YN03 Mechanical Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN04 Characterization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN05 Casting Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN51 Microstructural Analysis Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18YN81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 26 Hrs 14 4 4 18 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18YN06 Thermodynamics and Kinetics of 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
Materials
18YN07 Joining of Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN08 Physical Metallurgy of alloys 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN09 Forming and Particulate Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN__ Professional Elective – 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN52 Materials Testing and Characterization 50 50 PE
0 0 4 2 100
Laboratory
18YN61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18YN82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 Hrs 18 2 8 23 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18YN53 Computational Materials lab 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PE
18YN71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18YN72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted - out of which two may be electives from other ME / MTech
programmes)
Welding
18YN10 Welding Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN11 Welding Procedures and Qualifications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN12 Welding Codes and Standards 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN13 Welding Consumables 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN14 Design of Weldments 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN15 Welding of Nickel alloys 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
CASTING
18YN16 Advanced Casting Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN17 Foundry Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN18 Casting Design and Simulation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
299
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18YN19 Quality Control in Foundries 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN20 Foundry Practice for ferrous and Non 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
ferrous castings
MATERIALS ENGINEERING
18YN21 Iron and Steel Making 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN22 Principles of Non-Ferrous Extraction 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Metallurgy
18YN23 Physical Metallurgy of Stainless Steels 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN24 Physical Metallurgy of Structural Steels 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN25 Heat Treatment and Surface 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Modification
18YN26 Environmental Degradation of Metals 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN27 Non-Destructive Testing 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN28 Ceramics and Polymers 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN29 Composites 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN30 Nanostructured Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN31 Emerging Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN32 Materials Selection 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN33 Powder Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN34 Coating Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN35 Metallurgical Failure Analysis and Life 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
assessment
18YN36 Materials Modeling 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN37 Metal Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN38 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
(MEMS)
18YN39 Laser and Plasma Processing of 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Materials
18YN40 Process Modelling 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN41 Quality System Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
LANGUAGE ONE CREDIT COURSES
18OK01 Research Writing in Engineering Sciences

18OK03 Personality Development
300
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME INDUSTRIAL METALLURGY (PART TIME)
(2018 REGULATIONS)
Code Course Title Lecture Tutorial Practical Credits CA FE Total CAT
I SEMESTER
18YN01 Statistical Quality Control and Design of 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Experiments
18YN02 Phase Transformations 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18YN03 Mechanical Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN51 Microstructural Analysis Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18YN81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 16 Hrs 8 4 4 12 200 200 400
II SEMESTER
18YN04 Characterization Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN05 Casting Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN06 Thermodynamics and Kinetics of 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
Materials
18YN52 Materials Testing and Characterization PE
0 0 4 2 50 50 100
Laboratory
18YN82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 15 Hrs 9 2 4 12 200 200 400
III SEMESTER
18YN07 Joining of Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN08 Physical Metallurgy of alloys 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN09 Forming and Particulate Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18YN53 Computational Materials lab 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PE
Total 13 Hrs 9 0 4 11 200 200 400
IV SEMESTER
18YN61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
Total 11 Hrs 9 0 4 11 200 200 400
V SEMESTER
18YN71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 15 Hrs 9 0 6 12 200 200 400
VI SEMESTER
18YN72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 Hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (Six to be opted - out of which two may be electives from other ME / MTech
programmes)
Welding
18YN10 Welding Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN11 Welding Procedures and Qualifications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN12 Welding Codes and Standards 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN13 Welding Consumables 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN14 Design of Weldments 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN15 Welding of Nickel alloys 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
301
59th ACM 09.06.2018
CASTING
18YN16 Advanced Casting Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN17 Foundry Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN18 Casting Design and Simulation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN19 Quality Control in Foundries 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN20 Foundry Practice for ferrous and Non 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
ferrous castings
18YN21 Iron and Steel Making 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN22 Principles of Non-Ferrous Extraction 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Metallurgy
18YN23 Physical Metallurgy of Stainless Steels 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN24 Physical Metallurgy of Structural Steels 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN25 Heat Treatment and Surface 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Modification
18YN26 Environmental Degradation of Metals 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN27 Non-Destructive Testing 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN28 Ceramics and Polymers 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN29 Composites 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN30 Nanostructured Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN31 Emerging Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN32 Materials Selection 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN33 Powder Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN34 Coating Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN35 Metallurgical Failure Analysis and Life 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
assessment
18YN36 Materials Modeling 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN37 Metal Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN38 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
(MEMS)
18YN39 Laser and Plasma Processing of 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Materials
18YN40 Process Modelling 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18YN41 Quality System Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
LANGUAGE ONE CREDIT COURSES

302
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18YN01 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL AND DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS
2203
quality variation, statistical basis of control charts - control charts for variables - , R, and s charts - control charts for attributes – p,
np, c and u charts. (8+7)
(8+7)
DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS: Fundamentals of experimental design, guidelines for designing experiments, analysis of variance,
experiments with one factor, completely randomized design, randomized block design, factorial experiments, Latin square design.
(8+7)
regression models, confidence interval and hypothesis testing in multiple regression, 2-level factorial design – 23 design, general 2k
design, single replication of 2k design, design for fitting second order models – class of central composite design. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
4. Ronald E Walpole, Raymond H Myers, Sharon L Myers and Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2016.
18YN02 PHASE TRANSFORMATIONS

3003
CRYSTALLOGRAPHY & PHASE EQUILIBRIA: Crystal systems-Detailed discussion of common crystal structures in metals.
Crystal defects: Point, line, area and volume defects. Voids-types and location in BCC, FCC and HCP structures. Solution theory -
Types of solid solutions and compounds-Hume-Rothery rules for formation of substitutional solid solutions. Introduction to phase
diagrams and detailed discussion on Fe-C equilibrium diagram. (11)
FUNDAMENTALS OF PHASE TRANSFORMATIONS: Time Scale for phase transformations, types of transformations-spinoidal,
nucleation & growth, theory of transformation kinetics- kinetics of solid state reactions occurring at elevated temperatures , liquid,
solid state and dissociation reactions, nucleation and growth-nucleation kinetics, homogeneous nucleation, heterogeneous
nucleation, growth and overall transformation kinetic - Sintering & crystallization in ceramics and glass forming systems. (12)
SOLID STATE DIFFUSIVE TRANSFORMATION: Classification, Nucleation and growth - homogeneous and heterogeneous
mechanism, Precipitate growth under different conditions, Age hardening, Spinoidal decomposition, Precipitate coarsening,
Transformation with start range diffusion, Moving boundary transformations recrystallization, grain growth, eutectoid transformation,
discontinuous reactions (11)
PEARLITIC AND BAINITIC TRANSFORMATION: Factors influencing pearlitic transformation, Mechanism of transformation,
Nucleation and growth, Orientation relationship. Bainite-mechanism of transformation, Nucleation and growth, Orientation
relationships, Surface relief, Classical and non-classical morphology, Effect of alloying elements. DIFFSIONLESS
TRANSFORMATION: Characteristics of Martensitic transformation, Thermodynamics and kinetics, Nucleation and growth,
Morphology, Crystallography, Nonferrous martensite. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Reed Hill. R. E and Reza Abbaschian, University of Florida, "Physical Metallurgy Principles", Thomson Asia, Singapore 2003.
2. Porter. D. A and Easterling K E “Phase Transformations in Metals and Alloys", Chapman and Hall, London, 1992.
3. Sharma. R. C, Phase Transformations in Materials, CBS Publisher, 2002.
4. Raghavan. V, “Phase Transformations", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1990.
5. Smallman. R. E and Bishop R J, “Metals and Materials", Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd., New Delhi, 1995.
18YN03 MECHANICAL METALLURGY

3003
PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF MATERIALS: Theoretical Cohesive strength and practically measured strength, Dislocations,
Burger's Vector, Stress fields and Energies of dislocations, Deformation by slip – Critical resolved shear stress, Deformation by
twinning, Perfect and imperfect dislocations, Forces between dislocations, Intersection and cutting of dislocations, Dislocation
multiplication – Frank-Read sources, Dislocation pile-up‟s. (12)
STRENGTHENING MECHANISMS- Grain size strengthening-solid solution strengthening-factors affecting solid solution
strengthening. martensitic strengthening, precipitation hardening-conditions for precipitation hardening-aging-formation of
precipitates-coarsening of precipitates, mechanism of strengthening-dispersion strengthening. (11)
303
59th ACM 09.06.2018
FRACTURE: Types of fracture, Brittle fracture - Griffith theory, Fractography, Dislocation theories of brittle fracture, Ductile fracture -
Notch effects - Effect of temperature, stress raisers and strain rate on fracture behavior of materials. Fracture Mechanics: Stress
intensity factor - fracture toughness – Plane strain toughness testing - crack opening displacement - probabilistic aspects of fracture
mechanics. (11)
MECHANICAL TESTING OF MATERIALS: Tension test - constitutive equation - Instability - Notch tensile test - anisotropy of
tensile properties. Hardness test - types - Micro hardness testing - concept of Nano indentations. Torsion test - torsional failures -
Structural aspects of torsional failures. Impact testing – DBTT, Instrumented charpy test - ASTM standards for the above testing -
Fatigue - S-N curve - Effect of mean stress on fatigue - structural features of fatigue failure - Miner's Rule - Effect of metallurgical
variables - Creep - creep curve - Mechanism of creep deformation - Deformation mechanism maps - presentation of creep data -
prediction of long-time properties-creep test. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Dieter G E, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, Third edition, McGraw Hill Book Co., 2001.
2. Hull, "Introduction to Dislocation", John Wiley & Sons, N.Y, 2001.
3. Reed Hill R E, “Physical Metallurgy Principles”, Prentice Hall, N.Y., 2003.
4. Cottrell, "Theoretical Structural Metallurgy", ELBS, London, 2000.
18YN04 CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES

3003
LIGHT MICROSCOPY: Macro examination, principle and working of optical microscope, specimen preparation, optical principles -
numerical aperture, resolving power, depth of focus, depth of field, aberrations in optical microscopes and their remedial measures,
different microscopic techniques-dark field microscopy, phase-contrast microscopy, polarized light microscopy, interference
microscopy, high temperature microscopy; quantitative metallography. (11)
X-RAY DIFFRACTION: X-Ray Radiation–Properties, Generation of X-rays, X-ray absorption, Diffraction-Bragg's law, Reciprocal
Lattice, Laue‟s, rotating crystal and powder diffraction methods, X-ray diffractometer - principle, equipment and applications, X-ray
filters and counters, Applications- Determination of crystal structure, lattice parameter, Crystallite Size calculation, Residual stress
measurements. (11)
TECHNIQUES OF ELECTRON MICROSCOPY: Electron specimen interactions, electron optical instruments, transmission electron
microscopy - specimen preparation, imaging modes, applications, selected area diffraction, scanning electron microscopy -
operating modes and applications, electron probe microanalyser-qualitative and quantitative analysis, vacuum systems for electron
microscopy. (11)
ADVANCED MICROSCOPIC TECHNIQUES: Scanning probe microscopy-Scanning Tunneling Microscopy, Atomic force
microscopy- principle, instrumentation and applications, field ion microscopy - principle, instrumentation and applications.
SPECTROSCOPY: Optical emission spectroscopy, X-ray fluorescence spectroscopy - principle, equipment and applications. Auger
Electron Spectroscopy–principle, instrumentation and applications in metallurgy; X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy - principle,
instrumentation and applications; secondary ion mass spectroscopy - principle, instrumentation and applications. THERMAL
ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES: Differential thermal analysis, Differential scanning calorimetry and Thermo-Gravimetric analysis -
principles, instrumentation, results interpretation. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Angelo P C, “Materials Characterization”, Reed Elsevier India Pvt Ltd, 2013.
2. Yang Leng, “Materials Characterization -Introduction to Microscopic and Spectroscopic Methods”, John Wiley & Sons Pte
Ltd Singapore, 2008.
3. Cullity B D and Stock S R, “Elements of X-ray Diffraction”, Prentice Hall, Inc, 2001.
4. Hebbar K R, “Basics of X-Ray Diffraction and its Applications”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2007.
5. ASM Handbook, “Materials Characterisation”, ASM international, Volume 10, USA, 2017.
18YN05 CASTING TECHNOLOGY

3003
INTRODUCTION, PATTERNS, FOUNDRY SANDS: Types and foundries, various operations involved in foundries, Comparison of
Solidification route with other manufacturing routes. Patterns - Types, design of patterns, Allowances, material selection and
manufacture of patterns. Foundry Sand: Functional requirements moulding sand, types of moulding sand, preparation of mould
sands, testing of moulding sand, Cores – types, core sand preparation, core supports. (10)
MOULDIING AND CASTING PROCESSES: Classification of moulding processes, mould materials, bonds formed in moulding
aggregates, green sand moulds, dry sand moulding, loam moulding, CO2 molds, shell moulding, Resin binder processes, plaster
moulding processes, ceramic moulding processes, investment casting processes, graphite moulding processes, permanent mould
casting processes, die casting processes, centrifugal casting processes, continuous casting processes, Squeeze casting, semi solid
metal casting, directional solidification processes, CLA process, Thixocasting and Rheocasting processes. (12)
MELTING FURNACES AND ENERGY CALCULATIONS: Types of furnaces, Construction and operation of electric arc furnace
[Direct and Indirect Arc]. Core and core less induction furnace, cupola, rotary and crucible furnaces-Furnace design- cupola,
crucible, Induction furnace - Energy audit, energy calculations, metal utilization, energy utilization-simple problems. (11)
304
59th ACM 09.06.2018
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS AND CASTING DEFECTS: Casting design, methoding, Gating and Risering calculations,
improvement of yield and efficiency, simple problems in gating and risering for steels and cast irons. Casting defects - Identification,
analysis and Remedies. Fish bone diagram, FMEA and Y - Y analysis. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Srinivasan N K, “Foundry Engineering”, Khanna Tech. Publication Co, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Jain P L, “Principles of Foundry Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., Ltd, New Delhi, 2009.
3. Heine R W, Loper and Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, Tata McGraw Hill Publication. Co., 2012.
4. ASM Hand Book, “Casting”, ASM international, Volume 15, USA, 2017.
5. Beelay PR, “Foundry Technology”, London, 2001.
6. Chakrabarti A K, “Casting Technology and Casting Alloys”, PHI Publishing Co, New Delhi, 2009.
18YN51 MICROSTRUCTURAL ANALYSIS LABORATORY

0042
1. Macro and Micro Examination of Castings and Welds.
2. Inclusion rating of Steels and Grain size measurement in Ferritic and Austenitic Steels.
3. Assessment of morphology and characteristics of graphite in various cast irons.
4. Identification of plain carbon and alloy steels from their microstructures.
5. Determination of mechanical working and heat treatment condition of steels.
6. Evaluation of ferrite and austenite content in different types of stainless steels.
7. Determination of susceptibility to IGC of Austenitic Stainless Steels by ASTM A262 Practice A - Oxalic acid Test.
8. Microstructural examination of Al – Si Cast Alloys, Brasses and Bronzes.
9. Microstructural examination of Inconel, Stellite and Alpha – Beta Titanium.
10. Investigations on surface modified and hardened steels and tool steels.
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Laboratory manual prepared by the Department of Metallurgical Engineering.
2. ASM Handbook: Metallography and Microstructures”, ASM Internationals, Volume 9, USA, 2017.
SEMESTER II
18YN06 THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS OF MATERIALS

3204
INTRODUCTION FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS : System and surrounding, classification of systems, path and state
properties, thermodynamic processes - First law of thermodynamics thermodynamic equilibrium, reversible and irreversible
processes, intensive and extensive properties, Heat and work, internal energy, heat capacity of materials, enthalpy, thermo
chemistry, Hess's law, Kirchoff's law. (10+3)
SECOND, THIRD AND ZEROTH LAWS LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS: Carnot cycle, entropy-statistical interpretation of entropy,
combined statement of first and second laws- Free energy- thermodynamic functions-Maxwell's relations, Gibbs-Helmholtz equation,
effect of temperature on the thermodynamic properties. Third and Zeroth laws of thermodynamics, applications. (11+3)
THERMODYNAMIC POTENTIALS, SOULTIONS AND EQUILIBRIA IN PHASE DIAGRAMS: Fugacity, activity and equilibrium
constant. Clausius-Clayperon equation: effect of pressure on the equilibrium temperatures (water and iron systems). Le Chatelier's
principle, Vant Hoff's equation - Thermodynamics of Solutions: Gibbs - Duhem equation, partial and integral molar quantities, ideal
solutions - Raoult's law, real solutions, activity coefficient, Henry's law, alternative standard states, Sievert's law, mixing functions
and excess functions, regular solutions, applications of Gibbs-Duhem equation - Ellingham diagram free energy- composition
diagrams to the study of alloy systems. Free energy-temperature diagram for metastable phases- thermodynamic factors behind
the iron carbon phase diagram. (12+5)
KINETICS: First, second and third order reactions- Arrhenius equation-activation energy. Determination of order of the reaction -
types of processes- Kinetics at high temperatures, Kinetics of heterogeneous reactions, Kinetics of homogeneous reactions,
variation of reaction rate with concentration and temperature. Theory of absolute reaction rate, Problems, Gas–solid and gas–liquid
interfacial reactions. Fick‟s first law, Generalized diffusion equation, Steady state, Pseudo steady state, Unsteady state diffusion –
One dimensional cases, Diffusion coefficient, Examples of Pseudo steady state diffusion and unsteady state diffusion (12+4)
Total =L: 45+T: 15= 60

REFERENCES:
1. David R Gaskell, "Introduction to the Thermodynamics of Materials", Taylor and Franhs, 2003.
2. Upadhyaya G S and Dube R K, "Problems in Metallurgical Thermodynamics and Kinetics", Pergamon, 1977.
3. Gokcen, Reddy R G,"Thermodynamics", Plenum Press, New York, 1996.
4. David V Ragone, "Thermodynamics of Materials”, John Wiley and Sons, 1995.
5. Darken L S and Gurry R W, "Physical Chemistry of Metals", McGraw Hill, 1987.
6. Parker R H, "An introduction to Chemical Metallurgy", Perganon press, New York, 1978.
305
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18YN07 JOINING OF MATERIALS
` 3003
INTRODUCTION: Joining techniques, Welding processes and grouping, welding terms, AWS specifications for classification
ARC PHYSICS: Plasma, electron emission and ionization potential, arc temperature, influence of magnetic fields on arcs, arc blow,
metal transfer, effect of polarity, effect of shielding gases. POWER SOURCES: Static and dynamic characteristics, CC and CV
power source designs, current and voltage relationships, solid state power sources, wave form controlled power sources. (11)
HEAT FLOW IN WELDING: Heat transfer in weldments, dissipation of welding heat, cooling rates, weld metal cooling curves, peak
temperature, calculating width of heat affected zones, solidification rate and effects of heat input.
PROCESSES: Shielded metal arc welding, gas metal arc welding, flux cored arc welding, gas tungsten arc welding: process
equipment, control of parameters, consumable, specifications for electrodes and filler metals and applications. (12)
PROCESSES: plasma arc welding, submerged arc welding, stud arc welding. process equipment, control of parameters,
consumable, specifications for electrodes and filler metals and applications Oxy-fuel gas welding, Electro Slag Welding, Resistance
welding, Electron Beam Welding, Laser beam Welding, Thermit welding, Allied process. (11)
SOLID STATE WELDING PROCESSES – friction welding, friction stir welding, explosive welding, ultrasonic welding, diffusion
welding. Weld overlay, thermal cutting and thermal spraying. Brazing and Soldering,
WELDING DEFECTS: Causes and remedial methods, Residual Stresses and Distortion, Safety in Welding Introduction to
Welding Metallurgy (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Handbook, “Welding, Brazing and Soldering”, ASM international, Volume 6, USA, 2017.
2. Nadkarni S V, “Modern Arc Welding Technology”, Oxford IBH Publishers, 1996.
3. Howard B Cary, “Modern Welding Technology”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2002.
4. Parmar R S, “Welding Engineering and Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 2003.
5. AWS Welding Handbook, “Welding Processes - Part 1”, American Welding Society, 2004.
6. AWS Welding Handbook, “Welding Processes- Part 2”, American Welding Society, 2004.
18YN08 PHYSICAL METALLURGY OF ALLOYS

3003
ALLOY STEELS: Introduction to plain carbon steels, effect of alloying elements in Fe- Fe3C diagram - Physical metallurgy,
composition, structure, property, effect of alloy elements, heat treatment and applications of maraging steels, HSLA and micro
alloyed steels, armour steels, DP steels, IF steels, TRIP steels, bainitic steels, silicon steels, high manganese steels, tool steels and
steels for high temperature application. (12)
STAINLESS STEELS: Physical metallurgy, composition, structure, property, effect of alloy elements, heat treatment and
applications of ferritic, martensitic, austenitic, precipitation hardening, duplex, Nickel free stainless steels, high nitrogen stainless
steels (HNS) - Sensitization- causes and remedial measures for stainless steels - classifications by AISI system.
(10)
ALUMINIUM, COPPER AND MAGNESIUM ALLOYS: Classification, designation, composition, heat treatment, microstructure,
properties physical metallurgy and composition of pure aluminium and its alloys strengthening mechanisms in non-heat treatable
alloys and heat treatable alloys; introduction to Al-Li alloys - Classification, designation, physical metallurgy, composition, heat
treatment, microstructure, properties and composition of pure copper and its alloys. - Properties and applications of magnesium and
magnesium alloys; influence of alloying elements-Al, Mn, Zn, Si, Ag, Th, Zr; classification-cast alloys and wrought alloys. (13)
TITANIUM AND NICKEL: Classification, effect of alloying elements, heat treatment, microstructure, physical metallurgy, properties
and applications of Titanium and its alloys -Alpha stabilisers; beta stabilisers; Metallurgy of nickel base alloys-Alloying elements and
their effects-Nickel base super alloys, types, composition, physical metallurgy, properties and applications.Other nonferrous alloys
zinc, tin, lead, refractory materials, zirconium alloys, rare earth metals. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Balram Gupta, “Aerospace Materials volume 1- 4”, S Chand and Co., New Delhi, 2002.
2. Clark and Varney, “Physical Metallurgy for Engineers”, Affiliated East West press, New York, 1987.
3. Lula R, “Stainless Steels”, ASM, Ohio, 1990.
4. Brick, Gordon and Pense, “Structure and Properties of Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Book Co., New York, 1992.
5. ASM Hand Book, “Casting”, ASM international, Volume 15, USA, 2017.
18YN09 FORMING AND PARTICULATE TECHNOLOGY

3003
FORMING: Fundamentals of Metal forming: Components of stress - principal stresses - Von Mises, Tresca yield criteria, flow-stress
determination, effect of temperature, strain rate, microstructure, residual stresses and defects in materials – hydrostatic pressure,
friction and lubrication. (11)
FORMING OPERATIONS: Forging, rolling, extrusion, drawing : classification – equipment - forming load calculations – deformation
zone geometry - problems and defects, sheet metal forming: methods, forming limit diagram, defects. (11)
306
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEVERE PLASTIC DEFORMATION: methods: Equal Channel Angular Pressing, High Pressure Torsion, Accumulated Roll
bonding, Repeated corrugation and straightening and Twist Extrusion - applications – super plastic forming – High velocity forming –
methods, advantages and applications. (11)
POWDER METALLURGY: Introduction – brief description on stages in P/M processing – production - consolidation: compaction
and sintering, plastic forming-rolling, extrusion and forging, secondary and finishing operations, applications. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Dieter G E, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill, 2001.
2. William F Hasford and Robert M Caddell, “Metal Forming: Mechanics and Metallurgy”, Cambridge University Press P. ltd.,
London, 2007.
3. Angelo P C and Subramanian R, “Powder Metallurgy Science, Technology and Applications”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
2012.
4. Upadhayaya G S, Upadhyaya A and Tagaki K, “Powder Metallurgy-Science Technology and Materials”, Universities Press, UK,
2011.
18YN52 MATERIALS TESTING AND CHARACTERIZATION LABORATORY

0042
1. Hardness test, Impact test and Tension Test.
2. Wear Test
3. Non Destructive Testing
4. Corrosion Test
5. Quantitative Metallography and Optical emission spectroscopy
6. Determination of crystal structure, lattice parameter using XRD
7. Determination of crystallite size and lattice strain using XRD
8. Scanning Electron Microscopy imaging and EDS
9. Failure analysis using Scanning Electron Microscopy
10. Transmission Electron Microscope sample preparation, demonstration and SAD pattern indexing.
Total P: 60
.
18YN61 INDUSTRY VISIT & TECHNICAL SEMINAR
0042
VISIT TO INDUSTRIES: Study tour/Industry visit. Reports are to represent the observations of the students after the visits with their
personal comments/suggestions.
TECHNICAL SEMINAR : Lectures by experts preferably from industries to highlight the recent technical and soft skill trends.
SEMESTER III
18YN53 COMPUTATIONAL MATERIALS LAB
0042
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Introduction to CALPHAD approach and Thermo Calc software, Free energy calculation.
2. Construction of binary and ternary phase diagrams and label primary phases using Thermo Calc software.
(Fe-Fe3C system, Fe- Cr system, Al-Si system, Fe-Cr-Ni system and etc)
3. Construction of the property diagram and calculation of amount of phases for multi component alloy systems using
Thermo Calc software. (Alloy steels and nonferrous alloys)
4. Construction of isothermal and non- isothermal cooling curves for various ferrous alloys using TC-PRISMA.
5. Study of precipitation kinetics in alloy steels using TC- PRISMA.
6. Study of precipitation kinetics in non ferrous alloys using TC- PRISMA.
7. Simulation of Scheil Solidification of ferrous and non ferrous alloys using Thermo Calc software.
8. Study of diffusion behavior of carbon in steels using DICTRA.
9. Study of homogenization of a binary Fe-Ni alloy using DICTRA.
10.Study of diffusion behavior of dissimilar weldments using DICTRA.
Total P: 60
18YN71 PROJECT WORK - I

0063
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas of metallurgy and materials.
2. Developing a suitable methodology for solving the above problem.
3. Finalisation of system requirements and specification.
4. Proposing satisfactory solutions for the problem based on literature survey.
5. Conducting experiments, analyzing, and interpret the results.
6. Consolidated report
307
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER IV
18YN72 PROJECT WORK – II

0 0 28 14
Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas, literature survey, experimental work, results and discussion, paper writing, thesis
writing.
ELECTIVES
WELDING
18YN10 WELDING METALLURGY
3003
WELD SOLIDIFICATION AND TRANSFORMATION IN WELDMENTS: Weld solidification, Absorption of gases, liquid metal
reactions, solid state transformations in weldments, strengthening mechanisms in weld metals, heat affected zones
WELDABILITY AND WELDABILITY TESTING: Factors affecting weldability, cold cracking tests, hot cracking tests, Gleeble test,
Mechanical tests (emphasis on tension and bend tests) (11)
WELDING OF CARBON STEELS AND LOW ALLOY STEELS: Phase transformation, Hydrogen induced cracking, carbon
equivalent, preheating and post heating, solidification cracking, lamellar cracking, reheat cracking.
WELDING OF CAST IRONS: Weld metal and HAZ microstructures, Defects and remedies, Filler metal selection. (11)
WELDING OF STAINLESS STEELS: Welding of austenitic, ferritic, martensitic, duplex and precipitation hardenable stainless
steels. General Welding characteristics, Weld microstructures, Weld cracking and other metallurgical difficulties, Use of Constitution
diagrams (Schaeffler, Delong, WRC-1992), Filler metal selection, Dissimilar welds with stainless steels.
WELDING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS: Oxide formation, Hydrogen solubility, Difficulties due to electrical and thermal characteristics,
sensitivity to weld cracking. Filler metal selection. Weldability of heat treatable and non-heat-treatable aluminium alloys. (12)
WELDING OF NICKEL ALLOYS, TITANIUM ALLOYS AND COPPER ALLOYS: Weld metal and HAZ microstructures, Defects
and Remedies, Filler metal selection. WELDING OF SPECIAL ALLOYS: Welding of magnesium alloys, tool steels and clad metals.
WELDING QUALIFICATIONS: Welding Procedure Specification, Procedure qualification and welder qualification. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Lancaster J F, “Metallurgy of Welding”, George Allen Co, Boston, 1980.
3. Linnert G E, “Welding Metallurgy”, AWS, New York, 1995.
4. AWS Welding Handbook, “Materials and Applications - Part 1”, AWS, USA, 2004.
5. AWS Welding Handbook, “Materials and Applications - Part 2”, AWS, USA, 2004.
6. Sindo Kou, “Welding Metallurgy”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
18YN11 WELDING PROCEDURES AND QUALIFICATIONS

3003
PROCESSES & WELDING METALLURGY:
OVERVIEW OF SELECTED PROCESSES: SMAW, GTAW, GMAW, FCAW, SAW: AWS: Fundamentals, Equipments, Electrodes /
Filler metals Classifications as per AWS. Review of welding metallurgy of selected metals – Carbon steels, low alloy steels,
stainless steels, Ni alloys, Cu alloys, Al alloys, ASME B&PV Code – Sections IIC and IX
CODE PRACTICE
Familiarization of codes: Section IIC, Section IX of ASME B&PV Essential variables, non-essential variables, Supplementary
essential variables WPS formats, PQR formats and WPQ formats Test requirements; Range qualified for varying values of
essential values (12)
WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS) – FERRITIC STEELS

Preparation of WPS‟s for metal joining for Process variation: SMAW, GTAW, GTAW+SMAW, GMAW, SAW, SMAW+SAW,
GTAW+SAW Material variation: Carbon steels, Low Alloy Steels, Cr-Mo Steels Post Weld Heat Treatment: No PWHT, Stress
Relieving, Other Heat Treatments Thickness: 2 to 200 mm. Model WPSs of all the above categories and combinations to be
prepared. (11)
WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS) – STAINLESS STEELS AND NON-FERROUS ALLOYS

Preparation of WPS‟s for metal joining for Process variation: SMAW, GTAW, GTAW+SMAW, GMAW, SAW, SMAW+SAW,
GTAW+SAW Material variation: Stainless steels, Nickel alloys, Copper alloys, Titanium alloys, Al Alloys. Preparation of WPS‟s for
dissimilar metal joining for Process variation. SMAW, GTAW+SMAW Material combination: Carbon steel to low alloy steels,
Stainless steels to carbon steels, Copper alloys to carbon steels, Low alloy steels to another low alloy steel.
Preparation of WPS‟s for weld overlaying of Stainless steels over carbon steel, Nickel alloys over carbon steels, Cu alloys over
carbon steels, Stellite over carbon steels / stainless steels Model WPS of all the above categories and combinations to be prepared.
(11)
PQRS AND WPQS
Preparation of PQRs for selected WPSs Preparation of WPQs for selected WPSs for various processes, material thicknesses,
positions for butt welding, fillet welding and weld overlay.Model PQRs to be prepared for WPSs for butt welding, fillet welding and
weld overlay. (11)
308
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sindo Kou, “Welding Metallurgy”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
2. “ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code Section IIC”, ASME International, 2015.
3. “ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code Section IX”, ASME International, 2015.
4. API Standard 1104, “Welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities”, API, 2013.
5. AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code”, American Welding Society, 2010.
18YN12 WELDING CODES AND STANDARDS

3003
WELDING PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION: General tests for welding qualifications, Procedure
qualifications, Welding Procedure Qualifications, Essential variables for processes like SMAW, SAW, FCAW, GTAW, PAW. Test
coupon prepration, specimen preparation, testing and acceptance limits, Procedure qualifications, Range qualified. Practice for
preparation of WPS for various processes and material combinations. Main code: ASME B&PV IX. (11)
MATERIALS AND CONSUMABLES: Classification of materials: Ferrous and Non Ferrous, Compositions, mechanical properties,
for various shapes – plates, forgings, castings, wires, rods and pipes. As per ASTM, ASME B&PV II A and IIB
Classification of welding electrodes and filler metals for various processes like SMAW, GMAW, GTAW, SAW and for materials like
carbon steels, low alloy steels, stainless steels, cast irons, hard facing alloys, nickel alloys, copper alloys, alumnium alloys and
titanium alloys. Compositional features, mechanical properties and other tests. Consumable qualifications. As per AWS Specs /
ASME B&PV IIC (9)
STRUCTURAL WELDING CODES: General requirements of structural fabrications, welding symbols, Welded connections,
nontubular and tubular members, static loading, cyclic loading, Joint configurations, Groove welds, Fillet welds, plug and slot welds,
Built up members, calculation of stresses, stress ranges, Prequalification of WPS, Temperature requirements, Minimum preheat and
interpass temperatures, PWHT, Welding personnel qualifications, Weld types, preparation of WPSs, Testing and acceptance criteria
for SPS qualifications, welding consumable and electrode testing, distortion control, Inspection, NDT, As per AWS D1.1
(9)
PETROLEUM PIPING FABRICATION : Qualification of welding procedures for welds containing filler metal additives, Procedure
qualifications, Welding of test joints, Butt welds, Testing of butt welds, Welding of Test Joints-Fillet Welds , Testing of Welded Joints-
Fillet Welds, Qualification of welders, Single Qualification Multiple Qualification, Visual Examination, Destructive Testing ,
Radiography-Butt Welds, Retesting, Design and preparation of a joint for production welding , Alignment , As per API 1104.
(9)
PRESSURE VESSEL FABRICATION: Pressure vessel materials, Design, Openings and Reinforcements, Braced and Stayed
Surfaces, Fabrication, Inspection and Tests, Marking and Reports, Overpressure Protection, Design requirements fabrication
methods, joint categories, welding and inspection, post weld heat treatment and hydrotesting. As per ASME B&PV VIII-1.
(9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
2. ASME B&PV Code Section IX and Sections I, IIC, VIII Div 1, IX, 2015
3. API Code 1104: Welding of pipelines and related facilities.
4. AWS code D1.1 Structural welding – steel.
18YN13 WELDING CONSUMABLES

3003
FLUX COATED ELECTRODES: SMAW electrodes for carbon steels, low alloy steels, stainless steels, Al alloys, Cu alloys, Ni alloys
– Classification as per AWS, Requirements of mechanical properties, chemical composition, testing requirements, intended use of
important electrodes Problems based on selection of flux coated electrodes based on flux characteristics, material to be welded,
properties required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section IIC. (11)
BARE WELDING ELECTRODES AND RODS: Bare welding electrodes and rods for carbon steels, low alloy steels, stainless
steels, Al alloys, Ni alloys, Cu alloys, Ti alloys– Classification as per AWS, Requirements of mechanical properties, chemical
composition, testing requirements, intended use of important electrodes. Problems based on selection of bare welding electrodes
and rods based on material to be welded, properties required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section IIC.
(11)
ELECTRODES AND FLUXES FOR SAW AND FLUX CORED ELECTRODES: SAW electrodes for carbon steels, low alloy steels,
Fluxes, manufacturing methods, chemical nature; FCAW electrodes for Carbon steels, Low alloy steels, Stainless steels, Ni alloys.
Classification as per AWS, Requirements of mechanical properties, chemical composition, testing requirements, intended use of
important electrodes. Problems based on selection of electrodes and fluxes based on flux characteristics, material to be welded,
properties required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section IIC. (11)
SURFACING ELECTRODES, CAST IRON ELECTRODES AND RODS: Classification as per AWS, Requirements of mechanical
properties, chemical composition, testing requirements, intended use of important electrodes Problems based on selection of
electrodes / rods based on material to be welded, properties required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section
IIC.BRAZING METALS, BRAZING FLUXES, TUNGSTEN ELECTRODES, SHIELDING GASES: Classification as per AWS,
309
59th ACM 09.06.2018
intended use, testing requirements, Shielding gases - Types, characteristics, physical properties, shielding properties, applications.
Problems based on brazing metals, brazing fluxes, tungsten electrodes, shielding gases based on material to be joined, properties
required / applications. Filler metal qualification as per Section IIC. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. ASME Boiler and pressure Vessel Code – Part II C – Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes and Filler metals, 2013.
2. Larry Jeffus, “Welding principles and applications”, Delmer Cengage learning, 2012.
3. Lancaster, “Metallurgy of welding”, ELS, 2012.
4. Granjon, “Fundamental of welding metallurgy”, Abington, 1991.
.
18YN14 DESIGN OF WELDMENTS
3003
DESIGN BASICS: Types of joints, Types of welds, variants of joints, selection of weld type, weld joints for structural tubular
connections, welding symbols, weld dimensions, NDT symbols. Principles of weld joint design – General and specific design
principles. FAILURE ANALYSIS: Failure analysis – methodology, approaches, tools and techniques of failure analysis, modes of
failure, failure data retrieval, procedural steps for investigation of a failure for failure analysis. Case studies in welding.
(12)
WELD DESIGN FOR STATIC LOADING: Material or section properties, Weld design stress calculation for welds, design under
different types of loading like tension, compression, bending, shear, torsion and shock (11)
WELD DESIGN FOR DYNAMIC LOADING: Basic details of fatigue and fatigue failure, S-N curve, Goodman diagram, factors
affecting fatigue life of welded joint , methods of improving fatigue life of welded structures-design for fatigue loading, weld design
using fracture toughness value (KIC). (11)
DISTORTION AND RESIDUAL STRESSES: Welding residual stresses-causes, occurrence, effects-thermal and mechanical
relieving. Types of distortion – factors affecting distortion –distortion control methods-prediction- correction, jigs, fixtures and
positioners. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bladgett O W, “Design of Weldments”, James F. Lincoln Arc Welding Foundation, 1991
2. Parmar R S, “Welding Engineering and Technology” 1st edition,1997.
3. Gurney T R. Fatigue of Welded Structures. Cambridge University Press, 1979.
4. Rolfe T., Barsom. J., Fracture and Fatigue Control of Structures-Applications of Fracture Mechanics, Prentice Hall, 1977.
5. ASM Metals Hand Book. Failure Analysis and Prevention. ASM international, Volume 11, USA, 2017.
6. Das A K., Metallurgy of Failure Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1992.
18YN15 WELDING OF NICKEL ALLOYS
3003
SOLID-SOLUTION STRENGTHENED NI-BASE ALLOYS: Standard Alloys and Consumables, Welding Metallurgy ,Microstructural
Evolution in the Fusion Zone, Heat Affected Zone, Mechanical Properties of Weldments, Postweld Heat Treatment, Weldability,
Fusion Zone Solidification Cracking, HAZ Liquation Cracking, Ductility-Dip Cracking. (12)
PRECIPITATION-STRENGTHENED NI-BASE ALLOYS -Standard Alloys and Consumables, Welding Metallurgy , Microstructural
Evolution in the Fusion Zone, Heat-Affected Zone, Postweld Heat Treatment, Mechanical Properties of Weldments, Weldability
,Solidification Cracking, HAZ Liquation Cracking, Strain-Age Cracking. (11)
OXIDE DISPERSION STRENGTHENED ALLOYS AND NICKEL ALUMINIDES - Oxide Dispersion Strengthened Alloys , Physical
and Mechanical Metallurgy , Welding Metallurgy, Nickel Aluminide Alloys,Physical and Mechanical Metallurgy,Weldability of the Ni-
Aluminides. (11)
Dissimilar Welding-Application of Dissimilar Welds, Influence of Process Parameters on Fusion Zone Composition in Carbon, Low
Alloy and Stainless Steels, Determining Weld Metal Constitution, Fusion Boundary Transition Region, Postweld Heat Treatment.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1.John C. Lippold, Samuel D. Kiser, John N. DuPont,”Welding Metallurgy and Weldability of Nickel-Base Alloys”,
1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.
2. AWS Welding hand books, 9th Edition, Volume1 to Volume 5, American Welding Society.
310
59th ACM 09.06.2018
CASTING
18YN16 ADVANCED CASTING TECHNIQUES
3003
INVESTMENT CASTING: Investment casting -pattern and mould materials-types of waxes-tests for pattern waxes- dewaxing
methods – additives, resins, fillers used in investment casting-purpose of addition-process parameters- techniques and production
of investment moulds- shaw process-full mould process- CLA and CLV processes-replicast-applications of investment casting
process. (10)
SHELL MOULDING AND CENTRIFUGAL CASTING PROCESSES: Shell moulding machines-Pattern equipment - sands, resins
and other materials used for shell moulding, - preparation of resin and sand mixture-process parameters- application of shell
moulding - advantages of shell moulding- Types of centrifugal casting processes - calculation of mould rotary speeds - techniques,
equipments and production processes-Advantages and limitations of centrifugal casting methods. (11)
DIE CASTING AND OTHER CASTING PROCESSES: Methods, Permanent moulding, LPDC, PDC, VDC - Die casting machines-
operation and details-Die materials-metals cast by die casting method-advantages of die casting - Fluid sand process, V process -
Graphite moulding process, Magnetic Moulding, Impulse moulding, high pressure moulding, ceramic moulding, cement bonded
moulding. (11)
SEMI SOLID METAL CASTING: Introduction, Rheology and Thixotropy, difference between conventional casting and semi solid
metal casting processes, physical metallurgy of semi solid casting alloys, Slurry processing - Thixo Processes and Rheo processes,
Mould and die preparation, furnaces, methods, machines, die casting materials and applications - Squeeze casting - methods and
applications - Mechanical stirring, Magneto Hydrodynamic stirring (MHD), Non agitation: Cooling Slope casting - Solid route - Strain
Induced Melt Activated (SIMA), Recrystallisation and Partial Melting (RAP), Direct Partial Remelting (DPRM), strip casting process.
(13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Beeley P R, ”Foundry Technology", Butterworths, London, 2001.
2. Clegg A J,"Precision Casting Processes", Pergamon Press, London, 1991.
3. David H. Kirkwood, Michel Suéry, Platon Kapranos, Helen V. Atkinson, Kenneth P. Young “Semi-solid Processing of
Alloys”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2009.
4. Shahrooz Nafisi, Reza Ghomashchi “ Semi-Solid Processing of Aluminum Alloys” Springer, 2016
5. Anacleto de Figueredo “Science and technology of semi-solid metal processing “North American Die Casting Assoc.,
2001.
18YN17 FOUNDRY METALLURGY

3003
SOLIDIFICATION OF METALS AND ALLOYS: Solidification of castings, solidification patterns of metals and alloys - microstructure
development. Effect of composition, moulding materials and cooling rate on solidification pattern, segregations in castings,
segregation patterns in steel ingot. Shrinkage of casting, types- linear and volume shrinkages, - theoretical calculations of linear and
column shrinkages, shrinkage cavities, location, shape and size of shrinkage cavities – calculation of solidification time in metals
and alloys - directional solidification of castings. (11)
METALLURGY OF CAST METALS AND ALLOYS: Types, microstructures, properties, compositions, specifications IS, BS,EN and
ASTM standards of various cast irons, steels, aluminum, copper, magnesium and zinc base alloys. (13)
HEAT TREATMENT OF CASTINGS: Annealing, normalising, hardening and tempering of steels, microstructures of steels in as
cast and various heat treated conditions. Construction of TTT and CCT diagrams – Austempering, martempering. Heat treatment
practices for cast irons, aluminum, copper and other non ferrous alloys. (13)
GASES IN CASTINGS, FLUIDITY, RESIDUAL STRESSES IN CASTINGS: Gases in metals and alloys, measurements of gases
and Degassing Techniques - Fluidity - Definition, factors affecting fluidity and measurement of fluidity. Residual stresses in castings
- Origin, effects and stress relieving operations. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Heine R W Loper and Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, Tata McGraw Hill. Publication. Co., 2012.
2. ASM Handbook, “Casting”, ASM international, Volume 15, USA, 2017.
3. Peter Beelay, “Foundry Technology”, Butterworth, London, UK, 2001.
4. John Campbell, “Casting”, Elsevier Publishing Amsterdam, 2011.
18YN18 CASTING DESIGN AND SIMULATION

3003
OVERVIEW OF CASTING PROCESSES: Introduction to casting simulations, types of casting simulation software, methoding and
requirement for design of castings. Optimization of casting defects- Cause and effect diagram, Fish bone diagram, WHY method
and FMEA. (12)
CASTING DESIGN AND ANALYSIS: Minimum section thickness, hot spots and hot tears, junctions, ribs, and bosses. Design for
moulding, core making and cleaning. Design for continuous casting. (11)
311
59th ACM 09.06.2018
COMPUTER SIMULATION OF CASTING PROCESSES: Mould filling simulation, solid modeling, thermal analysis, solidification
simulation, feeder size and weight calculations and cost benefits of solidification simulation. Mold-metal filling optimization.
(12)
DESIGN FOR CASTABILITY: Product design for castability, process- friendly design and castability analysis. Prediction of cooling
curves, local microstructures and mechanical properties for metals and alloys. Prediction of mould erosions, sand burnt-on, sand
penetration and sand inclusions. (10)
REFERENCES:
1. Ravi. B, Metal Casting Computer-Aided Design and Analysis, PHI learning Private Limited, 2011.
2. Complete casting hand book metal casting processes, metallurgy, techniques and design, John Campbell Butterworth –
Heinemann publication, 2015.
18YN19 QUALITY CONTROL IN FOUNDRIES

3003
INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY CONTROL: Definition of quality control- need for quality improvement and control- dissemination of
quality information- quality and cost analysis-quality control and inspection-responsibility for quality control- quality control through
standardization- quality control organization. Quality planning, record and documents. Reliability engineering.
(12)
STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Introduction- probability- probability distribution- Binomial distribution-Poisson distribution-
normal distribution-statistical quality control (SQC)-statistical process control (CPC) in foundries- Process capability indices- process
variables in foundries acceptance control charts-applications of control charts in foundries -simple problems.
(11)
METHODS OF INSPECTION AND QUALITY APPRAISAL: Requirement for inspections – inspection of castings, equipment and
techniques to be used- methods to reduce energy consumption in foundry-Environmental pollution control- inspection of castings-
Experts system for casting defects analysis- accuracy evaluations and analysis of dimensions-quality function deployment (QFD)-
case studies on casting defect analysis. (11)
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND TOTAL QUALITY CONTROL: Quality policy- quality system and its activities -Reporting
and review- quality control system quality system documentation-corrective and preventive actions-third party inspection- Planning
and management of foundry–quality assurance system-- ISO standards for quality system- Important clauses in ISO:9000
specifications, ISO 9001/9002 (IS 14002) specifications – essential steps in implementing the quality system for ISO:9000- QS:9000
quality system- some case studies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jain P L, “Quality Control and Total quality Management”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company limited, New Delhi, 2006
2. Jain P L, “Principles of Foundry technology”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company limited, New Delhi, 2003
3. Ramana Rao T V, “Metal Casting Principles and Practice”, New Age International Publishers, 2010.
4. Srinivasan N K, ”Foundry Engineering”, Kanna Publishers, Fourth Edition- 2012.
18YN20 FOUNDRY PRACTICE FOR FERROUS AND NON FERROUS CASTINGS
3003
CAST IRONS: Introduction to cast irons, types of cast irons, specifications and standards. Melting practice for grey cast iron, SG
iron, Malleable and white cast irons, ADI CGI, -High chromium high carbon cast irons, Ni-hard, Ni-resist and High Silicon. Charge
calculations, charge additions and Simple calculations. Methods of melting- furnaces, modes of operations, lining materials and
lining procedures. Treatment of liquid metal before casting- Inoculations, Mg treatment, degassing and modification. Post casting
operations- cleaning, finishing operations, and heat treatment processes. Quality inspections- destructive and non destructive
testing. (12).
STEELS: Introduction to plain carbon steels and alloys steels, classifications of steels, specifications and standards. Melting
practice for plain carbon, Ni-steels, Cr-Mo steels, Cr-Mo-V steels, high Mn steels, stainless steels, and maraging steels and low
density steels. Melting techniques -charge calculations, charge additions, furnaces, modes of operations, lining materials and lining
procedures. Refinement of liquid metal- deoxidation, and degassing. Post casting operations- fettling, cleaning, finishes operations,
and heat treatment processes. Quality inspections and testing-destructive and non destructive testing.
(12)
LIGHT METAL CAST ALLOYS: Introduction to Al, Mg and Ti alloys, classification, specification and standards. Moulding- sand
casting, chill casting and pressure die-casting; melting- furnaces, raw materials, fluxes, dross formation and lining materials and
lining conditions. Refining of molten metal -degassing, grain refinement and modifications; Post casting operations- Fettling and heat
treatment, Quality control- microstructure analysis, destructive and non destructive testing, defect analysis.
(11)
COPPER AND NICKEL CAST ALLOYS: Introduction to Copper and Nickel cast alloys– effect of alloying elements, classifications
as per cast designations, specification and standards. Foundry practice for Brasses, Bonzes, Monel , Inconel and Hastelloys.
Moulding methods- sand casting, centrifugal casting and continuous casting. Melting techniques- furnaces, raw materials, fluxes,
dross formation and lining. Refining –deoxidation, degassing, grain refinement and structural modifications, Post casting operations-
Fettling and heat treatment, Quality control (10)
312
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Handbook, “Casting”, ASM international, Volume 15, USA, 2017.
2. Heine R W Loper and Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, Tata McGraw Hill. Publication. Co., 2012.
3. John R. Brown, Foseco Foundrymen‟s “Handbook for Ferrous and Non ferrous”, 11Th edition, Butterworth Heinemann,
1999.
1. Mahi Sahoo and Sudhari Sahu, “Principles of Metal casting” Mcgraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
18YN21 IRON AND STEEL MAKING
3003
INTRODUCTION: History of iron and steel making, evolution of modern steel making, overview of steel making in India and aboard,
general layout of integrated steel plants; RAW MATERIALS AND THEIR PREPARATION: metallurgical coal, Coke manufacture -
by-product coke ovens, iron ores, iron ore beneficiation, agglomeration methods - principle and mechanism of sintering,
pelletisation, fluxes, testing of raw materials, raw materials for steel making, steel making refractories, pre-treatment of hot metal
prior to steel making. (11)
PHYSICAL-THERMAL-CHEMICAL PROCESSES IN IRON MAKING: physical, thermal and chemical profiles, physical chemistry
of blast furnace reactions - carbon-oxygen reaction, gas-solid reactions, slag-metal reactions, desulphurisation and desiliconisation,
RAFT calculation; BLAST FURNACE PLANT AND PROCESS: Layout, constructional features of the blast furnace, charging
equipment, burden distribution, gas cleaning, hot blast stove, operational irregularities, metal and slag, High top pressure, bell-less
top, pulverised coal injection, humidification of blast, pre-reduced ore;
ALTERNATE IRON MAKING: Sponge iron production methods and smelting reduction processes. (12)
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY OF STEEL MAKING: Thermodynamics, kinetics and transport phenomena in steel making, refining slags,
slag - metal refining reactions. STEEL MAKING PROCESSES : Overview of Bessemer converters, open hearth practice, Electric
arc furnace steel making, LD process - plant and equipment, steel making practice, slag-metal-gas interaction, oxygen bottom
blown process, combined blowing processes, CONARC process, EOF process. (11)
SECONDARY STEEL MAKING: Deoxidation, desulphurization, ladle furnace, decarburization methods, vacuum degassing
methods, Injection metallurgy. STEEL INGOTS - fundamentals of solidification, rimming, capped and killed steels, ingot defects;
CONTINUOUS CASTING OF STEEL - heat transfer and solidification in continuous casting, tundish design and operation,
continuous casting of slabs and blooms, metallurgical defects. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ahindra Ghosh and Amit Chatterjee, “Iron Making and Steel Making - Theory and Practice”, PHI Learning Private Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2015.
2. Wakelin D H (ed), “The Making, Shaping and Treating of Steel: Iron Making”, The AISE Steel Foundation, 2004.
3. Fruehan.J.R (ed.), “The Making, Shaping and Treating of Steel: Steel making, The AISE Steel Foundation, 2004.
4. Tupkary R J and Tupkary V R, “An Introduction to Modern Iron Making”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
5. Tupkary R J and Tupkary V R, “An Introduction to Modern Steel Making”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
18YN22 PRINCIPLES OF NON FERROUS EXTRACTION METALLURGY

3003
THERMODYNAMIC PRINCIPLES OF METAL EXTRACTION: Zeroth law, first law, second law. Concepts of internal energy,
enthalpy, entropy and their changes with temperature. Concept of spontaneity of processes. Free energy and its variation with
pressure and temperature. Concepts of fugacity , activity and equilibrium constant. Standard free energy diagram fro oxides,
sulphides, chlorides and their uses. Thermodynamics of solutions. (12)
METHODS OF EXTRACTION: Ore, mineral, methods of beneficiation and their principles. Pyrometallurgy-calcination, roasting and
smelting, hydrometallurgy-leaching, solvent extraction, ion exchange and precipitation, electrometallurgy- electrolysis and electro
refining, material and energy balance. (11)
REFINING: methods of refining –ion exchange , solvent extraction, gaseous reduction, cementation, liquid –liquid extraction,
liquation, zone refining. Extraction metals from oxide ores- magnesium, aluminium, tin. (11)
METAL EXTRACTION: extraction of metals from sulphide ores- copper,zinc,nickel. Extraction of metals from halides ore-titanium
and rare earth metals, uranium,thorium. Extraction of precious metals –gold, silver and platinum. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ray H S , Gosh A ,”Principles of Extractive Metallurgy”, New Age International Publishers,2007.
2. David R Gaskell,”Introduction to the Thermodynamics of Materials‟‟,Taylor & Francis, UK, 2003.
3. Pehike R D,” Unit Processes in Extractive Metallurgy”, Elsevier, USA, 1993.
4. Ray H S, Sridhar R and Abraham A P,” Extraction of Non Ferrous Metals”, Affiliated East west Press Pvt Ltd, New Delhi
1985
5. Upadhayaya G S and Dube R K,” Problems in metallurgical thermodynamics and Kinetics”, Pergamon ,1997.
18YN23 PHYSICAL METALLURGY OF STAINLESS STEELS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Types of Stainless steels, Specifications of stainless steels, Properties of Stainless Steels, manufacturing
methods of stainless steels. Effect of alloying elements in stainless steels, Fe-Cr system, Fe-Cr-Ni ternary phase diagram, effect of
313
59th ACM 09.06.2018
various intermetallic phases in stainless steels, Heat treatment processes of stainless steels, effect of rare earth metals in stainless
steels. (12)
CORROSION BEHAVIOUR OF STAINLESS STEELS : Atmospheric and Aqueous Corrosion ,Stress-Corrosion Cracking and
Hydrogen Embrittlement, IGC, Pitting corrosion, PREN, passivation behavior of stainless steel, High-Temperature Corrosion,
Corrosion of Cast Stainless Steels, ASTM and EN standards on corrosion resistance testing, Electrochemical methods. (11)
RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN STAINLESS STEELS: Nitrogen alloyed stain less steels - Austentic stainless steels, Duplex
stainless steels and Martensitic stainless steels – Manufacture, Heat Treatment, solubility of nitrogen in stainless steels, Alumina
forming Austenitic stainless steels. (11)
SELECTION OF STAINLESS STEELS: Selection of stainless steels – marine, constructional, chemical storage tanks, Bio medical
implants, instruments in medical, high temperature applications, instrumentation, case studies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Davis J R “Stainless steels”, ASM specialty Hand Book ASTM International, 1996
2. ASM, “Source Book of Stainless Steel”, ASM Publisher, 1977.
3. Peckner.D and Bernstein.I.M, “Handbook of Stainless Steel”, McGraw Hill Book Co. New York, 1977.
4. Lula R A, James Gordon Parr, “Stainless steels” American Society for Metals, 1986.
18YN24 PHYSICAL METALLURGY OF STRUCTURAL STEELS

3003
FUNDAMENTAL: Types of structures steels. Principles involved in alloys of iron. Factors affecting metallurgical design and control
of properties and microstructure. Methodology used in the design of alloys based on sound metallurgical principles. Factors affecting
the strength of C-Mn steels and austenitic steel. (10)
HIGH STRENGTH STRIP STEELS: Low carbon strip steels and factors affecting cold formability, cold forming behavior process
route followed for production of low carbon steel strip and effect of alloying elements on yield strength after temper rolling –
Formability of high strength strip steel, coating of steel and Applications. (10)
MICRO ALLOYED STEELS: Recent trends, Strengthening mechanism and Modern concepts of thermo mechanical controlled
processing. Physical metallurgy concepts in explaining Strengthening mechanisms. Microstructural control to restrict brittle fracture
in high strength line pipe steels, nano size particles and its effects (12)
MEDIUM STRENGTH AND HIGH STRENGTH STEELS: Secondary hardened steels and maraging steels, Effect of alloying
elements such as Cr, Mo, Ti and Al on the microstructure, strength and fracture resistance of maraging steel. Recent trends in
Secondary hardened steels. Third generation of AHSS steels, TWIP steels and TRIP steels and their applications. Low density
steels and electrical steels and recent developments (13)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Nina Forstein “ Advanced high strength sheet steels- physical metallurgy, design, processing and properties, Springer
International Publishing Switzerland, 2015.
2. Llwellyn , D T, “Steels Metallurgy and Applications”, Butterworth, Heinmann, 1992.
3. Gladman.T,” The Physical metallurgy of microalloyed steels”, The Institute of Materials, London, 1997.
18YN25 HEAT TREATMENT AND SURFACE MODIFICATION

3003
HEAT TREATMENT EQUIPMENT: Furnaces, Calibration of thermocouple, Quenching methods, fixtures, control of furnace
atmosphere, temperature control, Design of heat treatment furnaces. (9)
HEAT TREATMENT OF STEEL: Effect of alloying elements on Fe-Fe3C diagram, Annealing (different types), normalizing, hardening
- Quenching media - Martensite formation.TTT and CCT diagrams. Hardenability and measurement of hardenability-Influence of
alloying elements. Tempering-Temper brittleness, Sub zero treatment-Control of retained austenite. Austempering, Martempering
and Thermo-mechanical treatments. (12)
HEAT TREATMENT OF FERROUS ALLOYS: Stainless steels, Tool steels and Cast irons, maraging steels, HSLA steels and dual
phase steels.
HEAT TREATMENT OF NON-FERROUS ALLOYS: Aluminium alloys, Magnesium alloys, Titanium alloys, and Ni-base alloys.
Design for heat treatment.
HEAT TREATMENT DEFECTS: Causes and remedies for defects (12)
SURFACE MODIFICATION TECHNIQUES: Flame and induction hardening. Carburising, nitriding, carbonitriding, boriding, electron
beam and laser beam hardening .PVD and CVD processes, sputter coating, ion plating, ion implantation, spray coatings , shot
peening, laser cladding, plasma coating . (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rajan and Sharma, “Heat Treatment, Principles and Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
314
59th ACM 09.06.2018
2. Vijendra singh, “Heat treatment of metals”, Standard Publishers distributors”, 2009.
3. Prabhudev K H, “Handbook of Heat Treatment of Steels”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publications. Co. Ltd., 1988.
4. American Society of Metals, “Metals Handbook”, Volume IV, A.S.M., Metals park, Ohio, USA, 1991.
5. Sudharsan T S, “Surface Engineering”, Ohio State University, 1992.
6. Karl Eric Thelning, “Steel and its heat treatment”, Butterworth Publications, 2000.
18YN26 ENVIRONMENTAL DEGRADATION OF METALS

3003
THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS OF CORROSION: Electrode potential-standard and reference electrodes, electrode and cell
representations – electrochemical cells – galvanic and concentration cells. Nernst equation, EMF series – free energy criteria for
corrosion reaction – thermodynamic Vs kinetic considerations-Pourbaix diagram (Fe, Ni, Al& Zn).Faradays laws,corrosion rates
expressions. Corrosion current density and corrosion rate, exchange current density–activation and concentration polarization-Tafel
equation, mixed potential theory and behaviour of galvanic couples, Passivity-potentiostatic polarization curves. Pilling-Bedworth
ratio. (15)
FORMS OF CORROSION: Atmospheric corrosion, galvanic corrosion, general biological corrosion. Localized corrosion-filiform
corrosion, crevice corrosion, pitting corrosion, localized biological corrosion. Metallurgically influenced corrosion-inter granular
corrosion, de-alloying. Mechanically assisted corrosion-erosion corrosion, cavitation corrosion, fretting corrosion, corrosion fatigue,
environmentally induced cracking-mechanisms of stress corrosion cracking and hydrogen embitterment.
(9)
CORROSION MONOTORING AND TESTING: Purpose and classification, weight loss method, salt spray test, tests for
intergranular corrosion, and stress corrosion cracking. Electrochemical polarization techniques, Tafel extrapolation, linear
polarization, AC impedance methods- electrochemical impedance spectroscopy. Application of -NDT techniques, Outline of on
stream and off stream corrosion monitoring methods. (10)
PREVENTION OF CORROSION: corrosion control by design, selection of materials-alloying-stainless steel and brass, oxidation
resistant materials, cathodic and anodic protection methods, corrosion inhibitors, anodic, cathodic and mixed inhibitors-vapour
phase inhibitors, applications, surface conversion processes. Metallic coatings, ceramic coatings. Super hydrophobic and self
heating coatings. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Chatterjee U K, “Environment degradation of metals”, Marcel Dekker Inc.,2001.
2. Raj Narayan, “Metallic Corrosion and Prevention”, Oxford Publications,1988.
3. Mars G Fontana, “Corrosion Engineering”, McGraw Hill Inc.,1987.
4. Herbert H Uhligand Winston Revie, “Corrosion and Corrosion Control - An Introduction to Corrosion Science and
Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons,1985.
5. Kenneth R Trethewey and John Chamberlain, “Corrosion for Science and Engineering”, Longman Inc., 1996.
6. Denny A Jones, “Principles and Prevention of Corrosion”, Prentice Hall Inc.,1996.
18YN27 NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING

3003
NDE AS QUALITY TOOL: Historical disasters that affected the development of NDT, Concepts of Non-Destructive testing, NDT
Qualification and Certification, Discontinuities and Defects, Introduction to codes and standards for NDT.
SURFACE TECHNIQUES: Visual Testing (VT). Direct and remote inspection. LASER Shearography. Penetrant Testing (PT):
Principle and mechanics Applicability and limitations, Dyes, developers and cleaners, Fluorescent penetrant test. Practical
demonstrations on VT and PT. (11)
MAGNETIC AND ELECTROMAGNETIC TECHNIQUES: Magnetic Particle Testing (MPT): Principles, applications, magnetization
methods. MPT Equipment and media. Practical demonstrations on MPT. Principle, Instrumentation and applications of Magnetic
Flux Leakage Testing (MFL). Principle, Instrumentation and applications of Eddy Current Testing (ECT) and Remote Field Testing
(RFT). (12)
PENETRATING SOUND WAVES TECHNIQUES: Ultrasonic Testing (UT): Ultrasonic wave characteristics, Transducers, Inspection
methods and types of scanning. Evaluation of flaw characteristics. Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD) technique, Guided Wave testing
(GWT), Phased Array ultrasonic Testing (PAUT) LASER ultrasonic testing, UT Calibration. Inspection of welds and Castings.
Practical demonstrations on UT. Acoustic Emission Testing (AET). (11)
PENETRATING LIGHT RAYS TECHNIQUES: X-ray and Gamma ray Radiography (RT). RT Equipment and producing a
radiograph. Film Radiography and Digital Radiography. Exposure factors. Factors affecting Contrast, Resolution and Sensitivity.
Determination of resolution and sensitivity of images by IQI (Penetrameters), RT of castings, welds and pipes. Safety in
radiography, Practical demonstrations on RT film interpretation. Principle, Instrumentation and applications of Infra Red
Thermography (IRT). (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Handbook, “Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, ASM international, Volume 17, USA, 2017.
2. Louis Cartz, “Non-Destructive Testing”, ASM International, Metals Park Ohio, USA, 1995.
3. Baldev Raj T, Jayakumar, Thavasimuthu M, „‟ Practical Non-destructive Testing‟‟, Woodhead Publishing, 2002.
315
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18YN28 CERAMICS AND POLYMERS
3003
CERAMICS CRYSTAL SYSTEMS: Crystal Structures of Ceramics (Pauling's Rules),Silicate Structures, Structures of Covalent
ceramics, problems on crystal systems ,Structures of Glasses and properties . Simple problems involving Packing Fraction, critical
radius ratio and density. Defects In Ceramics-Problems.
PROPERTIES AND APPLICATIONS OF ENGINEERING CERAMICS: Mechanical properties-Electrical Properties- Thermal
properties-Optical Properties of engineering ceramics –Simple problems - examples and applications. (12)
PRODUCTION AND FORMING TECHNIQUES: Solution synthesis routes-Sol gel, Combustion, Precipitation methods-Solid state
methods - slip and slurry casting-applications- Powder processing equipment and process details of hot pressing, Hot Isostatic
Pressing and Cold Isostatic Pressing, Sintering-Liquid Phase sintering. MECHANICAL
BEHAVIOUR OF CERAMICS: Elasticity and brittle fracture- Toughening Mechanisms, Weibull Statistics and Design, Thermal
Shock Resistance- Glass – elastic behaviour, strength and fracture. (12)
INTRODUCTION TO POLYMERS: Classification-thermoset, thermoplastics and elastomers. Structure of polymers- crystalline and
amorphous polymers - concept of Glass Transition Temperature (Tg), Polymerization- types and mechanisms with examples,
Degree of polymerization - molecular weight of polymers-problems, Polymer additives-Examples and properties, Applications of
engineering plastics. Elastomers - types, properties, examples. and application. (10)
MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF POLYMERS: Viscoelasticity-creep and stress relaxation in polymers. Yielding and fracture of
polymers, Crazing of polymers. PROCESSING & SELECTION OF POLYMERS: Processing of thermoset and thermoplastic
polymers-blow moulding, Injection moulding, Vaccum forming ,Thermoforming, compression moulding-Selection Criteria for
Polymers with Examples. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gowariker VR, Viswanathan NV and Jayadev Sreedhar,“Polymer Science”, New Age International P Ltd.,2005.
2. Michael Barsoum,“Fundamentals of Ceramics”, McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Inc.,1997.
3. William F Smith,“Foundations of Materials Science and Engineering”, McGraw-Hill Inc, New York.,1993.
4. Nobuka Ichinose, “Introduction to Fine Ceramics”, John Wiley & Sons, USA, 1987.
5. Chawla KK, “Ceramic Matrix Composites”, Chapman and Hall, UK,1993.
6. Kingery WD, “Introduction to Ceramics”, John Wiley, USA,1960.
18YN29 COMPOSITES
3003
INTRODUCTION: Composite material – definition – classification. Examples and applications for each class.
FIBER COMPOSITES: Constituents - functions of fiber and matrix - Properties of fibers - Critical fiber length - Aligned and random
fiber composites. Property prediction - Rule of Mixtures - Simple problems. Production of fibers : Glass fibers, boron, carbon,
alumina, metallic fibers, and ceramic fibers. Matrix materials: metallic, polymer and ceramic matrix materials - Concept of interfaces
and interfacial reactions in fiber composites. Tensile strength of continuous and discontinuous composites. Concept of fracture
modes in fiber composites. (12)
POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES: Types- Processing-Thermal matrix composites – Hand layup and spray technique, filament
winding, Pultrusion, resin transfer moulding, autoclave moulding-Thermoplastic matrix composites-Injection moulding, film stacking
– Diaphragm forming – Thermoplastic tape laying, Mechanical properties –.Applications.
METAL MATRIX COMPOSITES: Matrices and reinforcements. Processing – Solid state, liquid state, deposition and insitu
techniques MMCs applications. (11)
CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES: Ceramic matrix materials – Processing – Hot pressing, liquid infiltration technique, Lanxide
process, in-situ chemical reaction techniques – CVD, CVI, sol-gel process. Interface in CMCs. Mechanical properties– Applications.
CARBON / CARBON COMPOSITES: Processing, Properties and Applications. (11)
PARTICULATE COMPOSITES: Types - True particulate and Dispersion strengthened composites - Function and examples of
dispersoids - Particle size - interparticle spacing calculation- Examples of particulate composites. LAMINAR COMPOSITES:
Types - Layered and honeycomb structures – examples manufacture and applications. Joining of composite materials, design of
composites. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mathews F L and Rawlings R D, “Composite Materials: Engineering and Science”, CRC Press and Wood head Publishing
Limited, 2002.
2. Krishnan K Chawla, “Composite Materials Science and Engineering”, Springer, 2001.
3. Derek Hull, “Introduction to Composite Materials”, Cambridge University Press, 1988.
4. “ASM Handbook, “Composites”, ASM international, Volume 21, USA, 2017.
18YN30 NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS

3003
STRUCTURE AND PROPERTIES OF NANOMATERIALS: Definition-classification of nano materials-structure of nano materials-
comparison with conventional materials; basic concepts - relationship between grain size and properties - physical properties- color,
conductivity, Thomson effect, optical properties - surface plasmon effect, chemical properties - reactivity, mechanical properties -
strength, hardness of nano sized particles. (11)
316
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SYNTHESIS AND CHARACTERIZATION: Basic approaches-top down and bottom up approaches-various methods for producing
nano materials – zero, one, two and three dimensional materials, solid State (mechanical methods): Mechanical Alloying (MA) and
Mechanical Milling (MM) - Severe Plastic Deformation (SPD); chemical synthesis: combustion synthesis and precipitation
techniques, physical methods: Electrolysis, microwave and plasma synthesis, Physical Vapor Deposition (PVD). Important nano
materials characterization techniques – X-Ray Diffraction (XRD), Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) – imaging and diffraction
modes, Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM) / STM, Nano indentation technique. (12)
CONSOLIDATION AND SPECIFIC NANOMATERIALS: Problems in consolidation, use of glove box, FAST technique – process
variables, examples; High pressure shock consolidation – explosive forming, nano coatings – dip, plasma spray; Nano structures
with high application potential: carbon nano structures – fullerenes, nano tubes, Quantum dots, GaN wires, nano TiO 2, nano ZnO –
properties, applications and advantages. (11)
APPLICATIONS: Structural – Continuous coatings for corrosive environments, electronic and optical applications-thin and multi
layer capacitors, sensors and quantum dots, energy storage devices – fuel cells, catalysts, solar cells, efficient micro batteries,
biomedical- valves for artificial hearts, internal drug release devices, case studies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Murthy B.S, Shankar P and Baldev Raj, “Textbook of Nanoscience and Technology”, Springer, 2012.
2. Parag Diwan and Ashish Bharadwaj, “Nano structured Materials”, Pentagon Press, 2006.
3. Charles P Poole and Frank J Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2003.
4. Michael Wilson, Kamali Kannagara and Geoff Smith, “Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technology”,
Chapman and Hall, New York, 2002.
5. Pradeep T, “Nano: The Essentials”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2007.
6. Ying J, “Nanostructured Materials”, Academic Press, New York, 2001.
18YN31 EMERGING MATERIALS

3003
HIGH TEMPERATURE MATERIALS: Introduction– High and low temperature materials, superconductors, supra magnetic
materials, high entropy alloys, dispersion strengthened alloys - their advantages and applications, intermetallics, superalloys,
Refractories, (10)
NANOMATERIALS: Introduction-structure and properties of nano materials, carbon nano structures - production methods –
physical and chemical synthesis – high energy ball milling-examples. Nano materials for optical, bio, electrical, magnetic,
mechanical and structural functions - applications. (10)
METALLIC ANDCERAMICS MATERIALS: High strength alloys, quasicrystals, immiscible alloy systems and in-situ composites,
metallic glasses, single crystals, metallic foams, shape memory alloys-advantages and applications. insulators, ceramic matrix
composites, biomaterials - their need, advantages and properties. Thin films, coatings, Glass Ceramics. (10)
MATERIALS PROCESSING and CONSOLIDATION TECHNIQUES: Various methods - Mechanical alloying, Rapid Solidification
Processing, Melt spinning, atomization techniques, sol-gel, Self Propagating High Temperature Synthesis - processing capabilities -
process parameters - examples of material synthesized – Advantages. Consolidation techniques for ceramics and metallic powders
- Cold and Hot Isostatic Pressing, Powder extrusion, Equal Channel Angle Process, spark plasma sintering.
(15)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Handbook, “Powder Metallurgy”, ASM international, Volume 7, USA, 2017.
2. Nobru. H Ichinose, “Introduction to Fine Ceramics”, Butterworth-Heinman Ltd, NY,1992.
3. Reed R C, “The Superalloys: Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge,2006.
4. Liebermann. H. H, “Rapidly Solidified Alloys: Processes, Structure, Properties, Applications”, Marcel Dekker,Inc,1993.
5. Brian cantor, “Automotive Engineering: Light weight, functional and novel materials”, Taylor and Francis,1993.
6. Fujiwara. T and Ishii. Y, “Quasicrystals-Handbook of Metal physics”, Elsevier, 2008.
18YN32 MATERIALS SELECTION

3003
FACTORS AFFECTING SELECTION PROCESS: Technical and Non Technical Factors. Design process - types of design, design
requirements, Function, Material attributes. Displaying material properties using materials selection charts. Shape and
Manufacturing processes - Materials processing and design processes and their influence on design, Process attributes, Systematic
process selection, Process selection diagrams, Process cost, Energy consumption for production, Material costs, Availability,
Recyclability, Environmental consideration. (11)
MATERIALS SELECTION PROCESS: Materials selection methods: Screening, Ranking- weighted ranking, Performance indices-
Materials selection charts, Deriving property limits and material indices, Structural indices. Shape factors, Efficiency of standard
sections, Material limits for shape factors, Material indices which include shape, The microscopic or microstructural shape factor,
Co-selecting material and shape. (11)
CASE STUDIES ON KNOWN APPLICATIONS: Automobile materials (Body and Crank shaft), Marine structural materials (Hull and
Propeller), Aircraft structural materials (Wings and landing gears), Materials for space (Gas turbines and Nose), Materials for power
317
59th ACM 09.06.2018
generation machinery (Boilers and Pressure vessels), Materials for medical applications (Surgical knives and Bone replacements),
Chemical and petrochemical industries (Acid storage tanks and Fuel carrying pipes). (13)
MATERIALS SELECTION PROJECT: Students will carry out a materials selection exercise for a hypothetical design project,
identifying selection parameters and potential materials with the help of materials selection software. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ashby M F, “Materials Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth - Heineman, New York, 2005.
2. Dieter G E, “Engineering Design: A Materials and Processing Approach”, McGraw-Hill, 2000.
3. ASM Handbook, “Materials Selection and Design”, ASM international, Volume 20, USA, 2017.
4. Charles J A and Crane F A A, “Selection and Use of Engineering Materials”, Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd., 1989.
18YN33 POWDER METALLURGY

3003
COMMERCIAL METHODS OF POWDER PRODUCTION: atomization, electrolysis, sol-gel, novel powder preparation techniques -
self propagating high temperature synthesis, hydrothermal, solvent vaporization, Mechanical Alloying - preparation, composition,
recent developments in powder mixing and classification. (11)
POWDER CHARACTERISATION: individual particle characteristics, particle flow and packing characteristics – rheological
behaviour of slurries - Newtonian fluid, plastic flow, dilatant liquid, thixotropy, deflocculation, zeta potential, applications in ceramic
processing, Recent Developments. (11)
CONSOLIDATION: Dry pressing – powder flow and die filling, compaction behaviour, ejection and transfer, die wall effects, control
of compaction defects, cold isostatic Pressing. Casting process - slip casting, drying processes, mechanisms, defects. shaping,
surface finishing, glazing. firing – firing system, pre sintering processes, sintering and vitrification (11)
HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER IN powders, specific application to drying, Powder flow regimes: from fixed bed to fluidisation and
transport systems. sintering models and mechanisms. Factors controlling sintering kinetics, Recrystallisation and grain growth,
Pressure assisted sintering: Hot pressing and Hot Isostatic Pressing (HIP), Spark Plasma Sintering and Severe Plastic Deformation
Processing. Development of microstructure. Finishing operations: Carburizing, Carbonitriding, Nitriding , Hardening, Induction
Hardening Precipitation Hardening. Case Studies and P/M design. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Angelo PC, Subramanian R, “Powder Metallurgy”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2013.
2. Anish Upadhyaya, Gopal Shankar Upadhyaya, “Powder Metallurgy”, CRC Press, 2011.
3. Randall M.German, “Powder Metallurgy of iron and steel”, Metal Powder Industry, 1994.
4. Isaac Chang, Yuyuan Zhao, Advances in Powder Metallurgy”, Woodhead Publishing, 2013.
18YN34 COATING TECHNOLOGY

3003
ELECTROCHEMICAL TECHNIQUES: Chemical conversion coatings, phosphating, chromating, chemical colouring, anodizing of
aluminium alloys, deposition of copper, zinc, nickel and chromium - principles and practices, alloy plating, Electro deposition- Electro
composite plating. (10)
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS: Thermal spray- Plasma spray-HVOF- D Gun, laser cladding, diffusion coatings, Overlay
Coatings. (10)
THIN FILM COATINGS: Chemical Vapour Deposition, Physical Vapour Deposition- Electron Beam- Physical Vapour Deposition,
Pulsed Laser Deposition, Sputtering- magnetic sputtering, Electron beam evaporation, Diamond Like Coatings (DLC).
(10)
SOLUTION BASED COATING TECHNIQUES: Slurry coating - dip coating, spin coatings, spray coating – spray pyrolysis and
cladding, Specific Industrial applications. COATING CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES: Surface modification – wear, abrasion,
oxidation resistance. Coatings –measurement of coating thickness-porosity-hardness, fracture toughness, elastic modulus –
adhesion-bending strength-fracture strength- tensile strength, coating tribology, corrosion measurement, phase analysis and
microstructural evaluation. (15)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Lech Paw Lowski , Science and engineering of thermal spray coatings, John wiley and sons Inc., 1999
2. Klein, L., (Ed), Sol-Gel Technology for Thin Films, Fibres, Performs, Electronic and Speciality Shapes, 1988, Noyes
Publications, New Jersey, USA.
3. Bunshah.R.F. (Ed), Films and Coatings for Technology, Noyes Date Corp., New Jersey, USA,1982.
4. Sudarshan T S, „Surface modification technologies - An Engineer‟s guide‟, Marcel Dekker, Newyork, 1989
318
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18YN35 METALLURGICAL FAILURE ANALYSIS AND LIFE ASSESSMENT
3003
INTRODUCTION: Concepts of failure analysis, root-cause analysis, design deficiencies, material defects, manufacturing defects,
service life anomalies, charting methods of root cause analysis, categories of failures, failure prevention concepts; Practice of
failure analysis: Scope and planning, stages of failure analysis, tools and techniques, fractography (11)
FRACTURE & FAILURES: Mechanisms of deformation and fracture, ductile and brittle fractures, fatigue fracture, intergranular
fracture, thermo-mechanical fatigue, overloaded failures, fatigue failures creep and stress rupture failures; corrosion related
failures: forms of corrosion, hydrogen embrittlement, stress corrosion cracking, Wear failures: types of wear, impact wear, erosion
wear; distortion failures (11)
MANUFACTURING ASPECTS OF FAILURE: defects in weldments, castings, formed and heat treated components, failure related
to welding, casting, metal forming, and heat treatment; Case studies on analysis of industrial components like shafts, bearings,
springs, tools and dies, gears , pipelines, metallic orthopedic implants, components of boilers, pressure vessels, gas turbine
engines, automobile components, aircraft components (12)
STRUCTURAL LIFE ASSESSMENT METHODS: failure analysis and life assessment of structural components and equipment,
failure analysis diagrams, analysis methods for probabilistic life assessment, non destructive evaluation and life assessment,
fatigue life assessment, elevated temperature life assessment (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Becker .W.T and Shipley.R.J, “ASM Handbook Volume 11: failure analysis and prevention”, ASM International, USA, 2002.
2. Colangelo V J and Heiser F A, “Analysis of Metallurgical Failures”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., USA, 1987.
3. Das A K, “Metallurgy of Failure Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Professional, USA, 1997.
4. Charlie R B and Choudhury A, “Metallurgical Failure Analysis”, McGraw Hill, USA, 1993.
18YN36 MATERIALS MODELING

3003
CONCEPT OF SPECIFIC HEAT, ENTHALPY, ENTROPY AND FREE ENERGY - Maxwell‟s relations. Thermodynamics of pure
systems - Gibb‟s free energy change with temperature in a single component system - Clausius Clayperon equation - Surface
Energy & under cooling, Nucleation – homogeneous & heterogeneous nucleation. (10)
Thermodynamic parameters in a binary system – solution thermodynamics – ideal solution - configurational entropy – regular
solution model – chemical potential - free energy composition diagram - evolution of phase diagrams based on regular solution
model - quasichemical theory – Sub regular solution model. (10)
Thermodynamics and phase diagrams of multicomponent system - Redlitch-kister polynomial – muggianu and kohler extrapolation.
Crystallography in thermodynamics – crystal structure - Order and disorder structure – antisite defect and vacancies. Compound
energy formalism – Interstitial and substitutional phases – line and stoichiometric compounds – non – stoichiometric compounds.
CALPHAD modeling of non - metallic system. (12)
Brief introduction to experimental methods of determining thermodynamic parameters and phase diagrams. Phase diagram
determination by the diffusion couple technique. Solidification of pure metals and alloys – planar front and dendritic solidification.
Concepts of equilibrium solidification - scheil solidification – constitutional undercooling. (13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David A. Porter, Kenneth E. Easterling and Mohamed Sherif , “Phase Transformations in Metals and Alloys”, 3 rd Edition, CRC
Press, 2009.
2. David R. Gaskell, “Introduction to the Thermodynamics of Materials”, 5th Edition,CRC Press, 2008.
3. Saunders & Miodownik , “CALPHAD (Calculation of Phase Diagrams): A Comprehensive Guide”, 1st Edition,
Pergamman Press, 1998.
4. Suzana G. Fries and Bo Sundman, “Computational Thermodynamics: The Calphad Method, by Hans Lukas”,, Cambridge
18YN37 METAL ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

3003
INTRODUCTION - CAD & REVERSE ENGINEERING: Overview – History Classification - Rapid Prototyping Process Chain:
Fundamental Automated Processes, Process Chain-AM Technology in product development-Materials for Additive Manufacturing
Technology – Tooling - Applications. CAD & REVERSE ENGINEERING: Basic Concept – Digitization techniques – Model
Reconstruction – Data Processing for Additive Manufacturing Technology: CAD model preparation – Part Orientation and support
generation – Model Slicing –Tool path Generation – Softwares for Additive Manufacturing Technology: MIMICS, MAGICS.
(11)
LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Classification – Liquid based system – Stereo
lithography Apparatus (SLA)- Principle, process, advantages and applications- Solid ground curing (SGC) - Solid based system –
Fused Deposition Modeling - Principle, Process, advantages and applications, Laminated Object Manufacturing. Case studies: SLA,
FDM , LOM. (11)
POWDER BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Selective Laser Sintering – Principles of SLS process - Process,
advantages and applications, Three Dimensional Printing - Principle, process, advantages and applications- Laser Engineered Net
319
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Shaping (LENS), Electron Beam Melting. Introduction to Direct Rapid Tooling and Indirect Rapid tooling. Case studies: SLS, 3D
Printing, LENS. (11)
DESIGN FOR AM AND APPLICATIONS: Motivation, DFMA concepts and objectivess, AM unique capabilities, Exploring design
freedoms, Design tools for AM, Part Orientation, Removal of Supports, Hollowing out parts, Inclusion of Undercuts and Other
Manufacturing Constraining Features, Interlocking Features, Reduction of Part Count in an Assembly, Identification of markings/
numbers. Application: Material Relationship, Application in Design, Application in Engineering, Analysis and Planning, Aerospace
Industry, Automotive Industry, Jewelry Industry, Coin Industry. Application examples for aerospace, defense, automobile, RP
Medical and Bioengineering and general engineering industries. (12)
REFERENCES:
1. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for prototype development”, CRC
Press, 2007.
2. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006.
3. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”, CRC press, 2000.
4. Ian Gibson, David W. Rosen, Brent Stucker. Additive Manufacturing Technologies: Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital
Manufacturing, 2nd Ed. (2015),
5. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, Third Edition, World Scientific
Publishers, 2010.
6. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003.
18YN38 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS (MEMS)

3 003
MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS SCALING LAWS IN MINIATUIZATION: MEMS and microsystem products. Evaluation of
microfabrication. Microsystems and microelectronics. Applications of microsystems. Working principles of microsystems-
microsensors, microactuators, MEMS and microactuators, microaccelerometers.introduction to Scaling in geometry. Scaling in rigid
body dynamics. The trimmer force scaling vector-scaling in electrostatic forces, electromagnetic forces, scaling in electricity and
fluidic dynamics, scaling in heat conducting and heat convection. (11)
MATERIALS FOR MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS: Substrates and wafers-silicon as a substrate material, ideal substrates for
MEMS. Single crystal Silicon and wafers crystal structure. Mechanical properties of Si. Silicon compounds-SiO2, SiC, Si3N4 and
polycrystalline Silicon. Silicon piezoresistors. Gallium arsenside. Quartz-piezoelectric crystals. Polymers for MEMS. Conductive
polymers. (10)
ENGINEERING MECHANICS FOR MICROSYSTEMS DESIGN: Introduction. Static bending of thin plates-circular plates with edge
fixed, rectangular plate with all edges fixed and square plates with all edges fixed. Mechanical vibration. Resonant vibration.
Microaccelerometers-design theory and damping coefficients. Thermomechanics. Thermal stresses. Fracture mechanics-stress
intensity factors, fracture toughness and interfacial fracture mechanics. Viscosity of fluids-flow patterns, reynolds number. Basic
equation in continuum fluid dynamics. Laminar fluid flow in circular conduits. Computational fluid dynamics. Incompressible fluid
flow in microconducts-surface tension, capillary effect and micropumping. Fluid flow in submicrometer and nanoscale-rarefied gas,
Kundsen and Mach number and modelling of microgas flow. Heat conduction in multilayered thin films. Heat conduction in solids in
submicrometer scale. Thermal conductivity of thin films, heat conduction equation for thin films.
(11)
MICROSYSTEM FABRICATION PROCESS WITH MICROMANUFACTURING AND MICROSYSTEM PACKAGING::

Photolithography. Photoresist and applications. Light sources. Ion implanation. Diffusion process. Oxidation-thermal oxidation.
Silicon diode. Thermal oxidation rates. Oxide thickness by colour. Chemical vapour deposition-principle, reactants in CVD.
Enhanced CVD physical vapour deposition. Sputtering. Deposition by epitaxy. Etching-chemcial and plasma etching. Bulk
micromachining. Isotropic and anisotropic etching-wet etchants, etch stops, dry etching comparison of wet and dry etching. Surface
micromachining-process in general, problems associated in surface micromachining. The LIGA process-description, materials for
substrates and photoresists, electroplating, the SLIGA process. Microsystem packaging-general considerations. The three levels of
microsystem packaging-die level, device level and system level. Essential packaging technologies-die preparation-surface bonding,
wire bonding and sealing. Three dimensional packaging. Assembly of Microsystems - selection of packaging materials.
(13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture“, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi,
2002.
2. Mark Madou “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC Press, New York, 1997.
3. Julian W Gardner, “Microsensors: Principles and Applications”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2001.
4. Sze S M, “Semiconductor Sensors”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1994.
5. Chang C Y and Sze S M, “VLSI Technology”, McGraw Hill, New York, 2000.
18YN39 LASER AND PLASMA PROCESSING OF MATERIALS

3003
PRINCIPLES OF INDUSTRAL LASERS: Principle of laser generation, optical resonators, LASER beam modifications and types of
industrials lasers. LASER metallurgy -Process microstructure- fusion zone, zone of partial melting, HAZ, discontinuities- porosity,
cracking, lack of fusion, incomplete penetration and undercut. (13)
320
59th ACM 09.06.2018
LASER WELDING AND SURFACE MODIFICATION : Process mechanisms (Key hole and Plasmas) – operating characteristics –
process variations – imperfections- industrial applications –recent developments LASER surface heat treatment, LASER surface
melting- Glazing, LASER direct Metal deposition– LASER surface alloying, LASER surface cladding and Hard coatings, LASER
physical vapour deposition and LASER shock peening. (12)
PRINCIPLES AND SURFACE MODIFICATION OF PLASMA: Principle of Plasma generation, transferred and non-transferred arc
torches and their characteristics. Plasma hardening, plasma Nitriding, plasma spray coatings, plasma transferred arc deposition.
(11)
THIN FILM COATING AND OTHER TECHNIQUES: Plasma assisted PVD techniques – evaporation, sputtering, ion implantation.
Plasma assisted CVD techniques .Plasma Arc welding and cladding process. Plasma cutting (9)
References:
1. Ellijah kannatey-Asibu, Jr,” Principles of Laser Material Processing “, John Wiley & Sons,2009.
2. Jacques Perriere, Eric Millon, Eric Fogarassy,” Recent Advances in Laser Processing of Materials” Elsevier, 2006
3. Joseph M. Proud, “Plasma Processing of Materials: Scientific Opportunities and Technological Challenges” National Research
Council, Washington, 1991.
4. Mohan Sankaran R, “Plasma processing of Nanomaterials” CRC Press,2012.
5. Kenneth Budinski G, "Surface Engineering for Wear Resistance", Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliff, 1990.
18YN40 PROCESS MODELLING

3003
Introduction to modelling and simulation. Fundamentals of modelling and simulation, mathematical and physical basis of modelling,
methodology.Examples of metallurgical and materials processes, simultaneous solutions. Mass and energy balances, materials
properties and simultaneous solutions. Basic steps of modeling and simulation, modeling approaches, Modeling and Simulation in
Materials Science, Application of the methodology for materials behavior and processing problems.
(11)
Description of important extractive metallurgical processes (roasting, smelting, leaching, precipitation, electrolysis and refining)
steps in their mathematical modelling. Concepts of batch and continuous processes in metallurgy.Determining the effect of
controlling parameters, such as composition, temperature and particle size, concentration, pressure, gas/liquid/solid flow rate,
stirring speed, current density and their Mathematical modeling. Case Studies on Modeling and Simulation of important
metallurgical Processes. Melting of Scrap, Refining of Melt, Solidification, Re-heating, Heat Treatment, Fluid Flow in Laddle and
Tundish. (12)
Modelling of forming operations: Simple numerical models- Slab Method and the Upper Bound Method- Modelling of metal casting
processes shape casting, direct chill casting and continuous casting (11)
Modelling of Welding processes: Thermal modeling - single domain approach - handling phase change- Analytical solutions, Fluid
flow in the weld pool-Zones in a weldment, Numerical Solutions- Solute segregation profiles. Microstructure evolution Defects in
fusion welds, Dissimilar welding- Integrated approach (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES
1. Barber Z.H., “Introduction of Materials Modeling”, Maney Publishing, 2005.
2. King P.R., “Modeling and Simulation of Mineral Processing Systems”, ISBN:0-7506- 4884-8, 2001.
3. Mosterman P. J., “Realtime simulation technologies: principles, methodologies, and applications”, (Eds. Popovici K., Mosterman
P. J.), Taylor & Francis Group, LLC., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA. ISBN : 978-1-4398-4665-0, 2013
4. Ghasem N., “Computer methods in chemical engineering”, Taylor & Francis Group, LLC., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, USA.
ISBN : 978-1-439-84999-6, 2012.
5. Guo X.Z. (Ed.), “Multiscale Materials Modelling: Fundamental and Applications”, Woodhead Publishing Limited, Cambridge,
2007.
18YN41 QUALITY SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

3003
FOUNDATIONS OF TQM: Understanding quality, quality, competitiveness and customers, building quality chains, managing
quality, quality in all functions, models and frame works for total quality management, Early TQM frameworks - quality award
models - the four Ps and three Cs of TQM - a new model for TQM. Leadership And Commitment: The TQM approach - commitment
and policy - creating or changing the culture - effective leadership - excellence in leadership. (10)
DESIGN FOR QUALITY: Design, innovation and improvement - the design process - quality function deployment (QFD) - the house
of quality - specifications and standards - design in the service sectors - failure mode effect and criticality analysis (FMECA) - The
links between good design and managing the business. (10)
PROCESS REDESIGN / ENGINEERING: Reengineering the organization - process for redesign - the redesign process - the people
and the leaders. Human Resource Management: Introduction - strategic alignment of HRM policies - effective communication -
employee empowerment and involvement - training and development - teams and team work - review, continuous improvement and
conclusions - organizing people for quality - quality circles or kaizen teams. (13)
COMMUNICATIONS, INNOVATION AND LEARNING: Communicating the quality strategy - communicating the quality message -
communication, learning, education and training - a systematic approach to education and training for quality - turning educations
and training into learning - the practicalities of sharing knowledge and learning. Implementing TQM- quality And Environmental
Management Systems: Benefits of ISO registration - ISO 9000 series of standards - sector specific standards - ISO 9001
321
59th ACM 09.06.2018
requirements - - ISO 14000 series standards - concepts of ISO 14001 - requirements of ISO 14001 - relationship between health
and safety. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Besterfield D H et al, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Private Limited, 2004.
2. Oakland J S, “Total Quality Management - Text with Cases”, Butterworth - Heinemann - An Imprint of Elseiver, First Indian
Print, 2003.
AUDIT COURSES
18YN81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18YN82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

322
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING
(2018 REGULATIONS)
I SEMESTER
Statistical Quality Control and Design of 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP01
Experiments
18PP02 Computer Numerical Control and Robotics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18PP03 Futuristic Materials and their Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP04 Geometric Modeling for Manufacturing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18PP05 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
Object Computing and Data Structures EEC
18PP51 0 0 4 2 50 50 100
Laboratory
18PP81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 26 hrs 14 8 4 20 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
Finite Element Applications in PC
18PP06 3 2 0 4 50 50 100
Manufacturing
18PP07 Engineering Economics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP08 Automation in Manufacturing 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP09 Advanced Metrology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP_ Elective - 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP_ Elective - 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP52 Manufacturing and Metrology Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18PP61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 100 0 100 EEC
18PP82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 29 hrs 17 4 8 23 450 350 800
III SEMESTER
18PP_ Elective - 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP_ Elective - 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP_ Elective - 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP_ Elective - 6 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Automation and Smart Manufacturing PC
18PP53 0 0 4 2 50 50 100
Laboratory
18PP71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 EEC
Total 22 hrs 12 0 10 17 350 250 600
IV SEMESTER
18PP72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
18PP21 Production and Operations Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP22 Mechanics of Robot 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP23 Tool Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP24 Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP25 Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP26 Optimization Techniques 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP27 Non-Traditional Machining Processes 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP28 Product Development Strategies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP29 Image Processing and Machine Vision 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP30 Mechatronics System 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP31 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP32 Industrial Internet of Things 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP33 Lean Six Sigma 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP34 Mechanics of Polymer Matrix Composites 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP35 Industrial Ergonomics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP36 Precision Machining 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP37 Research Methodology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
323
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ONE CREDIT COURSES OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION

ENGINEERING
18PK01 Process Improvement and Product Design through Lean Six Sigma
18PK02 Design and Optimization Technology
18PK03 Theory of Constraints and its Thinking Process
18PK04 Press Tool Design
18PK05 Injection Mold Design
18PK06 Advanced Metrology and Calibration
SCIENCE ELECTIVES
18ID01 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS)

18ID02 Sensors for Engineering Applications
18ID03 Laser Processing of Materials
18ID04 Plasma Technology
18ID05 Nanosensor and its Applications
18ID06 Nano Magnetism and Spintronics
18ID07 Corrosion Science and Engineering
18ID08 Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis
18ID09 Polymeric Materials
HUMANITIES AND LANGUAGES ONE CREDIT COURSES

18OK02 Indian Ethos and Human Values
18OK04 Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting
324
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME PRODUCTION ENGINEERING (PART TIME)
(2018 REGULATIONS)

I SEMESTER
Statistical Quality Control and Design of 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP01
Experiments
18PP02 Computer Numerical Control and Robotics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18PP03 Futuristic Materials and their Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP51 Object Computing and Data Structures Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18PP81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 16 hrs 8 4 4 12 200 200 400
II SEMESTER
18PP07 Engineering Economics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP08 Automation in Manufacturing 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP09 Advanced Metrology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PP52 Manufacturing and Metrology Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18PP82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 14 hrs 8 2 4 11 200 200 400
III SEMESTER
18PP04 Geometric Modeling for Manufacturing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18PP05 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18PP61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 100 0 100 EEC
Total 14 hrs 6 4 4 10 200 100 300
IV SEMESTER
18PP06 Finite Element Applications in Manufacturing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18PP_ Elective - 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP_ Elective - 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP53 Automation and Smart Manufacturing Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
Total 15 hrs 9 2 4 12 200 200 400
V SEMESTER
18PP_ Elective - 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP_ Elective - 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP_ Elective - 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP_ Elective - 6 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 EEC
Total 18 hrs 12 0 6 15 300 200 500
VI SEMESTER
18PP72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
18PP21 Production and Operations Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP22 Mechanics of Robot 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP23 Tool Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP24 Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP25 Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP26 Optimization Techniques 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP27 Non-Traditional Machining Processes 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP28 Product Development Strategies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP29 Image Processing and Machine Vision 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP30 Mechatronics System 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP31 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP32 Industrial Internet of Things 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP33 Lean Six Sigma 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP34 Mechanics of Polymer Matrix Composites 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP35 Industrial Ergonomics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
325
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18PP36 Precision Machining 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PP37 Research Methodology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
ONE CREDIT COURSES OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
SCIENCE ELECTIVES


326
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18PP01 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL AND DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS

2203
quality variation, statistical basis of control charts - control charts for variables - 𝑋, R, and s charts - control charts for attributes
– p, np, c and u charts. (8+7)
ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING: Lot-by-Lot acceptance sampling for attributes – single sampling plans for attributes, double,
multiple and sequential sampling plans, acceptance sampling by variables - chain sampling, continuous sampling, skip-lot
sampling plans. (8+7)
DESIGN OF EXPERIMENT: Fundamentals of experimental design, guidelines for designing experiments, analysis of variance,
experiments with one factor, completely randomized design, randomized block design, factorial experiments, Latin square
design. (8+7)
regression models, confidence interval and hypothesis testing in multiple regression, 2-level factorial design – 23 design,
general 2k design, single replication of 2k design, design for fitting second order models – class of central composite design.
(8+7)
Total L: 32 + T:28 = 60
REFERENCES:
4. Ronald E Walpole, Raymond H Myers, Sharon L Myers and Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientists, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2016.
18PP02 COMPUTER NUMERICAL CONTROL AND ROBOTICS

3204
CONSTRUCTION of CNC MACHINES: Types of CNC machines, construction of CNC Machines - structures, guide ways, ball
screws, turret, ATC, APC, Control system: Feedback devices, spindle and feed drives, servo motors, control system, types of
interpolators, maintenance, testing of CNC machines. (12)
PROGRAMMING of CNC MACHINES: Cutting Tools for CNC machines, ISO and EIA standards, G codes, M codes, turning
centre programming, machining centre programming, canned cycles, programming for industrial components, generation of
CNC program using CAM software. (12)
ROBOTICS: History and present status, Law of robotics, robot definitions, robotic systems and robot anatomy, humans
systems and robotics, specifications of robots, safety measures in robotics. (10)
ROBOT KINEMATICS: Forward and reverse kinematics, Robot Drives, End effectors, Sensors and application of robots in
industrial environment, artificial Intelligence. (11)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Facing and Turning exercise using CNC - Horizontal Turning Centre
2. Linear, Circular interpolation - Face and End milling exercise using CNC – VMC Machine
3. Profile milling exercises incorporating sub programs in CNC VMC
4. Canned cycle exercises for CNC VMC
5. Determination of maximum and minimum position of links using a Robot
6. Estimation of accuracy, repeatability and resolution of a robot.
Total L: 45+ T: 30 =75
REFERENCES:
1. Mikell P Groover, Mitchel Weiss and Roger N Nagel, “Industrial Robotics”, McGraw Hill, 2017
2. Deb S.R. and ‎Sankha Deb, “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
3. Michael Mattson, “CNC Programming: Principles and Applications”, Cengage Learning India P. Ltd., New Delhi, 2014.
4. Hans B Kief Helmut A Roschiwal, “CNC Handbook” McGraw Hill Company, New York, 2013.
5. HMT, “Mechatronics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
6. Peter Smid, “CNC Programming Hand Book”, Industrial Press Inc., New York, 2007.
18PP03 FUTURISTIC MATERIALS AND THEIR PROCESSING

3003
AUTOMOBILE MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE: Requirement of Automotive materials, Aluminium alloys, High
performance Steels, Intermetallic Titanium alloys, Magnesium alloys, Ti-MMC, High performance polymers, Automotive
composites -GFRP, CFRP. Additive manufacturing materials, High pressure die casting, Laser and Electron beam welding,
Additive Manufacturing techniques- SLS, SLM, Stereolithography, Inkjet printing. (12)
AEROSPACE MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE: Anatomy of an aircraft, Distribution of material usage in airframe,
Aluminium, Magnesium, Titanium and steel alloys, Ceramics , Composites - GFRP, Carbon and graphene composites, Glare,
Digital composites – cellular solids, Metal foams. Laser beam welding and friction stir welding, Additive Manufacturing of
327
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Ceramics, Automatic tape laying, automatic fibre placement, Resin Infusion, Resin Transfer Moulding and Resin Film Infusion
processes. (12)
ENERGY MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE: Need for high performance energy materials, Carbon nanostructures: CNTs,
Graphenes, and Fullerenes for energy conversion and storage. Nano-materials for Solar Cells Applications, Next generation
battery materials - Li-ion, Ni-Metal Hydride and Ni-Hydrogen. Synthesis of Nanostructures- Top down and Bottom up
approaches, Physical methods - high energy ball milling, Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD), Laser ablation, sputter deposition
methods (Qualitative), Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD). Chemical methods-Sol-gel technique, Hydrothermal synthesis. (11)
HEALTHCARE MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE: Human Implants and Prosthetics, Metallic, ceramic and polymer implant
materials, Biocomposites, Metamaterials. Laser cutting of metal tubes, selective laser melting, additively manufacturing of
biomaterials, micromachining and micro moulding. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bhushan Bharat, “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, Springer, 2017
2. Sohel Rana and Raul Fangueiro, “Advanced Composite Materials for Aerospace Engineering: Processing, Properties and
Applications”, Woodhead Publishing, 2016.
3. Rowe Jason, “Advanced Materials in Automotive Engineering”, Woodhead Publishing, 2016.
4. Cantor Brian, Hazel Assender and Patrick Grant, “Aerospace Materials”, CRC Press, 2015.
5. Park Joon and Roderic S. Lakes, “Biomaterials: an Introduction”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2007.
6. Cao Guozhong, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties & Applications”, Imperial College Press, 2004.
18PP04 GEOMETRIC MODELING FOR MANUFACTURING

3204
ELEMENTS OF GEOMETRIC MODELING: Introduction, Definition, Introduction to C graphics, Mathematical foundations

(linear algebra, geometry, transformations, set theory), analytic and synthetic curves, Bezier and B-Spline curves, analytic and
synthetic surfaces. (12)
SOLID MODELING: Fundamentals of solid modeling, boundary representation, constructive solid geometry, parametric solid
modeling, features of solid Modeling Packages. (10)
FEATURE-BASED PRODUCT MODELING AND RECOGNITION: Introduction to manufacturing features, Role of features in
design and manufacturing, Feature creation techniques, Feature - properties, Recognizing manufacturing features and feature
topologies (11)
AUTOMATED PROCESS PLANNING: Introduction to Process Planning, Approaches to Computer Aided Process Planning,
Process ontology, Automated Feature Extraction, Ruled based methods, case based methods (12)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Programming for generation of Line using C-graphics
2. Programming for generation of Circle using C-graphics
3. Programming for generation of Ellipse using C-graphics
4. Programming for generation of Geometric Transformation (Scaling, Translation, Rotation) using C-graphics
5. Programming for generation of Bezier Curve using C-graphics
6. Programming for generation of Beizer Surface C-graphics
Total L: 45+ T: 30 =75

REFERENCES:
1. Ibrahim Zeid and Sivasubramanian R, “CAD/CAM: Theory & Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
2. Agoston and Max K, “Computer Graphics & Geometric Modeling”, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2005.
3. Gerald Farin, “Curves and Surfaces for CAGD - A Practical Guide”, 5th Edition, Morgan-Kaufmann, 2002.
4. Shah J J and Mantyla M, “Parametric and Feature-based CAD/CAM”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1995.
18PP05 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY

3204
DFM APPROACH: DFM approach, guidelines, standardization – comparison, design for assembly, DFA index, Cumulative
effect of tolerances - Worst case method, root sum square method, dimensions following truncated normal distributions,
Tolerance synthesis, non linear tolerance tolerance analysis, tolerance cost relationships. Process capability, Interchangeable
part manufacture and selective assembly, deciding the number of groups - Control of axial play - introducing secondary
machining operations, laminated shims, examples. (13)
GEOMETRIC DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING: Introduction to Model Based Definition, ISO 16792 and ASME Y 14.41
standards – Standards for Geometric tolerance ASME Y 14.5 and ISO 1101 - Examples for application of geometric tolerances
- True Position Theory - Comparison between co-ordinate and convention method of feature location, tolerancing and true
position tolerancing, virtual size concept, floating and fixed fasteners, projected tolerance zone, zero true position tolerance,
functional gauges, paper layout gauging, compound assembly, examples. Datums, datum feature, simulate datum feature,
datum targets - Grouped datum system with spigot and recess, pin and hole - computation of translational and rotational
accuracy, geometric analysis and applications. (12)
FORM DESIGN OF CASTINGS AND WELDMENTS: Redesign of castings based on parting line considerations, minimising
core requirements, redesigning cast members using weldments, form design aspects of sheet metal components. (10)
TOLERANCE CHARTING: Operation sequence for typical shaft type of components. Preparation of process drawings for
different operations, tolerance worksheets and centrality analysis, examples design features to facilitate machining, datum
328
59th ACM 09.06.2018
features - functional and manufacturing, component design - machining considerations, redesign for manufacture, examples –
design features to facilitate machining, datum features - functional and manufacturing, component design-machining
considerations, redesign for manufacture, examples. (10)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Tolerances stack up analysis of a 2D assembly.
2. Problems on Model I and Model II type selective assembly.
3. Redesign of casting.
4. Redesign for machining
5. Tolerance charting.
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Alex Krulikowski, “Fundamentals of Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing”, Delmar Cengage Learning International
Edition, 2012.
2. Bryan R.Fischer, "Mechanical Tolerance Stackup and Analysis", CRC Press, 2011.
3. Paul J Drake, “Dimensioning and Tolerancing Handbook”, McGraw Hill Publications, 1999
4. Creveling C M, "Tolerance Design - A Hand Book for Developing Optimal Specifications", Addison Wesley Longman
5. Harry Peck, “Designing for Manufacture”, Pitman Publications, 1983.
6. James G Bralla, “Hand Book of Product Design for Manufacturing”, McGraw Hill Publications, 1983.
18PP51 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY

0042
LABORATORY COMPONENT
Object Computing (Using Python)
Implementation of the following problems:

1. Implementation of classes and object for simple arithmetic operations.
2. Implementation of string manipulations.
3. Implementation of objects using list, set and dictionary.
4. Implementation of parameter passing mechanisms.
5. Implementation of user defined functions
6. Implementation of constructors and destructors.
7. Implementation of inheritance.
8. Implementation of polymorphism.
Data Structures (Using Python)
1. Program using arrays.

2. Representation of Sparse & dense Matrix using arrays.
3. Implementation of various sorting algorithms
4. Implementation of Stacks.
5. Implementation of queue.
6. Implementation of Linked Lists: Singly linked, doubly linked and Circular lists and applications.
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Vijayalakshmi Pai G A., “Data Structures and Algorithms: Concepts Techniques and Applications”, McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. Goodrich T. and‎Roberto Tamassia, “Data Structures and Algorithms in Python”, Wiley, Michael, 2016.
4. Mark Summerfield, “Programming in Python 3: A Complete Introduction to the Python Language”, Addison-Wesley
Professional, 2009.
5. Martin C. Brown, “PYTHON: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, 2001.
6. Allen B Downey, “Think Python”, O’Reilly, 2012.
II SEMESTER
18PP06 FINITE ELEMENT APPLICATIONS IN MANUFACTURING

3204
FINITE ELEMENT PROCEDURES: Need for FEA in manufacturing, Concept of elements, 1D, 2D and 3D models element
connectivity, Stiffness matrix, Shape functions, Review of numerical methods to solve PDEs, concepts of Variational calculus,
Plane stress and Plane strain models in manufacturing problems, Understanding manufacturing processes as an interaction of
material, stress and strain energy, Derivation of strain rate matrix. (11)
MODELING OF FORMING: General governing equations for metal forming, Modeling of forging process, derivation of
governing equation and boundary conditions, extending forging process model to other forming processes, FEA based case
studies. (12)
MODELING OF CASTING PROCESS: Modeling of solidification process, types of elements used for casting problems,
boundary and initial conditions, FEA based case studies. (10)
MODELING OF WELDING PROCESS & MACHINING PROCESS: Modeling of arc welding problem using FEA, moving heat
source, boundary conditions, friction models in machining process, finite element formulation of chip formation, Application of
Boundary Conditions, Solution Procedure and Evaluation of Secondary Quantities. (12)
329
59th ACM 09.06.2018
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Static structural analysis of a 1D bar problem.
2. Steady-state thermal analysis of a 1D bar.
3. Dynamic analysis of a sheet metal forming process.
4. Nonlinear transient analysis of solidification of casting process.
5. Static structural analysis of weld joints under thermal expansion.
Total L: 45 + T: 30 =7 5
REFERENCES:
1. Prakash M. Dixit and Uday S. Dixit, “Modeling of Metal Forming and Machining Processes”, Springer – Verlag London
Limited, UK, 2008.
2. Reddy J N., “Introduction to Finite Element Method”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Sindo Kou, “Transport Phenomena and Materials Processing”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 1996.
4. Edward R Champion, “Finite Element Analysis in Manufacturing Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1992.
5. Shiro Kobayashi, Soo Ikoh and Taylan Altan, “Metal Forming and the Finite Element Method”, Oxford and IBH Publishing,
New Delhi, 1989.
6. Owen D R J and Himton E., “Finite Elements in Plasticity, Theory and Practice”, Pinevidge Press Limited, U.K, 1980.
18PP07 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS

3003
INTEREST AND TIME VALUE OF MONEY: Present economic policy, liberalization, privatization, and globalization, scope for
industrial growth, Cash-flow diagram, simple interest, compound interest, single payments, uniform series payments, interest
factors and interest tables, nominal and effective interest rates, continuous compounding, and uniform continuous payments.
Methods for evaluation of alternatives: Present worth comparison - equal, unequal lived assets, study period, assets with infinite
life, capitalized cost and bond valuation. Equivalent uniform annual cost comparison, Rate of return comparison. (12)
REPLACEMENT ANALYSIS: Review of conventional approach, group replacement, analysis with time value accounting,
replacement due to deterioration, obsolescence, inadequacy, economic life for cyclic replacements, current salvage value of the
defender, defender and challenger with different lives, additional one year assessment. Depreciation: reasons, depreciation
accounting, causes of declining value, Methods of depreciation. (11)
COST MANAGEMENT: Cost structure of a product - direct, indirect cost - overheads - factory, administrative, selling and
distribution overheads – absorption - Target costing. Cost, volume, profit analysis: Analysis with time value accounting, linear,
non-linear, multi product break even analysis. Project management, PERT - CPM, crashing, cost system. Risk and multi stage
sequential decision analysis: Recognizing risk, including risk in economic analysis, expected value, payoff table, decision tree,
discounted decision tree. (11)
PROJECT FEASIBILITY ANALYSIS: Case study, report preparation. Marketing feasibility: Types of market, identification of
investment opportunities, market and demand analysis, forecasting demand, forecast control, secondary sources of
information. Technical feasibility: QFD, Product design, concept of concurrent engineering; plant design, make vs buy
decisions; value analysis, FAST approach. Financial feasibility: Means of financing, financial institutions, all India, state level;
Profitability: cash flows of a project, financial leverage of a business. Tax factors in investment analysis, effects of inflation in
economic analysis. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. William G Sullivan et al., “Engineering Economy”, Pearson Education Inc., 2015.
2. John A White et al, “Principles of Engineering Economic Analysis”, John Wiley and Sons, 2012.
3. Leland T Blank and Anthony J Tarquin, “Engineering Economy”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2012.
4. James L Riggs, David D Bedworth and Sabah U Randhawa, “Engineering Economics”, McGraw Hill Book Company,
2011.
5. Prasanna Chandra, “Projects - Preparation, Appraisal and Implementation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
18PP08 AUTOMATION IN MANUFACTURING

2203
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION: Historical perspective of industrial automation - Origin - Evolution, current and future trends –
Automation strategies and principles – Production concepts and Mathematical models. (6)
TRANSFER LINES AND ASSEMBLY: Automated flow lines, buffers, part feeding systems, quantitative analysis of transfer
lines and assembly systems. Material handling - AGV, AS/RS. Automated inspection. (7)
SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS: Contact and non contact measurement of presence, displacement, temperature, velocity,
acceleration, vibration, force, pressure, liquid flow. Fiber optics and Laser in measurement. (8)
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS: Evolution - Architecture - Scanning principle - different types of I/O modules -
Interfacing real world devices with PLC - Communication possibilities - Software development: Features, different
methodologies and strategies adopted for logic development. Basics of HMI and SCADA systems. (9)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Measurement of temperature using thermocouple, thermistor and RTD
2. Measurement of displacement using LVDT
3. Position and velocity measurement using encoders
4. Force, Pressure and vibration measurement
5. Exercises using PLC controls
6. Interfacing sensors with PC
330
59th ACM 09.06.2018
7. Use of Automation Studio software
8. Study of modularity in production systems
Total: L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. Frank D Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, McGraw Hill Book, company, 2016.
2. Mikell P Groover, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall, 2015.
3. Charles H Roth Jr, “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing house, 2013.
4. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2011.
5. Nanua Singh, “Systems Approach to Computer-Integrated Design and Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons, 1996.
18PP09 ADVANCED METROLOGY

3003
CALIBRATION AND EVALUATION OF UNCERTAINTY: Measurement principle, calibration, standards, environmental

conditions required, traceability of measurement, calibration procedure for vernier calliper, micrometer, dial gauge, slip gauges
and surface plate, evaluation of uncertainty of measurement, Inter-laboratory comparisons and proficiency testing. (10)
FORM MEASUREMENT AND COORDINATE METROLOGY: Computational metrology, types of filter used in surface
roughness measuring instruments and form measuring instruments, Geometric data fitting: Least-square best-fit line, plane and
circle, measurement of straightness, flatness and circularity errors. COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE: Need, types of
CMM, modes of operation, types of probe, probe calibration, dimensional measurement in CMM, reverse engineering
applications, computer-aided inspection planning (CAIP). (12)
NON-CONTACT MEASUREMENT SYSTEM: MACHINE VISION SYSTEM: Need, applications, algorithms for vision based
inspection. LASER METROLOGY: Interferometry, measurement of displacement, flatness, parallelism and gauge block
calibration. MICRO AND NANO METROLOGY: Atomic Force Microscopy, Scanning Electron Microscopy and scanning white
light interferometry. (13)
MODEL BASED DEFINITION: Introduction to model based definition, digital product definition data, creation of model based
definition model, generation of probe path planning for CMM. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Connie Dotson and Roger Harlow, “Fundamentals of Dimensional Metrology”, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Gupta S. V., “Measurement Uncertainties: Physical Parameters and Calibration of Instruments”, Springer Berlin
Heidelberg, 2014.
3. Herron J.B., “Re-Use Your CAD: The Model-Based CAD Handbook”, Action Engineering, 2013
4. Horst Czichos, Tetsuya Saito and Leslie Smith, “Springer Handbook of Metrology and Testing”, Springer, 2011.
5. Bala Muralikrishnan and ‎Jayaraman Raja, “Computational Surface and Roundness Metrology”, Springer, 2008.
6. Alexander Hornberg, “Handbook of Machine Vision”, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
18PP51 MANUFACTURING AND METROLOGY LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on relevant equipment/software for a duration of 10
hours. After this orientation, each student is expected to formulate and complete an activity of interest which has to be derived
from the orientation programme under the guidance of a faculty. The details like background, problem definition, state of
technology/knowledge in that area by a literature review (minimum 5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that
can be used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the
semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 20 hours.
Topics for orientation programme
1. Exercise on metal forming

2. Exercise on Plastic Injection Moulding
3. Manufacturing of components by subtractive rapid prototyping/ 3D printing
4. Exercise on welding – ultrasonic, TIG
5. Exercise on electro discharge machining
6. Measurement using dynamometer and accelerometer
7. Wear Measurement using Pin on Disc apparatus
8. Dimensional and Form measurements using CMM
9. Computer aided inspection using Machine Vision System
10. Measurement of surface roughness parameters using surface roughness tester
Total P: 60
18PP61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Every student shall make a technical presentation on an appropriate topic allotted by the department and submit a report on
dates announced by the department. The seminar and the report will be evaluated by a review committee constituted by the
HoD.
331
59th ACM 09.06.2018
A minimum of two industrial visits are to be arranged as part of the course and the candidates are expected to make a
presentation of their learnings in the industrial visit. There will be a viva-voce examination on the dates announced by the
department to verify the depth of understanding of the candidate in both the industrial visits and the technical topic.
Total P: 60
III SEMESTER
18PP52 AUTOMATION AND SMART MANUFACTURING LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on relevant equipment/software for a duration of 20
technology/knowledge in that area by a good literature review (5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that can be
used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the
1. Simulation of pneumatic sequential circuit along with fringe conditions

2. Simulation of electro pneumatic sequential circuit
3. Simulation of PLC based sequential circuit
4. Simulation of hydraulic circuits using software
5. Exercise on Modular Manufacturing System – DIY kits
6. IIoT Exercise 1 (CNC machines)
7. IIoT Exercise 2 (Energy monitoring)
8. IIoT Exercise 3 (Injection moulding machine)
9. IIoT Exercise 4 (Hydraulic Press)
10. IIoT Exercise 5 (Modular Manufacturing System)
Total P: 60
18PP71 PROJECT WORK I

0063
1. Identification of a real life problem in thrust areas
2. Developing a mathematical model for solving the above problem
3. Finalisation of system requirements and specification
4. Proposing different solutions for the problem based on literature survey
5. Future trends in providing alternate solutions
6. Consolidated report preparation
Total P: 90
IV SEMESTER
18PP72 PROJECT WORK II
0 0 28 14
I. Problem Identification
1. A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree)
2. List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints
3. Cost benefit analysis
4. Time Line of activities
II. A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any)]
III. A presentation including the following:
1. Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both)

2. Testing and Validation of the developed system
3. Learning in the Project
IV. Consolidated report preparation

Total P: 420
332
59th ACM 09.06.2018
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES (SIX TO BE OPTED)
18PP21 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

3003
CAPACITY PLANNING: Long-range capacity planning, Economies of scale, Facility location, Factors influencing facility
location, Single facility location problem, Multi facility location problem, Minimax location problem, Gravity location problem,
Euclidean distance location problem, Classification of layout, Systematic layout design procedure, CRAFT. (11)
PRODUCTION PLANNING AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT: Aggregate planning - graphical, heuristic and transportation
model, Development of a master production schedule, Make-to-stock, Assemble-to-order, Make-to-order/engineer-to-order,
Material requirement planning, Lot sizing in MRP, Manufacturing resource planning and Enterprise resource planning. Need for
inventory, Types of inventory, Continuous and periodic review policies, EOQ, EMQ models, Inventory model with purchase
discounts, Inventory models with uncertain demand and lead times, ABC analysis. (12)
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: Single machine models - SPT and EDD sequences, mean flow time, weighted mean flow
time, number of tardy jobs and mean tardiness, Parallel machine models - minimizing make span and weighted mean flow time,
Flow shop models - Johnson’s algorithm, Job shop models - branch and bound approach. Line balancing – Largest candidate
rule, Kilbridge and Wester’s method, Ranked positional weights method. (11)
LEAN PRODUCTION AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT: Elements of lean production, MRP Vs JIT, cycle time, takt time,
KANBAN, SMED, 5S, theory of constraints, Agile manufacturing, Maintenance management: Statistics of failure, Time to failure
and probability distributions, bath tub curve, Weibull’s probability distribution, reliability engineering, Preventive maintenance,
Total productive maintenance, Overall equipment effectiveness, Supply chain management: Definition, global optimization, bull-
whip effect, push-pull supply chain, delayed differentiation, downward substitution, product and process modularity, mass
customization. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano, “Operations and Supply Management”, McGraw
Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2013.
2. Panneerselvam R., “Production and Operations Management”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Jay Heizer, Barry Render and Jagadeesh Rajashekhar, “Operations Management”, Pearson Education, 2010.
4. Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier, “Operations Management”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
18PP22 MECHANICS OF ROBOT

3003
ROBOT: Definition - Robot Anatomy - Co-ordinate Systems, Work Envelope, types and classification - Specifications - Joint
Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load. Spatial transformations, Homogeneous coordinates, homogeneous transformation -
forward solution, inverse solution. (12)
JACOBIAN: Joint velocities, motion generation, singularity, static forces in the manipulator, transformations of velocities and
static forces in Cartesian space (11)
DYNAMICS: Newton’s equation, Euler’s equation, closed form dynamic equations, Lagrangian formulation, manipulator
dynamics in Cartesian space. (11)
TRAJECTORY GENERATION: Joint space, Cartesian space, collision free path generation, path planning. Mechanism design
– manipulator mechanism, actuation schemes, stiffness and compliance, position and force sensing. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mikell P Groover, “Industrial Robotics - Technology, Programming and Applications”, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
2. John Craig, “Introduction to Robotics, Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education, 2008.
3. Richaerd D Klafter, Thomas Achmielewski and MickaelNegin, “Robotic Engineering - An Integrated Approach”, Prentice
Hall India, New Delhi, 2001.
4. Richard Paul, “Robot Manipulators: Mathematics, Programming and Control”, MIT Press, 1981.
18PP23 TOOL DESIGN

3003
DESIGN OF CUTTING TOOLS: Cutting tool material, Single point cutting tool, Form tool, Hole making cutting tools, Milling
cutter, Broaching tool, Grinding wheel, ISO standard for inserts, Tool holders, Selection of inserts and tool holders for specific
applications, Automatic tool changers, Tool positioners and tool presetting in CNC machines. (11)
DESIGNOF JIGS AND FIXTURES: Principles of location, clamping and support, Drill bushes, General considerations for
design of jigs and fixtures, Types of drill jigs, Milling fixture, Turning fixture, Welding fixture, Modular fixture, Broaching fixture,
Grinding fixture, Design of drill jig and fixture. (12)
DESIGN OF PRESS TOOLS: Power presses, Press operations, Press tonnage, Elements of press tool die, Types of dies,
Clearance, Methods of reducing cutting forces, Strip layout, Selection of standard die set, Centre of pressure, Design of
blanking and piercing die, Sheet metal bending methods, Bending force, Bend allowance, Spring back, Design of bending die,
Drawing operations, Metal flow during drawing, Drawing force, Design of drawing die. (11)
333
59th ACM 09.06.2018
DESIGN OF INJECTION MOULD: Elements of mould, Types of injection mould, Mould material, Number of cavities, Selection
of mould and moulding machine, Parting line and surface, Feed system, Ejection system, Temperature control system, Design
of two plate and three plate mould. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Cyril Donaldson, George H LeCain, Goold V.C. and Joyjeet Ghose, “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Sanjay K Nayak, Pratap Chandra Padhi, Y Hidayathullah, “Fundamentals of Plastics Mould Design”, Tata McGraw Hill
Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Joshi P.H., “Jigs and Fixtures”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010.
4. Joshi P.H., “Press Tools Design and Construction”, S.Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
18PP24 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

3003
INTRODUCTION AND DATA PROCESSING FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING: Fundamentals of Additive Manufacturing
(AM), classifications of Additive Manufacturing systems, Information workflow in Additive Manufacturing, impact of AM on
Product development, reverse engineering - digitization techniques, model reconstruction, data Processing for Additive
Manufacturing, Additive Manufacturing data formats - STL Format, STL file problems, consequences of building a valid and
Invalid tessellated model, STL file repair. (10)
SOLID AND LIQUID BASED ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Principle, details of processes, process variables,
types, products, materials, advantages, applications and case studies: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM), Laminated Object
Manufacturing (LOM) – bonding mechanisms, Ultrasonic Consolidation (UC) – modeling of UC process, microstructures and
mechanical properties of UC parts, Polyjet printing. Stereolithography (SLA), Solid Ground Curing (SGC), Shape Deposition
Manufacturing (SDM), Ballistic Particle Manufacturing (BPM), Direct write technologies, JP-System 5. (13)
POWDER BASED AND OTHER ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS: Principle, details of processes, process variables,
types, products, materials, advantages, applications and case studies: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS) – Powder fusion
mechanisms in SLS, Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM), Powder based beam deposition processes,
Printing processes- Three Dimensional Printing (3DP) – droplet formation technology, printing process modeling. (12)
ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING APPLICATIONS AND RAPID TOOLING: Applications of additive manufacturing in aerospace
industry, automotive manufacturing industry, medical field – magics software. Rapid tooling – direct and indirect tooling, soft
tooling Vs hard tooling - investment casting, sand casting, permanent-mold casting, silicone rubber tooling, spray metal tooling,
and powder metallurgy tooling. Process optimisation - factors influencing accuracy- data preparation errors, part building errors,
errors in finishing, influence of part build orientation. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gibson I., Rosen D.W. and Stucker B., “Additive Manufacturing Methodologies: Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital
Manufacturing”, Springer, 2015.
2. Frank W. Liou, “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering Applications: A Tool Box for Prototype Development”, CRC Press,
2011.
3. Chua C.K., Leong K.F. and Lim C.S., “Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications”, 2nd Edition, World Scientific
Publishers, 2010.
4. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”, CRC press, 2005.
5. Pham D.T. and Dimov S.S., “Rapid Manufacturing”, Verlag, 2001.
18PP25 APPLIED HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS

3003
COMPONENTS OF FLUID POWER SYSTEMS: Pneumatic and hydraulics, Symbols of fluid power elements. Pumps and
compressors - types, selection. Cylinders - types, typical construction details. Valves - direction control, flow, pressure, types,
typical construction details. (11)
SPECIFICATIONS OF A FLUID POWER CIRCUIT: Selection of elements based on force, speed, travel and time. Sizing of
pipes, piping layout and accessories. Accumulators, intensifiers. Maintenance and troubleshooting of fluid power circuits. (11)
PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS DESIGN: General approach, travel step diagram. Sequential circuit design, cascade method, step
counter method. K.V. Mapping for minimization of logic equation, fringe condition modules. Typical industrial applications of
pneumatic systems: Metal working, handling, clamping, application with counters. (12)
ELECTRICAL CONTROL CIRCUITS: Electro-pneumatics, ladder diagram. PLC - construction, types, operation, programming.
PLC timers and counters. Servo and proportional valves - types, operation, application, hydro-mechanical servo systems. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David W Pessen, “Industrial Automation – Circuit Design and Components”, Wiley India, 2011.
2. Anthony Espisito, “Fluid Power with Application”, Pearson Education Private Limited, 2008.
3. Majumdar S R., “Oil Hydraulic Systems: Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited,
2003.
4. Majumdar S R., “Pneumatic Systems : Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited,
2003.
334
59th ACM 09.06.2018
5. Peter Rohner, “Fluid Power Logic Circuit Design - Analysis, Design Method and Worked Examples”, The Macmillan Press
Limited, 1979.
6. Werner Deppert and Kurt Stoll, “Pneumatic Controls : An Introduction to Principles”, Vogel-Druck Wurzburg, 1975.
18PP26 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

2203
UNCONSTRAINED NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING: Unimodal function, single variable optimization algorithms - exhaustive
search, region - elimination method - interval halving method – Fibonacci method. Multivariable optimization algorithms - Direct
search method - univariate method, pattern search methods - Hooke and Jeeves method, descend method- conjugate gradient
method. (8+7)
CONSTRAINED NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING: Characteristics of constrained problem – constrained optimization algorithms

- Khun-Tucker conditions, direct search methods – complex search and random search, linearized search techniques – cutting
plane method. (8+7)
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Principle of optimality, backward and forward recursion, calculus method of solution, tabular
method of solution, shortest-route problem, knapsack model. (8+7)
NONTRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHMS: Genetic Algorithm – Working Principle, Fitness function, GA operators –
differences and similarities between GA and traditional method – GA for constrained optimization. Simulated Annealing –
algorithm and examples. (8+7)
Total L: 32 + T: 28 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. David E Goldberg, “GA: In Search Optimization and Machine Learning”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research – An Introduction”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017.
3. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design, Algorithms and Examples”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
4. Singiresu S. Rao, “Engineering Optimization Theory and Practice”, New Age International, New Delhi, 2016.
5. Kambo N. S., “Mathematical Programming Techniques”, East-West Press, New Delhi, 2012.
18PP27 NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES

3003
MECHANICAL MACHINING PROCESSES: Abrasive jet machining, abrasive water jet machining, abrasive flow machining,
process variables, mechanism of material removal, process capabilities, applications and limitations. Ultrasonic Machining:
mechanics of cutting, process parameters, grain growing model, grain hammering model, analysis, capabilities. (12)
THEROMOELECTRIC PROCESSES: Electro Discharge Machining (EDM): principle, components and functions process
parameters, electrical circuit, material removal rate, process characteristics and application. Wire EDM: Principle,
characteristics and applications. Electron Beam Machining (EBM): Elements and their functions, process parameters, process
capabilities and applications. Laser beam machining (LBM): Laser production, types, process characteristics and applications.
Plasma Arc Machining (PAM): elements, plasma arc torches, parameters, process capabilities. (14)
CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO CHEMICAL MACHINING: Chemical machining (CM): Principle, masks, etchants, applications,
advantages and limitations. Electro chemical Machining (ECM): Principle, components and functions, process parameters,
material removal rate, inter electrode gap,tool design, electrolyte, applications and limitations. (7)
ADVANCED PROCESSES: Magneto Rheological Finishing (MRF), Magneto rheological Abrasive Flow Finishing (MRAFF) and
Magneto rheological Jet Finishing (MRJF). Micromachining, classifications, Electrochemical Micromachining. Hybrid processes
Electro Chemical Spark Micro Machining (ECSMM), equipments, process parameters, capabilities and applications. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gary F Benedict, “Non Traditional Manufacturing Process”, Routledge, 2017.
2. Vijay K Jain, “Advanced Machining Processes”, Allied Publications Private Limited, 2016.
3. JainVK, “Introduction to Micromachining”, Alpha Science International Ltd., 2014.
4. McGeoughJ A, “Advanced Methods of Machining”, Springer, 2011.
5. Hassan Abdel and Gaward El-Hofy, “Advanced Machining Processes”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2005.
6. James Brown, “Advanced Machining Technology Handbook”, McGraw Hill, 1998.
18PP28 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES

3003
CUSTOMER NEED GATHERING AND ESTABLISHING PRODUCT FUNCTION: Product development versus design, types
of design and redesign, S-curve, gathering customer needs, organizing and prioritizing customer needs, quality function
deployment- house of quality, establishing product function, FAST method, benchmarking and establishing engineering
specifications, product portfolios. (10)
CONCEPT DEVELOPMENT AND EMBODIMENT DESIGN: Information gathering, brain ball, C-sketch/6-3-5 method,
morphological analysis, -TRIZ- axiomatic design. concept selection - Pugh chart, weighted decision matrix ,analytic hierarchy
process, introduction to embodiment design –product architecture, configuration design, parametric design. Advanced methods
-system modeling, FMEA - linking fault states to system modeling, fault tree analysis. (12)
PHYSICAL PROTOTYPES AND EXPERIMENTATION: Types of prototypes, use of prototypes, rapid prototyping - technique,
classification and working principle, scale, dimensional analysis and similitude, physical model and experimentation - Design of
335
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Experiments (DOE), statistical analysis of experiments, product applications of physical modeling and DOE, design for
robustness. (12)
PRODUCT TEARDOWN AND REVERSE ENGINEERING: Overview, product teardown methods and applications. Reverse
engineering: reverse engineering phases, data collection, mesh reconstruction, surface fitting, computer vision - structured light
range imaging systems, reverse engineering hardware and software, applications of reverse engineering in automotive,
aerospace and medical industries. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, “Product Design - Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product Development”,
2. Vignesh Raja, Kiran J. Fernandes, Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective, Springer 2008
3. George E Dieter, “Engineering Design, A Materials and Processing Approach”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
4. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”, McGraw Hill, 2011.
18PP29 IMAGE PROCESSING AND MACHINE VISION

3003
DIGITAL IMAGES: Image formation, binary, gray and color images, steps in digital image processing, human vision and
machine vision, image sampling and quantization, image enhancement - gray level transformations, histogram processing,
image sharpening and smoothing, spatial and frequency domain filters, image restoration - noise models, noise reduction by
spatial and frequency domain filtering. (12)
IMAGE ANALYSIS: Image segmentation - edge and line detection, thresholding, region-based segmentation, image
representation, feature extraction, object recognition. Study of various image operations, 2D and 3D measurements. (10)
MACHINE VISION: Image sensing and acquisition, types of cameras and their principles, lightings, designing a machine vision
system- selection of lens, camera and illumination, laser vision system, software’s for image processing. (12)
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS: Machine vision in factory automation, dimensional inspection, defects identification, pattern
recognition applications, sorting of components, surface finish analysis, tool wear measurement, robot guidance, safety
monitoring. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Alexander Hornberg, “Handbook of Machine and Computer Vision: The Guide for Developers and Users”, John Wiley &
Sons, 2017.
2. Scott E Umbaugh, Digital Image Processing and Analysis: Human and Computer Vision Applications with CVIP tools,
CRC Press, 2016.
3. Davies E R., “Computer and Machine Vision: Theory, Algorithms, Practicalities”, Academic Press, 2012.
4. Bhabatosh Chanda and Dutta Majumder D., “Digital Image Processing and Analysis”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
5. Rafael G Gonzalez and Richard E Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, 2009.
18PP30 MECHATRONICS SYSTEM

3003
MECHATRONICS: Need and applications, elements of mechatronic systems, role of mechatronics in automation,
manufacturing and product development. Measurement: Importance of sensors in Mechatronics, Static and Dynamic
characteristics of sensors, errors and output impedance of sensors, transducers for measurement of displacement, strain,
position, velocity, noise, flow, pressure, temperature, humidity, vibration, liquid level, vision sensors. Linear and rotary drives –
types and selection criteria (11)
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND DESIGN: Mechatronic approach - Control program control, adaptive control and distributed
systems - Design process - Types of Design - Integrated product design - Mechanisms, load conditions, design and flexibility
Structures, load conditions, flexibility and environmental isolation - Man machine interface, industrial design and ergonomics,
information transfer from machine to man and man to machine, safety. (12)
REAL TIME INTERFACING AND DATA ACQUISITION: Introduction - Elements of data acquisition and control Overview of
I/O process - Installation of I/O card and software - Installation of application software - Over framing. General configuration:
single channel and multichannel data acquisition system, Digital Filtering, data logging, data conversion, introduction to digital
transmission systems PC based data acquisition system. (11)
MECHATRONICS SYSTEM INTEGRATION: Transducer calibration system for Automotive applications, Strain Gauge
weighing system - Solenoid force - Displacement calibration system - Rotary optical encoder - Inverted pendulum control - Pick
and place robot - pH control system - Case studies on design of Mechatronic products - Motion control using D.C. Motor, A.C.
Motor & Solenoids - Car engine management - Barcode reader. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sabri Cetinkunt, “Mechatronics”, John Wiley, 2007.
2. Bolton, “Mechatronics - Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering”, Addison Wesley Longman
Ltd., 1999.
3. Devdas Shetty and Richard A Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, PWS Publishing Company, 1997.
336
59th ACM 09.06.2018
4. Brian Morriss, “Automated Manufacturing Systems - Actuators, Controls, Sensors and Robotics”, McGraw Hill International
Edition, 1995.
5. Bradley Dawson D., Burd N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics: Electronics in Products and Processes”, Chapman and
Hall, London, 1991.
18PP31 LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

3003
LOGISTICS: Definition of logistics and supply chain management - Role of distribution in supply chain, distribution network
design, factors influencing distribution network design, distribution networks in practice, network design in the supply chain,
factors influencing the network design, framework for network design, models for facility location and capacity allocation, Impact
of uncertainty on network design. (10)
COORDINATED PRODUCT AND SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGN: Decision phases in a supply chain, objectives of SCM, examples
of supply chains, supply chain drivers, supply chain integration, supply chain performance measures. General framework -
Design for logistics - Standardization - Push-pull boundary - Supplier integration into New Product Development - Keys to
effective supplier integration - Mass Customization - Meaning - Mass Customization and Supply Chain Management. (10)
STRATEGIC ALLIANCES AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT: Framework for strategic alliances - Third Party Logistics - 3PL
issues and requirements - Retailer - Supplier Partnerships - Issues in Retailer - Supplier Partnerships - Distributor Integration -
Types and issues of Distributor Integration. Cycle inventory, economies of scale to exploit fixed costs, quantity discounts,
example problems, multi-echelon inventory, safety inventory in supply chain, safety level estimation, supply uncertainty, data
aggregation, replenishment policies, managing safety inventory in practice, product availability, optimal level, affecting factors,
supply chain contracts - Bull whip effect. (15)
TECHNOLOGIES FOR SCM: Information Technology (IT) - Infrastructure - Interface devices - System architecture - Electronic
commerce - IT for supply chain excellence - Service oriented architecture - Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) - Impact of
internet. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindl and Dharam VirKalra, “Supply Chain Management”, Pearson India Education Services Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2016.
2. Donald Bowersox‎M. Bixby Cooper and David Closs, “Supply Chain Logistics Management”, McGraw Hill, Education, New
Yorks, 2012.
3. Simchi - Levi Davi, Kaminsky Philip and Simchi-Levi Edith, “Designing and Managing the Supply Chain”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
4. Sadler I., “Logistics and Supply Chain Integration”, Sage Publishers, 2007.
18PP32 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS

3003
IOT ARCHITECTURE: Introduction to IoT - IoT vs industrial IoT (IIoT) - m2m architecture - IoT architecture - definitions and
functional requirements sensing, actuation, wireless sensor networks - future developments - possible architecture for the future
IoT use cases. (9)
BASICS OF COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING PROTOCOLS: Internet communication - IP addresses - mac

addresses- Wifi – Zigbee – low energy bluetooth – LORA - 6LOWPAN TCP and UDP - MQTT (12)
ELECTRONIC PROTOTYPING: Prototypes and production - open source versus closed source - prototyping embedded
devices - embedded computing basics - protpotyping IoT projects with Arduino - protpotyping IoT projects with Arduino and
Raspberry PI - industry IoT case study. (12)
IOT DATA ANALYTICS: Sensor- cloud – types of cloud - edge analytics and fog computing - sensor data aggregation – sensor
data mining techniques – big data analytics - predictive analytics. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
& Sons Ltd., UK, 2012.
3. David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi and Olivierhersent, “M2M Communications: A Systems Approach”, John Wiley & Sons
Ltd, UK, 2012.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison and Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of Things”, Springer, New York, 2011.
18PP33 LEAN SIX SIGMA

3003
ELEMENTS OF LEAN SIX SIGMA: Definition, need of fusion of Lean and Six Sigma, unique features, benefits, value
proposition, framework, MRP and ERP, total process. scalable Lean Six Sigma, emergence of transactional enterprises. (10)
SIX SIGMA PROCESS AND IMPROVEMENT TOOLS: DMAIC phases, tools, Design of Experiments, e-Infrastructure, Six
Sigma as a metric, critical success factors for Six Sigma, customer centricity, financial results, management engagement,
infrastructure, predicting team success, preventing team failure. Six Sigma culture. key messages of Six Sigma. (12)
337
59th ACM 09.06.2018
LEAN MANUFACTURING: Essentials, Cycle Efficiency, cost reduction and its sources, speeding of processes, application in
service industry, manufacturing time traps, finding and removing the hidden time traps, velocity of the process, third law of lean
Six Sigma for supply chain acceleration, second law of lean Six Sigma for supply chain acceleration, major lean improvement
tools, pull systems, setup reduction, Total Productive Maintenance, determination of 20% waste using value stream map,
creating a value stream map, lean enterprise. (13)
IMPLEMENTATION OF LEAN SIX SIGMA: Road map of Lean Six Sigma, need for executive engagement, securing
CEO/executive commitment, role of CEO, value stream selection, drivers of shareholder value, net present value for project
selection, destruction of shareholder value, competing with Lean Six Sigma. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Michael L. George, David T. Rowlands and Bill Kastle, “What is Lean Six Sigma”, McGraw Hill, Education, New York,
2012.
2. Terence T. Burton, “Accelerating Lean Six Sigma Results – How to Achieve Improvement Excellence in the New
Economy”, J. Ross Publishing, Mexico City, 2011.
3. Donald H. Sheldon, “World Class Master Scheduling – Best Practices and Lean Six Sigma Continuous Improvement”, J.
Ross Publishing, Mexico City, 2006.
4. Michael L. George, “Lean Six Sigma: Combining Six Sigma Quality with Lean Production Speed”, McGraw Hill, Education,
New York, 2002.
18PP34 MECHANICS OF POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES

3003
MANUFACTURE OF COMPOSITE COMPONENTS: Modern materials in design, types, metals, polymers, ceramics,
composites, Matrix and reinforcement-their roles, principal types of fibre and matrix materials. Processing of PMC: Lay up and
curing, open and closed mould processes, bag moulding, filament winding, pultrusion, pulforming, thermoforming, injection
moulding, blow moulding, an overview of metal matrix composite processing and ceramic matrix composite processing. (11)
MICRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINA: Volume and mass fractions, evaluation of elastic moduli, strength of
unidirectional lamina. (11)
MACRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINA: Hooke's law for different types of materials, engineering constants for
orthotropic materials. Stress, strain relations for plane stress in an orthotropic materials and in a lamina of arbitrary orientation,
strength of an orthotropic lamina, basic strength theories. (11)
MACRO MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF A LAMINATE: Classical lamination theory - lamina stress - strain behaviour -
resultant forces and moments in a laminate - types of laminates - strength and stiffness of laminates – inter laminar stresses in
laminates. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ronald F Gibson, “Principles of Composite Material Mechanics", McGraw Hill Book Co, 2007.
2. Autar K Kaw, "Mechanics of Composite Materials", CRC Press, NY, 2006.
3. Matthews F. L. and Rawlings R. D., “Composite Materials: Engineering and Science”, Woodhead Publishing, 1999.
4. Robert M Jones, "Mechanics of Composite Materials", Taylor and Francis, 1999.
18PP35 INDUSTRIAL ERGONOMICS

3003
ANTHROPOMETRY: History of ergonomics, interdisciplinary nature, ergonomics for productivity, safety, health and comfort,
Need for anthropometry, body planes, body movement ranges, measuring procedures, measurement tools, anthropometric
measurements, percentile calculation, ergonomic guidelines for design use, anthropometry in applications. (12)
INDUSTRIAL DESIGN: Manual lifting, revised NIOSH lifting equation, material handling devices, work posture - sitting,
standing or sit-standing, horizontal work surface design, console design for standing operator, seat design, hand tool design,
fitting the task, designing for the user, design guidelines for hand tools, design of VDT workstations, information display
modalities, design of controls, coding of controls, compatibility. (11)
RISK ASSESSMENT: Physical methods - QEC, RULA, REBA, strain index, Borg rating, Psychophysiological methods -
electromyography, heart rate, heart rate variability, energy expenditure, cognitive methods – focus groups, hierarchical task
analysis, SHERPA, environmental methods - thermal conditions measurements, cold and heat stress indices, thermal comfort
analysis. (11)
ILLUMINATION, NOISE AND VIBRATION: Illumination, measurement of light, concept of visibility, effects of lighting on
performance, recommended levels of illumination, distribution of light, glare, Noise, measurement of sound, noise and loss of
hearing, analysis and reduction of noise, effect of noise on performance, noise exposure limits, handling noise problems, whole
body vibration, attenuation, amplification and resonance, effects of vibration, limits for exposure to whole-body vibration. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Bridger R S., “Introduction to Human Factors and Ergonomics”, CRC Press, 2017.
2. Neville Stanton, “Handbook of Human and Ergonomics Methods”, CRC Press, 2004.
3. Debkumar Chakrabarti, “Indian Anthropometric Dimensions for Ergonomic Design Practice”, NID, 1997.
4. Martin Helandar, “A Guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, Taylor and Francis, 1995.
5. Mark S Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw Hill, 1993
338
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18PP36 PRECISION MACHINING

3003
PRECISION MACHINING: Principle - Need for precision machining-development perspective - classes of achievable
machining accuracy: conventional machining, precision machining, ultra precision machining - examples. ELEMENTS:
Guideways - drive systems: Nut and screw transmission, linear motor drive- direct spindle drive - bearings - capabilities. (12)
TOOLING FOR PRECISION MACHINING: Collet chucks tool holders-work holding devices: fixtures, step and TOE clamp -
cutting tool materials - characteristics - alignment of machine tool elements - CAD/CAM integration - tool path generation –
simulation n-post processing - examples. (12)
HIGH SPEED MACHINING: Principle- Need for High speed/high velocity machining - Determinants: fast machining, smart
machines, tools and processes. Characteristics - high speed spindle elements - High cutting speed-machining parameters.
Precision tooling interface- dry and near dry machining process. (12)
APPLICATIONS: Mould and die making: automotive forging die, injection and blow moulds. Medical applications:
biocompatibility, osseointegration, surface topography, implants classification, specialized dental and orthopedic implants –
custom prototype parts production - hard machining - one pass machining- examples. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Murty R.L., “Precision Engineering in Manufacturing”, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 2015.
2. Venkatesh V. C. and Sudin Izman, “Precision Engineering”, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2014.
3. Dale Mickelson, “Guide to Hard Milling & High Speed Machining”, Industrial Press Inc., 2007.
4. Bert P ERDEL, “High- Speed Machining”, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 2003.
5. Robert I King, ”Hand book of High-Speed Machining Technology”, Chapman and Hall Ltd., 1985.
18PP37 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

3003
REVIEWING OF LITERATURE AND PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION: Source material, reviewing of literature. Preparing: list of
reference reading, materials concerning the area of specialization, topic of research, critical evaluation, review of research work
- primary and secondary sources or materials, techniques to be adopted in the collection of primary data. (10)
METHODS OF PHILOSOPHY: Types of field research - significance of field research - tolls necessary for field research
qualifications of a field researcher - data elicitation - recording and transcribing - establishing rapport with informants - data
processing and analysis. Research Methods: Types of research methods: logical methods, specific method, descriptive
methods, historical methods, comparative method, contrastive method. Formation of hypotheses - framing suitable research
method for the topic concerned. (15)
RESEARCH ETHICS AND TECHNICAL RESEARCH: Ethics - ethical issues related to publishing. Layout of research paper -
citation counting, peer reviewed journals, Impact Factor, Scopus, Web of Science, SCI/SCIE, H-index, DOI, ORCID ID and
Plagiarism. Intellectual property rights (IPR) and patent. Common scientific software’s for computations and analysis. (10)
REPORTING THE RESEARCH: Tentative models to be framed - different levels and their presentation in the report, final
format for research findings, observations - discussion with research guide and other experts - review of sample work,
preliminary work - making necessary corrections and changes, structure of various chapters subsections - lists of tables, charts,
bibliography, referencing and foot notes, appendices, graphs. Thesis formatting and making effective presentation - LaTex.
(10 )
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. John Creswel. W, “Research Design, Qualitative and Quantitative and Mixed Methods Approaches”, Sage Publications
India Pvt. Ltd, 2011.
2. C.R. Kothari, “Research Methodology - Methods and Techniques”, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2004.
3. Ram Ahuja, “Research Methods”, Rawat Publications, New Delhi, 2001.
4. Kate Tubain L., “A Manuel for Writers of Term Papers, Thesis and Dissertations”, The University of Chicago Press,
Chicago, 1996.
5. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, “Methodology and Techniques of Social Research”, Himalaya publishing House, Bombay,
1984.
AUDIT COURSES
18PP81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

0040
Planning and preparation, word order, breaking up of long sentences, structuring paragraphs and sentences, being concise and
removing redundancy, avoiding ambiguity and vagueness, clarifying who did what, highlighting the findings, hedging and
criticising, paraphrasing and plagiarism. (15)
Sections of a paper - Abstract, introduction, review of the literature, methods, results and discussions, conclusions,
acknowledgements, references and the final check. (10)
339
59th ACM 09.06.2018
Key skills needed to write title, abstract, introduction, review of the literature, methods, results and discussions, and conclusions
of a research paper. (20)
Use of appropriate phrases to ensure the research paper is as good as it could possibly be the first- time submission. (15)
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Adrian Wallwork, “English for Writing Research Papers”, Springer New York Dordrecht Heidelberg London, 2011.
2. Goldbort R., “Writing for Science”, Yale University Press, 2006.
3. Day R., “How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper”, Cambridge University Press, 2006
4. Highman N., “Handbook of Writing for the Mathematical Sciences”, SIAM, Highman’s Book, 1998.
18PP82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

0060
Meaning of research problem, sources of research problem, criteria and characteristics of a good research problem, errors in
selecting a research problem, scope and objectives of research problem, approaches of investigation of solutions for research
problem, data collection, analysis and interpretation. (25)
Effective literature studies approaches, analysis of plagiarism, research ethics, effective technical writing, how to write report,
developing a research proposal, format of research proposal, presentation of research proposal for assessment by a review
committee. (20)
Nature of intellectual property: Patents, designs, trade and copyright. Process of patenting and development: Technological
research, innovation, patenting, development, international cooperation on intellectual property, procedure for grants of
patents, patenting under PCT. (20)
Patent rights: scope of patent rights, licensing and transfer of technology, patent information and databases, geographical
indications. New developments in IPR: Administration of patent system, IPR of biological systems and computer software,
traditional knowledge case studies on IPR. (25)
Total P: 90
REFERENCES:
1. Robert P. Merges, Peter S. Menell, Mark A. Lemley, “Intellectual Property in New Technological Age”, 2016.
2. Ranjit Kumar, “Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for Beginners”, Sage Publication, 2nd Edition, 2010.
3. Ramappa T., “Intellectual Property Rights Under WTO”, S Chand Publication, 2008.
4. Halbert, “Resisting Intellectual Property”, Taylor & Francis Ltd, 2007.
5. Wayne Goddard and Stuart Melville, “Research Methodology: An Introduction”, 2001.
6. Stuart Melville and Wayne Goddard, “Research Methodology: An Introduction for Science & Engineering Students”, 1996.
7. Mayall, “Industrial Design”, McGraw Hill, 1992.
8. Niebel, “Product Design”, McGraw Hill, 1974.

ENGINEERING
18PK01 PROCESS IMPROVEMENT AND PRODUCT DESIGN THROUGH LEAN SIX SIGMA
1001
LEAN SIX SIGMA FUNDAMENTALS

• Definition of term Sigma, Z Score, CTQ, Opportunity, Defect, DPMO
• Types of data…importance of measurement, repeatability and reproducibility
• Six Sigma Quality Level, Relationship between DPMO and Process Capability, Short/Long term Six Sigma, Z Shift
• Six Sigma’s focus on inputs (X’s) over outputs (Y’s) using the formula Y=f (X)
• Structure of execution team, Rhythm to sustain the improvement
• Intro to DMAIC, DMADOV, Lean….how it is different from Traditional Quality ISO (4)
METHODOLOGIES OF LEAN SIX SIGMA

• DMAIC
• DMADOV (DFSS)
• Lean (5)
TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES

DMAIC
• QFD
• FMEA
• Fishbone Diagram
• Hypothesis Test
• DoE
• SPC
DFSS
• Kano Model
• Decision Making Tools
• Pugh Matrix
• Robust Design Tools
340
59th ACM 09.06.2018
LEAN
• Value Stream Mapping
• 5S (6)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Alastair K Muir, “Lean Six Sigma Statistics”, McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. James T Schutta, “Business Performance through Lean Six Sigma”, ASQC Quality Press, 2006.
18PK02 DESIGN AND OPTIMIZATION TECHNOLOGY

1001
OPTIMIZATION TECHNOLOGY
• Fundamentals and requirements of design optimization (what, when and why of optimization)
• Optimization semantics, terminologies
• Optimization techniques in practice
• Discussion on Gradient based vs. Stochastic based optimization techniques
• Fundamentals, requirements and challenges in multiple objectives design optimization
• Demonstration of optimization using EXCEL solver (5)
TRANSFER FUNCTIONS
• Fundamental concepts of transfer function generation
• Introduction to design of experiments
• Importance of meta models in design optimization
 What is a meta model?
 Why meta models?
 How to generate a meta model?
 When to use a meta model? (4)
ROBUST DESIGN
• Fundamental concepts of robust design methods
• Uncertainty quantification - how variation impacts performance
• Discussion on the importance of maintaining design margins on customer CTQ’s
• Linking probabilistics with optimization – driving robust designs (4)
CASE STUDIES
Two case studies to be worked out in the class
Tool – Excel Solver (2)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. “Optimization in Practice”, Altair Users Conference, Bangalore, India, August 2007.
2. “Dace based Probabilistic Optimization of Mechanical Components”, Proceedings of GT2006 ASME Turbo Expo 2006 :
Power for Land, Sea & Air, Barcelona, Spain, May 8 – 11, 2006.
3. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design, Algorithms and Examples”, Prentice Hall, 2004.
4. Ashok D Belegundu and Tirupathi R Chandrupatla, “Optimization Concepts and Applications in Engineering”, Prentice
Hall, New Jersey, 1999.
5. Singiresu S Rao, “Engineering Optimization Theory and Practice”, New Age International, 1996.
18PK03 THEORY OF CONSTRAINTS AND ITS THINKING PROCESS

1001
FUNDAMENTALS OF THEORY OF CONSTRAINTS: 5 step process of TOC - Understanding the term “Bottleneck” -
Identifying Bottlenecks - Project vs Process Environments (a) Drum buffer rope methodology (b) Critical chain project
management. (3)
TOC TOOLS: Swim Lane Diagrams - Storyboarding - 5 Whys Technique - Root Cause Analysis - Pareto Analysis and Queuing
Models. (2)
ACCOUNTING AND TOC: Throughput - Operating expense - Productivity ratio - COGS (4)
INTEGRATING TOC WITH LEAN: 5 S – Tooling - 6 sigma - Total Productivity Maintenance (2)
BUSINESS SIMULATION GAME (2)
IMPLEMENTATION CASE STUDY (2)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Eliyahu M Goldratt and Jeff Cox, “The Goal – Process of Ongoing Improvement”, Productivity & Quality Publishing Private
Limited, 2010.
2. Eliyahu M Goldratt, “The Goal 2 – It’s Not Luck”, Productivity & Quality Publishing Private Limited, 2010.
3. Eliyahu M Goldratt, “Critical Chain”, Productivity & Quality Publishing Private Limited, 2010.
4. Anthony A Atkinson, Robert S Kaplan, Ella Mae Matsumura and Mark S Young, “Managerial Accounting”, Prentice Hall,
2007.
341
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18PK04 PRESS TOOL DESIGN
1001
Metal Cutting Theory, Materials and Criteria for Selection. (2)
TYPES OF PRESS TOOLS: Piercing and Blanking, Progressive, Bending, Multislide etc. (2)
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS BENDING: Die - Basics + Practical (2)
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS: Selection of Tool Type, Presses, Strip Layouts (3)
PIERCING AND BLANKING DIE DESIGN - PART 1: Blank Development, Cutting Load Calculations, Strip Layouts, Cutting
Clearances. (2)
PIERCING AND BLANKING DIE DESIGN - PART 2: Design of Stripper, Punch, Die, Frame Design, Material Selection and
Heat Treatment. (2)
Latest developments in press tooling. (2)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Joshi P H, “Press Tools - Design and Construction”, S Chand, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Cyrll Donaldson, George H Lecain and Goold V C, “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.
3. Vukota Boljanovic, Paquin and Crowley, “Die Design Fundamentals”, Industrial Press, New York, 2006.
4. Vukota Boljanovic, “Sheet Metal Forming Processes and Die Design”, Industrial Press, 2004.
5. Ivana Suchy, “Handbook of Die Design”, McGraw Hill, Inc., 1998.
18PK05 INJECTION MOLD DESIGN

1001
Tooling materials and Heat treatment. (1)
BASICS: Various Engineering and Commercial Grade Thermoplastics: Properties and Applications. (2)
BASICS: Moulding Process, Parts of a Mould, Mould Materials. (2)
FUNDAMENTALS OF MOULD DESIGN - PART 1: Introduction to Subsystems: Feed Systems and Ejection Systems. (2)
FUNDAMENTALS OF MOULD DESIGN - PART 2: Introduction to Subsystems: Cooling Systems, Guidance Systems. (2)
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS - PART 1: Selection of Cavity Layouts, 2 Plate, 3 Plate, Parting Line Selection, Standard and
Custom Mold Bases and other aspects of design. (2)
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS - PART 2: Selection of Machines, Sections, Sizes, Materials and their selection criteria. (2)
Design Discussions with an Example. (2)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Pye R G W, “Injection Mould Design”, East West Press, 2000.
2. Prabodh C Bolur, “A Guide to Injection Moulding of Plastics”, Allied Publishers Limited, 2000.
3. Bown J, “Injection Moulding of Plastic Components : A Guide”, McGraw Hill, Inc., 1979.
4. Athalye A S, “Injection Moulding”, Multi-Tech Publishers and Company, Mumbai, 1997.
5. Whelan A, “Injection Moulding Machines”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 1984.
18PK06 ADVANCED METROLOGY AND CALIBRATION

1001
GENERAL INTRODUCTION:
 Automotive and Aerospace requirements in areas of Metrology
 Measurement systems Errors- Explanations with Examples
 Traceability and its importance
 Introduction and important clauses ISO Standard 17025:2005
 Selection of Length Standards
 Advancement in CMM technology and its calibration
 Drawing Study (GD & T)
 Calibration of Verniers, Micrometers
 Calibration of Dial gauges, Lever Dials. Height gauges
PRACTICAL WITH EXERCISE:

 NABL criteria for Accommodation and Environment (Metrology lab requirements)
 Selection of MASTER EQUIPMENT and REFERENCE MATERIALS
 Calibration of non contact measuring Instruments
 Calibration of Plain and Thread gauges
342
59th ACM 09.06.2018
 Calibration of machines (VMC etc)
 Fixing Calibration periodicity
 Interpretation of Calibration Reports/Certificates
 Surface Roughness
 Uncertainty Calculations as per latest NABL 141
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. “Metrology Manual” by Tespa Tools Pvt. Ltd.
2. Hume K J, “Engineering Metrology”, Macmillan Company Publishers.
3. Connie Dotson and Roger Harlow, “Fundamentals of Dimensional Metrology”, Thomson Learning Publishers, New
York, 2003.
4. Galyer J F W and Shotbolt C R, “Metrology for Engineers”, Cassel and Company publishers, London, 1990.
5. Astme and Wilson A W, “Hand Book of Industrial Metrology”, Prentice Hall, INC publishers, New Delhi, 1988.
6. Parsons S H J, “Metrology and Gauging”, Macmillan Company Publishers, London, 1960.
7. Hume K J and Sharp G H, “Practical Metrology - Vol 1 & VoL 2”, Macmillan Company Publishers
SCIENCE ELECTIVES
18ID01 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS (MEMS)

3003
MEMS AND MICROINTEGRATEDSYSTEMS: Introduction, history of MEMS development, intrinsic characteristics of MEMS.
Devices: Sensors and Actuators. Overview of microfabrication, microelectronics fabrication process, silicon based MEMS
processes, new materials and fabrication processes. Points of consideration for processing. (7)
SCALING LAWS AND MINIATURIZATION: Introduction. Scaling in geometry. Scaling in rigid body dynamics. The trimmer
force scaling vector – scaling in electrostatic forces, electromagnetic forces, scaling in electricity and fluid dynamics, scaling in
heat conducting and heat convection. (7)
PRINCIPLES OF SENSING AND ACTUATION: Sensors. Classification of sensors. Signal conversion. Ideal characteristics of
sensors. Mechanical sensors. Introduction to electrostatic sensors and actuators. Parallel plate capacitors – equilibrium position
of electrostatic actuator under bias – pull in effect of parallel plate actuators. Applications: accelerometer, pressure sensor and
flow sensor. (7)
THERMAL AND MAGNETIC ACTUATORS: Thermal sensors and thermal actuators – applications: Inertia sensors and IR
sensors. Magnetic actuators. Principles of micro magnetic actuators. MEMS magnetic actuators. Principles of piezoelectric
sensing and actuation. Acoustic sensors and tactile sensors. (7)
MICROMACHINING: Photolithography. Photoresist and applications. Light sources. X-ray and electron beam lithography.
Oxidation, thermal oxidation. Silicon di oxide. Thermal oxidation rates. Oxide thickness by colour.Bulk micromachining. Isotropic
and anisotropic etching. Wet etchants, etch stops, dry etching comparison of wet and dry etching. Dry etching – physical
etching – reactive ion etching, comparison of wet and dry etching. Surface micromachining – process in general, problems in
surface micromachining. The LIGA process – description, materials for substrates and photoresists, electroplating, the SLIGA
process. (10)
MICROSYSTEM PACKAGING:The three levels of microsystem packaging – die level, device level and system level. Essential
packaging technologies – die preparation – surface bonding, wire bonding and sealing. Three dimensional packaging.
Assembly of Microsystems – selection of packaging materials. (7)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Chang Liu, Foundations of MEMS, Pearson International Edition, 2006.
2. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture”, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2002.
3. Mark Madou, Fundamentals of microfabrication, CRC Press, New York, 1997.
18ID02 SENSORS FOR ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS

3003
SENSOR CHARACTERISTICS: Transfer function, full scale input and full scale output, accuracy, calibration, error in
calibration, hysteresis, non-linearity, saturation, repeatability, resolution, environmental factors and reliability. (7)
STRAIN AND PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: Resistance strain gauge, piezoelectric pressure gauge, characteristics.
Electronic circuits for strain gauge, load cells. Interferometer, fibre-optic methods. Pressure gauges – aneroid capacitance
pressure gauge, ionization gauge. (8)
MOTION SENSORS: Capacitor plate sensor. Inductive sensors, LVDT accelerometer systems, rotation sensors, drag cup
devices, piezoelectric devices. Rotary encoders (7)
OPTICAL SENSORS: optical bridge. Proximity detector with polarized light. Linear optical sensors. photomultiplier, photo
resistor and photoconductors. Photodiodes, photo transistors, photovoltaic devices. Fiber-optic sensor, fabry perot sensor,
solid-state transducers (7)
TEMPERATURE SENSORS: Bimetallic strip, bourdon temperature gauge, thermocouples, thermoresistive sensors.
Resistance temperature detectors. Thermistors. NTC thermistors. Self-heating effect in NTC thermistors. PTC thermistors.
Bolometer, pyroelectric detector. (8)
343
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ELECTRONIC SENSORS: Proximity detectors, inductive and capactive, ultrasonic, photo beam detectors, reed switch, magnet
and Hall-effect units, Doppler detectors, liquid detectors, flow sensors, smoke sensors. (8)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Doeblin E O, “Measurement systems, application and design”, McGraw Hill, 2004.
2. Jacob Freden, “Handbook of Modern Sensors: Physics, Design and Applications”, Springer-Verlag, 2003.
3. Ian R Sinclair, “Sensors and transducers” Newnes Publishers, 2001.
18ID03 LASER PROCESSING OF MATERIALS

3003
BASICS OF LASERS AND LASER OPTICS: Overview of laser technology, energy distribution, laser resonators – longitudinal
and transverse modes, Bandwidth mechanism, Q-switching – four types of Q- switches, mode-locking- time domain, frequency
domain. (9)
LASER MATERIAL INTERACTION: Basic considerations, types of laser- CO2, Nd:YAG, Excimer. Heat in solids- electronic
and Lattice dynamics. Laser material interactions- single photon and multi photon process, laser reflection and absorption,
temperature profiles, vaporization, recondensation, plasma formation. (10)
LASER PLASMA INTERACTION: Fundamentals – process in nanosecond laser plasma interaction - laser induced gas
breakdown, plasma shielding during laser material processing, laser supported absorption waves, plasma shutter for optical
limitation, plasma interaction with femtosecond laser pulses – laser beam filamentation, generation of XUV radiation by laser
plasma, plasma mirror. (9)
CREATING NANOSTRUCTURES WITH LASERS: Fundamentals – plasma –gas interaction at increasing gas pressure in
nanosecond pulsed laser deposition, nanoparticle synthesis, controlled deposition of 2D nanoparticle arrays. Applications –
direct writing, laser LIGA, laser etching, pulsed laser deposition, MAPLE, lasers for MEMS. (9)
LASER MICROMACHINING: Basic consideration, processing limits, materials and processes – polymers, glass, ceramics,
metals, layer ablation, indirect ablation, hole drilling, patterning of thin films – dielectric masks, diffractive optical elements,
fabrication of micro optics and micro fluidics –grating, micro lenses, micro fluidics. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Laser Processing of Materials – Fundamentals, Applications and Developments, Peter Schaaf, Springer 2010.
2. Introduction to Laser Technology – Breck Hitz, J J Ewing, Jeff Hecht, 2001
3. Laser Material Processing – William M Steen, Jyotirmoy Mazumder, Springer 2010
4. Physics of Laser Processing Materials – Theory and Experiment, Gennady G.Gladush, Igor Smurov, Springer 2011.
18ID04 PLASMA TECHNOLOGY

3003
GASES AND COLLISION PROCESS: Masses and Number of atoms, kinetic energy and temperature, mean speed , pressure,
Avogadro’s Laws, number density of gases, impingement flux, monolayer formation time, mean free path, probability of
collision, energy transfer and collision frequency, Energy transfer in Binary collisions, gas flow types. Collision cross section,
Elastic and inelastic collision. Ionization, excitation, relaxation, recombination, dissociation, electron attachment, Ion-neutral
collisions, Metastable collisions. (10)
GLOW DISCHARGE: Plasma species, Electron and Ion temperature, plasma potential. Glow discharges: DC discharges, RF
discharges, Microwave discharges, Dielectric barrier discharges, ECR discharges. Conduction in ionized gases, Diffusion:
Diffusion and mobility, ambipolar diffusion, diffusion in combined electric and magnetic field: parallel field and perpendicular
field. General structures and feature; V-I characteristics- Glow discharge: cathode layer, positive column, Anode sheath. (11)
ARC DISCHARGE: Characteristic features of an arc discharge. Types of arcs – Arc with hot thermionic cathode, Arc with
external cathode heating, Arcs with cold cathode and cathode spots, vacuum arcs, High pressure arcs, Low pressure arcs. Arc
initiation- methods of arc initiation, Transition from glow to arc discharge. Plasma temperature and V-I characteristics of high
pressure arc columns. (10)
PLASMA SOURCES AND PLASMA DIAGNOSTICS: Low temperature plasma generation, transferred and non-transferred arc
torches, plasma torches. Plasma diagnostics: Electrical probe techniques, spectroscopic methods, Optical emission
Spectroscopy, Magnetic diagnostics. (7)
APPLICATIONS: Plasma spraying of ceramic, alloys and metals, plasma reduction of ores and minerals, plasma
disassociation of compound oxides, plasma refining and remelting, plasma furnace in steel making, plasma cutting, sputtering,
plasma enhanced chemical vapour deposition, plasma nitriding and surface cleaning, Plasma surface modification. (7)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Francis F Chen, “Introduction to Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion”, Springer Publications, 2006.
2. Milton O’Ring, “Materials Science of Thin Films”, Academic Press, 2002.
3. Reece Roth J, “Industrial Plasma Engineering Vol.1 : Principles”, Taylor & Francis, 1995.
4. Brainan Chapman, “Glow Discharge Processes : Sputtering and Plasma Etching”, John Wiley and Sons, 1980.
5. George Schmidt, “Physics of High Temperature Plasma”, Academic Press, 1979.
344
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18ID05 NANOSENSOR AND ITS APPLICATIONS
3003
NANOMATERIALS FOR SENSORS: Introduction: Quantum layers, wells, dots and wires- Carbon nanotube (CNT)-Structures:
Arm chair, Zigzag, Chiral - Fabrications: Laser ablation, Electric arc discharge method, Chemical vapour deposition - Properties
and applications of CNT. (7)
FUNDAMENTALS OF NANO-SENSORS: Sensing principles, sensor types and classification - mechanical, acoustic, magnetic,
thermal, chemical, radiation; micro sensors; sensors based on surface-acoustic wave devices. principles of design, fabrication
and characterization of miniature sensors, biosensor, micro fluids, MEMS and NEMS; Method of packaging at zero level, dye
level and first level Sensors. (10)
SENSORS FOR AEROSPACE AND DEFENSE: Accelerometer, Pressure Sensor, Night Vision System, Nano tweezers, nano-
cutting tools, Integration of sensor with actuators and electronic circuitry, Civil applications: metrology, bridges and other
industrial applications. (10)
CHEMICAL SENSORS: Nanomaterials for chemical sensors, physical transducing principles for sensors, gravimetric sensors,
electrical and electrochemical sensors, optical sensors, Resistive/semiconductive sensor materials, specific
conductivity/semiconductor sensors, Electrochemical sensors - Galvanic cell thermodynamics, Electrode kinetics, Gas sensors.
(10)
BIOSENSORS: Clinical Diagnostics, generation of biosensors, immobilization, characteristics, applications, conducting
Polymer based sensor, miniaturized biosensor - Nano pH sensors, calcium sensors, sodium sensors, glucose sensors, oxygen
sensors (8)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Larry Nagahara, Nongjian Tao and Thomas Thundat, "Introduction to Nanosensors Series: Nanostructure Science and
Technology", Springer-Verlag New York Inc, 2008.
2. Vijay K.Varadan, "Nanosensors,Microsensors,and Biosensors and Systems", SPIE- International Society for Optical
Engine”, 2007.
3. Zikang Tang and Ping “Nanoscience & Technology: Novel Structure and Phenomena”, CRC, 2003.
4. Ananthasuresh G. K., “Optimal Synthesis Methods for MEMS”, Springer, 2003.
5. Rai Choudhury P “MEMS & MOEMS Technology and Applications” SPIE, 2000.
6. Meixner H and R.Jones “Sensors: Micro & Nanosensor technology, Trends in Sensor Market” (Part 1&2), VCH, 1995.
18ID06 NANO MAGNETISM AND SPINTRONICS

3003
MAGNETISM: Introduction - Types of magnetism-weak magnetism, ferromagnetism, antiferromagnetism, Magnetic materials –

B-H loop and magnetic domain, soft magnetic materials, hard magnetic materials, recording media. (8)
QUANTUM PHENOMENOLOGY OF MAGNETISM: Quantum mechanics and magnetism – spin, spin-orbit interaction, Hund’s
rule – Exchange interaction - Magnetic Anisotropy - Magnetic domain walls and domain – Magnetization Process (8)
SPINTRONICS: Introduction – spin injection and spin dependent tunnelling – spin orbit coupling in semiconductors – spin
transport and spin transfer - spin relaxation – spin dephasing - materials for spin electronics (8)
SPINTRONIC DEVICES: Giant Magnetoresistance – Tunneling magnetoresistance – Spin valve – Spin based transistors –
carbon nano tube devices (10)
ORGANIC SPINTRONICS: Introduction to organic semiconductors – Spin-polarized transport in organic semiconductors –

Organic magnetoresistance - Spintronic applications of organic materials - Magnetic field effects in π-conjugated systems -
Investigating spin-dependent processes in organic semiconductors - Organic spintronics: Toward sensor and memory
applications. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Zeev Valy Vardeny, “Organic Spintronics”, CRC Press, 2010
2. Brutting W., “Physics of Organic Semiconductors”, Wiley-VCH Verlag Gmbh & Co, 2005.
3. O’ Handley R.C., “Modern Magnetic Materials”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
4. Ziese M. and Thornton M., “Spin Electronics”, Springer – Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2000.
5. Jiles D., “Introduction to Magnetism and Magnetic Materials”, Chapman & Hall, 1998.
18ID07 CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

3003
THERMODYNAMICS OF AQUEOUS CORROSION: Electrode processes – electrode potential, free energy, emf series -
applications, potential measurements, three electrode systems. Chemical Vs electrochemical mechanisms of corrosion
reactions, corrosion rate expressions. Construction of Pourbaix diagrams of Fe, Al, Ni and Zn, practical use of E-pH diagrams.
Galvanic corrosion – galvanic series – factors affecting galvanic corrosion. (9)
KINETICS OF AQUEOUS CORROSION: Corrosion current density and corrosion rate, exchange current density. Polarization -
activation control, Butler-Volmer equation, tafel equation, mass transport control, mixed potential theory, effect of oxidizer,
345
59th ACM 09.06.2018
combined polarization, factors affecting polarizations and rate of corrosion. Passivity, potentiostatic polarization curves, factors
affectng passivity, mechanism of action of passivators. (9)
FORMS OF CORROSION: General corrosion - atmospheric corrosion, general biological corrosion. Localized corrosion -
filiform corrosion, crevice corrosion, pitting corrosion, localized biological corrosion. Metallurgical influenced corrosion-inter
granular corrosion, de-alloying. Mechanically assisted corrosion - erosion corrosion, fretting corrosion, corrosion fatigue.
Environmentally induced cracking – mechanisms of stress corrosion cracking and hydrogen embitterment. (9)
PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF CORROSION: Corrosion control by design. Selection of corrosion resistant materials –
alloying, stainless steel and brass. Oxidation resistant materials, control of high temperature oxidation. Cathodic and anodic
protection methods. Alloys for marine applications. Use of inhibitors-types, applications. Corrosion in cold water pipes -
Langalier saturation index. (9)
CORROSION MONITORING AND TESTING: On-stream monitoring – electrical resistance, linear polarization, hydrogen test
probe, ultrasonic testing, radiography and corrosion coupons - specimen preparation, test conditions and evaluation of results
for overall corrosion. Off-stream monitoring equipments – acoustic emission testing, eddy current inspection, liquid penetration
inspection. Electrochemical techniques, Tafel extrapolation and polarization resistance – AC impedance methods (EIS). (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Roberge P R., “Corrosion Engineering Principles and Practice”, Mc Graw Hill Publishers, 2008.
2. Ahamed Z., “Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control”, Elsiever science and technology books, 2006.
3. Mars G Fontana, “Corrosion Engineering”, TATA McGraw Hill Publishers, 2005
4. Uhlig H H and Revie R W., “Corrosion and Corrosion Control – An Introduction to Corrosion Science and Engineering”,
John Wiley & Sons, 1985.
5. ASM Hand Book – Vol 13: Corrosion, ASM International, 2001.
6. Rajnarayan, “Metallic Corrosion and Prevention”, Oxford Publications, 1983.
18ID08 INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

3003
SEPARATION TECHNIQUES: Chromatographic methods - principles, classification - Column chromatography, Liquid

chromatography, Paper chromatography, HPLC, Thin layer chromatography, Ion-exchange chromatography, Gas
chromatography, GC-MS, Electrochromatography, Supercritical fluid chromatography; Capillary electrophoresis - principle,
instrumentation and applications. (10)
THERMAL ANALYSIS: Thermogravimetric analysis and differential gravimetric analysis - Instrumentation, factors affecting
TGA and DTA curves, comparison and applications of TGA and DTA. Derivative thermogravimetry - principle and applications.
Differential scanning calorimetry - principle, instrumentation and applications. (7)
UV-Visible SPECTROSCOPY: Basic principle – Instrumentation - absorption laws – types of electronic transitions – effects of
solvent and H bonding on max and max values –Woodward rules – applications. (4)
INFRA-RED SPECTROSCOPY: Basics-theory-Instrumentation-modes of vibration- characteristic IR absorptions of different

functional groups – factors influencing IR absorption. Interpretation of spectra of simple organic compounds. (5)
1
H-NMR SPECTROSCOPY: Basic principle – number of signals – chemical shift – factors influencing the chemical shift – peak
areas – spin-spin coupling – coupling constant – factors influencing the coupling constant. Analysis of NMR Spectra-First order,
non-first order spectra-AB, AB2, AMx, ABx, ABC. (6)
13
C-NMR SPECTROSCOPY: Basic principle – comparison with 1H NMR – noise decoupling, off resonance decoupling –
factors affecting the intensity of signals – gamma gauche effect – additivity relationship – calculation of chemical shifts for
aliphatic hydrocarbons up to five carbon atoms. (6)
MASS SPECTROMETRY: Mass spectrometry - basic principles- Instrumentation – types of mass analysers - GC-MS, types of
ionisation-base peak – molecular ion peak – metastable peak – isotopic peaks – general rules for fragmentation pattern –
McLafferty rearrangement – retro Diels-Alder reaction – ortho effect – fragmentation pattern of simple compounds. (7)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Skoog D.A, West D.M, Holler F.J and Crouch S.R, “Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry”, Thomson Brooks/Cole Pub.,
Singapore, 2004.
2. Willard H.H,Merritt L.L, Dean J.A and Settle F.A, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, CBS Pub. New Delhi, 2004.
3. Settle F.A, “Hand Book of Instrumental Techniques for Analytical Chemistry”, Prentice-Hall Inc, 1997.
4. Sawyer D.T, Heineman W.R and Beebe J.M, “Chemistry Experiments for Instrumental Methods”, John Wiley and Sons,
USA, 1984.
5. Akhnazarova S.L and Kafarov V.V, “Experiment Optimization in Chemistry and Chemical Engineering”, Mir Publishers,
Mascow, 1982.
18ID09 POLYMERIC MATERIALS

3003
INTRODUCTION: History of Polymers – Basics of Polymer – Classification, Polymerisation - free radical, ionic and
coordination polymerization, polycondensation, polyaddition, ring-opening polymerizations. (5)
346
59th ACM 09.06.2018
POLYMER MORPHOLOGICAL STRUCTURES: Stereo chemistry of polymers – Molecular interactions – Polymer crystals –
Amorphous Bulk state – Polymer structure – Property relationships – crystalline and Amorphous combinations – degree of
crystallinity, factors affecting crystalisability. Glass Transition temperature (Tg) – factors affecting Tg. (6)
MOLECULAR WEIGHT OF POLYMERS: Introduction – Solubility – Average Molecular weight values – Molecular weight-
Mechanical properties relation - Fractionation of Polymers. Molecular weight determination – Chromatography – Osmometry –
End group analysis – Ebulliometry and cryometry – Light scattering measurements – Ultra centrifugation. (6)
COMPOUNDING OF POLYMERS: Fillers and reinforcements, Plasticizers, anti oxidants, heat stabilizers, UV stabilizers, flame
retardants – flame retardant mechanism, curing agents, antistatic agents, lubricants. (4)
POLYMER TECHNOLOGY: Fibres, Elastomers – Fillers and sheets. Polymeric foams – Molding, casting, Extrusion. Polymer
matrix composites: Moulding method - Hand Method, Pultrusion, Filament winding. Nano composites, Adhesives –
Classification, bonding strength. Pressure sensitive adhesives – Cyanoacrylates. (8)
CHARACTERISATION & TESTING: Thermal Properties by TGA, DSC, TMA. Testing - tensile strength – IZOD impact,
compressive strength, hardness, vicot softening point, electrical resistance, dielectric constant, dissipation factor, arc resistance
and dielectric strength. Flammability – Limiting oxygen index. (8)
SPECIALITY POLYMERS AND POLYMER WASTE MANAGEMENT: Polymers for electronic applications – conducting
polymer, photonic polymers, liquid crystalline polymers. Membranes for reverse osmosis. Flame retardant polymers. Polymer
waste management : Recycling, incineration and biodegradation – biodegradable polymers. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Billmeyer F.W, “Text Book of polymer Science”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008.
2. Barbara H. Stuart, “Polymer Analysis”, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2003.
3. Joel R. Fried, “Polymer Science and Technology”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
4. Srinivasan.K, “Composite Materials”, Narosa Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
5. Brydson J A, “Plastic materials”, Butterworth, 2006.
6. Charles E. Carraher, Jr. “Seymour/ Carraher’s Polymer Chemistry”, Marcel Dekker, New York,2003.
18OK01 RESEARCH WRITING IN ENGINEERING SCIENCES

1001
RESEARCH WRITING: Fundamentals of research language, structure, style, format, information and Language conventions of
an engineering research paper & thesis. (5)
DRAFTING PARTS OF THESIS/RESEARCH PAPERS: Writing effective literature reviews, Drafting materials and methods
section, Presenting results and conclusions, Documenting sources. (5)
NUANCES OF LANGUAGE: Hedging, Use of Tenses and modals in different parts of thesis/research papers, Use of
active/passive and other features of language. (5)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Wei Wei, “Scholarly Communication in Science and Engineering Research in Higher Education”, Taylor & Francis Inc, UK,
2013.
2. David J. Bennett, Ed., “Successful Science Communication: Telling It Like It Is”, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi,
2011.
3. Dawkins, Richards, “The Oxford book of modern science writing”, OUP Oxford: New York: Oxford University Press, 2008.
18OK02 INDIAN ETHOS AND HUMAN VALUES

1001
HUMAN VALUES AND ETHICS FOR HOLISTIC MANAGERIAL EXCELLENCE: Introduction, need for value education,
Basic Managerial Skills, Holistic Approach, Total Quality Management (4)
PROFESSIONAL SKILLS: Introduction, Prevention of Stress in Work Life, Work Ethics, Leadership and Team Work in
Organisations, Employer – Employee Relationship. (6)
INDIAN HERITAGE: Introduction, Indian Ethos, Managing Cross-cultural work environment (5)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Mihai I. Spariosu/Jorn Rusen (eds.), “Exploring Humanity – Intercultural Perspectives on Humanism”, National Taiwan
2. Vasudha Dalmia and Rashmi Sadana, “The Cambridge Companion to Modern Indian Culture”, Cambridge University
Press, 2012.
3. VSP Rao and V Hari Krishnan, “Management”, Excel Book, New Delhi, 2010.
4. Fred E Luthans, “Organisational Behaviour”, International Edition, McGraw Hill Companies, New York, 2010.
347
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18OK03 PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT
1001
KNOWING ONESELF: Explore habits, attitudes, preferences and experience and tune them to suit the organizations, Become
aware of strengths and weaknesses, talents and problems, emotions and ideas, Know your ambitions, goals and values, IQ,EQ
& SQ. (5)
SELF MANAGEMENT: Time management, Ability to Socialize. (2)
INTEGRATED PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT: Recognizing the growth of different dimensions of one’s personality such as,
Physical, Intellectual, Emotional, Moral, Social and Spiritual. (4)
PERSONAL COMPETENCES: Developing rapport, Listening skills, Developing tem spirit, Assertiveness and negotiation skills,
Leadership Skills, Giving and receiving constructive Criticism, Positive thinking and creative thinking, Interview techniques and
grooming. (4)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. RajivK Mishra, “Personality Development”, Rupa & Co., 2008.
2. Selvam S. K. P., “Personality Development”, Aph Publishing Corporation, 2010.
3. Materials provided by Guest Speakers.
18OK04 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND COST ACCOUNTING

1001
INTRODUCTION OF ACCOUNTING: Branches of Accounting – Types of Accounting Concepts and Conventions – Subsidiary
Books. (3)
TRADING, PROFIT & LOSS ACCOUNT: Balance Sheet. (3)
COST ACCOUNTING: Concepts – Objectives – Methods of Costing. Cost Sheet – Elements of Cost – Cost Concepts –
Classification – Cost Sheet. (3)
JOB ORDER COSTING: Features Objectives – Procedure – Job Cost Sheet. Activity Based Costing – Methodology -
Applications. (3)
CURRENT TRENDS IN ACCOUNTING: Annual Reports – Skill Application. (3)
Total L: 15
REFERENCES:
1. Grewal T.S., “Double Entry Book-Keeping”, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2012.
2. Gaur & Narang, “Cost Accounting”, Kalyani Publishing Co., Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
3. Shukla, “Principles of Accounting”, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi, 2005.
348
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ME PRODUCT DESIGN AND COMMERCE
(2018 REGULATIONS)
I SEMESTER
18PD01 Computational Mathematics 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PD02 Material Selection for Product Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Geometric Modeling and Computer Aided
18PD03 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
Design
18PD04 Product Reliability 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PD05 Design for Manufacture and Assembly 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18PD51 Object Computing and Data Structures
0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
Laboratory
18PD81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18PD06 Product Lifecycle Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PD07 Engineering Economics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PD08 Finite Element Analysis 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18PD09 Human Factors for Product Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18PD__ Elective - 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD__ Elective - 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD52 Engineering Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18PD61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 100 0 100 EEC
18PD82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 hrs 18 4 8 24 450 350 800
III SEMESTER
18PD__ Elective - 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD__ Elective - 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD__ Elective - 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD__ Elective - 6 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Product Design and Development
18PD53 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PE
Laboratory
18PD71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 EEC
Total 22 hrs 12 0 10 17 350 250 600
IV SEMESTER
18PD72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
18PD21 Production and Operations Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD22 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD23 Object Oriented Analysis and Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18PD24 Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD25 Database Management Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18PD26 Optimization Techniques 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD27 Enterprise Computing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD28 Product Development Strategies 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD29 Noise, Vibration and Harshness 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD30 Metallurgical Failure Analysis 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD31 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD32 Industrial Internet of Things 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD33 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD34 Mechanics of Polymer Matrix Composites 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PD35 Design Optimization 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
348
59th ACM 09.06.2018

ENGINEERING
SCIENCE ELECTIVES


349
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18PD01 COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS

2203
NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations - Gauss Jacobi and Siedel
methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations – Newton‟s method. Interpolation: Cubic spline
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Initial value problem: Runge Kutta method, Milne‟s method. Boundary value problem:
Finite Element Method: The Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods. (8+7)
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite Difference Method: Liebmann‟s method for Laplace equation and Poisson equation,
explicit method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations, explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7)
MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Simulating deterministic behaviour, area under a curve, generating random numbers,
simulating probabilistic behaviour, inventory model: gasoline and consumer demand. (8+7)
Total L: 32 + T: 28 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. John H Mathews and Kurtis D Fink, “Numerical Methods using MATLAB”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Steven C Chapra and Raymond P Canale, “Numerical Methods for Engineers”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
3. Frank R Giordano, William P Fox and Steven B Horton, “A First Course in Mathematical Modeling”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 2014.
4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatly, “Applied Numerical Analysis”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Douglas J Faires and Richard Burden, “Numerical Methods”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2013.
18PD02 MATERIAL SELECTION FOR PRODUCT DESIGN

3003
MATERIALS AND ALLOY SELECTION: Materials classification, Ceramics and glasses, Hybrids, High performance materials,
Super Alloys , Shape memory alloys. Principles of material selection, Selection strategy - function, objectives and constraints,
performance maximizing criteria. Tools used in material selection - Material indices, Material property charts. Case studies on
materials selection. (12)
SELECTION OF MATERIALS AND SHAPE: Shape factors, elastic bending and twisting, failure in bending and twisting, axial
loading and column buckling, efficiency of standard sections, limits for shape factors, microscopic shape factors. Case studies
on co-selection of materials and shape. (10)
SELECTION OF MATERIALS FOR PERFORMANCE: Fracture - mechanical failures, fatigue failure, elevated temperature
failures - creep & thermal fatigue, corrosion and wear failures. Selection of materials for static strength, fatigue resistance, high
temperature resistance, corrosion and wear resistance. (12)
SELECTION OF PROCESS AND ENVIRONMENT: Families and classes of manufacturing processes, Process Information
Maps, Process attributes, Systematic process selection. Case studies on process selection. Material life cycle, Material and
energy-consuming systems, eco-attributes of materials. Case studies on Eco-selection. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mahmoud M Farag, “Materials and Process Selection for Engineering Design”, CRC Press, 2014.
2. Courtney T H, “Mechanical Behavior of Materials”, Overseas Press (India) Private Limited, 2006.
3. Michael F Ashby, “Materials Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2005.
4. Kara Johnson and Mike Ashby, “Materials and Design: The Art and Science of Material Selection in Product Design”,
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2002.
5. William D Callister, “Material Science and Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 1997.
6. Guy A G,” Elements of Physical Metallurgy”, Oxford & IBH Pub. Co., New Delhi, 1990.
18PD03 GEOMETRIC MODELING AND COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN

3204
COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND GRAPHICS SYSTEMS: Origin, history, goals and applications. 3D graph essentials, 3D world,
Graphics API‟s and software, graphics input and output devices, Raster devices. DDA, Bresenham algorithm for straight lines,
Midpoint algorithm for conics and curves, Filled area – scan line, boundary and flood fill. Primitive attributes. (10)
TRANSFORMATIONS: Coordinate system, Graphics pipeline, Translation, scaling, rotation, reflection and shear
transformations. Combined, modeling and co-ordinate transformation. Viewing and clipping - 3D viewing pipeline, Co-
ordinates and volume, Parallel and perspective projections, Projection and view-port transformation, clipping. Camera,
normalized view volume. (11)
CURVES & SURFACES: Lagrange, hermite and spline interpolation, cubic, Bezier and b-spline curves, composite curves and
geometric continuity, non-linear splines, curve fairing, recursive subdivision of curves. Implicit and quadric surfaces, surface of
revolution, sweep, ruled, bilinear and coons surfaces. Bicubic patch. Bezier, b-spline and cyclide surfaces. Surface fairing,
recursive subdivision of surfaces. (12)
SOLID MODELING: Solid Modeling and their representation. Data exchange format, shake based format, product based
format, GKS, PHIGS, IGES, PDES, DXF, CGM, STL, VRML, XML files. Interactive Computer Programming - Introduction to
350
59th ACM 09.06.2018
elementary level - on screen menu - high level - database level - device level and object oriented programming. (12)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Generation of analytical curves using „C‟ language
2. Transformation exercises using „C‟ language
3. Generation of synthetic curves using „C‟ language
4. Generation of analytical surfaces using „C‟ language
5. Generation of synthetic surfaces using „C‟ language
6. Combining the above exercises into a basic CAD package
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C Version”, Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Michael E Mortenson, “Geometric Modeling”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 2004.
3. David F Rogers and Alan Adams J, “Mathematical Elements in Computer Graphics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
4. James D Foley, Andries Van Dam, Steven K Feiner and John F Hughes, “Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”,
Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2000.
5. Martti Mantyla, “An Introduction to Solid Modeling”, Springer Verlag, 1987.
18PD04 PRODUCT RELIABILITY

3003
INTRODUCTION: Definitions, stage gate approach, Reliability characteristics, Bathtub curve, reliability models - Component
reliability and Hazard models, system reliability models, reliability mathematics - Statistical methods in reliability, reliability
predictive modeling. (11)
CONCEPTS IN ACCELERATED TESTING: Time acceleration factor, influence of acceleration factor in test planning,
application to acceleration test, high temperature operating life acceleration model, temperature humidity bias acceleration
model, temperature cycle acceleration model, vibration accelerator model, failure free accelerated test planning. Accelerated
reliability growth testing (12)
FMEA AND RELIABILITY ESTIMATION: Goal and vision, concepts and types of Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)
evaluations, fault tree model. Test design by failure modes and aging stresses. Aging due to cyclic force, Miner‟s rule.
Reliability estimation - parametric and non parametric methods, (12)
PRODUCT MAINTAINABILITY AND SOFTWARE RELIABILITY: Maintainability concepts and analysis measures of
maintainability, design for serviceability, supportability and maintainability, preventive maintenance scheduling. Introduction to
software reliability, waterfall lifecycle, techniques to improve software reliability, software reliability models. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Michael Pecht, “Product Reliability, Maintainability and Supportability Handbook”, CRC Press, 2009.
2. Naikan V N A, “Reliability Engineering and Life Testing”, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2009.
3. Prabhakar Murthy D N and Marvin Rausand, “Product Reliability”, Springer-Verlag London Limited, 2008.
4. Wayne Nelson and John A., “Accelerated Testing Statistical Models, Test Plans and Data Analyses”, John Wiley & Sons
Inc., 2008.
5. Alex Porter, “Accelerated Testing and Validation Testing, Engineering and Management Tools for Lean Development”,
Elsevier Inc., 2004.
6. Dana Crowe and Alec Feinberg, “Design for Reliability”, CRC Press, 2001.
18PD05 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY

18PD51 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY

II SEMESTER
18PD06 PRODUCT LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

3003
MOTIVATION AND INTRODUCTION: e-commerce, B to B, B to C forms of business, extended enterprise, concepts in PDM -
product life cycle, business objects, Object oriented approach in product development solutions , phase gate process in product
design, information flow model in product development, engineering bill of materials and manufacturing bill of materials. Cases
for preparation of combined BoM and other reports (10)
COMPONENTS OF PLM SOLUTIONS AND CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT: Work flows, work list, versions, views, Base
lines, product structure, Engineering change Management, disparate databases and connectivity, use of EAI technology
(middleware), Component supplier management and sourcing. (12)
PRODUCT VISUALISATION AND ROLE OF PLM IN INDUSTRIES: CAD neutral environment and visualisation of products,
standard softwares, use of visualisation in several stages of lifecycle, reviews, mark up - case studies. Role of PLM in
industries : (like auto, aero, electronic) - other sectors, ten step approach to PLM, benefits of PLM. (11)
351
59th ACM 09.06.2018
MODEL BASED DEFINITION (MBD) AND CUSTOMISATION OF PLM SOFTWARE: Need for MBD in a PLM environment,
Product and manufacturing information (PMI), Propagation of PMI through a product‟s life cycle. Product design based on
MBD. Integrated workflow based on MBD and PLM, Creation and management of MBD models using PLM system. Integrated
and collaborative product development environment (Model Based Enterprise) through MBD. Customisation of PLM software.
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kevin N Otto and Kristin L Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson, 2016.
2. J B Herron, “Re-Use Your CAD: The Model-Based CAD Handbook”, Createspace Independent Pub, 2013.
3. John Stark, “Product Lifecycle Management: 21 Century Paradigm for Product Realization”, Springer Publisher, 2011.
4. John Stark, “Global Product: Strategy, Product Lifecycle Management and the Billion Customer Question”, Springer
Publisher, 2007.
6. Antti Saaksvuori, Anselmi Immonen, “Product Life Cycle Management”, Springer, 2004.
18PD07 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS

18PD08 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS

3204
FINITE ELEMENT PROCEDURES AND FORMULATION: Discretization of the domain, basic element shapes, discretization
process, node numbering scheme, Stiffness matrix, assemblage of element equations and incorporation of boundary
conditions, shape function. Generalized Hooke's law, Strain Energy density function, Elastic symmetry, Stress strain
relationship, strain displacement relationship, boundary conditions, compatibility equations, Equilibrium equations, Governing
heat transfer equations, one dimensional conduction and convection problem. (15)
INTERPOLATION MODELS: Polynomial form of interpolation functions, selection of the order of the interpolation polynomial,
simplex, complex and multiplex elements, interpolation polynomial in terms of nodal degrees of freedom, convergence
requirements, linear interpolation polynomials in terms of global coordinates and for vector quantities, coordinate
transformation. (8)
ENERGY AND VARIATIONAL PRINCIPLE: Calculus of variations: The Variational operator, Extremum of functional, Natural
and essential boundary conditions, Principle of virtual displacements, Principle of total potential energy, Principle of virtual
forces and complimentary potential energy, Hamilton principle, Castigliano's theorems. (8)
ANALYSIS OF SOLID MECHANICS PROBLEMS: Analysis of bar, space truss, beam, plates - triangular membrane,
rectangular, Isoparametric formulation and axisymmetric formulation, case studies of static analysis, Dynamic equations of
motion, consistent and lumped mass matrices, free vibration analysis, dynamic response using finite element method, case
studies of dynamic analysis. (14)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Static structural analysis of a 1D bar problem.
2. Steady-state thermal analysis of a 1D bar.
3. Static structural analysis of a 1D beam problem.
4. Static structural analysis of a 2D triangular plate problem.
5. Dynamic structural analysis of a bar under free vibration.
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Klaus Jurgen Bathe, “Finite Element Procedures”, Prentice Hall Inc, 2012.
2. Reddy J N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. Saeed Moaveni, “Finite Element Analysis, Theory and Application with ANSYS”, Pearson Publication, 2011.
4. Singerasu S Rao, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2010.
5. David V Hutton, “Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Companies, 2010.
6. Reddy J N., “Energy Principles and Variational Methods in Applied Mechanics”, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
18PD09 HUMAN FACTORS FOR PRODUCT DESIGN

3204
INFORMATION INPUT: History of Human Factors, Multi-disciplinary engineering, human machine system, characteristics of
system, information theory, types of information, selection of display modality, coding of information, compatibility, memory,
decision making, attention, text, graphics, symbols, quantitative visual display, representational display, auditory, tactual and
olfactory displays. (12)
ANTHROPOMETRY: Need for anthropometry, data collection methodology, measuring procedures, tools, statistical analysis of
data for percentile calculation, anthropometric measurements, percentile calculation, usage of the anthropometric percentile
values, ergonomic guidelines for products, equipment and accessories, anthropometry in applications. (10)
BIOMECHANICS: Biostatics – static equilibrium equations, musculoskeletal system, problems in mechanics of upper extremity
and hand, lower extremity and foot, bending, lifting and carrying, Biodynamics – linear kinematics, angular kinematics, human
body kinetics, human body impact and collision, surface electromyogram, electrocardiogram and heart rate measurement.
(12)
VIRTUAL ERGONOMICS: Digital Human Modeling (DHM), anthropometric models, models for production design,
biomechanical models, anatomical models, cognitive models, DHM packages – selection strategies, Functionalities, Virtual
352
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ergonomics evaluation techniques – Rapid Upper Limb Assessment, field of vision, reach envelopes, accessibility and
clearance analysis, discomfort analysis, Applications of DHM. (11)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Measurement of static anthropometric data
2. Optimizing horizontal and vertical work surface dimensions
3. Physical workload measurement using Heart Rate Monitor (HRM)
4. Evaluation of muscle fatigue using surface Electromyography (sEMG)
5. Product evaluation using Digital Human Modeling (DHM) software
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Duffy V G, “Hand Book of Digital Human Modeling: Research for Applied Ergonomics and Human Factor Engineering”,
Taylor & Francis, 2009.
2. Chandler Allen Phillips, “Human Factor Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2000.
3. D Chakrabarti, “Indian Anthropometric Dimensions for Ergonomic Design Practice”, National Institute of Design,
Ahmedabad, 1997.
4. G Salvendy, “Handbook of Human Factors and Ergonomics”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997.
5. M S Sanders and E J McCormick, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1993.
18PD52 ENGINEERING DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on the relevant equipment/software for duration of 20
technology/knowledge in that area by a literature review (minimum 5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, equipment that
can be used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments and their interpretation with respect to the
TOPICS FOR ORIENTATION PROGRAMME
1. Static analysis of an automotive component

2. Modal analysis and design optimisation to improve natural frequencies using FEA.
3. Random vibration analysis of a automotive component and estimation of fatigue life using FEA
4. Steady state thermal analysis
5. Unsteady state thermal analysis
6. Steady state fluid flow analysis
7. Mold flow analysis of a injection molded component
8. Casting process analysis using software
9. Harmonic analysis of aircraft structure
10. Stress analysis of an electronic component under thermal cycling/shock loads and estimation of fatigue life.
Total P: 60
18PD61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Every student shall make a technical presentation on an appropriate topic allotted by the department and submit a report on
dates announced by the department. The seminar and the report will be evaluated by a review committee constituted by the
HoD.
A minimum of two industrial visits are to be arranged as part of the course and the candidates are expected to make a
presentation of their learnings in the industrial visit. There will be a viva-voce examination on the dates announced by the
department to verify the depth of understanding of the candidate in both the industrial visits and the technical topic.
Total P: 60
III SEMESTER
18PD53 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY

0042
PROJECT
Identify a consumer product as needed by the market, develop concept, develop CAD model, simulate in CAE environment,
optimize, develop tooling and make a physical prototype. Prepare a detailed report.
(The fabricated models may be in the form of RP models, clay models, sheet metal models or card-board models etc…)
DEMONSTRATION EXERCISE:
1. Study of reverse engineering concepts
2. Demonstration of 3D scanning
3. Study of rapid prototyping machines
4. Demonstration of Fusion Deposition Modeling
5. Demonstration of Selective Laser Sintering
353
59th ACM 09.06.2018
6. Demonstration of Vacuum casting
7. Demonstration of Virtual Reality
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Kevin N Otto and Kristin L Wood, “Product Design : Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product Development”,
2. Karl T Ulrich and Steven D Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Private
Limited, 2012.
18PD71 PROJECT WORK I

0063

Total P: 90
IV SEMESTER
18PD72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14
I. Preparing a project - brief proposal including
1. Problem Identification
III. A presentation includes the following:

IV. Consolidated Report Preparation

Total P: 420
18PD21 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

18PD22 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

3003
BASICS OF FLUID FLOW: Derivation of fluid flow governing equations - conservation of mass, momentum and energy –
relationship between mathematical terms and characteristics of fluid flow, Mathematical classification of flow, hyperbolic,
parabolic, elliptic and mixed flow types (12)
DISCRETISATION: Choice of grid - Finite difference method – Finite Volume Method - forward, backward and central
difference schemes, explicit and implicit methods - Properties of numerical solution methods, stability analysis, error estimation
– applications in heat transfer problems. (11)
NEED FOR CFD TECHNIQUES: Impact of nonconservation terms over the solution, artificial viscosity, upwind schemes, Cell
Reynolds number, courant number - Lax - Wendroff technique, MacCormack‟s technique, relaxation technique, ADI technique.
(11)
CFD TECHNIQUE FOR INCOMPRESSIBLE FLUID FLOW: Checker board distribution, staggered grid - pressure correction
technique, SIMPLE algorithm, applications in fluid flow problems. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Muralidhar K and Sundararajan T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, 2003.
2. Chung T J., “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, 2002.
3. Joel H Freziger and Milovan Peric, “Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics”, Springer Publications, 1999.
4. John D Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Basics with Applications”, McGraw Hill, 1995.
354
59th ACM 09.06.2018
5. Versteeg H K and Malalasekara W, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics - The Finite Volume Method',
Longman, 1995.
18PD23 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

3204
OVERVIEW OF OOAD: Objects – Operations and Methods – Encapsulation – Classes - Inheritance – Polymorphism - Object
oriented programming languages – Rational Unified Process – Software Development cycle with RUP- UML – Advantages of
UML- Requirement – Requirements Gathering – Requirements Management – Timing of Requirements Workflow – Cost of
Requirements Errors – Problem Analysis and Understanding User needs – Use cases – Prototyping - Use Case Analysis - Use
cases – Classification – Benefits – Steps in Use case modeling – Scope – Actors – Goal list – Finding use cases –
Documenting use cases – Notations – Relationships – Analysis Workflow – Analysis Workflow – Analysis Deliverables – Class
Analysis. (11)
USE CASE ANALYSIS: Architectural analysis – Packages – Post Analysis - Class Identification – Identifying classes – Entity
class – Control Class – Boundary class – Good and bad classes – Finding classes and their relationships – Responsibility –
Collaboration – Class diagrams – Notations - Class Relationship Analysis – UML Diagrams – Class diagram – Object Diagram
– Types of Class relationship – Reading Class associations – Multiplicity – Aggregation – Composition – Qualification –
Association class – Package diagram - Object state Analysis – Object State – UML and State – State Machine Diagrams –
Notations- State Transitions – Types of triggers – Signals (11)
OBJECT ACTIVITY ANALYSIS: Activity Diagrams – Branch – Signals – Partition Diagrams – Interaction Diagrams –
Sequence Diagrams - Design Workflow – Analysis and Design – Design in RUP – Design classes – class removal – Use case
design – construction - Object Design – Generalization – Modeling with Generalization – Modeling with Encapsulation –
Interfaces – Roles – Object Persistence – Active Objects - Synchronization - Template classes - System Design –
Collaborations - Modeling the Relationships of Collaborations - Using Collaborations in the Realization of Use Cases - Systems
and Subsystems – Components – Component diagrams – Deployment diagrams – Modeling the architecture of a system -
Other UML Diagrams - Composite Structure Diagram - Timing Diagram - State-as-Line Timing Diagram - State-As-Area Timing
Diagram - Interaction Overview Diagram (14)
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT USING RUP: Software development methodologies – Dimensions of the RUP Process –
Inception phase – Elaboration phase – Construction phase – Transition phase Refactoring – Steps for performing code
refactoring – Anti-patterns – Extract super class – Extract sub class - Software Reuse – What is software Reuse – Why reuse
software – Basic Techniques of Reuse – Techniques for Reuse asset management – Domain model and Domain architecture -
Domain analysis and design (9)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Activity Diagram for order Processing
2. State diagram for ATM application
3. State diagram for CPU execution
4. Collaboration diagram for database browser
5. Deployment diagram for TCP/IP layout
6. Class diagram for electronic shopping cart
7. Use case diagram for credit card processing
8. Package diagram for web server connection
9. Sequence diagram for database broachers
10. Interaction diagram for grocery shopping
Total L: 45+ T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Scott W. Ambler, Larry L. Constantine, “The Unified Process: Elaboration Phase: Best Practices in Implementing the UP”,
Focal Press, 2017
2. Chris Marshall, “Enterprise Modeling with UML: Designing Successful Software through Business Analysis”, Addison
Wesley, 2016.
3. Craig Larman, “Applying UML and Patterns : An Introduction to Object-Oriented Analysis and Design and Iterative
Development”, Prentice Hall PTR; 3rd Edition, 2016
4. Daryl Kulak and Eamonn Guiney, “Use Case: Requirements Context”, Addison Wesley, 2016
5. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “Unified Modeling Language User Guide”, Addison-Wesley Professional,
1st Edition, 2015
6. Grady Booch, “Object-Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2015
7. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Standard Object Modeling Language (Object Technology Series)”,
Addison-Wesley Professional; 3rd Edition, 2014.
18PD24 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

18PD25 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

3204
BASIC CONCEPTS: Introduction to databases - Conventional file Processing - Purpose of Database system - Characteristics
of database approach - Advantages of using DBMS - Database concept and architecture - Data Abstraction - Data Models -
Instances and schema - Data independence - schema architecture - Components of a DBMS - Database Languages -
Database Manager - Database Administrator - Database Users. (7)
DATA MODELING,RELATIONAL DATABASE MANIPULATION: Introduction - Data Associations - entities, attributes,
355
59th ACM 09.06.2018
relationships - Type role and structural constraints Weak and Strong entity types - Design of Entity relationship data models
(ERD) - Generalization - Aggregation - Conversion of ERD into tables - Applications - Introduction to Network data model and
Hierarchical data model - Introduction to Relational Data Model - Basic Concepts - Enforcing Data Integrity Constraints -
Relational Algebra Operations - Extended Relational Algebra Operations - Triggers - Introduction to views.
Introduction to Structured Query Language (SQL) - SQL Commands for Defining Database, Constructing Database,
Manipulations on Database - Basic Data Retrieval Operations - Advanced Queries in SQL Functions in SQL - Aggregation -
Categorization - Updates in SQL - Views in SQL (18)
DATA BASE DESIGN THEORY: Data base design process - Relational Database Design - Relation Schema - Anomalies in a
database - Functional dependencies - Axioms - Normal forms based on primary keys - Second Normal form, Third Normal
form, Boyce - Codd Normal form - Examples - Multi-valued dependencies - Fourth Normal form - Practical database design
tuning. (8)
FILE ORGANIZATION,DATABASE SECURITY, INTEGRITY CONTROL: Storage Device Characteristics - Constituents of a

file - Operations on file - Serial Files - Sequential Files - Index Sequential Files - Direct Files - Data Retrieval - Indexing using
Tree Structures - Security and Integrity threats - Defense mechanisms - Transaction and concurrency control mechanisms. (12)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. DDL, DML commands of SQL.
2. TCL commands.
3. Working with PL/SQL.
4. Triggers and stored procedures.
5. Packages in SQL
6. Applications illustrating Concurrency
Total L: 45+ T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Elmasri Rand Navathe SB, "Fundamentals of Database Systems", Pearson Education, 2016.
2. Silberschatz A andKorth Hand Sudarshan S, "Database System Concepts", McGraw Hill, 2011.
3. Raghu Ramakrishnan and Johannes Gehrke, "Database Management System", McGraw Hill, 2010.
4. Thomas Condly and Carolyn Begg, "Database System", Pearson Education, 2009.
5. Date C J, "An Introduction to Database Systems", Pearson Education Asia, 2008.
6. Graeme C Simsion, "Data Modeling Essentials", Dreamtech, 2006.
18PD26 OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

18PD27 ENTERPRISE COMPUTING

3003
ENTERPRISE DATA ENABLING: Enterprise Architectural overview - object oriented software development for enterprise -
Component Based software development for enterprise - Enterprise Data - Basis of JDBC, Drivers, Connection, Statement,
Result Set, Advanced JDBC features. (13)
ENTERPRISE WEB ENABLING: Web Browsers and Web Servers in Enterprise. Web Programming, Java Servlets - Java
Server pages, JavaServer Faces. (10)
MULTITIER ENTERPRISE COMPUTING: Java Beans, Enterprise Java Beans, Stateless Session Beans, Stateful Session
Beans, Message Driven Beans, Entity, (10)
ENTERPRISE ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION: Web Service standards, Describing and publishing, JAX-WS, WSDL,
SOAP, XML processing API - Java Message Service, Point to Point Messaging, Publish Subscribe Messaging, Java Script,
AJAX (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Eric Jendrock, Ian Evans, Devika Gollapudi, Kim Haase, Chinmayee Srivathsa, Ricardo Cervera-Navarro and William
Markito, “The Java EE 7 Tutorial”, Addison Wesley, 2014.
2. Steven Holzner, "Ajax : A Beginner's Guide", McGraw Hill, 2013.
3. David Geary, Cay S. Horstmann, "Core JavaServer Faces", Pearson, 2013.
4. George Reese, “Database programming with JDBC and Java”, O'Reily, 2012.
18PD28 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES

18PD29 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Relevance of and need for vibrational analysis. Mathematical modeling of vibrating systems - single degree
of freedom systems, free and forced vibrations, Transient Vibration - Impulse and arbitrary excitation, Laplace transform
formulation, response spectrum. (12)
TWO DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS: Generalized co-ordinates, principal co-ordinates, derivation of equations of
motion, co-ordinate coupling, Lagrange‟s equation. , Influence coefficients. (10)
356
59th ACM 09.06.2018
MULTI DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS: Derivation of equations of motion, orthogonality principle, calculation of natural
frequencies by Raleigh, Stodala, Dunkerley, Holzer and matrix iteration methods, geared system. (15)
NOISE, VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS AND CONTROL: Sound wave and its propagation, sound measurement,
Reverberation time and absorption of sound, sound isolation- machine enclosures, silencers and mufflers. Noise in gears,
bearings and chains, Transducers for vibration measurement – Mechanical Exciters, Electrodynamic Shaker – Dynamic Testing
of Machines and Structure – Experimental Modal Analysis, Methods of vibration control - excitation reduction at source,
undamped and damped dynamic vibration absorbers, vibration isolation. (8)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Lewis H Bell and Douglas H Bell, “Industrial Noise Control Fundamentals and Applications”, Marcel Dekker Inc., New
York, 2017.
2. Rao S S., "Mechanical Vibrations", Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Ashok Kumar Mallik, “Principles of Vibration Control”, Affiliated East-West Press (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 1990.
4. Seto, “Mechanical Vibrations", Schaum Outline Series, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York, 1990.
5. Grover G K., "Mechanical Vibrations ", New Chand and Brothers, Roorkey, 1989.
6. Tse Morse and Hinkle, “Mechanical Vibration”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi, 1987.
18PD30 METALLURGICAL FAILURE ANALYSIS

3003
FRACTURE: Stresses in body - Two dimensional and three dimensional states of stress, Mohr‟s circle - two and three
dimensions, hydrostatic stress, Von-mises, maximum shear stress (Tresca), octahedral shear stress. Fracture - Types of
fracture, Griffith crack theory, stress analysis of cracks, metallographic aspects of fracture. Brittle, ductile fractures, notch
effects, fracture curve, R curve, fracture under combined stresses, effect of hydrostatic pressure on fracture, probabilistic
aspects of fracture mechanics, toughness of materials. (12)
FATIGUE: Statistical nature of fatigue, S-N curve, low cycle fatigue, strain life equations, structural feature of fatigue, fatigue
crack propagation, effect of stress concentration, size, surface properties, metallurgical variables on fatigue, case studies,
designing against fatigue, improvements after failure and service, fatigue of bolts, welded and adhesive joints. (12)
CORROSION AND WEAR FAILURES: Factors influencing corrosion failures, analysis of corrosion failures, overview of various
types of corrosion, stress corrosion cracking - sources, characteristics of stress corrosion cracking, analysis of stress corrosion
cracking, various types of hydrogen damage failures, corrective and preventive action. Types of wear, role of friction in wear,
lubricated and non-lubricated wear, analysis of wear failures. (10)
ELEVATED TEMPERATURE FAILURES: Creep, stress rupture, elevated temperature fatigue, metallurgical instabilities,
environment induced failure, tests for analysis of failure at elevated temperatures. FMEA: Definition - analysis causes of failure
- modes - ranks of failure modes - fault tree analysis - case studies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. George E Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, Create Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2014
2. Richard W Hertzberg, “Deformation and Fracture Mechanism of Engineering Materials”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2012.
3. Courtney T H., “Mechanical Behavior of Materials”, Overseas Press (India) Private Limited, 2006.
4. Jaap Schijve, “Fatigue of Structures and Materials”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001.
5. William D Callister, “Material Science and Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 1997.
6. ASM Metals Handbook, “Failure Analysis and Prevention”, ASM Metals Park, USA, Vol. 10, 1995.
18PD31 LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

18PD32 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS

Vide Manufacturing Engineering 18PP32
18PD33 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

3003
FOUNDATIONS OF TQM: Understanding quality, quality, competitiveness and customers, building quality chains, managing
quality, quality in all functions, models and frame works for total quality management, Early TQM frameworks - quality award
models - the four Ps and three Cs of TQM - a new model for TQM. Design, innovation and improvement - the design process -
quality function deployment (QFD) - the house of quality - specifications and standards - design in the service sectors - failure
mode effect and criticality analysis (FMECA) - The links between good design and managing the business. (15)
PROCESS REDESIGN / ENGINEERING: Reengineering the organization - process for redesign - the redesign process - the
people and the leaders. Human Resource Management (HRM) - strategic alignment of HRM policies - effective communication
- employee empowerment and involvement - training and development - teams and team work - review, continuous
improvement and conclusions - organizing people for quality - quality circles and kaizen teams. (10)
COMMUNICATIONS, INNOVATION AND LEARNING: Communicating the quality strategy - communicating the quality
message - communication, learning, education and training - a systematic approach to education and training for quality -
turning educations and training into learning - the practicalities of sharing knowledge and learning. TQM and the management
of change - planning the implementation of TQM - sustained improvement. (10)
357
59th ACM 09.06.2018
QUALITY AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS: ISO 9000 series of standards - sector specific standards -
ISO 9001 requirements - implementation - documentation - writing the documents - internal audits - registration - ISO 14000
series standards - concepts of ISO 14001 - requirements of ISO 14001 - benefits of EMS - integrating ISO 14000 with ISO
9000 - relationship between health and safety. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mukherjee P.N., “Total Quality Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
2. Besterfield D H et al, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Private Limited, 2004.
3. Oakland J S., “Total Quality Management - Text with Cases”, Butterworth - Heinemann - An Imprint of Elseiver, First
Indian Print, 2003.
4. Joseph Berk and Susan Berk, “Total Quality Management: Implementing Continuous Improvement”, Sterling Publisher,
1993.
18PD34 MECHANICS OF POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES

18PD35 DESIGN OPTIMIZATION

3003
INTRODUCTION TO OPTIMIZATION: Defining the optimization problem, Kuhn tucker conditions, lagrangian and duality,
Single objective function - functions of one variable, unconstrained functions in N variables, constrained functions in N
variables, linear programming – simplex method. (12)
APPROXIMATION TECHNIQUES: Genetic Algorithm, Artificial Neural Network, simulated annealing, Ant Colony Optimization.
(10)
MULTI-OBJECTIVE FUNCTION PROBLEMS: Introduction, salient features, pareto optimality, global function/weighted sum,
epsilon - constraint and lexicographic methods, goal programming, Min-max solutions. (12)
MULTIDISCIPLINARY DESIGN OPTIMIZATION ARCHITECTURE: Introduction, terminology and notations, decomposition

into subtasks, structuring the underlying information, system Analysis, Multidisciplinary design optimization methods. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jaroslaw Sobieszczanski-Sobieski, Alan Morris and Michel van Tooren, “Multidisciplinary Design Optimization Supported
by Knowledge Based Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, Pondicherry, 2015.
2. Teofilo F. Gonzalez, “Handbook of Approximation Algorithms and Metaheuristics”, Chapman and Hall/CRC, 2007.
3. Vanderplaats, G. N., “Numerical Optimization Techniques for Engineering Design: With Applications”, McGraw Hill, New
York, 1984.
AUDIT COURSES
18PD81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18PD82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

ONE CREDIT COURSES OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
For the detailed Syllabi of all the one credit courses offered by Production Engineering department which are listed in this
programme scheme refer to the syllabi of M.E Manufacturing Engineering programme.
SCIENCE ELECTIVES
For the detailed syllabi of the science electives offered by Science Departments which are listed in this programme scheme
refer to the syllabi of M.E Manufacturing Engineering programme.
For the detailed syllabi of the one credit courses offered by Humanities department which are listed in this programme scheme
358
59th ACM 09.06.2018

ME VIRTUAL PROTOTYPING AND DIGITAL MANUFACTURING
(2018 REGULATIONS)

I SEMESTER
18PM01 Linear Systems Theory 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PM02 Digital Manufacturing 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
Geometric Modeling and Computer Aided PC
18PM03 3 2 0 4 50 50 100
Design
18PM04 Computer Graphics for Virtual Reality I 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Modeling and Simulation of Virtual Reality PC
18PM05 3 0 0 3 50 50 100
Systems
18PM51 Object Computing and Data Structures EEC
0 0 4 2 50 50 100
Laboratory
18PM81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18PM06 Product Lifecycle Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18PM07 Computer Graphics for Virtual Reality II 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Mathematical Modeling and Computer PC
18PM08 3 2 0 4 50 50 100
Aided Engineering
Scientific and Engineering Data PC
18PM09 3 0 0 3 50 50 100
Visualization
18PM__ Elective -1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM__ Elective - 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM52 Virtual Modeling and Simulation Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18PM61 Industry Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 100 0 100 EEC
18PM82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 hrs 18 2 8 23 450 350 800
III SEMESTER
18PM__ Elective - 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM__ Elective - 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM__ Elective - 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM__ Elective - 6 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM53 Virtual Prototyping and Design Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18PM71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 EEC
Total 22 hrs 12 0 10 17 350 250 600
IV SEMESTER
18PM72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
18PM21 Simulation and Modeling Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM22 Mechanics of Robot 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM23 Object Oriented Analysis and Design 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18PM24 Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM25 Database Management Systems 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18PM26 Data Analytics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PE
18PM27 Enterprise Computing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM28 Human Computer Interaction 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM29 Image Processing and Machine Vision 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM30 Mechatronics System 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM31 Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18PM32 Industrial Internet of Things 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
359
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SCIENCE ELECTIVES


360
59th ACM 09.06.2018
I SEMESTER
18PM01 LINEAR SYSTEMS THEORY

2203
VECTOR SPACES: Real vector spaces, subspaces, linear independence, basis and dimension, inner product space,
orthonormal bases, Gram-Schmidt process, linear transformation, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization. (8+7)
STATE SPACE LINEAR SYSTEMS AND SOLUTION TO STATE EQUATIONS: State space linear systems, block diagrams,
linearization of nonlinear systems, linear time variant (LTV) system, linear time invariant (LTI) system, solution to homogeneous
system, solution to non-homogeneous linear system, solving continuous time system. (8+7)
SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROLLABILITY: Matrix norms, Lyapunov stability, eigenvalue conditions for Lyapunov
stability, Lyapunov stability theorem, BIBO stability, time domain conditions for BIBO stability, BIBO versus Lyapunov stability,
controllable and reachable subspaces, reachability and controllability Gramians, controllable systems, eigenvector test for
controllability, Lyapunov test for controllability. (8+7)
OBSERVABILITY AND MINIMAL REALIZATIONS: Output feedback, unobservable subspaces, unconstructible subspace,
observability and constructability Gramians, observability tests, minimal realizations, Markov parameters, similarity of minimal
realizations, order of a minimal SISO realization. (8+7)
Total L: 32 + T: 28 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, “Elementary Linear Algebra: Applications Version”, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi, 2018.
2. David C Lay, “Linear Algebra and Its Applications”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017.
3. Chen C T., “Linear System Theory and Design”, Oxford University Press, USA, 2009.
4. João and P Hespanha, “Linear Systems Theory”, Princeton University Press, Princeton, New Jersey, 2009.
5. Panos J Antsaklis and Anthony N Michel, “A Linear Systems Primer”, Birkhäuser, Boston, 2007.
18PM02 DIGITAL MANUFACTURING

3204
VIRTUAL PROTOTYPING AND DIGITAL MANUFACTURING: History, Need for digital manufacturing, Virtual prototyping in
product development, Virtual prototyping tools, Digital technologies, Impact on economy, Digital technology in manufacturing,
Architecture of digital manufacturing system, Operation mode and applications of digital manufacturing. (12)
CAD/CAM/CAE: Role of CAD in design, Types and applications of design models, Need for reverse engineering, Reverse
engineering process, Reverse engineering hardware and software, CNC - Tool path generation and simulation, CMM – History,
economy, functions and operation method, Additive manufacturing – Need, applications and types – FEM – Node generation
techniques, Mesh generation techniques. (12)
DIGITAL FACTORY AND VIRTUAL MANUFACTURING: Scope, Methods and tools used in virtual manufacturing, Benefits,
Virtual factory simulation (10)
INTERNET OF THINGS: Applications, IoT data management requirements, Architecture of IoT, Technological challenges,
RFID and Electronic Product Code (EPC) network, The web of things, Issues in implementation of IoT. (11)
TUTORIALS: 3D Modeling of assemblies and systems, Simulation of machining processes using CAM packages, Reverse
Engineering of engineering components. (30)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Adrian McEwan and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiley, 2013.
2. Frank W Liou, “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering Application – A Toolbox for Prototype Developments”, CRC Press,
2011.
3. Vinesh Raja and Kiran J Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering-An Industrial Perspective”, Springer-Verlag, 2008.
4. Gerard Jounghyun Kim, “Designing Virtual Systems: The Structured Approach”, Springer, 2005.
5. James WCortada, “The Digital Hand - How Computers Changed the Work of American Manufacturing, Transportation,
and Retail Industries”, Oxford University Press, 2003.
18PM03 GEOMETRIC MODELING AND COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN

vide Product Design and Commerce 18PD03
18PM04 COMPUTER GRAPHICS FOR VIRTUAL REALITY I

3003
GRAPHICS SYSTEM AND MODELS: Applications of Computer Graphics, Graphics System, Physical and Synthetic Images,
Imaging Systems, Graphics Architectures. OpenGL GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING: The OpenGL API, Primitives and Attributes,
Color, Control functions, Adding Interaction. (11)
VIEWING: Positioning of the Camera, Parallel Projections, Perspective Projections, OpenGL Projection Matrices. GEOMETRIC
OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS: Scalars, Points, and Vectors, Three-Dimensional Primitives, Coordinate Systems and
Frames, Frames in OpenGL, Matrix and Vector Classes, Modeling a Colored Cube, Affine Transformations - Translation,
Rotation, and Scaling, Transformations in Homogeneous Coordinates, Concatenation of Transformations, Transformation
Matrices in OpenGL, Interfaces to Three-Dimensional Applications, Quaternion. (12)
361
59th ACM 09.06.2018
VERTICES TO FRAGMENTS: Basic Implementation Strategies, Four Major Tasks, Clipping - Line Clipping, Polygon Clipping,
Clipping of Other Primitives, Clipping in Three Dimensions, Polygon Rasterization, Hidden-Surface Removal, Antialiasing,
Display Considerations. LIGHTING AND SHADING: Light and Matter, Light Sources, The Phong Reflection Model,
Computation of Vectors, Polygonal Shading, Approximation of a Sphere by Recursive Subdivision. (11)
LIGHTING AND SHADING: Specifying Lighting Parameters, Implementing a Lighting Model, Shading of the Sphere Model,
Per-Fragment Lighting, Global Illumination. HIERARCHICAL MODELING: Symbols and Instances, Hierarchical Models, A
Robot Arm, Trees and Traversal, Use of Tree Data Structures, Other Tree Structures, Scene Graphs, Open Scene Graph.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Edward Angel, “Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach Using WegGL”, 7th Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2014
2. John F. Hughes, James D. Foley, “Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice”, Addison-Wesley, 2014.
3. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C Version”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
4. David Shreinerand Bill TheKhronos OpenGL ARB Working Group. “OpenGL Programming Guide: The Official Guide to
Learning OpenGL, Versions 3.0 and 3.1” Pearson Education, 2009.
5. David F Rogers, “Procedural Elements for Computer Graphics”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.
18PM05 MODELING AND SIMULATION OF VIRTUAL REALITY SYSTEMS

3003
VIRTUAL REALITY AND ADVANCES IN 3D USER INTERFACES: The historical development of VR: Scientific landmarks
Computer Graphics, Real-time computer graphics, Flight simulation, Virtual environments, Requirements for VR, benefits of
Virtual reality, 3D User Interfaces for the Real World, AR Interfaces as 3D Data Browsers, 3D Augmented Reality Interfaces,
Augmented Surfaces and Tangible Interfaces, Agents in AR, Transitional AR-VR Interfaces - The future of 3D User Interfaces,
Mixed reality. (9)
VIRTUAL REALITY HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE: Input device characteristics, Desktop input devices, Tracking Devices,
Special Purpose Input Devices, Direct Human Input, Home- Brewed Input Devices, Choosing Input Devices for 3D Interfaces -
World Space, World Coordinate, World Environment, Objects - Geometry, Position/Orientation, Hierarchy, Bounding Volume,
Scripts and other attributes, Tessellated Data, Cullers and Occluders, Lights and Cameras, Scripts, Interaction - Simple,
Feedback, Graphical User Interface, Room/Stage/Area Descriptions, World Authoring and Playback, VR toolkits, Available
software in the market. (12)
3D INTERACTION TECHNIQUES: Structured Approach to Interaction / Interface Design, Metaphors, Multimodality, Interaction
Techniques for 3D Manipulation, Design Guidelines - 3D Travel Tasks, Travel Techniques, Theoretical Foundations of
Wayfinding, User Centered Wayfinding Support, Environment Centered Wayfinding Support, Evaluating Wayfinding Aids,
System Control, Classification, Graphical Menus, Voice Commands, Gestural Commands, Tools, Multimodal System Control
Techniques. (12)
DESIGNING AND DEVELOPING VIRTUAL SYSTEMS: Strategies for Designing and Developing the system, Modeling an
object, scene construction, reference frames, modeling of function and behavior, estimating the performance of system, LOD,
tuning the system, Handling Collision, Collision Detection with Line Segments, Collision Among Polygonal Models, Bounding
Volumes, Collision Among Bounding Volumes, Motion and Collision Response, Deformation, Motion Control, Forward and
Inverse Kinematics. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Alan B Craig, William R Sherman and Jeffrey D Will, “Developing Virtual Reality Applications: Foundations of Effective
Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2009.
2. Gerard Jounghyun Kim, “Designing Virtual Systems: The Structured Approach”, 2005.
3. Doug A Bowman, Ernest Kuijff, Joseph J LaViola, Jr and Ivan Poupyrev, “3D User Interfaces, Theory and Practice”,
Addison Wesley, USA, 2005.
4. Burdea, Grigore C and Philippe Coiffet, “Virtual Reality Technology”, Wiley Interscience, India, 2003.
5. William R Sherman and Alan B Craig, “Understanding Virtual Reality: Interface, Application and Design (The Morgan
Kaufmann Series in Computer Graphics)”.Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, San Francisco, CA, 2002.
6. John Vince, “Virtual Reality Systems”, Addison Wesley, 1995.
18PM51 OBJECT COMPUTING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY

II SEMESTER
18PM06 PRODUCT LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

18PM07 COMPUTER GRAPHICS FOR VIRTUAL REALITY II

3003
COLOR MODELS AND COLOR SUMMARY APPLICATIONS: Properties of Light – Standard Primaries and the Chromaticity
Diagram – Intuitive Color Concepts – RGB Color Model – CMY Color Model – HSV Color Model – Conversion between HSV
362
59th ACM 09.06.2018
and RGB Models – Conversion Between HSV and RGB Models – Color Selection and Applications. DISCRETE
TECHNIQUES: Buffers – Digital Images – Writing into Buffers – Mapping Methods. (10)
DISCRETE TECHNIQUES: Texture Mapping – Texture Mapping in OpenGL – Texture Generation – Environment Maps –
Reflection Map – Bump Mapping – Compositing Techniques – Sampling and Aliasing. ADVANCED RENDERING: Going
Beyond Pipeline Rendering – Ray Tracing – Building a Simple Ray Tracer – The Rendering Equation - Radiosity – RenderMan
- Parallel Rendering – Volume Rendering – Isosurfaces and Marching Cubes – Mesh Simplification – Direct Volume Rendering
– Image-Based Rendering. (12)
FRACTALS: Modeling – Sierpinski Gasket – Coastline Problem – Fractal Geometry – Fractal Dimension – Recursively defined
curves – Koch curves – C curves – Dragons – Space filling curves – Turtle graphics – Grammar based models –Graftals–
Volumetric Examples – k-midpoint subdivision – Fractal Brownian Motion – Fractal Mountains – Iteration in the Complex plane
– Mandelbrot Set. COMPUTER ANIMATION: Design of Animation Sequences – General Computer-Animation – Functions –
Raster Animations (11)
ANIMATION: Computer-Animation Languages – Key-Frame Systems – Motion Specifications, Kinematics and Dynamics.
VIRTUAL REALITY MODELLING LANGUAGE: Introduction, exploring and building a world, building object, lighting, sound
and complex shapes, animation and user interaction, colors, normals and textures, nodes references. Special Applications:
Stereo display programming, multiport display systems, multi-screen display system, fly mode navigation, walk through
navigation, virtual track ball navigation. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ann Latham Cudworth, “Virtual World Design”, CRC Press, 2014.
2. Edward Angel, “Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach Using WegGL”, 7th Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2014.
3. John F. Hughes, James D. Foley, “Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice”, Addison-Wesley, 2014.
4. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C Version”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
5. Jed Hartman, Silicon Graphics Incorporated, Josie Wernecke, “The VRML 2.0 Handbook: The Official Guide to
Constructing Virtual Worlds”, Addison-Wesley Longman, 1996.
18PM08 MATHEMATICAL MODELING AND COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING

3204
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND NUMERICAL METHODS TO SOLVE PDEs: Elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic
equations - physical significance – Use of Central Differences, Central differences, Crank-Nicolson and ADI methods -
examples - Stability and error of numerical schemes. (10)
VARIATIONAL CALCULUS AND FINITE ELEMENT METHOD: Introduction, Solutions selected differential equations by
variational methods, Rayleigh - Ritz method - Finite element method - Concepts, nodes, elements, connectivity, Coordinate
systems, shape functions, stiffness matrix, Global stiffness matrix, Isoparametric elements, solution methods – Examples - Use
of software . (10)
FLUID FLOW: Introduction to computational fluid dynamics (finite difference, finite element techniques) - Formulation of fluid
flow problems (simple cases only) - Navier-Stokes equation - solution techniques - examples, solution of fluid flow problems
and Multi-physics Problems using software. (15)
HEAT TRANSFER: Derivation of energy equation in general form -Solutions using numerical methods (finite difference and
finite element techniques), solutions using FEA and CFD techniques for conductive and convective heat transfer problems.
(10)
TUTORIALS: Plotting of fields graphically and using software, modeling and analysis of deformation of rigid bodies using FEA,
modeling and analysis simple fluid flow problems, modeling and analysis of fluid flow problems with multi-physics approach.
(30)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Reddy J N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. Singerasu S Rao, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2005.
3. Curtis F Gerald Patrick O Wheatley, “Applied Numerical Analysis”, Pearson, 2004.
4. Muralidhar K and Sundararajan T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa Publications, 2003.
5. Patankar and Suhas V., “Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow”, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1980.
6. Elsgolts L., “Differential Equations and the Calculus of Variations”, MIR Publishers, 1977.
18PM09 SCIENTIFIC AND ENGINEERING DATA VISUALIZATION

3003
SCALAR VISUALIZATION TECHNIQUES: Nature of scientific and engineering data, Visualization Goals, Representation of
mesh and results data, mapping analysis results to Visualizations, One dimensional, two dimensional and three dimensional
Scalar fields - Element face colour coding - contour display - isosurface techniques - Marching Cubes algorithm - Particle
sampling. (12)
VISUALIZATION OF FLOW DATA: Tensors - Visualization mappings of flow data, Vector mapping - elementary icons -
particle traces – streaklines, streamlines – streamribbons and streamtubes - global icons - Tensor mappings - elementary icons
- global icons. (11)
CONTINUUM VOLUME DISPLAY: Acquisition Techniques, Volume rendering Terminology, Surface and Volume rendering
techniques, Optimisation, Applications. (12)
363
59th ACM 09.06.2018
APPLICATIONS OF ENGINEERING DATA VISAULIZATION AND FUTURE TRENDS: Case studies on construction, Product
design, Healthcare - Trends in Computing Hardware, Animation, Video and multi-media, software trends in Visualization. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Gavin Carver and Christine White, “Computer Visualization for the Theater – 3D Modelling for the Designers”, Taylor &
Francis, 2016.
2. Torsten Möller and Bernd Hamann Robert D Russell, “Mathematical Foundations of Scientific Visualization, Computer
Graphics and Massive Data Exploration”, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2009.
3. Helen Wright, “Introduction to Scientific Visualization”, Springer, 2007.
4. Richard S Gallagher, “Computer Visualization: Graphics Techniques for Engineering and Scientific Analysis”, CRC Press,
CRC Press LLC, 1994.
5. Elsgolts L., “Differential Equations and the Calculus of Variations”, MIR Publishers, 1977.
18PM52 VIRTUAL MODELING AND SIMULATION LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on relevant hardware/software for a duration of 20
technology/knowledge in that area by literature review (minimum 5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, hardware and
software that can be used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments/simulation and their interpretation
with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the
end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 40 hours.
1. Introduction to virtual reality hardware and software.

2. Conversion of CAD models into virtual reality models.
3. Adding behavior to 3D models.
Total P: 60
18PM61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
Students will make presentations on current topics related to their specialization and prepare a report for the same. The
presentation and the report will be evaluated by a review committee constituted by the Head of the Department .A minimum of
two industrial visits are to be arranged as part of the course and the students are expected to make a presentation on their
learning from the industrial visit. A viva-voce will be held at the end of the course.
Total P: 60
III SEMESTER
18PM53 VIRTUAL PROTOTYPING AND DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
In this course, students will be provided with an orientation programme on relevant hardware/software for a duration of 20
technology/knowledge in that area by literature review (minimum 5 latest papers), objectives, methodology, hardware and
software that can be used (from the orientation programme), results from the experiments/simulation and their interpretation
with respect to the assumptions/background and a formal conclusion are expected in the report which is to be submitted at the
end of the semester. This work is evaluated for the credit assigned. Expected hours needed for this work is 40 hours.

1. Creation of assemblies and systems in virtual environment.
2. Creation of digital mockup to study ergonomic and aesthetic aspects.
3. Use of VR hardware peripherals to create immersive environment for assemblies and systems evaluation.
Total P: 60
18PM71 PROJECT WORK I
0063
Total P: 90
364
59th ACM 09.06.2018
IV SEMESTER
18PM72 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 28 14
I. Preparing a project - brief proposal including
1. Problem Identification
III. A presentation includes the following:

IV. Consolidated Report Preparation

Total P: 420
18PM21 SIMULATION AND MODELING TECHNIQUES

3 003
INTRODUCTION TO SIMULATION: Advantages and disadvantages of simulation, areas of application, systems and system
environment, components of a system, discrete and continuous system, model of a system, types of models (10)
RANDOM NUMBER GENERATION: Properties of random numbers, Techniques for generating random numbers, linear
congruential method, combined linear congruential generators - Random number streams, midsquare method, feedback shift
register generators, tests for random numbers- Frequency tests - the Kolmogorov_Smirnov test, the Chi-square tests. (12)
RANDOM VARIATE GENERATION: Inverse transform technique, exponential distribution, uniform distribution, Weibull
distribution. Empirical continuous distributions - Empirical discrete distribution, discrete uniform distribution, geometric
distribution, acceptance - rejection technique - Poisson distribution, gamma distribution, discrete transformation for the normal
and lognormal distributions, convolution method. (13)
SIMULATION OF QUEUEING and INVENTORY SYSTEMS: Simulation of a single server queue, simulation of a two server
queue. Elements of inventory theory, inventory models, simulation of inventory control. CASE STUDIES: Simulation of
manufacturing and material handling system, simulation of computer systems, simulation of computer networks. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Averil M Law, “Simulation Modeling and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Narsingh Deo, “System Simulation with Digital Computer”, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Jerry Banks, John S Carson, Barry L Nelson, David M Nicol and Shahabudeen P, “Discrete-Event System Simulation”,
Pearson, New Delhi, 2011.
4. Andrew F Seila, Vlatko Ceric, Pandu R and Tadikamalla, “Applied Simulation Modeling”, Thomson Learning, University of
California, 2003.
5. Feurzeig, Wallace, Roberts and Nancy, “Modeling and Simulation in Science and Mathematics Education”, Springer
–Verlag, New York, 1999.
18PM22 MECHANICS OF ROBOT

18PM23 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

18PM24 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING

18PM25 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

18PM26 DATA ANALYTICS

3204
365
59th ACM 09.06.2018
INTRODUCTION AND LIFECYCLE: Types of digital data – Classification of digital data – Characteristics of data – Evolution of
Big Data – Definition of Big Data – Challenges with Big Data – Volume –Velocity – Variety – Big Data overview – State of the
practice in analytics - Data analytics lifecycle overview – Discovery – Preparation – Model planning. (12)
DATA AND PREDICTIVE ANALYTICS: Model building – Communication results – Operationalize – Data collection - Sampling
- Preprocessing - Linear regression - Logistic regression - Support Vector Machines - Ensemble methods - Multiclass
classification techniques - Evaluating predictive models - Case Study: Credit risk modeling, Recommender systems. (11)
SOCIAL NETWORK ANALYTICS: Social network definitions - Social network metrics - Social network learning - Relational
neighborhood classifier - Probabilistic relational neighborhood classifier - Relational logistic regression - Collective inferencing -
Egonets – Bigraphs - Case Study: Web analytics, Social media analytics – Business process analytics. (11)
ADVANCED ANALYTICS TECHNOLOGY AND TOOLS: Streaming data analytics - Map Reduce framework - Hadoop,
Twister, SPARK, Tools: Pig - Hive - Mahout - Sqoop – Flume, Open source databases: Hbase - MongoDB. - Neo4j. (11)
TUTORIALS: (30)
1. Map Reduce using Hadoop.
2. Predict using Apache Mahout.
3. Social Network Analytics using Spark.
4. Model development for retail, finance, fraud detection, stock market analysis, banking
5. Model development for social network, medical diagnosis, natural language processing
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. EMC Education Services, “Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing, Visualizing and Preserving
Data”, Wiley, USA, 2015.
2. Mohammed Guller, “Big Data Analytics with Spark”, A Press, USA, 2015.
3. Seema Acharya, Subhashini Chellapan, “Big Data and Analytics”, Wiley, USA, 2015.
4. Bart Baesens, “Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science and its Applications”, Wiley, USA,
2014.
5. Peter Zadrozny and Raghu Kodali, “Big Data Analytics using Splunk”, USA, 2013.
6. Eelco Plugge, Tim Hawkins, Peter Membrey, “The Definitive Guide to Mongodb: The NoSQL Database for Cloud and
Desktop Computing”, Apress, USA, 2010.
18PM27 ENTERPRISE COMPUTING

18PM28 HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION

3003
INTRODUCTION AND DESIGN ISSUES: Introduction to Human-Computer Interaction as an emerging field : Disciplines
contributing to HCI, Human Information Processing Psychology of everyday things, Importance of human factors in design –
cultural , emotional, technological, business, Need Satisfaction curve of technology, Levels of human computer interaction
DESIGN ISSUES: Graphical user interface – popularity of graphics, the concept of direct manipulation, graphical system,
Characteristics, Web user – Interface popularity, characteristics - Principles of user interface. Quality of Service,
Introduction: Models of Response - Time Impacts, Expectations and Attitudes, User Productivity, Variability in Response Time,
Frustrating Experiences - Error Messages, Display Design, Balancing Function and Fashion. (12)
INTERACTION STYLES: Screen Designing:- Design goals – Screen planning and purpose, organizing screen elements,
ordering of screen data and content – screen navigation and flow – Visually pleasing composition – amount of information –
focus and emphasis – presentation information simply and meaningfully – information retrieval on web – statistical graphics –
Technological consideration in interface design. Direct Manipulation and Virtual Environments - Examples of Direct
Manipulation, Discussion of Direct Manipulation-3D Interfaces, Teleportation, Virtual and Augmented Reality. Overview of Menu
Selection, Form Fill-in and Dialog Boxes. (10)
MOBILE HCI: Mobile Ecosystem: Platforms, Application frameworks - Types of Mobile Applications: Widgets, Applications,
Games - Mobile Information Architecture, Mobile 2.0, Mobile Design: Elements of Mobile Design, Tools. (10)
EVALUATING INTERFACE DESIGNS: Introduction - Software tools – Specification methods, interface Expert Reviews -
Usability Testing and Laboratories - Survey Instruments, Acceptance Tests - Evaluation During Active Use - Controlled
Psychologically Oriented Experiments, Navigation schemes selection of window, selection of devices based and screen based
controls. Interaction Devices – Keyboard and function keys – pointing devices – speech recognition digitization and generation
– image and video displays. (13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ben Shneidermann, “Designing the User Interface”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2016.
2. Rogers, Sharps and Wiley Dreamtech, “Interaction Design Prece”, 2015.
3. Olsen D.R., “Human – Computer Interaction”, Cengage Learning, 2010.
4. Alan Dix, Janet Fincay, Gre Goryd, Abowd and Russell Bealg, “Human – Computer Interaction”, Pearson Education, 2009.
5. Wilbert O Galitz and Wiley DreamTech, “The Essential Guide to User Interface Design”, 2007.
6. Soren Lauesen, “User Interface Design”, Pearson Education, 2004.
18PM29 IMAGE PROCESSING AND MACHINE VISION

366
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18PM30 MECHATRONICS SYSTEM

18PM31 MACHINE LEARNING

3 003
INTRODUCTION: Overview of machine learning - related areas – applications - software tools. PARAMETRIC REGRESSION:
Linear regression - polynomial regression - locally weighted regression - numerical optimization - gradient descent - kernel
methods. (10)
GENERATIVE LEARNING: Gaussian parameter estimation - maximum likelihood estimation - Bayesian estimation.
DISCRIMINATIVE LEARNING: Linear discrimination - logistic regression- logit and logistic functions. (10)
NEURAL NETWORKS: The perceptron algorithm - multilayer perceptrons – back propagation - nonlinear regression -
multiclass discrimination - training procedures - localized network structure - dimensionality reduction interpretation - Support
vectormachines. (10)
GRAPHICAL AND SEQUENTIAL MODELS: Bayesian networks - conditional independence - Markov random fields - inference
in graphical models - belief propagation - Markov models - hidden Markov models - decoding states from observations -
learning HMM parameters. DIMENSIONALITY REDUCTION: Feature selection - principal component analysis - linear
discriminant analysis - factor analysis - independent component analysis - multidimensional scaling - manifold learning. (15)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Shai Shalev Shwartz, ‎Shai Ben-David, “Understanding‎Machine‎Learning: From Theory to Algorithms" , Cambridge
2. Alpaydin E., “Machine Learning”, MIT Press, 2010.
3. Mitchell T., “Machine Learning”, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
4. Bishop C, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2006.
5. Hastie T., Tibshirani R. and Friedman J., “Elements of Statistical Learning”, Springer, 2001.
6. Duda R., Hart E and Stork D, “Pattern Classification”, Wiley-Interscience, 2000.
18PM32 INDUSTRIAL INTERNET OF THINGS

AUDIT COURSES
18PM81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18PM82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

SCIENCE ELECTIVES
For the detailed syllabi of the science electives offered by Science Departments which are listed in this programme scheme
For the detailed syllabi of the one credit courses offered by Humanities department which are listed in this programme scheme
367
59th ACM 09.06.2018
M E BIOMETRICS AND CYBER SECURITY
(2018 REGULATIONS)
Course Lectures/Week Maximum Marks
I SEMESTER
18NB01 Mathematical Foundations for Cyber Security 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 FC
18NB02 Advanced Algorithms and Analysis 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 FC
18NB03 Cyber Investigations 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18NB04 Applied Cryptography 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18NB05 Biometric Technologies 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18NB51 Cyber Investigations Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18NB81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 24 Hrs 14 6 4 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18NB06 Cyber Physical Systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18NB07 Biometric Image Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18NB08 Digital Forensics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18NB09 Cloud Security 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
sProfessional Elective -1
18NB__ 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18NB__ Professional Elective - 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB52 Biometric Image Processing Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18NB61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18NB82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 Hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18NB53 Security and Penetration Testing Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18NB71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18NB72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
18NB21 Advanced Persistent Threat 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB22 Machine Vision 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB23 Information Ethics and Laws 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB24 Operating Systems Security 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB25 Speech Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB26 Deep Learning 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB27 Secure Coding 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB28 Pattern Recognition 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB29 Digital Watermarking and Steganography 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB30 Design and Analysis of Security Protocols 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB31 Security in Internet of Things 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
368
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18NB32 Cyber Security Governance, Risk Management
3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
and Compliance.
18NB33
Content Based Image Retrieval 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB34
Human Computer Interaction 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB35
Hardware Implementation of Cryptosystems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB36
Filter Bank Designs for Biomedical Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18NB37 Malware Analysis and Reverse Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
369
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18NB01 MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATIONS FOR CYBER SECURITY

2203
NUMBER THEORY: The fundamental theorem of arithmetic, Division algorithm, Euclidean algorithm, Extended Euclidean algorithm.
Arithmetical function - Euler totient function – Congruence, Residue classes and complete residue system, Linear congruences,
Euler- Fermat theorem, Chinese remainder theorem, Probabilistic primality tests – Solovay - Strassen test - Miller-Rabin test. (8+7)
ALGEBRAIC STRUCTURES: Groups – cyclic groups, subgroups and cosets, modulo groups - primitive roots - discrete logarithms.
Rings – sub rings, fields – finite fields, elliptic curve cryptosystem, lattices- basic concepts, shortest vector problem, lattice basis
reduction algorithm. (8+7)
PROBABILITY THEORY: One dimensional random variables - families of discrete random variables - Bernoulli, Binomial, Poisson,
Geometric, families of continuous random variables - Uniform, Normal, Exponential, Usage of probability in encryption. (8+7)
RANDOM NUMBER AND RANDOM VARIATE GENERATION: LCG, In distinguishability of probability distributions - Next Bit
Predictors - The Blum-Blum-Shub Generator – security of the BBS Generator, Random variates generation – Bernoulli, uniform,
normal, exponential. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
1. Douglas Stinson, Cryptography – Theory and Practice, CRC Press, New York, 2017.
2. Nigel Smart, Cryptography Made Simple, Springer International Publishing, Switzerland, 2016.
3. Roy D.Yates and David J Goodman, “Probability and Stochastic Processes - A Friendly Introduction for Electrical and
Computer Engineers”, John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
4. Andrew F.Seila, Vlatko Ceric, PanduTadikamalla, Applied Simulation Modelling, Thomson learning, New York 2003.
5. Tom M Apostol, Introduction to Analytic Number theory, Narosa Publising House, New Delhi, 1998.
6. D. S. Malik, J. Mordeson, M. K. Sen, Fundamentals of abstract algebra, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.
18NB02 ADVANCED ALGORITHMS AND ANALYSIS

vide Information Technology 18NN02
18NB03 CYBER INVESTIGATIONS

3003
COMPUTER SECURITY: Threats, Vulnerabilities, Controls, Identification and Authentication , Various Attack methods- Passive
Attack, Active Attack, Cyber stalking, Basic Encryption methods-Symmetric Encryption, Public key Encryption. (10)
SECURITY ATTACKING TECHNIQUES: Anti forensics methods, Tunneling techniques- HTTP, DNS, ICMP, Fraud Techniques-
Online frauds and offenses, Rogue Antivirus, Exploitation: Techniques to gain a foothold - Misdirection, Reconnaissance and
disruption methods, Malicious codes: Self-replicating codes - Evading detection and elevating privileges - Stealing information and
exploitation. (13)
DEFENSE AND ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES: Memory forensics: Importance - Capabilities - Framework - Dumping physical memory
- Installing and using volatility - Finding hidden process - Volatility analyst pack, Honeypots, Malicious code naming and automated
analysis system – DNS, Firewalls -Terrorist Network Analysis, Security operation centre. (11)
CYBERCRIME DETECTION AND LAWS: Network Vs Host based detection, Anatomy and process, Network based and host
based intrusion detection systems: Architecture - Detection engine - Operational concept, Detection mechanism, Signatures, Traffic
analysis, Intrusion detection, IT Act, Digital laws and legislation, Law enforcement roles and responses, Indian evidence act: IPC -
CrPC - Electronic communication privacy act, Legal policies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Charles P. Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Plleeger ,”Analyzing Computer Security – A threat/vulnerability / Counter measure
approach”,Pearson,UK,2014.
2. Nina Godbole, SunitBelapure,” Cyber Security ”,Wiley,India,2013.
3. James Graham,Richard Howard and Ryan Olson, “Cyber Security Essentials”, CRC Press, USA, 2011.
4. VivekSood, “Cyber Law Simplified”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
5. Paul E Proctor, “The Practical Intrusion Detection Handbook”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007.
6. Bernadette H Schell and Clemens Martin, “Cybercrime”, ABC – CLIO Inc, California, 2004.
18NB04 APPLIED CRYPTOGRAPHY

3003
INTRODUCTION TO CRYPTOGRAPHY: Modular arithmetic functions, Shannon ciphers and perfect secrecy, Security services,
Threat model, Security attacks, Substitution ciphers, Transposition ciphers, Symmetric versus asymmetric techniques, Block versus
stream ciphers,Cryptanalysis: Linear and differential cryptanalysis. (8)
370
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SYMMETRIC TECHNIQUES: Block ciphers: Feistel versus non feistel cipher- DES and its variants- AES- Modes of operation,
Stream ciphers: RC5- Stream ciphers based on Linear Feedback Shift Registers (LFSRs),Key establishment and management. (12)
ASYMMETRIC TECHNIQUES:Principles of public key cryptosystems, Encryption, Key exchange, Digital signatures: properties and
requirements, RSA, ElGamal, Diffie-Hellman, Elliptic curve cryptography. (12)
INTEGRITY,AUTHENTICITY AND IDENTIFICATION SCHEMES: Cryptographic hash functions: requirements and security, Uses of
hash functions, Secure hash algorithm, Message digest algorithm, MD5, Message Authentication Codes(MAC), MAC from hash
functions, MAC from block ciphers, Identification Schemes: Challenge-response identification, Customized and zero-knowledge
identification protocols, Digital Signature Standard, Basics of PostQuantum Cryptography. (13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security Principles and practice”, Pearson Education Asia, 2017.
2. Nigel P.Smart, “Cryptography made simple”,Springer, USA, 2016.
3. Bruce Schneier, “Applied Cryptography: Protocols, Algorithms and Source Code in C”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2015.
4. Jeffrey Hoffstein, “An Introduction to Mathematical Cryptography”, Springer, USA, 2014.
5. Douglas R. Stinson, “Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, Chapman & Hall/CRC, USA, 2010.
6. Wenbo Mao, “Modern Cryptography - Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003.
7. Alfred J. Menezes, “Handbook of Applied Cryptography”,CRC Press, USA,1997.
18NB05 BIOMETRIC TECHNOLOGIES

3204
BIOMETRIC FUNDAMENTALS AND STANDARDS: Biometrics versus traditional techniques, Characteristics, Processes,
Performance measures,Assessing the privacy risks of biometrics - Designing privacy sympathetic biometric systems, Biometric
standards, Applications and properties, Biometrics in medicine. (10+7)
PHYSIOLOGICAL TRAITS: Face, Ear, Retina, Iris, Finger, Automated fingerprint identification system, Palm print, Hand vascular
geometry analysis, Knuckle, DNA, Dental,Cognitive Biometrics: ECG, EEG, Case Study. (14+8)
BEHAVIOURAL TRAITS: Signature, Keystroke, Voice, Gait, Gesture recognition, Video face, Mapping the body technology, Case
Study. (10+7)
USER INTERFACES: Biometric interfaces: Human machine interface - BHMI structure, Human side interface: Iris image interface -
Hand geometry and fingerprint sensor, Machine side interface: Parallel port - Serial port - Network topologies, Spoofing methods -
Securing Biometric templates - Cancellable biometrics. (11+8)
Total L:45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Reid, “Biometrics for Network Security”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Samir Nanavati, Michael Thieme and Raj Nanavati, “Biometrics – Identity Verification in a Networked World”, John Wiley and
Sons, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Anil K Jain, Patrick Flynn and Arun A Ross, “Handbook of Biometrics”, Springer, USA,2010.
4. John R Vacca, “Biometric Technologies and Verification Systems”, Elsevier, USA,2009.
5. John D Woodward, Nicholas M Orlansand Peter T Higgins,“Biometrics: The Ultimate Reference”, Dream Tech, New
Delhi,2009.
6. David D Zhang, “Automated Biometrics: Technologies and Systems”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, New Delhi,2000.
18NB51 CYBER INVESTIGATIONS LABORATORY

0042
1. Network Analysis
2. Malicious codes
3. Sniffer tools
4. Password cracking
5. Misdirection, Reconnaissance and disruption methods
Total P:60
SEMESTER II
18NB06 CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Cyber Physical system concepts-Design challenges-Mobile cyber physical systems-Design principles-Physical
system controls-Intelligence application of HDP-HMM in recognition of dynamic hand gestures. (12)
MODELING IN CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS: Introduction to models of computation-Languages and tools for system design-
Physical System Modeling on cognitive Unmanned Aerial vehicle-Concurrent models of computation-Continuous time model-
Acausal model-Mixed model-Hybrid systems. (10)
371
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SENSOR BASED CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS: Wireless Sensor and Actuator Networks for Cyber Physical Systems-
Applications-Community Sensing-Wireless Embedded/Implanted Micro Systems-Architecture and Security-The Application of
Machine Learning in monitoring - Robotics - Transportation (10)
CIVILIAN CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEM APPLICATIONS: Energy efficient building Cyber Physical System for Smart Grid
Applications-Cyber Physical System for transportation applications-Video communications - Digital Manufacturing/Industry 4.0 -
IEEE 802.1 AS standards (13)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rajeev Alur“Principles of Cyber Physical Systems”, MIT Press, USA, 2015.
2. E. A. Lee and S. A.Seshia, “Introduction to Embedded Systems, A Cyber -Physical Systems Approach”, MIT Press, USA,
2015.
3. Rolf Drechsler and Ulrich Kühne, “Formal Modeling and Verification of Cyber-Physical Systems”, Springer, USA, 2015.
4. FeiHu ,“Cyber-Physical Systems: Integrated Computing and Engineering Design”, CRC Press, India, 2013.
5. Stefan Posald, “Ubiquitous Computing: Smart Devices, Environments and Interactions”, John Wiley Sons Ltd, New
Jersey,2009.
18NB07 BIOMETRIC IMAGE PROCESSING

3003
INTRODUCTION: Digital image representation, Fundamental steps in image processing, Elements of digital image processing
system, Image sensing and acquisition, Sampling and quantization, Basic relationship between pixels, Transformation technology:
Fourier transform - Discrete cosine transform-.Discrete Wavelet Transform (10)
IMAGE PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS: Spatial domain methods: Basic gray level transformations - Histogram equalization -
Smoothing spatial filter - Sharpening spatial filters -Laplacian, Frequency domain methods: Smoothing and sharpening filters – Ideal
- Butterworth - Gaussian filters.Point- Line and edge detection - Thresholding - Global and multiple thresholding, Region splitting
and merging, Boundary following.Morphological Image Processing, Fundamental concepts and operations, Dilation and Erosion,
Compound operations, Morphological filtering, Basic morphological algorithms, Grayscale morphology. (13)
2D AND 3D FACE BIOMETRICS: Global face recognition techniques: Principal component analysis - Face recognition using PCA -
Linear discriminant analysis - Face recognition using LDA, Local face recognition techniques: Geometric techniques - Elastic graph
matching techniques, Hybrid face recognition techniques. 3D FACE IMAGE: Acquisition, Preprocessing and normalization, 3D face
recognition. (10)
HAND AND IRIS BIOMETRICS: Characterization by minutiae extraction: Histogram equalization, Binarization, Skeletonization,
Detection of minutiae, Matching, Performance evaluation, Preprocessing of iris images: Extraction of region of interest -
Construction of noise mask – Normalization - Features extraction and encoding - Similarity measures between two iris codes.
Fusion in Biometrics, Multi-biometrics, Levels of fusion: Sensor level - Feature level - Rank level - Decision level fusion - Score level
fusion. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rafael C Gonzalez, Richard E Woods and Steven L Eddins, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2016.
2. Anil K Jain, "Fundamentals of Image Processing", Pearson Eductaion, Noida, 2016.
3. Amine Nait Ali and Regis Fournier, “Signal and Image Processing for Biometrics”, John Wiley and Sons, UK, 2012.
4. Arun A Ross, KarthikNandakumar and Jain A K, “Handbook of Multi-biometrics”, Springer, New Delhi, 2011.
5. Oge Marques, “Practical Image and Video Processing using MATLAB”, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey, 2011.
18NB08 DIGITAL FORENSICS

3204
INTRODUCTION: System Forensics, Overview of Computer Crime, Types of Computer Crime, Sources of Cybercrime threats,
Challenges of Cyber Forensics, Cyber law and IT Act, System Forensic Technologies: Role of Forensics in businesses, Common
Forensic Tools. (9+7)
COMPUTER EVIDENCE: Controlling Forensic Investigation- Preserving Digital Crime Scene - Securing Physical evidence,
Collecting, Seizing and Protecting evidence, Information Hiding Techniques, Data Recovery, Live Forensic Acquisition - Volatile
Memory Analysis, Network Forensics : Network Basics, Network related attacks, Investigating Network Traffic, Investigating router
attacks, Using Network Tools: Unix Tools, Packet Sniffers. (14+8)
DIGITAL EVIDENCE ON OPERATING SYSTEMS: Windows: File systems - Data recovery - Log files - Registry - Internet traces -
Program analysis, UNIX: Evidence acquisition boot disk - File systems - Overview of tools - Log files - File system traces and
Internet traces. (12+8)
E-MAIL AND MOBILE DEVICE FORENSICS: Email Forensics: Role of email in investigation - Investigating E-mail Crimes and
Violations - E-mail Servers, E-mail Forensic Tools, Social Media Forensics, Mobile Device Forensics: Basics - Evidence
Acquisition Procedures - Mobile Device Forensic Tools. (10+7)
Total L:45 + T: 30 = 75
372
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Bill Nelson, Amelia Phillips and EnfingerSteuart, “Computer Forensics and Investigations”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi,
2016.
2. John Sammons, "Basics of Digital Forensics: The primer for getting started in Digital Forensics", Elsevier, USA, 2015.
3. John R Vacca and K Rudolph, “System Forensics, Investigation, and Response”, Jones and Bartlett Learning, USA, 2011.
4. Eogen Casey, “Digital Evidence and Computer Crime”, Elsevier, USA, 2011.
5. Cory Altheide and Harlan Carvey, “Digital Forensics with Open Source Tools”, Elsevier, USA, 2011.
18NB09 CLOUD SECURITY

3204
INTRODUCTION: Roots of cloud computing: Distributed computing – Grid computing, Cloud characteristics, Architecture, Layers of
cloud, Deployment models: Public cloud, Private cloud, Hybrid cloud, Community cloud, Refactoring, Data centers, Case study:
Amazon web services (AWS), OpenStack. (8+7)
CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE AND VULNERABILITIES: Virtualization –Types, Virtual machine provisioning and manageability,
Virtual machine migration, Cloud storage device: Cloud storage levels, Network storage interfaces, Database storage interfaces,
Operational planning, Threat expectations – Threat Agents – Cloud security threats: Threats to infrastructure and data,
Cybersecuritycasestudies: Energy– Healthcare– Banking – Military. (16+8)
CLOUD SECURITY MANAGEMENT AND RISKS: Security management in cloud, CIA triad, Privacy and compliance risks –
Information privacy and privacy laws,Managing risk in the cloud: Risk management framework –Cloud providers risks and
management process, Cloud consumers risk management process, API Security. (11+8)
CLOUD SECURITY MECHANISMS: Cloud security services, Design principles, Security policy implementation – Policy types,
Virtualization security management – VM security recommendations, Identity and access management, Data Security, Cloud
Security Alliance(CSA) - Certificate of Cloud Security Knowledge (CCSK). (10+7)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
REFERENCES:
1. Melvin B Greer and Kevin L Jackson, “Practical Cloud Security: A Cross Industry View”,CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2017.
2. Ronald L Krutz and Russel Dean Vines, “Cloud Security: A Comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud Computing”, Wiley India,
New Delhi, 2016.
3. RajkumarBuyya, James Broberg and AndrzejGoscinski, “Cloud Computing: Principles and Paradigms”, Wiley India, New
Jersey, 2016.
4. Thomas Erl, ZaighamMahmood and Ricardo Puttini, “Cloud Computing: Concepts, Technology and Architecture”, Prentice Hall,
New Jersey, 2013.
5. John W Rittinghouse and James F Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management and Security”, CRC Press,
Boca Raton, 2013.
6. Tim Mather, SubraKumaraswamy and ShahedLatif, “Cloud Security and Privacy”, ShroffPublishers, Mumbai, 2011.
18NB52 BIOMETRIC IMAGE PROCESSING LABORATORY

0042
1. Data Compression/ Feature Extraction using Image Transformation Techniques
2. Image Enhancement for Noise Removal
3. ROI Extraction using Image Segmentation and Morphological Image Processing
4. Develop an Biometric Image Processing pipeline for hand, face and iris images
5. Construct an uni-modal / multi-modal biometric system
Total P:60
18NB61 INDUSTRY VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
The student will make atleast two technical presentations on current topics related to the specialization. The same will be assessed
Total P:30
SEMESTER III
18NB53 SECURITY AND PENETRATION TESTING LABORATORY

0042
1. Reconnaissance, Foot printing, Port scanning
2. Exploitation,SQL Injection, post-exploitation, Reporting
3. Hacking web applications / Web Servers,OWASP
4. Exploiting the vulnerabilities in a LAN environment.
5. Antivirus programming
Total P:60
373
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18NB71 PROJECT WORK - I
0063
Total P: 90
SEMESTER IV
18NB72 PROJECT WORK - II

0 0 28 14
The project involves the following:
Preparing a project – brief proposal including
 A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be developed (block Diagram / Concept tree)
A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements & standards (if any) ]

 Learning in the project
Project Report

(Six to be opted out of which two may be an open elective from other M.E/M.TechProgrammes)
18NB21 ADVANCED PERSISTENT THREAT

3003
INTRODUCTION: Threat – Current landscape – Proactive vs. reactive security, APT: Cyber cancer – Characteristics of APT, APT
vs. traditional threat, APT attacks – Stuxnet, Duqu, Flame, Iran certificate attack. (8)
APT MULTI-PHASED APPROACH: AHM components, Core steps: Reconnaissance – Enumeration – Exploitation – Maintaining
access – Clean up – Progression – Exfiltration, Reconnaissance Data – Technical – Non technical, Social engineering tactics –
Spear-phishing methods, Remote targeting: Client hacking, Spear phishing, Physical infiltration – Physical social engineering –
Defeating physical security controls. (15)
CYBER SECURITY TRENDS: Risk-based approach – Formal risk model, Protecting data, Prevention – Inbound prevention –
outbound detection, Threat intelligence: TAR Ideal concepts, Victim Intelligence, Incident response – 6-step process, End-to-end
solution for APT. (12)
ADVANCED ATTACKS: Password cracking,Session management attacks, Attacking data stores – Injectors, Cross-site scripting
attacks, Side-channel attacks, Database attacks. (10)
Total L :45
REFERENCES:
1. Tyler Wrightson, “Advanced Persistent Threat Hacking”,McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Eric Cole, “Advanced Persistent Threat”, Syngress, USA, 2013.
3. Mike Shema, “Anti-Hacker Tool Kit”,McGraw Hill, USA, 2014.
4. Charles P Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Analyzing Computer Security: A Threat, Vulnerability, Countermeasure
Approach”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2014.
5. DafyddStuttard and Marcus Pinto, “The Web Application Hacker’s Handbook”, John Wiley & Sons, Indiana, 2011.
374
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18NB22 MACHINE VISION
3003
DIGITAL IMAGE FORMATION AND LOW-LEVEL PROCESSING: Overview and State-of-the-art, Fundamentals of Image
Formation, Transformation: Orthogonal, Euclidean, Affine, Projective, Fourier Transform, Convolution and Filtering, Image
Enhancement, Restoration, Histogram Processing. (10)
FEATURE EXTRACTION AND IMAGE SEGMENTATION : Edges - Canny, LOG, DOG; Line detectors (Hough Transform),
Corners - Harris and Hessian Affine, Orientation Histogram, Scale-Space Analysis - Region Growing, Edge Based approaches to
segmentation, Graph-Cut, Mean-Shift, MRFs, Texture Segmentation. (12)
MOTION ANALYSIS: Background- Subtraction and Modeling, KLT, Spatio-Temporal Analysis, Dynamic Stereo; Motion parameter
estimation. (11)
OPTICAL FLOW: Dealing with the aperture problem - regularization, Horn and Shunck method - algorithm using discrete
formulation, steps of Jacobi's method for matrix inversion, limitations, Lucas-Kanade algorithm for optical flow, Applications of optical
flow. (12)
Total L :45
REFERENCES:
1. Mark Nixon and Alberto S. Aquado, “Feature Extraction & Image Processing for Computer Vision”, Academic Press,USA,
2012.
2. Jan Erik Solem, “Programming Computer Vision with Python: Tools and algorithms for analyzing images”, O'Reilly Media,USA,
2012.
3. Richard Szeliski, Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications, Springer-Verlag London Limited, UK, 2011.
4. Computer Vision: A Modern Approach, D. A. Forsyth, J. Ponce, Pearson Education,UK, 2003.
18NB23 INFORMATION ETHICS AND LAWS

3003
COMPUTER ETHICS INTRODUCTION AND COMPUTER HACKING: Computer ethics, Identifying an ethical issue, Ethics and
law, Ethical theories, Professional Code of conduct, An ethical dilemma, A framework for ethical decision making, Computer
hacking, Destructive programs, hacker ethics , Professional constraints, BCS code of conduct, Ethical positions on hacking. (11)
ASPECTS OF COMPUTER CRIME AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: Aspects of computer crime, Computer security
measures, Professional duties and obligations, Intellectual Property Rights, The nature of Intellectual property, Intellectual Property
– Patents,Trademarks,Trade Secrets, Software Issues, Copyright, The Extent and nature of software piracy – Ethical and
professional issues. (11)
COMPUTER TECHNOLOGIES AND ACCESSIBILITY ISSUES: Principle of equal access, Obstacles to access for individuals,
professional responsibility, Empowering computers in the workplace, computers and employment, computers and quality of work,
computerized monitoring in the work place, telecommuting, social, legal and professional issues, Use of Software, Computers and
Internet-based Tools, Liability for Software errors, Documentation Authentication and Control, Software engineering code of ethics
and practices: IEEE-CS –ACM Joint task force. (12)
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL NETWORKING: Software Development, strategies for engineering quality standards,
Social Networking, Company owned social network web site, the use of social networks in the hiring process, Social Networking
ethical issues, Cyber bullying, cyber stalking, Online virtual world, Crime in virtual world, digital rights management, Online
defamation , Piracy, Fraud. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. George W Reynolds, “Ethics in Information Technology”, Cengage Learning, USA, 2012.
2. CarolineWhitback, “Ethics in Engineering Practice and Research”, Cambridge University Press, UK,2011.
3. Deborah G. Johnson, ”Computer Ethics, Pearson Education”, New Delhi, 2009.
4. PennyDuquenoy, Simon Jones and Barry G Blundell, “Ethical, legal and professional issues in computing”, Middlesex
University Press,UK, 2008.
5. Richard Spinello, “Case Studies in Information and Computer Ethics”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2003.
6. JohnWeckert and Douglas Adeney, “Computer and Information Ethics”, Prentice Hall, USA, 1997.
18NB24 OPERATING SYSTEMS SECURITY

3003
PROCESS AND MEMORY MANAGEMENT: Introduction: Operating System Structures – Operations – Services, Process
management: Process concept - Interprocess communication - CPU scheduling algorithms – Deadlocks, Memory management:
Paging - Page replacement algorithms. (11)
STORAGE MANAGEMENT: Disk structure, Disk scheduling algorithms, File concept, Access methods, File system structure, File
system implementation, Allocation methods, Free space management. (11)
375
59th ACM 09.06.2018
PROTECTION AND SECURITY: Protection: Goals – Principles – Domain - Access matrix - Access control - Revocation of access
rights - Capability-based systems, Kernel patch protection, Security: Program threats - System and network threats - User
authentication - Security defenses Implementation - Firewalling to protect systems and networks,OS security patches, CASE
STUDY: Linux system. (12)
SECURITY TOOLS: Windows OS: Malicious software removal tool – Microsoft baseline security analyzer – Url scan security tool,
Linux OS: ClamAV – Snort – Wireshark- Chkrootkit–Nessus, Other tools: Sqlmap – OpenVAS. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Silberschatz A, Galvin P and Gagne G, “Operating Systems Concepts”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2016.
2. William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Pradeep K Sinha, “Distributed Operating Systems”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2014.
4. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating systems”, PHI learning, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Deitel H M, “Operating System”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011.
18NB25 SPEECH PROCESSING

3003
MECHANICS OF SPEECH: Speech Fundamentals: Articulatory Phonetics – Production and Classification of Speech Sounds;
Acoustic Phonetics – acoustics of speech production - Speech signal, Speech stack, Discrete time signals and systems, Digital
filters, Sampling, Short time Fourier representation of speech. (11)
TIME AND FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHODS: Short time analysis of speech, Energy and magnitude, Zero crossing rate,
Autocorrelation function, Average magnitude difference function, Frequency domain methods: Discrete-time and short time Fourier
analysis Filter bank summation method of synthesis, Implementation using FFT, Time decimated filter banks, Two channel filter
banks. (12)
SPEECH ANALYSIS: Features, Feature Extraction and Pattern Comparison Techniques: Speech distortion measures–
mathematical and perceptual – Log–Spectral Distance, Cepstral Distances, Weighted Cepstral Distances and Filtering, Likelihood
Distortions, Spectral Distortion using a Warped Frequency Scale, LPC, PLP and MFCC Coefficients, Time Alignment and
Normalization – Dynamic Time Warping, Multiple Time – Alignment Paths. (11)
SPEECH RECOGNITION AND SYNTHESIS: Large Vocabulary Continuous Speech Recognition: Architecture – acoustics and
language models – n-grams, context dependent sub-word units; Text-to-Speech Synthesis: Concatenative and waveform synthesis
methods, sub-word units for TTS, intelligibility and naturalness – role of prosody. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Daniel Jurafsky and James H Martin, “Speech and Language Processing – An Introduction to Natural Language Processing,
Computational Linguistics, and Speech Recognition”, Prentice Hall, USA, 2008.
2. Quatieri T F, “Discrete Time Processing of Speech Signals”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Rabiner L R, and Schaffer R W, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, “Speech and Audio Signal Processing”, John Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 2004.
5. Lawrence Rabiner and Biing-Hwang Juang, “Fundamentals of Speech Recognition”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003.
6. Frederick Jelinek, “Statistical Methods of Speech Recognition”, MIT Press, USA, 1997.
18NB26 DEEP LEARNING

3003
vide Information Technology 18NN26
18NB27 SECURE CODING

3003
INTRODUCTION: Security Concepts, Common String Manipulation Errors and Vulnerabilities - Stack overflow, Heap overflow, Off-
by-one vulnerabilities , Integer Vulnerabilities , Memory management errors - Format string vulnerabilities - Concurrency and File
I/O - Race conditions , Rules and recommendations of SEI CERT C and CERT Java coding Standards. (9)
THREAT MODELLING: Identifying the Threats by Using Attack Trees and rating threats using DREAD, Defence in Depth and
Principle of Least Privilege, Compiler security features, Static Analysis. (6)
DATABASE AND WEB APPLICATION SECURITY: OWASP Top 10 flaws, Cross Site Scripting (XSS) and its types- Persistent and
Non persistent attack, XSS Countermeasures, Injection flaws and Remedies, CSRF, Clickjacking - Mitigation Techniques - Web
application hacker's methodology. (9)
SECURE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PRINCIPLES AND TESTING SECURE APPLICATIONS: Secure Software Development
Cycle (S-SDLC) -Security Requirements Engineering- Use/Misuse case, SD3 Practices(Secure by design, default and deployment),
DevSecOps, Testing Secure Applications: Security code overview, Secure software installation, Building the Security Test Plan,
Software Assurance overview, Testing threat categories, Assessing Risk, Secure Testing Methodologies - Attacking Dependencies,
Attacking through the User Interface, Attacking Design, Attacking Implementation. (12)
Total L: 45
376
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. Robert C. Seacord, “The CERT C Coding Standard: 98 Rules for Developing Safe, Reliable, and Secure Systems”, Pearson
Education,UK, 2014.
2. Robert C. Seaford, “Secure Coding in C and C++”, Pearson Education, Inc,UK, 2013.
3. DafyddStuttard, and Marcus Pinto, “The Web Application Hacker's Handbook: Finding and Exploiting Security Flaws”, John
Wiley &Sons,USA, 2011.
4. Gene Spafford Matt Messier John Viega“Secure Programming Cook Book For C And C++”, Shroff Publishers and
Distributors,India, 2006.
5. Michael Howard and David LeBlanc, “Writing Secure Code”,Microsoft Press,USA, 2004.
18NB28 PATTERN RECOGNITION

3003
REPRESENTATION: Introduction to pattern recognition, Data sets for pattern recognition, Pattern representation, Cluster
representation, Feature extraction, Analysis, Feature selection, Applications of pattern recognition. (7)
CLASSIFICATION TECHNIQUES: Nearest neighbor algorithm, Variants of the NN algorithm, Use of the nearest neighbor
algorithm, Branch and bound algorithm, Data reduction, Prototype selection - BAYES CLASSIFIER: Introduction, Continuous
features, Minimum error rate classification, Classifiers, Discriminant functions and decision surfaces, Normal density and its
discriminate function, Discrete features, Estimation of probabilities. (15)
HIDDEN MARKOV MODELS: Markov models for Classification, Hidden Markov models: HMM parameters - Learning HMMs,
Classification using HMMs. (8)
DECISION TREES: Decision trees for pattern classification, Construction of decision trees, Splitting at the nodes, Over fitting and
pruning- CLUSTERING:Partitional clustering, Hierarchical Algorithms- Divisive clustering - Agglomerative clustering, Clustering
large data sets. (15)
Total L:45
REFERENCES:
1. NarasimhaMurty M andSusheela Devi V, “Pattern Recognition: An Algorithmic Approach”, University Press, India, 2011.
2. SergiosTheodoridisandKonstantinosKoutroumbas, “Pattern Recognition”, Elsevier, New Delhi,2011.
3. Christopher M Bishop,“Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, USA,2011.
4. Richard O Duda, Peter E Hart and David G Stork,“Pattern Classification”, Wiley India, New Delhi,2010.
18NB29 DIGITAL WATERMARKING AND STEGANOGRAPHY

3003
INTRODUCTION OF WATERMARKING: Information hiding, Properties of watermarking, Embedding effectiveness, Fidelity, Data
payload, Blind or Informed detection, False-positive rate, Robustness, Security, Cipher and Watermark keys, Modification and
Multiple watermarks, Cost, Evaluating watermarking systems, Benchmarking, Scope of testing. (10)
WATERMARKING MODELS: Communications, Components of communications systems, Classes of transmission channels,

Secure transmission, Communication, Models of watermarking: Basic Model, Watermarking as communications with side
information, Geometric models of watermarking: Distributions and Regions in media space, Marking spaces, Modeling watermark
detection by correlation: Linear correlation, Normalized correlation, Applications of watermarking: Broadcast Monitoring, Owner
Identification, Transaction Tracking, Device Control. (12)
STEGANOGRAPHIC PRINCIPLES: Properties of Steganographic and Steganalysis systems: Embedding, steganographic capacity
,Embedding capacity, Embedding efficiency and Data payload, Blind or Informed extraction, Blind or targeted steganalysis,
Statistical undetectability, False alarm Rate, Robustness, Security, Stegokey, Evaluating and Testing steganographic systems. (10)
TECHINQUES IN STEGANOGRAPHY: Steganographic communication, Channel, Building blocks, Information-Theoretic

foundations of steganography, Cachin’s definition of steganographic security, Steganographic methods, Statistics preserving
Steganography, Model based steganography, Masking embedding as Natural processing, Minimizing the embedding impact, Matrix
embedding, Nonshared selection rule, Applications of steganography: Steganography for dissidents, Steganography for criminals.
(13)
Total L:45
REFERENCES:
1. Naskar R andChakraborty R S, “Reversible Digital Watermarking: Theory and Practices”, Morgan Claypool, USA, 2014.
2. Frank Y Shih, “Digital Watermarking and Steganography: Fundamentals and Techniques”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2012.
3. Ram Kumar and Singh AmitAsthana, “Steganography: A New Technique to Hide Information Within Image File”, Lambert
Academic Publishing, Germany, 2012.
4. Ingemar J. Cox, Matthew L. Miller, Jeffrey A. Bloom, Jessica FridrichandTonKalker, “Digital Watermarking and
Steganography”, Margan Kaufmann Publishers, New York, 2010.
5. Katzenbeisser, Stefan, Petitcolas, Fabien, A.P. “Information Hiding Techniques for Steganography and Digital
Watermarking”,ArtechHouse,USA, 2000.
377
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18NB30 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF SECURITY PROTOCOLS

3003
MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATIONS: Probability and information theory, Computational complexity: Deterministic polynomial time,
Probabilistic polynomial time, Non-deterministic polynomial time, Algebraic foundations, Number theory: Congruences and residue
classes – Quadratic residues. (9)
CRYPTOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES, SECURITY NOTIONSAND DEFINITIONS: Zero-knowledge proof, Semantic security, Provable
security: Standard model, Group model, Random oracle model, Unconditional security, Security properties, Symmetric techniques,
Asymmetric techniques, Data integrity techniques: Hash functions – Digital signatures. (14)
MODELING AUTHENTICATION PROTOCOLS: Authentication types and techniques, Modeling authentication protocol: EKE –
PAKE–SSH – SSL/TLS, Typical attacks and vulnerabilities. (8)
ANALYSIS OF SECURITY PROTOCOLS: Formal methods: Formal specification of protocols, Formal proof of security:
Computational model, Symbolic manipulation view: Theorem proving–Protocol and adversary models, Formal analysis techniques:
Model checking, NRL protocol analyzer, CSP approach, FDR, Formal analysis tools:Murphi, AVISPA, Hermes, PRISM, ProVerif,
Scyther, Limitations of formal analysis. (14)
Total L : 45
REFERENCES:
1. Hans Delfs and Helmut Knebl, “Introduction to Cryptography” Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 2015.
2. Wenbo Mao, “Modern Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Ling Dong and Kefei Chen, “Cryptographic Protocol”, Springer, Beijing, 2012.
4. Giampaolo Bella, “Formal Correctness of Security Protocols”, Springer, New York, 2007.
5. Peter Ryan, Steve A. Schneider, “Modelling& Analysis of Security Protocols”, Addison-Wesley, New York, 2001.
18NB31 SECURITY IN INTERNET OF THINGS

3003
INTERNET OF THINGS: Cyber Security versus IoT security – IoT attacks and Countermeasures – Common IoT attack types,
Attack trees, Fault trees and CPS-Attacks, Wireless reconnaissance and mapping, Security Protocol attacks, Physical security
attacks, Application security attacks - Security Engineering for IoT Development (12)
SECURING THE INTERNET OF THINGS:Security Architecture in Internet of Things, Security Requirements in IoT - Vulnerabilities
– Secrecy and Secret-Key Capacity - Authentication/Authorization for Smart Devices - Transport Encryption – Attack & Fault trees -
Identity lifecycle – Authentication credentials (11)
CRYPTOGRAPHIC FUNDAMENTALSFOR IOT: IoT IAM infrastructure – Authorization with Publish / Subscribe schemes , access
control - Cryptographic primitives and its role in securing IoT –key management fundamentals – cryptographic controls for IoT
protocols. (11)
CLOUD SECURITY & PRIVACY FOR IOT: Cloud services and IoT –IoT offerings from cloud service providers– Cloud IoT security
controls – An enterprise IoT cloud security architecture – New directions in cloud enabled IoT computing - Privacy challenges
introduced by the IoT – PbD principles – Privacy engineering recommendations -IoT Node Authentication. (11)
Total L:45
REFERENCES
1. Shancang Li, Li Da Xu, “Securing the Internet of Things”, Elsevier,USA, 2017
2. Brian Russell, Drew Van Duren, ”Practical Internet of Things Security”,Packt Publishing, USA,2016.
3. FeiHu,”Security and Privacy in Internet of Things (IoTs): Models, Algorithms, and Implementations”, CRC Press,USA,2016.
4. HimanshuDwivedi, Chris Clark and David Thiel, “Mobile Application Security”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
18NB32 CYBER SECURITYGOVERNANCE, RISK MANAGEMENT AND COMPLIANCE

3003
INFORMATION SECURITY: Foundations of Information Security – Security Mindset – Information Systems Strategy – Strategic
Planning - Value of IT – Implementing IT Portfolio – Policies. (10)
GOVERNANCE OF IT: Governance of Enterprise IT – Good Practices for Governance of Enterprise IT - Frameworks – Audit Role
in Governance of Enterprise IT – Information Security Governance. (12)
MANAGEMENT OF IT: Information Security Management – IS Management System – IS Management Roles and Responsibilities
– Classification of Information Assets – Is Control Design – System Access Permissions – Privacy Principles and Role of IS
Auditors. (11)
378
59th ACM 09.06.2018
AUDITING NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE: Auditing Remote Access – Auditing Internet points of Presence – Network
Penetration tests – Full Network Assessment – Development & Authorization of Network changes – Unauthorized changes-Risk
Management Process and Analysis Methods –ISO 27000 & SABSA Model. (12)
Total L:45
REFERENCES:
1. Michael Whitman, Herbert Mattord, “Management of Information Security”, CENGAGE Learning, USA, 2017.
2. Jason Andress, Steven Winterfeld, “The Basics of Information Security: Understanding the Fundamentals of Infosec in Theory
and Practice”, Elsevier, USA,2014.
3. Mark Stamp, “Information Security Principles and Practice”, Wiley, USA, 2012.
4. Charles P. Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Analyzing Computer Security: A Threat / Vulnerability / Countermeasure
Approach”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,2012.
5. Matt Bishop, Sathyanarayana S. Venkatramanayya, “Introduction to Computer Security” , Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006.
18NB33 CONTENT BASED IMAGE RETRIEVAL

3003
INTRODUCTION: Fundamentals of Images - Image Content Analysis – Feature Extraction – Image Segmentation - Shape
Description – Color histograms, GCH, Image searching. (11)
TECHNIQUES: Shape based CBIR, SVD, Contourlet transforms, Exact Legendre Moments (ELMs), Fuzzy and textQuery methods.
(12)
CBIR FOR MEDICAL IMAGES: Similarity in images – Image retrieval in Radiology, Scalable techniques, prediction of inter reader
accuracy, Blood cell images, Dental X Rays - developing statistical models, sparse matrices, medical decision support systems,
Case study. (11)
CBIR USING AI: Need for automated Learning, SVMs, Unsupervised Learning, CNN Deep learning techniques, Human interaction
and Semantic retrieval,Deploying a case study in MATLAB. (11)
Total L:45
REFERENCES:
1. Er. GauravJaswal, “Content Based Image Retrieval using Color Space Approaches: CBIR An Image Search Engine”, Lap
Lambert Academic Publishing GmbH KG, USA,2013.
2. ChanamalluSrinivasaRao, SamayamantulaSrinivas Kumar, “Content Based Image Retrieval Fundamentals & Algorithms”, Lap
Lambert Academic Publishing,USA, 2012.
3. TinkuAcharya, Ajoy k. Ray, “Image Processing, Principles and Applications”, Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Hoboken,
New Jersey, Canada, 2005.
4. Milan Petkovic, Willem Jonker, “Content Based Video Retrieval: A Database Perspective ”, Kluwer Academic Publishers,USA,
2004.
5. Oge marques, BorkoFurht,“Content Based Image and Video Retrieval”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, USA,2002.
18NB34 HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION

3003
INTRODUCTION: Overview of HCI -Mental models -Cognitive architecture -Task loading and stress -Human error identification.
(9)
INPUT TECHNOLOGIES: Sensor and recognition based input, Haptic interfaces- Non speech auditory output- Network based
interactions- Visual design principles, Intercultural user interface designs -Conversational speech interface, Multimodal interface
adaptive interfaces and agents. (12)
DATA GATHERING, ANALYSIS AND PRESENTATION: Key issues –Data recording –Interviews –Questionnaires –Observation –
Choosing and combining Techniques-Qualitative and quantitative –Simple quantitative analysis-Tools –Theoreticalframeworks. (12)
EVALUATION FRAMEWORK: Goals of evaluation –Types of evaluation –Evaluation case studies: A framework to guide evaluation
–Usability testing –Conducting experiments, Field studies –Inspections-Heuristic evaluation and walkthroughs, Analytics –Predictive
models. Applications: Healthcare, Deaf and Hard of learning users. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Jan Noyes, Chris Baber, “User Centered Design of Systems”, Springer, Germany, 2013.
2. Alan Dix, Janet Finlay, Gregory D Abowd, Russell Beale, “Human Computer Interaction”, Pearson, New Delhi, 2012.
3. John Helen Sharp, Yvanno Rogers and Jenny preece, “Interaction Design: Beyond Human Computer Interaction”,
Wiley,USA,2011.
4. Ben Shneiderman, “Designing the User Interfaces Strategies for Effective Human Computer Interaction”, Pearson, New
Delhi,2009.
5. Andrew sears Julie A, Jacko, Lawrence Erlbaum, “The Human Computer Interaction Hand Book: Fundamentals, Evolving
Technologies and Emerging Applications”, CRC Press, USA, 2008.
379
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18NB35 HARDWARE IMPLEMENTATION OF CRYPTO SYSTEMS
3003
VERILOG: Introduction to Verilog –Hierarchical modeling concepts – Lexical conventions: Modules and Ports - Gate Level Modeling
– Data Flow Modeling – Behavioral Modeling – Timing controls -Language Elements – Functions and Tasks –Useful Modeling
Techniques – Logic synthesis - Test Benches. (13)
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES: Basics, Programming Technologies – Programmable Logic Array (PLA), Programmable
Array Logic (PAL) , Programmable Logic Array (PLA), Design of State Machine using ASM Chart as a design Tool. (10)
Implementation – FPGA Architectures – Xilinx – Altera Flex – Design Principles using FPGAs – Implementing DSP Functions in
FPGA- FPGA Applications - Design of FIR Filter (10)
FPGA IMPLEMENTATION OF CRYPTOGRAPHIC ALGORITHMS: Block Ciphers, AES, Blowfish. Stream Ciphers - Encryption and
decryption with Stream ciphers, Shift - register based stream ciphers. Public Key Cryptography: RSA, ElGamal, Diffe-Hellman Key
exchange, ECC. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Blaine Readler, "Verilog by Example: A Concise Introduction for FPGA Design", Full ARC Press, USA, 2015.
2. William Stallings, "Crytography and Network Security", Prentice-Hall of India, India,2014.
3. Samir Palnitkar, "Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis", Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
4. Uwe Meyer Baese, "Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays", Springer, Germany, 2012.
5. Volnei A. Pedroni, "Circuit Design and Simulation with VHDL", MIT Press, USA, 2010.
18NB36 FILTER BANK DESIGNS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS

3003
DIGITAL FILTERS: Introduction-Filter design specifications-FIR filter design-IIR filter design-All pass filters-Special types of filters-
IIR filters based on two all pass filters. (10)
IIR FILTER DESIGN: Review of classical analog filter design (Butterworth. Chebyshev, Elliptic)-design of digital filters based on
continuous-time filters-mapping of differentials-impulse invariant transformation-modified impulse invariant transformation-bilinear
transformation-matched z-transform technique-Pade approximation-Prony’s method-Shank’s method-spectral transformation for
digital filters.FIR Filter Design: Review of conditions needed for precise linear phase-design techniques for linear phase FIR filters:
windowing method- frequency sampling- weighted Chebyshev approximation. (13)
UNIFORM FILTER BANK: Quadrature Mirror Filter Bank (QMFB)- Orthogonal Filter Bank (OFB)- Biorthogonal Filter Bank(BFB)-
Multidimensional Logarithmic Number System (MDNLS) Filter bank.Non-uniform Filter banks: Interpolated Filter Bank –Multi-rate
filter Bank- Reconfigurable Filter Bank- Adjustable filter bank- Warped filter bank- Design parameters for filter bank designs: Filter
Bank suitable for noise reduction-Power aware filter bank- Low delay filter bank designs. (13)
FILTER BANKS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS: Signal processing-Evolution and history of biomedical devices-
Classification-Device models-Importance of filter banks in Biomedical applications. (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Leland B.Jackson, “Digital Filters and Signal Processing”, Kluwer Academic, Boston, MA, 2013.
2. PP Vaidyanathan, "Multirate Systems And Filter Banks", Prentice Hall-Signal Processing Series, USA,2013.
3. Dietrich Schlichthärle, "Digital Filters: Basics and Design", Springer-Verlag, Germany, 2011.
4. John G.Proakis,DimitrisG.Manolakis, "Digital Signal Processing-Principles, Algorithms and Applications”, Pearson Prentice
Hall,New Delhi,2009.
5. Wing –KuenLing,"Non-Linear Digital Filters-Analysis and Applications ",Academic Press,USA,2007.
18NB37 MALWARE ANALYSIS AND REVERSE ENGINEERING

3003
INTRODUCTION: Malware Analysis, Goals, Malware Analysis Techniques, Basic Analysis: Static Analysis - Malware Analysis in
Virtual Machines - Dynamic Analysis, Types of Malware, General Rules. (10)
ADVANCED ANALYSIS: Static Analyis: x86 Architecture - IDA Pro - Recognizing C code constructs - Analyzing malicious window
programs, Dynamic Analysis: Debugging – OllyDbg - Kernel debugging with WinDBG, Rootkit Techniques: Hooking - Patching,
Modern Rootkit Analysis. (13)
MALWARE FUNCTIONALITY: Malware Behavior, Covert Malware Launching, Data Encoding: Goal - Common Cryptographic
Algorithms - Custom Encoding - Decoding, Malware-Focused Network Signatures: Network Countermeasures - Safely Investigate
an Attacker Online - Content-Based Network Countermeasures - Combining Dynamic and Static Analysis Techniques. (12)
380
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ANTI-REVERSE-ENGINEERING: Anti-Disassembly, Anti-Debugging, Anti-Virtual Machine Techniques, Packers and Unpacking,
Shell code Analysis. (10)
Total L:45
REFERENCES:
1. Christopher C. Elisan, “Advanced Malware Analysis”, McGraw-Hill, USA, 2015
2. Michael Hale Ligh, Andrew Case, Jamie Levy, AAron Walters, " The Art of Memory Forensics: Detecting Malware and Threats
in Windows, Linux, and Mac Memory", Wiley, USA, 2014.
3. Heng Yin, Dawn Song, “Automatic Malware Analysis: An Emulator Based Approach”, Springer, USA, 2013.
4. Michael Sikorski, Andrew Honig, “Practical Malware Analysis: The Hands-On Guide to Dissecting Malicious Software”, No
Starch Press, San Francisco, 2012.
5. Michael Ligh, Steven Adair, Blake Hartstein, Matthew Richard, “Malware Analyst's Cookbook and DVD: Tools and Techniques
for Fighting Malicious Code”, Wiley, USA, 2010.
AUDIT COURSES
18NB81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18NB82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

381
59th ACM 09.06.2018

M.TECH NANOSCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
(2018 REGULATIONS)

I SEMESTER
18LN01 Computational Mathematics 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LN02 Fundamentals of Nanoscience and Technology 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LN03 Synthesis of Nanomaterials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LN04 Materials Science 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LN05 Industrial Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LN51 Synthesis of Nanomaterials Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LN81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 28 Hrs 14 6 8 19 300 300 600
II SEMESTER
18LN06 Characterization of Nanomaterials 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LN07 Nanofabrication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LN08 Nanoelectronics 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18LN09 Nanobiotechnology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18LN__ Professional Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN52 Nanofabrication laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18LN61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18LN82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 30 Hrs 18 4 8 24 400 400 800
III SEMESTER
18LN 53 Nanodevice design laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PE
18LN71 Project Work - I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 22 Hrs 12 0 10 17 300 300 600
IV SEMESTER
18LN72 Project Work – II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
ELECTIVE THEORY COURSES(Six to be opted)

18LN21 Nanostructures in Medicine 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN22 Nanotherapeutics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN23 Regenerative Medicine 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN24 Photovoltaic Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN25 Biomolecular Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN26 Polymer Nanocomposites 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN27 Nanophotonics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN28 Biomaterials and Tissue Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN29 Polymer Electronics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN30 Nanobiomaterials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN31 Nanotoxicology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN32 Nanotechnology for Energy systems 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN33 Nanocomputing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Product Design, Management Techniques and
18LN34 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Entrepreneurship
18LN35 Nanosensors and Devices 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18LN36 Data Structures and Algorithms 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Mandatory Course
382
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18LN01 COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS
2203
NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS: Solving system of linear equations – Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Siedel
methods, successive over relaxation method, system of non-linear equations – Newton’s method. Interpolation: cubic spline
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO ODE: Initial value problem: Runge Kutta method, Milne’s method. Boundary value problem: Finite
Element Method - Rayleigh-Ritz method, Collocation and Galerkin methods. (8+7)
NUMERICAL SOLUTION TO PDE: Finite difference method: Liebmann’s method for Laplace equation and Poisson equation, explicit
method and Crank-Nicolson method for parabolic equations, explicit method for hyperbolic equations. (8+7)
Total L:32 + T:28 = 60

REFERENCES:
Delhi, 2014.
4. Curtis F Gerald and Patrick O Wheatly, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
18LN02 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

3204
NANO EVOLUTION: Scientific evolution - Feynman’s quantum electrodynamics – Taniguchi’s nanotechnology – Drexler’s engines
of creation – Definition of a nanosystem – Dimensionality and size dependent phenomena - Nanostructures – Naturally occurring
nanomaterials - Nanoscale properties - Magnetic Moment in clusters/Nanoparticles – Coercivity – Thermal activation and
superparamagnetic effects, Excitonic binding and recombination Energies, Capacitance in a nanoparticle, Optical properties -
Surface Plasmon Resonance, Nanotechnology Initiatives – challenges and future prospects of nanoscience. (12+6)
QUANTUM CONCEPTS: Inadequacies of Classical Mechanics – Duality nature of electromagnetic radiation – De Broglie
hypothesis for matter waves – Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle – Schrödinger's wave equation - Energy levels of a particle,
Density of states (DOS) - DOS of 3D, 2D, 1D and 0D materials - Quantum confinement - Penetration of a barrier, Tunnel effect -
Ballistic transport - Coulomb blockade. (11+8)
INTERMOLECULAR AND INTRAMOLECULAR FORCES: Atomic structure - bonds, chemical bonds, ionic interactions, covalent
bonds, metal bonds, hydrogen bonds – covalent and coulomb interactions – electrostatic stabilization - surface charge density -
electric potential at the proximity of solid surface - van der Waals forces - dipole-dipole interactions – repulsive forces - hydrophobic
and hydrophilic interactions, super-hydrophobicity. (11+8)
TRANSPORT IN THE NANOSCALE: Size effect on electronic properties – phonons in nanostructures - size effect on electron –
phonon coupling, evolution of band structures and Fermi surface - fraction of surface atoms – surface energy and surface stress,
size-induced metal-insulator-transition (SIMIT)- electron transport and kinetics in zero, one and two dimensional nanostructures -
nanocrystalline materials, effect of grain size and grain boundaries. (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENTS:
 Size dependendent optical properties of nanoparticles
 Tunneling measurements
 Surface morphology and grain size measurement
 Compression and hardness tests
REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep T, ―Nano: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology‖, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Masaru Kuno, ―Introductory Nanoscience: Physical and Chemical Concepts‖, Taylor and Francis, New York, 2012.
3. Aruldhas G, ―Quantum Mechanics‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 2013.
4. Hornyak G L, Tibbals H F and Dutta J, ―Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology‖, CRC Press, London, 2009.
5. Mathews P M and Venkatesan K, ―A Text book of Quantum Mechanics‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
383
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LN03 SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS

3003
GENERAL CHEMISTRY: Acidity – basicity and pKa – measurement of acid and base strength surface energy, chemical potential as
a function of surface curvature- electrostatic stabilization – steric stabilization – coagulation – aggregation, functional groups-
classification of nanomaterials. (11)
SELF ASSEMBLY AND ELECTROCHEMICAL APPROACH: Self assembly – classification of self assembly process, Self
Assembled Monolayer, Monolayers of organosilicon, alkanethiols and sulfides, Langmuir Blodgett (LB) films – micelle formation–
Biomemmitic approach-lotus effect surfaces. Electrochemical approach: Electrochemical Deposition, Electrophoretic deposition,
Electrospinning. (11)
CHEMICAL APPROACH: Homogeneous Nucleation-wet chemical reduction-Influence of stabilizer- vapor phase reaction-solid
phase reactions, Nanoparticles through Heterogeneous Nucleation, Spray pyrolysis- Fundamental aspects of VLS and SLS growth,
Atomic Layer Deposition , Chemical vapor deposition- plasma enhanced chemical vapor deposition, Sol-Gel. (12)
PHYSICAL APPROACH: Thin Film Growth modes- importance of Vacuum - Physical Vapor Deposition - Evaporation- Molecular
beam epitaxy (MBE)-Sputtering-Comparison of evaporation and sputtering, Pulsed Laser Deposition , Ball milling process,
Template-based synthesis- liposomes- Epitaxial Core-Shell Nanoparticles- Track etched alumina- polycarbonate membranes. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vikas Mittal, ―Characterization Techniques for Polymer Nanocomposites‖, Wiley-VCH, Germany, 2012.
2. Cao G, ―Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications‖, World Scientific Publishing, Singapore,
2011.
3. Pradeep T, ―Nano: The essentials, Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Rao C N R, Muller A and Cheetham A K, ―The Chemistry of Nanomaterials Synthesis, Properties and Applications‖, Wiley-
VCH, Germany, 2006.
5. Nalwa H S, ―Encyclopedia of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology‖, American scientific, New York, 2004.
18LN04 MATERIALS SCIENCE

3204
STRUCTURE OF CRYSTALLINE SOLIDS: Atomic bonding – crystalline state of solids-Crystal structure – Unit cell – Bravais
Lattice-Crystal systems-Lattice parameters-Crystallographic planes and directions- Miller Indices- Diffraction of X-rays by simple
space lattice- Bragg’s law- Experimental methods of X-ray diffraction- Diffraction of electrons from crystals- Diffraction of neutrons
from crystals. Crystal imperfections. (11+6)
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES: Free electron theory – Fermi Dirac distribution- Density of States- Sommerfeld’s theory of electrical
conductivity- Kronig-Penny model – Brillouin zones- Band model for metals, semiconductors and insulators. Dielectric properties:
static dielectric constant – Complex dielectric constant- Dielectric losses and relaxation time- ferroelectrics and piezoelectrics:
Classification and properties of ferroelectrics, piezoelectric materials and applications. (11+8)
SEMICONDUCTORS AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS: Electronic degeneracy in semiconductors- Carrier concentration in intrinsic
and extrinsic semiconductors- Law of Mass action-Fermi level- Hall effect and its applications-I-V Characteristics of nanomaterials,
size effects on electrical properties of materials-Origin of magnetism-Types of magnetic materials- ferromagnetism- Domain theory-
Magnetic hysteresis- Weiss molecular field theory- Hard and soft magnetic materials-applications –Anti-ferromagnetism – Ferrites-
Superconductors - Meissner effect-Type I and II superconductors-Josephson effect -SQUID. Size effects on magnetic and
superconducting properties of materials. (12+8)
OPTICAL AND THERMAL PROPERTIES: Optical Reflectance: Kramer-Kronig relations- Excitons and their types, luminescence –
types of decay mechanisms- Types of luminescence–Einstein’s theory of specific heat- Debye theory- Elastic waves in an infinite
1D array of identical atoms- vibrational modes of a finite 1D lattice of identical atoms, Size effects on optical and thermal properties
of materials. (11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENTS
 Indexing of diffraction patterns and identification of crystal structure
 I-V characteristics and dielectric measurements through impedance analysis
 Characterisation of semiconductors through hall effect
 Optical studies using photoluminescence measurement
REFERENCES:
1. Charles Kittel, ―Introduction to Solid State Physics‖, Wiley India P. Ltd.,2013.
2. Dekker A J, ―Solid State Physics‖, Macmillan Publications,2012.
3. Callister W D, ―Materials Science and Engineering‖, Wiley Publications,2010.
4. V. Raghavan, ―Materials Science and Engineering: A First Course", Prentice Hall, 2006
5. Pillai S O, ―Solid State Physics, New Age International‖, 2005.
6. Michael Shur, ―Physics of Semiconductor Devices‖, Prentice Hall,1995.
384
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LN05 INDUSTRIAL NANOTECHNOLOGY

3003
NANOTECHNOLOGY IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES: Advantages of nano devices, electronic circuit chips,
lasers, micro and nano electromechanical systems (MEMS) -optical switches - bio-MEMS - diodes and nano-wire transistors - data
memory - lighting and displays - energy storage - fuel cells and photo-voltaic cells. (11)
NANOTECHNOLOGY IN BIOMEDICAL AND PHARMACEUTICAL INDUSTRIES: Nanoparticles in bone substitutes and dentistry -
reconstructive intervention - nanorobotics in surgery - photodynamic therapy - nanosensors in diagnosis - protein engineering - drug
delivery - therapeutic applications. (11)
NANOTECHNOLOGY IN THE CHEMICAL INDUSTRY: Nanocatalysts, smart materials, heterogeneous nanostructures and
composites, nanostructures for molecular recognition (quantum dots, nanorods, nanotubes), molecular encapsulation and its
applications - nanoporous zeolites – self assembled nano-reactors - organic electroluminescent displays. (11)
NANOTECHNOLOGY IN AGRICULTURE, TEXTILES AND COSMETICS: Precision farming - smart delivery system – nano
fertilizers - food processing - safety and biosecurity -contaminant detection - nanofibre production - tissue engineering application -
lotus effect - nano finishing in textiles – cosmetics - color cosmetics. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Udo H. Brinker, Jean-Luc Mieusset (Eds.), Molecular Encapsulation: Organic Reactions in Constrained Systems, Wiley
Publishers, 2013.
2. W.N. Chang, Nanofibres fabrication, performance and applications, Nova Science Publishers Inc. 2012.
3. P. J. Brown and K. Stevens, Nanofibers and Nanotechnology in Textiles, Woodhead Publishing Limited, Cambridge, 2007.
4. Jennifer Kuzma and Peter VerHage, Nanotechnology in agriculture and food production, Woodrow Wilson International Center,
2006.
5. Neelina H. Malsch (Ed.), Biomedical Nanotechnology, CRC Press, 2005.
6. Bharat Bhushan, Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, Barnes and Noble, 2004.
18LN51 SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS LABORATORY

0042
PREAMBLE:
 Preparation of nanofibre using Electrospinning method and to characterize it using AFM
 Preparation of metal nanoparticles using chemical reduction method and characterize it using UV-Vis spectroscopy
 Preparation of Metal oxide nanomaterials
 Fabrication of nanofilms-chemical method
 Measurement of resistance using Omnicant
 Demonstration of Ball Milling process
Total P: 60
SEMESTER II
18LN06 CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOMATERIALS

3204
OPTICAL ANALYSIS: Interaction of electromagnetic radiation with materials, UV-Visible Spectroscopy - Fluorescence
spectroscopy, flame emission spectroscopy, X-ray fluorescence. (11+5)
MORPHOLOGY ANALYSIS: Optical microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, atomic force
microscopy, scanning tunnelling microscopy, Dynamic light scattering. (11+10)
COMSPOSITION AND MICROSTRUCTURAL ANALYSIS: Infra red spectrometry - Raman spectroscopy, Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance Spectroscopy, Secondary ion mass spectroscopy, Auger emission spectra, X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy, Atomic
Absorption Spectroscopy , Energy Dispersive spectroscopy, X-ray diffraction, Selected area electron diffraction. (12+10)
THERMAL ANALYSIS AND MECHANICAL ANALYSIS: Differential scanning calorimetry –thermogravimetric analysis-differential
thermal analysis-thermomechanical analysis, dynamic mechanical analysis - micro hardness - nanoindendation, Friction force
microscopy. (11+5)
Total L: 45+T: 30 = 75
TUTORIAL COMPONENT:
 Interpretation of UV-Vis Spectra. Electron microscopy sample preparation techniques.
 Signals and Artefacts in thermo mechanical analysis, Differential scanning calorimetry
 Interpretation of Particles size analysis data, FTIR, and Raman Spectra
385
59th ACM 09.06.2018
 Indexing SAED ring pattern and XRD crystal structure
REFERENCES:
1. Yang leng, ―Materials Characterization: Introduction to Microscopic and Spectroscopic Methods‖, Wiley, 2013.
2. Goddard W, ―Handbook of NanoScience, Engineering and Technology‖, CRC Press, 2007.
3. Cao G., ―Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications‖, Imperial College Press, 2004.
4. Willard, ―Instrumental Methods of Analysis‖, Van Nostrand, 2000.
5. Gaponenko S V, ―Optical Properties of semiconductor Nanocrystals‖, Cambridge University Press, 1998.
18LN07 NANOFABRICATION
3003
PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS: Introduction, clean rooms- necessity - types of clean rooms - construction and maintenance,
lithography - optical lithography -optical projection lithography, photo mask – fabrication – inspection - defects - repair-resists for
nanolithography. (11)
RESOLUTION ENHANCEMENT TECHNIQUES: Phase shift mask lithography, off-axis illumination, optical proximity correction,
immersion lithography, sub-resolution assist feature enhancement, zone plate array lithography, laser micromachining. (11)
ALTERNATIVE NANOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES: Electron beam lithography - scattering with angular limitation projection e-
beam lithography (SCALPEL) -projection reduction exposure with variable axis immersion lenses (PREVAIL), ion beam lithography,
extreme ultraviolet lithography, dip pen lithography, soft lithography. (11)
MEMS – FABRICATION PROCESSES AND PACKAGING: Materials for MEMS – MEMS fabrication processes – deposition and
etching– ion milling, micromachining, LIGA, integration of electronics and MEMS, packaging, post fabrication processes -package
selection – die attach – wire bonding – sealing. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vijay K. Varadan, Vinoy. K.J., Gopalakrishnan.S, ―Smart material Systems and MEMS: Design and Development
Methodologies‖, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2011.
2. Mark Madou, ―Fundamentals of microfabrication‖, CRC press, 2013.
3. Sami Franssila, ―Introduction to Microfabrication‖, John Wiley and Sons, London, 2012.
4. Tai Ran Hsu, ―MEMS and Microsystems, Design, Manufacture and Nanoscale Engineering‖, John Wiley and Sons, New
Jersey. 2008.
5. Harry J Levinson, ―Principles of Lithography‖, SPIE, New Jersey, 2005.
6. James J Allen, ―Micro Electro Mechanical System Design CRC Press-Taylor and Francis‖, New York, 2005.
18LN08 NANO ELECTRONICS

3204
EVOLUTION OF NANOELECTRONICS: Moore’s Law – Silicon Electronics - Limitations – Silicon MOS Transistor from Micro to
Nano – Scaling principles, limits to scaling, power constrained scaling limits - Capabilities of nano electronics - physical
fundamentals of nano electronics, mean free path, ballistic transport, tunnelling, energy quantization, electrostatic phenomena, and
Coulomb blockade.
(11+8)
INTEGRATION ISSUES AND NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES: Short channel effects - SiO2 vs High-k gate dielectrics - Integration
issues of high-k interface states – Metal Source Drain Junctions – Schottky Barrier-Work function pinning - Transistor
fundamentals, MOS Electrostatistics, Requirements for Non Classical MOS Transistors, Nano MOSFET, Single Electron
Transistors, Carbon Nanotube Field Effect Transistors, Resonant Tunnel Diodes .
(12+8)
SPINTRONICS: Spin orbit interaction - Spin polarization - spin relaxation - spin dependent transport - materials for spin electronics -
spin valve and spin tunneling devices, Spin Field Effect Transistor, Quantum Dot Cellular Automata.
(11+6)
MEMORY DEVICES AND SENSORS: Nano ferroelectrics - Ferroelectric random access memory - Fe-RAM circuit design -
ferroelectric thin film properties and integration - calorimetric sensors - electrochemical cells - surface and bulk acoustic devices -
gas sensitive FETs - resistive semiconductor gas sensors - electronic noses.
(11+8)
Total L: 45 + T: 30 = 75
 Process design and development of 30 nm CMOS inverter.
 Process and Device Simulation of Single-Electron Transistor
 Spin relaxation in metals and semiconductors
386
59th ACM 09.06.2018
 Simulation study of nanowire TFET device.
REFERENCES:
1. George W. Hanson, ―Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics‖, Prentice Hall, 2014.
2. Rainer Waser, ―Nanoelectronics and Information Technology: Advanced Electronic Materials and Novel and Devices‖, Wiley
Vch Verlag, Weiheim, 2012.
3. Shunri Oda and David Ferry, ―Silicon Nanoelectronics‖, CRC Press, New York, 2005.
4. Karl Goser et.al, ―Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum devices‖, Springer, 2005.
18LN09 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY
3003
BASICS OF BIOLOGY: cell, Organelles-Tissues- Nucleic Acids as Genetic-Material. Biomacromolecules - Carbohydrates, Lipids,
Proteins and Nucleic Acids, cell-Nanostructure Interactions.transport across membranes- Endocytosis, exocytosis, phagocytosis-
pinocytosis-receptor mediated endocytosis. Cell differentiation-proliferation- cell migration- apoptosis. Stem cells, ECM. (11)
PROTEINS AND DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURE: S-layer as template for arrangement of nanoparticles. Engineered nanopores-
supported Bilayers-membrane arrays-Alternative protein pores. DNA-protein Nanostructure-DNA templated electronics-sequence
specific molecular lithography- DNA-gold Nanoparticles conjugates- Molecular processor - DNA analyzer as biochip - molecular
electronics- DNA as smart glue, DNA computers. (11)
NANOPARTICLES IN THERAPEUTICS: Introduction-polymers–nondegradable synthetic polymers- polyethylene,polypropylene,

polytetrafluoroethylene, poly methyacrylates poly hydroxylmethyl acrylates, poly Nisopropyl acrylamide, biodegradable polymers,
lipid based colloidal system- factors affecting carrier system-drug load-drug release, stability , dosage. Targeting Approaches. (11)
NANOANALYTICS: Quantum dot biolabeling - nanoparticle molecular labels - analysis of biomolecular structure by AFM and
molecular pulling - force spectroscopy - biofunctionalized nanoparticles for Surface Enhanced Raman Scattering and Surface
Plasmon Resonance. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. David S Goodsell, ―Bionanotechnology: Concepts, Lessons from Nature‖, Wiley-Liss, New Jersey, 2014.
2. Goser K, Glosekotter P and Dienstuhl J, ―Nanoelectronic and Nanosystems - From Transistors to Molecular Quantum
Devices‖, Springer, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Reza Arshady and Kenji Kono, ―Smart Nanoparticles in Nanomedicine‖, Kentus Books, London, 2006.
4. Greco R S, Prinz and Smith R. L., ―Nanoscale Technology in Biological Systems‖, CRC Press, London, 2005.
5. Niemeyer C M and Mirkin C A, ―Nanobiotechnology, Concepts, Applications and Perspectives‖, Wiley-Vch, Germany, 2004.
18LN52 NANOFABRICATION LABORATORY

0042
PREAMBLE:
 Fabrication and characterization of thin film organic solar cells and MEMS transistors.
 Design and fabrication of 3D printed components.
 Fabrication and characterization of nanocomposite sensors.
 Biotemplating of nanostructures using bacteria and diatoms.
 Simulation of electronic devices and fabrication using sputtering.
Total P: 60
18LN61 INDUSTRIAL VISIT AND TECHNICAL SEMINAR

0042
by a committee appointed by the department. The students will also be taken on an industrial visit to an external as well as internal
industry specializing in nanotechnology related functions. The students are expected to submit a report at the end of the semester
covering the various aspects of his/her presentation together with the observation in industry visits. A test covering the above will be
held at the end of the semester.
Total P: 60
SEMESTER III
18LN53 SIMULATION AND DESIGN LABORATORY

0042
PREAMBLE:
 Study of simulation tools and device design optimization techniques
387
59th ACM 09.06.2018
 Design and analysis of

 Micro needles and micro fluidic channels for biomedical applications
 MEMS microphone and micromirror for electronic applications
 Gyroscope and accelerometer for industrial applications
 Electrochemical biosensor and meniscal scaffolds for diagnostic and therapeutic applications
Total P: 60
18LN71 PROJECT WORK - I
0063
Total P: 90
IV SEMESTER
18LN72 PROJECT WORK - II

0 0 28 14
A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional requirements and standards (if any)]


Total P: 420
18LN21 NANOSTRUCTURES IN MEDICINE

3003
NANOMEDICINE: Development of nano medicines - Nano Shells - Nano pores - Tectodendrimers - Nanoparticle drug system for
oral administration - Drug system for nasal administration -Drug system for ocular administration -Nanotechnology in diagnostic
application. (11)
SMART ASSEMBLIES: Nano and microparticulate delivery systems-the homing device challenge, nanoparticles in biomedical
screening and molecular imaging-analyte detection and screening-gold oligonucleotide nanoprobes-fluorescent silica nanoprobes,
molecular imaging, targeted radionuclide imaging. (11)
SITE SPECIFIC DRUG DELIVERY: Opsonization of polymer surface-blood compatibility of polymer surfaces-nanospecific blood-
nanoparticle interaction-complement activation and cell opsonization-leukocyte activation, suppression of opsonization and
nonspecific cell-particle interaction, clinical evaluation of long circulating nanocapsules, (11)
NANOSTRUCTURED MICROCAPSULES AND NANOGELS: Microcapsules with nanochanneled thermoresponsive layers,

microcapsules with sandwiched thermoresponsive membranes, nanogel-matrix membranes, thermocontrolled protein delivery
devices. Preparation of nanogels-microemulsion polymerization-chemical crosslinking-physiochemical crosslinking, stimuli
responsive nanogels, nanogel applications in drug delivery. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Alf Lamprecht, ―Nanotherapeutics Drug Delivery Concepts in Nanosience‖, Pan Stanford Publishing, Singapore, 2014.
388
59th ACM 09.06.2018
2. Mingjun Zhang and Ning Xi, ―Nanomedicine: A Systems Engineering Approach‖, Pan Stanford Publishing, Singapore, 2012.
3. Kewal K Jain, ―The Handbook of Nanomedicine‖, Humana Press, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Reza Arshady and Kenji Kono, ―Smart Nanoparticles in Nanomedicine‖, MML series volume 8, Knetus Books, London, 2006.
5. Robert A and Freitas Jr, ―Nanomedicine Volume IIA: Biocompatibility‖, S Karger Ag, Switzerland, 2003.
18LN22 NANOTHERAPEUTICS
3003
BIOLOGICAL MECHANISM: Opsonization-Complement activation-classical pathway-lectin pathway- Hypersensitivity-I, II, II, and
IV, Enhanced permeation and retention. (11)
VIRUS LIKE NANOPARTICLES FOR GENE THERAPY: Introduction-polycations for gene delivery In vitro-single plasmid
complexes surfactant assisted plasmid complexation-DNA complexation with novel surfactant-morphology, stability and
pharmokinetics of DNA-surfactant complexes. Surface modification startigies-Targeting PEG-folate modified DNA nanoparticles.(11)
ULTRASOUND TARGETING OF NANOCARRIER: Energy deposition pattern in the body-modes of ultrasound applications-
ultrasound transient cavitations-effect of Doxorubicin in transient cavitation-pluronics-optison microbubbles-ultrasound interaction
with cells- Drug release – synergistic effect. In vivo evaluation-mechansim of ultrasound targeting of nanocarrier. (12)
NANOPARTICLES IN CANCER THERAPY: Magnetic nano and microparticles for embolotherapy - hyperthermic therapy-delivery
of chemotherapeutic drugs-brachytherapy, Thermoresponsive liposomes for hyperthermic chemotherapy assemblies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mingjun Zhang and Ning Xi, ―Nanomedicine: A Systems Engineering Approach‖, Pan Stanford Publishing, Singapore, 2013.
2. Alf Lamprecht, ―Nanotherapeutics Drug Delivery Concepts in Nanosience‖, Pan Stanford Publishing, Singapore, 2009.
3. Kewal K Jain, ―The Handbook of Nanomedicine‖, Humana Press, New Delhi, 2012.
4. Reza Arshady and Kenji Kono, ―Smart Nanoparticles in Nanomedicine‖, MML series volume 8, Knetus Books, London, 2006.
5. Robert A and Freitas Jr, ―Nanomedicine Volume IIA: Biocompatibility‖, S Karger Ag, Switzerland, 2003.
18LN23 REGENERATIVE MEDICINE

3003
MOLECULES THAT ORGANIZE CELLS: Changes in cell-cell adhesion- Changes in cell-ECM adhesion- Changes in cell polarity
and stimulation of cell motility- Invasion of the basal lamina. (11)
CELL-ECM INTERACTIONS IN REPAIR AND REGENERATION: Composition and Diversity of the ECM- Receptors for
Extracellular Matrix Molecules, Signal Transduction Events during Cell- ECM Interactions, Cell-ECM Interactions during Healing of
Skin Wounds, Cell- ECM Interactions During Regeneration- Fetal wound healing- Liver regeneration. (11)
DESIGN PRINCIPLES IN BIOMATERIALS AND SCAFFOLDS: Introduction-selection of biomaterials, biodegradable and non-
biodegradable synthetic polymers-fabrication of macroporous biodegradable scaffolds-surface immobilization-sustain release of
bioactive molecules. Hydrogels in regenerative medicine. (11)
CELL AND TISSUE THREAPY: Biomineralization and bone regeneration, cell therapy for blood substitutes-articular cartilage-
myoblast transplantation in skeletal muscles.Fetal tissues, cardiac tissues, extracorporeal renal replacement, regenerative medicine
for cornea and respiratory tract, Regulations and ethics.
(12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Fisher J P, Mikos A G and Bronzino J D, ―Tissue Engineering‖, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2012.
2. Robert Neeram, Thomson ,Lanza and Atala, ―Principles of regenerative medicine‖, Elseiver, Canada, 2011.
3. Sujata V Bhat, ―Biomaterials‖, Narosa Publication House, New Delhi, 2012.
4. Cato T Laurencin and Lakshmi S Nair, ―Nanotechnology and Tissue Engineering: The Scaffold‖, CRC Press, Boca Raton. 2008
5. Lanza R, Langer R and Vacanti J, ―Principles of Tissue Engineering‖, Elsevier Intl, Amsterdam, 2007.
18LN24 PHOTOVOLTAIC TECHNOLOGY

3003
SEMICONDUCTOR PROPERTIES FOR PV: First, second and third generation photovoltaics - Optical absorption and carrier photo
generation- Direct vs. indirect bandgaps- Heavy doping effects – Moss Burstein and Bandgap Narrowing - Minority carrier transport
properties- Carrier recombination-lifetime and defects- Band to band and Shockley-Read-hall - High injection effects- Surface and
interface recombination - PN homojunctions and carrier transport under broad spectrum illumination- Photocurrent and spectral
response- Current transport models. (12)
389
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SOLAR CELL DESIGN: Solar Cell parameters - Efficiency calculations for ideal cells - Non-idealities: series resistance, shunt
resistance - Optical and electrical loss mechanisms - Basics of solar cell device design - Lateral and vertical design - Optical versus
electrical tradeoffs and optimization. (11)
SILICON AND THIN FILM PHOTOVOLTAIC CELLS: Si photovoltaics - High efficiency single crystal Si PV designs-
Polycrystalline/microcrystalline Si solar cells- Amorphous Si-Heterojunctions – Thin film II-VI photovoltaics - Polycrystalline
heterojunctions - CdTe/CdS and CuInGaSe2 /CdS thin film cell technologies III-V Heterojunction and Heterinterface Cells. (11)
HIGH EFFICIENCY PHOTOVOLTAICS: III-V multi-junction solar cells- Spectral splitting and the GaInP/GaAs/Ge triple junction
solar cell - Bandgap profile optimization and solar spectrum matching - Tunnel junctions and current matching limitations -
Concentrator Photovoltaics - Space photovoltaics- Radiation effects in semiconductors and solar cells - Organic (Polymer)
photovoltaics - Dye sensitized solar cells-GaAs - New concepts – quantum dots, wires, intermediate band, multiple exciton. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Fonash S. J., ―Solar Cell Device Physics‖, Academic, 2013.
2. Green M. A. ―Third Generation Photovoltaics: Advanced Solar Energy Conversion‖ Springer, 2006.
3. T. Markvart.‖Solar Electricity‖, Wiley, 2014.
4. Moller H.J. ―Semiconductors for Solar Cells‖ Artech House, 1993.
5. Goetzberger, J. Knobloch, and B. Voss ―Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells‖, Wiley, 1998.
6. Fahrenbruch A.L. and R.H. Bube ―Fundamentals of Solar Cells‖, Academic, 1983.
18LN25 BIOMOLECULAR NANOTECHNOLOGY

3003
BIOLOGICAL MOLECULES IN NANODEVICES: Significance of nanobiological devices, Design of nanobiological devices, nucleic
acids in nanobiological devices-Nucleic Acid Hybridization: Structure and Assembly-Biologically Functional Nucleic Acid
Nanodevices, proteins in nanodevices-Polypeptide Affinity Reagents:Targeting, Triggering, and Assembly. (11)
DNA ELECTRONICS: Charge transport mechanism in DNA-indirect measurement of charge transport in DNA-Direct Measurements
of Current–Voltage Characteristics-DNA applications in nano scale electronics-DNA Nano scale Wires-DNA Self-Assembly. (11)
DNA-BASED NANODEVICES: DNA technology-Force Generation-Branch Migration, A Device Based on the B–Z Transition-Design
of the Device-Characterization of the Device—Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer, DNA Actuators-DNA Tweezers-DNA
Scissors-A Three-State Device, A Device Based on Crossover Junctions-Design and Operation Scheme of the Device - Formation
of G-Quartets-Design and Operation of the G-Quartet Device-An Operation Principle for Free-Running DNA Motors. (11)
PROTEIN NANOTECHNOLOGY: S-layer proteins, secondary cell wall polymers, s-layer fusion proteins, s-layer monolayer
formation on solid surfaces, s-layer templating of nanoparticle arrays, spatial control of the s-layer reassembly, lipid membranes,
planar lipid membranes, s-layer ultrafiltration membrane (sum)-supported Lipid membranes, solid-supported Lipid membranes. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Chunhai Fan, ―DNA nanotechnology from structure to function‖, Springer, London, 2013.
2. Yoseph Bar Cohen, ―Biomimetics: Biologically Inspired Technologies‖, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2006.
3. Itamar Willner, Eugenii Katz, ―Bioelectronics: From Theory to Applications,‖ Wiley-VCH,Germany, 2005
4. David S Goodsell, ―Bionanotechnology: Concepts, Lessons from Nature‖, Wiley-Liss, New Jersey, 2004.
5. Niemeyer C M and Mirkin C A, ―Nanobiotechnology, Concepts, Applications and Perspectives‖, Wiley-Vch, Germany, 2004.
18LN26 POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES

3003
PREPARATION OF POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES: Definition of nanocomposite, polymer matrix, nanofillers, classification of
nanofillers, carbon and non-carbon based nanofillers- synthesis and properties of fillers, Nanofibers, Electrospinning, Composites
manufacturing, Synthesis of Nanocomposites: Dispersion, Direct Mixing, Solution Mixing, In-Situ Polymerization, In-Situ Particle
Processing, Nanocomposite fiber, Nanocomposite coating, Modification of Interfaces, Modification of Nanotubes, Modification of
Nanoparticles (12)
CHARACTERIZATION OF POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES: Characterization techniques for polymer nanocomposites – DLS,

TEM, SEM, AFM, XRD, etc, Mechanical Properties, Modulus, Failure Stress and Strain, Toughness, Thermo-mechanical behavior,
Abrasion and Wear Resistance, Permeability, Dimensional Stability Contents, Thermal Stability and Flammability, Conductivity,
Percolation threshold, Resistivity, Permittivity and Breakdown Strength (11)
PROPERTIES OF POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES: Properties of various polymer nanocomposites: Carbon nanofiller/Polymer

Composites, Metal/ceramic nanoparticle based composites, Layered Filler/Polymer Composites, Biodegradable polymer
nanocomposites, Barrier properties, Electrical and Optical Properties, Permeation and diffusion models (10)
390
59th ACM 09.06.2018
ADVANCED POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITES: Multi-scale nanocomposites, Nanocomposite nanofibers, Hybrid nanoparticles,

Nanoencapsulation, Wear resistant polymer nanocomposites, Surface treatments, Application of Polymer Nanocomposites –
Automobiles, Aerospace, Injection Molded Products, Coatings, Adhesives, Fire-retardants, Packaging Materials, Microelectronic
Packaging, Integrated Circuits, Drug Delivery, Sensors, Membranes, Medical Devices, Implants, Consumer Goods, Nanoemulsion,
etc. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Yiu-Wing Mai and Zhong-Zhen Yu, Polymer nanocomposites, Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2006,.
2. M. Joshi and A. Bhattacharyya, Nanotechnology – A New Route to High Performance Functional Textiles, Textile Progress,
2011.
3. Rakesh K Gupta, Elliot Kennan and Kwang Jea Kim, Polymer nanocomposites Handbook, CRC Press, 2014
4. Joseph H Koo, Polymer Nanocomposites: Processing and applications,McGraw Hill, 2012.
18LN27 NANOPHOTONICS
3003
LINEAR AND NONLINEAR PHOTONICS: Optical luminescence and fluorescence from direct bandgap semiconductor
nanoparticles, light emission from indirect semiconductors, Maxwell’s Equations, Photonic Band Gap and Localized Defect States,
Transmission Spectra, Nonlinear Optics in Linear Photonic Crystals, Guided Modes in Photonic Crystals Nonlinear Photonic Crystal
Analysis. (11)
PLASMONICS: Plasmonics, merging photonics and electronics at nanoscale dimensions, single photon transistor using surface
plasmon, nanowire surface plasmons-interaction with matter, single emitter as saturable mirror, photon correlation, and integrated
systems. (11)
NANOSTRUCTURE PHOTONICS: Surface Structures - Random Surfaces - Controlled Random Surfaces - Black Silicon, Thin Film
Structures and Optical Coatings, Photonic Crystals, Optical Properties of Materials Including Quantum Structures - Frequency
Conversion - Charge Carrier Generation - Multiple Exciton Generation - Optical Properties of Thin Films and Quantum Dots,
Nanoplasmonics. (12)
APPLICATIONS: Optical modulation by plasmonic excitation of quantum dots, Channel plasmon-polariton guiding by sub
wavelength metal grooves, Near-field photonics: surface plasmon polaritons and localized surface plasmons, slow guided surface
plasmons at telecom frequencies, Graphene photonics and optoelectronics. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Mool Ch, Gupta and John Ballato, The Handbook of Photonics, CRC Press, 2013.
2. Valery V Tuchin, Handbook of Photonics for Biomedical Science, CRC Press, 2010.
3. Ralf Menzel, Photonics: Linear and Nonlinear Interactions of Laser Light and Matter, Springer, 2012.
4. Shalaev, V M and Kawata, S, Nanophotonics with Surface Plasmons, Elsevier Science Publishing, Boston, 2007.
18LN28 BIOMATERIALS AND TISSUE ENGINEERING

3003
BIOLOGICAL MATERIALS: Biocompatibility- introduction to biological fluids- material response: swelling and leaching, corrosion
and dissolution, deformation and failure, friction and wear - host response: the inflammatory process - coagulation and hemolysis-
approaches to thrombo- resistant materials development. (11)
ORTHOPAEDIC IMPLANT MATERIALS: Bone composition and properties - joint replacement - biomaterials used in bone and joint
replacement: metals and alloys - ceramics: carbon, alumina, zirconia, bioactive calcium phosphates, bioglass and glass ceramics -
polymers - bone cement - composites. - materials for oral and maxillofacial surgery. (11)
VASCULAR AND OTHER IMPLANT MATERIALS: Vascular implants - vascular graft, cardiac valve prostheses, cardiac
pacemakers - blood substitutes - extracorporeal blood circulation devices. Biomaterials in ophthalmology - viscoelastic solutions,
contact lenses, intraocular lens materials. Teeth composition and mechanical properties - fillings and restoration materials -dental
cements and dental amalgams - dental adhesives. (11)
TISSUE ENGINEERING: Cell - extracellular matrix - cell as therapeutic agent - cell number and growth rate - cell differentiation -
cell migration - cell death - types of tissues - tissue dynamics - homeostasis in highly prolific tissue - tissue repair – nanomaterials
for cell engineering - nano structured extra cellular matrix - electrospun nanofibrous polymeric scaffold - neural tissue engineering -
cardiovascular tissue engineering. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Fisher, J P, Mikos, A G and Bronzino, J D, Tissue Engineering, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2012.
2. Temenoff , J S and Mikos , A G ,Biomaterials: The Intersection of Biology and Materials Science, Pearson, 2012.
391
59th ACM 09.06.2018
3. Sujata, V Bhat, Biomaterials, Narosa Publication House, 2009.

4. Cato T Laurencin and Lakshmi S Nair, Nanotechnology and Tissue Engineering: The Scaffold, CRC Press, 2008.
5. Lanza, R, Langer, R and Vacanti, J, Principles of Tissue Engineering, Elsevier Intl, 2007.
18LN29 POLYMER ELECTRONICS

3003
POLYMERIC MATERIALS: Origin, classification, formation of polymers - chain growth and step growth polymerization,
copolymerization - Thermoplastics and thermosets - Micro structures in polymers - polymer length, molecular weight, amorphous
and crystalline, thermal transitions in plastics. (11)
ELECTRONICALLY CONDUCTING POLYMERS: Band theory, insulators, semiconductors, metals, semimetals, poly (sulfur nitride)
and polyacetylene - Synthesis, structure and morphology- Conductivity doping, Phenylene polymers - Polypyrrole and
Polythiophene - Polyaniline - Stacked phtalocyanine polymers, polymers with transition metals. (11)
FABRICATION OF ORGANIC ELECTRONIC DEVICES: Technology, Materials, Printing and Patterning Techniques, Devices,
Printed Electrodes for All-Printed Thin-Film Transistor Applications: Surface Roughness and Edge Waviness in Printed Electrodes -
Solution-Processing for Organic TFT , Roll-to-Roll Printing, Gravure Printing, Screen Printing of Cathode, OLEDS, Roll-to-Roll
Printed OLED Demonstrators. (12)
SCALING EFFECTS IN ORGANIC TRANSISTORS AND SENSORS: Scaling Behavior- Charge Transport - Characterization -
Channel Length and Temperature Dependence of Charge Transport - Field-Dependent Mobility Model - Charge Transport in sub-
10-nm Organic Transistors - Chemical and Vapour Sensing with Organic Transistors. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Frances Gardiner and Eleanor Carter, ―Polymer Electronics- A flexible Technology‖, iSmithers Rapra Technology Pub. Akron,
2013.
2. Ruth Shinar and Joseph Shinar, ―Organic Electronics in Sensors and Biotechnology‖, Mc Graw Hill, New Jersey, 2013.
3. Cousins K and Keith Cousins, ―Polymers in Electronics‖, Smithers Rapra Technology Publishers, Akron, 2006.
4. Harry R Allcock, Frederick W Lampe and James E Mark, ―Contemporary Polymer Chemistry‖, Pearson, New Delhi, 2003.
18LN30 NANOBIOMATERIALS
3003
NATURAL NANOBIOMATERIALS: Mineral Constituents of the living systems - major elements, minor and trace elements, toxic
elements, biomineralization principles, architecture of bone and teeth, nanohydroxyapatite, nanosilica, silk as nanobiomaterial,
microstructure of cocoon silk and spider silk, biomimetic nanomaterials - Biologically inspired electro spun nano fibre and nano
tubes, Biomimetic formulation of synergistic nanocomposite materials, biomimetic adhesive design and manufacturing. (11)
DIAGNOSTIC NANOBIOMATERIALS: Intrinsic biocompatibility of nanoparticle in cellular system - Nanobiomaterial as contrast

agent, photosensitizer, degradable and non-degradable polymers, degradable and resorbable materials, biocompatible polymer
coated magnetic nanoparticles for MRI imaging, gold and silver loaded bioconjugated carbon nanotube and graphene for tumor
targeting, Silica / CdSe / CdS / ZnO core - shell nanostructures for optical diagnostics and imaging – multifunctional
nanobiomaterials for multi imaging modality approaches. (12)
THERAPEUTIC NANOBIOMATERIALS: Nanobiomaterial as therapeutic agent - Targeted, non-targeted delivery; controlled drug
release; exploiting novel delivery routes using nanoparticles, Cytotoxicity mechanisms and their potential use in therapy, gene
therapy using nanobiomaterials; nanostructures for antibiotics; diseased tissue destruction using nanoparticles, Photodynamic
therapy, Magnetically induced hyperthermia. (11)
FUNCTIONAL NANOBIOMATERIALS: Goals of nanomaterial use in healthcare, areas of application- nanovectors, nanobio-
generators, nanobiosensors, implantable drug delivery devices, status of tissue engineering of specific organs - bone marrow,
skeletal muscle, and cartilage, design and engineering of mesoporous scaffold for hard tissue replacement, choice of materials and
process techniques, fabrication of hybrid microswimmers, bionanomaterial applications in environmental remediation. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Ramakrishna S, Murugan Ramalingam, and Kumar T. S. S., ―Biomaterials: A Nano Approach‖, CRCPress, London, 2014.
2. Astrid Sigel, Helmut Sigel and Roland K. O. Sigel, ―Biomineralization: From Nature to Application‖, John Wiley, 2012.
3. Bikramjit Basu and Ashok Kumar K., ―Advanced Biomaterials: Processing and Applications‖, John Wiley, New Jersey, 2009.
4. Cato T. Laurencin, Temenoff J. S. and Mikos A. G., ―Biomaterials: The Intersection of Biology and Materials Science‖, Pearson,
New Delhi, 2009.
5. Yoseph Bar Cohen, ―Biomimetics: Biologically Inspired Technologies‖, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2006.
6. Hari Singh Nalwa, ―Handbook of Nanostructured Biomaterials and Their Applications in Nanobiotechnology‖, American
Scientific Publishers, 2005.
392
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18LN31 NANOTOXICOLOGY
3003
TOXICOLOGY AT NANO SCALE: Size-specific behavior of nanomaterials - nanotoxicology challenges - carbon nanotubes in
practice - postproduction processing of carbon nanotubes - physicochemical properties of nanomaterials as mediators of toxicity -
characterization of administered nanomaterials during toxicity studies - C60 - Graphene issues. (11)
NANOPARTICLE EXPOSURE: Physicochemical determinants in particle toxicology - nanoparticles vs. micron-size particles -
nanoparticle toxicity comparison to larger counterparts - requirement for appropriate model particles - exposure assessment,
exposure pathways and their significance - documenting the occurrence and nature of exposures. (11)
INTERACTION WITH BIOMEMBRANES: Bio-distribution of nanoparticles - localization of particles in tissues - relevance of drug
targeting to nanotoxicology Interaction of nanoparticles with lipid bilayers - cell-level studies of nanoparticle - induced membrane
permeability - internalization of cation nanoparticles into cells - placental biological barrier model for evaluation of nanoparticle
transfer - transport across placental barrier - assessment of placental transfer. (11)
BIOLOGICAL MECHANISM AND ETHICS: Nanoparticle disposition - outline of gene-cellular interactions of nanomaterials -
overview of dermal effects of nanomaterials - toxicity of nanoparticles in the eye - scientists as moral agents - the business
community and corporations as moral agents - policy makers and regulators as moral agents. ethical and societal implications - the
public interface of science technology and human values - origins of the precautionary principle. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Nancy A, ―Monteiro Riviere Lang Tran‖, Nanotoxicology, CRC Press, 2014.
2. Deb Bennett Woods, ―Nanotechnology: Ethics and Society‖, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, 2008.
3. Lynn Goldman and Christine Coussens, ―Implications of Nanotechnology for environmental Health Research, National
Academic Press, Washington,2007.
4. Patrick Lin, Fritz Allhoff, ―Nano-ethics: The Ethical and Social Implications of Nanotechnology‖, John Wiley and Sons, New
Jersey.
18LN32 NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY SYSTEMS

3003
SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS: Solar radiation, evolution of solar cells, amorphous and crystalline silicon, Thin films, Cadmium
telluride solar cell, Copper indium gallium selenide solar cell, Gallium arsenide multi-junction solar cell, Dye-sensitized solar cell,
Quantum Dot Solar Cells (QDSCs), Organic/polymer solar cells, hybrid photovoltaic system. (11)
MICRO BATTERIES: Super ionic solids - Nano-ionic materials - thin film battery- electrolyte thin films- capacity of a cell - power and
energy density of a cell - polymer electrolytes - super capacitors. Primary lithium batteries - Secondary lithium batteries - Li-ion
electrode materials - Applications of Lithium batteries in electronic devices and industries. (11)
FUEL CELL TECHNOLOGY: Types of fuel cells and their characteristics, physical and chemical phenomena in fuel cells, -
integration and performance for micro-fuel cell systems - design methodologies - micro-fuel cell power sources, fuel cells for
stationary and dynamic applications. (11)
HYDROGEN STORAGE METHODS: Metal hydrides - hydrogen storage capacity - hydrogen reaction kinetics - carbon-free cycle -
gravimetric and volumetric storage capacities - hydriding / dehydriding kinetics - thermal management during the hydriding reaction -
size effects - distinctive chemical and physical properties - multiple catalytic effects. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Kothari D P, Singal K C and Rakesh Ranjan, ―Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies‖, PHI Learning, New
Delhi, 2013.
2. Leon Freris and David Infield, ―Renewable Energy in Power Systems‖, John Wiley and Sons, London, 2009.
3. Viswanathan B and Aulice Scibioh M, ―Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications‖, Universities Press, Hyderabad, 2009.
4. Chetan Singh Solanki, ―Solar Photovoltaics: Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications‖, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2009.
5. Kiehne H A, ―Battery Technology Handbook‖, Marcel Dekkar, New York, 2003.
18LN33 NANOCOMPUTING
3003
TECHNOLOGIES AND IMPERFECTIONS: Digital signals and gates - Silicon nanoelectronics - Nanocomputing in the presence of
defects and faults - error detection, masking and reconfiguration - Defect tolerance - approaches for achieving defect tolerance in
nanometer domain, tool flow required to achieve defect tolerance, testing, placement and routing - Quadrillion transistor logic
systems - cell matrix, overcoming manufacturing defects. (11)
PROBABILISTIC BASED DESIGN FOR NANOSCALE COMPUTATION AND RELIABILITY ISSUES: Introduction - Markov
Random Field (MRK) design for structural based faults, design for signal based errors- Tools and techniques for evaluating reliability
393
59th ACM 09.06.2018
issues for nano architectures - NANOLAB, NANOPRISM, and reliability evaluation of multiplexing based majority systems. (11)
NANOSCALE QUANTUM COMPUTING: Nano information processing, prospects and challenges - quantum computation, error
correction, computing technologies, fabrication and test challenges, architectural challenges - quantum dot cellular automata –
computing, clocking and design rules. (11)
OTHER COMPUTING TECHNIQUES AND VERIFICATION OF NANO SYSTEMS: Brief overview of molecular electronics and
molecular computing - Use of optics in computing and optical computing paradigms - Role of non linear optics in optical computing -
Verification of large scale nanosystems - scalable verification, scalable unbounded and bounded model checking, verification in the
presence of unknowns and uncertainties. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vishal Sahni and Debabrata Goswami, Nanocomputing: The Future of Computing, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014.
2. Sandeep K Shukla and Iris Bahar, R, Nano, Quantum and Molecular Computing: Implications to high level design and
verification, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2012.
3. Goser K, Glosekotter P and Dienstuhl, J, Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems : From Transistors to Molecular Quantum
Devices, Springer, 2008.
18LN34 PRODUCT DESIGN, MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP

3003
PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT: Concept generation - product architecture - Industrial design process - criteria for
selection of product - product development process - design for manufacture - estimate the manufacturing cost - reduce the support
cost - prototyping - economics of product development projects - elements of economic analysis - financial models. (11)
MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES: Technology management - scientific management - development of management thought -

principles of management - functions of management - planning - organization - directing, staffing and controlling - management by
objective - SWOT analysis - enterprise resource planning and supply chain management. (12)
ENTREPRENEURIAL COMPETENCE AND ENVIRONMENT: Concept of entrepreneurship - entrepreneurship as a career -

personality characteristic a successful entrepreneur - knowledge and skill required for Entrepreneur - Business environment -
entrepreneurship development training - centre and state government policies and regulations - international business. (11)
MANAGEMENT OF SMALL BUSINESS: Pre feasibility study - ownership - budgeting - project profile preparation - feasibility report
preparation - evaluation criteria - market and channel selection - product launching - monitoring and evaluation of business -
effective management of small business. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert D Hisrich and Michael P Peters, ―Entrepreneurship‖, McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. Karal T Ulrich and Steven D Eppinger, ―Product Design and Development‖, McGraw- Hill, 2008.
3. Koontz H and Cyril O Donnellm, ―Essentials of Management‖, McGraw Hill, 2008.
4. Joseph L Massie, ―Essentials of Management‖, Prentice Hall, 2012.
18LN35 NANOSENSORS AND DEVICES

3003
SENSOR CHARACTERISTICS: Active and passive sensors - static characteristic - accuracy, error, precision, resolution, sensitivity,
selectivity, noise, drift, detection limit - reproducibility, hysteresis, stability, response time, recovery time, dynamic range - dynamic
characteristics - zero order, first and second order sensors. (11)
TRANSDUCTION PRINCIPLES: Photoelectric effect - photo dielectric effect - photoluminescence effect - electroluminescence
effect - chemiluminescence effect - Doppler effect - Barkhausen effect - Hal effect - Ettinshausen effect - thermoelectric effect -
peizoresistive effect – piezoelectric effect - pyroelectric effect -Magneto-mechanical effect (magnetostriction) - Magneto resistive
effect. (11)
INORGANIC SENSORS: Density of states (DOS) - DOS of 3D, 2D, 1D and 0D materials - gas sensing with nanostructured thin
films - absorption on surfaces, metal oxide modifications by additives, surface modifications - Nano optical sensors- Nano
mechanical sensors- Magnetically engineered spintronic sensors. (11)
ORGANIC SENSORS: Surface interactions-covalent coupling,adsorption,physical entrapment,chemical entrapment - using protein

in nanodevices - antibodies in sensing - antibody in nano particle conjugates - enzymes in sensing - enzyme nanoparticles hybrid
sensors - transmembrane sensors. Nanosensor based on Nucleotides and DNA - DNA decoders and microarrays - DNA protein
conjugate based sensors- DNA sequencing with nanopores- Sensors based on molecules with dendritic architectures. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Vijay K. Varadan, Linfeng Chen and Sivathanupillai, ―Nanotechnology Engineering in Nano and Biomedicine‖, John Wiley,
Canada, 2011.
394
59th ACM 09.06.2018
2. Kourosh Kalantar – Zadeh and Benjamin Fry, ―Nanotechnology- Enabled Sensors‖, Springer, 2014.
3. Bassi.A.S and Knopf.G.K, ―Smart Biosensor Technology‖, CRC Press, 2012.
4. Rajmohan Joshi, ―Biosensor‖, Isha Books, 2006.
5. Brain R. Eggins, ―Chemical Sensors and biosensors‖, John-Wiley, 2002.
18LN36 DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS

2203
INTRODUCTION: Software Development process –Data structures - Abstract Data Types - Analysis of algorithms - Best, worst and
average case time complexities - notations. (4+4)
ARRAYS: Operations - Implementation of one, two, three and multi dimensioned arrays – Sparse and dense matrices -
Applications. (4+6)
STACK AND QUEUE: Stack operations - implementations - Applications: Function handling - Recursion – Expression Evaluation.
Queue - operations - implementations - Priority Queues - Dequeues - Applications: Job scheduling. (6+4)
LISTS: Operations - Singly linked lists, doubly linked lists, Circular lists – Applications-Linked Stacks-Linked queues. (6+4)
TREES AND GRAPHS: Tree Terminologies - Implementation - Binary Tree: Properties – representation of trees, operations -
Traversals - Expression trees - Infix, Postfix and Prefix expressions – Dijkstra’s Algorithms-Floyd’s Algorithm,Graph Terminologies-
representations-graph search methods-Breadth first search, Depth first search,Minimum spanning trees-Multistage graph. (6+6)
SORTING: Insertion sort - Selection sort - Bubble sort - Radix sort - Algorithms and their time complexities. (4+6)
 Analysis of algorithms
 Implementation of stack and queue
 Evaluation of expressions
 Singly and doubly linked lists implementation
 Binary tree traversal
 Single source shortest path algorithm-Dijikstra’s algorithm
 All pairs shortest path problem-Floyd’s Algorithm
 Graph search method implementation
Total L: 30 + T: 30 = 60
REFERENCES:
1. Alfred V Aho, John E Hopcraft and Jeffrey D Ullman, ―Data structures and Algorithms‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Robert L Kruse, Bruce P Leung and Clovin L Tondo, ―Data Structures and Program Design in C‖, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2009.
New Delhi, 2009.
4. Mark Allen Weiss, ―Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007.
AUDIT COURSES
18LN81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18LN82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

395
59th ACM 09.06.2018

M.TECH BIOTECHNOLOGY
2018 REGULATION
M. Tech. BIOTECHNOLOGY – 2018 Regulations

(Minimum No. Of credits to be earned: 71 )
Hours/Week Maximum Marks
Course Credit
Course Title Practi CAT
Code Lecture Tutorial s CA FE Total
cal
Semester I
18BT01 Biostatistics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18BT02 Technologies and Strategies in OMICs Research 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18BT03 Genetic Engineering and Recombinant Products 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18BT04 Process Engineering Principles 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18BT05 Advanced Bioprocess Engineering 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
18BT51 Data Mining & Analysis Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18BT81 English for Research Paper Writing 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 21 hrs 15 2 4 18 300 300 600
Semester II
18BT06 Bioseparation Technology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
18BT07 Quality Assurance, Industrial and Bio-Safety 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT08 Instrumental Methods of Analysis Laboratory 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 PC
18BT09 Molecular Cloning and Expression Laboratory 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 PC
18BT_ Elective 1 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT_ Elective 2 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT52 Biological Big Data Analysis Laboratory 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 PC
18BT61 Industrial Visit and Technical Seminar 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 EEC
18BT82 Research Methodology and IPR 0 0 ** Grade 0 0 0 MC
Total 32 hrs 12 0 20 22 400 400 800
Semester 3
18BT_ Elective 3 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT_ Elective 4 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT_ Elective 5 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT_ Elective Laboratory 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT53 Industrial Biotechnology Laboratory 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 PC
18BT71 Project Work I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EEC
Total 27 hrs 9 0 18 18 300 300 600
Semester 4
18BT72 Project Work II 0 0 28 14 50 50 100 EEC
Total 28 hrs 0 0 28 14 50 50 100
18BT21 Molecular Principles of Cellular Properties 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT22 Vaccines and Therapeutic Proteins 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT23 Protein Chemistry and Engineering
18BT24 Advanced Topics in Plant Molecular Biology 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT25 Techniques In Molecular Subtyping of Pathogens 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT26 Biomaterials and Tissue Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT27 Membrane Separation 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT28 Biofuels 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT29 Industrial Waste Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT30 Bioreactor Designs 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT31 Fundamentals of Cellular Mechanics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT32 Techniques in Epidemiological Data Analyses 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT33 Pharmacogenomics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT34 Metagenomics and Epigenomics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT35 Systems Biology: Theory and Applications 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT36 Analytical Instrumentation Techniques 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
18BT37 Algorithms in Bioinformatics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE LABORATORY COURSES (One to be opted)
18BT54 Animal Cell Culture Laboratory 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 PE
18BT55 Plant Tissue Culture Laboratory 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 PE
18BT56 Protein Purification and Analysis Laboratory 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 PE
18BT57 Biofuel Laboratory 0 0 6 3 100 0 100 PE
396
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER I
18BT01 BIOSTATISTICS
3003
INTRODUCTION TO DECISION MAKING: Biological / clinical research and statististics: data sources and organizing investigational
studies. Communication of information. Interpretation of published data. Data in the form of proportion, survival, measures. Study
designs – prospective and case control. (12)
HYPOTHESIS TESTING: Statistical significance; interpretation of p values; multiple comparisons, nonparametric methods. (10)
CLINICAL STUDY DESIGN: Health science research, plan and approval process, different types of research including observational,
clinical, community, and interventional research. Sample size determination; survival analysis (8)
RELATIONSHIPS AND MODELS: Determinants, causations and correlations. Measure of robustness. Linear and non-linear
regression; BAYESIAN LOGIC: Laboratory tests and diagnosis. Genetic counseling. Clinical research. (15)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Forthofer RN, Lee ES and Hernandez M. ―Biostatistics: A guide to design, analysis and discovery‖, Academic Press, 2007.
2. Motulsky H. ―Intuitive Biostatistics‖, Oxford University Press, 2004.
3. Glantz, SA. ―Primer of Biostatistics‖, McGraw Hill, 1997.
4. Ambrosius WT. ‖Topics in Biostatistics: Methods in Molecular Biology‖, Humana Press, 2010.
18BT02 TECHNOLOGIES AND STRATEGIES IN OMICS RESEARCH

3003
TECHNOLOGIES IN GENOMIC AND PROTEOMIC ANALYSIS: Genome sequencing technologies – EST, SAGE, MPSS, microarray
technologies, Next generation sequencing; Proteomics technologies: 2D-electrophoresis, MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry. (12)
GENOME ANALYSIS: Genome assembly and annotation, Genomic browsers and databases, Comparative genomics — miRNA and
target genes identification, metagenomics – analysis and applications, Epigenetic analysis. (12)
TRANSCRIPTOMICS: Expression data bases and analysis tools, Examples in transcriptome analysis and applications. (10)
PROTEOMICS: Databases and computational methods for proteome analysis, Protein-protein interactions — yeast two-hybrid system.
(11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Sandy B Primrose, Richard M Twyman. ―Principles of Genome Analysis and Genomics‖, Blackwell Publications, London, 2003.
2. Jianping Xu., ―Next-generation Sequencing: Current Technologies and Applications‖, Caister Academic Press, 2014.
3. John R Yates, Daniel C Liebler ―Introduction to Proteomics:Tools For The New Biology‖, Humana Press, New Jersey, 2002.
4. Sandor Suhai.‖Genomics and Proteomics: Functional and Computational Aspects‖, Springer , New York, 2002.
5. Malcolm Campbell A , Laurie J Heyer. ―Discovery Genomics, Proteomics and Bioinformatics‖, Pearson, 2004.
6. Norbert W. Lutz , Jonathan V. Sweedler , Ron A. Wevers, ―Methodologies for Metabolomics: Experimental Strategies and
Techniques‖, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
18BT03 GENETIC ENGINEERING AND RECOMBINANT PRODUCTS

3003
INTRODUCTION: Overview of tools and technique used in rDNA. Large scale production of heterolous protein in prokaryotic and
eukaryotic systems – problems and solutions. Biosafety and regulations concerning genetically modified organisms (10)
RECOMBINANT BACTERIA AND TRANSGENIC BACTERIAL PRODUCTS TRANSGENIC FUNGAL APPLICATIONS: Recombinant
rhizobia, azospirilla, and agrobacteria; Medicine — Insulin, Hepatitis B Vaccine, Human growth hormone; Industrial products- xanthan
gum, plastics (Synechocystis), Remediation-oil spill, CO2 trapping, explosive removal, mercury removal. Vector control – mosquito
control; CASE STUDY 1. Recombinant Fungi — Biocontrol agent, biological insecticide, GM Arbuscular mycorrhizae , -GM fungi that fight
against malaria, dengue, vaccines — M-M-RVAXPRO (Measles, mumps and rubella vaccine.) CASE STUDY 2, 3 (13)
GENETICALLY MODIFIED PLANT: Resistance to biotic stress (pests and diseases)- Bt cotton, corn and Brinjal, ; Resistance to abiotic
stress (environmental); Improved nutritional qualities- proteins of high value ,baking quality, oil quality, starch quality. Yield parameters-
Short duration, indefinite flowering, high photosynthetic efficiency. CASE STUDY 4, 5, 6, 7 (12)
TRANSGENIC ANIMAL TECHNOLOGIES: Transgenic mice, poultry, livestock, insects, spider, silk worm, - medicine, nutritional quality,
silk quality, therapeutic products- erythropoietin, study models for Alzheimers, Huntingtons disease, developmental models –frog
metamorphosis. CASE STUDY 8. (10)
LIST OF CASE STUDIES

1. Walsh, Gary,‖Therapeutic insulins and their large-scale manufacture‖. Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol. 67 (2): 151–159, 2005.
2. Fang W, Vega-Rodríguez J, Ghosh A, Jacobs-Lorena M, Kang A, and St. Leger R. Development of Transgenic Fungi That Kill
Human Malaria Parasites in Mosquitoes. Science. 2011.
3. Brunner,K. Zeilinger,S. Ciliento,R. WooS.L., Lorito,M., Kubicek C.P., Mach, R.L, ―Improvement of the Fungal Biocontrol Agent
Trichoderma atroviride To Enhance both Antagonism and Induction of Plant Systemic Disease Resistance Appl Environ Microbiol.
2005 July; 71(7): 3959–3965, 2005.
397
59th ACM 09.06.2018
4. Liu et al.: A gene cluster encoding lectin receptor kinases confers broad-spectrum and durable insect resistance in rice. Nature
Biotechnology volume 33, pages 301–305 (2015)
5. Geddes et al., 2015, ―Use of plant colonizing bacteria as chassis for transfer of N2-fixation to cereals‖. Current Opinion in
Biotechnology: 32: 216-222 (2015)
6. Rakszegi M., Bekes F., Lang L., Tamas L., Shewry P.R. & Bedo Z, ―Technological quality of transgenic wheat expressing an
increased amount of a HMW glutenin subunit‖, Journal of Cereal Science, Vol 42, No. 1, (Jul), pp. 15-23, 2005.
7. Ye, X; Al-Babili, S; Klöti, A; Zhang, J; Lucca, P; Beyer, P; Potrykus, I, ―Engineering the provitamin A (beta-carotene) biosynthetic
pathway into (carotenoid-free) rice endosperm‖. Science 287 (5451): 303–5, 2000.
8. Cabot, R. A.; Kühholzer, B.; Chan, A. W. S.; Lai, L.; Park, K. —W.; Chong, K. —Y.; Schatten, G.; Murphy, C. N. et al., ―Transgenic
Pigs Produced Using in Vitro Matured Oocytes Infected with a Retroviral Vector‖. Animal Biotechnology 12 (2): 205–214, 2001.
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Glick B R, Pasternak J J and Patten C L, ―Molecular Biotechnology: Principles and Applications of Recombinant DNA‖, ASM Press,
Washinton D.C, 2010.
2. Primrose S B and Twyman R, ―Principles of Gene Manipulation and Genomics‖, John Wiley & Sons, USA, 2013.
3. Alexander N Glazer and Hiroshi Nikaido, ―Microbial Biotechnology: Fundamentals of Applied Microbiology‖, Cambridge, University
Press, 2007.
4. Brown T A, ―Gene Cloning and DNA Analysis: An Introduction‖, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2013.
18BT04 PROCESS ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES

3003
METABOLIC STOICHIOMETRY: Stoichiometry of cell growth and product formation, Types of material balance problems, Balances in
systems involving recycle, purge, and bypass streams, Elemental balance, Electron balance and Energy balance calculations, Heat of
reaction for processes with biomass production, Energy balance equations for cell culture, Fermentation Energy balance (12)
FLUID FLOW AND MIXING: Properties and classification of fluids, Bernoulli‘s equation and its application, Mechanism of mixing, flow
patterns in agitated vessels, calculation of power consumption in an agitated vessel, Improving mixing in fermenters. (10)
HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER : Mechanisms of heat transfer, Process design of heat exchangers, Diffusion theory, Film theory, Packing
materials used in distillation column, Methods of distillation and design calculations using Mccabe thiele method (12)
CHEMICAL REACTION ENGINEERING:, Homogeneous and heterogeneous reactions, Classification of chemical reactors, Interpretation
of batch reactor datas, Recycle reactors (11)
Total L: 45
References
1. Pauline M.Doran, Bioprocess Engineering Principles, 2nd Edition, Academic Press, 2012
2. McCabe W L, Smith J C and Harriot P, ―Unit operations of Chemical Engineering‖, McGraw Hill Publishers, 2005.
3. Octave Levenspiel, ―Chemical Reaction Engineering‖, John Wiley and sons, 2004.
4. Christie John Geankoplis, ―Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit Operations)‖, 4th Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2003
18BT05 ADVANCED BIOPROCESS ENGINEERING

3204
BIOREACTORS: Submerged fermentation: Operation and application – Stirred tank reactors, reactors in series, reactors with recycle,
packed bed reactors, plug flow reactors, airlift reactors, bubble column reactors, membrane reactors, disposable reactors. Solid state
fermentation: Reactors for SSF, features, advantages and limitations. (6+3)
KINETIC MODELS: Growth and product kinetic models: Unstructured models – Monod model, multiple substrate models, Luedeking-
Piret model. Application of kinetics models in batch, fed-batch and continuous processes. Structured models – Compartment models,
Cellular energetic and metabolism models. Segregation models – Age distribution model, Single cell models. Models for gene expression
and regulation, Models for plasmid expression and replication. Microbial interaction kinetics: Microbial competition, predator kinetics.
(13+9)
MASS TRANSFER IN BIOREACTORS: Gas-liquid mass transfer – Oxygen transfer in reactors, Factors affecting oxygen solubility and
oxygen transfer rate, Mass transfer coefficient determination, Gas phase dynamics. Solid-liquid mass transfer, Immobilized system,
Kinetics and factor affecting, External and internal transfer limitation, Thiele modulus, effectiveness factor, partitioning effects. Mass
transfer with biological reactions: slow reaction regime, fast reaction regime, Mass transfer in microbial flocs and films. (13+9)
HEAT TRANSFER AND MIXING IN BIOREACTORS: Heat generation in bioprocess systems, metabolic heat evolution, Design
equations for heat transfer systems – pipe exchangers and reactors. Sterilization of media – Kinetics of thermal death, Batch sterilization,
continuous sterilization, operation and design. Impellers – Rushton, Propellers, Pitched blade, curved blade, hydrofoil, mixing patterns.
Power requirements – Gassed and ungassed system for Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids. Effect of agitation on oxygen transfer in
reactors and towers. Mixing time and residence time distribution in aerated tanks. Multiple impeller system. Influence of agitation of
microbial, plant animal cells. (13+9)
Total = L: 45 + T: 30=75
REFERENCES:
1. Pauline M Doran, ―Bioprocess Engineering Principles – Second Edition‖, Academic press, 2012.
2. Anton Moser, ―Bioprocess Technology: Kinetics and Reactors‖, Springer Science and Business Media, 2012.
3. Najafpour G.D, ―Biochemical Engineering & Biotechnology‖, Second Edition, Elsevier, 2015.
4. Truskey G.A, Yuan F and Katz D.F, ―Transport Phenomena in Biological Systems‖, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2007
398
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18BT51 DATA MINING AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
Students will be carrying out two projects. One project will involve the computational analysis of genomics and proteomics data thereby
deriving the structural, functional and phylogenetic inferences. Second project will pertain to the modeling and simulation of biochemical
engineering problems using numerical methods and MATLAB programming.
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Michael Agostino, ―Practical Bioinformatics‖ Garland Science, Taylor & Francis Group, New York, 2013.
2. Syed Ibrahim, K., Gurusubramanian, G., Zothansanga, Yadav, R.P., Senthil Kumar, N., Pandian, S.K., Borah, P., Mohan, S,
―Bioinformatics-A Student‘s Companion‖ Springer, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Kenneth Beers, ―Numerical Methods for Chemical Engineering: Applications in MATLAB‖, Cambridge University Press, 2006
SEMESTER II
18BT06 BIOSEPARATION TECHNOLOGY

3003
SOLID-LIQUID SEPARATION: Classification of bio-products,; Pre-treatment of fermentation broth; Unit operations involved in the
development of a bio-product; Cell harvesting techniques, Filtration and centrifugation equipments; Batch and continuous filtration
process, biomass separation using rotary drum filter, cake washing, Scale-up of filtration and centrifugation. (12)
MEMBRANE BASED SEPARATION PROCESS: Principles, operation and application of microfiltration; Ultrafiltration; Nanofiltration,
Reverse osmosis, Dialysis and Electro-dialysis process (11)
PRODUCT ISOLATION: Adsorption, Equilibrium relationships for adsorption, Performance characteristics of fixed bed absorber; Concept
of breakthrough curve, Engineering analysis of fixed bed adsorber, Aqueous two phase liquid extraction; Examples of ATP systems,
Separation of protein and enzymes using ATP systems ,Super-critical fluid extraction for separation of biomolecules. (10)
PURIFICATION: Chromatography column selection; Packing material selection; Testing procedure for packed columns; Calculation for
number of theoretical plates; Asymmetry and design aspects; Theory, practices and application of Affinity chromatography, Gel
permeation chromatography, Ion exchange chromatography and Hydrophobic interaction chromatography. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Belter PA ,‎‎Cussler EL,‎‎Wei-Shou Hu, ―Bioseparations: Downstream Processing for Biotechnology‖, Wiley Blackwell, 1988.
2. Raja Ghosh, ―Principles of Bioseparations Engineering‖, World Scientific Publishers, 2006
3. Sivasankar, B. ―Bioseparations : Principles and Techniques‖. PHI, 2005.
4. Roger G. Harrison, Paul W. Todd, Scott R. Rudge, and Demetri P. Petrides, ―Bioseparations Science and Engineering‖, Oxford
University Press, 2015
18BT07 QUALITY ASSURANCE, INDUSTRIAL AND BIO-SAFETY

3003
QUALITY IN BIOPROCESS INDUSTRIES: Historical perspectives, contemporary trends, quality in business environment, methods of
quality control. Regulatory bodies and processes, Food industry, Chemicals, Pharmaceuticals, Agroproducts, GMP (10)
INDUSTRIAL SAFETY: Industrial chemicals, hazardous chemicals and industrial biological – handling, processing, management and
disposal issues. Industrial effluents. Regulatory bodies and regulations and effluent standards (10)
BIOSAFETY: Safety Classification, Bio-safety regulations – international conventions and protocols, Indian regulatory bodies and
processes. Toxicology: mutagenicity, teratology, susceptibility to toxic agents. Food allergens — Food allergy and related factors.
General characteristics of allergens: physical, chemical, stability, epitopes. In vitro assays, transgenic foods, amino acid sequence
homologies, (Bt) altered foods. GMO biosafety (13)
AGRICULTURE AND ENVIRONMENT: Regulatory oversight, safety assessment, substantial equivalence, gene expression product,
safety criteria, toxicity, antimutagenicity effects, allergenicity, marker genes; Fertilizers and pesticides regulations; Biofertilizers and
biopesticdes; Environmental monitoring, EIA, ERA (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Collins C. H. and. Beale A. J (Eds): ―Safety in Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology‖ Butterworth and Heinmann, Oxford, 2015
2. Thomas J A, ―Biotechnology and Safety Assessment‖ 3rd edition, Academic Press, 2002
3. Joshi R ―Biosafety and bioethics‖ Isha Books Delhi, 2006
4. Watson RR and Preedy VR. ―Genetically Modified Organisms in Food Production, Safety, Regulation and Public Health‖ Elsevier
USA 2016
399
59th ACM 09.06.2018
18BT08 INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS LABORATORY

0 0 4 2
Students will qualitatively and quantitatively analyze the analytes present in any biological samples using analytical techniques like HPLC,
GC, PCR, Flame photometry, Lyophilizer by performing the following steps:
a. Standard Operating Procedures

b. Sample Preparation Techniques
c. Varying Precursors/Operational Parameters.
d. Data collection, analysis and interpretation
Additionally, students will be taught to interpret spectral/imaging data collected from high end instruments like SEM, TEM, AFM, FT-IR,
Mass Spectrometry
Total P: 60
REFERENCES:
1. Richard F. Venn, ―Principles and Practice of Bioanalysis‖, Taylor and Francis Publishers, 2000.
2. Wilson and Walker, ―Principle and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology‖, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
18BT09 MOLECULAR CLONING AND EXPRESSION LABORATORY

0 0 6 3
Students will clone and express a heterologous gene in either prokaryotic or eukaryotic system and analyse the recombinant products.
The techniques used will include: retrieval of DNA sequence from NCBI, primer designing, DNA isolation, gene amplification, DNA
manipulation, transformation, RTPCR, Southern, Northern and/or Western Hybridization analysis of expression.
Total P: 90
Reference
Sambrook J. F. and Russell D. W. (Ed.), Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 3rd ed., Vols 1,2 and 3 Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory
Press, 2001
18BT52 BIOLOGICAL BIG DATA ANALYSIS LABORATORY

0042
Course Description: Students will design workflow for functional analysis of biological big data with the aid of computational platforms
and programming languages and derive statistically significant inferences.
Total P: 60
References:
1. Bernd Mayer, ―Bioinformatics for Omics Data‖, Humana Press, 2011.
2. Paul Teetor, ―R Cookbook‖, O′Reilly, 2011
18BT61 TECHNICAL SEMINAR AND INDUSTRIAL VISIT

0 0 2 1
Students shall make a technical presentation on appropriately chosen topics approved by the department and submit a report on the
same. The seminar and the report will be evaluated by a faculty review committee.
A minimum of two industries are to be visited as part of the course and the students are to present their observations and findings during
the visit.
Total P: 30
SEMESTER III
18BT53 INDUSTRIAL BIOTECHNOLOGY LABORATORY

0 0 6 3
Students in small groups will develop a process for the manufacturing of bioproducts. The experimentation would include:
a. Survey and selection of source and microbial strain.
b. Optimization of conditions for growth and product formation.
c. Downstream processing strategy for product recovery and purification.
d. Economical analysis of the process developed.
Total P: 90
REFERENCES:
1. Mukhopadhyay S N, ―Process Biotechnology, Theory and Practice‖, TERI, New York, 2012.
18BT71 PROJECT WORK – I

0 0 6 3
A theme / discipline specific topic is to be selected or assigned; a state of the art development in the field is to be studied and a review is
to be prepared; a specific problem within the topic is to be identified and the possible solution options are to be presented to a review
committee. Preliminary experiments, models, algorithmic principles are to be developed; a summarizing report is to be submitted.
400
59th ACM 09.06.2018
SEMESTER IV
18BT72 PROJECT WORK – II

0 0 24 12
A proposal based on the developments of PROJECT WORK – I is to be submitted, including time lines and milestones. Progress in
project will be evaluated based on details of analyses, consistency and quality of findings, ability to interpret progress and trouble shoot
obstacles.
ELECTIVES
18BT21 MOLECULAR PRINCIPLES OF CELLULAR PROPERTIES

3003
THE IMPORTANCE OF MEMBRANES: Transport of small molecules; principles of membrane transport; channels and electrical
properties of membranes (9)
CYTOSKELETONS, JUNCTIONS AND MATRIX: Actin and related proteins; myosin; microtubules; cellular polarization and migration;
cell-cell junctions; extracellular matrix; plant cell wall (9)
CELL FUNCTION ANALYSES: Regulatory networks and molecular interactions; mathematics of transient behavior; negative feedback
and oscillations; cooperative activation; positive feedback and bistability; system robustness (9)
INTRACELLULAR COMMUNICATION: Principles of cellular signaling; G protein coupled signaling; enzyme mediated signals; gene
control through alternate signaling; signaling in plants; INTRACELLULAR TRAFICS: Cellular compartmentalization; movement between
nucleus and cytosol; proteins into mitochondria. Molecular mechanisms of membrane transport and compartmental diversity; endocytosis
and exocytosis (18)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Alberts B et al., ―Molecular Biology of the Cell‖, 6th Edition, Garland Science, 2015.
2. Lodish H et al., ―Molecular Cell Biology‖, 8th Edition, WH Freeman, 2016.
3. De Robertis EDP, De Robertis EMF, ‖Cell and Molecular Biology‖ Lippincott Publication, 2010
4. Walker JM and Gingold EB, ―Molecular Biology and Biotechnology‖, Panther Books, 2008
18BT22 VACCINES AND THERAPEUTIC PROTEINS

3 3 0 3
BIOPHARMACEUTICAL PROTEINS: Therapeutic protein production from bacterial, yeast and mammalian systems, recovery of
therapeutic proteins from inclusion bodies. Recombinant hormones: insulin, erythropoietin, growth hormone, follicle stimulating hormone –
production by recombinant methods and applications. Recombinant cytokines and their receptors: granulocyte colony stimulating factor,
interferon - 1 b, TNF  receptors. (12)
RECOMBINANT ENZYMES, ENZYME ACTIVATORS AND INHIBITORS: tPA, coagulation factor VIII, asparaginase, biosimilars.. (12)
RECOMBINANT VACCINES: Modern types of vaccines- subunit vaccines, recombinant vaccines, hepatitis B vaccine, yeast,
recombinant vector vaccines, DNA vaccines, plantibodies, QC in vaccine production. (10)
MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: Therapeutic applications of monoclonal antibodies, clinical overview, human recombinant antibody
production, production of anti idiotypic antibodies, expression of antibody fragments, immunotherapy with genetically engineered
antibodies. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Dembowsky K and Stadler P, ― Novel therapeutic proteins- selected case studies‖. Culinary and hospitality industry publication
services, 2005.
2. Mark Smales, C and David Cameron James, ―Therapeutic proteins- methods and protocols‖, Humana press, 2005.
3. Myron M Levin, ―New generation vaccines, Informa health care, 2010.
4. Biotechnology Completely Revised Edition Edited by H.-J. Rehm and G. Reed in cooperation with A. Puhler and F? Stadler Volume
5a Recombinant Proteins, Monoclonal Antibodies and Therapeutic Genes Edited by A. Mountain, U. Ney and D. Schomburg 8
WILEY-VCH Weinheim - New York . Chichester . Brisbane . Singapore Toronto , 1999
15BT23 PROTEIN CHEMISTRY AND ENGINEERING

3003
PROTEIN STRUCTURE: Structural implications of peptide bonds, Primary structure and its determination- peptide mapping, peptide
sequencing- automated Edman method, mass spectrometry, High throughput protein sequencing setup, polypeptide synthesis,
secondary structures and its determination by CD, super secondary structures. (10)
PROTEIN FOLDING: Folding pathways, thermodynamics and kinetics of protein folding, Molecular Chaperones, protein folding diseases;
Protein stability, tertiary structure and its determination by X-ray crystallography; post translational modifications, Glycoprotein and
phosphoprotein analysis, Protein evolution – In vitro evolution. (10)
401
59th ACM 09.06.2018
PROTEIN CONJUGATES : Protein modification- group specific reagents for amino acid modifications, Biotinylated enzymes, Liposome
conjugates, Fluorescent conjugates, Colloidal gold labeled proteins; STRUCTURAL FUNCTION RELATIONSHIP OF PROTEINS:
Enzymes, antibodies, Protease inhibitors, membrane protein, receptors. (15)
ENGINEERING PROTEINS: Protein engineering methods- Directed and random mutagenesis, Engineering thermal stability, specificity
and other properties; Antibody engineering; Therapeutic insulin- case study 1, Engineering subtilisin and other industrial enzymes — case
study 2 & 3, ;Engineering with non natural amino acids – case study 4, Protein design — Basic concepts in design and construction of
new protein/enzyme molecule. (10)
LIST OF CASE STUDIES:

Case study 1: Recombinant DNA technology in the treatment of Diabetes: Insulin Analogs, Endocrine Reviews 22(5)706-717 2001.
Case study 2: Directed evolution of a maltogenic α-amylase from Bacillus sp. TS-25‘ Journal of Biotechnology, 134 (3-4), 325-333, 2008
Case study 3: Protein Engineering- Case studies of commercialized engineered Products, Biochemistry and Molecular Biology
Education 35 (1), 2-8,2007.
Case study 4: Protein engineering with non-natural amino acids – Chapter 11-―Protein Engineering‖ by Kaumaya P: In Tech 2012.
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Branden C and Tooze J ―Introduction to Protein structure‖ Second Edition , Garland Publishing Incv, NY 1999.
2. Schulz G.E. and Schirmer R. H.‖ Principles of Protein structure‖, Springer-Verlag,2003. .
3. Kaumaya P ―Protein Engineering‖ In Tech 2012.
4. Alberghina L, ―Protein engineering in Industrial Biotechnology‖ Harwood Academic Publishers, Chur, Switzerland, 2003.
5. Hermanson G T ‖Bioconjugate Techniques‖ Academic Press Third Edition 2013.
18BT24 ADVANCED TOPICS IN PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOGY

3003
PLANT GENOME AND PHYSIOLOGY: Genome organization and gene expression; organelle genomes, Gene regulation, Protein
targeting. Photosynthesis, lipid metabolism, Respiration, Secondary metabolites. CASE STUDY 1 (13)
TRANSGENIC PLANTS: Gene manipulation; genome and Plastid transformation; Plant functional Genomics; activation tagging, RNAi,
transposon tagging, molecular pharming Biosafety of transgenic plants. CASE STUDY 2 (12)
STRESS RESPONSE SIGNAL TRANSDUCTION: Biotic, abiotic- salinity, drought, heat, cold, UV radiation, heavy metals, pathogen and
pest infestation. CASE STUDY 3 (10)
HORMONES AND GROWTH REGULATION: Plant development, Flowering, Tissue culture. CASE STUDY 4 (10)
Total L: 45
CASE STUDIES:
1. Elisabeth Veeckman, Tom Ruttink, Klaas Vandepoele (2016): Are We There Yet? Reliably Estimating the Completeness of Plant
Genome Sequences. The Plant Cell.
2. Long et al., (2015): Meeting the Global Food Demand of the Future by Engineering Crop Photosynthesis and Yield Potential. Cell:
161 (10: 56-66
3. Zhu JK (2016): Abiotic Stress Signaling and Responses in Plants. Cell 167 (2): 313-324
4. Ren H and Gray WM (2016): SAUR Proteins as Effectors of Hormonal and Environmental Signals in Plant Growth. Molecular Plant:
8(8): 1153-1164
REFERENCES:
1. Palmiro Poltronieri , Natalija Burbulis and Corrado Fogher (Eds): From Plant Genomics to Plant Biotechnology. Woodhead
Publishing Limited, Oxford, 2013
2. Mitsue Miyao,, ―Molecular evolution and genetic engineering of C4 photosynthetic enzymes‖, J. Exp. Bot., 54: 179 – 189, 2003.
3. Shujun Yang, Barbara Vanderbeld, Jiangxin Wan, and Yafan Huang, ―Narrowing Down the Targets: Towards Successful Genetic
Engineering of Drought-Tolerant Crops‖, Mol Plant, 3: 469 – 490, 2010.
4. Hiroyuki Nonogaki, ―Micro RNA Gene Regulation Cascades during Early Stages of Plant Development‖, Plant Cell Physiol., 51:
1840 – 1846, 2010.
5. TakehitoInaba and Yasuko Ito-Inaba, ―Versatile Roles of Plastids in Plant Growth and Development‖, Plant Cell Physiol., 51: 1847 –
1853, 2010.
18BT25 TECHNIQUES IN MOLECULAR SUBTYPING OF PATHOGENS

3003
Overview – Phenotyping methods – Characteristics of Ideal typing methods — limitations of traditional methods (9)
DNA based Techniques: DNA hybridization , PCR based approaches, Electrophoresis based methods, Bead based nucleic acid assay,
Plasmid Analysis (12)
DNA Sequencing based Techniques: MLST, SNP, VNTR, MLVA, IS analysis, Pyrosequencing, Ribotyping, Microarray, CRISPR, NGS
(12)
Omics based Techniques: Protein based methods, Transcriptome analysis, Proteomic profiling, Microbial Lipid Analysis (12)
Total L: 45
402
59th ACM 09.06.2018
REFERENCES:
1. DNA Methods in Food Safety: Molecular Typing of Foodborne and Waterborne Bacterial Pathogens, Sara Lomonaco and Daniele
Nucera, John Wiley and Sons, 2014.
2. Lin T, Lin L, ZhangF (2014). Review on Molecular Typing Methods of Pathogens, Open Journal of Medical Microbiology, 4, 147-152
3. Shariat N and Dudley EG (2014) CRISPRs: Molecular Signatures Used for Pathogen Subtyping, Applied and Environmental
Microbiology, 80(4) 430–439
4. Croucher J N et al (2015). Bacterial Genomes in Epidemiology – Present and future.
5. Castro et al, (2015) Identification and Typing Methods for the Study of Bacterial Infections: a Brief Review and Mycobacterial as
Case of Study, 17:1-10
6. Harald H. Kessler (Ed): ―Molecular Diagnostics of Infectious Diseases‖, Walter De Gruyter & Co, 2014
18BT26 BIOMATERIALS AND TISSUE ENGINEEERING

3003
INTRODUCTION: tissue architecture, cell organization, ECM molecules, Cell-Cell adhesion, Cell matrix adhesion, Matrix molecules and
their ligands, Growth factors and their functions. Repair and regeneration; STEM CELLS: Embryonic and adult, cell lineages, cell
determination and differentiation. Induced pluripotent stem cells, application of stem cells in tissue engineering. (16)
FUNCTIONAL TISSUE ENGINEERING: Tissue culture principles, bioreactors in tissue engineering. Mass transfer studies- nutrients,
growth factors and other regulatory molecules. Molecular and cell transport-diffusion, convection, cell migration. Cell & tissue mechanics-
elasticity, viscoelasticity, pseudoelasticity, measurements of mechanical properties (10)
BIOMATERIALS: Scaffolds/substrates for tissue regeneration, Metals, Ceramics, synthetic Polymers, biopolymers- Characteristics and
applications. Nanomaterials Microscale patterning of cells and environment, Polymer scaffold fabrication, micro and nanoscale
fabrication, Surface Modification- Objectives, biological coating (10)
CASE STUDIES: Musculoskeletal, Skin, Hematopoietic system (9)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Lanza, Robert Langer and Joseph P. Vacanti eds., Principles of Tissue Engineering, Academic Press, 2013.
2. Alberts B., Lewis J., Johnson A., ―Molecular Biology of the Cell‖, 5th edition, Garland Publishing, Inc., London, 2008
3. Robert P Lanza, Anthony Atala ―Methods Of Tissue Engineering‖, Academic Press, New York, 2006
4. Larry L Hench ed. Julian R Jones ―Biomaterials, Artificial Organs and Tissue Engineering‖, Woodhead Publishing Limited, England,
2005
18BT27 MEMBRANE SEPARATIONS

3003
REVERSE OSMOSIS: Types of membranes, Membrane process, Theoretical background, Membranes and materials, Membrane
selectivity, Membrane modules, Membrane fouling, control and cleaning, Applications. (10)
ULTRAFILTRATION AND MICROFILTRATION: Characterization of Ultrafiltration membranes, Concentration polarization and

membrane fouling, Membrane cleaning, membrane modules and system design, Applications. Microfiltration: Types and application. (12)
ELECTRODIALYSIS AND DIALYSIS: Chemistry of Ion-exchange membranes, Transport in electro dialysis membranes, system design.
Dialysis, Donnan dialysis and diffusion dialysis. Membrane reactors. Control drug delivery. (12)
CASE STUDIES: Membrane processes in production of functional whey components, Separation and fractionation of milk fat globules,
Fractionation of milk proteins for making cheeses, caseins and whey proteins and for milk protein standardization, Sewage treatment
using membrane bioreactors, Membrane separations for removal of microorganisms, Desalination of sea water using RO and
Electrodialysis (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Richard W Baker, ―Membrane Technology and application‖, John Wiley and Sons, Ltd. Third Edition, 2012.
2. Seader JD, Henley EJ and Roper DK, ―Separation process principles-Chemical and biochemical operations‖,Wiley Interscience, third
Edition, 2011.
3. Ladisch MR, ―Bioseparations Engineering: Principles, Practice, and Economics‖, Wiley Interscience, 2001.
4. Ahmad Fauzi Ismail Mukhlis A. Rahman Mohd Hafiz Dzarfan Othman Takeshi Matsuura, ―Membrane Separation Principles and
Applications‖, Elsevier, First edition, 2018
18BT28 BIOFUELS
3003
BIODIESEL: , First, second and third generation biofuels, Biorefinery concepts,Transesterification reaction mechanism, Basics and
chemistry of fats and oil, oil resources and feedstock, methods for biodiesel production, Different types of catalysts employed,
heterogeneous catalysis, treen-borne oil biodiesel, enzyme based biodiesel and microalgae based biodiesel, Physiochemical properties
and biodiesel characterization techniques. (11)
BIOETHANOL AND BIOBUTANOL: Different feedstocks for Bioethanol and biobutanol production, Fermentation process, Sugarcane
molasses and other sources for fermentation process. Lignocelluloses pretreatment methods, Hydrolysis, Hydration, Lignin upgradation,
Simultaneous Saccharification and fermentation (SSF), Co-fermentation and economics of bioethanol production, ABE Fermentation,
Recent development in bioethanol and biobutanol commercialization (12)
403
59th ACM 09.06.2018
BIOHYDROGEN AND BIOGAS: Thermo-chemical conversion of lignocellulosic biomass, Biohydrogen production process: Chemical
method and Biological method, Factors affecting biohydrogen production, Characteristics of biohydrogen, Feedstocks for biogas
production, Microbial and biochemical aspects, Operating parameters for biogas production, Digesters for rural application (12)
MICROBIAL FUEL CELLS AND BIOELECTROGENESIS : Mechanism of Bioelectrogenesis, Basics of Bioelectricity generation in
Microbial Fuel Cell, Exoelectrogens and electron transfer mechanism, Available architectures, Voltage and power generation, Kinetics
and mass transfer in Microbial Fuel Cell, Applications of Microbial Fuel Cell. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Riazi MR, David Chiaramonti, ―Biofuels Production and Processing Technology‖, CRC Press, 2017
2. Sunggyu Lee, Shah YT, ―Biofuels and Bioenergy: Processes and Technologies‖, CRC Press, 2012
3. David M Mousdale, ―Introduction to Biofuels‖, CRC Press, 2010.
4. Bruce E. Logan, ―Microbial Fuel Cells‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2008.
.
18BT29 INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT
3003
MICROBIAL ECOLOGY: Ecological principles relevant in treatment of waste; capability of microbial process for pollutant management.
(15)
INDUSTRIAL LIQUID WASTE MANAGEMENT: Waste generation and characterization; collection and handling; reactor and operational
principles; biological processes – non intensive treatment; and fish ponds; treated waste disposal; plant design and operation. (12)
SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT: Bioprocess solid wastes, characterization and value estimation, combustion, solid
state fermentation, vermiculture. Chemical wastes and their sources, waste characteristics; principles in generation, containment and
treatment. (12)
AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT: Criteria pollutants, methods for pollutant characterization; methods in treating gaseous pollutants; role
of technology towards air pollution. Odour and aerosol control; Carbon sequestration and carbon credits (6)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Rittman B E and McCarty P L, ―Environmental Biotechnology‖, McGraw Hill International, New York, 2001.
2. Tchobanoglous G et al, ―Solid Wastes Engineering Principles and Management‖, McGraw Hill, Inc, 2004.
3. Denevers N, ―Air Pollution Control Engineering‖, McGraw Hill International Edition, New York, 2000
4. Martin Alexander, ―Biodegradation and Bioremediation — ED 2‖, Elsevier Amsterdam, 2013.
18BT30 BIOREACTOR DESIGNS

3 0 0 3
DESIGN OF BIOREACTOR VESSEL AND UTILITIES: Bioreactors: Materials, Standard size, design consideration and specifications.
Utilities for reactors: Sterilization system, cooling system – types, materials, Piping and valves design specifications and sizing. (10)
DESIGN OF DIFFERENT BIOREACTORS: Pneumatic agitated bioreactors – bubble column and airlift reactors, Immobilized cell
reactors, Photo-bioreactors. Design of reactors for solid state fermentation. Scale up — Fundamental, Semi-fundamental, Dimensional
analysis and rule of thumb approaches, Scale up based on mass transfer coefficient, power consumption, shear and mixing. (14)
BIOREACTORS FOR ANIMAL AND PLANT CELLS: Characteristics of animal and plant cells, Types of reactors: reactors for
mammalian cells, reactors for hairy root culture. Design considerations – mass transfer, effect of shear, scale up of reactors for animal
cells and plant cells. (11)
BIOPROCESS MONITORING AND CONTROL: Sensors to monitor fermentation process: Biomass, temperature, pH, dissolved oxygen,
foam, flow measurements, pressure and gas analysis. Biosensors in monitoring process. Controllers: Feedback and feed forward
controllers, PID controllers. Process Analytical Technology: CQA, CPP, QbD concept, Biocalorimetry and Dielectric spectroscopy in real
time bioprocess monitoring. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Lydersen B K, Nancy A D and Nelson K L, ―Bioprocess Engineering – Systems, equipments and facilities‖, Wiley India PVt. Ltd.,
2010.
2. Impre JFMV, Vanrolleghem PA and Iserentant DM, ―Advanced Instrumentation, Data Interpretation and Control of Biotechnological
Processes‖, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2010.
3. Mansi, E.M.T.EL., Bryce, C.F.A., Demain, A.L. and Allman, A.R., ―Fermentation Microbiology and Biotechnology‖, Third edition
Taylor and Francis, 2012.
4. Tapobrata Panda, ―Bioreactors: Analysis and Design‖, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2011
18BT31 FUNDAMENTALS OF CELLULAR MECHANICS

3 0 0 3
MOLECULAR MECHANICS: Forces in Biology; Molecular motors and force generation, Single molecule mechanics; Biopolymers —
Properties of DNA, Protein, Cytoskeletal polymers, Chain Models, functional implications. (12)
CELLULAR MECHANICS: Mechanics of cell andy organelle membrane ; Cytoskeleton and cortex; Static and dynamic cell processes;
Cell motility, adhesion, migration and contraction. Quantitative aspects of cell mechanics — continuum mechanics, models of
viscoelasticity, single cell mechanical models. (15)
404
59th ACM 09.06.2018
MECHANOTRANSDUCTION: Mechanical Signals, Mechanosensing, Intracellular signaling initiated by mechanical signals. (8)
EXPERIMENTAL METHODS: Single molecule — optical and magnetic traps, force spectroscopy, AFM; Cellular level — passive and
active rheology, motility and adhesion assays. Case Studies — cancer, malaria, and sickle cell anemia.
(10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Boal, D. ―Mechanics of the Cell‖. Cambridge University Press, 2001.
2. Grodzinsky, A. Fields, ―Forces and Flows in Biological Systems‖. Garland Science, 2011
3. Howard, J. ―Mechanics of Motor Proteins and the Cytoskeleton‖. Sinauer Associates, 2001.
4. Jackson, M. B. ―Molecular and Cellular Biophysics‖. Cambridge University Press, 2006.
5. Mofrad, M., and R. Kamm. ―Cytoskeletal Mechanics: Models and Measurements in Cell Mechanics‖. Cambridge University Press,
2011. .
6. Mofrad, M., and R. Kamm. ―Cellular Mechanotransduction: Diverse Perspectives from Molecules to Tissues‖. Cambridge University
Press, 2009.
18BT32 TECHNIQUES IN EPIDEMIOLOGICAL DATA ANALYSES

3 0 0 3
PATTERN RECOGNITION: Trend analysis – chi-square and regression models: congenital malformation in infants over time:
surveillance data. Cross sectional data – 2 by k tables, summary odds ratios and logistic regression: risk of low birth weight and
exposure to cigarette smoke. (9)
CLINICAL INTERROGATION: Prospective study – relative risk and poisson regression: behavior type and risk of coronary disease.
Randomized trial – t-tests and computer intensive approaches: memory loss rates in Alzheimer‘s disease patients. (10)
FITTING MODELS: Goodness of fit – Pearson chi-square tests: Mendel‘s ornamental flowers. Multivariate linear regression models:
pregnancy weight gain and birth weight.CLUSTER ANALYSIS: Graphic cluster analysis, PCA with contour plots: race/ethnicity and gene
frequencies. (20)
BIAS AND MISCLASSIFICATION: Simple linear regression and correlation: bias in repeated blood pressure measurement. (6)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Selvin S. ―Epidemiologic Analysis – a case oriented approach‖. Oxford University Press, New York, 2001.
2. Forthofer, R & Lee ES, ―Biostatistics:: Design, Analysis and Discovery‖, Elsevier Acad Press, 2006
3. Vittinghoff E, Lidden GV & Shiboski SC, ―Regression Methods: Linear, Logistic, Survival, Repeated Measure Models‖, Springer,
2012
4. Daniel WW, ―Biostatistics‖, John-Wiley, 1999
18BT33 PHARMACOGENOMICS
3 0 0 3
PHARMACOGENETICS: Case studies in Polymorphic genes encoding drug metabolizing enzymes, transporters, receptors and other
drug targets in man and animals. Effects of genetic polymorphisms on the disposition and metabolism of drugs, environmental,
endogenous chemicals and other xenobiotics. Regulation of drug metabolizing enzymes — examples. (15)
PHARMACOGENOMICS IN DRUG DISCOVERY: Drug discovery principle, target identification, screening methodologies and assays,
mechanism-based design, structure-based design, in vitro and in vivo testing, chemical analogs and development issues (10)
PHARMACOGENOMICS IN DRUG DEVELOPMENT: Genome wide studies to understand the genetic basis for differences in drug
response. Genetic variability in drug receptors, transporters and enzymes as well as regulatory proteins involved in promoting and
inhibiting transcription and translation. Toxicogenomics. (10)
REGULATORY AND ETHICAL ASPECTS: Case studies, clinical trials, FDA, Pharmacogenomic Data Submission, Guidance and other
regulatory guidelines (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Nussbaum Roderick McInnes Huntington Willard Thompson & Thompson Genetics in Medicine‖, 8th Edition, 2015.
2. Pharmacogenomics: Applications to Patient Care, Third Ed. 2009 ISBN: 978-1-932658-699,Editors: Julie A. Johnson, Vicki L.
Ellingrod, Deanna L. Kroetz, Grace M. Kuo
3. Sata F, Sapone A, Elizondo G, et al. CYP3A4 allelic variants with amino acid substitutions in exons 7 and 12: evidence for an allelic
variant with altered catalytic activity. Clin Pharmacol Ther 2000;67:48-56.
4. Choo EF, Leake B, Wandel C, et al. Pharmacological inhibition of P-glycoprotein transport enhances the distribution of HIV-1
protease inhibitors into brain and testes. Drug Metab Dispos 2000;28:655-660
18BT34 METAGENOMICS AND EPIGENOMICS

3 0 0 3
TECHNIQUES AND STRATEGIES FOR METAGENOMIC ANALYSIS: Types of metagenomes — Amplicon, Shotgun and Functional.
Tools used for identifying diversity, searching for novel genes and gene products, and investigating relationships among genes, mRNAs,
and proteins in microbial communities. NGS for metagenome analysis. Metagenomic bioinformatics tools enabled genome assembly and
classification of large-scale sequencing data. (14)
405
59th ACM 09.06.2018
EPIGENETIC AND EPIGENOME REGULATION: Histones and nucleosomes, chromatin organization, Histone modifications and
epigenetic information, transcription in chromatin environment, Techniques used in the study of transcription factor binding and DNA
methylation, chromatin remodelers, regulation of gene expression – non-coding RNAs, small non-coding RNAs. Molecular regulation of
genomic imprinting, genetic control of epigenomics, methylomes, role of environment in epigenome regulation (10)
TECHNIQUES USED IN EPIGENOME ANALYSIS: ChIP, ChIP on chip,ChIP sequence, ChIP- PCR, sequencing, enzyme based
methods, NGS based sequencing of the epigenome. Epigenome systems – Human epigenome, epigenomics in plants, fungi
(10)
APPLICATIONS OF METAGENOMICS AND EPIGENOMICS: Metagenomic applications in agriculture, environment and health. Plant-
microbe interactions, bioremediation, industrial bioproducts, epigenetic regulation in stem cells, epigenetics of the immune system,
epigenetics in neuronal diseases, Cancer epigenomics. (11)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Diana Marco, editor. ―Metagenomics: Theory, methods, and applications‖. Caister Academic Press, Norfolk, UK; 2010.
2. Nessa Carey, ―The epigenetic regulation‖, Columbia University Press, 2011.
3. Robert A Myers, ―Epigenetic regulation and epigenomics‖, Wiley- Blackwell, 2012.
4. Kalia, Vipin Chandra, Yogesh Shouche, Hemant J. Purohit, and Praveen Rahi, eds. ―Mining of Microbial Wealth and
MetaGenomics”, Springer, 2017.
18BT35 SYSTEMS BIOLOGY: THEORY AND APPLICATIONS

3003
INTRODUCTION : Biological Systems and Processes – Reductionism – Modern experimental techniques and Biological Databases —
Need for systems biology — Mathematical Models — Systems level understanding of biological systems — Basic principles and concepts
– Systems Biology Work Flow — Applications — Scope and Future. (6)
FOUNDATIONS OF SYSTEMS BIOLOGY: Linear Algebra – Probability Theory – Network and Graph Theory – Dynamical Systems
Theory – Stochastic Processes — Control of Linear Dynamical Systems — Biological Thermodynamics – Linear and Nonlinear Time
series Analysis — Statistics — Multivariate Statistics (20)
MODELLING AND APPLICATIONS: Modelling Theory: Goals, inputs and initial exploration — Modelling Strategies (Structural models,
Network Approach, Kinetic, Discrete, Stochastic and Spatio-temporal models) — Model Design and Fitting — Model testing and Selection
— Local & Global Sensitivity Analysis — Model Reduction and Extension – Model Optimisation and Control. (16)
DATABASES, DATA FORMATS, STANDARDS AND SIMULATION TOOLS : Biological Databases, Systems Biology Markup Language
— BioPAX –Systems Biology Graphical Notation – Simulation Tools for Systems Biology (COPASI, CellDesigner, Virtual Cell, Cytoscape
etc.) (3)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Edda Klipp, Wolfram Liebermeister, Christoph Wierling, Axel Kowald ―Systems Biology: A Text Book‖, Wiley-Blackwell Publishing,
2016.
2. Eberhard Voit, ―A First Course in Systems Biology‖, Garland Science,2012.
3. Brian P Ingalls, ―Mathematical Modelling in Systems Biology‖, MIT Press,2013
4. Uri Alon, ‗Introduction to Systems Biology – Design Principles of Biological Systems‘,CRC Press, 2006.
18BT36 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES

3003
SPECTROSCOPIC AND IMAGING TECHNIQUES: Concepts, Sample Preparation and Characterization - Atomic Absorption
Spectroscopy, Infrared, , Energy DispersiveX-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy; Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Integrated Approaches:
Structural aspects of protein- NMR-FT-IR technique, chemical state identification and elemental quantification – AAS-EDX-XPS
technology, Microscopic Techniques: Atomic force microscopy, Confocal Microscopy, Fluorescence microscopy, Scanning Electron
Microscopy, Transmission Electron Microscopy; Innovative TEM coupled approaches for cell study: FLEC-TEM, CT-TEM, TEM-
NanoSIMS, TEM diffraction; (15)
CHROMATOGRAPHY AND MASS SPECTROMETRY: Concepts on liquid chromatography and its variants (HPLC, Capillary LC, reverse
phase LC, 2D-LC), Applications: Food Analysis, Characterization of antibody-drug conjugates, determination of fungicides, TLC-HPLC as
an integrated approached for determination of complex molecules from soil/water samples; Integrated Approaches on Mass spectrometry
– GC-MS and LC-MS . (10)
ELCTROPHORETIC APPLICATIONS: Concepts on Capillary and Pulsed Field Gel electrophoresis; PFGE Applications: Profiling of
Serovars using PFGE, Investigation of Epidemology; Capillary electrophoresis: Analysis of Vitamins, separation of enantiomers, drug
discovery; Electrophoresis-Colorimetry integrated technique (10)
APPLIED ELECTROCHEMISTRY: Transmembrane Electrochemistry (SECM, STM, Voltametry), Integrated Approach – Oxidative
Electrochemistry-LC-Mass spec for peptide/protein modification, separation and identification. (10)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Wilson and Walker, "Principle and Techniques of Practical Biochemistry", Cambridge University Press, Oxford, 2000
2. Richard F. Venn, "Principles and Practice of Bioanalysis", Taylor and Francis, 2000
3. Skoog D A, Holler F J and Nieman T A, "Principles of Instrumental Analysis", Barace College Publishing, DC, 2006
406
59th ACM 09.06.2018
4.Khandpur R S,‖Handbook of Analytical Instruments‖, McGraw Hill, 2006
18BT37 ALGORITHMS IN BIOINFORMATICS
3003
BIOLOGICAL DATABASES: Scope and history of Bioinformatics; DNA, Protein and Structural Databases; Secondary databases and
their construction with case study (7)
SEQUENCE ALIGNMENT ALGORITHMS: Pairwise sequence alignment: Dot matrix; K-tuple methods: BLAST, FASTA;; Dynamic
Programming; Multiple sequence alignment: Progressive methods - Clustal W, Iterative methods – HMM; Scoring matrices: PAM,
BLOSSUM, PSSM. (14)
GENE AND PHYLOGENETIC PREDICTION: Gene prediction: Asymmetry statistics, Neural networks; Phylogenetic prediction: Distance
methods; (12)
PROTEIN AND RNA STRUCTURE PREDICTION: RNA structure prediction: Minimum free energy methods and co-variation site
analysis; Protein structure Prediction: two dimensional structure-Neural networks, three dimensional structure-Rosetta Method,
HMMSTR. (12)
Total L: 45
REFERENCES:
1. Marketa Zvelebil & Jeremy Baum, ―Understanding Bioinformatics‖. 1st edition, Garland Science, 2007
2. Jonathan Pevsner, ―Bioinformatics and Functional Genomics‖. 3rd edition, Wiley-Blackwell, 2015
3. David W Mount, ―Bioinformatics: Sequence and Genome Analysis‖, 2nd edition, CBS publishers, 2004.
4. Sung, W.K., ―Algorithms in bioinformatics: a practical introduction‖, CRC Press, 2009
ELECTIVE LABORATORY
18BT54 ANIMAL CELL CULTURE LABORATORY

0 0 6 3
Course content
1. Aseptic technique
2. Morphology of various mammalian cell types
3. Routine subculture
4. Cell counting and viability assays
5. Freezing and thawing cells
Total P: 90
REFERENCES:
1. Ian Freshney R., ‗Culture 0f Animals Cells: A Manual of Basic Technique‘ John-Wiley & Sons Inc 2005
18BT55 PLANT TISSUE CULTURE LABORATORY

0 0 6 3
Course content
1. Aseptic technique
2. Media composition and formulation
3. Callus induction and sub-culturing
4. Suspension culture induction and maintenance
5. Microporpagation
6. Agrobacterium mediated transformation and confirmation
7. Hairy root induction
Total P: 90
REFERENCES:
1. Roberta H. Smith: Plant Tissue Culture, Third Edition: Techniques and Experiments. Academic Press. 2012.
2. Razdan Mk, ‗Introduction To Plant Tissue Culture‘ Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt Ltd 2003
18BT56 PROTEIN PURIFICATION AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY

0 0 6 3
Course content
1. Induction of recombinant protein in Bacteria/ yeast
2. Assay of enzymes / recombinant protein analysis by western hybridization
3. Protein purification using FPLC - Affinity chromatography/ Ion-exchange chromatography
4. Analysis, Fraction pooling and sample concentration
5. Purity analysis by HPLC
Total P: 90
References:
1. Roe S ― Protein Purification Techniques : A Practical approach‖ , Second Edison, Oxford University Press, 2001, New York
2. Rosenberg I M ― Protein analysis and purification: benchtop techniques - ED 2, Birkhauser 2007 Boston
407
59th ACM 09.06.2018
3. Hardin C , Riell A And Pinczes J, ― Cloning gene expression and protein purification: experimental procedures and process
rationale‖, Oxford University Press 2008, New York
18BT57 BIOFUEL LABORATORY

0 0 6 3
Course content
1. Biomass screening, size reduction and particle size distribution analysis
2. Determination of cellulose, hemicellulose, and lignin content from lignocellulosic biomass
3. Estimation of crystallinity index in raw and pretreated sample
4. Non-edible/Algal oil extraction using Soxhlet apparatus
5. Biodiesel production from vegetable oils
6. Fatty acid profile analysis and data interpretation using GC
7. Sugar analysis and data interpretation using HPLC
8. Quantification of ethanol and data interpretation using HPLC
Total P: 90
REFERENCES:
1. Anju Dahiya, ―Bioenergy: Biomass to Biofuels‖, Academic Press, 2014
2. Ashok Pandey , Christian Larroche, Steven Ricke, Claude-Gilles, Dussap Edgard Gnansouno, ―Biofuels‖, Academic Press, 2011
AUDIT COURSES
18BT81 ENGLISH FOR RESEARCH PAPER WRITING

18BT82 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND IPR

408

Vol I PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Vol I PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

AGENDA & APPENDICES

09th JUNE 2018

PSG COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY

Government Aided Autonomous College Affiliated to Anna University Chennai

59th Meeting of the Academic Council

Venue: F201 Date: 09.06.2018 Time: 9.45 am

1. Welcome and Introductory remarks by the Chairman.

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Prakasan will move

as in Appendix I [pages 1 - 447] be approved and

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel will move

BSc Applied Science

as in Appendix II [pages 448 - 470] be approved and

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will move

BSc Computer Systems and Design

as in Appendix III [pages 471 - 511] be approved and

5. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences recommended

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will move

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi will move

MSc Fashion Design and Merchandising

7. The Board of Studies in Computer Applications recommended the regulations, courses of

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr A Chitra will move

as in Appendix VI [pages 756 - 778] be approved and

8. The Board of Studies in Automobile Engineering recommended the following

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Neelakrishnan will move

15AF20 Core Tools of IATF 16949 – SPC and MSA

for BE Automobile Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Sudha Sadasivam will move

15Z024 Multi-tier Computing

for BE Computer Science and Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as

15ZS41 Machine Learning

for ME Software Engineering of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr M C Bhuvaneswari will move

15EF18 Industrial Drives for Automation

for BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering (Regular & Sandwich) of 2015

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S Subha Rani will move

15LF21 ASIC Flow for Mixed Signal VLSI Design

for BE Electronics and Communication Engineering of 2015 regulations with

12. The Board of Studies in Information Technology recommended the following

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr K Umamaheswari will move

(i) that the introduction of the following elective courses namely

15I020 Secure Coding

for BTech Information Technology of 2015 regulations with syllabus as in

13. The Board of Studies in Textile Technology recommended the following

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr G Thilagavathi will move

15TF26 Fabric Sourcing

for BTech Textile Technology degree programme of 2015 regulations with

14. The Board of Studies in Applied Science recommended the following

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr S C Murugavel will move

15OH95 Composites Materials

15. The Board of Studies in Applied Mathematics and Computational Sciences

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr N Geetha will move

(i) that the introduction of the following elective course namely

12XWAP/12XTEL Deep Learning

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr D Vijayalakshmi will move

15FOD1 Theatre and Film Costumes

17. The Board of Studies in Fashion Technology recommended the following

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr P Kandhavadivu will move

15RM02 Field work

18RM02 Field work

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam will move

MBA Master of Business Administration

as in Appendix XVI [pages 794-853] be approved and

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr V Thilagam will move